PC 2109 
 
 .L7 
 
 1829 
 
 
 
 ~ 
 
 ■^i^lkk 
 
 iï-rA 
 
 • 
 
 'Wim 
 
 
 
 \j|Pffl| 
 
 jtfai 
 
 £ K 
 
 m^w^ 
 

 t c 
 
 <- ^ s y 
 
 <■ * i et 
 
 :«r c< 
 
 ^ C C < 
 
 - ■>■'*'" 
 
 
 
 f^f. 
 
 ■ c« ' 
 
 . 1 
 
 < 
 
 * 
 
 
 * 
 
 
 . 
 
 
 <c <5; * < 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^:c«^\ 
 
 
 
 <$£& c 
 
 . ^ v 
 
 
 ±< * ( 
 
 
 
 mm 
 
 
 
 < 
 
 
 *&£L \ t 
 
 ' <" ■ 
 
 r 
 
 afc *^*^"v , s - 
 
 
 
 g{ LIBRARY OF CONGRESS. ÎI 
 
 L [FORCE COLLECTION. J 
 
 ,{ «gay 03 
 
 I J UNITED STATES OF AMERICA.} 
 
 •'<■«. 
 
 < c sut. ^ <5L 
 
 "^ ■-*- 
 
 :2F * 
 
 K V< 
 
 
 
 CO <c 
 
 ote«r 
 

 
 f 2ËB 
 
 * ï<gCZGc<^ 
 
 k ex: cr 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 È3 «r «§J 
 r-^c <^: *@p 
 
 ^c«*fe 
 
 
 i^K 
 
 
 <e^^ 
 
 <3^ 
 
 r çr 
 
 c: cfiC 
 
 «C CGC 
 C cc<: 
 
 at <rt <- ( -: .' 
 
 
 ■'■4P 
 
 ^» 
 
 «gate 
 
 
 
 
 33SSt 
 
,- ~ 
 
 M I 
 
A 
 
 THEORETICAL AND PRACTICAL 
 
 G R A M M A R 
 
 OF THE 
 IN WHICH 
 
 THE PRESENT USAGE IS DISPLAYED. 
 
 AGREEABLY TO THE DECISIONS OF 
 
 THE FRENCH ACADEME* 
 
 S 
 
 By M. DE T,E VIZ AC. 
 
 REVISED AND CORRECTED BY 
 
 MR. STEPHEN PASQUIER, M.A. 
 
 )¥ THE UNIVERSITY OF PARIS, AND TKACHER OF THE FRENCH LANG U AG 9 
 TO THE CHARTER-HOUSE SCHOOL. 
 
 SEVENTH AMERICAN EDITION, 
 
 VITH THE VOLTARIAN ORTHOGRAPHY, ACCORDING TO THE DICTIONARY 
 OF THE FRENCH ACADEMY. 
 
 [Stereotyped by A. Chaudler ] 
 
 NEW-YORK; 
 
 îsh'^ 
 
 OLI.INS &, CO., COLLINS & HANNAY, O. A. ROORBACH, WHITE 
 f ALLAHER & WHITE, G. & C & H. CA.RVILL, 
 AND CHARLES DE BEHR. 
 
 1829. 
 

 Southern District of New- York, *s. 
 BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the 27th day of January, A. 1/ 
 1829, in the fifty-third year of the Independence of the United States of 
 America, William E. Dean, of the said District, hath deposited in this 
 office the title of a Book, the right whereof he claims as Proprietor, in 
 the words following, to wit : 
 
 *" A Theoretical and Practical Grammar of the French Tongue : in 
 which the present usage is displayed, agreeably to the decisions of the 
 French Academy. By M. De Lévizac. Revised and corrected by Mr. 
 Stephen Pasquier, M. A. of the University of Paris, and teacher of the 
 French Language to the Charter-house School. Seventh American 
 Edition, with the Voltarian Orthography, according to the Dictionary of 
 the French Academy," 
 
 In conformity to the Act of Congress of the United States, entitled 
 44 An Act for the encouragement of Learning, by securing the copies of 
 Maps, Charts, and Books, to the Authors and Proprietors of such co 
 pies, daring the time therein mentioned." And also to an Act, entitled 
 «• Aft Act, supplementary to an Act, entitled, An Act for the encourage 
 ment of Learning, by securing the copies of Maps, Charts, and Books, 
 to the Authors and Proprietors of such copies during the times therein 
 mentioned, and extending the benefits thereof to the arts of Designing - 
 Engraving, and Etching Historical and other Prints." 
 FRED. J. BETTS, 
 Clerk of the Southern District of JVac-Yorh- 
 
 W. E. DKAN, PRINTER 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 The distinguished success that has attended the 
 Grammar of M. de Lévizac, which has been adopted 
 by the most celebrated Schools in England, is a suf- 
 ficient proof that it is one of the most useful that 
 has hitherto appeared : it has indeed one advan- 
 tage, that will always secure it a preference above 
 every other : all the principles it contains, as well 
 as the Orthography of Voltaire, are sanctioned by 
 the Authority of the French Academy, and by aU 
 the Grammarians of eminence, who for nearly a 
 century have laboured to ascertain and fix the true 
 rules of the French Language. Another advan- 
 tage, not less valuable, is, that almost all the phrases 
 given as examples or exercises, being drawn from 
 the Dictionary of the Academy, or the most approv- 
 ed French writers, the Student of this Grammar 
 will store his mind with none but pure and correct 
 forms of speech, and will not be liable to contract 
 vicious modes of expression, and imbibe error while 
 aiming at instruction. The proprietors have been 
 particularly careful with respect to the correctness 
 and simplicity of the present Edition, which they 
 have submitted to a strict Revision, and which, on 
 a comparison, will be found to surpass preceding 
 Editions, both in the copiousness of its remarks and 
 its general perspicuity. 
 
EXPLANATION 
 
 OF THE ABBREVIATIONS USED UK THE EXERC J 
 
 m. stands for 
 
 f. - - 
 
 pi. - - 
 
 s. or sing. 
 
 h m. 
 
 h asp. 
 
 pr. - - 
 
 art. - 
 
 pr-art. 
 
 pron. 
 
 inf-1 
 
 inf-2 
 
 inf-3 
 
 inf-4 
 
 ind-1 
 
 ind-2 
 
 ind-3 
 
 ind-4 
 
 ind-5 
 
 ind-6 
 
 ind-7 
 
 ind-8 
 
 cond-1 
 
 cond-2 
 
 cond-3 
 
 imp. 
 
 subj-1 
 
 subj-2 
 
 subj-3 
 
 subj-4 
 
 masculine. 
 
 - feminine. 
 
 - plural. 
 
 - singular. 
 
 - h mute. 
 
 - h aspirated. 
 
 - preposition. 
 
 - .article. 
 
 - article contracted. 
 
 - pronoun. 
 
 - present of the infinitive 
 
 - the past. 
 
 - participle present. 
 
 - participle past. 
 
 - present of the indicative 
 
 - imperfect. 
 
 - preterit definite. 
 
 - preterit indefinite. 
 
 - preterit anterior- 
 
 - pluperfect. 
 
 - future absolute. 
 
 - future anterior. 
 
 - present of the conditional. 
 
 - first conditional past. 
 
 - second conditional past. 
 
 - imperat ! ve. 
 
 - present of the subjunctive 
 
 - imperfect. 
 
 - preterit. 
 
 - pluperfect. 
 
 * in the exercises denotes thatthe word under which it is plac 
 ed is not expressed in French. . 
 
 — denotes that the English word (see page 74) is spelt alike m 
 French, or at least the part under which this sign is placed. 
 
 = denotes that the French word diners from the English only 
 by its termination, as directed page 75. 
 
 Those French words which are followed by the above signs 
 are to take the form which they point out. 
 
 In the Third pari the w is no longer placed under the ^ord, 
 
 ^nVllinVthe exercises, the order of the figures placed some 
 limes in the phrases after the French words, is to be observed. 
 
 In the exercises, when several English words are included be- 
 tween a parenthesis, they must be translated by the only wo <> 
 placed under 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 The French Alphabet 
 
 General Observations 
 
 The Vowels 
 
 Accentuation and Punctuation 
 
 Table I. The seventeen Simple Sounds 
 
 PÀG1. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 2 
 3 
 4 
 
 Table II. Coalition of Letters, representing the 17 Simple Sounds 5 
 
 Table III. The Diphthongs 6&7 
 
 Observations upon the two first Tables 
 
 Of the Y. 9 
 
 Exercises on Monosyllables . . . . .10 
 
 Dissyllables ...... 12 
 
 Words of three Syllables ... 14 
 
 Of Consonants . . . . . . .17 
 
 Of Gender .37 
 
 A Vocabulary, French and English . . . .46 
 
 GRAMMAR. 
 
 introduction 
 Apostrtphe and Elision . 
 
 71 
 73* and fol. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE AND IN- 
 FLECTIONS. 
 
 Chapter I. 
 Of the Substantive 
 Substantive Common 
 
 Proper 
 
 Collectives 
 
 Of Masculine Gender 
 
 Feminine Gender 
 
 Of Singular Number 
 
 Plural Number . 
 
 Of the Formation of the Plural 
 
 General Rule .... 
 
 Chapter II. 
 Of the Article .... 
 Eli-ion of the Article 
 Contraction of the Article 
 Cases in which contraction does not take place 
 General Rules on the Article 
 Of the Article in a partitive sense 
 
 a2 
 
 76 
 77 
 77 
 77 
 77 
 77 
 77 
 78 
 78 
 78 
 
 80 
 80 
 81 
 82 
 83 
 84 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 m 
 
 Chapter III. 
 
 Of the Adjective 
 
 Of the Formation of the Feminine of Adjectives 
 
 Exceptions .... 
 
 Of the Formation of the Plural of Adjectives 
 
 Degrees of Signification of Adjectives 
 
 Positive. 
 
 Comparative of Superiority 
 
 Inferiority 
 
 Equality 
 
 On MEILLEUR, MOINDRE, and PIRE 
 
 Of the Superlative 
 
 Agreement of the Adjective with the Substantive 
 
 Nouns and Adjectives ef Number 
 
 Chapter IV. 
 
 Of the Pronoun 
 
 1 . Of the Personal Pronoun 
 
 Pronouns of the First Person 
 
 Second Person 
 
 Third Person 
 
 Reflected or Reciprocal Pronouns 
 
 Of en and y. .... 106 
 
 2. Possessive Pronouns 
 
 Of those that always agree with a Noun expressed 
 
 with Nouns understood 
 
 %. Of Relative Pronouns . 
 
 4. Of Pronouns Absolute . 
 
 5. Of Demonstrative Pronouns 
 
 6. Of Indefinite Pronouns 
 
 First Class 
 Second Class 
 Third Class 
 Fourth Class 
 
 Chapter V. 
 
 Of Verbs 
 
 Characteristics of Verbs 
 
 The Five Sorts of Verbs 
 
 Of Conjugations 
 
 Of the Auxiliary Verb avoir . 
 
 The same Verb with a Negative 
 
 . interrogatively and affirmatively 
 
 interrogatively and negatively 
 
 Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb être 
 1. Conjugation in er 
 
 Conjugation of the Pronominal Verbs 
 Passive Verbs 
 
 I'A&k 
 
 85 
 86 
 88 
 80 
 91 
 91 
 91 
 92 
 92 
 93 
 94 
 95 
 97 
 
 100 
 100 
 101 
 101 
 102 
 105 
 and 107 
 108 
 108 
 109 
 111 
 112 
 113 
 114 
 114 
 116 
 117 
 118 
 
 118 
 118 
 120 
 122 
 12.- 
 136 
 131 
 132 
 134 
 140 
 149 
 156 
 160 
 106 
 174 
 
CONTENTS?. 
 
 Vli 
 
 PAGE. 
 
 Conjugation of the Neuter Verbs . . . .175 
 
 Of the Impersonal Verbs . . .176 
 
 Conjugation of the impersonal Verb falloir . . 177 
 
 — — y avoir . .179 
 
 Of the Irregular Verbs . . . .180 
 
 Irregular Verbs of the First Conjugation . . .180 
 
 Second Conjugation . 182 
 
 — Third Conjugation . .189 
 
 — — Fourth Conjugation . .194 
 
 Irregular Verbs of the First Branch of the Fourth Conjugation 194 
 
 ■ Second Branch . . . 200 
 
 Third Branch . . .201 
 
 Fourth BraHch . . . 202 
 
 Observations . . . . . . .207 
 
 Table of the Primitive Tenses of the Four Regular Conjugations 208 
 
 -Irregular and Defective Verbs i 
 
 Of Prepositions . 
 Of the Adverb . 
 Of Conjunctions 
 Of Interjections 
 
 Chapter VI. 
 
 Chapter VII. 
 
 Chapter VIII. 
 
 Chapter IX. 
 
 211 
 
 218 
 
 223 
 
 228 
 
 PART II. 
 
 SYNTAX, 
 
 OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 Chapter I. 
 
 Of the Substantive ..... 
 Of Compound Nouns . . . 
 
 Chapter II. 
 
 Of the Article ....... 231 
 
 A comparative Table on the Use of the Article . 232 
 
 Chapter III. 
 
 Of the Adjective ...... 235 
 
 Difference of Construction between the English and French Lan- 
 guages . . ... 237 
 
 229 
 229 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Regimen of the Adjectives 
 Promiscuous Exercises . 
 
 Chapter IV. 
 
 Of the Pronouns . . 
 
 1. Of Personal Pronouns . 
 
 Of the Place of Personal Pronouns 
 Of Personal Pronouns used as Subject 
 Of Personal Pronouns used as Regimen 
 
 % Of the Relative Pronouns 
 
 3. Of Pronouns Absolute . 
 
 4. Of Demonstrative Pronouns 
 
 5. Of Indefinite Pronouns 
 First Class 
 Second Class 
 Third Class 
 Fourth Class 
 
 Chapter V. 
 
 A general Exercise on the Pronouns 
 Of the Verb .... 
 Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 
 Of the Regimen of Verbs 
 
 Nature and Use of Moods and Tenses 
 
 Indicative 
 
 Conditional 
 
 -~- Imperative 
 
 Subjunctive ... 
 
 -Infinitive. 
 -Participle 
 -Participle Present 
 -Past 
 
 Agreement of the Participle Past with its Subject 
 with its Regimen 
 
 Of the Adverbs 
 Situation of Adverbs 
 
 Of the Conjunctions 
 
 -Conjunction que 
 
 Chapter VI. 
 
 Chapter VII. 
 
 Government of Conjunctions . 
 Conjunctions that are followed by an Infinitive 
 
 govern the Indicative . 
 
 ■ Subjunctive 
 
 uous Exercises . 
 
 page. 
 238 
 239 
 
 241 
 241 
 241 
 241 
 
 242 
 246 
 240 
 252 
 254 
 254 
 257 
 259 
 264 
 
 266 
 268 
 268 
 271 
 274 
 274 
 277 
 278 
 279 
 280 
 281 
 281 
 283 
 283 
 285 
 
 289 
 289 
 
 291 
 291 
 233 
 293 
 294 
 295 
 895 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 IS 
 
 PART III. 
 
 IDTOMS, OR WORDS CONSIDERED IN THER PARTICULAR 
 RULES. 
 
 Chapter I. 
 
 Of the Substantive .... 
 
 Chapter II. 
 Of the Article ...... 
 
 Cases in which the Article is to be used 
 — — not used . 
 
 page. 
 300 
 
 303 
 303 
 308 
 
 Chapter III. 
 
 Of the Adjective 
 
 with the Article 
 
 312 
 312 
 314 
 317 
 318 
 
 The Place of Adjectives 
 Regimen of Adjectives 
 Adjectives of Number 
 
 Chapter IV. 
 
 Of Pronouns ....... 320 
 
 Pronouns Personal . . . . . 320 
 
 On the Pronoun soi ..... . 326 
 
 Cases in which the Pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, leur, may 
 
 apply to things ...... S27 
 
 Difficulty respecting the Pronoun explained . . . 330 
 
 Repetition of the Personal Pronouns .... 332 
 
 Relation of the Pronouns of the Third Person to a Noun expressed 
 
 before .. ..... 335 
 
 Explanation of some Difficulties attendant on the Possessive Pro- 
 nouns ....... 337 
 
 Relative Pronouns. — Of qui ..... 341 
 
 Of que 344 
 
 Of lequel and dont ...... 345 
 
 Of quoi and où ..... 346 and 347 
 
 Absolute Pronouns. — Of qui, que, and quoi . . . 347 
 
 Demonstrative Pronoun3 ..... 349 
 
 Indefinite Pronouns. — Of on .... 353 
 
 Of quinconque and chacun . 354 
 
 Of personne, l'un et l'autre, & ni l'un ni l'autre, tout, & rien 356 
 Of tout . . . . . . .357 
 
 Of quelque— que and quel que . . . 358 and 359 
 
 Chapter V. 
 
 Of the Verb.— Agreement of the Verb with its Subject 360 
 
 Of the Collective Partitive ..... 361 
 
 Place of the Subject, with regard to the Verb . . . 36S 
 
 Government of Verbs ...... 367 
 
 On the Use, proper and accidental, of Moods and Tenses, Indicative 369 
 
 Use of the Conditional ...... 376 
 
 Remark on the Use of the Conditional and Future . 378 
 
 * T se of the Subjunctive . .... 379 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 ïrv 
 
 
 Relations between the Tenses of the Indicative 
 
 Subjunctive and those of the 
 
 Indicative ...... 
 
 Farther Observations upon the Conditional and Subjunctive 
 Relations between the Tenses of the different Moods . 
 
 of the Indicative 
 
 to the Conditional, &c. 
 
 of the Present and Future Absolute, &c. 
 
 Principal Relations with the Subjunctive 
 Of the Infinitive .... 
 
 Chapter VI. 
 Of Prepositions . 
 
 The Use of the Article with Prepositions 
 Repetition of the Prepositions . 
 Government of Prepositions 
 
 Chapter VII. 
 Of the Adverb — Of the Negative ne . 
 Of the Place of the Negatives . 
 Of the Use of pas and point . 
 When may both pas and point be omitted ? 
 When ought both pas and point to be omitted 
 On plus and davantage 
 On si, aussi, tant, and autant 
 
 Chapter VIII. 
 Of Grammatical Construction 
 Of Inversion 
 Of the Ellipsis . 
 Of the Pleonasm 
 Of the Syllepsis 
 
 Chapter IX. 
 Of Grammatical Discordances, Amphibologies and Gallicisms 
 Of Amphibologies ..... 
 
 Of Gallicisms ...... 
 
 Free Exercises . . . 
 
 Phrases on some Difficulties of the French Language . 
 
 On the Collective Partitives .... 
 
 Of some Verbs which cannot be conjugated with avoir 
 On the Personal Pronouns .... 
 
 On Words of Quantity ..... 
 
 On soi, lui, soi-même, and lui-même . 
 
 On the Relative Pronouns ... 
 
 On the Demonstrative Pronouns 
 
 On the Verbs avior employed impersonally 
 
 Promiscuous Phrases ..... 
 
 Phrases in which the Article is used 
 
 omitted . 
 
 On the Pronoun le 
 
 On the Participle Past .... 
 On the Principal Relations of Moods and Tenses 
 On the Negative ne .... 
 On some Delicacies of the French Language . 
 
 332 
 
FRENCH GRAMMAR, 
 
 Grammar, in general, is the art of speaking and writing cor 
 rectly. 
 
 To speak — is to convey our thoughts by means of articulated 
 sounds. 
 
 To write—' is to render those thoughts permanently visible by 
 means of certain Signs, or Characters, called Letters, and then 
 number disposed in order constitutes what is called the Alphabet 
 
 FRENCH ALPHABET. 
 
 ROMAX LETTERS. ITALIC LETTERS. OLD PRO. XEW PRO 
 
 A a A a ah ah 
 
 B b B b bay* be* 
 
 C c C c say ke 
 
 D d D d day de 
 
 E e E e a a 
 
 F f F f eff fe 
 
 G g G g jay] ghe 
 
 H h H h ahsh he 
 
 I i I i e e 
 
 J j J j jee] je\ 
 
 K k K k kah ke 
 
 L 1 L l ell le 
 
 Mm M m entra me 
 
 N n N n enn ne 
 
 O o O oo o 
 
 P p P p pay pe 
 
 Q q Q q ku\ ke 
 
 R r R r heir re 
 
 S s S s ess se 
 
 T t T t tay te 
 
 U • u U u u\ u\ 
 
 V v V t) vay ve 
 X x X x eeks kse 
 
 Y y Y y egrec e grec 
 Z z Z z zed ze 
 
 * Here both the old pronunciation and the new are expressed by English 
 ?ounds, and in the new the letter c after each consonant is sounded as in thf 
 English word battery. 
 
 t The two consonants g andj are sounded in the Alphabet like siapleasurr 
 or 2 in azure. 
 
 t See the second note, page 4. 
 
2 THE SOUNDS 
 
 GENERAL OBSERVATIONS 
 
 The French Alphabet contains, as we see, twenty- 
 five letters, which are divided into Vowels and Conso* 
 nants. 
 
 A vowel is the simple emission of the voice forming 
 an articulate sound by itself. 
 
 A consonant, on the contrary, cannot be articulated 
 without the assistance of a vowel. 
 
 The vowels are a, e, i, o, w, and y, which sometime- 
 has the sound of one i, and sometimes of two. 
 
 The nineteen remaining letters, b y c, d,f, g, luj. A 
 /, m, n, p, q, r, s, t, v, x, z, are consonants. 
 
 THE VOWELS. 
 
 The French language com-l 
 prehends more distinct simple 
 sounds than are here represent- 
 ed by the above five vowels ; 
 for, according as these are pro- 
 nounced close or broad short 
 or long, with the appropriate 
 accentuation, they furnish — ten seventeen 'sim 
 simple sounds. pie sounds. 
 
 V.B.t Add to these — three other J> See T.xrt.t 1 
 simple sounds, each represent- p. 1. 
 ed by the combination of two 
 vowels, and 
 
 Lastly — four nasal simple 
 sounds, which again, for want of 
 more appropriate si^ns, arc re- 
 presented by the coalition ofti 
 or m with the above vowels, and 
 they complete the number of 
 
 The vowels are either long or short ; 
 The long vowels require more, the sort VOW 
 ïime in pronouncing, thus: 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 a is long in pâte * dough and short in patte paw 
 
 e . tempête storm trompette trumpet 
 
 i — gîte abode -petite little 
 
 a . « hôte host hotte wicker basket 
 
 u flûte flute huite hut 
 
 Besides the simple there are also the compound 
 sounds, in which two vowels are distinctly heard by a 
 single emission of the voice ; these are the diphthongs. 
 See Table III. p. 6 and 7. 
 
 The sound of one or more letters, pronounced with 
 a single emission of the voice, is called a syllable ; one 
 oi more syllables make a word. 
 
 There are */i re e , 
 accents, the ' 
 
 I 
 
 ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION. 
 
 In reading, due attention should be paid to the accents 
 and cedilla, to the apostrophe, diceresis, hyphen, &.c. t^e two 
 former of which are peculiar to the French language. 
 
 acute (') never placed but on e, as 
 
 in bonté, 
 grave Ç) placed over a, e, u, as in 
 
 viola, procès, où. 
 circumflex ( A ) employed over any long 
 vowel j as plâtre, têve, 
 épître, apore, bûche. 
 The cedilla is a kind of comma placed under c, giving 
 it the sound of s before a, o, u, as in façade, façon, reçu. 
 The apostrophe (') marks the suppression of a vowel 
 nefore another vowel, or h mute, as in Péglné) V oiseau, 
 '■homme, s'il vient, for la église, le oiseau, le homme, si il 
 vient. 
 
 The diœresis ('*) is placed, over the vowels e, i, w, to in- 
 timate that they are to be pronounced distinctly from the 
 vowels by which they are accompanied. 
 
 The. hyphen (-) is particularly used in connecting com- 
 pound words, as in Belles-lettres, tout-puissant, chefs- 
 d'oeuvres, arc-en-ciel, &c. 
 
 All the other distinctive marks, as the comma, semi- 
 colon, colon, period, 'interrogation, note of admiration 
 and exclamation, parenthesis. &c . &c. are the same in 
 the French as in the English language. 
 

 THE SOUNDS 
 
 TABLE I. 
 
 The Seventeen Simple Sounds of the French Tongue. 
 
 m 
 
 SOUNDS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 SOUNDED AS 
 
 1 
 
 a short 
 
 ami 
 
 friend 
 
 a in amateur 
 
 2 
 
 a long 
 
 bas 
 
 stockings 
 
 a 
 
 bark 
 
 3 
 
 e 
 
 tenir 
 
 to hold 
 
 e 
 
 battery 
 
 4 
 
 é 
 
 été 
 
 summer 
 
 a 
 
 paper 
 
 5 
 
 è 
 
 modèle 
 
 model 
 
 e 
 
 met 
 
 6 
 
 ê(i) 
 
 tête 
 
 head 
 
 e 
 
 there 
 
 7 
 
 i 
 
 imiter 
 
 to imitate 
 
 i 
 
 timid 
 
 3 
 
 o short 
 
 école 
 
 school 
 
 o 
 
 scholar 
 
 9 
 
 6 long 
 
 cote 
 
 rib 
 
 
 
 note 
 
 10 
 
 u. * 
 
 vertw 
 
 virtue 
 
 (2) 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 eu short 
 
 jeune 
 
 young 
 
 u 
 
 shun 
 
 12 
 
 eu lo7ig 
 
 jewne 
 
 fast 
 
 (2) 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 ou 
 
 soupe 
 
 soup 
 
 ou 
 
 soup 
 
 14 
 
 an} 
 
 cmge 
 
 angel 
 
 en 
 
 encore 
 
 15 
 
 in \ (<») 
 onf v < 
 
 lin 
 
 flax 
 
 en 
 
 length 
 
 16 
 
 long 
 
 long 
 
 on 
 
 long 
 
 17 
 
 un 3 
 
 brun 
 
 brown 
 
 un 
 
 
 (1) Besides these four sorts of e, there is one entirely mute at. 
 the end of many words, as in the above modèle, tête, école, cote ; 
 and sometimes in the beginning and middle, as in cependant, ja- 
 veline, Roquefort, souquenille, l 'empereur, &c. 
 
 (2) The sound of the French u, to which there is no similar, 
 nor even approximate sound" in English, must be heard from the 
 master, and it may be necessary to add, that though we have 
 attempted to exhibit the French sounds by English" letters, vet 
 they can only be correctly learnt by hearing them from the lips 
 of a native. In particular, the nasal sounds cannot be conveyed 
 by any combination of English letters. 
 
 N. B The figures in the following tables relate to the above S6 
 Tenteen simple sounds. 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 TABLfe II. 
 
 Coalition of LeUers representing several of Hie Seventeen Stmph 
 Sounds. 
 
 1 
 
 4 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 12 
 
 13 
 14 
 
 15 
 16 
 
 n 
 
 Simple Sounds represented by examples. 
 
 ou 
 
 un 
 
 il gagea 
 
 he betted 
 
 aigu 
 
 sharp 
 
 geai 
 
 joy 
 
 année 
 
 year 
 
 œsophage 
 
 œsophagus 
 
 aide 
 
 aid 
 
 baie 
 
 bay 
 
 baleine 
 
 whale 
 
 je nageais 
 
 I did sxeim 
 
 faible 
 
 weak 
 
 monnaie 
 
 money 
 
 aine 
 
 eldest 
 
 paraître 
 
 to appear 
 
 folie 
 
 folly 
 
 aurore 
 
 dawn 
 
 flageolet 
 
 flageolet 
 
 auteur 
 
 author 
 
 marteau 
 
 hammer 
 
 geôle 
 
 gaol 
 
 gageure 
 
 wager 
 
 euef 
 
 had 
 
 laitue 
 
 lettuce 
 
 sœur 
 
 sister 
 
 nœud 
 
 knot 
 
 queue 
 
 tail 
 
 il joue 
 
 he plays 
 
 Août 
 
 August 
 
 jambe 
 
 leg 
 
 affligeant 
 
 afflicting 
 
 membre 
 
 member 
 
 entendre 
 
 to hear 
 
 essaim 
 
 swarm 
 
 crainte 
 
 fear 
 
 peinture 
 
 picture 
 
 impoli 
 
 impolite 
 
 symbole 
 
 symbol 
 
 syntaxe 
 
 syntax 
 
 pigeon 
 
 pigeon 
 
 ombre 
 
 shadt 
 
 à jeun 
 
 fasting ' 
 
 parfum 
 
 perfume 
 
■■ 
 
 
 or 2 
 
 ieu 
 
 10U 
 
 îen 
 
 ion 
 
 oin 
 
 ua 
 
 >' IN C 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 
 rABLE III. 
 
 
 Diphthongs. 
 
 ds represented by 
 
 fiacre 
 
 galimatias 
 
 examples. 
 hackney-coach, 
 nonsense 
 
 je défiai 
 amitié 
 
 J challenged 
 friendship 
 
 vous riez 
 biais 
 
 you laugh 
 bias 
 
 bière 
 
 beer 
 
 ciel 
 
 heaven 
 
 je purifiais 
 violon 
 
 I purified 
 violin 
 
 miauler 
 
 to menu 
 
 rehure 
 
 binding 
 
 relieur 
 
 bookbinder 
 
 mieux 
 
 better 
 
 chzourme 
 viande 
 
 i crew of a 
 
 I S alle V 
 meat 
 
 audience 
 
 audience 
 
 chrétien 
 
 christian 
 
 passion 
 
 passion 
 
 bois 
 
 wood 
 
 boîte 
 
 box 
 
 foie 
 
 liver 
 
 mocîle 
 
 marrow 
 
 voisin 
 
 neighbour 
 
 nageoire 
 
 fin 
 
 besom 
 
 want 
 
 
 cloud 
 
 je remua» 
 
 I moved 
 
 éternver 
 
 to sneeze 
 
 dénué 
 
 nun 
 
 stript 
 cloud 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 5 
 10 
 
 7 
 10 
 
 8 
 10 
 11 
 10 
 ' 12 
 10 
 14 
 Î0 
 15 
 10 
 16 
 13 
 
 1 
 
 13 
 
 4 
 
 13 
 5 
 13 
 7 
 13 
 11 
 31 
 12 
 13 
 14 
 13 
 15 
 13 
 16 
 
 TABLE III. 
 
 Diphthongs Continued. 
 Compound Sounds represented by 
 u eue menuet 
 
 è y uai il suait 
 
 u ) ui buisson . 
 
 i 3 uie parapluie 
 
 ? uo impétuosité 
 
 ueu 
 
 ueu 
 
 oueu 
 
 oueu 
 
 ouon 
 
 lueur 
 
 majestueux 
 
 nuance 
 influence 
 
 tuons 
 
 l'ounge 
 
 dénouer 
 déjoî/é 
 fille enjouée 
 je jouai 
 fouetter 
 je dénouais 
 combouis 
 Vouïe 
 
 boueur 
 
 noueux 
 
 louange 
 Rouen 
 
 babouin 
 
 jouons 
 2* 
 
 examples. 
 minuet 
 he perspired 
 bush 
 umbrella 
 
 impetuosity 
 glimmering 
 
 majestic 
 
 shade 
 influence 
 
 June 
 
 let us kiU 
 
 wheel-work 
 
 to untie 
 frustrated 
 cheerful girl 
 Î played 
 to whip 
 I untied 
 cart grease 
 hearing 
 
 scavenger 
 
 knotty 
 
 praise 
 Rouen, a citfj 
 
 baboon 
 let us play 
 
Î5 THE SOUNDS 
 
 OBSERVATIONS 
 
 Upon the two first Tables. 
 
 Ain, an, do not take the nasal sound when m or n are 
 doubled, as in constamment, année. Am is not nasal 
 nt the end of some foreign names, as Abram, Roboam. 
 &c. ; except Adam, which has the nasal sound. 
 
 Em and en are articulated as in the English words 
 hem and men : 
 
 1. In words taken from foreign languages ; as Je- 
 rusalem, item, hymen, pollen, solen, amen, &c. and also 
 10 lemrne, gemme, dêccmvirat, decemvirs, étrenner, enne- 
 mi,- moyennant, penne, pennage, and in the second sylla- 
 ble of the compound word empenné. 
 
 2. In some persons and tenses of the verbs, tenir. 
 •cnir, prendre, and their compounds, as que je Tienne, 
 nie tu soutiennes, qu'il comprenne, &e. in the pronouns 
 feminine, la ?nirnne, la tienne, les siennes, in many cthei 
 words, as antienne, magicienne, Vienne, en Autriche, &c. 
 
 3. In many nouns and persons of verbs ending in ène, 
 'Pine, as in arène, ébène, je me promène, il égrène, il sème, 
 where however the e is somewhat more open. 
 
 But em va femme, and en in enorgueillir, ennoblir, and 
 ennui, must be pronounced as if spelt with a, famine, 
 'norgueillir, annoblir, &c. and len in the second syllabk- 
 of so-/e w-nel and derivatives has only the sound of la. 
 
 Aen has the sound of the French nasal an in Caen, a 
 town in Normandy. 
 
 And' aon has the same sound in Laon, another town 
 in France, in faon a fawn, and in paon a peacock : bu: 
 these letters have the sound of on in taon an oxfly. 
 
 N in the monosyllable en, both when a preposition 
 and when a pronoun, in on, mon, ton, son, pronouns, and 
 in bon, bien, and rien ceases to be nasal when these 
 words are immediately followed by a vowel or an h mute, 
 as en Italic, on en aura, mon amu e'etf un bon homme, 
 on a bien essayé, je suis bien-aise an- il n'ait 
 But en and on remain nasal, when placed after the verb* 
 -, which they belong ; as dounez-cn « votre sœur. A-! 
 ssayê ? xa-V-en au logis. 
 
OF THE FRENCH TOSGVt* 
 
 9 
 
 lm and in are not nasal, 
 
 1. In the word intérim, and in proper names taken 
 from foreign languages, as Sêlim, Ephraïm, Ibrahim. 
 However the nasal sound is preserved in Benjamin, Joa~ 
 <him, séraphin, chérubin. 
 
 2. In the beginning and middle of words, when m or 
 n is followed by a vowel or an h mute, as inanimé, ini- 
 maginable, unanimité, &c. 
 
 3. Whenever m or n is doubled, as immoler, immer- 
 », innover, inné, innocent, though in this latter word 
 
 only one n is sounded. 
 
 Un has the sound of u close in une, unième, unanime. 
 -and of eun in jeune homme, when followed by a word be- 
 ginning with a vowel or an h mute, as un homme, un es- 
 prit, aucun ami, commun accord. 
 
 Um is pronounced omm in some words adopted from 
 the Latin, as ce.niumvirs, album, quinquennium, ladanum. 
 'anum, geranium. 
 
 U after the consonants q and g is generally silent, as 
 
 -uatre, guerre, &e. See those letters, p. 21 and 27. 
 
 OF THE Y. 
 This letter when alone, or when preceded, or fol- 
 lowed by a consonant, is pronounced as simple i, ex- 
 cept in pays, paysan, paysage, and even abbaye, which 
 are pronounced pê-is, pê-isan, pê'isage, abé-ie. F be- 
 tween two vowels is pronounced ii, and when preceded 
 by a, it gives to this letter the sound of ai, and when by 
 n or u, it gives to them the sound of the diphthongs oi 
 or ui. The vowel which follows the y is pronounced 
 like one of the diphthongs ia, ie, &c. for which reason 
 we have deferred speaking of the y till after the diph 
 hongs. 
 
 Ab-ba-ye 
 't-bo-yer 
 ip-po 
 
 a-yer 
 ljé*ga-yer 
 
 yon 
 
 . c'.-ble 
 
 -ycr 
 
 fra-ya 
 
 abbey 
 
 to bark 
 to support 
 to *ictep 
 to $( "amer 
 perc'd 
 ible. 
 
 .'jitcned 
 
 nous é-ga-yons. 
 es su-yer 
 mo-yen 
 net-to-yer 
 je pa-yais 
 ja ra-ye-rai? 
 ro-yau-me 
 vo-ya-ge 
 vo-ya-gcur 
 
 ice enliven 
 
 to wipe 
 
 menus 
 
 to clean 
 
 I was pcyiv.z 
 
 I would erase 
 
 kingdom 
 
 voyage 
 
 traveller 
 
20 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 EXERCISES— On Monosyllables, or words of one syllaba. 
 
 he returns 
 ' he smells, feeh- 
 1 sell 
 
 I 
 
 Gras 
 
 ma 
 
 la 
 
 sa 
 
 ia 
 
 las 
 
 pas 
 
 un plat 
 
 bac 
 
 sac 
 
 arc 
 
 pare 
 
 bal 
 
 cap . 
 
 car 
 
 par 
 
 part 
 
 art 
 
 char 
 
 dard 
 
 lard 
 
 tard 
 
 quand 
 
 rang 
 
 blanc 
 
 ^ans 
 
 dans 
 
 gland 
 
 pan 
 
 cran 
 
 plant 
 
 plan 
 
 llanc 
 
 grand 
 
 en 
 
 il fend 
 
 gens 
 
 lent 
 main 
 
 il ment 
 
 il pend 
 
 il prend 
 
 ceint 
 
 cinq 
 
 sain 
 
 sein 
 
 saint 
 
 aeing 
 
 fat 
 
 my 
 
 thy 
 
 his, her, Us 
 
 the, her, it 
 
 tired 
 
 step 
 
 a dish 
 
 ferry-boat 
 
 sack, bag 
 
 arch, bow 
 
 park 
 
 ball 
 
 cape 
 
 for 
 
 by, through 
 
 share 
 
 art 
 
 chariot 
 
 dart 
 
 bacon 
 
 late 
 
 when 
 
 rank 
 
 white 
 
 without 
 
 in 
 
 acorn 
 
 skirt of a coat 
 
 notch 
 
 plantation 
 
 plan 
 
 flank 
 
 great 
 
 in 
 
 he splits 
 
 people 
 
 slow 
 hand 
 
 ht lies 
 he hangs 
 he lakes 
 girt 
 
 five 
 • wholesome 
 bosom 
 holy 
 signature 
 
 il rend 
 
 il sent 
 
 je vends 
 
 je 
 
 mè 
 
 ntî 
 
 te 
 
 ce 
 
 se 
 
 le 
 
 de 
 
 lé 
 
 né 
 
 mais 
 
 mes 
 
 tes 
 
 ses 
 
 les 
 
 pré 
 
 près 
 
 prêt 
 
 ver 
 
 vers 
 
 vert 
 
 il perd 
 
 il sert . 
 
 cerf 
 
 serf 
 
 peur 
 
 il meurt 
 
 pleurs 
 
 leur 
 
 sel 
 
 tel 
 
 quel 
 
 sec 
 
 bec 
 
 chef 
 
 bref 
 
 neuf 
 
 Est 
 
 vingt 
 
 crin 
 
 lin 
 
 brin 
 
 pain 
 
 pin 
 
 Yin, 
 
 me 
 
 not 
 
 thee 
 
 this, that 
 
 himself, Szc 
 
 the, him, it 
 
 of 
 
 breadth(o( cloth 
 
 born 
 
 but 
 
 my, pi. 
 
 iny,p\. 
 
 his, her j ils, pi. 
 
 the, them 
 
 meadow 
 
 near 
 
 ready 
 
 worm 
 
 toward, or ©ewe 
 
 green 
 
 he loses 
 
 he series 
 
 stag 
 
 bondman . 
 
 fear 
 
 he dies 
 
 tears 
 
 their 
 
 salt 
 
 such 
 
 which 
 
 dry 
 
 beak 
 
 chief 
 
 short 
 
 new, or nine 
 
 East 
 
 twenty 
 
 horse-hair 
 
 flax 
 
 sprig 
 
 bread 
 
 pine 
 
 yrin$ 
 
 I 
 
OF THE FRENCH TOKGOE 
 
 II 
 
 i 
 
 fie 
 
 front 
 
 fils 
 
 son 
 
 rond 
 
 frit 
 
 fried 
 
 blond 
 
 lis 
 
 lily 
 
 pont 
 
 pris 
 
 taken 
 
 long 
 
 prix 
 
 price 
 
 fond 
 
 ris 
 
 laugh 
 
 ils font 
 
 riz 
 
 rice 
 
 jonc 
 
 ni 
 
 neither , nor 
 
 non 
 
 nid 
 
 nest 
 
 gond 
 
 si 
 
 if 
 
 nom 
 
 il fit 
 
 he did 
 
 plomb 
 
 mis 
 
 put 
 
 nu 
 
 plis 
 
 folds 
 
 du 
 
 fil 
 
 thread 
 
 il dut 
 
 vil 
 
 vile 
 
 bru 
 
 vif 
 
 lively 
 
 brut 
 
 sot 
 
 fool 
 
 il but 
 
 tôt 
 
 soon 
 
 cru 
 
 clo? 
 
 shut up 
 
 il crut 
 
 nos 
 
 our 
 
 je fus 
 
 vos 
 
 your 
 
 jus 
 
 gros 
 
 big 
 
 lu 
 
 trop 
 
 too much 
 
 il hit 
 
 trot 
 
 trot 
 
 plus 
 
 croc 
 
 hook 
 
 tu 
 
 or 
 
 gold 
 
 vu 
 
 bord 
 
 edge 
 
 fiux 
 
 fort 
 
 strong 
 
 glu 
 
 tort 
 
 wrong 
 
 duc 
 
 je sors 
 
 I go out 
 
 suc 
 
 sort 
 
 fate 
 
 sur 
 
 port 
 
 port 
 
 mur 
 
 il mord 
 
 he biles 
 
 nul 
 
 vol 
 
 theft 
 
 bout 
 
 choc 
 
 shock 
 
 joug 
 
 roc 
 
 rock 
 
 nous 
 
 bloc 
 
 block 
 
 vous 
 
 troc 
 
 exchange 
 
 clou 
 
 dot 
 
 dowry 
 
 cou 
 
 on 
 
 one. people, they coup 
 
 bon 
 
 good 
 
 trou 
 
 bond 
 
 bound 
 
 mou 
 
 ton 
 
 thy 
 
 tout 
 
 son 
 
 his, her, its 
 
 toux 
 
 ils sont 
 
 they are 
 
 pou 
 
 mon 
 
 my 
 
 cour 
 
 don 
 
 gift 
 
 il pleut 
 
 dont 
 
 of which, kc. 
 
 peu 
 
 donc 
 
 therefore 
 
 il veut 
 
 forehead 
 
 round 
 
 light (hair) 
 
 bridge 
 
 long 
 
 bettom 
 
 they do 
 
 rush 
 
 no 
 
 hinge 
 
 name 
 
 lead 
 
 naked 
 
 of the, sing. ni. 
 
 he owed 
 
 daughter-in-law 
 
 rough 
 
 he drank 
 
 raw 
 
 he believed 
 
 I was 
 
 juice 
 
 read 
 
 he read 
 
 more 
 
 thou 
 
 seen 
 
 flux 
 
 bird lime 
 
 duke 
 
 juice 
 
 upon 
 
 waH 
 
 no, none 
 
 end 
 
 yoke 
 
 ice, us 
 
 you 
 
 nail 
 
 neck 
 
 blowy stroke 
 
 hole 
 
 soft 
 
 all 
 
 cough 
 
 louse 
 
 yard 
 
 it rains 
 
 little, few 
 
 he is willing 
 
la 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 ON DISSYLLABLES, 
 
 Or Words of Two Syllables, 
 
 A-bus 
 
 a-chat 
 
 ac-teur 
 
 a-ge 
 
 â-me 
 
 an-neau 
 
 ar-deur 
 
 ar-gent 
 
 as-tre 
 
 au-cun 
 
 a-veu 
 
 a-vis 
 
 au-tre 
 
 bal-con 
 
 ban-que 
 
 foar-que 
 
 ba-teau 
 
 bâ-ton 
 
 beau-té 
 
 bê-gue 
 
 bê-te 
 
 beur-re 
 
 fei-ble 
 
 blâ-me 
 
 bon-heur 
 
 bon-té 
 
 bos-quet 
 
 bou-quet 
 
 bour-geon 
 
 bour-ru 
 
 bras-seur 
 
 bri-gand 
 
 brus-que 
 
 bru-te 
 
 buf-fet 
 
 bu-reau 
 
 bus-te 
 
 ca-deau 
 
 ca-fé 
 
 ca-hot 
 
 e a-non 
 
 ca-ve 
 
 cau-se 
 
 cer-cle 
 
 ci-seau 
 
 cî-seaux 
 
 abuse 
 
 purchase 
 
 actor 
 
 age 
 
 soul 
 
 ring 
 
 ardour 
 
 money 
 
 star 
 
 none 
 
 confession 
 
 advice 
 
 other 
 
 balcony 
 
 bank 
 
 a bark 
 
 boat 
 
 stick 
 
 beauty 
 
 stammerer 
 
 beast 
 
 butter 
 
 bible 
 
 blame 
 
 happiness 
 
 goodness 
 
 grove 
 
 nosegay 
 
 bud 
 
 surly 
 
 brewer 
 
 robber 
 
 abrupt 
 
 brute 
 
 cupboard 
 
 office 
 
 bust 
 
 present 
 
 coffee 
 
 jolt 
 
 cannon 
 
 cellar 
 
 cause 
 
 circle 
 
 chisel 
 
 scissors 
 
 clé-ment 
 
 cli-mat 
 
 cloi-son 
 
 co-hue 
 
 com-mun 
 
 com-pas 
 
 com-te 
 
 con-gé 
 
 con-te 
 
 co^quin 
 
 cor-deau 
 
 cô-té 
 
 cou-ple 
 
 cou-reur 
 
 cous-sin 
 
 cou-vent 
 
 crê-me 
 
 cri-me 
 
 crot-te 
 
 croû-te 
 
 da-rae 
 
 dan-seur 
 
 dé-bit 
 
 de-bout 
 
 de-mi 
 
 dé-pôt 
 
 dé-sert 
 
 dessert 
 
 dis-cours 
 
 dou-leur 
 
 c-cu 
 
 en-clin 
 
 en-fant 
 
 é-poux 
 
 es-poir 
 
 é-tain 
 
 être 
 
 ex-cès 
 
 festin 
 
 fê-te 
 
 fi-lou 
 
 fla-con 
 
 flam-beau 
 
 flû-te 
 
 fo-rêt 
 
 fou-drc 
 
 clement 
 
 climate 
 
 partition 
 
 throng 
 
 common 
 
 compass té 
 
 earl 
 
 holiday 
 
 tale 
 
 rogue 
 
 line 
 
 side 
 
 couple 
 
 runner 
 
 cushion 
 
 convent 
 
 cream 
 
 crime 
 
 dirt 
 
 crust 
 
 lady 
 
 dancer 
 
 sale 
 
 erect 
 
 half 
 
 deposit 
 
 wilderness 
 
 dessert 
 
 speech 
 
 pain 
 
 crown 
 
 inclined 
 
 child 
 
 spouse 
 
 hope 
 
 pewter 
 
 being 
 
 excess 
 
 feast 
 
 festival 
 
 pickpockt 
 
 decanter 
 
 flambeau 
 
 flute 
 
 forest 
 
 thunderbolt 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 13 
 
 four-mi 
 
 ant 
 
 meu-bîe 
 
 furniture 
 
 fri-pon 
 
 knave 
 
 mon-de 
 
 world 
 
 tu-reur 
 
 fury 
 
 mons-tre 
 
 monster 
 
 gaie-té 
 
 cheerfulness 
 
 mou-le 
 
 mould 
 
 gar-çon 
 
 boy 
 
 mou-lin 
 
 mill 
 
 ga-teau 
 
 cake 
 
 ni-gaud 
 
 silly fellow 
 
 ga-zon 
 
 turf 
 
 nou-veau 
 
 new 
 
 gen-dre 
 
 son-in-law 
 
 œu-vre 
 
 work 
 
 gen-re 
 
 gender 
 
 on-guent 
 
 ointment 
 
 gi-got 
 
 leg of mutton 
 
 or-dre 
 
 order 
 
 gla-çon 
 
 piece of ice 
 
 ou-bli 
 
 oblivion 
 
 goû-té 
 
 luncheon 
 
 pa-rent 
 
 relation 
 
 gout-te 
 
 drop 
 
 par-rain 
 
 godfather 
 
 grâ-ce 
 
 favour * 
 
 pâ-te 
 
 dough 
 
 gron-deur 
 
 grumbler 
 
 pâ-té 
 
 pie 
 
 gru-au 
 
 oatmeal 
 
 pat-te 
 
 paw 
 
 guè-re 
 
 little 
 
 pê-che 
 
 Jishingy peach 
 
 guer-re 
 
 war 
 
 pé-ché 
 
 sin 
 
 gueu-le 
 
 mouth of a beast pê-cheur 
 
 fisherman 
 
 gui-de 
 
 guide 
 
 pé-cheur 
 
 sinner 
 
 1 hai-ne 
 
 hatred 
 
 pei-ne 
 
 (rouble 
 
 1 hale 
 
 sunburning 
 
 pein-tre 
 
 painter 
 
 hal-le 
 
 market -ha 1 1 
 
 pè-re 
 
 father 
 
 • har-pe 
 
 harp 
 
 peu-pie 
 
 people 
 
 ' ha-te 
 
 haste 
 
 peu-reux 
 
 fearful 
 
 • hau-teur 
 
 height 
 
 pin-te 
 
 pint 
 
 • ha-sard 
 
 chance 
 
 plu-me 
 
 feather 
 
 1 liê-tre 
 
 beech 
 
 por-trait 
 
 picture 
 
 hom-me 
 
 man 
 
 pour-pre 
 
 purple 
 
 iion-neur 
 
 honour 
 
 prin-ce 
 
 prince 
 
 * hon-te 
 
 shame 
 
 pru-neau 
 
 prune 
 
 bor-reur 
 
 horror 
 
 ra-goût 
 
 ragout 
 
 ho-te 
 
 landlord 
 
 rè-gle 
 
 rule 
 
 hu-mairi 
 
 human 
 
 rè-gne 
 
 reign 
 
 im-pie 
 
 impious 
 
 rei-ne 
 
 queen 
 
 iu-ge 
 
 judge 
 
 ren-te 
 
 annuity 
 
 jour-née 
 
 day 
 
 rè-ve 
 
 dream 
 
 lai-teux. 
 
 milky 
 
 i'i-re 
 
 laughing 
 
 la-quais 
 
 footman 
 
 rou-te 
 
 road 
 
 lar-cin 
 
 theft 
 
 ru-se 
 
 trick 
 
 lar-geur 
 
 breadth 
 
 sa-bre 
 
 sabre 
 
 li-queur 
 
 liquor 
 
 sa-lut 
 
 salute 
 
 io-gis 
 
 dwelling 
 
 s a-tin 
 
 satin 
 
 lon-^ueur 
 
 length 
 
 sauce 
 
 sauce 
 
 mar-bre 
 
 marble 
 
 sau-teur 
 
 tumbler 
 
 mar-chand 
 
 trade man 
 
 se-jour 
 
 residence 
 
 ma-ri 
 
 husband 
 mother 
 
 si-gnal 
 
 signal 
 
 mè-re 
 
 si-gne 
 
 ^sign 
 
 
M 
 
 THE 1 
 
 SOUNDS 
 
 ■jom-bre 
 
 dark 
 
 to-me 
 
 sou-hait 
 
 wish 
 
 tou-pie 
 
 sou-pe 
 
 soup 
 
 tour-neur 
 
 sou-ris 
 
 smile 
 
 traî-neau 
 
 su-cre 
 
 sugar 
 
 trô-ne 
 
 sus-pect 
 
 suspicious 
 
 trou-peau 
 
 ta-che 
 
 spot 
 
 veu-ve 
 
 tâ-cbe 
 
 task 
 
 vi-gne 
 
 tam-bour 
 
 drum 
 
 zè-le 
 
 tom-beau 
 
 grave 
 
 zé-Ie 
 
 volume 
 
 top 
 
 turner 
 
 sledgt 
 
 throne 
 
 flock 
 
 widow 
 
 vine 
 
 zeal 
 
 zealous 
 
 WORDS OF THREE SYLLABLES. 
 
 A-bî-me 
 
 a-bré-gé 
 
 a-bri-cot 
 
 ab-so-lu 
 
 ab-sur-de 
 
 ac-tri-ce 
 
 af-fai-re 
 
 am-pou-le 
 
 ap-pé-tit 
 
 à-pre-té 
 
 a-rai-gnée 
 
 ar-moi-re 
 
 ar-tis-te 
 
 as-si-da 
 
 a-tro-ce 
 
 au-ber-gc 
 
 a-voi-ne 
 
 aus-tè-re 
 
 ba-bio-le 
 
 bas-ses-se 
 
 bà-ti-ment 
 
 bê-le-ment 
 
 ber-gè-re 
 
 bê-ti-se 
 
 bien-fai-sant 
 
 bien-sé-ant 
 
 bien-ve-nu 
 
 blan-châ-trc 
 
 bles-su-re 
 
 boi-se-rie 
 
 bor-du-re 
 
 bou-lan-ger 
 
 bou-t; 
 
 bou-ti-que 
 
 bras-se rie 
 
 abyss 
 
 abridgment 
 
 apricot 
 
 absolute 
 
 absurd 
 
 actress 
 
 business 
 
 blister 
 
 appetite 
 
 asperity 
 
 spider 
 
 cabinet 
 
 artist 
 
 assiduous 
 
 atrocious 
 
 inn 
 
 oats 
 
 austere 
 
 bawble 
 
 baseness 
 
 building 
 
 bleating 
 
 shepherdess 
 
 stupidity 
 
 benevolent 
 
 becoming 
 
 wlcome 
 
 whitish 
 
 wound 
 
 wainscot 
 
 edging 
 
 baker 
 
 whim 
 
 shop 
 
 breic' 
 
 bra-vou-re 
 
 breu-va-ge 
 
 bro-de-rie 
 
 brou-et-te 
 
 brii-lu-re 
 
 brus-que-menl 
 
 ca-de-nas 
 
 cam-pa-gne 
 
 ea-rè-ine 
 
 ear-ros-se 
 
 cein-tu-re 
 
 ce-pen-dant 
 
 cham-pi-gnon 
 
 cha-pe-lier 
 
 <-ha-pel-le 
 
 eha-pi-tre 
 
 char-la-tàn 
 
 char ret-te 
 
 châ-ti-ment 
 
 thau-de-ment 
 
 chau-diè-rc 
 
 chauf-fa-ge 
 
 cbaus-su-re 
 
 ci-vîè-re 
 
 i la-ve-cin 
 
 clo-a-que 
 
 cO-H-que 
 
 col-lé-ge 
 
 col-li-ne 
 
 co : lon-ne 
 
 co-lo-ris 
 
 co-mé-die 
 
 co-mé-dien 
 
 com-ir.er-çant 
 
 rom-pa-gnie 
 
 valour . 
 drink 
 
 embroidery 
 wheelbarrow 
 burning 
 bluntly 
 padlock 
 country 
 tent 
 coach 
 girdle 
 however 
 mushroom 
 halter 
 chapel 
 chapter 
 quack 
 cart 
 
 chastisemen: 
 warmly 
 copper 
 fuel 
 
 shoes, stocking 
 hand-barrow 
 harpsichord- 
 sewer 
 colic 
 college 
 hill 
 
 column 
 colouring 
 comedy 
 comedian 
 merchant 
 company 
 
 si 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 
 
 13 
 
 som-pa-gnon 
 conrdai-te 
 
 oon-qué-rant 
 
 oon-quê-të 
 
 eons-tam-inent 
 
 «jon-ti-gu 
 
 cor-don-nier 
 
 jo-ri-a-ce 
 
 iîor-ni-chon 
 
 jou-chet-te 
 
 oou-roD-ne 
 
 (TOU-te-Ias 
 
 cou-te-lier 
 
 oou-tu-re 
 
 ^ra-moi-si 
 
 oré-du-le 
 
 cri-ti-que 
 
 jru-au-té 
 
 cui-si-ne 
 
 :ul-bu-te 
 
 cu-re-dent 
 
 dé-com-bres 
 
 dé-goû-tant 
 
 dé-jeû-ner 
 
 de-ineu-re 
 
 dés-hon-neur 
 
 des-po-te 
 
 dis-ci-ple 
 
 dis-grâ-ce 
 
 dro-guis-te 
 
 droi-tu-re 
 
 é-cha-faud 
 
 é-cbel-le 
 
 rj-che-veau 
 
 é-cu-me 
 
 ?m-pe reur 
 
 em-plâ-tre 
 
 em-plet-te 
 
 on-clu-me 
 
 on-ga-geant 
 
 en-ne-mi 
 
 en-sei-gne 
 
 o-pa-gneul 
 
 <>pi-ce 
 
 é-pi-cier 
 
 é-pou-se 
 
 «9-ca-lier 
 
 ?»pa-ce 
 
 companion 
 
 behaviour 
 
 conqueror 
 
 conquest 
 
 constantly 
 
 contiguous 
 
 shoemaker 
 
 tough 
 
 girkin 
 
 couch 
 
 crown 
 
 hanger 
 
 cutler 
 
 seam 
 
 crimson 
 
 credulous 
 
 critic 
 
 cruelty 
 
 kitchen 
 
 tumble 
 
 tooth-pick 
 
 rubbish 
 
 disgusting 
 
 breakfast 
 
 abode 
 
 dishonour 
 
 despot 
 
 pupil 
 
 disgrace 
 
 druggist 
 
 uprightness 
 
 scaffold 
 ladder 
 
 skein 
 
 froth 
 
 emperor 
 
 plaster 
 
 purchase 
 
 anvil 
 
 engaging 
 
 enemy 
 
 sign 
 
 spaniel 
 
 spice 
 
 grocer 
 
 wife 
 
 stair-case 
 
 IJHK6 
 
 es-pè-ce 
 
 es-quis-se 
 
 es-tra-gon 
 
 <-tei-gnoir 
 
 é tour-di 
 
 c-vê-ché 
 
 é-veil-lé 
 
 ex-ces -sif 
 
 ex-em-ple 
 
 ia-bu-leux 
 
 fa-ca-de 
 
 fa-ien-ce 
 
 fa-ri-neux 
 
 fa-rou-che 
 
 ii-las-se 
 
 Seu-ris-te 
 
 fai-bles-se 
 
 fo-la-tre 
 
 fou-droy-ant 
 
 four-bis-seur 
 
 four-ru-re 
 
 i'rani-boi-se 
 
 iri-su-re 
 
 frois-su-re 
 
 gi-ro-fle 
 
 go-be-let 
 
 gou-lû-ment 
 
 gué-ri-son 
 
 gui-mau-ve 
 
 hâ-lei-ne 
 
 * har-di-ment 
 
 c ha-ri-cot 
 
 hor-lo-ge 
 
 hor-ri-ble 
 
 ho-tes-se 
 
 i-gno-rant 
 
 im-men-se 
 
 im-pu-ni 
 
 in-cen-die 
 
 in-con-nu 
 
 in-gé-nu 
 
 in-hu-main 
 
 in-sec-te 
 
 ins-truc-tif 
 
 i-voi-re 
 
 i-vro-gne 
 
 ja-quet-te 
 
 jour-na-Her 
 
 3 
 
 kind 
 
 sketch 
 
 stragon 
 
 extinguisher 
 
 thoughtless 
 
 bishoprick 
 
 awake 
 
 immoderate 
 
 example 
 
 fabulous 
 front 
 
 delft-ware 
 
 mealy 
 
 fierce 
 
 flax 
 
 florist 
 
 weakness 
 
 playful 
 
 thundering 
 
 sword-cutler 
 
 fur 
 
 raspberry 
 
 curling 
 
 bruising 
 
 cloves 
 
 tuvibler t goblet 
 
 greedily 
 
 cure 
 
 marsh-mallow 
 
 breath 
 
 boldly 
 
 French bean 
 
 clock 
 
 horrid 
 
 landlady 
 
 ignorant 
 
 immense 
 
 unpunished 
 
 conflagration 
 
 unknown 
 
 ingenuous 
 
 inhuman 
 
 insect 
 
 instructive 
 
 ivory 
 
 drunkard 
 
 jacket 
 
 journeymm 
 
iai-tiè-re 
 
 lan-gou-reux 
 
 len-til-le 
 
 li-ma-çon 
 
 ina-ga-sin 
 
 mal-a-droit 
 
 ma-nœu-vre 
 
 mar-mi-ton 
 
 ioas-cu-lin 
 
 mé-con-tent 
 
 mé-moi-re 
 
 mé-na-ger 
 
 men-son-ge 
 
 mé-pri-se 
 
 mé-tho-de 
 
 mo-des-tie 
 
 mon-ta-gnard 
 
 mou-tar-de 
 
 mur-mu-rc 
 
 na-tu-rel 
 
 nau-fra-ge 
 
 iié-an-moins 
 
 no-bles-se 
 
 uoi-rà-tre 
 
 o-bli-geant 
 
 om-bra-ge 
 
 op-pro-bre 
 
 p-ra-geux 
 
 or-fè-vre 
 
 .)r-piie-lin 
 
 pa-moi-son 
 
 pan-tou-fle 
 
 pa-pe-tier 
 
 pa-ra-sol 
 
 pa-ren-te 
 
 pa-rois-se 
 
 pas-sa-bîe 
 
 pois-sar-de 
 
 poi-tri-ne 
 
 por-tiè-re 
 
 pos-tu-re 
 
 po-ta-ge 
 
 pous-siè-re 
 
 pré-tex-te 
 
 prin-ces-so 
 
 pro-mes-se 
 
 pro-tec-tcnr 
 
 nu-é-ril 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 
 milk-woman 
 
 puis-san-ce 
 
 power 
 
 languishing 
 
 que-rel-le 
 
 quarrel 
 
 lentil 
 
 ra-pie-re 
 
 rapier 
 
 snail 
 
 ra-tiè-re 
 
 rat-trap 
 
 warehouse 
 
 ré-col-te 
 
 crop 
 
 awkward 
 
 ré-ser-vé 
 
 reserved 
 
 manœuvre 
 
 res-sour-cë 
 
 resource 
 
 scullion 
 
 re-trai-te 
 
 retirement 
 
 masculine 
 
 rê-ve-rie 
 
 meditation 
 
 discontented 
 
 rou-geâ-tre 
 
 reddish 
 
 memory 
 
 rus-ti-que 
 
 rural 
 
 thrifty 
 
 scan-da-Ieux 
 
 scandalous 
 
 falsehood 
 
 scru-pu-leux 
 
 scrupulous 
 
 mistake 
 
 sé-an-ce 
 
 sitting 
 
 method 
 
 ser-ru-re 
 
 lock 
 
 modesty 
 
 bif-fle-raent 
 
 whistling 
 
 Highlander 
 
 sim-ple-ment 
 
 plainly 
 
 mustard 
 
 so-bri-quet 
 
 nick name 
 
 murmur 
 
 so-Ien-uel 
 
 solemn 
 
 natural 
 
 son-net-te 
 
 little bell 
 
 shipwreck 
 
 so-no-re 
 
 sonorous 
 
 nevertheless 
 
 sou-cou-pe 
 
 saucer 
 
 nobility 
 
 soup-çon-neux 
 
 auspicious 
 
 blackish 
 
 spec-ta-cie 
 
 sight 
 
 obliging 
 
 splen-di-de 
 
 splendid 
 
 shade* 
 
 suc-ces-seur 
 
 successor 
 
 'disgrace 
 
 su-pré-me 
 
 supreme 
 
 stormy 
 
 symp-tô-me 
 
 symptom 
 
 goldsmith 
 
 tein-tu-re 
 
 dying 
 
 orphan 
 
 ten-dres-sc 
 
 tenderness 
 
 faintingfit 
 
 té-né-breux 
 
 dark 
 
 slipper 
 
 thé-à-lre 
 
 theatre 
 
 stationer 
 
 thé-iè-re 
 
 tea-pot 
 
 umbrella 
 
 toi-let-te 
 
 toilet 
 
 kins wo ma 
 
 tour-ne-vis 
 
 screwdriver 
 
 parish 
 
 tou-te-fois 
 
 nevertheless 
 
 tolerable 
 
 tri-che-rie 
 
 cheat 
 
 fishwoman 
 
 tri-om-phe 
 
 triumph 
 
 breast 
 
 trom-pet-le 
 
 trumpet 
 
 coach door 
 
 tu-mul-te 
 
 tumult 
 
 posture 
 
 va-cau-ces 
 
 holidays 
 
 porridge 
 
 verrget-te 
 
 brush 
 
 dus! 
 
 ver-mis-seau 
 
 small worm 
 
 pretence 
 
 vic-toi-re 
 
 victory 
 
 princess 
 
 vi-gou-reux 
 
 vigorous 
 
 promise 
 
 vil-la-geois 
 
 countryman 
 
 protector 
 
 voi-tu-re 
 
 carriage 
 
 childish 
 
 Bé-phi-re 
 
 ztphyrus 
 
OF THE FKESCH TONGUE, 
 
 OF CONSONANTS. 
 
 W 
 
 B, b, this letter has the same sound as in English. 
 
 Bal 
 
 ball 
 
 bo-bi-ne 
 
 bobbin 
 
 Ba-bel 
 
 Babe! 
 
 bar-ba-ris-me 
 
 barbarism 
 
 ba-bii 
 
 prating 
 
 bi-bli-o-thè-que 
 
 library 
 
 ba-bouin 
 
 baboon 
 
 bur-les-que 
 
 burlesque 
 
 B is always pronounced in the middle of words, as 
 ab-di-qucr, sub-ve~nir, ob-vi-er ; and at the end of pro- 
 per names, as Job, Caleb, Moab ; also in the words 
 radoub, the refitting of a ship, rumb, point of the com- 
 pass ; but it is never sounded in plomb, lead. 
 
 When double, as in abbé, abbot ; rabbin, rabbin ; 
 sabbat, sabbath ; and their derivatives, only one of 
 these letters is sounded ; however, in Abbeville and 
 abbatial the sound of the double b is distinctly heard. 
 
 ( k, or English c in cart, before 
 I a> o, u, I, n, r 9 but 
 
 C, c, has the sound of { of 
 
 s, or c in cedar, cider, cymbal, 
 before e, i, and y. 
 
 C sounded as h 
 
 C sounded as s. 
 
 Oal-cul 
 
 ca-co-pho-nie 
 
 clé-ri-cal 
 
 Cra-co-vie 
 
 co-que-li-cot 
 
 cro-co-di-le 
 
 cris-tal 
 
 cu-eur-bi-te 
 
 calculation 
 
 cacophony 
 
 clerical 
 
 Cracow 
 
 wild-poppy 
 
 crocodile 
 
 crystal 
 
 cucurbite 
 
 ce-ci 
 
 cé-ci-té 
 
 cé-ta-cée 
 
 cer-ceau 
 
 Cir-cé 
 
 ci-li-ce 
 
 cy-ni-que 
 
 cy-près 
 
 this 
 
 blindness 
 
 cetaceous 
 
 hoop 
 
 Circe 
 
 hair-cloth 
 
 cynic 
 
 cypress 
 
 C is not sounded in the middle of words before q , ca/ 
 :o, eu, cl, cr, as socque, acquérir , accabler, acclimater* 
 acclamation, accomplir, acoutrer, accréditer, ecclésias- 
 tique, which are pronounced so-que, a-quérir, a-cabier s 
 &c. except, however, in the words pec-cable, pec-ctmt* 
 
W THE SOUNDS 
 
 peccadille, pec-cavi, sac-cholatique, in which the souno 
 of the double c is distinctly heard. — It has the sound oi 
 k before ce and ci, as in suc-cès, ac-cident, vac-cine, &c. 
 and takes the sound of s before w, o, u, when there is o 
 cedilla under it, as in façade, façon, reçu. 
 
 C is sounded as g hard in second, and its derivatives, 
 and by many in Claude, and Reine-Claude, and even b\ 
 some, but improperly, in secret. 
 
 C, at the end of words, is usually pronounced k, as 
 in cognac, lac (a lake), avec, bec, pic> syndic, roc, froc, 
 estoc, duc, aqueduc, agaric, arc, zinc, &c. and in the 
 singular of êch ce ; but it is not sounded in croc, ac-croc. 
 arc-boutant, banc, -broc, clerc, marc d'argent, cric, esto- 
 mac, flanc, jonc, lacs (toils), tabar t tronc, échecs, nor in 
 donc before a consonant ; but 
 
 It is always sounded in croc- en-jambe, franc étourdi, 
 du blanc au noir, and in both syllables of mic-mac, trie 
 trac, cric-crac, ric-à^ric, and porc-épic. 
 
 In words ending in et, both consonants are generally 
 SOUfidfid* as la tact, contact, intact , exact, inexact* ah 
 e 'eci, correct, direct, infect, strict, succinct ; but neithei 
 of them in aspect, suspect, circonspect, amict, instinct, 
 distinct ; and only c in respect, though both letters an 
 always heard in suspecte, circonspecte, respecte, distincte. 
 as well as in the middle of other similar words, as rec- 
 teur, vecteur, séducteur, rédacteur, humecter, injecter, dac 
 fyle, ductile, tactique, &c. 
 
 f one, which is most general, like 
 ^ , ,1 sh in she, shake : 
 
 C% has two sounds, J the other> which very rarelv oc 
 
 * curs, is that of/; in chimera. 
 
 Examples of sh. 
 
 Chat eat ar-chi-tra-vn architrave 
 
 che-val horse chon-ct-tc scrccch-oiv! 
 
 cher-cher to seek chû-te fall 
 
 chi-che fling]/ chu-cho-ter (o tcfr 
 
 nr-chi-tec-te arjchii fcc. &c. ri 
 
OF THE FHENCH TONGUE, 19 
 
 and in many proper names, as Achille, Joachim, Ckéru* 
 bin, Zachée, &c. 
 
 Examples of ch as L 
 
 A-chab Cham Za-cha-rie Cal-chas 
 
 A-cbé-lo-iïs Cha-na-an Ma-chi-a-vel Bac-chus 
 
 An-ti-o-chus Chi-o Mi-chel-an-ge Cha-ron 
 
 A-chaie Cho-rè-be Pul-ché-rie Ci-vi-ta-Vec 
 
 A-na-cbar-sis Chos-ro-ès Ti-cho-Bra-hé chia 
 
 a-na-cho-rè-te Cbal-da-a-que Dyr-ra-chi-ura Zu-rich 
 
 ar-chan-ge Chal-dée chirro-man-cie é-cho 
 
 Ar-chan-gel cha-os chœur scho-lie 
 
 ar-ché-ty-pe ché-li-doi-ne cbo-ris-te cha-li-bé 
 
 ar-chon-tes Cher-so-né-se or-ches-tre chon-dril-le' 
 
 ir-chi-é-pis-co- cbi-li-ar-que i-cho-reux chi-ra-gre 
 
 pal chal-co-gra- cbo-rè-ge ar-cha-ïs-me 
 
 :hal-câ-doi-ne phie Na-bu-cho-do- 
 
 ?u-cha-ris-tie ca-te-chu-mè-ne no-sor 
 
 Examples of chi as k. 
 
 Vacbt } C Yak } 
 
 U-treôbt i are pronounced) Utrek (without sounding 
 
 Maes-tricht ) ( Mastrik ) tlie u 
 
 Ch takes the sound of a hard g in drachme, and is 
 dropped in almanack ; and on account of their Italian 
 origin in vermicelle and violoncelle, c, without h, takes the 
 sound of the English sh. 
 
 Ch has uniformly the sound of k, in all words where 
 it is followed by a consonant, a3 Christ, chrétien, Chloris, 
 chronique, isochrone^ chronomètre, Arachné, ichneumon** 
 technique, &c. 
 
 D, d, has the same sound as in English* 
 
 Dé-da-le labyrinth Dry-a-de Dryad 
 
 do-du plump dro-ma-dai-re dromedary 
 
 din-don turkey de-di-ca-toi-re dedicatory 
 
 D is always sounded in the middle of words, as adjec« 
 iif, adverbe, admirable. 
 
 It is likewise heard at the end of proper names, as in 
 David, Obed, Gad, Alfred, &c. and in some other 
 3* 
 
20 THE SOt?» 
 
 words, as Cid, Sud, Sund, Talmud, cphod, lamed. Ai 
 the end of many words before a vowel, or h mute, d 
 takes the sound of t, as, quand il viendra ; nn grand 
 homme; vend-il? &c. however, it is never sounded in 
 bond, gond, fond, nid, nœud, muid, and pied ; except in dc 
 fond-en-comble, de pied -en-cap, tenir pied-à-bcule, avoh 
 un pied-a-ierrc, where it is sounded as t. 
 
 D is sounded double in some few words derived fron 
 the Latin, as in ad-dition, ad-ducteur, red-dition. 
 
 F,f, is sounded like the same letter in English 
 
 Example. 
 
 Var-fa-det hobgoblin fé-bri-fu-ge febrifuge 
 
 rau-fi-ler io baste (in sewing) fruc-ti-fi-er to fructify 
 
 fet-fa edict of the Mufti fi-fre fiftr 
 
 fan-fa-ron boaster for-fait crime 
 
 Final / is sounded in all words ending in if, whici 
 amount to nearly 260, mostly adjectives, and in raf bref 
 brief chef, fief nef nerf, grief serf relief mèche) 
 Azof lof tof tvf ouf pouf œuf veuf bœuf and neuf. 
 (new) ; but not in clef cerf éteuf chef-d'œuvre, œuf 
 irais, nor in the plural of nerf œuf, bœuf and nev; 
 (new). In neuf (nine), when alone, or when it termi 
 nates the sentence,/ is distinctly sounded, but it takes 
 the sound of v before a vowel, and is silent before a con 
 sonant. 
 
 When it is doubled, only one of these letters is sound 
 ed : however, in some few words, as effusion, affadir. 
 effraction, it seems more proper to sound both. 
 
 'before a, o, u, the hard sound of g in the 
 p , 1 English word go, 
 
 »and before c, i, y, the soft sound of sin 
 pleasure. 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 21 
 
 Examples of g hard* 
 
 &an-grê-ne gangrene gut-tu-ral guttural 
 
 Gro-nin-gue Groningen gom-me gum 
 
 gai cheerful gla-ce looking-glass, 
 
 go-gue-nard joker Gor-go-ne Gorgon 
 
 Examples of g soft* 
 
 Geai jay gé-né-ral general 
 
 gé-or-gi-qties georgics gens people 
 
 gen-re gender gin-gem-bre ginger 
 
 gé-mir to groan gyro-ni-que gymnastic 
 
 G final has the hard sound in joug, and in proper 
 names, as Agag, Doeg, but it takes the sound of k in 
 rang, s<mg, and long masculine before a vowel ; ant 
 also in bourg. It is silent in faubourg, Luxembourg, 
 &c. and in Bourg -P abbé, Bourg-la-Reine, &c. ; and 
 likewise in sangsue, de sang-froid, sang-de-dragon, in, 
 rang, sang, long, before a consonant, and always in 
 doigt, legs, poing, vieux-oing, hareng, étang, seing, and 
 vingt. 
 
 Bourg-mestre is pronounced bourgue-mestre, and by 
 some persons it is now, and not improperly, written in 
 the latter manner, 
 
 Gu forms a distinct syllable in the inflections of the 
 verb ar-gn-er ; is strongly sounded in aiguë, mmigu'è, 
 dgiïè, ambiguë, contigu'è, exiguë, and bésaigué ; has a 
 mixed sound with the following i in aiguille, aiguillade. 
 aiguillonner, aiguiser, and derivatives, and in the pro- 
 per names, d'Aiguillon, de Guise, le Guide. But the 
 u in the inflections of more than forty verbs ending in 
 guer, and in many other words, where it stands before 
 e and i, being intended only to give g the hard sound 
 is entirely silent, as in bague, bègue, figue, dogue, fou- 
 gue, fugue, onguent, langue, longue, nargue, vergue, mer 
 gue, distingue, gué, gui, guérir, guinder, guise, languir, 
 guinguette, &c. 
 
 Gua takes the mijxt sound of the diphthong gGiia» iiî 
 some few words, as lingual, paraguante, Gaudeloupe, 
 Guadalquivir, Gitatimala, Guastalla. 
 

 22 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 When g is doubled, only one is sounded, except be * 
 fore e and », then the first g retains the hard, and tht 
 second adopts the soft sound, as in sug- gérer , su*-ges- 
 tion. 
 
 G before //, and before several consonants in the 
 middle of words, retains its hard sound, as in Benrhen. 
 Enghierii église, énigme, segment, amygdales. Before 
 / there are two exceptions, in the words, imbroglio and 
 de Broglio, where it is sounded liquid, as in seraglio. 
 and these words are generally pronounced as if written 
 imbroille, de Broille. 
 
 'one hard, as in the English wore 
 
 ignorant î 
 \ and the other liquid, as in the las* 
 syllable of onion. 
 
 Gn has two sounds 
 
 Examples of the hard sound. 
 
 'Hi 
 
 Gni-de 
 
 
 gna-pha li-um 
 
 ag-na-ti-que 
 
 rég-ni-coltj 
 
 
 Gno-mc 
 
 
 gnos-li-que 
 
 cog-na-ti-qu 
 
 3 mag-ué-sie 
 
 
 gno-mi-de 
 
 
 ag-nat 
 
 ag-nus 
 
 stag-nan t 
 
 
 gno-mi-que 
 
 
 ag-na-ti-on 
 
 ig-née 
 
 stag-na-ti-or. 
 
 
 gno-mon 
 
 
 cog-nat 
 
 ig-ni-cole 
 
 di-ag-nos-tiqiK 
 
 
 guo-mo-ni-que 
 
 cog-na-ti-on 
 
 ig-ni-ti-on 
 
 m ag-nat 
 
 ■ ■ 
 
 G is silent 
 
 in signet, and Regnard, a 
 
 French writer o. 
 
 
 comedies, 
 
 pronounced sinet, 
 
 Renard. 
 
 
 H, h, when aspirated, is sounded with a strong guttu- 
 ral impulse, and when mute, it has no power but that of 
 showing etymology. 
 
 'Hâbler 
 
 'ha-che 
 
 'ha-ir 
 
 'har-pe 
 
 'haut 
 
 *hé-ros* 
 
 'hé-ris-son 
 
 'hi-deux 
 
 'hon-te 
 
 hur-ler 
 
 H aspirated in 
 
 H is mule in 
 
 to romance 
 
 axt 
 
 to hate 
 
 harp 
 
 high 
 
 hero 
 
 hedge-hog 
 
 hideous 
 
 shame 
 
 to hnwl 
 
 ha-bit 
 
 her-be 
 
 heu-re 
 
 heu-reux 
 
 hé-ro-ï-ne* 
 
 hé-ro-ï-que* 
 
 hé-ro-ïs-me* 
 
 liis-toi-re 
 
 hi- ver 
 
 hor-reur 
 
 coat 
 
 grass 
 
 hour 
 
 happy 
 
 hero int 
 
 heroic 
 
 heroism 
 
 history 
 
 icinter 
 
 horror 
 
 and about 160 more words. 
 
 and about 135 other cases. 
 
 AH generally noted in my dictionary aad others. 
 
OF tf HE FRENCH TONGUE, 2$ 
 
 * Observe, that h is aspirated in 'héros, but not in its 
 derivatives. 
 
 H is never aspirated in the middle of a word, except 
 when that word is the compound of another beginning 
 with an h aspirated, as in s J aheurter, dêhdler, déhanché, 
 déharnacher, enharnacher, s'enhardir, dehors. 
 
 N. B. Though there is no aspirated h before onze, 
 onzième, and oui, we pronounce and write more gene- 
 rally le onze, le onzième, than Vonze, V onzième, and say 
 always le oui et le non without elision, and final s in mes. 
 tes, ses, nos, vos, leurs, ces, and les, is never sounded 
 when placed before any of these words, as tous vos oui 
 et vos non ; sur les onze heures, and even before une in 
 sur les une heure. 
 
 For what concerns h placed after c or g, see the re- 
 marks on those two letters, p. 1 8 and 22. 
 
 H, after r or t, is always silent, as rhéteur, Rhône, rhu- 
 barbe, thé, Thomas } thym. 
 
 J, j, has constantly the sound of z in azure, or s in 
 
 pleasure, 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Jus gravy jou-jou toy 
 
 ja-mais never ju-ju-be jujube 
 
 jo-vi-al jovial jeu-nes-se youth 
 
 K, h has always a hard sound, as in the English won! 
 king. 
 
 This letter can hardly be considered as belonging to 
 the French alphabet, as it is found only in some few 
 words borrowed from foreign languages, as 
 
 Kan-gu-rou kanguroo ki-os-que Turkish pavilion ^ 
 
 ker-mès cochineal fcy-ri-el-le tedious enumeration. 
 
I 
 
 24 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 f first, is precisely the same as 
 I in the English words li- 
 L } I, has two sounds, the \ ly, law, &c. 
 
 j second, resembles that ol 
 L in brilliant. 
 
 Example of the First. 
 
 La-té-ral 
 
 îé-gis-la-teur 
 
 li-bel-le 
 
 Bail 
 
 som-meil 
 
 ceil 
 
 é-cu-reuil 
 
 or-gueil* 
 
 fe-nouil 
 
 tail-Io. 
 
 lail-la 
 
 tail-lé 
 
 tail-lis 
 
 tail-Ions 
 
 tail-leur 
 
 tail-lu-re 
 
 Neuil-ly 
 
 lateral 
 
 legislator 
 
 libel 
 
 li-las 
 
 lo-cal 
 
 lu-ni-so-lai-re 
 
 lilach 
 
 local 
 
 lunisclar 
 
 Example of the Second. 
 
 lease 
 
 sleep 
 
 eye 
 
 squirrel 
 
 pride 
 
 fennel 
 
 shape 
 
 he did cut 
 
 cut 
 
 copse 
 
 let us cut 
 
 tailor 
 
 kind of embroidery 
 
 Neul-ly 
 
 cail-lou-ta-ge 
 
 mer-veil-leux 
 
 œil-la-de . 
 
 Guil-lau-me 
 
 or-gueil-leux* 
 
 gri-bouil-let-te 
 
 ga-zouil-le-ment 
 
 bar-bouil-lage 
 
 chu-mail-lis 
 
 o-reil-le 
 
 pé-ril 
 
 pé-ril-leux 
 
 oil-le 
 
 ira-bro-glio 
 
 pebhle-worf 
 wonderful 
 glance 
 IVilliam 
 proud 
 scr ambit 
 warbling 
 scrawl 
 squabble 
 car 
 
 danger 
 danger oiu 
 olio' 
 intricacy 
 
 As the pronunciation of this letter is attended with 
 some difficulty, observe that the final syllables, ail, til. 
 œil, euil, ueil, and ouiU are always liquid ; so are in any 
 situation aill, till, œill, euill, ueill, and ouill, followed bv 
 ;a vowel, as is seen in the list of examples just given. 
 
 * There is a perceptible difference between the vowel 
 sound of the second syllable of orgueil and orgueilleux : 
 the former is pronounced like œil, aûd the latter like the 
 .second syllable of sommeil. 
 
 L final, preceded simply by i, is liquid in some fev 
 words, of which the following is nearly a list ; avril, 
 ôabil, Brésil, cil, gril, grésil, péril, and gentil t when 
 before a vowel, though in some even of these the / i^' 
 occasionally dropped in familiar conversation ; in other 
 
Ojt the FKurrcH TOHeuc* SfS 
 
 words of this termination, the I is usually suppressed» as 
 in fusil, outil, chenil, &c. pronounced fusi, outi, chenu 
 
 In \\fils a son, or sons, the I is mute ; but in Jil, Jilu 
 thread, threads, it is always heard, but is not liquid. 
 
 The same remark applies to poil, pronounced poèl, the 
 hair of an animal, and to il the personal pronoun ; in 
 the plural of this latter Us the I is sometimes rejected 
 and sometimes pronounced, though the first mode is pre- 
 ferable. 
 
 Observe that Milhaut, Pardalhac, and Sully, proper 
 names, are pronounced liquid, contrary to the establish- 
 ed rule, and that the two latter are nearly the only known 
 instances of an I or // sounded liquid, without being im- 
 mediately preceded by the vowel z. 
 
 Ill, in the middle of a word, is generally liquid, there 
 being no exceptions of this rule but those words which 
 begin immediately by ill, as illegal, illuminer, &c. and 
 the following, distiller, instiller, osciller, scintiller, imi- 
 ter, vaciller, fritillaire, imbécille, mille, tranquille, with 
 their derivatives and inflections when verbs, and -ville with 
 its compounds, as also Achille, campanille, codicille, fi 
 Grille, Gille, maxillaire, pupille, la Sibylle, and sille. 
 
 In most of these exceptions // are both sounded, as 
 well as in several other words, in which these letters are 
 preceded by other vowels, as allégorie, allusion, appel- 
 latif, appellation, belligérant, belliqueur, collation de 
 bénéfices, follicule, malléole, velléité, collusion, constella- 
 tion, constellé, ebullition, Gallican, Gallicisme, intellect. 
 &c. malléable, médullaire, palliatif, pellicule, équipoller. 
 hellénisme, and in proper names, as Apollon, Bellone, Do- 
 "abella, Pallas, Sylla, &c. 
 
 M, m, corresponds in sound with the same letter in 
 English. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mar-me-la-de marmalade mo-mie mummy 
 
 raar-mot-te marmot mo-ment moment 
 iué-mo-ra-ble memorable Mus-sul-man Mussulman 
 
 mir-mi-don myrmidon mur-mu-re murmur 
 
 mi-mi-que immic mys-tè-re mystery 
 
n 
 
 raj* sQUjxua 
 
 * ' 
 
 M, though usually sounded in the middle of worcte 
 before n, as in amnistie, calomnie, hymne , insomnie, som~ 
 aambule, automnal, is yet mute in damner, and its deri- 
 vatives, and in the substantive automne. 
 
 When double, only one of these letters is usually 
 sounded, except, 1st. in proper names, as, Em-manuel ; 
 2dly, in words beginning with imm, as im-mortel. 
 
 In words in which em is followed by m, as emmencher ; 
 it is pronounced like an, with the nasal sound. 
 
 When this letter is final, see tables first and second 
 'p. 4 and 5), and the accompanying observations (p. 8 
 and 9), where we necessarily, in part, discussed the na- 
 ture of this letter. 
 
 N, n, has the same sound as in English. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 \-na-nas pine-appîe non-ne nun 
 
 N T é-nu-far Nenuphar non-obs-tant notwithstanding 
 
 ia-ti-o-nal national Ni-ni-ye Nineveh 
 
 lo-mi-nal nominal noc-tur-ne nocturnal 
 
 'îo-na-gé-nai-re a man of ninety nyra-phe nymph 
 
 When n follows the letter g, seegn (p. 22). 
 
 JVis often nasal, see table I. (p. 4), and table EL 
 (p. 5), and our observations (p. 8 and 9). 
 
 JV takes the sound of s in monsieur, pronounced mos* 
 sieu* 
 
 N after e before t final in the third person plural of* 
 any French verb is constantly silent, and the e is mute 3 
 as ils consentent au marché, ils aimaient à rire, ils lurent 
 un chapitre ; here the final t is only sounded before a 
 vowel. 
 
 When n is doubled, one onïy is generally pronounced, 
 ■except in an-nexe, an-nal, an-nuel, an-notation, an-nuler, 
 in-nty in-nové, in-novation, and a few other cases. 
 
 P, ;>, is sounded as in English. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 butterfly pou-pée doll 
 
 pippm po-pu-lai-re popular 
 
 mean fellow pour-pre purple 
 
 principle pur-pu-rin purplisft 
 
 discourse py-ra-mi-de pyramid 
 
 Va-pil-lon 
 
 pe-pin 
 
 jpied-plat 
 
 Vrin-ci-pe 
 
 pro-pos 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 S? 
 
 P followed by h has the sound of/, as philos opke } photo- 
 phore, physique. 
 
 P preserves its sound in the middle of a word, as in 
 adapter, adopter, capter, captieux, baptismal, aptitude, 
 exception , exemption, inepte, contempteur, gypse* $ e P m 
 tembre, Septuagésime, corruption, rupture, apsides, rap* 
 sodies, symptôme, 
 
 But it is not heard in baptême, baptiser, baptistairc* 
 Baptiste, cheptel, exempt, exempter, sculpter, sculpteur, 
 sculpture, je romps, il corromp, sept, septième, temps, et 
 printemps, nor in prompt, prompte, and its derivatives. 
 
 Final p is always sounded in Mep, cap, Gap, jalap t 
 and julep, it is also heard in trop, beaucoup, when be- 
 fore a vowel, but never in champ, camp, drap, loup, si- 
 rop, and galop. 
 
 In laps, relaps, and rapt, both the final consonants are 
 pronounced, but neither in ceps de vigne. 
 
 When p is doubled, only one is generally sounded ; 
 however, in such words as lippitude, hippocentaure, hip- 
 popotame, Hippomène, Agrippa, Agrippine, Philippiqucs, 
 and Hippias, both are distinctly heard. 
 
 Q, q, has generally the hard sound of h in king. 
 As this letter is constantly followed by the vowel u, ex- 
 cept in cinq, and coq, we shall simply remark v that 
 
 Ç k, by far the most general before 
 
 any vowel. 
 \ kou before a in some particular 
 
 words. 
 {,ku before e, or i in some others 
 
 Qw has three sounds, 
 that of 
 
 Qua! 
 
 qua-li-té 
 
 quel-que 
 
 qui-con-que 
 
 qui-pro-quo 
 
 quo-li-bet 
 
 quin-qui-na 
 
 qae-nouil-le 
 
 Examples of k. 
 
 wharf 
 
 quality 
 
 some 
 
 whosoever 
 
 blunder 
 
 pun 
 
 Peruvian bark 
 
 distaff 
 
 ques-tion 
 sé-ques-tre 
 queue 
 a-queux 
 a-qué-duc 
 é-qui-vo-que 
 se re-quin- 
 quer 
 
 fee. fee. «c. 
 4 
 
 question 
 
 sequestration 
 
 tail 
 
 watery 
 
 aqueduct 
 
 ambiguity 
 \$to trick ones\ 
 S\ out 
 
& 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 A-qua-ti-que 
 
 é-qua-teur 
 
 é-qua-ti-on 
 
 qua-kre 
 
 qua-dra-tu-re 
 
 qua-dri-ge 
 
 qua-dru-pé-de 
 qua-dru-ple 
 
 Examples of fcow. 
 
 qua-ter-ne 
 qua-dra-gé- ? 
 nai-re > 
 qua-dra-gé- £ 
 
 aquatic 
 
 equator. 
 
 equation 
 
 quaker 
 
 quadrature si-mal 
 
 i ancient cha~ a-qua-ti-le 
 
 < riot with a-qua-reMe 
 
 ( four horses li-qua-ti-on 
 
 quadruped in-quar-to 
 
 quadruple lo-qua-ci-té 
 
 Examples of ku. 
 
 quaternion 
 a man oj forty 
 
 quadragesimal 
 
 aquatile 
 aqualinta 
 liquation 
 quarto size 
 loquacity 
 
 E-ques-tre equestrian 
 
 Ik/ue-fac-ti-on liquefaction 
 qiitos-teur quesior 
 
 ques-tu-re questure 
 
 quin-quen-nium quenquennium 
 
 équi-la-tè-re ^°f e ? ual < 
 
 <i-qui-la-té-ral 
 
 é-qui-an-gle 
 
 é-qui-dis-tant 
 
 5 tons 
 equilateral 
 equiangular 
 equidistant 
 
 é-qui-mul-ti-ple 
 
 c-qui-ta-ti-on 
 
 quin-tu-plc 
 
 quin-ti-le 
 
 quin-quen-nal 
 
 quin-dé-cem-virs 
 
 quin-qué-rè-me 
 
 quin-quer-ce 
 
 equimultiple 
 horsemanship 
 quintuple 
 quintile 
 quinquennial 
 quindecemviri 
 ancient galley 
 a term of the 
 ancient gym- 
 nasium 
 
 In quinquagénaire, a man of fifty, and quinquagésime, 
 quinquagesima, the first sellable corresponds with the 
 sound of qu in équestre, and the second corresponds with 
 the sound of qu in aquatique. This letter is never 
 doubled. 
 
 R, r, is sounded as in English, but much stronger. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ra-re-tê 
 
 ras-su-rer 
 
 ra-bou-gri 
 
 re-brous-ser 
 
 ri-gou-reiix 
 
 rom-pre 
 
 rou-vri«* 
 
 ru-gir 
 
 ru-ral 
 
 tus-tre 
 
 R is always sounded at the end of words after the 
 
 scarcity 
 
 rhyth-mc 
 
 rhythm 
 
 to hearten 
 
 sour-dre 
 
 to spring 
 
 stunted 
 
 cour-roux 
 
 wrath 
 
 to turn back 
 
 il-cou-ra 
 
 he ici II ru.. 
 
 rigorous 
 
 cor-ro-de-ra 
 
 ■it will corrode 
 
 to break 
 
 to open again 
 
 cor-ro-bo-re-ra 
 
 ) it will cono 
 I borate 
 
 to roar 
 
 ir-ra-di-u-ti-on 
 
 irradiation 
 
 rural 
 
 ir-ro-rR-li-on 
 
 irrigation 
 
 a boor 
 
 tor-re-iac-ti-on 
 
 torréfaction 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, 
 
 2$ 
 
 /owels, a, i, o, u, except in Monsieur > pronounced, as we 
 have said, Mos-sieu. 
 
 Er, in the following adjectives and substantives, con- 
 stantly rhymes with air, which is pronounced alike in 
 'both lançuaçes. 
 
 ultramarine 
 
 belvidere 
 
 Lucifer 
 
 the Lord's prayer 
 
 ignorant medical ; 
 
 practitioner 
 village school-mas 
 
 ter 
 Stadiholder 
 Jupiter 
 Algiers 
 Gessner 
 Niger, a river 
 Sadder, a holy boo 
 
 of the Persians 
 
 In all other substantives, ending in er, the r is silent; 
 and the e pronounced close and short as in clarté. 
 
 When the following adjectives and a few others pre- 
 cede immediately a substantive which they qualify, if 
 this begins with a vowel, the r is pronounced, but in nc 
 other case. 
 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Cher 
 
 aear 
 
 ou-tre-mer 
 
 cuil-ler 
 
 spoon 
 
 bel-vé-der 
 
 fer 
 
 iron 
 
 Lu-ci-fer 
 
 ver 
 
 worm 
 
 Pa-ter 
 
 mer 
 
 sea 
 
 fra-ter 
 
 iier 
 
 haughty 
 
 
 gas-ter 
 hi-er 
 
 stomach 
 yesterday 
 
 raa-gister 
 
 hi-ver 
 
 winter 
 
 Stat-hou-der 
 
 a-mer 
 
 bitter 
 
 Ju-pi-ter 
 
 ean-cer 
 
 cancer 
 
 Ai-ger 
 
 en-fer 
 
 hell 
 
 Gess-ner 
 
 é-ther 
 
 ether 
 
 Ni-ger 
 
 a-vant-hier 
 
 < the day before 
 
 Sad-der 
 
 yesterday 
 
 R sounded 
 
 R not sounded. 
 
 ' Le premier acte the first act 
 
 I son dernier ouvrage his last work 
 
 un singulier événement a singular event 
 I un entier abandon an entire cession 
 
 [ un léger obstacle a slight obstacle 
 
 Il est le premier à vous permettre et le dernier <x 
 vous tenir parole. — He is the first to promût 
 and the last to keep his word. 
 C'est un homme léger et inconstant, entier en 
 tout ce qu'il veut, et singulier en tout ce qu'il 
 fait- — He is a light versatile character, positive 
 in alt he undertakes, and singular in all ht 
 does. 
 
 Final r in the present of the infinitive of all the verbs 
 .<af the first conjugation, is always pronounced when im- 
 
r 
 
 30 
 
 THE SOUNDS . 
 
 mediately followed by a word beginning with a vowel 
 when the style is dignified, but in conversation this dis 
 tinction is seldom observed. 
 
 Rh. See h (p. 23), 
 
 When this letter is double, only one is pronounced., 
 except, 1st. in aberration, abhorrer , horreur, errer, tor- 
 réfier, and their derivatives ; 2dly, in words beginning 
 with irr, as irrévocable, irrégulier, irruption, &c. ; 3dly, 
 in the future and conditional of the verbs acquérir, cou- 
 rir, mourir, and their derivatives — j'acquer-rai, je mour^ 
 rais 3 nous cour-ri-ons, &c. 
 
 
 S> s, has two ) hard, as in the Eng!ish word sister » 
 sounds, the $ soft, as in rose and please* 
 In the following list of words the first s has the hard : 
 and the second the soft sound. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF BOTH SOUNDS 
 
 Sai-son 
 
 sai-sie 
 
 sé-sa-me 
 
 si-se 
 
 Sou-bi-se 
 
 sot-ti-se 
 
 season 
 
 seizure 
 
 sesamum 
 
 situate 
 
 Soubise 
 
 •silly action ' 
 
 sour-noi-se 
 
 sup-po-sez 
 
 sé-dui-sant 
 
 Su-se 
 
 suein 
 
 Sy-ra-cu-se 
 
 ,„ f ô « f« ï mental réserva- Syu-thè-se 
 sous-en-ten-te < .. ' 
 
 v 
 
 a sullen woman 
 
 suppose 
 
 alluring 
 
 Susa 
 
 quarter-deck 
 
 Syracuse 
 
 Synthesis 
 
 , S has uniformly the hard sound at the beginning of 
 words, except in Sbire, Svelte, Sganareile and Sdili for 
 Dêlos, where it has the soft sound ; and in familiar con» 
 versation aller à Sedan ; il est le second de sa classe, art 
 pronounced as if these words were written azdan, h 
 zgon. Before ch, s is mute, as in Schall, Schafflious*. 
 Schelling, Schis-e, Schorl. 
 
 Sh in shérif, a sheriff, is sounded as in English. 
 
 When s is followed by ce % ci, cy % the sound of onk 
 one of these consonants is heard, as in scène, science, 
 Scythie, &c. except, however, in aces-cence, convales- 
 cence, ejfervcs-cence, efflores-cence, tvrges-cence, incan- 
 de3-cence } réminiscence, rcsipis-cence, mis-cible r re* 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE. 31 
 
 infer, sus-ception, sus-citer, sus-citation, vis-cère, vis- 
 ceral, trans-cendance, and a few others, where s cannot 
 be rescinded without altering the pronunciation. In all 
 other combinations, sc takes the sound of sk, as scapu- 
 r aire, scolie, sclérotique, scribe, esclave, scrupule, &c. 
 
 S preserves the hard sound in the middle of a word, 
 when preceded or followed by a consonant, as in transe. 
 transir , Transylvanie, convulsion, valse, espace, usten- 
 sile, statistique, &c. &c. However it takes the soft 
 sound, or that of z in Alsace, Arsace, Asdrubal, asbeste, 
 balsamine, balsamique, bisbille, Israël Israélite, Esdras. 
 InisbC, presbitère, transaction, transiger, transitoire, 
 intransitif, transalpin, Lesbos, Isboseth, Brisgaw, Rys* 
 :cick, Louisbourg, Augsbourg, Presbourg, Philipsbourg* 
 and some few others. 
 
 S takes the soft sound when between two vowels, as 
 in base, thèse, bise, rose, ruse, &c. Except in com- 
 pound words, where it preserves the hard sound of the 
 initial s of its root ; as in désuétude, entresol, mono- 
 syllabe, polysyllabe, parasol, tournesol, préséance, pré 
 supposer, resaisir, resaluer, vraisemblable? and some de- 
 rivatives, 
 
 Se final, see final t (p. 33.) 
 
 Final s is always heard in as, atlas, argus, bibus. 
 us, bolus, agjius, fœtus, calus, sinus, Phébus, les us. 
 virus, en sus, aloes, bis, jadis, iris, gratis, lapis, le lis, 
 :a Lys (a river), inaïs, métis, vis } tournevis, Amadis. 
 Adonis, Paris, (the shepherd), pathos, Athos, I^esbos, 
 Minos, Délos, Paros, Brutus, Vénus, Régulus, Protésilas, 
 Bias, Gil Bias, Las Casas, and many more foreign pro- 
 per namc3. 
 
 In almost all other cases final s is silent when the nexi 
 word begins with a consonant, as au moins vous ne pou- 
 vez pas dire, que je vous répète toujours les mêmes 
 'hoses ; but it generally takes the soft sound of z before 
 another word, beginning with a vowel or h mute, as aurez 
 vous au moins alors assez de patience, pour, &c. 
 
 Though there is no s, in quatre, yet, before y eaux itis r 
 ;n conversation, pronounced as if ending in that letter. 
 
 4* 
 
32 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 Finally, $$ have generally the sound of a single s pro- 
 nounced hardy as in je ressassasse, assassinasse, Mis- 
 sissippi, &c. ; except in some few words, where both 
 are heard, assation, assonance, dissonance, accessible, 
 inaccessible, admissible, inadmissible, missive, scissile, 
 scission, scissure, fissure, fissipède, assentiment, asservir 
 Thus there is a difference in pronunciation between 
 4hese phrases : C'est un homme à sentimens ; il aime 
 à servir ses amis ; and il faut son assentiment 
 cet ambitieux voudrait asservir l'univers ; and again 
 between Palun de plume est scissile and la sicile es: 
 une île triangulaire, &c the double ss must be distinctly 
 heard. 
 
 [first, hard, as in the English 
 r ; t, has two sounds, i word tit, 
 
 the j second, soft, like c in cedar and 
 
 \ civil. 
 
 FIRST SOUXD. 
 
 Examples of t hard before vowels and diphthongs 
 
 Tac-ti-que 
 
 tactics 
 
 ti-are 
 
 •es-ta-teur 
 
 testator 
 
 basti-on 
 
 thé-à-tre 
 
 theatre, 
 
 ques-ti-on 
 
 to-ta-li té 
 
 totality 
 
 mix-ti-on 
 
 tour-te-rel-fc} 
 
 tar tit dove 
 
 com-bus-ti-on 
 
 ti-tu-lai-re 
 
 titulary 
 
 bi-jou-tier 
 
 li-thy-nia-le 
 
 tithymal 
 
 Ma-thi-as 
 
 chré-tien 
 
 christian 
 
 Pon-thieu 
 
 dy-nas-tie 
 
 dynasty 
 
 tu sou-tiens 
 
 ie tiea 
 
 thine 
 
 &c. &c. Sec. 
 
 
 SECOND SOUKD. 
 
 tiara 
 
 bastion 
 
 question 
 
 mixture 
 
 combustion 
 
 jeweller 
 
 Mathias 
 
 I J onthieu 
 
 ihou supporlesi 
 
 Tis soft before /, connected with some other follow- 
 ing vowel or vowels, in some particular words, that ajç 
 given as exceptions to ih? first sound of i. 
 
 i 
 
OF TUE FBENCB TOSGUË, 
 
 44 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Par-tï-at 
 
 par-ti-a-li-té 
 
 par-tiel 
 
 pa-ti-en-ce 
 
 im-pa-ti-en-ce 
 
 quorti-ent 
 
 cap-ti-eux 
 
 ar-gu-tie 
 
 cau-ti-on-ne-ment bail 
 
 partial 
 
 partiality 
 
 partial 
 
 patience 
 
 impatience 
 
 quotient 
 
 captious 
 
 cavil 
 
 ac-ti-on 
 bal-bu-U-er 
 ia-i-ti-er 
 bal-bu-ti-a 
 • bal-bu-tie-ment 
 in-i-ti-e 
 in-i-ti-a-ti-on 
 Ve-ni-ti-en 
 se pré-cau-ti-on- 
 ner 
 
 action 
 to stammer 
 to initiate 
 he stuttered 
 stammering 
 initiated 
 initiation 
 Venetian 
 to be cautious, 
 
 Sti, xti, thi, preserve invariably the first sound of t be- 
 fore any letter. 
 
 v To complete this second list, observe that t always 
 takes the sound of c— 1st. In all adjectives ending in 
 -tial, Axel, 'tient, -lieux, and their derivatives ;— 2djy» 
 In all the inflexions of the two verbs quoted, balbutier. 
 and initier ; — 3dly, in several hundred words ending in 
 tion, when Hon is not immediately preceded by an s, 01 
 an x ; and finally, in the following additional list of 
 words, ending in -tie and -tien, viz. the substantives 
 calvitie, facétie, impéntie, inertie, minutie, péripétie, 
 primatie, prophétie, suprématie, aristocratie, démocra- 
 tie, théocratie ; in the names of countries, as Béotie, 
 Croatie, Dalmatie, Galatie ; and of nations, or per- 
 sons, as Béotien, Egyptien, Capétien, Dioclétien, Demi- 
 tien, Gratien, Le Titien, and some few others. 
 
 T final is always sounded in apt, rapt, fat, malt, 
 mat, pat, opiat, exeat, transeat, vivat, spoilt, spath, Goli- 
 ath, net, fret, tacct, Thibet, aconit, déficit, granit, introït, 
 prétérit, transit, subit, dot, Attaroth, azimut, brut, com~ 
 put, chut, bismuth, induit, luth, lut, occiput, sinciput, and 
 both 5 and t are articulated in Le Christ, Vest (east), 
 Vouest, Brest, lest, test, Pest, toast, and entre le zist et le 
 zest ; but neither of these letters is heard in Jésus Christ, 
 which is pronounced Jésu Cri. 
 
 T final is likewise generally heard, when the follow- 
 ing word begins with a vowel or h mute, as c'est un petit 
 homme, &c. &c. ; however, there are many words in 
 which it always remains silent, as mort, tcrt, goitt, 
 
 
34 THE SOUNDS 
 
 ^ourt, bat, maty lit, respect, instinct, navel, assassinat. 
 artichaut, défaut, debout, brûlot, statut, &c. so that a 
 person would almost be regarded with astonishment 
 who should affectedly sound it in these sentences : 
 L'assaut a été terrible. — Le contrat est signé et le dépo f 
 est chez moi.—Le gigot est cuit et le ragoût aussi. — Avant 
 de pêcher mettez V appât à la ligne. — J'ai fait un b or 
 marché; voyez, V achat est là; such a pronuneiatioh 
 would be barbarous and often equivocal. 
 
 T is always silent in the conjunction et, pronounced <?'. 
 therefore to avoid what is called hiatus in French verse, 
 this word is never placed before a vowel. 
 
 For words ending in c£ see page ,8. 
 
 When this letter is doubled, only one is heard, except 
 in atticisme, attique, Atticus, battologie, guttural, and pit- 
 toresque. 
 
 V, v, has the same sound in French as in English. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Val-ve 
 
 valve 
 
 vi-vre 
 
 to live 
 
 val-vu-le 
 
 valvule 
 
 vi-vo-ter 
 
 to live poorh, 
 
 vau-de-vil-lç 
 
 ballad 
 
 vi-re-vol-te 
 
 j quick ivregi 
 I lar walk 
 
 ver-ve 
 
 poetic firs, 
 
 vi-re-veau 
 
 windlass 
 
 vi-va-ce 
 
 vivacious 
 
 veu-ve 
 
 widow 
 
 vis-à-vis 
 
 opposite 
 
 veu-va-ge 
 
 icidowhood 
 
 This letter, when doubled, is represented by the 
 character w, which is met with in some foreign words, 
 and is always pronounced as a simple B,as in Wigh, 
 Wolfram, Warwick, Windsor, Walcourt, Wallon, War- 
 sovie, Westphalia, Wi Sternberg, Wolga, Weser, Wcndover, 
 Ryswick. &c. except in wist and wiski\ where it has the 
 English sound ; but in Newton, the first syllable new is 
 pronounced as ncu in weMtralité. 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE* 
 
 35 
 
 X, x, has the 
 different sounds of 
 
 „ k$, in axe, expense 
 \ gz, in exhibit, exhale 
 
 k, in excellent, exsiccative 
 ss, in bliss, mossy 
 z, in Xenophon* 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 
 Ax-e 
 
 sex-e 
 ri-xe 
 box-er 
 hi-xe 
 
 Of the first sound, ks. 
 
 axis 
 sex 
 
 altercation 
 to box 
 luxury 
 
 A-lex-an-dre 
 
 Xan-tip-pe 
 
 ox-y-gè-ne 
 
 pa-ra-do-xe 
 
 flu-xi-on 
 
 Alexander 
 
 Xantippe 
 
 oxygen 
 
 paradox 
 
 defluxion 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Of the second sound, gz. 
 
 Xa-vier Xaverius. ex-a-men 
 
 Xé-no-phon Xenophon ex-au-cer < 
 
 ex-il exile ex-haus-ser 
 
 ex-or-de exordium ex-hi-ber 
 
 ex-u-bé-ran-ce exuberance ex-hu-mer 
 
 examination 
 to hear favoura» 
 
 bly 
 to raise 
 to produce 
 to disinter 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Ex-cé-der 
 cx-cel-ler 
 ex-cès 
 ex-cep-ter 
 
 ex-ci-se 
 
 Of the third sound, k. 
 
 to exceed 
 to excel 
 excess 
 to except 
 
 excise 
 
 ex-sic-ca-ti-on 
 ex-suc-ci-on 
 ex-su-da-ti-on 
 éx-su-der 
 
 ex-ci-per 
 
 exsiccation 
 
 exsuction 
 
 exsudation 
 
 exude 
 ; to plead an ex* 
 I ception 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Of the fourth sound, ss. 
 
 Ait Aix Soixante Sixty 
 
 Aix-la-Chapelle Aix-la-Chapelle Bruxelles 'Brussels 
 
 ^uxerre Auxerre Luxeuil Luxeuil 
 
 Aaxonnc Auxomxe and some few more. J 
 
ss 
 
 THE SOUNDS 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Of the fifth sound, z. 
 Deuxième second dix ecus ten crown* 
 
 sixième sixth dix hommes ten men 
 
 dixième tenth deux aunes two ells 
 
 dix-huit eighteen beaux yeux fine eyes 
 
 dix-neuf nineteen &c. &c. 
 
 The first sound of this letter ks is by far the most ge 
 neral. 
 
 The second sound gz takes place in all words begin 
 ning with x or ex followed by a vowel, or the letter h. 
 as le Xanthe, Xénocrates, Ximents, exorable, and seve- 
 ral others with those already mentioned in the second ex- 
 emplification. 
 
 The third sound k is limited to words beginning with 
 exce, exci, and exs. 
 
 The fourth sound ss is only found in the above quota- 
 tions, and in six and dix when unaccompanied by sub 
 stantives, as in de seize ôtez six, reste dix, where six and 
 dix are pronounced with the hissing sound of ss in the 
 English word bliss. 
 
 Fina} x is generally pronounced as z, when the nexf 
 word begins with a vowel or !i mute, otherwise it is 
 silent, as // est heureux auprès de vous, et malheureux 
 loin de vous : le flux et reflux de la mer, &c. except in 
 the following words, where it has always the sound of 
 lis. Jljax, Astianax, borax, storax, Halifax, Hippo- 
 nax, Dax, climax, thorax, Pertinax, Syphax, index, per- 
 plex, Beatrix, Erix, Felix , prefix, phénix, Fox, Palafox, 
 Coysevox, lynx, sphinx, larynx, syrinx, onyx, Styx, am. 
 Pollux. 
 
 N. B. X takes the sound of sh only in Don Quixote. 
 generally pronounced Don Kishot, or rallier ghishot. 
 
 Z, z, is generally pronounced as 
 rose. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Zi-za-nic tare zig-zag 
 
 ié-nith seniih zin-zo-Iin 
 
 ,'ô-ne ro::e Zuy 
 
 z in zone, or 5 n 
 
 zigzag 
 
 reddish purph 
 Zvydt: 
 
OF THE FRENCH TONGUE, &J 
 
 Except some few words, as assez, chez, nez, sonnez •, 
 two sixes), and some proper names, as Alvarez, Sua- 
 rez, Metz, Senez, Rkodez, &c. z final is the distinctive 
 mark of almost all the second persons plural in the 
 French verbs, where it is generally heard, when followed 
 by a word beginning with a vowel, or h mute, otherwise 
 it is only sounded in the proper names already mentioned. 
 Z is doubled in a few words taken from the Italian Ian» 
 guage, as lazzi, (dumb show), mezzanine, mezzo termine, 
 mezzo-tinto, and in some names of towns, or provinces 3 
 as Arezzo, VAbruzze, &c. 
 
 OP GENDER, 
 
 Gender in all languages marks the distinction of sex,, 
 and as there are only two of these, the French agree- 
 ably to this view have but two genders, the masculine 
 and feminine : the neuter they do not admit. 
 
 The masculine gender expresses the male kind, as un 
 homme, a man ; un lion, a lion. 
 
 The feminine gender denotes the female kind, as une 
 femme, a woman ; une lionne, a lionness. 
 
 The gender of nouns, in inanimate objects, is gene- 
 rally expressed by their termination ; thus, final e mute 
 is the distinctive mark of the feminine gender, every 
 other final letter is the sign of the masculine. This 
 would be an excellent rule, were it universal ; but 
 this is far from being the case from the number of ex- 
 ceptions, and it is with the intention of affording the learn- 
 er a tolerable clue on this head, that we have here laid 
 down the following concise rules, which will clear up 
 some of the chief difficulties. 
 
ib 
 
 THE GENDERS 
 
 A TABLE OF SUBSTANTIVES 
 
 That are Masculine in one signification, and Feminine in 
 another. 
 
 Masculine, 
 
 Assistant, helper 
 eagle ; a great genius 
 an angel 
 an alder-tree 
 barb, a Barbary horse 
 
 bard, a poet 
 
 red-breast 
 
 a sort of privateer 
 
 a scroll, or ornament in 
 
 painting 
 a caravan, a hoy 
 
 cornet, a standard-bearer 
 
 a couple, a man and wife 
 
 Croat, a Croatian soldier 
 
 a crape 
 
 an echo, the return of 
 sound 
 
 ensign,a standard-bear- 
 er 
 
 example, model, instance 
 
 a gimlet, a piercer 
 
 a large tun 
 
 keeper, warden 
 
 hoar-frost 
 
 the rolls, a register 
 gules in heraldry 
 guide, director 
 heliotrope, sunflower 
 iris, the rainbow 
 
 of the eye 
 lacker, a kind of varnish 
 a book 
 
 a hat of otter's hair 
 handle of a tool 
 a labourer 
 memoir; a bill 
 thanks 
 
 r ; iris > 
 
 Aide 
 aigle 
 ange 
 aune 
 barbe 
 
 barde 
 
 berce 
 câpre 
 
 cartouche 
 
 coche 
 
 cornette 
 
 couple 
 cravate 
 crêpe 
 
 cho 
 
 enseigne 
 
 exemple 
 foret 
 foudre 
 garde 
 
 givre 
 
 greffe 
 gueule 
 guide 
 héliotrope 
 
 iris 
 
 laque 
 
 livre 
 
 loutre 
 
 manche 
 
 manœuvre 
 
 mémoire 
 
 merci 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 Aid, help, support 
 a Roman standard 
 a kind of thornback 
 an ell, a sort of measure 
 beard 
 
 a slice of bacon ; 
 horse-armour 
 cow-parsnip 
 caper, an acid pickle 
 
 cartouch, cartridge 
 
 a notch ; a sow 
 a woman's head- dress wheii 
 in dishabille 
 a brace, a pair, two of a sort 
 a cravat, a neckcloth 
 a pancake 
 
 Echo, a nymph 
 
 a sign post 
 
 a copy for writing 
 a wood, a forest 
 lightning, thunderbolt 
 watch ; hilt ; nurse 
 a snake, or serpent (in he* 
 raldry) 
 a" graft 
 
 the mouth of beasts 
 rein, for governing a horse 
 heliotrope; jasper 
 
 S sprig-crystal ; a proper 
 name 
 acca, gum-lac 
 a pound 
 an otter 
 
 a sleeve ; English channel 
 the working of a ship 
 memory 
 pity, mercy 
 
 N. B. Of this table it is to be remarked, that the French word stands in the 
 ruddle column, and its signification on the right hand and on the left. When 
 il has the meaning which stands on the left, it is masculine 3 when that which 
 stands to the right, it is feminine. 
 
OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 39 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 mood; mode 
 a pier, or mound 
 mould, cast, form 
 a ship-boy 
 
 the philosopher's stone 
 office, business ; prayers 
 ombre, a game at cards 
 page of a prince, Lc 
 a merry an drew 
 
 a hand's breadth 
 
 pantomime 
 
 easter, easter-day 
 
 a comparison 
 
 pendulum 
 
 ïe Perche, in France 
 
 summit, highest pitch 
 
 any body, nobody {a 
 
 pronoun) 
 ^pade, at cards 
 gnatsnapper, a bird 
 a plane-tree 
 a stove ; a canopy 
 post; a military station 
 punto at cards 
 purple colour; purples > 
 
 (a disease) > 
 
 a pretence 
 quadril at cards 
 the calling back a hawk 
 rest, relaxation 
 a glass coach 
 a sort of pear-tree 
 Satyr, a sylvan god 
 ^erpentarius 
 nap, slumber 
 a smile 
 a porter 
 
 holder, a book-keeper 
 a tour ; turn ; trick 
 triumph 
 trumpeter 
 épace 
 
 n vase, vessel 
 
 a bat of vigonia wool 
 a veil 
 
 Féminine. 
 
 mode 
 
 môle 
 
 moule 
 
 mousse 
 
 œuvre 
 
 office 
 
 ombre 
 
 page 
 
 paillasse 
 
 palme 
 
 j pantomime 
 pâaue 
 parallèle 
 pendule 
 perche 
 période 
 
 personne 
 
 pique 
 
 pivoine 
 
 plane 
 
 poêle 
 
 poste 
 
 ponte 
 
 pourpre 
 
 prétexte 
 
 quadrille 
 
 réclame 
 
 relâche 
 
 remise 
 
 sans-peau 
 
 satyre 
 
 serpentaire 
 
 somme 
 
 souris 
 
 suisse 
 
 teneur 
 
 tour 
 
 triomphe 
 
 trompette 
 
 vague 
 
 vase 
 
 vigogne 
 voile 
 
 fashion 
 
 mole, moon-calf 
 
 muscle, a shell-fish 
 
 moss, a plant 
 
 action; an author's works 
 
 pantry, larder, buttery 
 
 shade, shadow 
 
 page in a book 
 
 a straw -bed 
 
 ( the branch of a palm 
 
 I tree ; victory 
 
 a dumb show 
 
 the passover 
 
 a parallel line 
 
 a clock 
 
 pole ; perch, a fish 
 
 period, epocha 
 
 a person (a noun) 
 
 a pike 
 
 peony, a flower 
 
 plane, an instrument 
 
 a frying-pan 
 
 the post for letters 
 
 the laying of eggs 
 
 purple fish ; purple dye 
 
 prétexta [nament 
 
 party of horse in a tour- 
 
 acatch-word (in printing ) 
 
 harbour [tance 
 
 a coach-house ; a remit- 
 
 a sort of pear 
 
 a satire, a lampoon 
 
 snake-root, dragon's wort 
 
 sum; load; name of ari- 
 
 a mouse [ver 
 
 Switzerland 
 
 tenor, purport, content 
 
 tower ; rock at chess 
 
 a trump 
 
 trumpet 
 
 a wave, surge 
 
 J the slime in pond?. 
 
 I lakes, fee. 
 
 a vigon, a llama 
 
 a sail 
 
40 
 
 THE GENDERS 
 
 SUBSTANTIVES DENOTING SPECIES, 
 
 which have a fixed Gender independently of termination. 
 
 I 
 
 God, his angels, cherubim and seraphim, are of 
 masculine gender. 
 
 All terms seeming to constitute an appellation, and 
 all proper names of men and women are of the gen- 
 der of the sex to which they respectively belong, as 
 are likewise all names of animals, when the male is 
 distinguished from the female by a different denomi- 
 nation ; but when the same name is used for both 
 
 • male and female, as un éléphant, vn zèbre, une pan- 
 thère, un vautour, un cygne, une caille, une perdrix, 
 un barbeau, une truite, un congre, its gender must 
 then, like that of any inanimate object, be determin- 
 ed by its termination. Here the only difficulty re- 
 spects substantives ending in e mute, all the rest be- 
 ing of the masculine gender, with such exceptions a? 
 
 ^will be seen in page 45. 
 
 f All diminutives of animals, when there is but one 
 common denomination for both sexes, are of the 
 masculine gender, whatever may be the gender of 
 the original from which they are derived, as un lion- 
 ceau, un souriceau, un perdreau, un cornillas, un 
 corpillon, un couleuvreau, un vipéreau, un bécasseau. 
 
 ' &c. except une bécassine ; but these two latter, 
 although derived from the word bécasse, and belong- 
 ing to the genus, are not of the same species. In 
 other cases, the diminutives follow the gender their 
 sex indicates, as vu poulain, une pouliche, un cachet. 
 
 l^vne poulette. 
 
 ( Diminutives of inanimate objects more generally 
 follow the gender of their roots, as batelct, înaison- 
 yiette, globule, from bateau, maison, globe, &c. how- 
 ever, corhillon, soliveau, cruchon, savonnette, trous- 
 seau, from corbeille, solive, cruche, savon, and trous- 
 se, and many others do not. 
 
OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 41 
 
 " All the names of the days, months, and seasons of 
 the year, are of the masculine gender, except au- 
 tomne, which is of both genders ; when, however, 
 the diminutive mi (half) is prefixed to the name of a 
 month, the compound word then takes the feminine 
 gender, as la mi-mai, la mi-août, &c. except also la 
 mi-carême and saint- days, as la saint- Jean, la Tous- 
 saint, &c. 
 
 of trees, except yeuse, a sort of ^ 
 
 •v j 
 
 oak, 
 
 6 All names i 
 
 of shrubs, with some exceptions, 
 
 of metals, without exceptingp/a- 
 tine, formerly feminine. 
 
 of minerals, a few excepted, 
 
 are 
 t mascu- 
 line. 
 
 7 All names 
 
 of colours, without excepting 
 V Isabelle, le Feuille-morte, &c. 
 though they have a feminine 
 termination, 
 
 of mountains, except those" 
 chains which have no singular, 
 
 of winds, except la bise, la Ira- 
 montane, la brise, and les 
 moussons, 
 
 of towns, except those which 
 necessarily take the article la 
 before them, as la Rochelle, la 
 Ferté-sur-Aube, &c. and some 
 others. 
 
 are 
 
 mascL 
 line. 
 
48 THE GENDERS 
 
 Ç Ordinal, distributive and proportional numbers, 
 adjectives and infinitives of verbs, prepositions and 
 adverbs, all these, when used substantively, arc 
 masculine, as le tiers, le quart, un cinquième, le qua- 
 druple, le beau, le sublime, le boire, le manger, le 
 mieux, le pour, le contre, un parallèle (a compari- 
 son) t &c. except la moitié, and the elliptical forms 
 of speech, une courbe, une tangente, une perpendicu- 
 laire, une pur allele 9 une antique, used for une ligne 
 courbe, une ligne tangente, &c. Antique is feminine, 
 for the same reason ; the word médaille, or statut 
 
 ..appearing to be understood. 
 
 All names of virtues are of the feminine gender, 
 except courage, mérite. 
 
 S-! 
 
 GENDERS OF NOUNS MOSTLY DEPENDING ON THEIR 
 TERMINATION. 
 
 i It will be recollected that final e mute constitutes 
 10 c the feminine gender, and every other final letter the 
 ( masculine. 
 
 f All names of states,, empires, kingdoms, and 
 
 J provinces, are of the gender which their termi- 
 .", j nations indicate ; except le Bengale, le Mexique. 
 
 J le Péloponhe, le Maine, le Perche, le Rouergue, le 
 
 j Bigorre, le Vallage, la Franche-comté, and perhaps 
 
 La few more. 
 
 £ The names of fruits, grain, plants, and flowers. 
 \ follow pretty generally the gender of their termi- 
 " \ nations, but there are too many exceptions to be in 
 
 \ troduced here* 
 
OF THE FRENCH NOUNS. 
 
 43 
 
 TABLE 
 
 SHEWING THE GENDER OF ALL WORDS THAT DO NOT END IN 
 € MUTE. 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 il 
 
 40 
 
 15 
 30 
 
 10 
 
 200 
 
 6 
 3 
 
 i00 
 
 200 
 
 ( Aparté, arrêté, be- 
 
 I nédicité, comté, 
 
 { côté, été, pâté, 
 
 | traité, té, thé, 
 
 l^Léthé 
 
 ( alibj, biribi, lundi, 
 <• gui,' grand merci, 
 
 convoi, effroi, &c. 
 ( ergo, vertigo, indi- 
 ( go, &c. 
 
 $ fichu, cru, écu, tis- 
 ( su, hc. 
 
 S aloyau, anneau, &:c. 
 &c. 
 
 ( bref, chalef, chef. 
 ( fief, grief, relief 
 ( daim, essaim, abat 
 l faim 
 
 San, ban. cran, é- 
 cran, pan, £cc. 
 rbain, baise-main 
 | avant-main, garde 
 j main, tourne-main 
 j essuie-main, gain, 
 i frein, basin, &c. 
 
 ( scion, 
 l tion, I 
 
 bastion^ bes 
 xion 
 
 gabion, taudion 
 million, lion, ardé 
 lion, fourmilion, 
 trémion, capion, 
 turion, camion, 
 lampion, septen- 
 trion, brimborion, 
 gavion, &c. 
 
 -cion "\ 
 -sion ] 
 -tion l 
 -gion f 
 -nion ] 
 L -xion J 
 
 -bion "j 
 
 -dion f 
 
 -lion | 
 
 f -mion } 
 -pion 
 •rion 
 
 -vion J 
 
 { amitié, inimitié, ) 
 i moitié, pitié > 
 
 absurdité, beauté, \ 
 
 charité, cité, dig- f 
 
 nité, fidélité, gêné- ? 
 
 rosité, &c. k.c. \ 
 
 Fourmi, merci, ) 
 gagui, après-midi > 
 
 foi, loi, paroi 
 
 albugo, virago 
 
 bru, glu, tribu, 
 
 vertu 
 
 eau, peau, surpeau, 
 
 sans-peau 
 
 clef, nef, soif 
 faim, maîe-faim 
 maman 
 
 m, main, nonnam 
 
 succion, cession, 
 friction, gestion, 
 région, opinion, 
 réflexion, fluxion, 
 &c. &iC &c. 
 
 rébellion, dent-dç 
 lion, alluvion 
 
 ! 
 
 500 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 4 
 
 3 
 2 
 1 
 
 1100 
 
44 
 
 ÏHE GENDERS 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 8 
 
 75 
 
 4 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 150 
 
 70 
 
 15 
 
 12 
 
 700 
 
 250 
 
 alcyon, clayon, era 
 yon, rayon, sayon 
 trayon, lamproyon, 
 Araphictyons 
 
 brise-raison 
 
 ' peson, bison, gri 
 i son, groison, hori- 
 zon, tison, oison 
 I poison, contre-poi 
 son, buson 
 
 f basson, caisson, ca- 
 1 vesson, taisson, po- 
 ] isson, cosson, buis 
 ) son, frisson, héris- 
 % son, maudisson, 
 nourrisson, palis- 
 son, polisson, unis- 
 son, saucisson 
 
 Ç arcanson, échan- 
 ) son, tenson, pinson 
 
 ( charançon, caveçon 
 J pinçon, suçon, &c. 
 
 bridon. guéridon, &c. 
 
 j tendron, jeune tén- 
 ( dron, baron, kc. 
 
 J abattis, appentis, 
 l iris,. tourne-vis, &c. 
 
 ^ bois, mois, carquois, 
 ( harnois, &c. 
 
 C adent, chiendent. 
 ) liondent, claque- 
 \ dent, cure-dent, oc- 
 ( cident, trident, hc. 
 
 acharnement, as- 
 sortiment, &c. 
 
 'ballet, billet, bos- 
 quet, minuit, con- 
 duit, réduit, kc. bil- 
 lot, brûlot, complot, 
 &c. bout, goût, ra- 
 goût, &.C 
 
 -y on 
 
 -çon 
 
 -don 
 
 • ion 
 -ron 
 
 -dent ) 
 -gent \ 
 
 ornent 
 
 -et 
 -uit 
 -ot 
 •out 
 
 cargaison, &c. &x. 
 
 garnison, guérison, 
 prison, trahison, i 
 cloison,foison,moi- J 
 son, pâmoison, toi- 
 son, camuson 
 
 paisson, boisson, 
 moisson, cuisson, 
 salisson, mousson 
 
 chanson 
 
 façon, contrefaçon, 
 malfaçon, leçon, 
 rançon 
 dondon 
 
 laideron, souillon, 
 tatillon 
 
 brebis, souris, chau- 
 ve-souris, vis, iris 
 
 fois 
 
 dent, surdent, gent 
 jument 
 
 forêt, nuit, dot, glout 
 
■ 
 
 OF THE FRENCH NOUNS, 
 
 45 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 15 
 
 •20 
 
 40 
 
 900 
 
 ï faix, choix, cruci- 
 \ fix. prix, &c. taux, 
 | houx, courroux, é- 
 poux, he. 
 
 ' art, départ, chara- 
 | part, rempart, ef- 
 I fort, port, fort, to rt, 
 ' &c. 
 
 fer, ver, hiver, &c. 
 f air, éclair, &e. tour, 
 1 contour, four, &c 
 
 bonheur, malheur, 
 labeur, honneur, 
 déshonneur, cœur, 
 anticœur, crève- 
 cœur, chœur, chou- 
 fleur, pleurs, équa- 
 teur. secteur, Sic. 
 kc. &c. 
 
 } -eur 
 
 paix, croix, noix, 
 poix» voix, perdrix, 
 chaux, faux, toux 
 
 hart,part,mort,raa- j 
 lemort < 
 
 cuiller, mer, chair, ^ 
 cour, tour $ 
 
 aigreur, ampleur, ar- 
 deur, blancheur, can- 
 deur, chaleur, Chan- 
 deleur, clameur, cou- 
 leur, douceur, dou- 
 leur, épaisseur, er- 
 reur, fadeur, défa 
 veur, ferveur, fleur. 
 
 76 
 
 passe-fleur, sans fleur, fraîcheur, frayeur, froideur, fureur, gran- 
 deur, grosseur, hauteur, horreur, humeur, laideur, langueur, lar- 
 geur, lenteur» liqueur, longueur, lourdeur, lueur, maigreur, moi- 
 teur, noirceur, odeur, pâleur, pesanteur, peur, primeur, profon- 
 deur, puanteur, pudeur, impudeur, rigueur, roideur, rondeur, 
 rougeur, rousseur, rumeur, saveur, senteur, sœur, sauteur, splen^ 
 deur, sueur, teneur, terreur, tiédeur, torpeur, touffeur, tumeur, 
 valeur, non-valeur, vapeur, verdeur, vigueur, and mœurs ; be- 
 sides basseur, rancœur, trémeur, three words now obsolete, making 
 in the whole the number of seventy-six. 
 
 There are a great many proper names of females, which, 
 though they may not have the feminine termination, are of that 
 gender, as the learner, from their nature, will easily comprehend; 
 such are, among the heathens, Pallas, Cérès-, Thétis, Vénus, Ju- 
 non, Didon.êzc ; among christian names, Sarah* Deborah, Elisabeth, 
 Agnès, Szc. and many of these are contractions, as Fanchon for 
 Fanny, Lison, Louison, Marion, Manon, Nanon, Jeanneton, Ma- 
 delon, Tonton, Cataut, Margot, Goion, Babet, Babeau, Isabeau, 
 &c. [See Article 2. p. 40.] 
 
 As this list of exceptions will be found pretty accurate, all 
 other nouns, that belong to this termination, must be strictly conr 
 gidered as being of the masculine gender, since they are not enu- 
 merated in this Table, 
 
VOCABULARY 
 
 FRENCH AND ENGLISH. 
 
 j* In the following Vocabulary, the Gender has been affixe-. 
 only to those Nouns that are not comprised in the precedlnp- 
 Rules. 
 
 
 Of the Universe in General 
 
 
 Dieu 
 
 God 
 
 soleil 
 
 sun 
 
 créateur 
 
 creator 
 
 rayon du soleil 
 
 , sun-beam 
 
 Jésus -Christ 
 
 Jesus Christ 
 
 lune 
 
 moon 
 
 (rinité 
 
 trinity 
 
 éclipse 
 
 eclipse 
 
 Saint-Esprit 
 
 Holy Glmt 
 
 orage, m. 
 
 storm 
 
 ange 
 
 angel 
 
 tonnerre, m 
 
 thunder 
 
 archange 
 
 archangel 
 
 éclair 
 
 lightning 
 
 prophète 
 
 prophet 
 
 brouillard 
 
 M 
 
 messie 
 
 messiah 
 
 pluie 
 
 rain 
 
 sauveur 
 
 saviour 
 
 arc-en-ciel 
 
 rain-bou 
 
 rédempteur 
 
 redeemer 
 
 ondée 
 
 shower 
 
 Vierge-Marie 
 
 Virgin Mary 
 
 neige 
 
 snow 
 
 apôtre 
 
 apostle 
 
 grêle 
 
 hail 
 
 évangéllste 
 
 evangelist 
 
 glace 
 
 ice 
 
 martyr 
 
 martyr 
 
 gelée 
 
 frost 
 
 saint 
 
 saint 
 
 dégel 
 
 thaw 
 
 paradis 
 
 paradise. 
 
 rosée 
 
 dew 
 
 ciel 
 
 heaven 
 
 créature 
 
 creature 
 
 enfer 
 
 hell 
 
 globe, m. 
 
 globe 
 
 diable 
 
 devil 
 
 sphère 
 
 sphere 
 
 nature 
 
 nature 
 
 hémisphère, m 
 
 hemisphere 
 
 univers 
 
 universe 
 
 horizon 
 
 horizon 
 
 monde, m. 
 
 world 
 
 degré 
 
 degree 
 
 élément 
 
 element 
 
 longitude 
 
 longitude 
 
 terre 
 
 earth 
 
 latitude 
 
 latitude 
 
 eau 
 feu 
 
 water 
 fire 
 
 points cardi- 
 naux, pi 
 
 y cardinal point, 
 
 air 
 
 air 
 
 orienter est 
 
 east 
 
 firmament 
 
 sky 
 
 occident, or 
 
 > west 
 
 étoile 
 
 star 
 
 ouest 
 
 planète 
 
 planet g 
 
 septentrion, or 
 
 I north 
 
 comète 
 
 comet 
 
 nord 
 
 
 constellation 
 
 tonstellation 
 
 midi, or sud 
 
 south 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 47 
 
 climat 
 
 région 
 
 continent 
 
 Europe 
 
 Asie 
 
 Afrique 
 
 Amérique 
 
 empire, m. 
 
 royaume, m. 
 
 république 
 
 pays 
 
 colonie 
 
 principauté 
 
 électorat 
 
 province 
 
 comté 
 
 îïe 
 
 presqu'île 
 
 péninsule 
 
 chersonèse 
 
 cap. 
 
 promontoire^ 
 
 isthme, m. 
 
 montagne 
 
 mont 
 
 colline 
 
 sommet 
 
 pente, or 
 
 penchant 
 
 hauteur 
 
 vallée 
 
 vallon 
 
 abîme, m* 
 
 désert 
 
 plaine 
 
 marais 
 
 rive 
 
 rivage, m. 
 côte 
 rochers- 
 roche* 
 roc* 
 écueil* 
 banc* 
 
 y 
 
 climate 
 
 region 
 
 continent 
 
 Europe 
 
 Asia 
 
 Africa 
 
 America 
 
 empire 
 
 kingdom 
 
 republic 
 
 country 
 
 colony 
 
 principality 
 
 electorate 
 
 province 
 
 shire or county 
 
 island 
 
 peninsula 
 
 cape - 
 m, promontory 
 isthmus 
 mountain 
 mount 
 hill ; 
 summit 
 
 > declivity 
 
 eminence 
 
 valley 
 
 vale 
 
 abyss 
 
 desert 
 
 plain 
 
 marsh, or fen 
 ? bank (of a 
 5 river) 
 
 shore 
 
 coast 
 
 rock 
 
 rock 
 
 rock 
 
 shoal 
 
 ledge of rocks 
 
 récif* 
 
 brisans* 
 
 cime 
 
 pierre 
 
 pont 
 
 chaussée 
 
 gué 
 
 quai 
 
 route 
 
 sentier 
 
 fossé 
 
 gravier 
 
 sable, m. 
 
 sablon 
 
 poussière 
 
 océan 
 
 mer 
 
 golfe, m. 
 
 baie 
 
 rade 
 
 anse 
 
 canal 
 
 détroit. 
 
 courant 
 
 marée 
 
 flux 
 
 reflux 
 
 vague 
 
 flots, pi. or 
 
 ondes, pi. 
 
 havre, wi. 
 
 port 
 
 lac 
 
 rivière 
 
 fleuve^m. 
 
 embouchure 
 
 ruisseau 
 débordement 
 déluge, m. 
 inondation 
 
 écluse 
 
 digue 
 
 reef of rocks 
 
 Ï breakers, 
 surf 
 top 
 stone 
 bridge 
 causeway 
 ford 
 
 warf or quay 
 read 
 path 
 ditch 
 gravel 
 sand 
 
 small sand 
 dust 
 ocean 
 sea 
 
 gulf 
 
 bay 
 
 road (for 
 
 creek 
 
 channel 
 
 strait 
 
 current 
 
 tide 
 
 flowing 
 
 ebbing 
 
 wave 
 
 billows 
 
 waves 
 
 haven 
 
 harbour 
 
 lake 
 
 river 
 
 great river 
 } mouth of a 
 5 river 
 
 brook 
 
 overflow 
 
 deluge 
 
 inundation 
 ) flood-gate 
 jj sluice 
 
 dike 
 
 # These seven words do not convey in French the same ideas 
 /he four latter relate to the sea, 
 

 48 
 
 VOCABULARY» 
 
 
 
 étang 
 
 pond 
 
 nuage, m. 
 
 cloud 
 
 
 vivier 
 
 fish-pond 
 
 nielle 
 
 blight 
 
 
 réservoir 
 
 bason 
 
 humidité 
 
 dampness 
 mildew 
 
 
 abreuvoir 
 
 horse-pond 
 
 serein 
 
 
 bain 
 
 bath 
 
 tourbillon 
 
 whirlwind 
 
 
 citerne 
 
 cistern 
 
 orage, m. 
 
 stôrm 
 
 
 fontaine 
 
 fountain 
 
 tempête 
 
 tempest 
 
 
 source 
 
 spring 
 
 calme, nu 
 
 calm 
 
 puits 
 
 well 
 
 éternité 
 
 eternity 
 
 pompe 
 
 pump 
 
 temps 
 
 time 
 
 
 bateau 
 
 boat 
 
 siècle,??!. 
 
 age or century 
 
 
 barque 
 
 bark 
 
 époque 
 
 epoch 
 
 bac 
 
 ferry boat 
 
 période, m. 
 
 period 
 
 
 coche d'eau, 
 
 m. barge 
 
 date 
 
 date 
 
 il 
 
 gabare 
 
 lighter 
 
 an, année 
 
 year 
 
 
 navire, m. 
 
 ship 
 
 mois 
 
 month 
 
 II 
 
 vaisseau 
 
 vessel 
 
 janvier 
 
 January 
 
 
 paquet-bot 
 
 packet-boat 
 
 février 
 
 february- 
 
 
 flamme 
 
 blaze 
 
 mars 
 
 march 
 
 
 étincelle 
 
 spark 
 
 avril 
 
 april 
 
 
 chaleur 
 
 heat 
 
 mai 
 
 may 
 
 
 fumée 
 
 smoke 
 
 juin 
 
 june 
 
 
 incendie, m. 
 
 conflagration 
 
 juillet 
 
 July 
 
 
 chauffage, m. 
 
 fuel 
 
 août 
 
 august 
 
 
 charbon 
 
 coals 
 
 septembre 
 
 September 
 
 
 charbon-de- 
 
 l pit-coal 
 
 . octobre 
 
 October 
 
 
 terre 
 
 novembre 
 
 november 
 
 
 charbon- de - 
 bois 
 
 I charcoal 
 
 décembre 
 semaine 
 
 decembcr 
 week 
 
 
 braise 
 
 small coal 
 
 jour 
 
 day 
 
 
 tourbe 
 
 turf 
 
 journée 
 
 day 
 
 
 mottes, pL 
 
 peat 
 
 aujourd'hui 
 
 to-day 
 
 
 bois 
 
 wood 
 
 demain 
 
 to-morrow 
 
 
 bûche 
 
 tog of wood 
 
 hier 
 
 yesterday 
 
 
 fagot 
 
 faggot 
 
 lundi 
 
 monday 
 
 
 coupeaux, /?/. 
 
 chips 
 
 mardi 
 
 tuesday 
 
 
 cendré 
 
 ashes 
 
 mercredi 
 
 Wednesday 
 
 
 suie 
 
 soot 
 
 jeudi 
 
 thursday 
 
 
 feu 
 
 fire 
 
 vendredi 
 
 friday 
 
 
 atmosphère 
 
 atmospher-e 
 
 samedi 
 
 Saturday 
 
 
 veut 
 
 wind 
 
 dimanche 
 
 sunday 
 
 
 zéphyr 
 
 zephyr 
 
 heure 
 
 hour 
 
 
 vapeur 
 
 vapour 
 
 demi-heure 
 
 half an hour 
 
 
 lumière 
 ténèbres, pi. 
 
 light 
 darkness 
 
 quart-d'heure 
 
 ( quarter of a 
 \ hour 
 
 
 chaleur 
 
 heat 
 
 aurore 
 
 aurora 
 
 
 froid 
 
 cold 
 
 aube 
 
 dawn 
 
 
 nue, nuée 
 
 cloud 
 
 matin 
 
 morning 
 

 VOCABULARY* 
 
 matinée 
 
 forenoon 
 
 carnaval 
 
 midi 
 
 noon 
 
 carême, m. 
 
 l'après-midi 
 l'après-dînée 
 
 1 4U~ n n„~~* nm rai-carême 
 > the afternoon A 
 5 J paque 
 
 soir 
 
 > evening 
 
 pentecote 
 
 soirée 
 
 g vi't/ii/t^ 
 
 la Saint- Jean 
 
 crépuscule m. 
 
 twilight 
 
 Pavent 
 
 nuit 
 
 night 
 
 noël 
 
 minuit 
 
 midnight 
 
 fête 
 
 minute 
 
 minute 
 
 équinoxe, m. 
 
 seconde 
 
 second 
 
 solstice, m. 
 
 moment 
 
 moment 
 
 canicule 
 
 instant 
 
 instant 
 
 fenaison 
 
 saison 
 
 season 
 
 moisson 
 
 printemps 
 
 spring 
 
 vendage 
 
 été 
 
 summer 
 
 tonte 
 
 automne 
 
 autumn 
 
 semailles,, pi 
 
 hiver 
 
 winter 
 
 congé 
 
 
 OF 
 
 MAN. 
 
 genre -humain 
 
 mankind 
 
 orphelin 
 
 homme 
 
 man 
 
 orpheline 
 
 femme 
 
 woman 
 
 héritier 
 
 sexe 
 
 sex 
 
 héritière 
 
 enfant 
 
 child 
 
 maître 
 
 garçon 
 
 boy 
 
 maîtresse 
 
 tille 
 
 girl 
 
 hôte 
 
 vierge 
 
 r if gin 
 
 hôtesse 
 
 virginité 
 enfance 
 
 virginity 
 
 domestique 
 
 infancy 
 
 servante 
 
 jeunesse 
 
 youth 
 
 voisin 
 
 adolescence 
 
 ado U scenes 
 
 
 virilité 
 
 manhood 
 
 voisine 
 
 vieillesse 
 
 old age 
 
 compagnon 
 
 décrépitude 
 
 decrepitude 
 
 
 jeune homme 
 
 youth or lad 
 
 compagne 
 
 jeune fille 
 
 young girl 
 
 corps 
 
 vieillard 
 
 old man 
 
 membre, ni* 
 
 géant 
 
 giant 
 
 tronc 
 
 nain 
 
 dwarf 
 
 tête 
 
 pigraée, m. 
 
 pigmy 
 
 crâne, m. 
 
 mari 
 
 Husband 
 
 front 
 
 femme 
 
 wife 
 
 visage, m. 
 
 veuf 
 
 widower 
 
 traits, ph . 
 
 veuve 
 
 widow 
 
 
 49 
 
 carnival 
 lent 
 
 midlent 
 easier 
 
 whit-sunday 
 midsummer 
 advent 
 Christmas 
 festival 
 equinox 
 the solstice 
 the dog-days 
 hay harvest 
 harvest 
 vintage 
 shearing-time 
 sowing-time 
 holiday 
 
 orphan (boy) 
 orphan (girl) 
 heir 
 heiress 
 master 
 mistress 
 landlord 
 landlady 
 man servant 
 maid servant 
 neighbour 
 ( neighbour 
 I (female) 
 companion 
 { companion 
 ( (female 
 body 
 member 
 trunk 
 head 
 scull 
 
 forehead 
 
 face 
 
 features 
 
SO 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 ceil 
 yeux, pi. 
 
 eye 
 eyes 
 
 cerveau 
 cervelle 
 
 > brain 
 
 sourcils, pi. 
 
 eye-brows 
 
 squelette, m. 
 
 skeleton 
 
 paupière 
 
 eye lid 
 
 cœur 
 
 heart 
 
 nez 
 
 nose 
 
 poumon 
 
 lungs 
 
 narines, pi. 
 
 nostrils 
 
 foie, m. 
 
 liver 
 
 bouche 
 
 ?nouth 
 
 rate 
 
 spleen 
 
 lèvres, pi. 
 
 lips 
 
 estomac 
 
 stomach 
 
 dent 
 
 tooth 
 
 entrailles, pi. 
 
 entrails 
 
 gencives, pi. 
 
 gums 
 
 sang 
 
 blood 
 
 mâchoire 
 
 jaw-bone 
 
 humeurs, pi. 
 
 humours 
 
 langue 
 
 tongue 
 
 glande 
 
 gland 
 
 palais 
 
 palate 
 
 poil 
 
 hair 
 
 joues, pi. 
 
 cheeks 
 
 chair 
 
 flesh 
 
 fossette 
 
 dimple 
 
 peau 
 
 skin 
 
 menton 
 
 chin 
 
 pores, m. pi. 
 
 pores 
 
 barbe 
 
 beard 
 
 nerf 
 
 nerve 
 
 tempes, pi. 
 
 temples 
 
 artère 
 
 artery 
 
 oreille 
 
 ear 
 
 veine 
 
 vein 
 
 chevesx,jp7. 
 
 hair 
 
 os 
 
 bone 
 
 cou 
 
 neck v. 
 
 moelle 
 
 marrow 
 
 gosier 
 
 throat 
 
 ride 
 
 wrinkle 
 
 sein 
 
 bosom 
 
 bouton 
 
 pimple 
 
 mamelle 
 
 br> ast 
 
 santé 
 
 health 
 
 ventre, m. 
 
 belly 
 
 tempérament 
 
 constitution 
 
 ceinture 
 
 waist 
 
 embonpoint 
 
 plumpness 
 
 côté 
 
 side 
 
 maigreur 
 
 leanness 
 
 hanche 
 
 haunch 
 
 teint 
 
 complexion 
 
 cuisses, pi. 
 
 thighs 
 
 rougeur 
 
 redness 
 
 genou 
 
 knee 
 
 pâleur 
 
 paleness 
 
 jarret 
 
 ham 
 
 port 
 
 countenance 
 
 rotule 
 
 knee-pan 
 
 démarche 
 
 gait 
 
 jambe 
 
 leg 
 
 geste, m. 
 
 gesture 
 
 mollet 
 
 calf of the leg 
 
 vivacité 
 
 liveliness 
 
 pied 
 
 foot 
 
 enjoûment 
 
 sprightliness 
 
 talon 
 
 heel 
 
 . gaieté 
 
 g ait y 
 
 orteil 
 
 toe 
 
 beauté 
 
 beauty 
 
 •bras 
 
 arm 
 
 charmes, m. pi 
 
 . charms 
 
 coude, m 
 
 elbow 
 
 attraits, pi. 
 
 attractions 
 
 aisselle 
 
 the arm -pit 
 
 appas, pi. 
 
 beauties 
 
 épaule 
 
 shoulder 
 
 agrément 
 
 pleasantness 
 
 main 
 
 hand 
 
 laideur 
 
 deformity 
 
 poing 
 
 fist 
 
 taille 
 
 shape, sise 
 
 poignet 
 
 v:rist 
 
 voix 
 
 voice 
 
 doigt 
 
 finger 
 
 parole 
 
 speech 
 
 pouce, m. 
 
 thumb 
 
 silence, m. 
 
 silence 
 
 ongle, m. 
 
 nail 
 
 action 
 
 action 
 
 côte 
 
 Tib 
 
 mouvement 
 
 motion 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 6i 
 
 repos 
 grimace 
 ris, rire m. 
 souris 
 sourire m. 
 humeur 
 soupir 
 
 gémissement 
 assoupisse- 
 ment 
 sommeil 
 songe m. 
 rêve m. 
 souffle m. 
 haleine 
 respiration 
 éternuement 
 vue 
 ouïe 
 odorat 
 goût 
 toucher 
 sentiment 
 obscurité 
 ombre 
 son 
 bruit 
 odeur 
 puanteur 
 saveur 
 sensations pi. 
 chatouillement 
 plaisir 
 joie 
 douleur 
 faim 
 soif 
 dégoût 
 maladie 
 mal 
 
 incommodité 
 infirmité 
 indisposition 
 mal-de-dents 
 mal-de-tête 
 
 mal-aux-yeux 
 
 migraine 
 
 Hat 
 
 grimace 
 laughter 
 
 > smile 
 
 ill temper 
 
 sigh 
 
 groan 
 
 > droivsiness 
 
 sleep 
 
 vision 
 
 dream 
 
 blast 
 
 breath 
 
 respiration 
 
 sneezing 
 
 sight 
 
 hearing 
 
 smell 
 
 taste 
 
 touch 
 
 sense 
 
 darkness 
 
 shade 
 
 sound 
 
 noise 
 
 smell 
 
 stench 
 
 relish 
 
 sensations 
 
 tickling 
 
 pleasure 
 
 joy 
 
 pain 
 
 hunger 
 
 thirst 
 
 surfeit 
 
 disease 
 
 complaint 
 
 illness 
 
 infirmity 
 
 disorder 
 
 tooth-ache 
 
 head-ache 
 
 S complaint in 
 the eyes 
 megrim 
 
 vertige m» 
 
 évanouisse- 
 ment 
 
 défaillance 
 
 faiblesse 
 
 démangeaison 
 
 pesanteur 
 
 engourdisse- 
 ment 
 
 insomnie 
 
 coup 
 
 contre-coup 
 
 égratignure 
 
 écorchure 
 
 entorse 
 
 foulure 
 
 enflure 
 
 tumeur 
 
 meurtrissure 
 
 contusion 
 
 blessure 
 
 cicatrice 
 
 ulcère m. 
 
 gangrène 
 
 coupure 
 
 brûlure 
 
 cor 
 
 durillon 
 
 enrouement 
 
 rhume m. 
 
 toux 
 
 coqueluche 
 
 surdité 
 
 fréaésie 
 
 folie 
 
 rage 
 
 goutte 
 
 convulsions/?/. 
 
 vapeurs pi. 
 
 fièvre 
 
 frisson 
 
 accès 
 
 délire m. 
 
 crise 
 
 médecine 
 
 médecin 
 
 chirurgien 
 
 apothicaire 
 
 6 
 
 dizziness 
 
 > swooning 
 
 fainting 
 swoon 
 itching 
 heaviness 
 
 > numbness 
 
 want of sleep 
 
 blow 
 
 counter-blow 
 
 scratch 
 
 excoriation 
 
 sprain 
 
 strain 
 
 swelbng 
 
 tumour 
 
 bruise 
 
 contusion 
 
 wound 
 
 scar 
 
 ulcer 
 
 mortification 
 
 cut 
 
 burn 
 
 com 
 
 callosity 
 
 hoarseness 
 
 cold 
 
 cough 
 
 hooping-cough 
 
 deafness 
 
 frenzy 
 
 lunacy 
 
 madness 
 
 gout 
 
 convulsive-fitg 
 
 vapours 
 
 fever 
 
 shivering 
 
 fit 
 
 delirium 
 
 crisis 
 
 physic 
 
 physician 
 
 surgeon 
 
 apothecary 
 
92 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 accoueheur 
 
 man-midwife 
 
 régime m. 
 
 diet 
 
 sage-femme 
 
 midwife 
 
 sirop 
 
 syrup 
 
 consultation 
 
 consultation 
 
 agonie 
 
 dying hour 
 
 ordonnance 
 
 prescription 
 
 mort 
 
 death 
 
 remède m. 
 
 remedy 
 
 cadavre m. 
 
 corpse 
 
 drogues pi. 
 
 drugs 
 
 vie 
 
 life 
 
 poudres pi. 
 
 powders 
 
 guérison 
 
 recovery 
 
 pillules pL 
 
 pills 
 
 rechute 
 
 relapse 
 
 saignée 
 
 bleeding 
 
 symptôme m. 
 
 symptom 
 
 lancette 
 gouttes pi. 
 
 lancet 
 drops 
 
 convalescence 
 
 S fair way of 
 ( recovery 
 
 bain 
 
 bath 
 
 
 
 OF THE MIND AND ITS FACULT 
 
 IES. x 
 
 âme 
 
 soul 
 
 souvenir 
 
 remembrance 
 
 esprit 
 
 mind 
 
 oubli 
 
 forgetfulness 
 
 génie m. 
 
 genius 
 
 stupidité 
 
 stupidity 
 
 raison 
 
 reason 
 
 passions pi. 
 
 passions 
 
 entendement 
 
 understanding 
 
 affections pi. 
 
 affections 
 
 jugement 
 
 judgment 
 
 amour 
 
 love 
 
 sens 
 
 sense 
 
 amours /. pi. 
 
 amours 
 
 pensée 
 
 thought 
 
 haine 
 
 hatred 
 
 idée 
 
 idea 
 
 désir 
 
 desire 
 
 imagination 
 
 imagination 
 
 crainte, peur 
 
 fear 
 
 fantaisie 
 
 fancy 
 
 appréhension 
 
 apprehension 
 
 caprice m. 
 
 caprice 
 
 espérance 
 
 hope 
 
 volonté 
 
 vnll 
 
 confianee 
 
 confidence 
 
 liberté 
 
 liberty 
 
 honte 
 
 shame 
 
 bel -esprit 
 
 wit 
 
 timidité 
 
 bash fulness 
 
 opinion 
 
 opinion 
 
 hardiesse 
 
 boldness 
 
 sentiment 
 
 sentiment 
 
 assurance 
 
 confidence 
 
 vérité 
 
 truth 
 
 colère 
 
 anger 
 
 erreur 
 
 error 
 
 courroux 
 
 wrath 
 
 vraisemblance 
 
 likelihood 
 
 fureur 
 
 fury 
 
 probabilité 
 
 probability 
 
 rage 
 
 rage 
 
 apparence 
 
 appearance 
 
 ressentiment 
 
 resentment 
 
 méprise 
 
 mistake 
 
 vengeance 
 
 revenge 
 
 bévue 
 
 oversight 
 
 dépit 
 
 spite 
 
 science 
 
 science 
 
 déplaisir 
 
 displeasure 
 
 connaissance 
 
 knowledge 
 
 tristesse 
 
 sadness 
 
 pénétration 
 
 penetration 
 
 chagrin 
 
 grief 
 
 sagacité 
 
 sagacity 
 
 peine 
 
 sorrow 
 
 disposition 
 
 disposition 
 
 désespoir 
 
 despair 
 
 inclination 
 
 inclination 
 
 doute m. 
 
 doubt 
 
 capacité 
 
 capacity 
 
 soupçon 
 
 suspicion 
 
 mémoire 
 
 memory 
 
 f\hvi'p 
 
 rnvy 
 
jalousie 
 pitié 
 
 miséricorde 
 compassion 
 terreur 
 épouvante 
 indignation 
 vertu 
 charité . 
 justice 
 tempérance 
 sobriété 
 force 
 modestie 
 civilité 
 pudeur 
 politesse 
 honnêteté 
 complaisance 
 douceur 
 bonté 
 amitié 
 ^ZSion 
 concorde 
 paix 
 
 tranquillité 
 patience 
 prudence 
 économie 
 habileté 
 industrie 
 soin 
 
 diligence 
 exactitude 
 honneur 
 probité 
 désintéresse- 
 ment 
 sagesse 
 constance 
 bienveillance 
 émulation 
 faveur 
 valeur 
 bravoure 
 courage m. 
 finesse, ruse 
 
 jealousy 
 
 ;abulark« 
 
 adresse 
 
 dexterity 
 
 pity 
 
 chasteté 
 
 chastity 
 
 mercy 
 
 innocence 
 
 innocence 
 
 compassion 
 
 libéralité 
 
 liberality 
 
 terror 
 
 générosité 
 
 generosity 
 
 fright 
 
 reconnoissance gratitude 
 
 indignation 
 
 frugalité 
 
 frugality 
 
 virtue 
 
 prospérité 
 
 prosperity 
 
 charity 
 
 adversité 
 
 adversity 
 
 justice 
 
 mœurs pi. 
 
 mariners 
 
 temperance 
 
 bonheur 
 
 happiness 
 
 sobriety 
 
 récompense 
 
 reward ' 
 
 fortitude 
 
 prix 
 
 prise 
 
 modesty 
 
 présent 
 
 present 
 
 civility 
 
 don 
 
 gift 
 
 bashfulness 
 
 prêt 
 
 loan 
 
 politeness 
 
 grâce 
 
 grace 
 
 honesty 
 
 réputation 
 
 fame 
 
 complaisance 
 
 vice m. 
 
 vice 
 
 sweetness 
 
 défaut 
 
 defeat 
 
 goodness 
 
 imperfection 
 
 imperfection 
 
 friendship 
 
 avarice 
 
 avarice 
 
 union 
 
 avidity 
 
 oreediness 
 
 concord 
 
 orgueil 
 
 pride 
 
 peace 
 
 paresse 
 
 idleness 
 
 tranquillity 
 
 fainéantise 
 
 tlothfulness 
 
 patience 
 
 lâcheté 
 
 sluggishness 
 
 prudence 
 
 nonchalance 
 
 carelessness 
 
 economy 
 
 luxe m. 
 
 luxury, pomp 
 
 skill 
 
 mollesse 
 
 effeminacy 
 
 industry 
 
 impureté 
 
 lewdness 
 
 care 
 
 débauche 
 
 revel 
 
 diligence 
 
 dissolution 
 
 dissoluteness 
 
 exactness 
 
 libertinage m. 
 
 libertinism 
 
 honour 
 
 désordre m. 
 
 disorJerly life 
 
 probity 
 
 dérèglement 
 
 licentiousness 
 
 \didntnestedncss m ?V ris . 
 1 raillerie 
 
 contempt 
 jest 
 
 wisdom 
 
 moquerie 
 
 mockery 
 
 constancy 
 
 médisance 
 
 slander 
 
 benevolence 
 emulation 
 
 calomnie 
 crime m. 
 
 calumny 
 crime 
 
 favour 
 
 malice 
 
 malice 
 
 va! our 
 
 méchanceté 
 
 wickedness 
 
 bravery 
 
 tromperie 
 
 deceit 
 
 courage 
 
 parjure m. 
 
 perjury 
 
 cunning 
 
 friponnerie 
 
 knavery 
 
 53 
 
54 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 fourberie 
 
 enchantement 
 
 injustice 
 
 tort 
 
 usure 
 
 achat 
 
 vente 
 
 troc 
 
 gage th. 
 
 dépôt 
 
 contrat 
 
 marché 
 
 bassesse 
 
 impudence 
 
 effronterie 
 
 audace 
 
 témérité 
 
 poltronnerie 
 
 opiniâtreté 
 
 obstination 
 
 cruauté 
 
 dispute 
 
 brouillerie 
 
 babil 
 
 caquet 
 
 inconstance 
 
 ingratitude 
 
 ambition 
 
 prodigalité 
 
 gourmandise 
 
 impolitesse 
 
 incivilité 
 
 dissention 
 
 impatience 
 
 imprudence 
 
 négligence 
 
 malhonnêteté 
 
 déshonneur 
 
 roguery 
 
 exil 
 
 exile 
 
 wit cher aft 
 
 banis6ement 
 
 banishment 
 
 injustice 
 
 pusillanimité 
 
 pusillanimity 
 
 wrong 
 
 trahison 
 
 treachery 
 
 usury 
 
 perfidie 
 
 perjidiousness 
 
 purchase 
 
 punition 
 
 punishment 
 
 sale 
 
 châtiment 
 
 chastisement 
 
 barter 
 
 légèreté 
 
 levity 
 
 pledge 
 
 coquetterie 
 
 coquetry 
 
 trust 
 
 badinage m. 
 
 sport 
 
 contract 
 
 larcin 
 
 robbery 
 
 bargain 
 
 vol 
 
 theft 
 
 meanness 
 
 fripponnerie 
 
 knavish trick 
 
 impudence 
 
 tromperie 
 
 deceit 
 
 effrontery 
 
 ivrognerie 
 
 drunkenness 
 
 audaciousness 
 
 ivresse 
 
 ebriety 
 
 temerity 
 
 assassinat 
 
 murder 
 
 cowardice 
 
 meurtre m. 
 
 manslaughter 
 
 stubbornness 
 
 mensonge m. 
 
 He 
 
 obstinacy 
 
 fausseté 
 
 falsehood 
 
 cruelly 
 
 conte m. 
 
 tale 
 
 dispute 
 
 serment 
 
 oath 
 
 Quarrel 
 
 malheur 
 
 misfortune 
 
 broil 
 
 folie 
 
 folly 
 
 babbling 
 
 extravagance 
 
 madness 
 
 prating 
 
 coutume 
 
 custom 
 
 inconstancy 
 
 usage m. 
 
 use 
 
 ungratefulness 
 
 pratique 
 
 practice 
 
 ambition 
 
 habitude 
 
 habit 
 
 prodigality 
 
 licence 
 
 licentiousness 
 
 gluttony 
 
 excès 
 
 excess 
 
 rudeness 
 
 tour 
 
 trick 
 
 incivility 
 
 bagatelles pi. 
 
 trifles 
 
 dissension 
 
 faute 
 
 fault 
 
 impatience 
 
 faiblesse 
 
 weakness 
 
 imprudence 
 
 faible m. 
 
 foible 
 
 negligence 
 
 affront 
 
 affront 
 
 rudeness 
 
 outrage m. 
 
 outrage 
 
 disgrace 
 
 insulte 
 
 insult 
 
 OF MEATS AND DRINKS. 
 
 iourriture 
 ilimens pi. 
 vivres m. p /. 
 
 nourishment 
 
 food 
 
 victuals 
 
 provisions 
 
 repas 
 
 déjeûner 
 
 provision* 
 
 meal 
 
 breakfast 
 

 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 dîner 
 
 dinner 
 
 verjus 
 
 verjuiee 
 
 * 
 
 { afternoon's 
 I luncheon 
 
 anchois 
 
 anchovies 
 
 goûter 
 
 c t ices/?/. 
 
 spices 
 
 souper 
 
 supper 
 
 poivre m. 
 
 pepper 
 
 collation 
 
 collation 
 
 gingembre m. 
 
 ginger 
 
 festin 
 
 feast 
 
 muscade 
 
 nutmeg 
 
 régal 
 
 treat 
 
 mâcis 
 
 macs 
 
 pain 
 croûte 
 
 bread 
 crust 
 
 girofle m. 
 (clous de) 
 
 > cloves 
 
 mie 
 
 crumb 
 
 canelle 
 
 cinnamon 
 
 farine 
 
 flour 
 
 oublies pi 
 
 wafers 
 
 son 
 
 bran 
 
 sucre m. 
 
 sugar 
 
 pâte 
 
 dough 
 
 cassonade 
 
 moist sugar 
 
 levain 
 
 leaven 
 
 dessert 
 
 dessert 
 
 morceau 
 
 bit, morsel 
 
 fruit 
 
 fruit 
 
 tranche 
 
 slice 
 
 pâté 
 
 pie 
 
 bouchée 
 
 mouthful 
 
 gâteau - 
 
 cake 
 
 viande 
 
 meat 
 
 tourte, tarte 
 
 . tart 
 
 bouilli 
 
 boiled meat 
 
 biscuit 
 
 biscuit 
 
 rôt, rôti 
 
 roast meat 
 
 macaron 
 
 macaroon 
 
 bœuf 
 
 beef 
 
 crêpe 
 
 pancakes 
 
 mouton 
 
 mutton 
 
 confitures pi. 
 
 sweetmeats 
 
 agneau 
 
 lamb 
 
 gelée 
 
 jelly 
 
 veau 
 
 real 
 
 marmelade 
 
 marmalade 
 
 porc 
 
 pork 
 
 conserve 
 
 conserve 
 
 venaison 
 
 venison 
 
 tablettes pi. 
 
 lozenges 
 
 volaille 
 
 fowls 
 
 dragées pi. 
 
 sugar-plums 
 
 gibier 
 
 game 
 
 pralines;?/. 
 
 crisp-almonds 
 
 g'got 
 
 a leg of mutton 
 
 i fromage m. 
 
 cheese 
 
 andouille 
 
 chitterlings 
 
 beurre m. 
 
 butter 
 
 saucisse 
 
 sausage 
 
 lait 
 
 milk 
 
 jambon 
 
 ham 
 
 crème 
 
 cream 
 
 lard 
 
 bacon 
 
 œuf 
 
 e gg 
 
 moutarde 
 
 mustard 
 
 coque 
 
 shell 
 
 soupe 
 
 soup 
 
 blanc 
 
 white 
 
 potage m. 
 
 pottage 
 
 jaune m. 
 
 yolk 
 
 bouillon 
 
 broth 
 
 boisson 
 
 drink 
 
 consommé 
 
 jelly broth 
 
 liqueur 
 
 liquor 
 
 ragoût 
 
 ragout 
 
 thé 
 
 tea 
 
 fricassée 
 
 fricassee 
 
 café 
 
 coffee 
 
 jus 
 
 gravy 
 
 chocolat 
 
 chocolate 
 
 sauce 
 
 sauce 
 
 limonade 
 
 lemonade 
 
 poisson 
 
 fah 
 
 ponche m. 
 
 punch 
 
 salade 
 
 sallad 
 
 vin 
 
 wine 
 
 sel 
 
 salt 
 
 bière 
 
 beer 
 
 huile 
 
 oil 
 
 eau-de-vie 
 
 brandi/ 
 
 vinaigre m. 
 
 vinegar 
 
 nectar 
 
 nectar 
 
 «5 
 
 6* 
 
56 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 ambroisie 
 cidre m. 
 poiré 
 
 ambrosia 
 
 cider 
 
 perry 
 
 hydromel 
 
 sirop 
 
 lie 
 
 mead 
 sgrup 
 dregs 
 
 OF DRESSING APPAREL, &C. 
 
 habillement 
 
 dress 
 
 guêtres pi. 
 
 gaiters 
 
 hardes 
 
 clothes 
 
 souliers 
 
 shoes 
 
 habit complet 
 
 a suit of clothei 
 
 escarpins pi 
 
 pumps 
 
 habit 
 
 coat 
 
 semelle 
 
 sole 
 
 veste 
 
 waistcoat 
 
 bottes pi 
 
 boots 
 
 gilet 
 
 undtr-waislcoat boucles pi. 
 
 buckles 
 
 manches pi 
 
 sleeves 
 
 cuir 
 
 leather 
 
 poches/?/. 
 
 pockets 
 
 chapeau 
 
 hat 
 
 bouton 
 
 button 
 
 perruque 
 
 wig 
 
 doublure 
 
 lining 
 
 jupe 
 
 petticoat 
 
 couture 
 
 seam 
 
 jupon 
 
 under-petticoa 
 
 culotte 
 
 breeches 
 
 satin 
 
 satin 
 
 pantalon 
 
 pantaloon 
 
 taffetas 
 
 taffety 
 
 gousset 
 
 fob 
 
 gaze 
 
 gauze 
 
 drap 
 
 cloth 
 
 coiffure 
 
 head-dress 
 
 soie 
 
 silk 
 
 coiffe 
 
 hood 
 
 velours 
 
 velvet 
 
 collier 
 
 necklace 
 
 serge 
 basin 
 
 serge 
 dimity 
 
 boucles 
 
 d'oreilles/?/, 
 
 > ear-rings 
 
 flanelle 
 
 flannel 
 
 gants pi. 
 
 gloves 
 
 étoffe 
 
 stuff 
 
 mitaines pi. 
 
 mittens 
 
 manteau 
 
 cloak 
 
 tablier 
 
 apron 
 
 surtout 
 redingote 
 
 surtout 
 riding-coat 
 
 mules/?/, 
 pantoufles pi. 
 
 > slippers 
 
 linge m. 
 
 linen 
 
 bague 
 
 ring 
 
 toile 
 
 linen-cloth 
 
 bijou 
 
 jewel 
 
 batiste 
 
 cambric 
 
 bracelet 
 
 bracelet 
 
 mousselin 
 
 muslin 
 
 dentelle 
 
 lace 
 
 linon 
 
 lawn 
 
 blonde 
 
 blond-lact 
 
 chemise 
 
 shirt 
 
 éventail 
 
 fan 
 
 jabot 
 
 frill 
 
 manchon 
 
 muff 
 
 cravate 
 
 cravat 
 
 agrafe 
 
 clasp 
 
 bas pi. 
 
 stocking* 
 
 épingle 
 
 pin 
 
 jarretières pi. 
 laine 
 
 garters 
 
 aiguille 
 
 needle 
 
 wool 
 
 étui 
 
 case 
 
 fil 
 
 thread 
 
 dé 
 
 thimble 
 
 coton 
 
 cotton 
 
 masque m. 
 
 mask 
 
 maille 
 
 stilch 
 
 voile ?n. 
 
 veil 
 
 trou 
 
 hole 
 
 tabatière 
 
 snuff-box 
 
 chaussons pi. 
 
 socks 
 
 tabac 
 
 snuff 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 57 
 
 tabac (à fumer) tobacco 
 bourse purse 
 
 argent m money 
 
 porte -feuille m, "pocket-book 
 
 ciseaux pL 
 crayon 
 mouchoir 
 lunettes pi. 
 lorgnette 
 
 scissars 
 
 pencil 
 
 handkerchief 
 
 spectacles 
 
 opera-glass 
 
 conserves pL 
 
 bouquet 
 
 canne 
 
 cordon 
 
 épée 
 
 montre 
 
 boîte 
 
 chaîne 
 
 cachet 
 
 preserves 
 
 nosegay 
 
 cane 
 
 string 
 
 stoord 
 
 watch 
 
 case 
 
 chain 
 
 seal 
 
 OF A HOUSE AND FURNITURE. 
 
 maison 
 
 
 house 
 
 hôtel 
 
 
 ( noblemart 
 \ house 
 
 hôtellerie 
 
 
 inn 
 
 château 
 
 
 castle 
 
 palais 
 
 
 palace 
 
 couronne 
 
 
 crown 
 
 trône m. 
 
 
 throne 
 
 sceptre m. 
 
 
 sceptre 
 
 aile 
 
 
 icing 
 
 pavillon 
 
 
 pavilion 
 
 fondemens pi. 
 
 foundation 
 
 mur, muraille 
 
 wall 
 
 bâtiment 
 
 
 building 
 
 matériaux 
 
 pi. 
 
 materials 
 
 pierre 
 
 
 stone 
 
 brique 
 
 
 brick 
 
 mortier 
 
 
 mortar 
 
 chaux 
 
 
 lime 
 
 plâtre wî. 
 
 
 plaster 
 
 ciment 
 
 
 cement 
 
 tuile 
 
 
 tile 
 
 ardoise 
 
 charpente 
 
 poutre 
 
 solive 
 
 échelle 
 
 cave 
 
 cellier 
 
 tonneau 
 
 futaille 
 
 boutique 
 
 atelier 
 
 magasin 
 
 vestibule m. 
 
 slate 
 
 timber work 
 
 beam 
 
 joist 
 
 ladder 
 
 vault 
 
 cellar 
 
 cask 
 
 vessel 
 
 shop 
 
 work-shop 
 
 warehouse 
 
 hall 
 
 salle 
 
 salon 
 
 escalier 
 
 office 
 
 cuisine 
 
 garde-man- 
 ger m. 
 
 boulangerie 
 
 brasserie 
 
 lingerie 
 
 écurie 
 
 remise 
 
 puits 
 
 étage m. 
 
 appartement 
 
 chambre 
 
 antichambre 
 
 salle-à-manger 
 
 salon-de-com- 
 pagnie 
 
 cabinet-de- 
 toilette 
 
 chambre-à- 
 coucher 
 
 galerie 
 
 cabinet 
 
 boudoir 
 
 garde-robe 
 
 porte 
 
 porte-cochère 
 
 seuil 
 
 jalousie 
 
 gond 
 
 marteau 
 
 serrure 
 
 y parlour 
 
 stair-case 
 
 pantry 
 
 kitchen 
 
 S store-room 
 
 bake-house 
 
 brew-house 
 
 laundry 
 
 stable 
 
 coach-house 
 
 well 
 
 story 
 
 apartment 
 
 room 
 
 antichamber 
 
 dining-room 
 
 > drawing-room 
 
 > dressing-room 
 
 > bed-room 
 
 gllery 
 
 closet 
 
 lady's closet 
 
 wurdrobe 
 
 door 
 
 gate 
 
 threshold 
 
 blinds 
 
 hinge 
 
 knocker 
 
 lock 
 
58 
 
 clé, or clef 
 
 verrou 
 
 fenêtre 
 
 vitre 
 
 volet 
 
 balcon 
 
 store nu 
 
 grenier 
 
 toit 
 
 gouttière 
 
 malle 
 
 boîte 
 
 caisse 
 
 cassette 
 
 coffre m. 
 
 logement 
 
 ameublement 
 
 cheminée 
 
 àtre m. foyer 
 
 soufflet 
 
 pelle 
 
 pincettes pi. 
 
 fourgon 
 
 garde-cen- 
 dre?». 
 
 coquernar 
 
 bouilloire 
 
 couvercle m. 
 
 poêle 
 
 poêlon 
 
 casserole 
 
 fourneau 
 
 allumette 
 
 pierre-à-fusil 
 
 briquet 
 
 four 
 
 essuie-main 
 
 bassinoire 
 
 panier, cor- 
 beille 
 
 porcelaine 
 
 faïence 
 
 poterie 
 
 pot 
 
 cruche 
 
 lampe 
 
 lanterne 
 
 savon 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 key 
 
 amidon 
 
 starch 
 
 bolt 
 
 balaia 
 
 broom 
 
 icindow 
 
 banc 
 
 bench 
 
 glass 
 
 escabeau 
 
 stool 
 
 shutter 
 
 plancher 
 
 floor 
 
 balcony 
 
 parquet 
 
 inlaid floor 
 
 blind 
 
 plafond 
 
 ceiling 
 
 garret 
 
 lambris 
 
 wainsjcoi 
 
 rooj 
 
 cloison 
 
 partition 
 
 gutter 
 
 tapisserie 
 
 hangings 
 
 trunk 
 
 tapis 
 
 carpet 
 
 box 
 
 lit 
 
 bed 
 
 chest 
 
 alcove 
 
 alcove 
 
 casket 
 
 châlit 
 
 bedstead 
 
 coffer 
 
 chevet 
 
 bolster 
 
 lodging 
 
 . oreiller 
 
 pillow 
 
 furniture 
 
 paillasse 
 
 straw-maitress 
 
 chimney 
 
 matelas 
 
 mattress 
 
 hearth 
 
 draps pi. 
 
 sheets 
 
 bellows 
 
 couvertures pi 
 
 bed-clothes 
 
 shovel 
 
 courte-pointe 
 
 counterpane 
 
 tongs 
 
 rideau 
 
 curtain 
 
 poker 
 
 tringle 
 
 curtain-rod 
 
 
 anneau 
 
 ring 
 
 >fender 
 
 sofa 
 
 sofa 
 
 
 fauteuil 
 
 elbow-chair 
 
 boiler, copper 
 
 siège nu 
 
 seat 
 
 lid 
 
 chaise 
 
 chair 
 
 frying-pan 
 
 coussin 
 
 cushion 
 
 skillet 
 
 armoire 
 
 press 
 
 saucepan 
 stove 
 
 commode 
 
 ( chest of drau 
 \ ers 
 
 match 
 
 trumeau 
 
 pier-glass 
 
 flint 
 
 toilette 
 
 toilet 
 
 steel ■ 
 
 miroir 
 
 looking-glass 
 
 oven 
 
 peigne m. 
 
 comb 
 
 towel 
 
 pomade 
 
 pomatum 
 
 warming-pan 
 
 poudre . 
 
 powder 
 
 ■ basket 
 
 houppe 
 parfum 
 
 V u Jf 
 perfume, 
 
 china-ware 
 
 tableau 
 
 picture 
 
 delft-ware 
 
 dessin 
 
 drawing 
 
 earthen-ware 
 
 coloris 
 
 colouring 
 
 pot 
 
 portrait 
 
 portrait 
 
 pitcher 
 
 paysage m. 
 
 landscape 
 
 lamp 
 
 miniature 
 
 miniature 
 
 lantern 
 
 chandelier 
 
 candlestick 
 
 $oap 
 
 bougeoir 
 
 flat candlestick 
 

 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 bobèche 
 
 socket 
 
 cuiller, or ci 
 
 I spoon 
 
 chandelle 
 
 candle 
 
 illère 
 
 bougie 
 
 wax-light 
 
 salière 
 
 salt-cellar 
 
 cire 
 
 wax 
 
 huillier 
 
 oil- cruet 
 
 mouchettes pi 
 
 . snuffers 
 
 moutardier 
 
 mustard-pot 
 
 porte-mou- 
 chettes m. 
 
 > snuffer-pan 
 
 aiguière 
 coupe, tasse 
 
 ewer 
 cup 
 
 éteignoir 
 
 extinguisher 
 
 gobelet 
 
 goblet 
 
 vergettespZ. 
 
 brush 
 
 verre ml 
 
 glass 
 
 buffet 
 
 cup-board 
 
 bouteille 
 
 bottle 
 
 cabaret 
 
 tea-board 
 
 bouchon 
 
 cork 
 
 tasse 
 
 cup 
 
 tire-bouchon 
 
 m. cork-screw 
 
 soucoupe 
 
 saucer 
 
 carafe 
 
 decanter 
 
 théière 
 
 tea-pot 
 
 bibliothèque 
 
 library 
 
 cafetière 
 
 coffee-pot 
 
 bureau 
 
 bureau 
 
 chocolatière 
 
 chocolate-pot 
 
 tiroir 
 
 drawer 
 
 sucrier 
 
 sugar-basin 
 
 cachet 
 
 seal 
 
 jatte 
 
 bowl 
 
 lettre 
 
 letter 
 
 table 
 
 table 
 
 enveloppe 
 
 cover 
 
 nappe 
 
 cloth 
 
 adresse 
 
 direction 
 
 serviette 
 
 napkin 
 
 signature 
 
 signature 
 
 assiette 
 
 plate 
 
 sonnette 
 
 bell 
 
 plat 
 
 dish 
 
 estampe 
 
 print 
 
 couteau 
 
 knife 
 
 médaille 
 
 medal 
 
 
 OF THE CITY. 
 
 
 ville 
 
 iown^ city 
 
 frontispice m» 
 
 frontispiece 
 
 village m. 
 
 village 
 
 portail 
 
 portal 
 
 bourg 
 
 borough 
 
 colonne 
 
 column 
 
 rue 
 
 street 
 
 pilastre m. 
 
 pilaster 
 
 carrefour 
 
 cross-way 
 
 base 
 
 base 
 
 passage m. 
 
 passage 
 
 piédestal 
 
 pedestal 
 
 place / 
 
 square 
 
 statue 
 
 statue 
 
 cul-de-sac 
 pyramide 
 
 ( no thorough- 
 I fare 
 pyramid 
 
 arcade 
 portique m. 
 
 arcade 
 ) portico, or 
 3 azsa 
 
 obélisque m. 
 
 obelisk 
 
 aqueduc 
 
 aqueduct 
 
 pavé 
 
 pavement 
 
 dôme m. 
 
 dome 
 
 ruisseau 
 
 kennel 
 
 paroisse 
 
 parish 
 
 marché 
 
 market 
 
 comédie 
 
 play-house 
 
 denrées pi. 
 
 provisions 
 
 théâtre m. 
 
 stage 
 
 boucherie 
 
 meat-market 
 
 coulisses pi. 
 
 scenery 
 
 poissonnerie 
 
 fish-market 
 
 décorations 
 
 decorations 
 
 triperie 
 
 old clothes shop 
 
 toile 
 
 curtain 
 
 édifice m. 
 
 edifice 
 
 foyer 
 
 green-room 
 
 façade 
 
 front 
 
 orchestre m» 
 
 orchestra 
 
 52) 
 
60 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 parterre m, 
 
 pit 
 
 trésorerie 
 
 treasury 
 
 loge 
 
 box 
 
 amirauté 
 
 admiralty 
 
 amphitéâtre m 
 
 . first gallery 
 
 arsenal 
 
 arsenal 
 
 paradis 
 
 upper ^dlery 
 
 faubourgs 
 
 suburbs 
 
 billet 
 
 ticket 
 
 boulevards pi. 
 
 bulwarks 
 
 couvent 
 
 convent 
 
 remparts pi. 
 
 rump arts 
 
 monastère m. 
 
 monastery 
 
 barrière 
 
 turnpike 
 
 cellule 
 
 cell 
 
 guinguette 
 forge 
 
 tea-garden 
 
 hermitage m- 
 
 hermitage 
 
 forge 
 
 solitude 
 
 solitude 
 
 verrerie 
 
 glass-house 
 
 retraite 
 
 retirement 
 
 fonderie 
 
 foundery 
 
 université 
 
 university 
 
 carrosse m. 
 
 coach 
 
 collège nu 
 
 college 
 
 impériale 
 
 roof 
 
 école 
 
 schow 
 
 portière 
 
 coach door 
 
 pension 
 
 boarding school 
 
 glaces/)/. 
 
 windows 
 
 parlement 
 
 parliament 
 
 timon 
 
 coach-pole 
 
 chambre-haute 
 ou des pairs 
 
 > I home of lords rou . e 
 $ J essieu 
 
 wheel 
 
 axle-tree 
 
 chambre basse 
 
 (house of 
 
 equipage vu 
 
 equipage 
 
 ou des com- 
 
 harnais ??/. 
 
 harness 
 
 
 i commons 
 
 
 
 munes 
 
 
 renés pi. 
 
 reins 
 
 prison 
 
 prison 
 
 bride 
 
 b.idle 
 
 cachot 
 
 dungeon 
 
 licou 
 
 halter 
 
 hôpital 
 
 hospital 
 
 selle 
 
 saddle 
 
 infirmerie 
 
 infirmary 
 
 bât 
 
 pack-saddle 
 
 taverne 
 
 tavern 
 
 arçon 
 
 saddle-bow 
 
 cabaret 
 
 public-house 
 
 sangle 
 
 girth 
 
 auberge 
 
 inn 
 
 étriers pi. 
 
 stirrup 
 
 café 
 
 coffee -house 
 
 éperons pi. 
 
 spurs 
 
 enseigne 
 
 sign 
 
 berline 
 
 berlin 
 
 affiche 
 
 bill 
 
 cabriolet 
 
 gk 
 
 pont 
 
 bridge 
 
 chaise 
 
 chaise 
 
 arche 
 
 arch 
 
 fiacre vu 
 
 hackney-coach 
 
 pilier 
 
 pillar 
 
 charrette 
 
 carl 
 
 bateau 
 
 boat 
 
 fourgon 
 
 waggon 
 
 quai 
 
 key, on a river 
 
 remise 
 
 coach house 
 
 bourse 
 
 exchange 
 
 rasoir 
 
 razor 
 
 banque 
 
 bank 
 
 cuir 
 
 strap 
 
 agiotages. 
 
 stock-jobbing 
 
 moule 
 
 mould 
 
 douane 
 
 custom- house 
 
 machine 
 
 machine 
 
 poste 
 
 general post 
 
 moulin 
 
 mill 
 
 petite-poste 
 
 twopenny post 
 
 
 
 OF 
 
 TRADES, ARTS 
 
 , PROFESSION, 
 
 fee 
 
 boulanger 
 
 baker 
 
 relieur 
 
 book-binder 
 
 perruquier 
 
 hair-dresser 
 
 libraire m. 
 
 bookseller 
 
 forgeron 
 
 blacksmith 
 
 chaudronnier 
 
 brazier 
 

 
 Vocabulary» 
 
 i 
 
 brasseur 
 
 brewer 
 
 serrurier 
 
 locksmith 
 
 boucher 
 
 butcher 
 
 maçon 
 
 bricklayer 
 
 ébéniste 
 
 cabinet-maker 
 
 maître d'hôtel 
 
 steward 
 
 charpentier 
 
 carpenter 
 
 mercier 
 
 mercer 
 
 charron 
 
 wheel-wright 
 
 meunier 
 
 miller 
 
 sculpteur 
 
 carver 
 
 peintre 
 
 painter 
 
 chimiste 
 
 chymist 
 
 pâtissier 
 
 pastry-cook 
 
 horloger 
 
 clock-maker 
 
 paveur 
 
 paviour 
 
 confiseur 
 
 confectioner 
 
 colporteur 
 
 pedlar 
 
 carrossier 
 
 coach-maker 
 
 parfumeur 
 
 perfumer 
 
 tonnelier 
 
 cooper 
 
 médecin 
 
 physician 
 
 corroyeur 
 
 currier 
 
 plâtrier 
 
 plasterer 
 
 coutelier 
 
 cutler 
 
 plombier 
 
 plumber 
 
 fournisseur 
 
 sword-cutler 
 
 potier 
 
 potter 
 
 teinturier 
 
 dyer 
 
 imprimeur 
 
 printer 
 
 distillateur 
 
 distiller 
 
 sellier 
 
 saddler 
 
 droguiste 
 
 druggist 
 
 lingère 
 
 sempstress 
 
 graveur 
 
 engraver 
 
 couturière. 
 
 ?nanlua-make> 
 
 maréchal 
 
 farrier 
 
 tailleur 
 
 tailor 
 
 poissonnier 
 
 fishmonger 
 
 cordonnier 
 
 shoe-maker 
 
 fondeur 
 
 founder 
 
 pelletier 
 
 skinner 
 
 fruitier 
 
 fruiterer 
 
 forgeron 
 
 smith 
 
 fourreur 
 
 furrier 
 
 chirurgien 
 
 surgeon 
 
 jardinier 
 
 gardener 
 
 apothicaire 
 
 apothecary 
 
 doreur 
 
 gilder 
 
 arpenteur 
 
 surveyor 
 
 verrier 
 
 glass-maker 
 
 tanneur 
 
 tanner 
 
 vitrier 
 
 glazier 
 
 tourneur 
 
 . turner 
 
 gantier 
 
 glover 
 
 entrepreneur 
 
 undertaker 
 
 orfèvre 
 
 goldsmith 
 
 tapissier 
 
 upholsterer 
 
 joaillier 
 bijoutier 
 
 {jeweller 
 
 horloger 
 tisserand 
 
 watch-maker 
 weaver 
 
 épicier 
 
 grocer 
 
 perruquier 
 
 wig-maker 
 
 armurier 
 
 armourer 
 
 ouvrage 
 
 work 
 
 chapelier 
 
 halter 
 
 ouvrier 
 
 work-man 
 
 aubergiste 
 
 innkeeper 
 
 ouvrière 
 
 work-woman 
 
 menuisier 
 
 joiner 
 
 manœuvre 
 
 labourer 
 
 OF THE COUNTRY, HUSBANDRY, FLOWERS, TREES, &< 
 
 campagne 
 
 country 
 
 hameau 
 
 hamlet 
 
 chemin 
 
 way 
 
 enclos 
 
 close 
 
 sentier 
 
 fool-way 
 
 château 
 
 castle 
 
 boue 
 
 mud 
 
 terre 
 
 estate 
 
 fange 
 
 mire 
 
 cour 
 
 yard 
 
 poussière 
 
 dust 
 
 basse-cour 
 
 poultry-yard 
 
 bourbier 
 
 slough 
 
 colombier 
 
 pigeon-house 
 
 orflière 
 
 cQft-rut 
 
 laiterie 
 
 dairy 
 
 81 
 
62 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 écurie 
 
 stable 
 
 jardin 
 
 garden 
 
 fruiterie 
 
 fruit -lofl 
 
 OF HERBS 
 
 jardinage m. 
 
 gardening, 
 
 
 AND PLANTS. 
 
 
 aloès 
 
 aloe 
 
 moutarde 
 
 mustard 
 
 angéliquc 
 
 angelica 
 
 capucine 
 
 nasturtium 
 
 artichaut 
 
 artichoke 
 
 ortie 
 
 nettle 
 
 asperge 
 
 asparagus 
 
 oignon 
 
 onion 
 
 mélisse 
 
 balm 
 
 persil 
 
 parsley 
 
 basilic 
 
 basil 
 
 panais 
 
 parsnip 
 
 fève 
 
 bean 
 
 pois 
 
 peas 
 
 haricot 
 
 french-bean 
 
 pariétaire 
 
 pellitory 
 
 poirée 
 
 beet 
 
 plante 
 
 plant 
 
 betterave 
 
 beet-root 
 
 plantain 
 
 plantain 
 
 bourrache 
 
 borage 
 
 pavot 
 
 poppy 
 
 bardane 
 
 burdock 
 
 pomme-de-terrepo/a/oe 
 
 primprenelle 
 
 bur net 
 
 courge 
 
 pumpkin 
 
 chou 
 
 cabbage 
 
 pourpier 
 
 purslain 
 
 carotte 
 
 carrot 
 
 rave 
 
 radish 
 
 céleri 
 
 cdery 
 
 radis 
 
 Spanish radish 
 
 cerfeuil 
 
 chervil 
 
 roseau 
 
 reed 
 
 choux-fleurs pi 
 
 . cauliflowers 
 
 rue 
 
 rue 
 
 mâches pi. 
 
 corn-sallad 
 
 jonc 
 
 rush 
 
 cresson 
 
 cresses 
 
 rhubarbe 
 
 rhubarb 
 
 concombre m. 
 
 cucumber 
 
 safran 
 
 saffron 
 
 dent-de-lion 
 
 dandelion 
 
 sauge 
 
 sage 
 
 patience 
 
 dock 
 
 sarette 
 
 savery 
 
 chicorée 
 
 endive 
 
 ciboule 
 
 scallion 
 
 fenouil 
 
 fennel 
 
 échalote 
 
 shallot 
 
 fougère 
 
 fern 
 
 oseille 
 
 sorrel 
 
 ail 
 
 garlic 
 
 véronique 
 
 speedwell 
 
 calebasse 
 
 gourd 
 
 épinards pi. 
 
 spinage 
 
 ciguë 
 
 hemlock 
 
 tanaisie 
 
 tansy 
 
 herbe 
 
 herb 
 
 ivraie 
 
 tare 
 
 raifort 
 
 horse-radish 
 
 estragon 
 
 stragon 
 
 joubarbe 
 
 house-leek 
 
 chardon 
 
 thistle 
 
 lierre m. 
 
 ivy 
 
 thym 
 
 thyme 
 
 poireau 
 
 leek 
 
 serpolet 
 
 wild thyme 
 
 laitue 
 
 lettuce 
 
 trèfle m. 
 
 trefoil 
 
 réglisse 
 
 licorice 
 
 navet 
 
 turnip 
 
 mauve 
 
 mallows 
 
 valériane 
 
 valerian 
 
 guimauve 
 
 marsh-mallows 
 
 végétaux/?/. 
 
 vegetables 
 
 marjolaine 
 réséda 
 
 marjoram 
 mignonette 
 
 légumes m. pi. 
 
 { vegetables^ 
 I greens 
 
 menthe 
 
 mint 
 
 verveine 
 
 vervain 
 
 gui 
 
 mislctee 
 
 absynthe 
 
 wormumod 
 
 mousse 
 
 moss 
 
 m ille-f entile 
 
 yarrow 
 

 VOCABULARY. 
 
 
 
 
 FLOWERS. 
 
 
 deuriste 
 parterre 
 
 florist 
 flower garden 
 
 chèvre-feuille 
 ni. 
 
 > lioney-suckte 
 
 ileur 
 
 flower 
 
 
 seringat 
 
 seringa 
 
 iris 
 
 crocus 
 
 
 Hlas 
 
 lilac 
 
 primevère 
 
 cows'ip 
 
 
 souci 
 
 marigold 
 
 narcisse m. 
 
 narcissus 
 
 
 amaranth e 
 
 amaranth 
 
 jacinthe 
 
 hyacinth 
 
 
 pavot 
 
 poppy 
 
 mlipe 
 violette 
 
 iulip 
 liolet 
 
 
 coquelicot 
 ponceau 
 
 i wild-poppy 
 
 pensée 
 
 pansy 
 
 
 bluet, barbeau 
 
 i blue-bell 
 
 marguerite 
 
 daisy 
 
 
 tournesol 
 
 sun-floicer 
 
 impériale 
 
 lurk's cap 
 
 
 camomille 
 
 camomile 
 
 martagon 
 lis 
 
 mounlain-l 
 lily 
 
 % 
 
 belle-de-nuit 
 
 $ grtat night 
 I shade » 
 
 muguet 
 
 may-lily 
 
 
 éternelle 
 
 > cassidony 
 
 oreille-d'ours 
 
 auricula 
 
 
 immortelle 
 
 anémone 
 
 anemone 
 
 
 balsamine 
 
 balsam 
 
 renoncule 
 
 ranunculus 
 
 
 ancolie 
 
 columbine 
 
 jonquille 
 
 jonquil 
 
 
 passe-rose 
 
 hollyhock 
 
 giroflée 
 
 slock-gillifi 
 
 ' OW 67 
 
 ■ hépatique 
 
 htpatica 
 
 œillet 
 
 pink 
 
 
 pied-d'alouetti 
 
 b lark-spur 
 
 campanule 
 
 ^bell-flower 
 
 
 pivoine 
 
 piony 
 
 ^antelée 
 
 
 scabieuse 
 
 scabious 
 
 rose 
 
 rose 
 
 
 julienne 
 
 rocket 
 
 jasmin 
 
 jasmine 
 
 
 planche 
 
 bed, 
 
 tubéreuse 
 
 tuberose 
 
 
 plate-bande 
 
 flower-border 
 
 63 
 
 OF TREES AND SHRUBS. 
 
 arbre m. tree 
 
 arbrisseau shrub 
 
 écorce bark 
 
 branche branch 
 
 feuille leaf 
 
 graine seed 
 
 rejeton s>cker 
 
 abricotier apricot -tree 
 
 cerisier cherry-tree 
 
 châtaignier chesnut-lree 
 
 citronnier lemon-tree 
 
 coignassier qvince-tree 
 
 iiguier fig-tree 
 
 noyer walnut-tree 
 
 oranger orangt-tree 
 
 pêcher peach-tree 
 
 pommier 
 
 apple-tret 
 
 poirier 
 prunier 
 arbousier 
 
 pear-tree 
 
 plumb-tree 
 
 arbutus 
 
 frêne 
 
 ash-tree 
 
 tremble 
 hêtre 
 
 aspen 
 beech-tree 
 
 bouleau 
 
 birch-tree 
 
 buis 
 
 box 
 
 genêt 
 
 broom 
 
 sureau 
 
 elder-tret 
 
 orme 
 
 elm 
 
 sapin 
 
 coudrier 
 
 houx 
 
 4 
 
 lilas 
 7 
 
64 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 tilleul 
 
 myrte 
 
 chêne 
 
 osier 
 
 romarin 
 
 églantier 
 
 !ime-lree 
 
 myrtle-irec 
 
 oak 
 
 rosemary 
 sweet briar 
 
 épine 
 
 thorn 
 
 buisson 
 
 thorn-bush 
 
 aubépine 
 
 white-thorn 
 
 vigne 
 
 vine 
 
 saule 
 
 willow-tree 
 
 if 
 
 yew-tree 
 
 FRUITS. 
 
 amande 
 pomme 
 abricot 
 cerise 
 
 guigne 
 
 châtaigne 
 
 marron 
 
 groseilles pi. 
 
 groseille 
 
 ligue 
 
 aveline 
 
 raisin 
 
 prune 
 
 peine-claude 
 
 citron 
 
 ananas 
 
 nèfle 
 
 almond 
 
 apple 
 
 apricot 
 
 cherry 
 
 < black-heart 
 
 I cherry 
 
 chesnut 
 
 horse chesnut 
 
 currants 
 
 gooseberry 
 
 h 
 
 filbert 
 
 grapes 
 
 plum 
 
 green-gage 
 
 lemon 
 
 pine-apple 
 
 medlar 
 
 melon 
 
 mûre 
 
 brugnon 
 
 noisette 
 
 orange 
 
 pêche 
 
 poire 
 
 citrouille 
 
 coin 
 
 framboise 
 
 fraise 
 
 noix 
 
 épine-vinerte 
 
 grenade 
 
 olive 
 
 cerneaux 
 
 raisins-secs 
 
 melon 
 
 mulberry 
 
 nectarine 
 
 nut 
 
 orange 
 
 peach 
 
 pear 
 
 pumpion 
 
 quince 
 
 rasberry 
 
 strawberry 
 
 walnut 
 
 barberries 
 
 pomegranate 
 
 olive 
 
 Î kernels of 
 walnuts 
 raisins 
 
 grange 
 
 hutte 
 
 chaumière 
 
 seigneurie 
 
 dime 
 
 métairie 
 
 sillon 
 
 pré, prairie 
 
 arpent 
 
 fossé 
 
 champ 
 
 pâturage m. 
 
 terroir 
 
 parc 
 
 haie 
 
 bruyère 
 
 dunes 
 
 lande 
 
 PR03IISCU 
 barn 
 hut 
 
 lhatched-house 
 manor 
 tithe 
 farm 
 ridge 
 meadow 
 acre 
 ditch 
 field 
 
 pnstnre-ground 
 soil 
 pu rk 
 hedge 
 henth 
 downs 
 waste-land 
 
 OUS WORDS, 
 commune 
 plaine 
 garenne 
 fondrière 
 marais 
 plate-bande 
 serre 
 
 serre-chaude 
 boulingrin 
 berceau 
 bosquet 
 grotte 
 
 vignoble m. 
 pépinière 
 taillis 
 ballîer 
 
 ige m. 
 perspec 
 
 common 
 
 plain 
 
 warren 
 
 bog 
 
 marsh 
 
 border 
 
 green-house 
 
 hot -house 
 
 bowlin t 
 
 bower 
 
 grove 
 
 grotto 
 
 vineyard 
 
 7iursery 
 
 coppice 
 
 thtricet 
 
 landscape 
 
 prospect 
 

 
 OCABULARY. 
 
 c 
 
 vue 
 
 view 
 
 millet 
 
 millet 
 
 cascade 
 
 cascade 
 
 lin 
 
 flax 
 
 canal 
 
 canal 
 
 chanvre m. 
 
 hemp 
 
 agriculture 
 
 agricull 
 
 ure chènevis 
 
 hemp-seed 
 
 labourage m< 
 
 tillage 
 
 épi 
 
 ear (of corn) 
 
 bétail 
 
 caille ■ 
 
 gerbe 
 
 sheaf (of corn j 
 
 fumier 
 
 dung 
 
 tige 
 
 stalk 
 
 terreau 
 
 mould 
 
 tuyau 
 
 blade 
 
 récolte 
 
 crop 
 
 paille 
 
 stray) 
 
 moisson 
 
 harvest 
 
 chaume m. 
 
 Hubble 
 
 vendange 
 
 vin! age 
 
 foin 
 
 hay 
 
 houblon 
 
 hops 
 
 fourrage m. 
 
 fodder 
 
 grain 
 
 com 
 
 fermier 
 
 farmer 
 
 blé 
 
 iv he at 
 
 paysan 
 
 peasant 
 
 orge 
 
 barley 
 
 laboureur 
 
 ploughman 
 
 avoine 
 
 oats 
 
 moissonneur 
 
 reaper 
 
 riz 
 
 rice 
 
 faucheur 
 
 mower 
 
 seigle m. 
 
 rye 
 
 berger 
 
 shepherd 
 
 65 
 
 OF QUADRUPEDS. 
 
 bête beast 
 
 animal animal 
 
 animal domes- 
 tique 
 
 bête-de-somme beast of burden 
 j beast for the 
 
 lame beast 
 
 monture 
 
 cheval 
 
 cavale 
 
 jument 
 
 étalon 
 
 poulain 
 
 pouiiche 
 
 bidet . 
 
 âne 
 
 ânesse 
 
 ânon 
 
 mulet 
 
 mule 
 
 bête-à-cornes 
 
 bœuf 
 
 buffle m. 
 
 taureau 
 
 vache 
 
 génisse 
 
 veau 
 
 saddle 
 horse 
 mare 
 
 mare 
 
 sfallion 
 
 coït 
 
 jiiiy 
 
 'poney 
 
 css 
 
 milk- as s 
 
 young ass 
 
 mule 
 
 she-mule 
 
 horned beast 
 
 ox 
 
 buffalo 
 
 bull 
 
 cow 
 
 heifer 
 
 calf 
 
 bouvillon 
 
 bullock 
 
 renne m. 
 
 rein-deer 
 
 brebis 
 
 ewe 
 
 mouton 
 
 wether 
 
 bélier 
 
 ram 
 
 agneau 
 
 lamb 
 
 chèvre 
 
 she goal 
 
 bouc 
 
 he-goat 
 
 chevreau 
 
 hid 
 
 cochon 
 
 hog 
 
 porc 
 
 vk 
 
 pourceau 
 
 Pig 
 
 truie 
 
 sow 
 
 cochon-de-lait 
 
 sucking pig 
 
 cochon-d'inde 
 
 guinea pig 
 
 verrat 
 
 boar 
 
 sanglier 
 
 icild boar 
 
 laie 
 
 tv ild sow 
 
 marcassin 
 
 young wild boar 
 
 bête-fauve 
 
 deer 
 
 cerf 
 
 stag 
 
 biche 
 
 hind 
 
 faon 
 
 fawn 
 
 daim 
 
 fallow-deer 
 
 daim-mâle 
 
 buck 
 
 daim-femelle 
 
 doc 
 
Û6 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 chevreuil 
 
 chevrette 
 
 chamois ( 
 
 ■\on 
 
 lionne 
 
 lionceau 
 
 tigre 
 
 tigrêsse 
 
 ours 
 
 ourson 
 
 zèbre m 
 
 giraffe 
 
 léopard 
 
 caméléopard 
 
 rhinocéros 
 
 hippopotame m, 
 
 éléphant 
 
 «hameau 
 
 dromadaire m. 
 
 lama 
 
 buffle wi. 
 
 hyène 
 
 panthère 
 
 once 
 
 licorne 
 
 clan 
 
 loup 
 
 louve 
 
 louveteau 
 
 lynx 
 
 renard 
 
 latsson 
 
 blaireau 
 
 castor 
 
 hermine 
 
 marte, zibeline 
 
 écureuil 
 
 'hérisson 
 
 porc-épi c 
 
 loutre 
 
 raton 
 
 furet 
 
 lièvre 
 
 'hase 
 
 levraut 
 
 lapin 
 
 lapine 
 
 chien 
 
 chienne 
 
 roe-buck 
 
 roe 
 
 chamois 
 
 lion 
 
 lioness 
 
 lion's whelp 
 
 tiger 
 
 tigress 
 
 bear 
 
 bear's cub 
 
 zebra 
 
 giraffa 
 
 leopard 
 
 came lop ard 
 
 rhinoceros 
 
 riv^r-horse 
 
 elephant 
 
 camel 
 
 dromedary 
 
 lama 
 
 buffalo 
 
 hyena 
 
 panther 
 
 ounce 
 
 unicorn 
 
 elk 
 
 wolf 
 
 she-wolf 
 
 wolf's cub 
 
 lynx 
 
 fox 
 
 brock 
 
 badger 
 
 beaver 
 
 ermine 
 
 marten, sable 
 
 squirrel 
 
 hedge-hog 
 
 porcupine 
 
 otter 
 
 rackoon 
 
 ferret 
 
 hare 
 
 doe-hare 
 
 leveret 
 
 rabbit 
 
 doe-rabbi! 
 
 dog 
 
 bitch 
 
 lice 
 lévrier 
 levrette 
 dogue 
 doguîn 
 mâtin, 
 limier 
 bichon 
 épagneul 
 basset 
 barbet 
 
 chien-d'arrèt 
 meute de 
 chiens 
 chat, matou 
 chatte 
 chaton 
 rainon 
 
 lwund-bitch 
 
 greyhound 
 
 greyhound bilen 
 
 fruit dog 
 
 whelp 
 
 mastiff 
 
 blood-hound 
 
 lap-dog 
 
 spaniel 
 
 terrier 
 
 shaped-dog 
 
 pointer 
 
 ipack of hound; 
 
 cat) tom-cat 
 cat, puss 
 kitten 
 puss 
 
 minet, minette young kitte* 
 singe ,7i. monkey 
 
 guenon ape 
 
 magot, babouin baboon 
 
 gazelle 
 
 belette 
 
 poutois 
 
 fouine 
 
 genette 
 
 muse 
 
 loir 
 
 marmote 
 
 taupe 
 
 rat 
 
 souris 
 
 tortue 
 
 antelope 
 
 weasel 
 
 pole cat 
 
 pole-cat 
 
 wild cat 
 
 musk-cat 
 
 dormouse 
 
 marmot 
 
 mole s 
 
 rat 
 
 mouse 
 
 tortoise 
 
 bétail, bestiaux cattle 
 
 troupeau flock, herd 
 
 pâtre, berger shepherd 
 
 bergère shepherdess 
 vacher, bouvier cow-herd 
 
 porcher swine-herd 
 
 chasse hunting 
 
 chasseur hunter 
 
 braconnier poacher _ 
 gibier, yenaison game 
 
 fusil gun 
 
 gibecière poach 
 
 tiré shooting 
 
 tireur shooter 
 
 garde -chasse gamekeeper 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 6? 
 
 OF BIRDS. 
 
 • iseau 
 
 oiselet, oisillon 
 
 volaille 
 
 coq 
 
 poule 
 
 poulet 
 
 poussin 
 
 cochet 
 
 poularde 
 
 chapon 
 
 coq-d'Inde, î 
 dindon ; 
 
 dinde 
 
 dindonneau 
 
 oie 
 
 jar 
 
 oison 
 
 canard 
 
 cane 
 
 caneton, ca- 
 nette 
 
 pigeon 
 
 colombe 
 
 serin, canari 
 
 perroquet 
 
 perruche 
 
 moineau, 
 passereau 
 
 hirondelle 
 
 martinet 
 
 rossignol 
 
 chardonneret 
 
 pinson 
 
 verdier 
 
 bouvreuil 
 
 linot, linote 
 
 rouge-gorge m. 
 
 merle m. 
 
 grive 
 
 geai 
 
 pie 
 
 alouette 
 
 bergeronnette 
 
 alcyon ou mar- 
 tin-pécheur 
 
 pivert 
 
 bird 
 
 little bird 
 fowl 
 
 cock 
 
 hen 
 
 chicken 
 
 young chicken- 
 
 cockerel 
 
 pullet 
 
 capon 
 
 S turkey-cock 
 
 turkey-hen 
 
 young turkey 
 
 goose 
 
 gander 
 
 gosling . 
 
 drake 
 
 duck 
 
 > duckling 
 
 pigeon 
 dove 
 
 canary bird 
 parrot 
 paroquet 
 
 > sparrow 
 
 swallow 
 
 martin 
 
 nightingale 
 
 goldfinch 
 
 chaffinch 
 
 greenfinch 
 
 bullfinch 
 
 linnet 
 
 redbreast, robin 
 
 blackbird 
 
 thrush 
 
 magpie 
 
 lark 
 
 wagtail 
 
 ? kingfisher 
 
 woodpecker 
 
 mésange 
 
 pluvier 
 
 roitelet 
 
 vanneau 
 
 butor 
 
 bec-figue m. 
 
 é tourne au 
 
 sansonnet 
 
 bruant 
 
 coucou 
 
 freux, grolle 
 
 corbeau 
 
 corneille 
 
 hibou 
 
 chouette 
 
 buse 
 
 choucas 
 
 aigle 
 
 aiglon 
 
 épervier 
 
 ëmouchet 
 
 milan 
 
 faucon 
 
 cormoran 
 
 plongeon 
 
 héron 
 
 cigogne 
 
 outarde 
 
 pélican 
 
 autour 
 
 vautour 
 
 griffon 
 
 huppe 
 
 mouette 
 
 perdrix 
 
 bartavelle 
 
 perdreau 
 
 caille 
 
 cai^eteau 
 
 faisan 
 
 faisandeau 
 
 bécasse 
 
 bécassine 
 
 ortolan 
 
 tourterelle 
 
 7 * 
 
 Ht 
 
 plover 
 
 wren 
 
 lapwing 
 
 bittern 
 
 beccofico 
 
 starling 
 
 starling 
 
 yellow-hammer 
 
 cuckoo 
 
 rook 
 
 raven 
 
 crow 
 
 owl 
 
 screech-owl 
 
 buzzard 
 
 chough 
 
 eagle 
 
 eaglet 
 
 sparrow-hawk 
 
 musket-hawk 
 
 kite 
 
 falcon 
 
 cormoran*. 
 
 diver 
 
 heron 
 
 stork 
 
 buskard 
 
 pelican 
 
 gos-hawk 
 
 vulture 
 
 griffin 
 
 lapwing 
 
 gull 
 
 p; rtridge 
 \ large red par* 
 5 tridge 
 
 young partridge 
 
 quail 
 
 young quail 
 pheasant 
 young pheasant 
 woodcock 
 snipe 
 
 ortolan 
 turtle-dove 
 
es 
 
 VOCA 
 
 BULARY. 
 
 
 gelinotte 
 
 wood-hen 
 
 autruche 
 
 ostrich 
 
 franco! in 
 
 heath-cock 
 
 pintade 
 
 pintado 
 
 ramier 
 
 wood-pigeon 
 
 fou-de-bassan 
 
 gannet 
 
 macreuse 
 
 sea-duck 
 
 pingoin 
 
 ragor-bill 
 
 sarcelle 
 
 teal 
 
 chauvre-souris bat 
 
 gfoe 
 
 courlis 
 
 crane 
 curlew 
 
 chasse-aux- 
 oiseaux 
 
 yfowling 
 
 foulque 
 
 } coot, moorcock, 
 
 appeau 
 
 bird-call 
 
 $j or hen 
 
 gluaux 
 
 lime twigs 
 
 poule-d'eau 
 
 moor-hen 
 
 trébuchet 
 
 bird-trap 
 
 paon 
 
 peacock 
 
 filets 
 
 nets 
 
 paonne 
 
 pea-hen 
 
 oiseleur 
 
 bird-catcher 
 
 paonneau 
 
 young peacock 
 
 oiselier 
 
 bird-seller 
 
 dgne un* 
 
 swan 
 
 volière 
 
 aviary 
 
 
 OF FISHES. 
 
 
 poisson 
 
 fish 
 
 homard, lan- 
 
 > lobster 
 
 esturgeon 
 
 sturgeon 
 
 gouste 
 
 turbot 
 
 turbot 
 
 écrevisse-de- 
 
 saumon 
 
 salmon 
 
 mer 
 
 rouget 
 
 roach 
 
 écre visse 
 
 crawfish 
 
 brochet 
 
 pike 
 
 crabe m. 
 
 crab 
 
 carpe 
 
 carp 
 
 crevette 
 
 prawn 
 
 truite 
 
 trout 
 
 chevrette 
 
 shrimp 
 
 perche 
 
 perch 
 
 anguille 
 
 eel 
 
 cabillaud 
 
 fresh coil 
 
 anchois 
 
 anchovy 
 
 morue 
 
 stock-fish. 
 
 goujon 
 
 gudgeon 
 
 raie 
 
 skate 
 
 véron 
 
 minnoio 
 
 anche 
 
 tench 
 
 lotte, barbotte etl-pout 
 
 éperlan 
 
 smelt 
 
 loche 
 
 ( loach, ground 
 I Ung 
 
 maquereau 
 
 mackerel 
 
 
 surmulet 
 
 mullet 
 
 morue salée 
 
 salt-fish 
 
 carrelet 
 
 flounder 
 
 barbue 
 
 dab 
 
 barbeau 
 
 alose 
 
 barbel 
 shad 
 
 marsoin 
 
 J sea-hog, por 
 \ poise 
 
 sole 
 
 sole 
 
 espadon 
 
 saw-fish 
 
 sardine 
 
 sprat 
 
 porcelaine 
 
 sea-snail 
 
 thon 
 
 tunny 
 
 tortue 
 
 tortoise 
 
 plie 
 
 plaice 
 
 huître 
 
 oyster 
 
 congre m. 
 
 conger 
 
 pétoncle 
 
 cockle 
 
 merlan 
 
 whiting 
 
 moule 
 
 muscle 
 
 merluche 
 
 haddock 
 
 baleine 
 
 whale 
 
 hareng 
 
 herring 
 
 cachalot 
 
 cachalot 
 
 sèche 
 
 cuttlefish 
 
 burt, bref fish 
 
 requin 
 
 shark 
 
 limande 
 
 dauphin 
 
 dolphin 
 
 lamproie 
 
 lamprey 
 
 chien-marin 
 
 sea-dog * 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 :oup--marm 
 hérisson-de- 
 mer 
 frai 
 fretin 
 laite 
 
 œufs 
 
 museau 
 ouies 
 
 sea-woïf 
 sea-urchin 
 
 fry 
 
 young fish 
 
 soft roc 
 ( spawn, hard 
 \ roe 
 
 snout 
 
 gills 
 
 nageoire? fine 
 
 écailles scales 
 
 coquilles shells 
 
 arrêtes bones 
 pinces, braques claws 
 
 appât, amorce bait 
 
 pêcheur fisherman 
 
 pêche fishery 
 pêche-à-la- 
 ligne 
 
 angling 
 
 OF REPTILES AND INSECTS. 
 
 grenouille 
 
 frog 
 
 pou 
 
 louse 
 
 serpent 
 
 serpent 
 
 lente 
 
 nit 
 
 couleuvre 
 
 adder 
 
 puce 
 
 flea 
 
 vipère 
 
 viper 
 
 punaise 
 
 bug 
 
 scorpion 
 
 scorpion- 
 
 chenille 
 
 caterpillar 
 
 spic 
 
 a spick 
 
 papillon 
 
 butterfly 
 
 basilic 
 
 basilisk 
 
 mouche 
 
 fly 
 
 dragon 
 
 dragon 
 
 abeille 
 
 bee 
 
 tarentule 
 
 tarantula 
 
 frelon 
 
 hornet 
 
 crapaud 
 
 toad 
 
 bourdon 
 
 drone 
 
 lézard 
 
 lizard 
 
 guêpe 
 
 wasp 
 
 sang-sue 
 
 leech 
 
 taon 
 
 oxfly 
 
 limace 
 
 slug 
 
 cousin 
 
 gnat 
 
 ver 
 
 worm 
 
 can th aride 
 
 Spanish-fly 
 
 ver-luisant 
 
 glow-worm 
 
 hanneton 
 
 cockchafer 
 
 ver-coquin 
 
 vine-grub 
 
 sautereHe 
 
 grasshopper 
 
 ver-à-soie 
 
 silk-worm 
 
 cigale 
 
 balm-crickc 
 
 escargot 
 
 snail 
 
 araignée 
 
 spider 
 
 escarbot 
 grillon 
 
 beetle 
 cricket 
 
 toile-d^araig- 
 née 
 
 J cobweb 
 
 perce-oreille m. ear-wig 
 teigne moth 
 
 essaim-d'a- 
 beilles 
 
 I swarm of bees 
 
 ciron 
 
 hand- worm 
 
 miel 
 
 honey 
 
 fourmi 
 
 ant 
 
 cire 
 
 wax 
 
 charançon 
 
 weevil 
 
 rayon-de-miel 
 
 honeycomb 
 
 cloporte m. 
 
 wood-louse 
 
 ruche 
 
 hive 
 
 tique 
 
 tick 
 
 fourmilière 
 
 ant-hill 
 
 
 OF METALS, &C. 
 
 
 or 
 
 gold 
 
 platine 
 
 platina 
 
 argent 
 
 silver 
 
 vermeil 
 
 silver-gilt 
 
TO 
 
 VOCABULARY. 
 
 cuivre 
 
 airain 
 
 laiton 
 
 bronze 
 
 similor 
 
 fer 
 
 M-d'arclial 
 
 acier 
 
 fer-blanc 
 
 étain 
 
 plomb 
 
 mercure 
 
 vif-argent 
 
 copper 
 brass 
 
 latten-ivire 
 bronze 
 
 pinchbeck 
 
 iron 
 
 wire 
 
 steel 
 
 iron-tinned 
 
 tin, pewter 
 
 lead 
 
 mercury 
 
 quicksilver 
 
 soufre 
 
 nitre 
 
 saltpetre 
 
 bitume 
 
 antimoine 
 
 arsenic 
 
 alum 
 
 couperose/, 
 
 vitriol 
 
 carmin 
 
 pastel 
 
 ocre/. 
 
 vermillion 
 
 sulphur 
 
 nitre 
 
 saltpetre 
 
 bitumen 
 
 antimony 
 
 arsenic 
 
 alum 
 
 copperas 
 
 vitriol 
 
 carmine 
 
 pastel 
 
 ochre 
 
 red-had 
 
 
 OF 
 
 COLOURS. 
 
 
 blanc 
 
 white 
 
 rouge 
 
 red 
 
 noir 
 
 black 
 
 iaune 
 
 yellow 
 
 bleu 
 
 blue 
 
 brun 
 
 brown 
 
 vert 
 
 green 
 
 pourpre 
 
 purple 
 
 gris 
 orangé 
 
 grey 
 orange colou 
 
 OF PRE 
 
 écarlate 
 r indigo 
 
 scarlet 
 indigo 
 
 
 CIOUS STONES. 
 
 
 diamant 
 
 diamond 
 
 améthyste 
 
 am et h y si 
 
 topaze 
 émeraude 
 
 topaz 
 emerald 
 
 cornaline 
 onyx 
 
 cornelian 
 onyx 
 
 saphir 
 escarboucïe 
 
 sapphire 
 
 agatbe 
 
 agate 
 
 carbuncle 
 
 corail 
 
 coral 
 
 rubis 
 
 ruby 
 
 perle 
 
 pearl 
 
 OF THE PRINCIPAL COUNTRIES. 
 
 France 
 
 Italic 
 
 Espagne 
 
 Portugal 
 
 Turquie 
 
 Allemagne 
 
 Suisse 
 
 Prusse 
 
 Pologne 
 
 Bohême 
 
 Hongrie 
 
 France 
 
 Italy 
 
 Spain 
 
 Portugal 
 
 Turkey 
 
 Germany 
 
 Switzerland 
 
 Prussia 
 
 Pol-Hi 
 
 Bohemia 
 
 Hungary 
 
 Hollande 
 les Pays-Bas 
 
 Angleterre 
 
 Ecosse 
 
 Irlande 
 
 Russie 
 
 Danemaiu 
 
 Suède 
 
 Norvège 
 
 Tartarie 
 
 Arabie 
 
 Holland 
 
 the Netherlands 
 
 England 
 
 Scotland 
 
 Ireland 
 
 Russia 
 
 Denmark 
 
 Sweden 
 
 Xorway 
 
 Tartar y 
 
 Arabia 
 

 rOCABULAET. 
 
 
 ^erse 
 
 Persia 
 
 Monoémugï 
 
 Monaemugî . 
 
 înde 
 
 India 
 
 Caffrerie 
 
 Caffraria 
 
 Chine 
 
 China 
 
 Abyssinie 
 
 Abyssinia 
 
 Mogol 
 
 Mogul 
 
 Canada 
 
 Canada 
 
 Bengale 
 
 Bengal 
 
 Pensylvanie 
 
 Pennsylvania 
 
 .Malabar 
 
 Malabar 
 
 Maryland 
 
 Maryland 
 
 Japon 
 
 Japan 
 
 Virginie 
 
 Virginia 
 
 Barbarie 
 
 Barbary 
 
 Caroline 
 
 Carolina 
 
 Egypte 
 
 Egypt 
 
 Géorgie 
 
 Georgia 
 
 Biledulgerid 
 
 Biledulgerid 
 
 Pérou 
 
 Peru 
 
 Zaara 
 
 Zaara 
 
 Paraguay 
 
 Paraguay 
 
 Nigritie 
 
 Nigritia 
 
 Chili 
 
 ChilC 
 
 Guinée 
 
 Guinea 
 
 Brésil 
 
 Brazil 
 
 Ethiopie 
 
 Ethiopia 
 
 Guiane 
 
 Guiana 
 
 Zanguebar 
 
 Zanguebar 
 
 St. Domingue 
 
 St. Domingo 
 
 Monomotapa 
 
 Monomotapa 
 
 Jamaïque 
 
 Jamaica 
 
 71 
 
 INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES 
 
 The learner is to render the English definite article 
 (le before a noun masculine ^ 
 
 | la before a noun feminine lin the singu- 
 
 - , ! V before a noun masculine or feminine ( lar. 
 y | begining with a vowel or h mute J 
 
 I les before nouns of either gender in the plural and the 
 I indefinite. 
 
 by 5 
 
 un before a noun masculine singular. 
 une before a noun feminine singular. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Le livre the ho oh /estantes the fiants 
 
 la rue the street un hommo a man 
 
 Z'ame the soul une femme aworrxni 
 
 ^histoire the history « un héros a hero. 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 The wood ; the forest ; the houses ; the men ; the court 
 
 bois m. forêt f. maisons pi. hommes pi. cour i 
 
 the foot ; the arms ; the rjem ; the garden ; the windows 
 
 piedm. ferns pi. dÊnvbrcî. jardin m. fenêtres *p\ 
 
 a history ; a novel ; 4p foreigner; a walk ; a day 
 
 histoire f. roman m. étranger mÉk promenade (.jour m 
 
 ^ night; the sun ; the moon ; the sta^ «body; a £ard 
 
 nuit f. soleil m. lune f. étoiles pi. corps m. carte 1 
 
 a crowrt. 
 
 écu m. 
 
 He will render the English prepositions 
 
 % a bv g) 6 K anc * w ^en f°^°"" e d by the article, thus : 
 
72* 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 / du before a noun masculine singular beginning witL 
 
 V a consonant or h aspirated 
 
 of the by < de la before a noun feminine singular 
 
 J de V before any noun beginning with a vowel or h mute 
 
 \ des before any noun in the plural. 
 
 r au before a noun masculine singular beginning with 
 
 ^ a consonant or h aspirated 
 
 to the by < à la before a noun feminine singular 
 
 f àV before any noun beginning with a vowel or /t mute 
 
 \ aux before any noun in the plural. 
 And when these prepositions are followed by a or an, thus : 
 
 d'un before a noun masculine 
 'une before a noun feminine 
 , J a un before a noun masculine 
 y l a une before a noun feminine. 
 
 °f ah y\œ 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ])a pare 
 de la riviere 
 de l'esprit 
 ties carrosses 
 au parc 
 a la rivière 
 
 of the parle 
 of the river 
 of the mind 
 of the coaches 
 to the park 
 to the river 
 
 à l'esprit 
 aux carrosses 
 d'un jour 
 d'une nuit 
 à un jour 
 à une nuit 
 
 to the min J 
 tu the coachti 
 of a day 
 of a night 
 to a day 
 to a night 
 
 of the 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 The palace of the king ; of the queen ; of the man ; 
 
 palais m. roi m. reine f. homme h m. 
 
 men ; to the king ; to the queen ; to the man ; to the men . 
 hommes ol. 
 
 from a balcony; from a window ; of a prince ; to a princess ; 
 
 balcon m. fenêtre f. — m. princesse f. 
 
 of the gardens ; of the evening ; to the courtiers ; of a table ; U 
 
 jardins pi. soir m. courtisans pi. 1. 
 
 the master ; to a lady ; of the soul ; of the horse ; to a cat ; 
 maître m . dame f. âmeî. cheval m. chat m 
 
 of the houses ; of a carpet. 
 maisons pi. lapis ] 
 
 These same prepositions, w!l 
 nouns, my, thy, his, her, its, ovr^ 
 dered thus : 
 
 followed by the possessive pro 
 Ji^mand their % will be both ren 
 
 "/< 
 
 '*** W , 
 his, her, or t 
 
 our 
 
 your 
 
 their 
 
 ■ »"2/ 
 
 I his, her, its 
 I our 
 ' your 
 their 
 
 l>y dc 
 
 by à 
 
 ngular 
 m. 
 
 plural 
 f. m. and t 
 
 mon 
 
 ma met 
 
 ton 
 
 ta tes 
 
 son 
 
 sa ses 
 
 notre 
 
 notre nos 
 
 votre 
 leur 
 
 votre vos 
 leur leurs 
 
 mon 
 
 ma mes 
 
 ton 
 
 ta tes 
 
 son 
 
 sa ses 
 
 notre 
 
 notre nos 
 
 votre 
 leur 
 
 votre vos 
 leur 
 
 
ÏO THE EXERCISES, 78* 
 
 and likewise, when followed by the demonstrative -this or that, 
 these or those : 
 
 ( ce before a noun masculine beginning 
 of this or that, by de ) , with a consonant or A aspirated 
 io this ov that, by à < \ cet before a noun masculine beginning 
 J >/„ with a vowel or & mute 
 
 \ cette before a noun feminine 
 of these ot those, by de ces^£, c , . c .,, , 
 
 to itee or those, by à c|j» before nouns P lural Neither gender 
 
 *|RtAMPLES. 
 
 de mon père of my father à leur travail to their work 
 
 à ta mère to thy mother de cette terrasse from this terrace 
 
 de son frère of his brother de ce lieu of that place 
 
 de notre ville o/owr town de cette homme of this man 
 
 à votre maison to your house de ces arbres of these trees 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 Of my clothes; of thy handkerchief ; of his pocket: of your 
 habits pi. mouchoir m. poch f. 
 
 letters ; of our treasure; to //ieir house; of this steeple ; of thai 
 fetters pi. /résor m. inaisonf. clocher m , 
 
 hero ; 0/ //us tower ; of these models ; of my sister; to 
 
 héros m.h asp. tour i, modèles pi. sceur f. 
 
 .yow relations ; the top of this mountain ; to my friend ; 
 parens pi. sommet m. montagne f. ami m. 
 
 of these pleasures; 0/ our duties; to their connexions ; of 
 
 plaisirs pi. devoirs pi. liaisons pi. 
 
 fcw acquaintances ; to w?2/ neighbours. 
 connaissances pi. voisins pi. 
 
 The Apostrophe ( 5 ) marks, we have said, page 3, the 
 suppression of a rowel before another vowel, or ti mute, 
 as in V église for /a église, &c. 
 
 This suppression is called elision ; a, e, t, are the 
 only vowels liable to be thus cut off, and even of the 
 suppression of the last of these, only two instances oc- 
 cur, viz. in the conjunction si before the pronoun, singu- 
 lar and plural, il 9 Us. 
 
 The a is suppressed only in la feminine, both when an 
 article and a pronoun. 
 
 But the bus 1 op of e occurs, not only in the mas- 
 culine article and pronoun le, but also in many other 
 monosyllables, such as je, me, te, se, de, ce, ne, que. 
 
<72 
 
 INTEODUCTION. 
 
 and in the compound of que, such as, parceque>quoique, 
 puisque, jusque, vu que, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 orf 
 
 fla 
 la 
 U 
 le 
 
 je 
 me 
 
 te 
 
 se 
 
 le 
 la 
 ce 
 de 
 ne 
 
 que 
 
 si 
 si 
 
 parceque 
 
 quoique 
 
 puisque 
 
 jusque 
 
 vu que 
 
 dèsque 
 
 quelque 
 
 l'amitié 
 
 l'herbe 
 
 l'oiseau 
 
 l'honneur 
 
 j'ai 
 
 il m'oublie 
 
 je t'aime 
 
 il s'habille 
 
 vous l'aidez 
 
 vous l'obligez 
 
 c'est vrai 
 
 un coup-d'œil 
 — [n'oubliez pas 
 _U qu'attendez 
 
 i l vous ? 
 — 's'il arrivait 
 
 s'ilspoavaient 
 
 — '.parcequ'ilfaut 
 
 quoiqu'il fasse 
 
 $ puisqu'on 
 \ vous dit 
 { jusqu' à de- 
 l main 
 
 S vu qu'il ob- 
 tiendra 
 1^ dèsqu'on 
 l saura 
 \ quelqu'un 
 \ vient 
 
 r la amitié 
 la herbe 
 le oiseau 
 le honneur 
 je ai 
 
 il me oublie 
 je te aime 
 
 il se habille 
 
 vous le aidez 
 vous la obligez 
 ce est vrai 
 un coup de œil 
 ne oubliez pas 
 que attendez ) 
 vous ? S 
 
 for 1 si il arrivait 
 si ils pouvaient 
 parceque il ? 
 faut 
 
 quoique il 
 fasse 
 
 puisque on 
 vous dit 
 jusque à de- 
 main 
 vu que il 
 obtiendra 
 dèsque on 
 saura 
 
 quelque un 
 vient 
 
 the friendship 
 
 the grass 
 
 the bird 
 
 the honour 
 
 I have 
 
 he forgets me 
 
 / love thee 
 ( he dresses 
 I himself 
 
 you help him 
 
 you oblige her 
 
 it is true 
 
 a glance 
 
 do not forget 
 
 what do you 
 
 expect ? 
 if it happened 
 if they could 
 because it is 
 
 requisite 
 whatevtr he 
 
 may do 
 since they tell 
 you 
 
 till to-morrow 
 
 since he will 
 
 obtain 
 as soon tu it 
 will be known 
 somebody 
 
 comes 
 
 It is allowable either to retrench, or to retain the final 
 c of the preposition entre, between, among, when it is 
 placed before the pronouns eux. elles, and autres ; but 
 it is always rescinded in the following compound words : 
 
 Entr'acte 
 s'e ntr' aider 
 entr'ouir 
 entr'ouvrir 
 
 an inttrlude 
 to help ont another 
 to hear imperfectly 
 to half open 
 
 >for 
 
 entre-acte 
 • se entre-aider 
 I entre-ou'ir 
 
 entre-ouvrir 
 
 and in a few others ; but it is indifferent to say ; 
 
TO THE EXERCISES. 78 
 
 entre eux ) C entr'eux between them 
 
 entre elles >or< entr'elles between them 
 
 entré autres choses ) ( entr'autres choses among other things 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The soul ; the heroine ; the mind ; he loves him ; she 
 âme f. héroïne f. esprit m. il aime 2 le 1 : eZ/e 
 
 loves &er ; J love this man ; you do not understand 
 
 2 la I ; je aime homme m. vous * ne*entendez 2 pas 3 
 me ; he esteems thee ; he goes away ; it was Me golden age ; 
 me 1 : il estime 2 te 1 ; se en-ra ce eta*/ de or 2 âge 1 ; 
 
 do not go there ; if he comes : if they please : what has he 
 * ne ailes pas là ; s& vient; ils veulent ; que a-t-il 
 
 said? till night; though he says ; since he knows 
 
 dit ? jusque au soir m. quoique dise ; puisque sait ; 
 
 when he saw : between them ; somebody is come. 
 lorsque vit ; entre eux ; quelque un est venu. 
 
 N. B. In the following French negative modes of 
 speech, which answer to the accompanying nglish 
 translation, the caret points out the place which the 
 French verb must occupy, whenever it is not in the in- 
 finitive mood. 
 
 f je ne suis pas, &c. lam not, &c> 
 nous n'avons ) j - 
 point \™ have not 
 
 il ne joue jamais he never plays 
 
 vous ne dites > ... 
 
 rien ^ you say nothing 
 
 T \ne pas 
 
 - w {ne A pjint 
 
 never ne* jamais 
 
 nothing ne A rien 
 
 nobody ne* personne 
 not a jot ne A goutte 
 
 Vas 
 
 e ne vois per- ? r „ , , 
 
 * i il see nobody 
 
 sonne y ** 
 
 il do not see, or 
 
 je ne vois goutte < / see not in the 
 
 ( least 
 
 -*" S n V^ Ulle J [ J % n aT iSnall 1^— *" 
 
 But in compound tenses, it is the auxiliary verb that 
 parts the negative we from the pas, or p<rint 9 &c. that 
 accompany it, as nous n'avons point parlé, we have not 
 spoken ; on Saurait jamais cru, one could never have be- 
 lieved. 
 
 N. B. The addition of pas, or point, to the negative particle we, 
 must not be considered as a second negation : but only as a com- 
 plementary part of it. For in such cases, pas, point, goptte, are 
 mere restrictive terms, nearly resembling the English words, jot, 
 bit, tittle, sometimes added to not, with this difference, that pas 
 andpoiîit in French have nothing trivial in them. 
 
 5 
 
74 
 
 INTRODUCTION 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 I do not say , 1 have not said ; 1 have never seen ; I neve. 
 
 * dit ai dit ai vu 
 
 (tell a falsehood) ; I do nothing ; I have done nothing ; is he 
 
 mens fais fait est-il 
 
 not arrived ? does not he come ? I see nothing ; has he never seen ? 
 
 arrivé * Z vient » vois a-t- vu 
 
 he never loses his time ; that (is worth) nothing ; I met nobody 
 ptrd ttneps m. cda vaut rencontrai 
 
 There are many words which are alike in both lan- 
 guages, and others which differ only in their termina- 
 tion. 
 
 The expressions, which are perfectly alike, are par- 
 ticttlayly those that have the following terminations : 
 
 S animal, cardinal, fatal, general, local, moral, natal 
 original, principal, he. 
 
 < capable, fable, &c bible, eligible. he. noble, double. 
 ( soluble, insoluble, he. t 
 S face, grimace grâce, place, preface, race surface, 
 (. trace he, 
 
 ^ chance, complaisance, extravagance, ignorance, 
 ( lance temperance he. 
 
 ! abstinence, conference continence, diligence, elo- 
 quence, patience, he. 
 K artifice auspices edifice, justice, injustice, office, 
 ( orifice, pr cipice solstice he. 
 
 < miracle, oracle, obstacle, receptacle, tabernacle, 
 I spectacle, he. 
 
 i ambuscade cavalcade, brigade, esplanade, séré- 
 ( nade retrograde he. 
 
 i age. adage, bandage, cage, cordage, image, page. 
 I plumage, rage, tec. 
 
 i college, privilege. Sacrilege, siege, sortilege, 
 I &c. 
 
 {vestige doge, barge, charge, orange, forge, rouge, 
 \ refuge, déluge. &c 
 
 i globule, ridicule, animalcule corpuscule, formule, 
 ( module, mule pustule valvule, he 
 c bile, débile, agile docile ductile, facile, fragilr : 
 I nubile, reptile, versatile, kc 
 i carabine, fascine, doctrine, heroine, machine, ma- 
 \ rine, famine, mine rapine ice. 
 i action, fraction, légion, nation, opinion, passion. 
 ). question, religion, kc. 
 
 al ' 
 
 as 
 
 -ble 
 
 
 -ace 
 
 
 -ance 
 
 
 ence 
 
 
 • ice 
 
 
 -acle 
 
 
 -ade 
 
 — - 
 
 -age 
 
 
 -ege 
 
 
 -g e 
 
 
 -ule 
 
 
 -ile 
 
 
 
 -ine 
 
 
 
 -ion 
 
 1 
 
ant 
 -ent 
 
 TO THE EXERCISES. ?5 
 
 arrogant, constant, elegant, elephant, pétulant, 
 piquant, poignant, vigil -dt, &c. 
 j absent, accident, compliment, augment, content, 
 I element, fréquent, serpen 1 fed. 
 
 \ 
 
 Many other English words require only the change 
 of termination, in the following manner : 
 
 -gy 
 
 into gie 
 
 as energy 
 
 euergie 
 
 -ary 
 
 -aire 
 
 — military 
 
 militaire 
 
 -ory 
 
 -oire 
 
 — glory 
 
 gloire 
 
 CU 
 
 -ce 
 
 — clemency 
 
 clémence 
 
 -ty 
 
 té 
 
 — beauty 
 
 beauté 
 
 -CHS 
 
 -eux 
 
 — dangerous 
 
 dangereux 
 
 -SUT 
 
 ■ -eur 
 
 — favour 
 
 faveur 
 
 -or 
 
 — -eur 
 
 — error 
 
 erreur 
 
 -me 
 
 7 -i n 
 
 — clandestins 
 
 clandestin 
 
 Ave 
 
 -if 
 
 — expressive 
 
 expressif 
 
 -ry 
 
 -pie 
 
 — fury 
 
 furie 
 
 -dy 
 
 -die 
 
 — perfidy 
 
 perfidie 
 
 
 ( 
 
 -eux 1 
 
 C -euse 
 feminine in< -ive 
 ( -ine 
 
 N.B. 
 
 Adjectives in <^ 
 
 -if Smake their 
 
 
 ( 
 
 -in S 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The beauty of that fable; the horror of vice ; the utility 
 
 f. f. f h m. art. m. f. 
 
 of science ; the atrocity of this action ; the violence of his 
 art. f. f. f. f. 
 
 passions ; the simplicity of that machine ; an audacious 
 
 pi. f. f. 2. 
 
 conspirator ; the absurdity of that opinion ; the militarv 
 
 m. 1 f f pi. 2 
 
 evolutions ; an industrious nation ; an important victory ; an 
 
 pi 1 2 f. I. 2 f. 1 
 
 alimentary pension ; a dangerous animal ; a figurative 
 
 % f. 1 2 m. t 2 
 
 expression ; a famous general ; his constant generosity, he is 
 f. 1. m. 2 f . 1 il est 
 
 incapable of attention ; his imprudence is visible ; his fidelity 
 
 son f. 
 
 is indubitable ; she rs very attentive ; .your clemency is 
 
 elle est très- f. f. 
 
 admirable ; the destruction of his fortune was the consequence 
 f. f. Jut I 
 

 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 of his temerity ; she is very scrupulous ; his condition is horrible , 
 
 f. très- f. f. 
 
 his parents are very miserable ; this history is incontestable ; 
 
 pi. sont très- pi. f. 
 
 your facility is prodigious ; his perfidy is odious ; it was an hor- 
 
 f. f. f. ce était 
 
 rible famine : the sublimity of his sentiments is still preferable 
 
 f. f. m. encore 
 
 to the energy of his expressions ; it was a decisive action ; the 
 
 f. f . 2 f. 1 
 
 carnage was terrible ; that obstacle is invincible ; this 
 
 m. fut cet nie 
 
 instrument is not harmonious ; the prosperity of the wicked i? 
 m. f. michans pi 
 
 not durable ; your insidious presents are not acceptable ; his 
 
 2 pi. sont pi. 
 
 memory is truly extraordinary ; that is his principal occupation : 
 
 f. vraiment ce est f. f. 
 
 a central position; his extravagance v is visible : these argu- 
 
 f. 2. f. 1 son f. ces m 
 
 ments are insoluble, 
 pi. 
 
 PART I. 
 
 OF WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR NATURE 
 AND INFLECTIONS. 
 
 There are, in French, nine sorts of words, or parts o\ 
 speech, namely, 
 
 1. Substantive, or Noun, 4. Pronoun, 7. Preposition, 
 
 2. Article, 5, Verb, 8. Conjunction, 
 
 3. Adjective, 6. Adverb, 9. Interjection. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 
 
 The substantive is a word, which serves to name a 
 person, or thing, as Pierre, Peter ; livre, book, &c. 
 There are fwo sorts of substantives, the substantia? 
 
OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 7t 
 
 proper, or proper name, and the substantive common, al- 
 so called appellative. 
 
 The proper name is that which is applied to a par- 
 ticular person, or thing, as Cesar, Cesar ; la Tamise, (he 
 Thames. 
 
 The substantive common is that which belongs to a 
 whole class of objects. The word homme, man, is a sub- 
 stantive common, as it is applicable to any individual, as 
 Peter, Paul, John, &c. 
 
 Of these nouns, some are collective, and others a&- 
 stract. 
 
 Collectives express either a whole mass, as une armée, 
 an army: une forêt, a forest: or a partial assemblage, 
 as une quantité de, &c. a certain, quantity of; la plupart, 
 most part, &c. 
 
 Abstract nouns are the names of qualities abstracted 
 from their subjects, as, surface, ronitu?, science, sagesse; 
 surface, roundness, knowledge, wisdom, &c. 
 
 In substantives, are to be considered Gender and Num- 
 her. 
 
 OF GENDER. 
 
 There are only two genders, the masculine anâfemi- 
 nine. 
 
 The masculine belongs to the male kind, as un horn- 
 me, a man ; un lion, a lion, &e. 
 
 The feminine belongs to the female kind, as une fem- 
 me, a woman ; unr lioiine, a lioness, &c\ 
 
 This distinction has, through imitation, been ex- 
 tended to all substantives, as, un livre, a book, is mas- 
 culine ; une table, a table, is feminine, &c. see p. 37 
 40, &c, 
 
 OF NUMBER. 
 
 There are two numbers ; the singular and the plu- 
 ral. 
 
 The singular expresses one single object, as un homme. 
 ' un livre. 
 
 S* 
 
78 
 
 OP THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 The plural announces more objects than one, as de? 
 hommes y des livres. 
 
 Proper names have no plural, as Londres, Paris, Mil 
 ton, &c. 
 
 OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH 
 SUBSTANTIVES. 
 
 GENERAL RULE. 
 
 The singular is ge-^J Singular, 
 
 nerally changed ? 
 into a plural, by } 
 adding an s. J 
 
 | ( Singular. Plural. 
 
 Y as { le roi the king les rois the kings 
 j la reine the queen les reines the queen? 
 
 Sing. 
 
 "* r remain un 
 ~*l alterable. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 FIRST EXCEPTION. 
 
 Singular. 
 ^ le fils, 
 \ la voix, 
 fie 
 
 nez 
 
 the son ; 
 the voice ; 
 the nose ; 
 
 Plural, 
 
 les fils, ike sons. 
 
 les voix, the voices. 
 
 les nez the 
 
 SECOND EXCEPTION. 
 
 Sing-. 
 
 Singular. 
 ( bateau 
 J feu 
 \ vœu. 
 v bijou, 
 
 boat ; 
 
 Jire; 
 vow : 
 jewel ; 
 
 THIRD EXCEPTION. 
 
 Sing, 
 -a/t 
 
 Plural. Singular. 
 
 t } are changed \ -aux ) J cheval, 
 'Il J into } ux > M I travail, 
 
 horse ; 
 work ; 
 
 Plurai. 
 
 bateaux, boats. 
 
 feux, Jircs. 
 
 vœux, vows. 
 
 bijoux, jewels* 
 
 Plural. 
 
 chevaux, horses. 
 
 travaux, works. 
 
 * Those in c ou, that take x in their plural, are chou, caillou-bijou, 
 genou hibou joujou, pou; the others now follow the general rule 
 and ULke -, as clou, clous ; verrou, verront, Sic. 
 
 t Several nouns in al. as 6a/ - al, pal, r gal. carnaval, local, &c 
 follow however the general rule, simply takinç s. 
 
 \ Those in -ail, making their plural in aux. are particularly bail, 
 sous bail, corail, émail, soupirail, travail, vantail, ventait; the rest, 
 aa altirnil, détail, éventail, gouvernail, portail, sérail,&c. follow the 
 : general rule. 
 
OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 
 
 FOURTH EXCEPTION. 
 Plural. 
 
 79 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 -ant* 1 1 now drop their f -ans Ç 7 enfant, child ; enfans, children, 
 ent* 5 t in polysyllables \ -ens \ y moment, moment ; momens, moments* 
 
 These 
 six are 
 irregular 
 
 Singular, 
 ail 
 
 bétail 
 aïeul 
 ciel 
 œil 
 bercail 
 
 garlick 
 cattle 
 
 grandfather 
 heaven 
 eye 
 sheep/old 
 
 Plural, 
 aulx 
 bestiaux 
 aïeux 
 cieux 
 yeux 
 
 has no plural 
 
 heads of garlick 
 cattle v 
 ancestors 
 heavens 
 eyes 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The flowers of the gardens ; 
 fleur jardin 
 
 he palaces of the kings ; 
 
 palais roi 
 
 vhe walnuts of their orchards : 
 
 noix verger 
 
 the feathers of these birds ; 
 
 -plume oiseau 
 
 gods of the pagan 
 dieu païen 
 
 the niceties of the languages : 
 délicatesse langue 
 the woods of those countries ; 
 bois pays 
 
 the pictures of those painters * 
 tableau peintre 
 
 the melody of their voices ; the 
 =f s voix 
 
 the jewels of my sisters ; the cabbages 
 bijou sœur chou 
 
 of our gardens ; these charming places ; the horses of my 
 
 jardin char mans 2 lieu 1 cheval 
 stables ; the fans of these ladies ; the (front gates) of those 
 
 écurie éventail dame portail 
 
 churches ; the actions of my ancestors ; the evils of this 
 
 église — aïeul mal 
 
 life ; the victories of those generals ; the works of those 
 
 vie = — travail 
 
 architects ; the corals of those seas ; the (learned men) ol 
 
 — iecte corail mer savant 
 
 those times ; the presents of my parents ; the teeth of youi 
 
 temps-là — — dent 
 
 pornos ; the playthings of our children : the heads of these 
 
 peigne joujou enfant tète 
 nails. 
 clou. 
 
 * Only polysyllables in -nt drop the t, but monosyllables retain 
 it. as chant, chants ; gant, gants; dent^ dents; &c. except, however 
 
 gent, gens. 
 
8C OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The Article is a small word prefixed to substantives, to 
 determine the extent of their signification. 
 
 Y le before a mascu. \ 
 The French 1 substantive f the plural is les foi 
 
 article is j la before a femin. £ both genders. 
 \ substantive J 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Sim, 5 U J 0Ur iheda V \r,\»r S les J ours ihe da V s 
 g * l la nuit the night $ riur * \ Its nuits the n&gbLs. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The sun, the moon, and the stars, are the glory of 
 
 soleil m. lune f. étoile, f. y\. sont =f. 
 
 nature. 27*e king, the queen, and the princes are well 
 
 art — f. roi m. reine f. — m. pi. trés- 
 
 pleased. The rose, the violet, the tulip, //te narcissus, 
 satisfaits- — f. viole te f. tulipe f. narcisse m. 
 
 the hyacinth, • tfie gilliflower, the jasmine, the lily, M/ 
 
 jacinth? f. , girojUe f. jasmin m. lis m. 
 
 honeysuckle, //*e ranunculus, are the delight of the sight, 
 
 chèvre-feuille m. rtnoncule f. d Ikes f. pi. rue i. 
 
 Poefrv, painting, and wu5ic, are (sister arts). Th' 
 
 art. poésie f. art. peinture f. art musique f. s&ur f. pi 
 day and the night are equally necessary. 
 jour m. 7iwt7 f. également nécessaires. 
 
 The article is subject to elision and contraction. (Sec 
 p. 73* and 72.) 
 
 Elision of the article is the omitting of the e in le, or 
 the a in /a, when these articles precede a noun begin- 
 ning with a vowel, or h mute. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 l'argent \ in , teado f We argent the money 
 l'histoire S inslea001 \ la histoire the history 
 
 But in this case the place of the letter thus omitted k 
 supplied by an apostrophe. 
 
OF THE ARTICLE, 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 SI 
 
 The soul of man without cultivation is like e. 
 
 âme f. art. homme h m. sans culture f. est comme 
 
 diamond (in the rough). The history of Spain is sometimes 
 
 diamant m. 
 
 very interesting. 
 
 très-intéressante. 
 
 what beauty ! 
 
 quelle=f. art 
 
 offspring of a weak mind 
 
 partage m. faible 2 esprit m. 1. art, 
 
 brut =h m. Espagne est quelquefois 
 
 (Look at) the amaranth and the anemone ; 
 Considérez amaranthe f. — f. 
 
 Self-love and pride are always the 
 
 amour-propre art orgueil sont toujours 
 Honesty, inno- 
 
 Honnêteté, h. m. art. 
 
 cence, honour. and the love of virtue are 
 
 — art. honneur h m. amour art- vertu f. 
 
 (very much esteemed. Summer, autumn, and winter, 
 
 très-estimés art. été art. automne art. hiver h m, 
 
 are very changeable. France is separated from Italy by the 
 
 variables art. — séparée de art. Italie par 
 
 Alps, and from Spain by the Pyrenees. 
 Alpes, pi. art. — pi. 
 
 Contraction in grammar is the reducing of two syl- 
 lables into one, and takes place, when the preposition 
 a, or de precedes the article ; in which case, instead 
 of putting 'le le before a masculine singular beginning 
 with a consonant, or h aspirated, du must be employed : 
 instead of à le, au must be used ; and before the plural 
 substantives of both genders, de les is changed into des. 
 and à les into aux. 
 
 Thus 
 
 Du roi 
 
 du héros 
 au roi 
 au héros 
 des rois 
 des reines 
 aux rois 
 aux reines 
 
 is instead of 
 
 de le roi 
 de le héros 
 à b roi 
 à le héros 
 de les rois 
 de les reines 
 à les rois 
 à les reines 
 
 of the king 
 of the hrro 
 to the king 
 to the hero 
 of the kings 
 of the queens 
 to the kings 
 to the queens 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The top of the mountains, and the bottom of the vallies 
 
 sommet m. montagne 
 
 are equally agreeable. Silk is soft 
 
 également agréables art. Soie f. douce 
 happiness of a feeling man is to relieve 
 bonheur m. sensible 2 l de subvenir v 
 
 fond m. v allée 
 
 to the touch. The 
 toucher m. 
 the wants of the 
 besoin 
 
82 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 poor. A man given !o pleasure was never a great man. 
 
 pauvre m» s. livré art. plaisir m. fut grand 
 
 He obeyed the orders of the king. The warbling of birds. 
 
 // obéit à ordres gazouillement m. art. oiseau 
 
 the murmuring of streams the enamel of meadows, the 
 
 —rem. art. ruisseau émail m art. pra aie 
 
 coolness o/- woods the fragrance of flowers, and the sweet 
 fraîcheur f. art. bois parfum m. art fleit* douct 
 
 smell of plants, contribute greatly to the pleasures of the 
 odeur f. art. plante contribuent beaucoup 
 mind and to the health of the body 
 esprit saut f. co<ps m. 
 
 De and à are ne er contracted with la, before a femi- 
 nine substantive singular beginning with a consonant. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Be la reine of the queen à la reine to the queen 
 
 Nor are fie and « contracted with le or la, before aiv? 
 substantive singular, beginning with a vowel, or À mute, 
 but then the article suffers elision. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 De V esprit of the mind de Phomme 
 
 A V esprit to the mind à (homme 
 
 Be Vâme of the soul à lame 
 
 De l -histoire of the history à V histoire 
 
 Contraction likewise does not take place, when the 
 adjective tout, all, every, intervenes between de, or à, 
 and the article. 
 
 EXAxMPLES. 
 
 De tout le ru onde f of everybody. 
 
 De tous les hommes, of all men. 
 
 A tout le monde to every body. 
 
 A tous les hommes, to all men. 
 
 Be toutes les vertus, of all virtues. 
 
 A toutes les maisons, to all houses. 
 
 of man 
 to man 
 to the soul 
 to the history 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The hope of success strengthened the cause of 
 
 entrance t. art. réussite f. fortifia — f. 
 
 virtue, and weakened the audaciousness of 
 art. vertu f. affaiblit audact f. art. 
 
 Fire of imagination, strengtli of mind, and 
 art. Feu m. art. — f. art. force f. art. esprit 
 
 firmness of soul, are gifts of nature. 
 
 rebellion 
 — f. 
 
 art. 
 We saw 
 
 fermeh' f: art. âme des dsns m. pli art — f. Nouapfa** 
 
OF THE ARTICLE» £$ 
 
 frith horror that man given up to avarice and vo- 
 
 avec = livré. * art. — à art. vo- 
 
 luptuousness. Good cultivation is that which contributes 
 
 lupté f. art. Bonne culture f. ce qui contribue 
 
 most to the fertility of the soil. Jjjore or less pain 
 
 le plus = terre î. Plus ou moins de peine 
 
 is the lot 0/ every body. The history of man under 
 
 par tage m. tout art mondem. = art. rfans 
 
 all the circumstances 0/ life, is the study of the 
 
 toutes art. circonstance f. art wV f étude 
 
 wise. Playfulness does not become all ages 
 
 sage m. art. Enjouement m. * ne sied m à art. — m. pi. 
 nor all characters. 
 ùi à art caractère, m. pi. 
 
 I. General Rule. In French, the article always 
 agrees in gender and number with the substantive to 
 which it relates. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Le livre que je cherche, The book which I am looking 
 
 for 
 Lu femme que je vois, The woman whom I see. 
 
 Les hommes qui étudient. The men that study. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The father, mother, brothers, sisters, 
 
 père m. art. mère f. art. fi ère m. pi art. sœurs f. pi, 
 
 uncles, aunts. and several other relations 
 
 art. oncles m. pi. art. tantt f. pi. pieusieurs autres parens m. pi. 
 were present. What we value is health, frugality, 
 
 étaient présent Ci que vous estimons. c y est art. santé f. art. =f. 
 
 liberty, vigour of mind and body ; it is the love, of 
 art. =f. art. vigueur f. art. art. corps m. ce am»ur m. 
 
 virtue, reverence for the gods. fidelity to all 
 
 art. f. art. crainte f. de dieu m pi. art.=f envers 
 
 mankind, moderation in prosperity, for- 
 
 art. monde m. art. — f dans art. = f. art. for- 
 
 titude in adversity, courage, good morals, and the 
 
 re f. art. = f art. — m. art. bonnes-mœurs, f. pi. 
 
 abhorrence of flattery. 
 horreur f. h. m. art =f. 
 
 II. General Rui*. The article and the prepositions 
 à and de, whether contracted or not, are invariably to be 
 repeated before every substantive. 
 
m 
 
 ÔF THE ARTICLE 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'esprit, les grâces, et la beauté Wit, grace, and beauty, capti- 
 
 nous captivent. vate us. 
 
 Je vis hier le rot, la \&ne, et les I saw yesterday the king, queen< 
 princes, and princes. 
 
 Ignorance is the mother of er- 
 ror, admiration, and prejudi- 
 ces of every kind. 
 
 jtmnct*, 
 Jj'ignoronce est la mère de V er- 
 reur, de l'admiration, et des 
 préventions de toute espèce. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Innocence of manners, sincerity, obedience, 
 
 art. — f. art. mœurs, pi. art. =f. art. obéissance f. 
 
 and abhorrence of vice, inhabit this happy region. 
 
 art. horreur h. m. art. — m. habitent heureuse — f. 
 The plants of the gardens, the animals of the forests, the minerals 
 
 plante jurdin m. — forêt f. — 
 
 of the earth, the meteors of the sky, must all concur 
 
 terre f. météore ciel m. doivent tous concourir 
 
 to store the mind with an inexhaustible variety. Neither 
 
 à enrichir par inépuisable 2 ==f. I * 
 
 suffering, punishment, nor kindness make any 
 art. peine, f. art. châtiment m. * art. carrtsse +. pi. ne font nulle 
 impression on those minds. The lily is the emblem of 
 
 — sur âmt pi. lis m. symbole m. 
 
 virginity, candour, innocence and 
 
 art. =f. de art. =f. de art. — f. de art. 
 
 purity. 
 pureté f. 
 
 Du, de la, de V, des, answering to the English partitive 
 some expressed, or understood, have by way of ellipsis 
 passed into habitual use. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Je mange du pain. 
 JI prend de la peine. 
 Nous mangeons du hachis. 
 Elle conçoit de la haine. 
 Vous ares de V amitié. 
 Vous prenez de Y humeur. 
 Nous cueillons des pommes. 
 Ils vendent des oranges. 
 
 I eat bread. 
 
 He takes some trouble. 
 We eat some hash. 
 She conceives a hatred. 
 You have some friendship. 
 You go into an ill humour. 
 We gather apples. 
 They sell oranges. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 OPKe me some bread and butter. 
 
 donnez-moi pain m. pr. art. bverre m. 
 
 Q/Fer him tome 
 Offres-tui 
 
OF THE ADJeAi^Ë. 85 
 
 meat. Take some salt. (There^) mustard. We 
 
 mande f. Prenez sel m. Voilmfv. art. moutarde f. Nous 
 
 have some girkms. Shall I offer you some chicken ? Shall I 
 
 avons cornichons pi. Vous offrirai-je poulet m. Vous 
 
 help you to some fruit ? I will take (with pleasure) some 
 
 servirai je * — m. Je prendrai volontiers 
 
 broth. Bring me ! some bread. Pour me out some beer. 
 bouillon m. Apportez-moi Versez-moi * bière f, 
 
 Brink some wine. Take some tea. Put (in) some sugar 
 Bui'ez t>£« m. Prenez thé m. Meittz-y sucre m. 
 
 and milk- I hear some noise. There falls some hail. 
 
 pr. art. lait m. J'entends bruit m. // tem&e gré/e f. s 
 
 She has some pride. Have you any ink and 
 
 Elle a' orgueil m. Avez-vous pr. art. encre f. pr. art, 
 
 pens ? Put some oil and vinegar to the salad. 
 
 plumes pi. Mettez huile, h m. pr. art. vinaigre m. sur salade f. 
 Eat some lobster. He has received some gold and 
 
 Mangez pr. art. homard m. /i. asp. /i « reçu or m, 
 
 silver, 
 pr. art. argent m. 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 The adjective is a word, which is added to a substan- 
 tive to express its quality, as, 
 
 bon père good father bonne mère good mother 
 
 beau livre fine book belie image fine image 
 
 These words bon, bonne, beau, belle, are adjectives, 
 as they express the qualities of père, mère, livre, 
 image. 
 
 A word is known to be an adjective, when it can be 
 properly joined with the word personne, or the word chose. 
 Thus, habile, skilful, and agréable, agreeable, are adjec- 
 tives, because we can say personne habile, skilful person ; 
 chose agréable, agreeable thing. 
 
 In French the adjective takes the gender and number 
 of the substantive to which it relates. This difference 
 of gender and number is generally marked by the termi- 
 nation. 
 
 9 
 
36 
 
 OF T*E ADJECTIVE, 
 
 OP THE FORMATIOr^hnF* THE FEMININE OF FRENCH 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule I. Jill adjectives ending in the singular in e muté* 
 
 are of both genders. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Un homme aimable* An amiable man. 
 
 Unefemm* awiable. An amiable woman. 
 
 Rule II. Whenever the adjective does not end in c 
 mute, the e mute is added to form its feminine. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 prudent 
 
 sensible 
 
 polite 
 
 crooked 
 
 informed 
 
 Rule III. Adjectives in -eZ, ~eil, -icv, -on, and 'et, 
 to form their feminine double their last consonant and 
 take e mute. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 prudent 
 
 
 r prudente 
 
 sensé 
 
 
 % sensée 
 
 poli 
 
 /• 
 
 l polie 
 
 tortu 
 
 
 J tortue 
 
 instruit 
 
 
 V instruite 
 
 cruel 
 
 { cruel/e 
 
 cruel 
 
 -=50 
 
 pareil 
 
 \ pareil /e 
 
 iïke.^ 
 
 = 3 
 
 ancien f. ^ ancienne 
 
 ançient 
 
 =80 
 
 bon 
 
 § bonne 
 
 good 
 
 =18 
 
 net* 
 
 V nette 
 
 clean 
 
 =34 
 
 of each 
 
 termination. 
 
 RuLt. IV. Adjectives ending in/, change this letter into 
 -v f and take e mute. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 fbre/ ■ f brève short 
 
 1 acti/ c j active active 
 
 m: ] nai/ *"1 naive ingenuous 
 
 (^neu/ [neuve new 
 
 Rule V. Adjectives ending in -r change -x into s 2 and 
 take e mute. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 C honteuz 
 
 .< y? tueni- 
 ( jaloux 
 
 C honteuse 
 
 /.y vertueuse 
 
 ( jalouse 
 
 ashamed 
 virtuous 
 iealous 
 
OF THÉ ADJECTIVE. 
 
 8Ï 
 
 Rule VI. Adjectives, or rather substantives, ending 
 in -eur, derived from verbs, generally change the r into s, 
 and take e mute ; but several, mostly of Latin origin» 
 require -eur to be changed into -rue, in others -eur is 
 transformed into -cresse, and about twelve, as, antérieur. 
 citêrieur, extérieur, intérieur, inférieur, meilleur, mineur } 
 majeur, postérieur, supérieur, ultérieur , prieur, take on~ 
 lv an e mute, and follow the Second Rule. 
 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 
 C trompeur 
 m.) menteur 
 (parieur 
 
 C trompeuse 
 /. < menteuse 
 ( parleuse 
 
 deceitful 
 lying < 
 talkative 
 
 i acteur 
 m.< accusateur 
 l admirateur 
 
 ( actrice 
 /.< accusatrice 
 ( admiratrice 
 
 actor, actress 
 
 accuser 
 
 admirer 
 
 C enchanteur 
 m.< pécheur 
 ( vengeur 
 
 i enchanteresse 
 /.< pécheresse 
 ( vengeresse 
 
 enchanting 
 
 sinful 
 
 avenging 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 She is decent. This house is well situated. This pear 
 
 Elle — Cette maison, f. bien situé poire f. 
 
 js too ripe. She is tall and well formed. This story h 
 
 trop mûr grand bienfait histoire f. 
 
 very entertaining. This person is very unsteady. This moun* 
 irès-amusant personne f. 6ie7i léger taon- 
 
 tain is steep. This road is not very safe. The door is not 
 iagne f. escarpé rouie f. " sûr porte f. 
 
 op^n. Xhis room is dark. This street is too narrow. It is 
 
 ouvert.. chambre f obscur r^e f. étroit Ce 
 
 an ancient custom. She has carnation lips. His 
 
 coutume f. a art. vermeil 2 lev re f. pi. 1. Sa 
 memory will be immortal. His manners are natural. The 
 
 =f. sera — tel. Ses manières f. pi. naïf 
 
 engagement was warm. (That is) an original thought. This 
 action f. ' fut rif voila neuf 2 pensée f. 1. 
 
 cloth is the best of all They are delusive pro- 
 
 étoffe {. meilleur f pi. Ce " des trompeur 2 pro- 
 
 mises. He seduces by hisfawning manners. The 
 
 messe f. pi. 1. t séduit par flatteur 2 manier es f. pi. 1. 
 delightful valley' of Tempe is in Thessaly. 
 
 iHclicieux vallée f. Tempe dans art. =f. 
 
 
 
n 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS TO THE SECOND RULE. 
 
 The following adjectives double the last consonant iu 
 forming the feminine. 
 
 77T. 
 
 /• 
 
 
 
 m. 
 
 /• 
 
 
 bas 
 
 basse 
 
 low 
 
 
 épais 
 
 épaisse 
 
 thick 
 
 cas 
 
 casse 
 
 hoarse, broken 
 
 métis 
 
 métisse 
 
 mongrel 
 
 gras 
 
 grasse 
 
 fat 
 
 
 gros 
 
 grosse 
 
 big 
 
 las 
 
 lasse 
 
 tired 
 
 
 sot 
 
 sotie 
 
 silly 
 
 exprès 
 
 expresse express 
 
 
 vieillot 
 
 vieillot/e 
 
 oldish 
 
 
 
 
 [ monk nul 
 
 nulle 
 
 none 
 
 profès 
 
 professe 
 
 professed < 
 
 or 
 
 1 nun 
 
 gentil 
 
 gentiUe 
 
 genteel 
 
 OTHER EXCEPTIONS TO THE SECOND AND FIFTH RULES. 
 
 The following adjectives form their feminine by doub 
 ling the I in the masculine before a vowel. 
 
 m. 
 beau 
 bel 
 
 nouveau 
 nouvel 
 vieux 
 vieil 
 
 < belle 
 S nouvelle 
 vieille 
 
 fine 
 
 m.* 
 fou 
 fol 
 
 £ folle 
 
 old u,u " S molle 
 mol J 
 
 The following are entirely irregular. 
 
 mad 
 
 soft 
 
 m 
 blanc 
 franc 
 frais 
 sec 
 Grec 
 public 
 caduc 
 Turc 
 long 
 bénin 
 mah'rc 
 
 V. B. < 
 
 /• 
 blanc/ie 
 franc/te 
 fraît/ie 
 sèche 
 Grecque 
 publique 
 caduque 
 Turque 
 \onsrue 
 bénigne 
 malig?ie 
 m. 
 r concret 
 discret 
 indiscret 
 inquiet 
 complet 
 incomplet 
 replet 
 suret 
 prêt 
 
 white 
 frank . 
 fresh 
 dry 
 Greek 
 public 
 decrepit 
 Turkish 
 long 
 benign 
 
 malignant traître 
 
 ^ f concrtlc 
 
 discrete 
 
 indiscrè/e 
 inquiète 
 >make { compile 
 incomplè/e 
 replè/e 
 suréVe 
 prête 
 
 m. f. 
 
 faux fausse false 
 
 roux rousse red 
 
 doux douce sweet 
 
 aigre-doux aigre-douce tari 
 
 tierce 
 
 J torse, or 
 
 l torte 
 
 colle 
 
 favori/e 
 
 jumelle twin 
 
 traîtresse traitor 
 
 tiers 
 tors 
 
 coi 
 
 favori 
 jumeau 
 
 third, fee 
 
 twisted 
 
 still, tnvg 
 favorite 
 
 follow the second 
 rule, except in the 
 additional accent 
 and differing from 
 the numerous ter 
 minations in -el* 
 
 Of the THIRD RCT>> 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 89. 
 
 Prefix m. makes préfixe f. and is the only adjective in 
 x, which preserves this letter and follows the second 
 jiule. 
 
 Some adjectives have no feminine, as bisehé, dispos., 
 fat, paillet, &c. ; others have no masculine, as blette. 
 &c, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. 
 
 herbe f. soupe f. mais trop 
 
 ît is ^foolish undertaking, There is no truth in all that 
 
 sot enterprise f. // n'y a nui vérité f. dans tout cela 
 
 This water is not clean. It is a very silly history. It is in the 
 
 cau f. net. Ce 2 fo! 3 ={. 1. à 
 
 newest fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon 
 nouveau mode f. beau =f. loi f. sur 
 
 that point. He lives in a state of luxurious idleness, This wax 
 — m. H vit dans * * mou oisiveté f. cire f. 
 
 Is not very white. She is as fresh as a rose. The paint 
 
 * comme — f. peinture f 
 
 ;>n that wainscot is not tfry. His answer is a m^re evasion. 
 de lambris m réponse f. franc défaite f. 
 
 The thing is public. That plant possesses a pernicious 
 
 chose f. /ter&e f. a malin 2 
 
 property. She is of a benevolent character, The avenging 
 ijualitt t 1. a * b hi in 2 humeur f. vengeur?: 
 
 thunderbolt smote that impious wretch. He extended tc 
 
 foudre f« 1. frappa impie m. * tendit 2 * 
 
 us a. protecting hand. This woman is jealous and deceit 
 nous 1 — Jew 2. mainî.l. femme f. jaloux faux. 
 
 fui. His temper is mild. This colour is too retf. These o^i, 
 
 Sow humeuY f. c/oux couleur f. frop roiur. 
 
 clothes are goorf for nothing. 
 
 hardes f. pi. ne à new. 
 
 OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL OF FRENCH AD- 
 JECTIVES. 
 
 General PtULE. F very adjective forms its plural 
 by the simple addition of s, as. 6on., 6o/is, bonne, bonnes, 
 poli, polis, polie, p ,l,e*. This rule is without exception 
 as it regards the feminine termination ; but the mascutoe 
 3ias the four following exceptions. 
 
 9* 
 
90 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Ï. Adjectives ending in -s or -.r, do not change 
 their termination in the plural masculine, as gros, gras, 
 hideux. 
 
 2. Those ending in -au, take x in the plural, as beav* 
 beaux, nouveau, nouveaux. 
 
 3. Some adjectives in -al, change this termination 
 into aux, as, égal, equal, égaux ; général, généraux : 
 hut most of these have no plural masculine, as amical, 
 austral, boréal, canonial, conjugal, diametral, fatal, filial, 
 final, frugal, jovial, lustral, matinal, naval, pastoral, pec- 
 toral, special, vénal, and some others. 
 
 4. Polysyllables ending in -nt, according to the most 
 general practice, drop the t in the plural masculine, as 
 excellent, excellens ; but monosyllables retain it, as lent. 
 slow, lents. The adjective tout, all, makes tous. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 They are envious and jealous, Those fowls are big ami 
 
 Ils == poulet m. pi. 
 
 fat. Owls are frightful birdé. (There 
 
 art. Hibou m. pi, des hideux 2 oiseau m. pi. 1. Voilà 
 
 are) some beautiful jewels. The two new operas 
 
 de beau bijou m. pi. deux nouveau — m. pi 
 
 have succeeded. ' * Men are only equal in the 
 
 onf réussi art. 2 ne ) que 4 3 par 
 
 infirmities of nature. The general officers arc 
 
 = art. — f. — 2 officiers m. pli h 
 
 assembled. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency 
 
 — blé — m. pi. sont — Ses progrès m. p] r 
 
 is slow, but solid. All his friends have been very glad t<- 
 sont solide amim.pl. ont été b en-aise de 
 
 see him. Those ladies are tired with walking. Yon 
 
 voir 2 lei. dame f. pi. las de marcher. }'ou; 
 
 have powerful enemies, but their efforts will be vain 
 
 avez de ennemi m. pi mais leurs — m. pi se ront — 
 
 and useless. The four cardinal points are the east. 
 
 inutile. quatre . point m. pi. 1. orient m 
 
 west, south, and north. 
 
 art. occident m. art. mi di m. art. 7iordm. 
 
0# THE ADJECTIVE.- <H 
 
 OF THE DEGREES CF SIGNIFICATION OF THE ADJEC- 
 TIVE. 
 
 Grammarians commonly reckon three degrees of 
 comparison ; the positive, the comparative, and the su- 
 perlative. 
 
 The positive is the adjective expressing the quality 
 of an object, without any increase, or diminution, as 
 beau, belle. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 A child gentle, amiable^ and docile, is beloved by every 
 enfant m. doux, aimable — aimé de tout 
 
 Nôdy. An ingenuous candour, an amiable simplicity and a 
 
 le monde. — nu 2 = f. 1. =f, 
 
 (iveiy artlessness are the charm of youth. The 
 
 piquant 2 naïveté i. 1 charme m. art. jeunesse f. 
 
 sight of an agreeable landscape is a varied and rapid source 
 vuef. agréable paysage m. varié 2 rapide 3 — f . 1 
 
 of delightful sensations. 
 délicieux 2 — f. pi. 1. 
 
 The comparative is so called, because it draws a com* 
 parison between two or many objects. When two things 
 are compared, the one is °ither superior, inferior, or eajjal 
 to the other ; hence three sorts of comparison, that of 
 superiority, inferiority, and equality. 
 
 N. B. The adverbs plus, moins, and aussi, which 
 mark these three kinds of comparison, are to be repeat- 
 ed before every adjective, when several are joined to the 
 same substantive, and are followed by the conjunction que } 
 rendered in English by than or as. 
 
 The comparative of superiority is formed by putting 
 plus, more, before the adjective, and que, than, after it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 &a rose est plus belle que la vio- The rose is more beautiful that 
 " htte, the violet. 
 
I 
 
 H:' 
 
 9* OF THE ADJECTIVE- 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 The republic of Athens was more, illustrious than iba* 
 
 r /publique f. Athènes a été illustre cell' 
 
 of Lacedemon. Homer was perhaps a greater genius 
 
 Lacédémone. Homère était peut-être grand génie in. 
 
 than Virgil ; but Virgil had a more delicate and more refineo 
 
 Virgile ; mais avait fin 2 délicai 
 
 taste than IJomer. Milton appears (to me) more tublim' 
 
 3 goût m. 1 /* m. parait 2 we 1 
 
 fhan all the other epic poets. 
 
 aw/re 1 épique 3 poèfe m. pi. 2. 
 
 The comparative of inferiority is formed by prefix- 
 ing moins, less, to the adjective, and adding que, than, 
 after it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 La violette est moins belle que la The violet is less beautiful than 
 rose. the rose. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasure 
 art. Naufrage m art. mort f. funestes pi. m. 
 
 which attack virtue. The violet is less brilliant to t>.o 
 
 qui attaquent art. f. f. brillant 
 
 eye than the lily, a true emblem of modesty 
 
 m. pi. lis m.* véritable 2 emblème m. 1. art. = f. 
 
 and of pride. Autumn is less varied than 
 
 de art. orgueil m . art. Automne {. varié art 
 
 spring, * but it is richer. 
 
 2")rinlemps m. elle riche. 
 
 The comparative of equality is formed by placing aus 
 si, as, before the adjective, and que, as, after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 La tulipe est aussi belle que la The tulip is as beautiful as the 
 rose. rose. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Pope's images are as perfect as his style is hai 
 
 de Pope 2 art.— f pi. 1 parfait son — m. 
 
 monious. Delicacy of taste is a gift of ïi?. 
 art. Délicatesse f. art. goût m. don m, art. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. OS 
 
 aire, as scarce as true genius. The love of our neighbour 
 — f. rare art. vrai génie m . amour du* prochain 
 
 is as necessary in society for the happiness of life, 
 
 = dans art. =f. pour bonheur m. art. vie f. 
 as in Christianity for eternal salvation. It is qs easy 
 
 art. — nisme m. art. — net 2 salut m. 1. aisf 
 
 to do good, as to do evil. 
 
 de faire art. bien m. de art mal m. 
 
 The three following adjectives, meilleur, better, pire, 
 worse, moindre, less, are comparatives in themselves. 
 
 Né B. As most beginners are apt to confound these 
 comparative adjectives with the comparative adverbs, 
 :>iieux, pis, and moins, because they are generally ren- 
 dered by the same English words better, worse, and less. 
 it may be adviseable to subjoin here these comparative 
 adverbs with their positives, that the difference of mean- 
 ing may serve as a distinction. 
 
 Meilleur, better, is the comparative of lon r good, 
 and is used instead of plus bon, which is never said, 
 o' ! Pire signifies phi s mauvais, worse, or more wick - 
 » ed, and is used instead of this. 
 
 Moindre means phis petit, less, or smaller, and is 
 ^used instead of these terms. 
 
 Mieux*, better, is the comparative of bien, well, 
 and is used instead of plus bien, more well, which is 
 said in neither language. 
 
 Pis* is the comparative of mal, badly, and is used 
 for plus mal, worse, which is likewise employed. 
 
 Moins is the comparative oî peu, little, and is used 
 ..for plus peu, which is never heard. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ce fruit-là est bon, mais celui- That fruit is good^but this, is bet • 
 
 ci est meilleur. 1er. 
 
 Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but it has 
 
 elle a été pire. been worse. 
 
 Ma dépense est petite, mais la My expense is small, but yours is 
 
 vôtre est moindre. smaller. 
 
 * There are some instances of pis and mieux used adjectivelv, } 
 bat this is not the place to notice them. ) 
 
94 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 II se conduit bien, mais elle se He behaves icdl, lut .'lie bthù 
 
 conduit encore mieux. still better. 
 
 Il se portait mal, mais il est pis He vjas unwell, but he is tecra 
 
 que jamais. than ever. 
 
 .Te parle peu, vous parlez encore I spiak little, you real: s'il. 
 
 moins. leu. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 His reasoning is not better than yours. Yov 
 
 Son raisonnement m. le vôtre. Votre m. 
 
 cat deal; better than that of his brother. The thickness c: 
 de beaucoup celui son épaisseur t. 
 
 this wall is less than that of the next wall. This column 
 
 murm. celle voisina 1 colonne f. 
 
 is less than the other in height and thickness. The remedy 
 
 autre en hauteur f. en grosseur f. icmlce m 
 
 is worse than the disease. Your horse is worse than mine. 
 
 mal m. cheval m. le mien. 
 
 • The adjective is in the superlative degree, when il 
 expresses the quality in a very high, or in its highest 
 state : hence there are two sorts of superlatives, the ab- 
 solute and the relative. 
 
 The superlative absolute is formed by putting très, 
 fort, bien, very, before the adjective ; it is called abso- 
 lute, because it does not express any relation to other ob- 
 jects. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Londres est une très-belle ville. London is a very fine city. 
 
 Remark. The adverbs extrên ement, extremely, inji 
 aiment, infinitely, are likewise marks of the superlative 
 absolute. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cot homme est extrêmement sa- That man is extremely If 
 
 vaut. ed. 
 
 Dieu est infiniment heureux. God is supremely happy. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 That landscape is very diversified, very txlnisiie, and inf. 
 paysage m. varié étendu 
 
 ' agreeable on every side. The Alps are very hL 
 
 agréable de tout cùlé m. f. pL haut 
 
 1 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE, 95 
 
 The style of Fenelon is very rich, and 
 astir] — m. — 
 
 harmonious, but it is sometimes prolix ; that of Bossuet i? 
 = il quelquefois prolixe ; celui 
 
 mely sublime, b .::imes harsh and unpolished. 
 
 dur rude. 
 
 The superlatii c is formed by prefixing the ar- 
 
 ticle le to the comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and 
 
 to the adverb- ; it is called relatrje. as r 
 
 expresses a relation to other objects. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Londn des ville*. London is the finest of m 
 
 . -éfère une moist - I prefer a country-house to 
 
 pagn* au ■- finest palace. 
 
 Plus and the article are repeated before 
 
 every adjective. 
 
 EXEKCI5E, 
 
 trisoQ, that there if perhaps in 
 oison?. que il y ait peut-être dan? 
 langue - which Pope has drawn from the Alps. 
 
 tire i 
 - Essay on 1. The i:\osl able men are 
 
 habib gens m.pl. 
 not alwavs most ancient and 
 
 toujours f. 
 
 Br» of all kinds oi idolatry, was the worship ren- 
 
 f. = culte m. ren- 
 
 dered to the sun. ' cciTAsable of all errors is 
 
 du - ï ni. art. = f . 
 
 that which is wilful. 
 cille qui 
 
 AGREEMENT OF TUL ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUBSTAN- 
 TIVE. 
 
 Rule I T; js agrees in gender and 
 
 number with the hîch it relates. 
 
 Le bon r. l The good father. 
 La benne good mother- 
 
 De beau. Vine g?.raens. 
 Dt belles p ro men e w a Iks. 
 
M 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE, 
 
 Bon is masculine singular, because père is masculine, 
 and in the singular ; bonne is feminine singular, because 
 mère is feminine, and in the singular ; beaux is in the 
 masculine plural, because jardins, is masculine, and plu- 
 ral, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 These hills are covered with trees loaded with 
 
 coteau m. pi. couvert de arbre m. pi. chargé de 
 fruit, already ripe. A pure stream rolls its limpid 
 
 — m. pi. déjà mur. clair ruisseau m. roule son limpide 2 
 
 water through the midst of meadows enamelled with 
 
 cristal m. 1 à milieu m. prairie f. pi. émaillé de 
 
 flowers. (Every thing) interests the heart in this abode, 
 
 -fleur f. pi. tout intéresse cœur m. séjour m. 
 
 which is full of charms. Fly, inconsiderate youth, 
 
 * * plein attrait m. pi. Fuyes, — déré 2 jeunesse f. 1 
 
 fly from the enchanting allurements of a vain world : 
 
 * — teur 2 attrait 1 — 2 monde m. 1. 
 
 its perfidious sweets are a slow poison, which (would 
 
 ses — de 2 douceur f. pi. 1 lent 2 — m. 1 qui dé- 
 
 destroy) in your soul the noble enthusiasm of goodness. 
 
 truirait dans âme — enthousiasme m. art. bien m. 
 
 and the precious seeds of sublime virtues. 
 = germe m. art. — 2 vertu 1. 
 
 Rule IL When the adjective relates to two substan- 
 tives singular of the same gender, it must be put in the 
 plural, and agree with them in gender. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Le roi et le berger sont égaux 
 après la mort 
 
 The king and the shepherd are 
 equal after death. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Uprightness and piety are much esteemed, even b\ 
 
 art. Droiture f. art. piété î. /rè« estimé même d\ 
 
 the wicked. A man in the most elevated, 
 
 méchant pi. *art. dans élevé 2 art. état \ 
 
 and a man in the most obscure situation, are equally 
 
 *art. obscur 2 art. état m 1. également 
 
 precious in the eyes of God. Pilpay and Confucius are very 
 
 = à m. pi Di u — — 
 
 celebrated among the nations m. of Asia. 
 célèbre par mi petip/fpj. art. 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE. 97 
 
 Rule III. When the two substantives, to which the 
 adjective relates, are of different genders, the adjective is 
 to be put in the masculine plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Mon père et ma mère sont con- My father and mother are con* 
 tens, tented. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 His probity mid disinterestedness are known (every where) 
 
 = f. son désintéressement m. connu partout 
 
 The love of life, and the fear of death, arc 
 
 amour m . art. vie f. crainte art mort f. 
 
 natural to man. Ignorance and self-love arc 
 
 — re! art. art. — f. art. amour-propre rn. 
 
 y prentmpl-jous. My sister and brother v;ere very 
 
 présomptueux f. mon m. ont été 
 
 itive to the instructions of their masters. 
 — — maître m. pi. 
 
 >0l>3 AND ADJECTIVES OF DUMBER. 
 
 Numbers are divided into five classes, viz. cardinal, ordinal, 
 collective, distributive, and propo-tionaL 
 
 CARDINAL 
 NUMBER. 
 
 un, une 
 
 deux 
 
 trois 
 
 quatre 
 
 cinq 
 
 7 sept 
 
 huit 
 neu/ 
 
 îotaii 
 
 lllonze 
 la douze 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBER 
 
 2d 
 
 lier 
 <, deuxième, 
 second 
 
 \ 
 
 troisième 
 quatrième 
 
 cinquième 
 
 sixième 
 
 septième 
 huitième ' 
 
 neuvième 
 
 di'Ai-ème 
 onzième 
 douzième 
 
 3d 
 4th 
 5th 
 
 6th 
 
 7th 
 
 8(h 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
 
 NO UN 3. 
 
 unité 
 
 couple paire 
 
 trio 
 
 deux couples 
 
 d ^mi- 
 douzaine 
 
 huit inc 
 
 i vaine 
 
 lothldizaine 
 Ilthl 
 
 12th! douzaine 
 10 
 
 unit 
 
 COUph 
 
 trio 
 
 two couph 
 
 V- 
 
 half a d 
 
 wpck 
 
 vin- days of 
 p .ayer 
 half a score 
 
 dozen 
 
 \ 
 
98 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE- 
 
 CARDINAL 
 NUMBER. 
 
 J3 
 14 
 
 15 
 16 
 17 
 
 18 
 19 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 30 
 31 
 40 
 11 
 50 
 51 
 tO 
 !S1 
 
 70 
 
 71 
 
 72 
 
 SO 
 
 00 
 
 91 
 
 treize 
 
 quatorze 
 
 quinze 
 
 seize 
 
 dix-sept 
 
 dix-huit 
 
 dix-neuf 
 
 vingt 
 
 vingt- et-un 
 
 vingt-deux 
 
 trente 
 Urente-et- 
 ( un, &c. 
 
 quarante 
 
 S quarante- 
 et-un 
 cinquante 
 ( cinquante- 
 ( et-un 
 soixante 
 ( soixante- 
 l et-un- 
 ? soixante- 
 Jdix 
 
 {soixante- 
 ? onze 
 J soixante- 
 ( douze, &e. 
 
 < quatre - 
 J vingt 
 
 ( quatre- 
 <_ vinirt-un, 
 fee* 
 
 J quatre- 
 
 c vingt-dix 
 
 C quatre- 
 J vingt- 
 , ( pnze 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBER. 
 
 treizième 
 
 quatorzième 
 
 quinzième 
 
 seizième 
 
 dix-septième 
 
 dix-huitième 
 
 dix- ne unième 
 
 vingtième 
 Jviogt-et- 
 ( unième 
 $ vingt deux- 
 ième, &c. 
 
 trentième 
 c trente- 
 ( unième: 
 
 quarantième 
 ( quarante- 
 ( unième • 
 
 cinquantième 
 ^ cinquante- 
 { unième 
 
 soixantième 
 ( soixante- 
 ( unique 
 Csoixante- 
 ( dixième 
 ( soixante- 
 ( onziè.r.r; 
 
 S soixante- 
 douzième 
 
 ( quatre- 
 ( vingt? 
 
 ( quatre- 
 2 vingt- 
 f unième 
 C quaere- 
 s' viugt- 
 ( dixième 
 i qu aire- 
 s' vmgt- 
 
 13th 
 14th 
 15th 
 IGth 
 17lh 
 18th 
 19lh 
 20th 
 
 2ist 
 
 22d 
 30th 
 
 40th 
 
 41 st 
 50th 
 olst 
 SOth 
 6 1st 
 
 7ôtb 
 
 71st 
 
 72d 
 
 30th 
 Slst 
 9Cth 
 91st 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLECTIVE 
 NOUNS. 
 
 quinzaine 
 
 vingtaine 
 
 trentaine 
 
 quarantaine 
 
 i einquan- 
 1 taine 
 
 oixuiïtame 
 
 fortnight, Sec. 
 
 a score 
 
 ascorefyahalf 
 
 two score 
 
 < two score & 
 ( a half 
 
 three score 
 
 four score 
 
OF THE ADJECTIVE* 
 
 99 
 
 ORDINAL NUMBER. ORDINAL NUMBER. 
 
 100 
 101 
 
 200 
 1000 
 
 •2000 
 
 10,000 
 1,000,000 
 
 cent 
 
 j een 
 \ un, 
 
 cent- 
 fee. 
 
 deux 
 cents 
 
 mille 
 
 ( deux 
 1 mille, 
 
 j dix 
 l mille 
 
 ( mille 
 < fois 
 f mille 
 
 centum'? 
 i cent- 
 
 < unième 
 ( &>c. 
 
 v deux- 
 
 < cent- 
 ( ième 
 millième 
 ( deux- 
 ) mill- 
 } ièi -e, 
 f k.c 
 
 i dix- 
 
 < mill- ; 
 ( ième 
 Crail- 
 
 < lion- 
 ( ième 
 
 100th 
 101st 
 
 200th 
 1000th 
 
 2000th 
 
 I 10,000th 
 ; millionth 
 
 NUMERICAL COLLEC- 
 TIVE NOUNS. 
 
 1 centaine 
 
 2 centaines 
 
 1 millier 
 
 2 milliers 
 
 1 myriade 
 1 million 
 
 1 hundred 
 
 2 hundred 
 
 1 thousand 
 
 2 thousand 
 
 1 myriad 
 1 million 
 
 Un milliard, or billion, & thousand, millions, un trillion, kc> 
 
 The formation of the ordinal number from the cardinal 
 does not require any explanation, except that -unième is 
 only found in compound numbers, where premier and se- 
 cond are inadmissible. 
 
 When mentioning the days of the month, the French 
 make use of the cardinal instead of the ordinal number, 
 and say, le onze d'avril, not le onzième, &c. le vingt-cinq 
 dn rnais prochain, and not le vingt-cinquième, &c. except, 
 however, that instead of Pun du mois, they say, le pre- 
 mier, the first day of, &c. and sometimes le second, 
 though not so well, for le deux ; but this mode proceeds 
 no farther. 
 
 Mille never takes s in the plural, thus, vingt mille is 
 twenty thousand, and not vingt milles, which would 
 mean twenty miles ; and when mentioning the christian 
 
100 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 sera, it is customary to curtail this word into mil, and to 
 write, for example, Van mil huit cent seize, and never Van 
 milk, &c. 
 
 There are many other numerical expressions used ia 
 poetry, music, games, &c. as distique , tercet, quatrain, 
 sixain* huitain, &c. solo, duo, trio, quatuor, quinque. 
 quinte, octave, &c. beset, sonnez, &c. 
 
 Un millier is very often employed for one thousand 
 weight, but quintal is never used except in the sense ot 
 dne hundred weight. 
 
 The distributive numbers are those wiiich express the 
 different parts of a whole: as, la moitié, the half; It* 
 quart, the quarter; un cinquihne, a fifth, &c. 
 
 The proportional denote the progressive increase of 
 things ; as, le double, the double ; h triple, treble ; h 
 centuple, a hundred-fold, &c. 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN. 
 
 A pronoun is a word substituted in the place of a 
 noun. 
 
 There are several kinds of pronouns, as the personal. 
 possessive, relative, absolute, demonstrative, and indefi- 
 nite. 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Personal Pronouns are used for the names of persons 
 or things. 
 
 There are three persons : the first who speaks ; the 
 second who is spoken to; and the third is the person. o\ 
 thing spoken of. 
 
OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 101 
 
 PRONOUNS OK THE FIRST PERSON. 
 
 Singular. 
 Subject, je 
 
 S me for à moi 
 me moi 
 moi à moi 
 moi moi 
 
 Plural, 
 Subj. nous 
 
 n y ( nous for à nous 
 ' J' i nous nous 
 
 / 
 
 je loue Dieu 
 
 I praise God 
 
 to me 
 
 il me donne 
 
 he gives me 
 
 me 
 
 il me blesse 
 
 he hurts me 
 
 to me 
 
 donnez-moi 
 
 give me 
 
 me 
 
 aidez-moi 
 
 help me 
 
 Me 
 
 nous louons Dieu 
 
 we praise God 
 
 to us 
 
 il nous donne 
 
 he gives us 
 
 us 
 
 il nous blesse 
 
 he hurts us 
 
 They are both masculine and feminine, that is, of the 
 same gender as the person, or persons they represent. 
 
 In general, je and nié are put before the verb ; moi 
 îfter it : and nous before, but sometimes likewise after 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 i cast my eyes upon the objects which surrounded mc } 
 
 portai vue f. s sur objet qui environnaient me, 
 
 and saw with pleasure that all was calm and tranquil. Do 
 
 je vis avec que était calme tranquille * 
 
 yeù not see in all the features of my father that he is 
 
 " 3 1 4 voyez 2 dans trait m. pi. qut 
 
 satisfied with me ? We have told the truth What were 
 
 content do moi ? avons dit vérité t. Que * 
 
 they saying of us ? * If we desire to be happy, tot must 
 disait 1 Si désirons de devons 2 
 
 not deviate from the path of virtue. 
 
 ions écarter de sentier m. art. 
 
 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE 
 
 SECOND PKRSOtf. 
 
 alar. 
 
 thou 
 
 tu crains Dieu 
 
 5 thou feares 
 \ God 
 { he spéaks to 
 I thee 
 
 for à toi 
 
 tn thte 
 
 il te parle 
 
 te toi 
 
 toi à toi 
 
 toi 
 
 ihee il te voit 
 
 ( peine 
 thte habille-toi 
 10* 
 
 he sees thee 
 < give thyself , 
 ) the trouble 
 dress thyulf 
 
102 OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Plural. 
 ïubi vous Jy«.or j vous louez ) you praise 
 
 * u0 J' vOUS \ you l Dieu J God 
 
 { y . S vous /or à vous to you il vous parle < 4 °^ eo ° 
 
 (vous vous ycu il vous respecte he respects you 
 
 In general tu and te are put before the verb ; toi af- 
 ter ; and vous before, but sometimes after it. 
 
 Remauk. Politeness has led to the use of the plural 
 vous, instead of the singular tu : as, vous êtes bien bon : 
 vovi are very good, for tu es bien bon, 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Thou art greater than I ; and from thee I have (at once) 
 
 es moi toi ai en même 
 
 learnt humility and wisdom. I (was telling] 
 
 lempjt 2 appris 1 art. =f. art. sagesse f. disais 
 
 thee that dancing is to the body what taste is to the mind. 
 le que art, danse f. m a que art. m. 
 
 You have shown us* great talents? when . (will you show" 
 aves 2 montré 3 1 de —m. quand montrerez -vous Z 
 
 us great virtues? How amiable you are! How rrood î/ou an 
 I dt f. pi. Que 3 1 êtes 2 3 a 2 ' 
 
 to have thought of us! (It was said) of you the other day, 
 de vous être occupé On disait autre jour m 
 
 that I/cm intended to spend a winter in' London (in order to 
 
 vous vous proposiez de passer m. à — dres 
 see every thing curious which that city present*. 
 voir tout ee =6 que 1 cette 2 ville 3 offre 4 Je <">. 
 
 PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON. 
 
 (ill 
 
 Singular. 
 
 he 
 
 il perd son ? /to /ojw Aii 
 
 Sub ' * temps > ' ,s,ie 
 
 'iellef. jfc J elle travaille )*fo i$ always 
 
 I l toujours > al work 
 
 C dites-/»: que }tdl him thai 
 
 1 lui m. for à lui to him \ je fut par- V / icill speaf; 
 
 • j ( lerai ) to /u'm 
 
 \ ( dites-lui que ) 
 
 (lui/. — à elle toher < vousfwidon- > 
 
 f nerez j 
 
 tell her thtU 
 you ici!' 
 s;ive her 
 
OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS* 
 
 108 
 
 Singular, 
 lui m. for le him 
 
 lew. 
 la/. 
 
 elle/ 
 
 or lui him 
 — elle her 
 
 elle her 
 
 le m. for cela it 
 
 g -l ils m. 
 
 I ) elles/. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 — — //te?/ 
 
 — — they 
 
 les m. 
 
 les/. 
 eux ??i. 
 elles 
 
 or eux them 
 
 or elles Mem 
 
 — — them 
 
 — — them 
 
 i je ne connais ) 
 «? que lui de > 
 ( capable ) 
 
 je ne connais ( 
 que lui de 
 capable 
 
 le méprise 
 
 la respecte 
 
 Il ne connait 
 
 I know but 
 him capa- 
 ble 
 I despise him 
 I respect her 
 he knows bui 
 
 qu'elle y S her 
 je ne le savais } I did no 
 
 \ know it 
 
 pas 
 
 \V 
 
 leur m. for à eux to them 
 
 leur/, for à elles to them 
 
 ils chantent 
 
 elles rient 
 
 payez leur ce 
 que vous 
 leur devez 
 
 dite?-/ i>r, que 
 je désire /eur 
 [ parler 
 
 I vous les trou- 
 | verez 
 
 il les admire 
 
 [je ne vois 
 [ qu'eux 
 ; il ne connait 
 [ qu'elles 
 
 i 
 
 tÈçy sing 
 (gentlemen) 
 j they laugh 
 I (ladies) 
 C pay them what 
 you owe tc 
 V them (to men) 
 
 S tell them thai 
 I wish tc 
 speak to them 
 : to ladies) 
 ) you will find 
 \ them ; men) 
 ( he admins 
 I them (ladies) 
 ) I see but then? 
 S (gentlemen v 
 )he knows bn\ 
 \ them (ladies*; 
 
 Ail the personal pronouns jc> tv, il, vom, ils. and 
 clic, elles, when subjects, are put after the verb in inter- 
 rogations, as, 
 
 Singular, 
 fje / «fcm-je payer? 
 
 ubject. I 
 
 il 
 
 tu 
 
 thou as-tu dit ? 
 he 
 
 chante-t-i7 
 
 bien 1 
 
 * ch» S travaille-t- ? 
 elle she J dh? < 
 
 must I pay ? 
 
 hast thou said ? 
 
 ( docs he th:; 
 } well ? 
 
 docs she work ? 
 
04 OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 Plural, 
 fnous we irons nous ? shall we go? 
 
 I vous you yiendrez-vous ? will you come t 
 
 ni jec . < iis r «a« they chante nt-t'fc ? dor they sing ? 
 
 [elles/. ? they \ ^SSj^- \ * N WOrk ? 
 
 II, le, ils, eux, are always masculine : elle, la, elles 
 feminine ; and les, leur, of both genders, as well as luL 
 when meaning to him, or to her ; in other cases, lui ex- 
 clusively belongs to the masculine. 
 
 All personal pronouns, when subjects, are placed 
 before their verbs, except in interrogative sentences, 
 and most of them likewise, when objects precede them, 
 except in the imperative affirmative. But the objective 
 çux\ elles, lui for le, and moi, toi,soi, with one exception 
 of this last, in soi disant, styling himself are invariably 
 placed after the verbs by which they are governed. 
 
 EXERC T 
 
 hetn', because 
 aim m. parcs que doux ;== 
 
 fui. Hz (was saying, (to them), do you not know 
 
 ant disait 
 
 the property of merit is to excite envy ? 
 
 que propre m art. mérite m. de exciter art. envie f. 
 often exhorted me to the study which is the most usefiiî, 
 
 souvent 2 exhortait 1 (hide f. * 
 
 that of the human heart They make ks love virtue, more 
 
 celle 2 ml. font aimer art. f. 
 
 by their examples than by their words. What has been 
 
 par leurs exemple pi . parole f. pi. Que 1 on 3 a-t-1* 
 
 said oHhem ? Did they speak of them ? Do you not see 
 dit cut ? * on 2 parlait » elle ? fyts 3 
 
 her ? With what pleasure she plays ! 
 3 quel joue f 
 
OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 105 
 
 REFLECTED AND RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD 
 PERSON. 
 
 Singular. examples. 
 
 iraws 
 
 50i | wi^a P re P osi. j chacun tire àso{ j e^^J 
 
 • , ,,, r >,( egoiism makes a 
 
 . C governed by the J 1 e«oisme fait I 
 
 < q»em ( self 
 
 f - ^ à soi, à lui- i il 5e donne des ( he gives himseli 
 
 3 \ même ( louanges \ fraises 
 
 çp y. (à elle-mé- ( elle 5e fait illu- î she imposes or 
 
 ? " J ( me i sion ( herself 
 
 f. C soi, or fui- ) 
 se /or 7>iême t ^ 4e P er d Ac n«7i$ himself 
 
 » * j ii* j «He « flatte ' { *£"* her / 
 
 Plural. EXAMPLES 
 
 r < ils s'attribuent J /Ae^/ attribute to 
 
 se /or à eux-métkes 1 la gloire de. \ themselves the 
 ( &c. ) glory of, he. 
 
 C elles se prescri- Uheij prescribe to 
 se for à elles-mêmes < vent pour rè- > themselves as a 
 ( gle de, te- ) rule to, kc. 
 
 Îils s'eniredon- \ 
 nenU ou se f they exchange 
 font des ca-> &fis 
 deaux \ 
 
 (ils se sont dés-V^ have dis- 
 se for eux-mêmes < honorés } graced them 
 * f selves 
 
 » „ . J elles se sont flat- $ ^ *■" ,/ a '' 
 
 se for elles-mêmes < ., < te red ihem- 
 
 f selves 
 
 se for Vun feutre ils ,'entr'aident j "^P one alî 
 
 , , . (les rais, dit-on, } m . ., . ., 
 
 Ctt /•«• î '« W7W les au-) .» AW1 *JL j/ Tr ^ (rats, M \s said, 
 se / or \ très ) ; e e n n t tre ' deV °'J ea/eachothei. 
 
 Remark. & is placed before a verb, and soi, after a 
 preposition, and sometimes after a verb. 
 
 a 
 
106 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUN?. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 In a thousand instances we do not watch sufficiently over 
 
 * mille occasion f. on * veille asses sur 
 
 ourselves. The glory of the world (passes away) in an instant. 
 
 soi ;== f. monde m. s'évanouît en — m. 
 
 He gives himself (a great deal) of trouble. She tires hcrst!/ 
 
 donne se beaucoup peint f ■ lusse se 
 
 People should (very seldom) speak of themselves. Virtue is 
 On doit rarement parler soi art, f. 
 
 amiable in itself. We must take upon ourselves the care 
 
 de soi On doit prendre sur soi soin m. 
 
 of our own affairs. 
 ses propre affaire f. pi. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUN RELATIVE CU. 
 
 de lui of him 
 
 d'elle of her 
 
 d'eux of them 
 
 en for \ d'elles of them 
 
 de cela of that 
 
 d'ici hence 
 
 de là thence 
 
 ' cet homme vous 
 I plait, vous en I 
 i parlez sou- | 
 
 vent 
 je ne crois pas 
 \ cette femme ' 
 | sincère, je m' i 
 
 en méfie 
 f ces fruits parais- 
 ) sent bons, j'en 
 \ m an gérais vo- 
 F lontiers 
 f voilà de belles 
 ) oranges, vou- 
 \ lez- vous m'en 
 [ donner ? 
 
 ( on ne m'a pas 
 < trompé, j'en 
 f suis sûr 
 
 ici, 
 j'en 
 
 ' il arriva 
 comme 
 partais 
 
 ' vous allez à Pa- 
 ris, et monsi- 
 ' eur en vient 
 
 ithat vian phases 
 > you, you speak oi 
 i him often 
 
 ÏI do not believe 
 ' that icoman sin- 
 cere, I distrus: 
 ) her 
 
 ) these fruits look 
 r good, I should 
 f like to eat some 
 ) of them 
 
 f these are beautiful 
 £ oranges, will you 
 \ give me some 
 
 i/ have not been 
 f imposed upon, 
 C f am sure of 
 J it 
 
 ihe arrived here 
 as I was set- 
 ting off. from 
 hence 
 lyou are going to 
 f Paris, this gen- 
 £ tleman comet 
 } from thence 
 
OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 1GY 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUN, OR ADVERB y. 
 
 f i c'est un honnête 'J , • L k 
 
 r àlui iokkn jjomn». fies-vous ^gtfSÇ^ 
 
 ^ n i hp S cette raison est so- ) that reason is good, 
 a eue toner j Hde Je m'y rends ] I yield to it. 
 
 Sees argnmens sont f theseargument , are 
 pressans, je n y l cogent J see no re- 
 sr dere 1 **»*«• 
 
 f accablé de vos ci \ loaded with your cU 
 
 a-J*«ti„ ^*u*„> J vilites, je ne sais f vJitits, I do not 
 tflr{ a elks to them J comm ' e ^ y répQû V ^ ^ , . ffC . 
 
 ( dre ) knowledge them. 
 
 C j'ai éprouvé cette ) / experienced that 
 à cela fo it < perte quand j'y > hss, when I least 
 
 { pensais le moins ) thought of it. 
 
 C nous partons deYwesttofffromLon- 
 ici here < Londres, quand > don, when you 
 
 ( vous y venez } came hither. 
 
 I c'est un endroit ) It is a fine place, ï 
 là there < charmant, je > intend to settle 
 
 ( cocnpte m'y fixer ; there 
 
 Hem ark. Y and en are always put before the verb, ex- 
 cept with the imperative affirmative. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 They speak (a great deal) of ii. You like French 
 
 On parle beaucoup aimes art. Français 2 
 
 authors, you are always speaking of them. That is a delicate 
 'uteur 1*2 parlez 1 Ce df lient 2 
 
 .affair; the success of it is doubtful. See them ; I consent 
 =: f. 1 succès m. douteux Voyez l consens o 
 
 io it. but do not trust them. That is a fine appoint- 
 
 2 * 1 5 cous 2 fiez 4 y 3 Ce charge 
 
 ment: he bad long aspired lait. He has done 
 
 f. * depuis long-temps S — rait 2 I cr./flîJ 
 
 • : bathe will get nothing by it. 
 
 ' ''intra 3 rien 4 y 2 
 
Ï08 OP POSSESSIVE NlONOtJNS. 
 
 §11. 
 
 OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 These pronouns are adjectives, which denote the pos- 
 session of things. When we say, mon habit, my coat ; 
 votre maison, your house ; son jardin, his or her gar- 
 den ; it is the same as saying V habit qui est à moi, the 
 coat which belongs to me ; la maison qui est. à vous, the 
 house which belongs to \ou '; le jardin qui est à lui, or à 
 elle, the garden which belongs to him or to her. 
 
 Of the*e pronominal adjectives, some always agree 
 with a noun expressed, and the others with a noun under- 
 stood ; hence there are two sorts of possessive pronouns. 
 
 Of those that always agree with a noun expressed, 
 some relate to one person, and others to several. 
 
 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES RELATING TO ÇXE PERSON- 
 
 persow. Singular. Plura). 
 
 C 1st mon, m. ma,/. mes, m.f. my 
 
 for the} 2d ton, m. ta,/. tes, m.f thy 
 
 (3d son, m. sa./. ses, m. J. his, her, ils 
 
 PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES RELATING TO MANY PERSONS. 
 
 person. Singular. Plural. 
 
 List notre, m. f nos, m.f. our 
 
 of the < 2d votre, m f. vos, m.f. your 
 
 (3d leur, m.f. leurs, m./. their 
 
 N. B. These possessive pronouns in French always 
 agree in gender and number with the object possessed, 
 and not with the po*s *sor as in English, for which rea- 
 son they must be repeated before every noun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mon père, ma mère, et mes My father, mother, and bro- 
 frère sont à la campagne avec thers are in the country, with 
 vos amis et leurs enfaris, your friends and th^ir children. 
 
 Mo»» cousin est aiW consoler sa y cousin is gone to visit and 
 
 sœur, qui a perdu son jils, console his sister, who has lost 
 
 her son. » 
 
OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS* • 109 
 
 Mon, ton, son, are also used before a noun feminine, 
 *hen beginning with a vowel, or h mute ; thus, mm 
 une, my soul ; ton humeur, thy humour ; son amitié , his 
 friendship ; must be said instead of ma âme, ta humeur, 
 
 ^a amitié. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 My principles, my love of retirement, my taste . 
 
 — pe goûtm. pour art. retraite f. amour m. 
 
 tor (everything) that (is connected) with learning, and 
 
 tout ce qui tient à art instruction, 
 
 my detestation of all spirit of party, (every thing) has 
 
 haine f. Ji asp. your esprit parti tout a 
 
 induced me to prefer a life passed in the closet, to the 
 porté préférer * art. rie f. * de * cabinet 
 
 active life of the world. Do not think, my daughter, that thy 
 = 2 f. 1 m. * pense que 
 
 candour, thy ingenuousness, thy taste, so delicate and so 
 - = i. ingénuité i. in. —cat 
 
 •eiined, and even thy graces, can shelter thee from 
 
 même — puissent mettre à Vabri de 
 
 censure. His wit, his talents, his. honesty, 
 
 it. — f. esprit m. — m. honnêteté f h m. 
 
 nid even his (good nature) make him beloved by every body. 
 
 mtmf- bonhomie f. font aimer de tout le monde. 
 
 Our constancy and our efforts will (at last) surmount al; 
 
 = f. — m. * enfin % surmonteront! 
 
 obstacles. I see nothing that can (be ten ■ 
 
 art, — m. pi. vois 2 ne J. rien 3 que on puisse . re- 
 
 hired) in your conduct Their taste for the fantastical, the 
 
 pr ndre dans condudc, i. pour bizarre, m. 
 
 monstrous, and the marvellous, gives to all their compo^ 
 monstrueux m merveilleux, m. donne — 
 
 citions, although very fine in themselves, an air of deformity, 
 f. quoique en elles-mcmes, — m, difformité i 
 
 which shocks at first sight. 
 ]ui choque à art. coup-d'œil. 
 
 Of the pronouns, which always agree with nouns un- 
 derstood, some relate to one person, and others to several 
 persons. 
 
 Those which relate only to one person are : 
 
 m. Sing. f Sing. ra. Plur. f. Plur. 
 
 1st. Lendetit la mienne t les miens, les miennes, mine 
 
 *2d. Le tien, lu tienne, les liens, les tiennes, thine 
 
 3d. Le sitn- 'f, les siens, Us siennes, his, hep, «*« 
 
 11 
 
110 OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS* 
 
 Those which relate to several persons are 
 
 
 m. Sing. 
 
 f. Sing. 
 
 PI. of both Gen. 
 
 1st. 
 
 Le nôtre, 
 
 la nôtre, 
 
 les nôtres, ours 
 
 2d. 
 
 Le votre, 
 
 la vôtre, 
 
 les vôtres, yours 
 
 3d. 
 
 Le leur. 
 
 la leur, 
 
 les leurs, theirs 
 
 N. B. The real use of these pronouns is to spare the 
 repetition of the nouns, which have been expressed a lit- 
 tle before. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Avtz-vous toujours votre che- Have you still your horse 1 I 
 Ml ? je n'ai plus le mien. have disposed of mine. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Is it your temper or hers, that hinders you from living well 
 ce humeur f. qui empêche de vivre 
 
 together ? If it be yours, it is easy for you to remedy 
 
 ensemble ce est it 2 aisé 3 * 1 de porter remède 
 
 it, by mastering (your temper) ; if it be hers, redouble your 
 V en prenant sur vovs-nûme ; ce redoubles de * 
 
 complaisance, attention, and good behaviour ; it i- 
 
 — de — de procédé m. pi. il 
 
 very seldom that this method (proves unsuccessful). If my 
 
 très rare ca moyen ne réussisse pas Si 
 
 friends had served me with the same zeal as yours, i* 
 
 avaient servi mime zèle m, que it 
 
 is very certain that I (should have) succeeded: but yours have 
 
 irès-sûr aurais réussi ont 
 
 been all fire, and mine all ice. All the pictures which we 
 été de déglace tableau m. que 
 
 expected from Rome are arrived : there are some that are a 
 attendions arrivés il y en a qui 
 
 little damaged ; but yours, his, and mine, are in good 
 
 peu endommagés en 
 
 condition. We know perfectly well what are your 
 
 état m. savons parfaitement * quels, 
 
 amusements in • town, and I assure you we are very 
 — à art. ville f. — que sommes bien 
 
 far from envying you them , but if you knew 
 
 éloigné pi. envier 3 1 2 connaissiez quels 
 
 ours in the country, it is most likely you 
 
 sont à campagne f. il y a toute appnrc.net que 
 
 /would not be long) in giving them the preference. You 
 
 ne tarderiez pas à donner leur — f. 
 
 have opened your heart to me with that noble frankness 
 avez ouvert — franchise i 
 
OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS» 
 
 in 
 
 which so well becomes an honest man : this confidence well 
 jiii «23 sied 1 à honnête confiance f. 2 
 
 deserv T es mine, 
 mérite 1. 
 
 Remark. When through politeness vous is used fui 
 Ju, then votre, vos, must take the place of ton, ta, tes, and 
 le vôtre, la vôtre, les vôtres, be used for le tien, la tienne, 
 les tiens, les tiennes. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Que vous ressemblez peu à vos How little you resemble your 
 meet res ! ancestors ! 
 
 Quand vous aurez entendu nos When you have heard our 
 raùom,nom écoulerons les vôtres, reasons, we will listen to yours 
 
 Qui 
 
 que 
 
 C who 
 ( which 
 
 Dieu qui voit tout ) 
 
 les chevaux qui courent 
 
 § m- 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Relative pronouns are those which relate to a pre- 
 ceding noun, or pronoun, called tfie antecedent. In the 
 phrase, V homme qui joue, the man who plays ; qui re- 
 lates to the substantive homme ; nomme is then the an- 
 tecedent to the pronoun relative qui. 
 
 God who sees every 
 thing 
 
 the horses which are 
 running 
 
 the man whom you 
 seek 
 
 the laws which we ob- 
 serve 
 
 the insult of which you 
 complain 
 
 nature whose secrete 
 are unknown to us 
 
 the people of whom 
 you speak 
 
 it is a condition, with- 
 out which he will do 
 nothing 
 
 those to whom he ap- 
 plied, refused to pro 
 tect him 
 
 C w T hom 
 ( which 
 
 Dont 
 
 or 
 
 h qui 
 
 Lequel, 
 Laquelle 
 Auxquels 
 Auxquelles 
 
 V homme que vous K 
 cherchez \ 
 
 les lois que nous oh- \ 
 servons \ 
 
 fof which p W/ % d . ont vous \ 
 l vous plaignez ( 
 
 I whose \l*r fUTe àç>ntnousi 
 \ ignorons les secrets \ 
 
 lof whom J /e * 's« wde î nirow 
 L l parles ( 
 
 L c'est une conditionC 
 'which < sans laquelle il ne) 
 
 ( veut rien faire ( 
 towhomC ceux auxquels il s'est L 
 
 < adresse, ont refusé} 
 
 ( de le défendre f 
 
112 OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. 
 
 i ce sont des choses à( these are things of 
 
 | what < quoi vous ne pen- < which you done: 
 
 ^ . (ses pas ( think ' 
 
 Quoi < ■ ï « r . > A i i5 
 
 , v , j ( to cause, pourquoi ( the reason why hr 
 
 which < on Va arrêté, est! was arrested, i- 
 
 ^ ( connue ( known 
 
 Qui, que, and dont, are of both genders and both num 
 hers. 
 
 Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article le, le. 
 Vs, with which it coalesces in the following manner : 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 lequel laquelle lesquels lesquelles which 
 
 duquel de laquelle desquels desquelles of which 
 
 auquel à laquelle auxquels auxquelles to which 
 
 This pronoun always agrees in gender and number 
 with its antecedent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its 
 place, is always governed by tt preposition. 
 
 §IV, 
 
 OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE, 
 
 Pronouns absolute are those which have no relation tc 
 an antecedent. They are * K e five following : 
 
 r h $ -7 e vous ^ irai " ^ ^ a \ * wi ^ te ^ y ou w ^ 1 
 
 {je vous dirai qui Vaï 1 
 \ fait I 
 
 has done it 
 
 q - ) a S vous pouvez consulter î you may consul 
 
 yui j whom £ ^ u . vons VOU( ires \ whom you please 
 \ qui consulterez- Ç whom will you con 
 
 L whom l'vousl \ suit? 
 
 ( i . S H ne sa iï q ue r &° u * S ae d° es not know on 
 Que \ what I dre ( what to determine 
 
 que ferez-vous ? what will you do ? 
 
 J en quoi puis-je vous < in what can I serve 
 
 <\ servir? ( you? 
 
 ( -J i* •„ „ »„% ( there is in it, I dr 
 
 1 1/ 1/ ft In IP. 1TP Ç/77.Ç 1 . •. * * -i 
 
 £ ., ,x . . ( there is in it, I df 
 
 ïily a la je ne sais > not fcnow what ^ 
 
 { <poid obscur } scurUy 
 
OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 113 
 
 quel 
 
 Lequel 
 
 what 
 
 what 
 
 which 
 which 
 
 ( quelle instabilité] 
 «? dans les choses ! 
 ( humaines ! 
 
 J il ne sait quel parti) 
 l prendre ) 
 
 C lequel aimez-vous j 
 < le mieux de ces < 
 / tableaux ? ( 
 
 ( je sais fo'm lequel < 
 l je choisirais \ 
 
 t what instability in 
 human affairs ! 
 
 he does not know 
 ivhat resolutior 
 to take 
 
 ' which do you pre 
 fer of those pic 
 
 ' tures ? 
 
 I I know well which 
 
 » I would choose 
 
 Qui applies only to persons. Que and quoi to 
 things. * 
 
 Quel, masc. quelle, fern. sing, quels^ m. quelles, Upl. 
 always precede a substantive, the gender and number 
 of which they take. 
 
 Lequel, duquel, auquel, &c. are used to mark a dis 
 tinction between several objects. 
 
 were ; 
 
 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, &C. 
 
 Demonstrative pronouns are those which point, as ii 
 — !, to the objects spoken of. These are, 
 
 Singular. 
 
 ] 
 
 Plural 
 
 
 
 masc. 
 
 Jem. 
 
 masc. 
 
 fini. 
 
 
 
 ce, cet** 
 
 cette 
 
 this, or thai ces 
 
 ces 
 
 these, 
 
 or those 
 
 celui 
 
 celle 
 
 this, or that ceux 
 
 celles 
 
 these, 
 
 or those 
 
 celui-ci 
 
 celle-ci 
 
 this ceux-ci 
 
 celles-ci 
 
 these 
 
 
 celui-là 
 
 ceci 
 
 cela 
 
 celle-là 
 
 that ceux-là 
 /^S thcsehaven0 
 
 celles-là 
 
 those 
 
 
 
 plural. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ce before a consonant 
 
 ) ce before an h aspirated 
 
 I cet before a vowel 
 
 cet before an /, mute 
 
 ce livre this boat: 
 
 ce héros that hero 
 
 cet enfant this child 
 
 cet homme that man 
 
 fETTE before any feminine noun cette femme IhatuomGr. 
 11* 
 
3 14 OF INDEFINITE FRONOUNS. 
 
 C when without a noun, ) C qui esf-ce ? ) who is il ? 
 
 oe < intimates a person, or \ as < ce que je vous > what I tell; 
 
 ( thing spoken of ) ( dû est vrai ) is true 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Nothing is so opposite to that true eloquence, the office 
 
 ne 2 rien 1 opposé véritable — f. /one- 
 
 (of which) is to ennoble (every thing), as the use 
 
 tionf.2 1 de 1 ennoblir 3 tout 2 * que emploi m. 
 
 of Mose refined thoughts, and hunting after those light, 
 
 ^712 pensée LI. «rt.recherchef.de léger 2 
 
 airy, A unsolid ideas, which, like a leaf pf 
 
 déliéSsans consistance 4 idée f. 1 . comme feuille f. 
 
 beaten metaî, acquire brightness only by losing 
 
 battu 2 — m. 1 ne prennent de art. éclat m. que en perdan! 
 part of their solidity. This man has nothing in coniraoi 
 
 * * art. = f, h m. de commun 
 
 with thai hero. This long restrained hatred brokr 
 
 h asp. I long-temps 3 contenu 4 ft«!fn f. 2 éc/o/ti 
 out, and was the unhappy source of those dreadful events 
 
 fut malheureux — f. terrible événe- 
 
 Ii is a great pleasure to me. It was a grea' 
 
 ment m. pi. Ce plaisir m. * /uf 
 
 pain to us. 
 
 d {plaisir m. * nous. 
 
 §vi. 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Indefinite pronouns are those which are of a vague 
 and indeterminate; nature. 
 They are of four sorts. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 Those that are never joined to a substantive. 
 
 i a .. ( one is apt to flatter one' 
 
 \ one on aune a se flatter < Jr * 
 
 ° N J a man $ on n ' es t'P as toujours $ a man is not always mar 
 f l maître de soi \ ter of his own temper 
 
OF INDEJ1SITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 He 
 
 *\ 
 
 a woman 
 
 somebody 
 
 people 
 
 they 
 
 we 
 
 you 
 
 !l 
 
 I 
 | they 
 
 Ton n'est pas toujours \ 
 < maîtresse d'aller ou*< 
 I Ton veut j 
 
 on frappe à la porte ) 
 
 on pense et * l'on ditj 
 
 tout haut l 
 
 (on ri conte diversement^ 
 
 \ cette histoire \ 
 
 ^ on acquiert l'expéri-S 
 l ence à ses dépens j 
 
 on trouve partout des 
 importuns 
 
 C on prévient qu'on n'ai 
 
 ; point eu Vintention< 
 
 ( de, &c 
 
 t Quand on vous dit 
 
 ? que * Ton compte 
 
 ( sur vous - 
 
 i si * l'on vous blàme\ 
 
 } et si* on le loue % on- 
 
 ( a tort 
 
 it is not always îc 
 the power of a ico 
 man to go where 
 she wishes 
 
 somebody knocks a 1 
 the door 
 
 people think and say 
 openly 
 
 they relate that story 
 differently 
 
 we acquire experi- 
 ence at our owr 
 expense 
 
 you will find trou 
 blesomc people 
 every where 
 
 J beg to observe 
 that /had no in- 
 tention to, &c. 
 
 when /tell you tha* 
 / depend upon 
 you 
 
 if they blame you 
 and praise him 
 they are wrong. ' 
 
 i one 
 Quelqu'un < somebody 
 ( some one 
 
 Chacun 
 
 <e 
 
 each 
 every one 
 
 (quelqu'un m'a 
 L told me. 
 
 dit, somebod; 
 
 \ quiconque connaît les kommes^ap- 
 f prend à s>n défier, whoevev 
 C knows mankind, learns to dis- 
 j trust them. 
 
 ^ chacun s'en plaint, every one 
 $ complains of him. 
 
 r el on \ it is better for > 
 / euphony to i 
 ou on \ part these 
 i words with I 
 
 ^ n on J an V 
 
 les habitudes qu'on con- . 
 and l tracte 
 "'In- } ce après çuot o?i court 
 ctead \ quoiqu'on croie 
 
 / un homme à ont on re- 
 
 ^ proche 
 
 j when the next 
 word doesnoi 
 begin with an 
 /. as is seen by 
 the examples 
 
 . les habitudes que Von con- 
 tracte 
 
 ' ce iprès quoi Von court 
 
 ) bien que Von croie 
 un homme à qui l'on re- 
 proche 
 
IIS 
 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Autrui 
 
 Personne 
 
 Rien 
 
 other people 
 
 others 
 
 nobody- 
 no one 
 
 ( nothing 
 
 < not any thing 
 
 ( any thing 
 
 [n'enviez pas le bien d'autnri, do no: 
 
 covet the property of others. 
 J ne faites pas >à autrui ce que vous ne 
 } voudriez pas qu'on vous fît, de 
 
 not do to others what you would 
 ^ not have done to you. 
 C la fierté ne convient à personne, pride 
 I becomes nobody. 
 'rien ne lui plaît, notfeing please? 
 { him. 
 y a-t4l rien qui puisse lui plaire ? \> 
 
 there any thing that can please 
 
 him? 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 If you (behave yourself) (in that manner), what will people 
 vous conduisez ainsi * on £ 
 
 say of you 1 Jt (is thought) that this news h true 
 
 dira-t 1 On croit nouvelle f. 
 
 Tkey write me word from Ispahan that thou hast left 
 
 écrit — as quitté art. 
 
 Persia, and • art now at Paris. One cannot reae: 
 
 Perse f. que tu es actuellement à ne peut lire 
 
 Telemachus, without becoming better: we there find (even 
 Télémaque m. sons devenir meilleur, on y trouve par- 
 
 where) a mild philosophy. noble and elevated sentiments : we 
 tout doux ==f- des — 2 élève 3. — 1 
 
 there find in every line the effusions of a noble soul, and we 
 
 y voit à chaque ligne epanchement m. beau f. 
 admire precepts calculated to effect the happiness o 4 
 
 des préceptepl, propre faire bonheur m. 
 
 the world, 
 ' monde m. 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 
 
 Those which are always joined to a substantive. 
 
 Quelque 
 
 Chaque 
 
 Quelconque 
 
 some 
 
 each, every 
 
 whoever 
 whatever 
 
 " si cela était vrai, quelque historien 
 
 > en aurait parlé, if that were 
 
 \ true, some historian would have 
 mentioned it. 
 
 r à chaque jour suffit sa peine, the 
 trouble of each day is sufficient. 
 
 f of itself. 
 
 l il n'y a raison quelconque qui pu- 
 isa- l'y obliger, no reason what- 
 
 ; ever can oblige him to it. 
 
OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS, 
 
 117 
 
 Certain 
 Un 
 
 i certain 
 ► some 
 
 a, an 
 
 C certain homme* a certain man. 
 I certaines nouvelles, some news. 
 if ai vu un homme, I saw a man 
 < prenez une orange, take an 
 I orange 
 
 THIRD CLASS. 
 
 Those ruhich are sometimes joined to a substantive, anc 
 sometimes not. 
 
 Nul no, none 
 
 Pas un no, not one 
 
 Aucun no, none 
 
 Autre other 
 
 Même same 
 
 Tel 2 
 
 such 
 like 
 
 Plusieurs 
 
 Ton! 
 
 C several 
 ( many 
 
 (all 
 
 < every 
 
 f every thing 
 
 f nulle raisonne peut le convaincre, n< > 
 \ reason can convince him ; 
 j nul d'eux ne Pa rencontré, not one 
 ( of them has met him. 
 (it n'y à pas une erreur dans cet ouv- 
 rage, there is no error in that 
 { work ; 
 
 | pas un ne le dit, not one say? 
 ^ so. 
 
 S je ne connais aucun de vos juges, I 
 know none of your judges ; 
 Un a fait aucune difficulté, he has 
 made no difficulty. 
 (servez-vous dune autre expression. 
 make use of another expres- 
 sion ; 
 je vous prenais pour un autre, I took 
 
 you for another. 
 ' c'est le même horn- e que je vis hier 
 he is the same man I saw yester- 
 day ; 
 eel homme n 1 est f lus le même, thai 
 
 man is no longer the same. 
 'il tint à peu près un tel discours, 
 he delivered nearly such a dis- 
 course ; 
 je ne vis jamais rien de lel y I never 
 
 saw any thing like it. 
 'il est arrive plusieurs vaisseaux, se 
 
 veral vessels are arrived ; 
 il ne faut pas que plusieurs pâtis 
 sent pour un seul, many must noi 
 suffer for one. 
 
 !tous les êtres créés, all created be 
 ings ; 
 tout disparaît devant Dieu, every 
 thing vanishes before God. 
 
 ' 
 
 < 
 
118 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are followed by q,ue. 
 
 Qui que whoever 
 
 Quoi qut whatever 
 
 Quel que 
 
 whoever 
 whatever 
 
 Tel que such as 
 
 Quelque — 
 que 
 
 whatever 
 however 
 
 Tout— que however 
 
 i qui que lu sois, whoever thou may 
 
 < est be ; 
 
 ( qui que ce soit, whoever it may be. 
 
 S quoi que ce soit, whatever it ina\ 
 be; 
 qum que vous disiez, whatever you 
 may sa)\ 
 ( quel que soit cet homme, whoever 
 1 that man may be ; 
 \ quel que soit votre courage, what- 
 f ever your courage may be. 
 C celte étoffe est telle que vous la vou- 
 
 < les, this stuff is such as you wish 
 { for. 
 
 f quelque raison qut vous donniez. 
 ) whatever reason you may give 
 J quelque puissant que vous ioyez. 
 (^ however powerful you may be. 
 ' tout savant qu'il est, however learn 
 ed he may be. 
 
 CHAP. V, 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 The Verb is a word, the chief use of which is to ex 
 press affirmation : it has persons, moods, and tenses. 
 
 In the phrase, la vertu est aimable, virtue is amiable. 
 it is affirmed that the quality aimable, belongs to h: 
 vertu ; likewise in this sentence, le vice n'est pas aima- 
 ble, vice is not amiable, it is affirmed that the quality 
 aimable, does not belong to le vice ; the word est express 
 cs this affirmation. 
 
 That concerning which we affirm, or deny a thing, is 
 called the subject, and what is affirmed, or denied, is call- 
 ed its attribute. In the two preceding sentences vertu 
 and vice are subjects of the verb est, and aimable is the 
 attribute affirmed respecting the one, and denied with re 
 Rpect to the other. 
 
OF THfe VERB. 
 
 There are in verbs two numbers, the singular and plu- 
 al, and in each number three persons. 
 
 r The first person is that who speaks ; it is design 
 Snated by je, I, in the singular and by nous, we, in 
 1 \ the plural ; as, je pense, I think ; nous pensons, we 
 (think. 
 
 The second is the person spoken to, expressed 
 | by iu, thou, in the singular, and by vous, you, in the 
 I plural ; as, tu penses, thou thinkest ; vous pensez, 
 ^ you think. 
 
 The third is the person spoken of, known by il, 
 I he, or elle, she, in the singular, and by Us, or elles, 
 I they, in the plural ; as, il, or elle pense, he, or she; 
 thinks ; ils, or elles pensent, they think. 
 
 All substantives, either common, or proper, are of the 
 third person, when not addressed, or spoken to. 
 
 f A word is known to be a verb, when it admits 
 „ lthe personal pronouns ; thus, finir, to finish, is 
 
 \ a verb, because we can say, je finis, tu finis, il, 
 'or elle finit, &c. 
 
 There are five moods, or modes of conjugating 
 erbs. 
 
 The infinitive mood affirms, in an indefinite man- 
 Î { ner, without either number, or person ; as, aimer, 
 love ; avoir aimé, to have loved. 
 The indicative simply indicates and asserts a 
 in a direct manner ; as, j'aime, I love ; il 
 he loved. 
 .* ( The conditional affirms a thing with a condition, 
 \ as, j'aimerais, si, &c. I should love, if, &c. 
 i The imperative is used for commanding, exhort- 
 i I ing, requesting, or reproving ; as, aime, love (thou) ; 
 { aimons, let us love. 
 
 S The subjunctive subjects a thing to what pre- 
 cedes ; as vous voulez, qu'il aime, you wish that 
 he may love ; que nGus aimions, that we may 
 v love. 
 
 (nei 
 
 ftp 
 
 l The 
 2 ? thing i 
 ( aima, 
 
ïâÔ OF THE VERB. 
 
 There are three tenses, the present, which declares 
 a thing now existing, or doing, as, je lis, I read ; the 
 past, or preterit, denoting that the thing has been done, 
 as, j'ai lu, I have read ; the future, denoting that the 
 thing will be done, as, je lirai, I shall read. But these 
 are subdivided, so that there are several preterit, and two 
 future tenses. 
 
 There are five kinds of verbs, the active, passive, neu- 
 ter, pronominal, and impersonal. 
 
 The verb active is that which expresses an action , 
 the object of which is either declared, or understood. 
 Aimer, to love, is a verb active, as it expresses an ac- 
 tion, the object of which may be quelqu'un, some per- 
 son, or quelutie chose, some thing ; as, aimer Dieu, to 
 love God ; aimer l'étude, to love study. The object of this 
 action is called the regimen,or goverment of the verb active. 
 
 ( À simple question will show this regimen, as ? 
 MR J q u ' es t~ C€ q ue j'aime ? what do Ï love ? answer. 
 \ Dieu, God. Dieu is then the regimen of the 
 \ verb j'aime. 
 
 In the French language the passive verb's are sup- 
 plied by the verb être, as they are in English by the 
 verb to be, and the participle pa*t of the verb active 
 followed by the preposition de, or par, the subject and 
 regimen of the verb active being reversed. Thus ta 
 change the verbs from active to passive in these 
 sentences, mon f ère m'aime, mv father loves me ; le 
 milan a enlevé le canari, the kite has carried off the 
 canary ; they must be reversed in this way, je suis 
 aimé de mon père, I am loved by my father : le canari 
 a été enlevé par le milan, the canary has been carried of: 
 by the kite. 
 
 The verb neuter, is that which has no direct regimen, 
 as the verb active has. Aller, to go ; marcher, to walk, 
 are verbs neuter, because we cannot say, aller quel- 
 qu'un, to go somebody ; marcher quelque chose, to walk 
 something. Plaire to please, is likewise a verb neuter. 
 as we cannot say in French plaire quelqu'un, to please 
 somebody, but plaire à quelqu'un. 
 
OF THE VERB. 12 f 
 
 The pronominal verbs are those in which each person 
 s conjugated through all the tenses, with a double per- 
 sonal pronoun. 
 
 fje me, I myself nùus nous we ourselves 
 
 I tu te, thou thyself '^^{*%j$*££ 
 
 IS 
 
 ! tilt se, she herself elle se 
 
 J they themselves 
 
 There are four sorts of pronominal verbs. 
 
 Ç The pronominal verb active, when the action of 
 | the verb falls upon tto) subject, as, je me flatte, I 
 I <j flatter myself ; il se loue, he praises himself. Al- 
 | most all the active verbs are susceptible of being re-> 
 [fleeted. 
 
 f The pronominal verb neuter, which indicates 
 3 1 only a state, a disposition of the subject, as, se re- 
 " \peniir, to repent, se désister, to desist, s'enfuir, to 
 { run away. 
 
 The reciprocal verb expresses a reciprocity of 
 action between two, or more subjects, and conse- 
 quently has no singular; such are s'enrr'aider, to 
 help one another, s'entre-donner, to give each other* 
 The pronominal verb impersonal, is only used in 
 the third person singular. Active verbs frequently 
 assume this form, in a passive sense, for the sake of 
 brevity and energy ; as, il se bâtit, there is building; 
 il se faisait, there was doing ; il se conclut, there 
 was concluded ; il s y est dit, it has been said ; il se 
 donnera une grande bataille, a great battle will be 
 I. fought. 
 
 H 
 
 The impersonal verb is only used in the third person 
 singular, with the pronoun il, and has no relation to any 
 person or thing. Neiger y to snow, is an impersonal 
 verb, as it cannot be applied to any person, or thing; il 
 neige, it snows, il neigeait, it did sno<* 
 
 Though the greatest part of the French verbs are 
 12 
 
i22 OF CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 regular, there are, however, as in other languages, some 
 that are irregular, and others that are defective. Regu- 
 lar verbs are those which are conjugated conformably to 
 a general standard. Irregular verbs are those which do 
 not conform to the verb employed as a model ; and de- 
 fective verbs are those which, in certain tenses, or per- 
 sons, are not used. 
 
 OF CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 To conjugate a verb is to rehearse it with all its differ 
 ont inflections. 
 
 The trench have four conjugations, which are easily 
 distinguished by the termination of the present of the in- 
 finitive. 
 
 -er as, parler, aimer, chanter, donner, &c 
 •ir as, finir, sentir, ouvrir, tenir, &c. 
 -oir as, recevoir, apercevoir, devoir, &c. 
 -re as, rendre, plaire, paroitre, réduire 
 joindre, &c. 
 
 The French, like most modem nations, not having a 
 sufficient number of inflections in their verbs to represent 
 the great variety of their tenses, supply this deficiency 
 with two auxiliary verbs, avoir and être, to have and to 
 be. 
 
 Those tenses in a verb, whose inflections are derived 
 pure and unmixed from the parent stock, are called sim- 
 ple tenses, and are always in French expressed by a sin- 
 gle wor'l But the tenses, which are formed by the uni- 
 on of those of the verbs avoir, or être, with a partici- 
 ple past, are called compound, and necessarily consist 
 of not less than two, or three words. Thus, avoir, j'ai, 
 j'avais, j'nis, &c parler, je parle, jt parlais, &c. are 
 simple tenses; but avoir eu, j'at eu, j'eus eu, j'< vais eu, 
 avoir parle, i\ti parlé, j'eus parlé, fai eu parlé, &c. are 
 compound tenses. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 123 
 
 OONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB Avoir, TO HAVE. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST 
 
 avoir to have avoir eu to have had 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 ayant "having ) 
 
 past. > ayant eu having had 
 
 eu, fflu eue, /. had ) 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE, OR COMPOUND 
 
 OF THE PRESENT. 
 
 I have ~) 
 
 thou hast 
 ÎÎ, or elle a he, or she has il a I he has 
 
 ous avons we have nous avons f 
 
 j'ai J have j'ai 
 
 tu as thou hast tu as 
 
 1 
 
 -ons 
 r ez 
 Is, or elles ont they have ils ont 
 
 ous avez you have vous avez j 
 
 we have 
 
 you have 
 
 they have 
 
 I had 
 
 j 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 C In the following exercises, the substantive be- 
 R 1 ing taken in a partitive sense, it will be neces- 
 
 \ sary to use the article, according to the direc- 
 \ tion given, page 84. 
 
 Present. — I have books. Thou hast friends. He ha,^ 
 livre. ami 
 
 nonesty. She has sweetness. We have credit. You have 
 
 honnêteté f. h m. douceur f. — m. 
 
 riches. They have virtues. They have modesty. 
 
 richesse pi. m. vertu f. = f. 
 
 Preterit Indefinite. — I have had pleasure. Thou hast had 
 
 plaisir m. 
 gold. He has had patience. She has had beauty. We have 
 or m. — f. = f. 
 
 jad honours. You have had friendship. They have had 
 
 honneur amitié f. m, 
 
 sentiments. They have had sensibility. 
 - f. =f. 
 
 Imperfect. — I had ambition. Thou hadst wealth. He ha*i 
 
 bien ra. 
 
'24 AUXILIARY VERB AVOiR 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PLUPERFECT, OT COMPOUND OF THF 
 IMPERFECT. IMPERFECT. 
 
 'avais / had, or did j'avais 
 
 have 
 ''- thou hadst, or lu avais 
 
 didst have 
 it he had, or did il avait 
 
 have 
 ions me had, or did nous avions 
 
 have 
 viez you had, or did vous aviez 
 
 /mue 
 lent flfce^ /mrf, or ils avaient 
 
 did have 
 
 >eu 
 
 J 
 
 I had 
 thou hadst 
 he had 
 we had 
 you had 
 they had 
 
 . 
 
 yhao 
 i 
 
 : 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR, OV COMPOUND 
 
 "TERIT DEFINITE. OF THE PRETERIT. 
 
 jus I had j'eus ^ / had ^ 
 
 u bus thou hadst 
 
 1 cut he had 
 
 'ions eûmes %oe had 
 
 vous eûtes j/ou had 
 
 ■lit //ie*/ Ziarf 
 
 tu eus 
 il eut i 
 
 nous eûmes j 
 vous eûtes 
 ils eurent J 
 
 eu 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 he had 
 
 we had 
 
 you had 
 
 they had J 
 
 }had 
 
 ..y. She had graces. We had oranges. You had pears 
 = f. — — poire 
 
 riicy had apples. They had lemons 
 m. pormne f. • citron- 
 
 Pluperfect. I had had apricots. Thou hadst had nectarine? 
 abricot brugnon 
 
 He bad had walnuts. She had had hazel-nuts. We had had 
 
 noix noisette. 
 
 ;hesnuts. You had had figs. They had had medlars. The} 
 rhniaigne figusm. ' nèfle f. 
 
 had had filberts. 
 aveline . 
 
 Preterit definite. I had plums. Thou hadst cherries 
 
 prune cerise 
 
 awberries, She had pine-apples. We had almonds 
 
 fraise ajianas amande 
 
 You had currants. They had raspberries, They har 
 
 groseille m. framboise f. 
 ".rapes. 
 • aisin m. pi. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 125 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE* 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 j aurai / shall, or will have 
 
 j'aurai ^ 
 
 I shall, or*" 
 will have 
 
 
 iu auras thêu shalt, or wilt tu auras 
 
 thou wilt 
 
 
 have 
 
 1 
 
 have 
 
 
 H aura he will have 
 
 il aurat 
 
 he will 
 
 
 nousauronswe shall have 
 
 nous aurons } eu 
 I 
 
 have 
 
 we shall 
 
 have 
 
 ■ haa 
 
 vous aurez you shall have 
 
 vous aurez 
 
 ! 
 
 you will 
 have 
 
 
 ils auront they will have 
 
 ils auront | 
 
 they will 
 
 
 
 j 
 
 have j 
 
 
 In the following exercises, the addition ol 
 fan adjective, after the substantive, will make 
 I no change in the remark on the preceding ex- 
 ercise. 
 
 Preterit anterior. — I had had very black ink. Thou 
 
 fori 2 noir 3 encre f Î. 
 hadst had honest proceedings. She had had uncommon 
 
 honnête 2 procédé 1 rare 2 
 
 graces. We had had very ripe grapes. You had had exquisite 
 1. 2 mûr 3 1. exquis 2 
 
 melons. They had had ready money. 
 — m. 1. comptant 2 argent m. 1. 
 
 Future absolute. — I shall have studious pupils. Thou 
 
 appliqué 2 élève m. 1- 
 wilt have horrid pains. He will have ridiculous ideas. 
 hornble 2 peine f. 1. ridicule 2 idée f. 1 . 
 
 We shall have useless cares. You will have true end real 
 
 inutile 2 soin m. 1. 2 réel S 
 
 pleasures. They will have poignant griefs. 
 m. 1. cuisant 2 chagrin m. Î. 
 
 But if the adjective precedes the substantive, 
 then de, or d\ only is to be used. 
 
 Future anterior. — I shall have had good paper. Thou 
 
 papier m. 
 wilt have had excellent fruit. She will have had charming 
 m. pi. charmant 
 
 flowers. We shall have had good pens. You will have had 
 fours f, plume f, 
 
 12* 
 
 Rem. 
 

 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR, 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PAST, or COMPOUND OF THE CON 
 D1T10NAL. 
 
 y aurais I should, could, j'aurais 
 
 or would have 
 ta aurais thou should 1 st tu aurais 
 
 have 
 fl aurait he should have il aarait 
 
 nous aurions we should have nousaurions 
 
 3 auriez you should have vous auriez 
 
 ■iraient they should have ils auraient 
 
 ► eu 
 
 should ~) 
 
 I 
 
 have 
 thou should- | 
 
 est have 
 he should 
 
 have [ 
 
 we should f 
 
 have 
 you should 
 
 havn 
 they should | 
 
 have 
 
 had 
 
 î&ge buildings. They will have had fine clothes. 
 grand bâtiment m. superbe habit m. 
 
 Present or the conditional. — -I should have fine engra-v 
 
 gravure 
 ngs. Thou should'st have pretly playthings. He shou'c 
 joli joujou m. 
 
 f. JOll Ji 
 
 have immense treasures. We should nave beautiful pictures 
 
 — trésor m. tableau n, 
 
 JTou would have prettv houses. They should have long con 
 
 f. 
 versatfpns. 
 t. 
 
 The preceding remark holds <?ood iikevisr 
 ter a word expressing quantity, such as 
 ) beaucoup, a great deal, great many ; pen. 
 little, few ; plus, more ; moins, less ; wop, tor 
 much, too many, &c. except bien, much, ma- 
 ny, which requires du, de la, de l\ de*: 
 
 Conditional past. — I should have had a great deal of trouble 
 
 peine f 
 Thou would'st have had more pleasure. He would have 
 
 de 
 Jiad (a. vast deal) of knowledge. We should have had mort 
 infiniment connaissance f. pi. 
 
 if succeeding. Y ou would certainly 
 tic occasion f. pi réussir cerlaine'men 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AtOIB. 12$ 
 
 C J'eusse eu, tu eusses eu, il eût eu, nous eussions eu, vous 
 "!N/B. 1 eussiez eu, Us eussent eu, I should have had, &c. is also 
 ( used for the conditional past. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Aie, or aye Have Qhou) 
 
 Qu'il ait Let him have 
 
 Ayons Let us have 
 
 Ayez Have (ye) 
 
 Qu'ils aient Let them have 
 
 have had many advantages over him, They would havr 
 
 1 beaucoup de avantage sur lui 
 
 had many enemies. 
 bien ennemi. 
 
 Observe that, when the verb is followed by several 
 substantives, the proper article and preposition must be 
 epeated before each. 
 
 Imperative. — Have complaisance, attention, and 
 
 — f. égard m. pi. 
 
 loliteness. Let him have modesty, and more correct idea? 
 politesse f. — f. 2 juste 1. 
 
 Let her have more decency. Let us have courage and firmness 
 décence — m. fermeté i 
 
 J lave gravy soup, nice roast-beef, and a pudding. Le* 
 
 un gras 2 soupe f. 1 un bon rosbif m. pouding m. 
 
 them have ale, rum, and punch. Let them have manners. 
 
 m. aile f. rum m. ponche m. f. mœurs f. pL 
 
 and conduct. 
 conduite f. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. — That I may have many friends. That thoi: 
 
 beaucoup 
 may'st have good reasons to give him. That he may havr 
 
 donner lui 
 elevated sentiments. That we may have courage and mag- 
 /levé 2 — m. 1. bravoure f. 
 
 nanimity. That you may have delightful landscapes, and 
 = f. délicieux 2 paysage m. pi. 1. 
 
 beautiful sea-pieces. That they may have more condescensior 
 marine f. pi. — danc> 
 
 ~nd more prepossessing manners. 
 
 2 prévenant 3 manière f. pi. 1. 
 
 r ERiT,— That I may have had wine, beer, and cider. 
 
 vin m. bière f. cidre m 
 
128 
 
 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES* 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT, or COMPOUND 
 
 <4ue+ 
 
 1 
 
 That Que 
 
 j'aie J may have j'aie 
 
 îu aies thou may 1 it have tu aies 
 
 il ait he may have ii ait 
 
 nous ayons we may have nous ayons 
 
 vous ayez you may have vous ayez 
 
 •Is aient they may have ils aient J 
 
 OF THE PRESENT 
 
 That } 
 
 I may have 
 
 thou may'st 
 
 have 
 ht may have ^ - ia(i 
 
 we may have 
 
 you may have 
 
 they may have) 
 
 That thou may'st have had a good horse, and a fine dog. 
 
 cheval m. chien 
 
 That he may have had enlightened judges. That we may have 
 
 éclairé 2 juge m. 1. 
 had snow, rain, and wind. That you may have had a great 
 
 neige f pluie f. vent m. 
 dining-room, a beautiful drawing-room, a prett\ 
 
 mlle-à-manger f. superbe salcn-de-compagnie m. joli 
 
 ing-room, and a charming bed-room. Thai 
 
 cabinet de toilette m. — mant chambre-à-coucher f. 
 
 they may have had vast possessions, fine meadows, and de- 
 vaste — f. prairie f. dc~ 
 
 lightful proves 
 UX 2 bois m. 1. 
 
 Imperfect. — That I might have a sword, musket, and 
 
 épéei. fusil m. 
 That thou might'st have a knife. a spoon, and a 
 pistoiei m. couteau m. cuillère f. 
 
 fork. That we might have a penknife, pencils, and gooa 
 
 fourchette f. canif m. pinceau m. 
 
 copies. That he might have a coach, a good house, and 
 
 modèle m. carrosse m. f. 
 
 Rem 
 
 ( The subjunctive, in French, is always preceded by 
 . ? the conjunction (pic, that, which is often suppressed in 
 ( English. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIRS 129 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES* COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 That 
 
 Que 
 
 j'eusse 
 
 tn eusses 
 
 il eût 
 
 nous eussions we might have 
 
 vous eussiez you might have 
 
 ils eussent they might have 
 
 PLUPERFECT, or CÔMPOUNI* 
 OF THE IMPERFECT. 
 Que ^| That 
 
 I had, or might 
 
 have 
 thou mighVst 
 
 have 
 he might have 
 
 j'eusse 
 tu eusses 
 il eût 
 
 nous eus- 
 sions 
 
 vous eus- 
 siez 
 
 ils eussent 
 
 / might 
 
 have 
 thou might' 
 
 est have 
 he might 
 
 have 
 we might 
 
 have 
 you might 
 
 have 
 they might 
 
 have 
 
 >har 
 
 :urniture, simple but elegant. That you might have 
 
 meuble, m. pi. — mais — 
 
 ileal th and great respect. That they might have fruitful 
 
 santé f. un considération f. fertile™ 
 
 lands. 
 
 J erre f. 1. 
 
 Pluperfect. That I might have had friendship. That thou 
 
 amitié f. 
 might'st have had gloves, boots, and horses. That he 
 
 gant m. botte f. cheval m. 
 
 might have had zealous and faithful servants. That we 
 
 zélé 2 fcdtle 8 domestique m. 1 . 
 
 might have had fine clothes, precious jewels, and magnificent 
 
 = 2 bijou m. 1 magnifique 2 
 furniture. That you might have had warm friends. Thai 
 
 1 chaude 2 1 
 
 ^hey might have had greatness of soul and pity. 
 grandeur f. pitié f. 
 
 SThe verb avoir, serves not only as an auxiliary to conju 
 gate its own compound tenses, but likewise the compound 
 tenses of the verb être, and those of the active, the impety 
 sonal, and almost all the neuter verbs. 
 
 I 
 
130 ' AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
 
 SENTENCES ON THE SAME VERB, WITH A 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 In the following sentences, the preposition de or d\ it 
 put before the substantive, according as it begins with a 
 consonant, or a vowel, ne between the personal pronoun 
 and the verb, and pas or point, after the verb in the sim- 
 ple tenses, and between the verb and the participle in the 
 compound tenses ; as, 
 
 Je n'ai pas de livres, I have no books. 
 
 f u n'avais pas de bien Thou hadst no wealth. 
 
 Kile n'eut pas d'honnêteté, She had no honesty. 
 
 Noos n'avons pas eu d'amitié, We have had no friendship . 
 
 Vous n'aviez pas eu de puissans You had not had powerful 
 
 amis, friends. 
 
 Ils n'auront pas d'ennemis re- They will not have formidable 
 
 doutables, enemies. 
 
 EXERCISE, 
 
 INDICATIVE. Present. I have no precious medals. 
 
 = 2 médaille f. 1. 
 We have no useless things. Preterit indefinite. 
 
 inutile 2 chose f. 1 
 I have had no constancy. We have had no generosity. 
 
 = f. =f. 
 
 Jmperpect. Thou hadst not a beautiful park. You had no 
 
 parc m. 
 -ood cucumbers. Pluperfect. He had had no fine houses. 
 
 concombre m. 
 They had had no money. Preterit definite. He had not 
 
 argent m. 
 a jkUful -animer. They had no carpets. Preterit an- 
 
 habile jardinier m. tapis in. 
 
 lEKioR. Thou hadst had no complaisance. You had had no 
 
 tlents. Future absolute. I shall have no great bu 
 
 ~~ m - *f 
 
 ss. We shall have no uncommon prints. Futirj 
 
 ? airtt 'P l - rare2 estampe f. 1. 
 
 anterior. Thou shalt have had no consolation. You shall not 
 
 *iave had quiet days. 
 
 tranquille 2 m. î 
 
AUXILIARY YERB AVOIR» idl 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 Present.— He should not have bad pictures. They 
 
 mauvais tableau ra. 
 should have no leisure. 
 loisir m. 
 Past. — I should have had no griefs. We should have 
 
 chagrin m. pi. 
 had no troubles. 
 peine f. pi. 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 Have no impatience. Let him not have absurd 
 
 sing. — absurde 2. f. pi, 
 
 ideas. Let Us not have dangerous connexions. Have no such 
 1. . = 2 liaison f. pi. tel 
 
 whims. Let them not have so whimsical a project. 
 raprice m. bizarre 2. projet m. 1. 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Present. — That I may have no protectors. That we may 
 
 = m. 
 have no success. 
 succès m. 
 Preterit. — That he may have had no perseverance. That 
 
 >hey may have had no valour. 
 
 bravoure f. 
 Imperfect. — That thou might'st have no principles of taste. 
 
 principe m. goût m , 
 • r hat you might not have a just reward. 
 
 juste récompense f. 
 Pluperfect. — That I might have had no good advice. That 
 
 avis m. pi. 
 we might have had^o news. 
 
 nouvelle f. pi. 
 
 THE VERB Avoir j INTERROGATIVELY AND AFFIRMATIVELY ; 
 
 In interrogations, the personal pronoun, accompa- 
 nied by a hyphen (-), is placed after the verb, in the 
 simple tenses, and between the verb and the participle, 
 in the compound tenses, and, when the third person sin- 
 gular of the verb ends with a vowel, for euphony a t is 
 added between it and the pronoun, preceded and follow- 
 ed by a hyphen, thus (-*-). See likewise the remarks, 
 page 123. 
 
132 AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR. 
 
 Ai-je des livres ? Have I books ? 
 
 \vais-tu du bien ? Hadst thou wealth ? 
 
 Eut-elle de l'honnêteté ? Had she honesty f 
 
 Avons-nous eu de bon s conseils? Have we had good advice ? 
 
 \viez-vous eu de la prudence ? Had you had prudence ? 
 
 \ura-t-il de l'argent ? Will he have money ? 
 
 \ura-t-elle eu des protecteurs? Will she have had protectors ? 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. Present.— -Hast thou needles? Have you 
 
 aiguille f . 
 coloured maps ? Preterit indefinite. — Have I had pens ? 
 enluminé 2 carte f. 1. plume f. 
 
 Have we had convenient houses ? Imperfect. — Had she silk ' 
 commode 2 f. 1. soie 1 
 
 Had they large buildings 1 Pluperfect — Had she had pins ? 
 
 grand bâtiment m. épingle ï. 
 
 Had they had extensive fields ? Preterit definite — Had 
 
 spacieux 3 champ m. I. 
 he good shoes ? Had they looking-glasses ? Preterit ante* 
 
 soulier m. f. miroir m. 
 
 uior. — Hadst thou had lace 1 Had you had odoriferous 
 
 dentelle f. odoriférant 2 
 
 shrubs. Future absolute. — Shall I have gold, silver, 
 arbuste m. 1. ra. argent m. 
 
 \nd platina. Shall we have (good luck) ? Future anterior. - 
 
 platine m. bouheur m. 
 
 Will bhe have had joy ? Will they have had company ? 
 joie f compagnie f. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. Present— Shouldst thou have happy 
 
 heurevj 
 moments ? Should you have good wine ard nice cordials ? 
 
 — m. vin. m. fin 2 liqueur f. 1. 
 
 Past.— Should he have had uncommon fruits? Should they 
 rare 2 m. 1. 
 
 e had rich clothes ? 
 
 THE SAME VERB INTERROGATIVELY AND NEGATIVELY. 
 
 In sentences of this form observe the different rules 
 that are prefixed to the exercises on the verb, and in 
 sentences simply interrogative, always place ne at the be- 
 ginning of sentences, and pas, or point, after the person- 
 al pronoun, whether in the simple, or compound tenses. 
 
AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR, 13Ô 
 
 N'ai-je pas des livres ? Have I no books ? 
 
 N'avais-tu pas des amis ? Hadst thou no friends ? 
 
 N'a-t-ellepas beaucoup d'esprit? Has she not a great deal of wit ? 
 
 N'avons-nous pas eu de bons Have we not acted fairly ? 
 
 procédés ? 
 
 N'aviez vous pas eu de nouvel- Had you not had new gowns ? 
 
 les robes ? 
 
 N'aura-t-il pas des ressources ? Will he have no resources ? 
 
 X ? auront-elles pas eu des conso- Will they have had no cGnsola- 
 
 lations ? lions ? 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 INDICATIVE. Present.— Hast thou no diamonds? Have 
 
 diamant m. 
 you no indulgent parents ? Preterit indefinite. — Hast thou 
 
 — 2 — m. 1. 
 not had contempt, and even hatred, for that man ? Have 
 
 mépris m. même haine f. h asp. pour cet 
 
 you not had better examples / Imperfect. — Had he not a 
 
 meilleur exemple m. 
 rigid censor ? Had they not inattentive children ? 
 
 xcère 2 censeur m. 1. =2 enfant m. 1. 
 
 Pluperfect — Had I not had other views ? Had we not had 
 
 autre vue ? f pi. 
 amethysts, rubies, and topazes ? Preterit definite. — Had I 
 améthyste f. rubis m. topaze ? f. 
 
 no great wrongs ? Had we not perfidious friends ? Preterit 
 tort m. perfide t 1 
 
 * interior. — Had he not used far fetched expressions ? Had 
 eu 2 recherchée — f. 1. 
 they not excellent models ? Future absolute. — Wilt thou 
 
 — modèle m. 
 
 not lead a more regular life ? Will you not have 
 
 avoir plus 2 réglé 3 conduite f. 1. 
 fashionable gowns ? Future anterior. — Shall I have had no 
 à la mode 2 robe f. I . 
 
 sweetmeats ? Shall we not have had a good preacher ? 
 confitures ? f. prédicateur ? m. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. Present.— Should she not have cifcar 
 
 clair 2 
 
 and just ideas ? Would they not have more extensive know- 
 
 3 f . 1 2 éèmidu 3 con- 
 
 ledge 1 Past.— Should she have had no patience ? 
 
 naissances f. pi. 1. 
 
 Should they have had no rectitude ? 
 f. droiture ? f. 
 
 13 
 
134 
 
 AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB, 
 
 être, to be. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 A PRESENT. 
 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Etre to be 
 
 Avoir été 
 
 
 to have been 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Etan being 
 
 \ 
 
 
 
 PAST. 
 
 \ ayant été 
 
 
 having been 
 
 été been 
 
 ) 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 je suis 1 am 
 
 j'ai 1 
 tu as 
 
 
 I have I 
 Ihou hast J 
 
 tu os thou art 
 
 
 il, or elie est he. or she is 
 
 il a i 
 nous avons j 
 
 été 
 
 ,leh , as \betr. 
 we nave f 
 
 nous sommes wc are 
 
 
 vous êtes you are 
 
 vous avez 1 
 
 
 you have j 
 
 lues S sont the y arc 
 
 ils ont 
 
 
 they have J 
 
 EXERCISES. 
 
 As interrogative and negative sentences will now be 
 promiscuously intermixed, the scholar will observe, 
 that the adverb, in the following exercises, is to be 
 placed before the adjectives : and that whenever in in- 
 terrogative sentences a substantive is the subject, it 
 is to be placed at the head of the sentence, adding a 
 pronoun for the interrogation immediately after the verb, 
 non fjrère is my brother come ? 
 
 -1 am very glad to see you. Art not thou pleased 
 aise de voir satisfait 
 
 With thai honk ! [g she really amiable? We are happy. 
 
 irtblcmcnl heureux 
 
 Arc not you Loo condi Are your friends still in 
 
 con- encore à 
 
 Lorid 
 
 rmnr rTDEFiNiTF. H jeen constant! 
 
AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 
 i35 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 j'étais 
 
 J was 
 
 j'avais ") 
 
 Ihad 
 
 V 
 
 tu étais 
 
 thou toast 
 
 tu avais 
 
 thou hacUt 
 
 | 
 
 il était 
 
 he was 
 
 il avait ! , 4 , 
 > ete 
 nous avions j 
 
 hs had 
 
 } been 
 i 
 
 nous étions 
 
 we were 
 
 we had 
 
 vous étiez 
 
 you ivere 
 
 vous aviez j 
 
 you had 
 
 i 
 
 ils étaient 
 
 they -were 
 
 ils avaient J 
 
 they had 
 
 J 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 je fus 
 
 I was 
 
 j'eus ^ 
 
 J had 
 
 1 
 
 tu fus 
 
 thou wast 
 
 tu eus 
 
 thou hadst 
 
 | 
 
 il fut 
 
 he was 
 
 il eut ! , . , 
 > ete 
 nous eûmes ,' 
 
 he had 
 
 } been 
 i 
 
 nous fûmes 
 
 we were 
 
 we had 
 
 vous fûtes 
 
 you were 
 
 vous eûtes | 
 
 you had 
 
 i 
 
 ils furent 
 
 they were 
 
 ils eurent J 
 
 they had 
 
 j 
 
 <hou always been steady? She has been faithful. Have we 
 
 posé fidlh 
 
 seen firm and courageous ? You have been charitable. Have 
 
 ferme = — 
 
 <hose men always been good and benevolent ? 
 
 bienfaisant ? 
 
 Imperfect. — I was too busy to see you. VVast not thou 
 occupé pour recevoir 
 troublesome 1 Was this girl idle ? Were wc not too un- 
 
 importun Jille paresseux in- 
 
 tractable ? You were not quiet enough. They were vain. 
 
 docile ? tranquille 2 assez 1. f. — 
 
 frivolous, and coquettish. 
 frivole coquette. 
 
 Pluperfect. — 1 had hitherto been very indifferent. Hadst 
 jusqu'alors insouciant. 
 
 not thou been too imprudent ? Had his wife been sufficiently 
 
 — ('pou se assez 
 
 modest and reserved ? We had not yet been sufficiently 
 
 asstz réservé, encore 
 
 Prêt. ant. — Exercises upon this tense would be 
 as yet too complicated, as may be seen by this sen- 
 Rem.«( tence ; à peine y eus-je été cinq ou six minutes, qu'il ar- 
 riva, I had scarce been there five or six minutes, when 
 he arrived. 
 
136 AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 I shall or will j'aurai 
 
 be 
 thou will be tu auras 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE 
 je serai 
 
 tu seras 
 
 il sera ht will be il aura 
 
 nous serons we shall be nous aurons 
 
 vous serez you shall be vous aurez 
 
 ils seront they shall be ils auront 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 1 
 
 >été 
 
 / shall or 
 will have 
 
 thou wilt 
 h live 
 
 he will have 
 
 we shall 
 
 have 
 you will 
 
 have 
 they will 
 
 have 
 
 ► been 
 
 attentive. Had you been envious and jealous? They had no* 
 appliqué =c jaloux 
 
 been grateful. 
 
 reconnoisant. 
 
 Preterit definite. — Perhaps I was not sufficiently 
 
 Peut être que asses 
 
 prudent. Wast thou discreet enough on that occasion? Was 
 
 — discret 1 en — f. 
 
 not that princess too proud ? We were very unhappy. Were you 
 
 — cesse fier i 
 
 not too hasly ? They were not much satisfied. 
 prompt fort satisfait. 
 
 Future absolute. — To-morrow I shall be at home till 
 
 Demain ch tz-moi jusqu'à 
 
 (twelve o'clock). Wilt thou always be restless, brutal, and 
 
 midi inifuift. bourru 
 
 sour? Will your father be at home this evening ? 
 
 chagrin Monsieur rhes-lui soirm. 
 
 we not be more diligent ? Will you always then be 
 
 — 3 , done 2 1 
 
 capricious, obstinate, and particular ? Will not your scholars be 
 
 ax opiniâtre» point ill. écolier 
 
 troublesome ? 
 incommo'l 
 
 aie aji 1 1 ru>R -Shall not I have been too severe ? Thoi; 
 
 wilt have been too distrustful. Will not his sister have been 
 défiant sœur 
 
 ind capricious ? Shall not we have been eager 
 fantasque empressé £ 
 
AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 
 m 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES.. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ie serais J should, would, j'aurais 
 
 or could be 
 
 tu serais thou would'st tu aurais 
 
 be 
 
 il serait he would be il aurait 
 
 nous serions we should be nous aurions 
 
 vous seriez you xoould be vous auriez 
 
 ils seraient they would be ils auraient 
 
 été 
 
 PAST. 
 I should 
 
 have 
 thou would 1 st 
 
 have 
 he would 
 
 have 
 we should 
 
 have 
 you should 
 
 have 
 they would 
 
 have 
 
 The conditional past, J'eusse été, iu cusses été> il eût été, nous 
 eussions été, vous eussiez été, ils eussent été, is also used. 
 
 enough ? Will you not have been inconsiderate ? Will- not the 
 
 1 indiscret 
 
 judges have been just ? 
 juge 
 
 4 
 
 Conditional present. I would not be so rash. 
 
 téméraire. 
 Would'stthou be as consistent in thy behaviour as in thy Ian- 
 conséquent dans conduite f. pro- 
 
 guage ? Would not his son be ready in time ? Should we be 
 pos m pi. fils prêt à 
 
 always incorrigible ? You would not be disinterested enough, 
 
 désintéressé 2 I 
 Would not those ladies be always virtuous ? 
 dame vertueux ? 
 
 Past. (Had it not been for) your instructions, I should have 
 . Sans conseil m. pj. 
 
 been proud and haughty. Would'st not thou have been 
 
 dédaigneux hautain 
 
 malicious and sarcastic ? Would that man have been so 
 malin ricaneur tellement 
 
 destitute of common sense ? Certainly we should not have beer 
 dépourvu bon sens 
 
 so ridiculous. Would not you have been more lfind and, 
 si ridicule d9ux pl Ui 
 
 indulgent :' They would not have been so ungenteel. 
 complaisant ? malhonni 
 
 23* 
 
138 
 
 AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Sois 
 
 Qu'il soit 
 Soyons 
 Soyez 
 Qu'ils soient 
 
 Be (thou) 
 Let him be 
 Let us be 
 Be (ye) 
 Let them be 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 que that 
 
 que 
 
 
 that ") 
 
 je sois / may y can, or 
 should be 
 
 tu soi? thou may'st 
 be 
 
 il soit he may be 
 
 j'aie 
 tu aies 
 il ait 
 
 > été 
 
 I may, candor 
 
 should have 
 thou may' si 
 
 have 
 he may have 
 
 \btt 
 
 nous soyons ice may be 
 
 nous ayons 
 
 
 ice may haie 
 
 
 vous soyez you may be 
 
 vous ayez 
 
 
 you may have 
 
 
 ils soient they may be 
 
 ils aient . 
 
 
 they may have ^ 
 
 
 Imperative. Be liberal. Do not be so lavish. Le: 
 sing. — sing, prodigue 
 
 • quitable, humane, and prudejit. Let us not be covetou? 
 — humain, — avide. » 
 
 conomical and temperate. Do not be thoughtless. 
 pL économe sobre pi. léger 
 
 As the third person singular and plural of the impera- 
 nood belong rather to the subjunctive, they are thert 
 exemplified. 
 
 It has already been observed, that before the sub- 
 ive can form a complete sense, it must be pre 
 ceded by another verb. For the sake of brevity, 
 therefore, complete sentences will only be given on the 
 present tense. This remark applies alike to the fou? 
 conjuj 
 
AUXILIARY VERB ETRE. 1*39 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 que 
 
 that 
 
 que 
 
 
 that 
 
 
 je fusse 
 
 I might, or 
 
 j'eusse 
 
 
 I might or 
 
 
 
 could be 
 
 
 
 could 
 
 > 
 
 tu fusses 
 
 thou might' 'st be 
 
 tu eusses 
 
 
 thou mighVsl 
 
 «5 
 
 il fût 
 
 he might be 
 
 il eût y été 
 
 he might 
 
 
 nous fus- 
 
 we might be 
 
 nous eus- 
 
 
 we might 
 
 
 sions 
 
 
 sions 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 vous fussiez 
 
 you might be 
 
 vous eussiez 
 
 
 you might 
 
 
 ils fussent 
 
 they might be 
 
 ils eussent 
 
 
 they might 
 
 
 Present. Is it possible I can be so credulous ? They wish 
 — * — le On désire 
 
 ibou niay'st be more modest. Is it possible she can be so ob 
 modeste * en- 
 
 ornate? They wish us to be more assiduous. It is not 
 fêlé assidu On* 
 
 expected you should be timid. It is feared they may 
 
 s'attend timide. On* craint ne 
 
 be guilty. 
 icupable. 
 
 Preterit. That I should have been so hasty and impatient 
 
 emporté si — 
 Thou should'st have been so puffed up with pride. That she 
 
 bouffi de 
 should have been so fickle. That we should have been so head 
 volage têtu 
 
 strong. That you should have been so avaricious. That they 
 
 avare 
 «hould have been so unreasonable. 
 déraisonnable. 
 
 Observe, the verb être serves as ah auxiliary to conjugate the 
 passive verbs through all their tenses, the compound tenses of the 
 pronominal verbs and those of about fifty neuter verbs. 
 
 Imperfect That I should not be humane and generous. 
 
 humain = 
 
 That thou might'st be more careful. That she might not be so 
 
 soigneux. 
 arrogant. That we might be victorious. That you might not be 
 
 so stern. That they might not be so cruel. 
 tévère. 
 
A 
 
 : 40 OF THE REGULAR VERBS 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 L\ ER. 
 
 In verbs ending in -get, the e is preserved in 
 those tenses where g ,s followed by the vowels a, 
 or o, in order to preserve to this letter its soft sound : 
 as, Langeant, jugeons, je négligeai. 
 
 In verbs ending in -cer, (or the same reason, a 
 cedilla is put under c, when followed by a, or o ; as. 
 I suçant, plaçons, j' effaçai. 
 
 !In verb* ending in -operand -uyer, they is chang- 
 ed into i before a mute e ; as, f emploie, il essuie, 
 j'appuierai, il nettoierait. 
 ( This practice is extended by some to verbs in 
 4 Layer and -eyer, as, il paie, j'essaierai, elle grasseyé, 
 ( or grasseie. 
 
 In some few verbs ending in -e/er and -«fer, the 
 / and t are doubled in those inflections, which re- 
 ceive an e mute after these consonants, as, from ap- 
 peler, il appelle, from jeter, je jetterai, &c. 
 
 The first person singular of the present oi 
 the indicative changes e mute into acute é in in- 
 J terrogative sentences. The remark is also ap- 
 » plied°to some verbs of the second conjugation end- 
 j ing in -prir, : /Wr, and -far ; as, négligé-je ? aimé- 
 [je? offrt-jc f cueilié-je ? 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 I 1 mi-ht have bcon move studious. Thai 
 
 t j loll ,,. d more rimim-i That she might 
 
 have i, duty. That we might have 
 
 = </ ( roir m. pi. 
 
 pleasure. That you might have been 
 lier- I til* 
 
 more M m ml That they might have 
 
 Idu 
 for 
 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS, 
 
 149 
 
 PARADIGM, OR MODEL. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 SIMPLE, TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESET. 
 
 parl-er to speak avoir parl-e* 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 PRESENT. 
 ptà-ant speaking 
 
 PAST. 
 
 parl-é m. -te f. spoken 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 ( ayant parl-é 
 
 PAST. 
 
 to have spoktr 
 
 PAST, 
 
 having spoker 
 
 ! 
 
 All the regular verbs of the First Conjugation 
 adopt the terminations of the verb- parler ; Exam. 
 
 parl-er 
 
 aim-er 
 
 expliqu-cr .;; 
 
 ; avou-gr 
 
 parl-an^ 
 
 annonç-anf 
 
 engag-efln/ 
 
 défray-arat 
 dédommage' 
 
 parl-é 
 
 agré-é * 
 
 dëcri-é 
 
 je parl-e 
 
 dans- s 
 
 ignor-e 
 
 renvoi-c 
 
 tu pari -es 
 
 dîn-es 
 
 rejet -tes 
 
 renouvelles 
 
 il parl-e 
 
 chant-e 
 
 bégai-e 
 
 grassey-e 
 
 nous parl-ons 
 
 berç-a?is 
 
 choy-ons 
 
 chang eons 
 
 vous parl-es 
 
 régn-es 
 
 essuy-es 
 
 épel-es 
 
 ils parl-e?if 
 
 caress-cn£ 
 
 enna-ieni 
 
 appel-fewf 
 
 And so on through the whole verb. 
 
 Ç Adverbs, with few exceptions, must be placed 
 9 1 after the verb, in simple tenses, and between the 
 " \ auxiliary and the participle in compound tenses, 
 
 ( when this adverb is only a single word. 
 
 I The remarks prefixed to the exercises on the 
 
 3 ( verb avoir, when de is to be placed between the 
 f verb and the substantive, ought to be attended to. 
 
 i The article the, after the verb, must always be 
 
 4 ( expressed in French, though often understood in 
 ( English. 
 
 ATIVB PRESENT. 
 
 EXERCJ 3 
 
 I willingly give that plaything tc 
 volontiers aonner jotijou m. 
 
142 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 ul e I speak j'ai 
 
 tu parl-es thou speakest tu as 
 
 il parl-e he speaks il a 
 
 noas pari-dM we sptak nous avons 
 
 vous pari-ce you speak vous avez 
 
 ils parl-enf they speak ils ont 
 
 parl- 
 
 I have 
 thou hast 
 ht has 
 ue have 
 you have 
 they have 
 
 your sister. Do I prefer pleasure to my duty ? Dos: 
 
 f. * préférer art. . Tn. devoir m. 
 
 'hou not irritate thy enemies ? He does not propose salutary 
 irriter ennemi proposer un = L' 
 
 advice to bis friends. We sincerely love peace and 
 
 avis m. 1 sincèrement art. paix f. art. 
 
 tranquillity. We do not neglect (any thing) to please you 
 
 = f. * négliger rien pour plaire 
 
 Do you not admire the beauty of that landscape ? Do no 
 
 admirer = f. 
 
 your parents comfort the afflicted ? 
 
 — consoler affligé m.\û. 
 means to succeed. 
 irf. moyen m. pour réussir. 
 
 Preterit indefinite. 
 
 paysage m. * 
 
 They (make use of) all 
 employer 
 
 to my cousin. 
 r he val m. 1 — m. 
 
 villi my sister ? 
 
 I have (given up) my favour]'. t 
 céder favori 2 
 
 Hast thou not exchanged watcher 
 changer de mo 
 lias the tutor given fine engravings to hi- 
 précepteur de gravure f. pi. 
 We have spoken (a long while) of your adventure. 
 pupille m. long- 'Utreï 
 
 you not insisted too much upon that point ? Have you; 
 insisté * sur — m. • 
 
 HUB! I (hoir hall dresses ? 
 
 arer de bal t habit m. pi. 1. 
 
 Imperfect. 1 it of my misfortunes, 
 
 mm cette penser à malheur m. pi. 
 
 thou dread lib [>, id firmness ? He ex 
 
 redouter — f. pro», fermeté f. rc 
 
 «.ihiteriin 1 all the virtues oi itors. Dii* no 
 
 tracer en f. anectrç 
 
OF THE REGULAR YER&S. 
 
 144 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES» 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 je parl-aifi I did speak, or j ? avais 
 
 teas speaking 
 lu parl-afs thoudidst speak tu avais 
 il parl-aii he did speak il avait 
 nous parl-ions ?ce di<i i;;eafe nous avions 
 vous parl-fez #om did speak vous aviez 
 ils paxl-aient they did speak ils avaient J 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 J/iad 
 
 ? parl-é 
 
 we had 
 you had 
 they had 
 
 »5 
 p 
 
 hat woman accuse her friend of levity ? We did not protect 
 
 accuser ami f. légèreté f. * protéger 
 
 *hal bad man. You despised a vain erudition. Did {he 
 
 méchant mépriser — *2 — f. 1. * 
 
 Romans disdain so weak an enemy ? The bees were there 
 Romain dédaigner faible 2 m. I. abeille * y 
 
 sucking the cups of the flowers. 
 nicer calice m. Jlcur. 
 
 Pluperfect. — I had drained an unwholesome marsh. 
 
 dessécher mal tain 2 murais in. 1. 
 Had'st thou not married a man rich, but unluckily without 
 
 épouser malheur eusemenl sans 
 
 education ? Had his father rejected these advantageous 
 
 — f. rejeter avantageux 2 
 
 offers ? We had not long listened to the singing of the 
 
 offre f. 1. Jong-tcm^s écouter * chant m. 
 
 birds. Had you already studied geography and history 1 
 oiseau m. déjà étudier art. = f. art. == 
 
 Had not his friends procured him a troop of cavalry 1 
 
 procurer 2 lui 1 compagnie f. cavalerie ï 
 
 There is a fourth preterit, called preterit anterior m 
 definite, which is used instead ( >f the preterit anterior 
 when speaking of a time not entirely elapsed ; as/ai ei 
 achevé mon ouvrage ce matin, cette semaine, &c. and not 
 fens achevé: as it is found in every conjugation, I shall 
 insert it here ; j'ai eu parlé, tu as eu parlé, il a eu parlé, 
 nous avens eu parlé, vous avez eu parlé, ils ont et^ parle. 
 
J44 
 
 OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 je parl-at I spoke j'eus 
 
 tu pari -as thou spokest tu eus 
 
 il pari -c he spoke il eut 
 
 nous parl-â/nes ice spoke nous eûmes 
 
 vous parl-â7ej you spoke vous eûtes 
 
 ils parl-crenf they spoke ils eurent 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 ► parl-é 
 
 Ihad 
 thouhadst 
 he hcuf 
 we had 
 you had 
 they had 
 
 Preterit definite. — Did I not gladly give peaches 
 * avec plaisir de art. pêche f. pî. 
 
 and flowers to my neighbours ? Thou forgottest an 
 
 pr. art. fleurs f. pi. voisin m. pi. oublier 
 
 essential circumstance. Did not your cousin relate that 
 
 essentiel^ circonstance f. pi. * raconter 
 
 charming history with (a great deal) of grace ? He lightly 
 — mant = f avec beaucoup légèrement 
 
 judged of my intentions. Did we not shew courage, 
 
 juger * — * montre de art. — m. pr. — 
 
 constancy, and firmness ? Did you visit the grotto 
 
 art. = f. pr — art. f. * visiter grotte f. 
 
 and the grove ? They did not generously forgive their 
 
 bois m. généreusement pardonner à 
 
 enemies. 
 
 Preterit anteriok.-tI had soon wasted my money, and 
 
 bientôt manger argent m. 
 exhausted my resources. Hadst thou very soon reinforced thy 
 épuiser reuowrct f. * vite renforcer 
 
 party.? Had not Alexander soon surmounted all obstacles? 
 
 part i in. Alexandre surmonter tous art. =m. pi. 
 
 We had not soon enough shut the shutters, and let down) the 
 
 tot 2 assez 1 fermer volet baisser 
 
 curtains. Had you not quickly dined ? In the twinkling 
 rideau promptement diner. Dans * un clin 
 
 ♦f an eye, they had dispersed the mob 
 
 * œil disperser populace f. 
 
 Future abs lute.— I shall relieve the poor. Wilt 
 
 soul». pauvre m. pi. 
 
 thou faithfully keep that secret? Will he consult 
 
 fidèlement garder —m. consulter de art. 
 
OP TÏÏÊ REGULAR VERES. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMP«»T7Nr 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 je parl-erat J shalU or 
 
 ■will speak 
 'u parl-cnzs thou shaft 
 
 sptak 
 :1 parl-£T& he shall 
 
 speak 
 nous parl-erons ice shall 
 
 speak 
 tous parl-er£2 #oit sAcrtf 
 
 lis pa.r\-eront they shall 
 speak - 
 
 FUTURE ANÏERIOR 
 
 j'aurai 
 tu auras 
 il aura 
 nous aurons 
 vous aurez 
 ils auront 
 
 >pari 
 
 halt | 
 i 
 
 enlightened judges? He will support you >. 
 'claire. 2 jttg-c I. appuyer d? 
 
 We shall not prefer pleasure to glory 
 
 préférer art- m. art. f, pi. 
 
 îonour. By such conduct, will you i 
 
 tel 2 1 conduite f. 3- 
 ind mother ? Will they astonish their he 
 pron. étonner 
 
 Future anterior. — I shall soon have finished tbj; 
 
 thy submission, wilt thou not have appea 
 
 soumission f. a/ paiu- ce 
 
 the king have triumphed over his enemies 
 
 triompher de 
 not have rewarded enough the merit 
 
 récompenser mérite m 
 
 Will you not have flown to his assistance I 
 
 voler secours m. 
 
 have brought money ? 
 
 apporter de art argent. 
 
 
 de him : 
 
 Conditional present. — Should I fot 
 
 foi 
 without number ? Thou would'st not a 1 
 
 nombre m. 
 Would not his attorney (clear up) thai 
 
 procureur débrouiller 
 (drive away) the importunate. V> 
 
 chasser importun m. pi. 
 
 14 
 
 % 
 
rt6 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PAST 
 
 >1 
 
 je parl-craw I should, j'aurais ") I should, 
 
 would, or would, or 
 
 could speak could 
 
 tu parl-erars thou should' st tu aurais thou should 'st 
 
 speak 
 il parl-erail he should il aurait fte should 
 
 speak } parl-é 
 
 nous pari- ice should nous aurions we should 
 
 erions speak 
 
 vous pari- you should vous auriez you should 
 
 criez speak 
 
 ils pari- they should ils auraient they should 
 
 eraient speak J J • 
 
 J'eusse parlé, tu eusses parlé, il eût parlé, nous eussions parlé, 
 vous eussiez parlé, ils eussent parlé, is also used for the conditional 
 past. This remark holds good for every verb. 
 
 itrocious plot ? They would not unravel the clue of 
 
 atroce 2 complot m. 1. démêler Jil m. 
 
 that intrigue 
 — f. 
 
 Past.— -I should have liked hunting, fishing, and the 
 
 aimer art. chasse f art pêche f. 
 country. Would'st thou not have played? Would he not have 
 campagne f. jouer 
 
 bowed to the company ? Would we gladly have praised his 
 lalmtr * compagnie f avec plaisir 2 louer 1 
 
 pride and incivility ? You would have awakened 
 
 orgueil m. prou, malhonni! Hier 
 
 y body. Would those merchants have paid their debts ? 
 tout le monde marchand payer dttte f. pi. 
 
 hi all thy actions, consult the light of 
 
 — f. pi. consulter lumière art. 
 yield to the violence of thy passions. 
 
 — f . — 
 
 ad virtue. Let us not 
 -• f. art. f. 
 ark. own inter* to the 
 
 cent '{rît m. pi. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 U7 
 
 parl-e* 
 qu'il parl-e 
 pari ons 
 parl-es 
 qu'ils parl-e?if 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 speak {thou) 
 let him peak 
 let us speak 
 speak (i/e) 
 let them speak 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 que 
 je parl-e 
 
 PRESENT. 
 that 
 
 que 
 I may, or can j'aie 
 
 speak 
 thou may'st tu aies 
 
 speak 
 he may speak il ait 
 uousparl-îons ire may speak nous ayons 
 vous parl-ies you may speak vous ayez 
 ils parî-ertf they may speak ils aient 
 
 tu parl-es 
 il parl-e 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 that 
 
 I may, or can 
 
 thou may'st 
 
 >parl-é 
 
 he may 
 ice may 
 you may 
 they may 
 
 
 public good. Do not omit such useful and interest 
 2 bien 1 * négliger de art. si utile 2 infères- 
 
 ing details. 
 saiÀ 3 — m. pi. 1. 
 
 Subjunctive Present. — That I may not always listen to 
 
 tccruter * 
 
 a severe censor of my defects. That thou should'st find 
 
 — 2 = in. 1 défaut m. pi. trouver 
 
 real friends. That he would adorn his speeches with the grace? 
 
 de vrai parer discours de 
 
 of a pure diction. That she would remain in her boudoir. 
 
 — 2 — f. 1. rester — m. 
 
 That we shoujd so hastily condemn the world. That 
 légèrement condamner monde m. 
 
 * Rem. The second person singular of the imperative of this 
 conjugation, and likewise of some verbs of the second ending in 
 vrir,frir, ~lir, take 5 after e, before the word y and en, as, portes 
 en à ton frère, carry some to thy brother ; offres- en à ta sœur, 
 offer some to thy sister ; cueilles-en aussi pour toi, gather sorat 
 e for thyself; apporks-y tes livres, bring there thy books. 
 
Uï 
 
 OP THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 s .s 
 
 COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 1MPE£ 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 que " 
 
 that } 
 
 
 I might, could j j'eusse 
 
 
 / might, could, 
 
 
 
 ould 
 
 
 or would 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -OM£S 
 
 thou nàghVst tu eusses 
 
 
 thou might'st 
 
 Î 
 
 Ci 
 
 
 
 
 
 at 
 
 he might speak il eût 
 
 ►parl-é 
 
 he might 
 
 ^ 
 
 
 we m nous eus- 
 speak sions 
 night vous eus- 
 ak siez 
 
 
 we might 
 you might 
 
 Q 
 ft 
 c\ 
 
 
 night ils eus- 
 
 
 they might 
 
 
 
 speak sent 
 
 
 •* 
 
 
 may pout incessantly. That they may work more 
 
 nnt cesse travailler plus 
 
 ■fers, 
 
 —That I may have caressed insolence, and 
 caresser art. — f. 
 '. That thou would'st have added nothing to . 
 
 a j alter 
 .i he should have carried despair into 
 
 i .' ra. porter art. désespoir m. dan: 
 
 his friend That we may have blamed a conduct 
 
 blâmer conduite L 
 Client and so wise. That you may have exasperated so 
 — sage exaspérer 
 
 :t a character. That they may not have taken advan 
 l ixj. 1 profiter 
 
 :i-Uinces. 
 pi. 
 
 1mp> i 1 should not copy his example. That 
 
 imiter exemple m. 
 i up) perfidious friends. That he 
 
 •I miner de art. — de 2 ! 
 ' instead of a palace. That wt 
 
 ' minière f. au lieu palais m. 
 
 i feet of an illegitimate king. That you 
 
 pit dm. illégitime & 1 
 
 laws of your country. That they would 
 loi f. pi pays m. 
 
&F TKE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 14$ 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION, 
 
 IN IR. 
 
 This conjugation is divided into four branches» 
 The first branch contains upwards of two hundred 
 aid eighty regular verbs in -*V, exclusive of fifty-three 
 more comprised in the three other branches, which 
 may be considered as exceptions, and may be reduced 
 to thirteen roots, with thirty-nine derivatives. By 
 presenting some of the regular verbs of the first 
 branch, which nearly resemble the three following lists 
 of exceptions, the scholar will evidently see that the 
 Germinations in -mir, -vir, -tir, and -nir, are not ab« 
 solutely the distinctive marks of the three othei 
 
 branches, the 
 
 [ists cf which 
 
 ought to 
 
 be learned b) 
 
 heart. 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 ' ralent-îV 
 
 io slacken 
 
 
 ( to be under ihf 
 
 
 retent-ir 
 
 to resound 
 
 ressort-tr 
 
 < jurisdiction 
 
 
 appésant-î'r 
 
 to makejieavy 
 
 
 . ( of a court 
 
 
 nant-ir 
 
 to pledge 
 
 asserv-tr 
 
 to instave 
 
 
 renform-ir 
 
 to paster 
 
 seT-tr 
 
 to use hard 
 
 
 affefm-ir 
 
 to strengthen 
 
 assouv-aV 
 
 »to glut 
 
 
 répart-îr 
 
 io distribute 
 
 appauvr-î'r 
 
 to impoceruJ 
 
 £Fw J avert-ir 
 
 to inform 
 
 tern-ir 
 
 to tarnish 
 
 1 sert-ir 
 
 to set a stone 
 
 vern-ir 
 
 io varnish 
 
 j dessert- ir 
 
 îo un:- et a stone 
 
 garnir 
 
 to garnish 
 
 | sort-tr son i 
 
 i to obtain a 
 
 fourn-?> 
 
 to furnish 
 
 plein et 
 
 > full effect 
 
 ben-ir 
 
 to bless 
 
 | entier effet 
 
 i (by law) 
 
 henn-ir, kc 
 
 io neigh 
 
 t assort-ir 
 
 to match 
 
 
 
 not speak at random. 
 
 à-tort et à-travers. 
 
 Pluperfect. That I should not have burnt that work. That 
 
 brûler m . 
 
 iiiou might'st not have contemplated the beauties of the gouq- 
 contempler = cam- 
 
 try. That he should have perfected his natural qualities. 
 pagne perfectionner — tel 2 =f. phi. 
 
 That we might not have gained the victoiy. That you 
 
 remporter =f. 
 
 had enchanted the public. That they would have struck 
 — ter —m. * fiapptr 
 
 enemies with fear. 
 de crainte 
 
l6u 
 
 OF THE REGULAS VERBS* 
 
 dcr-mir 
 ) me 
 
 DERIVATIVES. 
 
 C redor-mtV /o sfee^ again 
 
 1 endor-mir fo /w// asleep 
 
 \ se rendor-mir fo fall as lee, 
 
 f again 
 
 démen-/ir fo gi»e Me ft> 
 
 consen-/tV to consent 
 
 pressentir to foresee 
 
 ressen-/ir to resent 
 
 dépar-/ ir to divide 
 
 .. {to set out 
 ,repar-Jtf J flgam 
 
 ressor-fir <o go ow/ agâf». 
 to repent^ has no derivative. 
 
 10 sleep 
 
 to lit 
 in feel 
 
 to set out 
 
 to go out 
 to serve 
 
 \ couv-rir 
 
 Of: 
 
 'o oven Ï rouv-nr § fo o^en again 
 
 * ^ J entr'ouv-nr fo //a// o/>£/i 
 
 . < découv-nr /o discover 
 
 to cover < 
 
 { recouv-rtr Jo coptr again 
 
 to offer mésoff-Wr to underbid 
 
 to duffer, has no derivative. 
 
 
 DERIVAT! ES. 
 
 \im lu happen 
 orconv- | f o circum- 
 vent 
 
 o^ira- 
 
 gree 
 •.come 
 
 t. ittotnt 
 it tain tenir i 
 o pr vent 
 
 • fome 
 
 in re 
 >nem- 
 btr 
 
 HOOT. DERIVATIVES. 
 
 r 
 
 s'abst-enir to abstain 
 
 appart-en?V to belong 
 coni-enir to contain 
 det-tmr to detain 
 entret-entr to ketp up 
 
 maint- cuir to me 
 obtenir to obtain 
 ret-e?iir to retain 
 sout-enrr to uphold 
 
 '". of the second branch, take the 
 likewise conjugated with itrt, 
 ubvenir. which take avoir ; con- 
 . >.*i*, bin it takes itrt } when it shj 
 . ^ uijtl obsolete verbj only used imperional])'. 
 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 151 
 
 BRANCH 1. 
 
 » ( punishing 
 * m P h laissant 
 
 PARADIGMS. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. 
 
 to feel to open 
 
 sen-fir ouv-n'r 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 feeling 
 seu-tant 
 
 opening 
 ouv-rant 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 Simple 
 
 f punished 
 \ pun-i 
 
 felt 
 sen-ti 
 
 Comp. j to have punished 
 près, i avoir pun-i 
 Comp. i having punished 
 partie, \ ayant pun-i 
 
 [felt 
 sen-ti 
 
 opened 
 ouv-ert 
 
 opened 
 ouv-erJ 
 
 ' 1 punish 
 
 je pun-is 
 
 tu pun-is 
 
 iim.^ il pun-if 
 
 nous p\m-issons 
 vous pun-iss<?s 
 ils pun-iweni 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 fed 
 
 sen-s 
 
 sen-s 
 
 sen-f 
 
 sen-Jons 
 
 sen-tes 
 
 ^en-tent 
 
 open 
 
 o\xv-re 
 
 ouv-res 
 
 ouv-re 
 
 ouv-rons 
 
 ouvres 
 
 ouv-rent 
 
 BRANCH 4 
 to hold 
 X-enir 
 
 holding 
 t-enant 
 
 held 
 t-enu 
 
 held 
 t-enu 
 
 hold 
 
 t-iens 
 
 t-iens 
 
 i-ient 
 
 t-enons 
 
 X-enez 
 
 X-iennent 
 
 Indicative. Present. I choose this picture. I feel alt 
 choisir tableau m. 
 
 the unpleasantness of your situation. Whence comest thou ? 
 
 désagrément m. — d'où venir 
 
 Does he thus define that word ? Does his mother (go out) so 
 
 ainsi définir mot m. ' sortir 
 
 soon ? Do we not (set off ; for the country ? Do you not 
 
 tôt partir campagne f. 
 
 pity his sorrows ? Do you not (tell a lie ?) They are 
 
 compatir à mal m pt. mentir 
 
 finishing at this moment. They (act contrary) to your 
 
 finir dam 1 * art. — m. contrevenir 
 
 orders. 
 ordre. 
 
 Imperfect. I fortified his soul against the dangers joi' 
 prémunir contre — ■ 
 
;i>2 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 \ 
 
 I have punished 
 
 felt 
 
 opened 
 
 lield 
 
 omv ' *j' ai p un * 
 
 sen-ti 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 ouv-erl 
 
 tenu 
 
 simple \^ did P Uni5h 
 t \ je pun-tssais 
 
 feel 
 
 open 
 
 hold 
 
 sen-tais 
 
 ouv-rais 
 
 ùtnab 
 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 
 _ C I had punished 
 om P' ^ j'avais pun-t 
 
 felt 
 
 opened 
 
 held 
 
 sen-ti 
 
 ouv-ert 
 
 t-enu 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. 
 
 
 (I punished 
 
 felt i 
 
 opened 
 
 held 
 
 je pun -is 
 
 sen-tis 
 
 ouv-ris 
 
 t-ins 
 
 
 tu pun-is 
 
 sen-tis 
 
 ouv-ris 
 
 t-ins 
 
 simple i 
 
 il pun it 
 
 sen-lit 
 
 ouvrit 
 
 t-int 
 
 
 nous pun-îmes 
 
 sen times 
 
 ouv-rimes 
 
 t-Anmu 
 
 
 vous pu n-ifes 
 
 sen-t'tes 
 
 onv-rîics 
 
 t-întes 
 
 
 Jls puniVen/ 
 
 sentirent 
 
 oav- rirent 
 
 Vinrent 
 
 seduction. I served my friends warmly. Did'st no 
 
 art.' — f. strvir avtc chal ur 
 
 thou amuse him with fair pronr.-ises ? He complied (at last) 
 
 entretenir de beau promesse f. pi consentir enfin 
 
 with the wishes of his family Did we not frequently 
 
 à dinr m. pi. famil/f f. fréquemment 
 
 warn our friends of the bad state of their affairs ! Did we 
 :ivfrtir état 
 
 sleep then ? Did you not belie 
 dormir alors ? démentir 
 
 not the enemies invade an 
 envahir 
 
 Din 
 
 wild beasts 
 
 saura ar 2 belt f. 1 
 their mountains ? 
 montagne. 
 
 often 
 so uvent 
 
 your character ■ 
 coraettrt m. 
 immense country ? Did thf 
 
 — 2 pays m. 1. 
 (come out) from the bottom of 
 sortir fond m. 
 
 Preterit. I softened my father by my submission. L 
 fl >'rh ir soum ismon f. 
 
 w that terrible catastrophe. Thou did'st not (come again) 
 pressentir — 2 f. 1 revenir 
 
 as thou had'st promised. He did not succeed through 
 
 comme le. ind 2 promis réussir par 
 
 N. B. Only tin' first person of those tenses, which are invari- 
 ably conjugated afike, will now be given, the scholar will easih 
 v the rest. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 153 
 
 PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 p < I had punished felt opened 
 
 i*Qmp* ^ y ens p Un .^ sen-/* ouv-ert 
 
 held 
 ert t-enu 
 
 Simple^ 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 I shall punish feel open hold 
 
 punirai sen-tirai ouv-nVai t-iendrai 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 Convo \ 1 s h a U have punished felt opened 
 
 P* \ j'aurai pun-t sen-Ji* ouv-eri 
 
 held 
 
 ert t-enu 
 
 CONDITIONAL 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ^. j $ I should punish feel open hold 
 
 ™ l je pun-irais sentirais ouv-rirais t-iendrais 
 
 thoughtlessness. Did his daughter not (set out again) 
 
 étourderit f repartir 
 
 immediately? Did not Alexander sully his glory by his pride? 
 sur-le-champ ternir 
 
 Did we (go out of the city) before him ? We never betrayed 
 
 ville f. avant lui trahir 
 
 that important secret. Did you not agree to trust 
 
 — 2 — m. 1. consentir de vous en rapporter 
 
 to me ? They served their country with courage. Did the 
 
 moi pays — 
 
 ancient philosophers enjoy great consideration ? 
 
 philosophe m. pi. jouir de un — f. 
 
 Future. Shall I not obtain this of you ? What will be- 
 
 obtenir cda de que de- 
 
 come of thee, if I forsake thee Will he not embellish 
 
 venir * tu abandonner embellir 
 
 his country-seat ? He will not sleep quietly. 
 
 maison de campagne tranquillement 
 
 Shall we consent to that ridiculous bargain ? With 
 
 2 marché m. 1. avec de art. 
 
 lime and patience, you will compass your end. Wc 
 
 m. pr. art. f. venir à-bont de dessein m. 
 
 shall not sully the splendour of our life by an unworthy action. 
 
 éclat m. indigne 2 — 1 
 
 Will those men enrich their country by their industry ? Will 
 
 enricher pays industrie 
 
 not our friends offer us their assistance ? 
 offrir secours 
 
254 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 PAST. 
 
 Comp. 1 1 s h 0U M h> ave punished felt 
 p ' \ j'aurais pun-i sen-ti 
 
 opened 
 ouv-ert 
 
 held 
 
 t-enu 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 (punish (thai) 
 ' pun-is 
 
 qu'il pun-isse 
 
 pun"i3sons 
 j pun-issez 
 (. qu'ils pun-issent 
 
 fed 
 
 sens 
 
 sen/e 
 
 sen-tons 
 
 sen-ies 
 
 sen tent 
 
 open 
 
 ouv-/e 
 
 ouv~rg 
 
 ouv-rons 
 
 ouv-rcs 
 
 ouv-re?tf 
 
 hold 
 
 t-iem 
 
 X-xennc 
 
 t-enons 
 
 t-cnes 
 
 i-iennen 
 
 Conditional. I would open the door and the window 
 _ ,, porte î. f entire i. 
 
 I should stiU cherish life. Would'st not thou interpose in 
 
 chérir art intervenir 
 
 'hat affair ? Would my brother (set off again) without taking 
 * repartir sans prendre 
 
 ieave of us ? You would not succeed in injuring him in the 
 congé parvenir à nuire lui 
 
 public opinion. Could'st thou soften that flinty heart ' 
 
 — 2 — f. 1 . attendrir de rocher 2 1 
 
 Could they foresee their misfortune ? Would men always 
 
 pressentir malheur art. 
 
 (grow old) without growing wiser, if they reflected on the 
 
 vieillir sans devenir inf 1 réfléchir in d-2 sur 
 
 shortness of life ? 
 brièveté f. art. 
 
 Imperative. Shudder with horror and terror. Support 
 
 Frémir de = de effroi m. Soutenir 
 
 Ihy character in good and bad fortune. Do not 
 
 art. dans art mauvais — f. 
 
 obtain thy point, but by means consistent with 
 parvenir a fin f. pi. que par des moyens que avoue 2 * an 
 delicacy Let us feed the poor. Let us again 
 
 délicatesse \ vonmr m . pl . obtenir art 
 
 glory by our perseverance. Let us not divulge our secret., 
 
 = 2! it découvrir 
 
 to every body Never submit to so unjust a yoke. Do not 
 
 tout-le-monde fléchir sous 2 joue m 1 
 
 ïïï5 B ■°rsv n TfT Donot ( x r n us > a r 
 
 (m that unexpected manner.) l 
 
 ainsi à Vimproviste. 
 
OP THE REGULAR VERB& 
 
 ÎU 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ( that I may punish feel open hold 
 
 que je pun-ûse sen-is ouv-re tienne 
 
 que tu pun-mes serines ouvres X-itnnes 
 
 SimA qu'il pun-isse sen-te ouv-re t-iennt 
 
 que nous pun-iss?"o?is sen-tions ouv-rions t-enions 
 
 que vous yun-ùsies sen-ties ouv-nes t-enies 
 
 . qu'ils ipun-issent sen-tent oav-rent t-iennent 
 
 : omp. 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 that I may have punished felt 
 que j'aie pun-i sen-/i 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 opened 
 ouv-ert 
 
 'held 
 t-emi 
 
 \~ that I might punish feel , open hold 
 
 . j que je pun-isse sen-tisse ouv-risse Vinsse 
 
 I que tu pun-isses sen-tisses ouv-risses t-insses 
 
 ^im.{ qu'il pun-îf sen-tit ouv-rît t4nt 
 
 I que nous pun-m?o??.s sen-ti^sions ouv-rissions tinssions 
 
 que vous pun-miés sen-tissies ouv-rissies t-inssies 
 
 L qu'ils ipun-issent sen-tissent ouv-rissent t-inssent 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 r ( (hat I might have punished felt opened held 
 
 y0m P' l que j'eusse puni senti ouvert tenu 
 
 Subjunctive present. — That I may never blemish my re» 
 
 flétrir 
 putation. That I may (be before-hand) with such dangerous 
 
 f. pr 'venir de art. si = 2 
 
 enemies. I will hot have thee (go out) this morning. That he 
 
 I veux que In sub-1 malin m 
 
 may not enjoy his glory. That he may not obtain his 
 
 de fc== f. parvenir a 
 
 ends. That we may become just, honest, and virtuous. 
 
 fin f. pi. devenir honnêt- vertueux. 
 
 That you may punish the guilty. That you may return 
 
 coupable pi. revenir 
 
 covered with laurels. That they may establish wise 
 
 couvert de laurier m. pi. établir de art. 2 
 
 and just laws. That they may agree about the conditions. 
 3 1 convenir dt — 
 

 -Î56 OF THE REGULAR VERBS, 
 
 THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 IN -OIR. 
 
 PARADIGM. 
 
 This conjugation contains only seven regular verbs, 
 which are : 
 
 perc-evoir to receive dèc-evoir to deceive 
 
 aperc-eroir to perceive d-evoir to owe 
 
 conc-evoir to conceive red-evoir to owe again 
 
 And recevoir* which serves as paradigm. Percevoir is a law 
 erra, and apercevoir is often reflected. 
 
 Observe. In verbs ending in -cevoir, the c, to pre- 
 serve the soft sound of that letter, takes a cedilla, when 
 followed by o, or u. See page 3. 
 INFINITIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSKS. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 ■ cc-eroir to receive avoir reç-7* to have received 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 PRESENT. \ 
 
 vev-cvant receiving f , 
 
 > ayant reç-w having received 
 
 :eç-u received j 
 
 Imperfect. — That I might stun the whole neighbourhood 
 étourdira tout 1 voisinage m. 
 That I might not (bring about) my design?. That thou 
 
 venir à-boul de projet m. pi. 
 would'st (tell a wilfùl lîe.) That he might not bear 
 
 mentir dt dentin prfmi.ditê. soutenir 
 
 his disgrace with firmness. Inat we might disobey the Jaw?. 
 
 — f. 'metè désobéir à 
 
 Flint we should belong \o that great king. That you might 
 
 appartenir 
 renounce your errors and prejudices. That they might 
 
 nir d- = pr pron prêj 
 
 rce of their reasons. That they might hold 
 iblir f. raisonnement tenir h 
 
 ' he most absurd i' 
 
 I. 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 157 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 I receive, &c. we receive^ he. 
 
 je reç-ois nous rec-evons y ai reç-u 1 have received 
 
 tu reç-ois vous rec-eres tu as, &c. thou, &c. 
 
 il reç-oit ils reç-oivent 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 [did receive we did receive j'avais reç-u I had received 
 je rec-evais nous rec~evions 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 I received we received 
 
 je reç-us nous reç-ûmes j eus, reç-u I had received 
 
 tu reç-ws vous reç-ûies tu eus, &c. //(Ol% &c. 
 
 il reç-ut ils reç-urent 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Indicative present. — I perceive the summit of the Alps 
 
 apercevoir sommet Alpes f,p\. 
 
 covered with perpetual snow. What gratitude dosl 
 
 de éternel 2 neige f. pi. 1 reconnaissance f 
 
 thou not owe to her who (has discharged) the duty of a mother, 
 
 devoir celle 1 remplir 3 5 
 
 (to thee) (in thy infancy) ? Does your scholar understand 
 
 près de 4 2 écolier concevoir 
 
 well that rule whishis so simple? We do not owe a large 
 bien règle f. *" * devoir gros 
 
 sum. Do you not perceive the snare ? Ought firm 
 
 tommeî. piégera. Devoir 5 des 1 3 
 
 and courageous men to yield to circumstances ? 
 = 4 2 * cérfer art. circonstance ? 
 
 Imperfect. — Did I not receive him kindly? £)i<j & e 
 
 le avec amitié r 
 see the castle from such a distance? W^ did not re- 
 
 spereevoir château si * lorn per- 
 
 ceive our income Did you not receive crr^at entities ? 
 cevovr revenu m.Dl «6 *on?t#efé f . pf. 
 
 15 
 
158 OF THE REGULAR VERBg, 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 [ shall receive we, &c. j'aurai reç*t* J shall have 
 
 je reç-er/m nous rec-evrons received. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST. 
 
 ( should receive we should, fee j'aurais reç-u I should have 
 je vec-evrais nous rec-evrions tu, &c. received 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 rec-evons let us receive 
 reç-ois receive thou rec-eves receive ye 
 
 qu'il reç-oive let him receive qu'ils reçoivent let them receive 
 
 Oid those tyrants conceive all the blackness of their crimes ? 
 tyran concevoir noirceur f. — 
 
 Preterit. — I perceived him walking by moon 
 
 le qui se promenait à art. clair de. 
 iglit. Did the queen conceive a great esteem for that 
 
 la lune m. estime f. 
 
 honest man. Did we not immediately perceive the snare : 
 
 le bien 2 1 
 
 You did not receive his letters in time. Did the ministers con- 
 
 lettres à-temps. — tre 
 
 rive the depth of his plan. 
 
 profondeur f. — m. 
 
 Future.— Shall I receive visits to-day? He will 
 
 de art. visite aujourd'hui ? 
 not discover the spiro of his village. We shall conceive 
 apercevoir clocher m. — m. 
 
 well founded 1>< Will you never conceive so 
 
 de art. / ndi '2 e^n'-nnce f. pi. 1. 
 
 Jumiiioui'd principle v *ha'! men always owe then 
 
 = 2 1 art. mal- 
 
 fortunes to their fault B 
 htur faute 9 
 
 Conditionat,. — Should T reçoive the offers of my enemy 7 
 
 offre 
 
OF THÉ REGULAR VERBS. i§b 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 ■ "* r- 
 
 PRESENT. PRETERIT. 
 
 hat I may receive that we, &c. que j'aie reç-w that I may 
 
 que je reç-oive que nous rec-evions que tu, fcc. hare re 
 
 que tu reç-oives que vous rec-eviez qu'il, &c. ceived 
 
 qu'il reç-oire qu'ils reç-oiuenf 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT* 
 
 'hat I might, he. that we might, he- que j'eusse ihatlmigh; 
 
 que je reç-usst que nous reç-i«sio?is reç-u havt rt- 
 
 que tu reç-usses que vous reçussiez que tu, &c. ceived 
 
 qu'il reç-û/ qu'ils reç-U5«c?^ 
 
 Should a wise man thus (give himself up) to 
 devoir 4 13 2 ainsi 6 s'abandonnera art 
 
 despair ? Should we conceive such abstract ideas 
 
 désespoir m. de art. «i 2 abstrait 3 1 
 
 ïou would easily perceive so gross a trick. Would no' 
 
 grossier 2 ruse f. 1 
 my sisters receive their friend with tenderness ? 
 
 tendresse ? f. 
 
 Imperative. Conceive the horror of his situation. Do nol 
 
 eceive that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us 
 
 marque f. confiance — 
 
 entertain a horror of vice. Let us never owe (an^ 
 
 concevoir * de art. pour art. m. 
 
 thing). Receive his advice with respect and gratitude. Re 
 rien. avis — — 
 
 ceivc no more of his letters. 
 
 lettre f. pi. 
 
 Subjunctive present. That I may receive consola 
 
 de art. 
 lions. That he should not conceive a thought so well explained 
 
 pensée f. développé. 
 
 That we may always receive false news. That you 
 
 de nouvelle {. pi. 
 
 may not perceive the danger of books which are contrar. 
 
 — art. * * contre 
 
 vo good morals.. That they may not collect unjust 
 * art. mœurs f. pi. percevoir de injuste ï 
 
 iaxes. 
 
 ;? Pi 1 
 
 <t 
 
160 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 FOURTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 IN -RE. 
 
 Remark. — This conjugation has five branches. 
 
 C in -andre 
 
 iu -cndre 
 
 The first ends { in -ondre 
 
 in -erdre 
 
 Jîri -ordre 
 
 the s 2 con d ends in -aire 
 
 thC THIRD CIld3 j in . a . <re 
 
 the fourth ends in -wire 
 
 i in -aindre 
 
 the fifth ends < in -eindre 
 r in -oindre 
 
 as, répandre 
 as, vendre 
 as, répondre 
 as, perdre 
 as, mordre 
 
 Sas, pleure 
 as, taire 
 as, repaire 
 as, connaî/re 
 as, instruire 
 as, contra :n<£r. 
 as, peindre 
 as, joindre 
 
 to spill 
 to sell 
 to answer 
 to lose 
 to bite 
 to please 
 to keep secret 
 to feed 
 to know 
 to instruct 
 e to constrain 
 to paint 
 to join 
 
 PARADIGMS 
 
 INFINITIVE 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 ÎRÀNCH 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5 
 o r nder to please to appear to reduce to join 
 
 ' re pl-aire par-aftre réduire joi-m/rc 
 
 rendered pleased appeared reduced joined 
 
 avoir rend-u pl-u par-u réduit jo'i-nl 
 
 Imperfect. That I might conceive such a project. That 
 
 projet m. 
 he might perceive the secret designs of the enemy's general 
 
 caché 2 dessein 1 2*1 
 
 That we should not receive everybody with civility. That you 
 
 honnêteté. 
 could not conceive the depth of this book. That the* 
 
 profondeur f. 
 might not perceive the masts of tho ship. 
 
 mât m. pi vaisseau m 
 
OF THE REGULAR TERES. 
 
 i«i 
 
 BRANCH 
 
 rendering 
 vend-awf 
 
 tendered 
 rend-u 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4> BRANCH 5, 
 
 pleasing appearing reducing 
 
 pi disant p&r-aissant réduisant 
 PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 pleased appeared reduced 
 pl-w par-it réduis 
 
 joining 
 joi-gnant 
 
 jomec 
 ioi-nt 
 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 
 PRESENT» 
 
 
 
 1 render 
 
 please 
 
 appear 
 
 reduce 
 
 join 
 
 je rend-5 
 
 p\-ais 
 
 par-a/s 
 
 rédui-s 
 
 joi-ns - 
 
 tu rend-s 
 
 pl-aîs 
 
 par-ais 
 
 rédui-.* 
 
 joi-715 
 
 il rend 
 
 -pl-ait 
 
 pàr-aît 
 
 rédui-/ 
 
 joi-n* 
 
 nous rend-on s 
 
 p\-aisons 
 
 pdiV-aissons 
 
 •réduirons 
 
 joi-g?ïonA 
 
 vous rend-es 
 
 p\-aisez 
 
 par-az'sscs 
 
 rédai-sez 
 
 joignes 
 
 ils rend-enf 
 
 p\-aisent 
 
 pa.r-aissent 
 
 redui-se?i£ 
 
 joi-gneni 
 
 
 PKETERIT 
 
 INDEFINITE 
 
 . (I have) 
 
 
 rendered 
 
 pleastd 
 
 appeared 
 
 reduced 
 
 joined 
 
 j ? ai rend-u 
 
 pl-u 
 
 par-?* 
 
 rédui-f 
 
 joi-nt 
 
 Indicative present, i know his fiery and impetuous 
 connaître bouillant 2 =3 
 temper. I wait his return with impatience. Does he 
 
 caractère m. 1 attendre retour 
 
 fear death ? Does not virtue please every body ? We do 
 
 ■craindre art. f. à 
 
 not force you to adopt this opinion. We suppress foi 
 
 contraindre de adopter — f. taire 
 
 the present several interesting circumstances. Do you not 
 
 — m. intéressant 2 f- I 
 
 confound these notions one with another? You seduce 
 confondre art. art. séduire 
 
 your hearers by your modest exterior. Do your sons 
 
 auditeur m. pi. 2 = m. 1 
 
 acknowledge their errors ? Bo not those workmen waste theii 
 reconnaître = ouvrier perdre 
 
 time about trifles ? 
 
 à de art. bagatelle pi. 
 
 Imperfect. I did not displease by my conduct. I was 
 déplaire 
 pitying those sad victims of the revolution. Did Hot 
 plaindre triste victime f. pi. — f. 
 
 15* 
 
162 
 
 G*' THE REGULAR VERBS, 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 BRANCH L BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5, 
 / did render please appear reduce join 
 
 je reod-tm \A-aisais par-awsais rédui-sak joi-gnat> 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 / had rendered pleased 
 j'avais rend-it pl-u 
 
 appeared 
 par-w 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE 
 
 reduced 
 redui-f 
 
 I rendered pleased 
 
 je vend is pl-ws 
 
 tu rend-is pl-ws 
 
 il rend-i< pl-uf 
 nous lend-îwes pl-ûm«5 
 
 v-#u3 vend-Uts pl-tt/ej 
 
 ils rend- iVenf pl-urfcttJ 
 
 appeared 
 
 par-us 
 
 par-us 
 
 par-uÉ 
 
 parûmes 
 
 par-û/es , 
 
 par-iiren* 
 
 reduced 
 
 rédui-m 
 
 rédui-s/s 
 
 réduit 
 
 réduisîmes 
 
 mum-sites 
 
 réduisirent 
 
 PKETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 I had rendered pleased appeared reduced 
 j'eus rend-w pl-w par-u réduit 
 
 joined 
 joi-nf 
 
 joined 
 
 joi-gnis 
 
 joi-gnis 
 
 joi-gait 
 
 joi-gnîmc; 
 
 }q\- gnît es 
 
 joi-gniren* 
 
 joined 
 joi-nf 
 
 this dog bite ? Did that man (at last) acknowledge lii 
 
 chien mordre enfin 
 
 injustice ? We did not appear convinced, 
 
 ■- f . convaincu pi. 
 
 sighs and tears. Were you painting 
 
 soupir m. pi. pron. larme f. pi. peindre 
 
 subject ? * Did those orators throw 
 
 tableau ra. 1 = répandre 
 
 expression into their speeches ? They led 
 art. — discours induire 
 
 into an error. 
 
 an historical 
 
 d'histoire 2 
 
 the graces of 
 
 the people 
 m. 
 
 Preterit. I aimed at an honest end. Did his prudence 
 
 tendre à 2 buf m. 1 — f. 
 
 extinguish the fire of a disordered imagination ? Did not you 
 dérègle 2 — f. ] 
 
 Inct (do au ay) his prejudices ? We led oui 
 
 détruire pr if ni. -on f. pi reconduire 
 
 I hark to his country house Did we offer our in 
 dr campagne 2f 1 vendre en- 
 
 cenM to (he pride of a blockhead? Did you feign to think 
 rem sot feindre dt 
 
 \s a madmau ? DM you conduct your children from truth tc 
 an * fou conduire on 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 16$ 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 BRANCH Î. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4* 
 
 BRANCH & 
 
 I shall render please appear reduce 
 jerend-rai pl-airai -par-aîtrai réduirai 
 
 join m 
 joi-narai 
 
 futurs anterior. (I shall have) 
 
 
 rendered pleased appeared reduced . 
 j'aurai rend-u pl-u par-u réduis 
 
 joined 
 joi-71? 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 
 1 should render please appear reduce 
 je rené-rais pi- airais par-aftrcus rédui-rafc 
 
 join 
 joi-ndrais 
 
 • ruth ? Did those frightful spectres appear again ? 
 
 effrayant 2 — m. pi. 1 apparaître de nou- 
 Did not the children (come down) at the first sura 
 veau descendre à or- 
 
 jûons ? 
 Ire m sing. 
 
 Future. Shall I hear the music of the new opera > 
 
 entendre musique f. 
 
 I shall not conceal from you my mind. Will the ge- 
 
 taire façon de penser. 
 
 ueral constrain the officers to join their respective corps ? 
 
 contraindre officier rejoindre = 
 
 Will not a thought, true, grand, and well expressed, please 
 
 f, exprimé 
 
 at all times ? We shall (make our appearance; on this grea< 
 dan* art. m. pi. paraître sur 
 
 theatre, next month. Shall we describe all the 
 
 — m. art. prochain 2 mois m 1 d peindre 
 
 horror of this terrible night ? Will you not new-model & 
 
 — 2 nuit f. 1 refondre 
 
 work so full of charming ideas ? Will you know your 
 
 pleine 2 1 reconnaître 
 
 things again ? Will they always reduce our duties to 
 
 effet in pi * devoir m. pi. 
 
 beneficence ? They will assiduously correspond with 
 art. bienfaisance f. assidûment correspondre 
 
 their friends. 
 
 Conditional. Should I, by these means, gain the 
 
 moyen m. s atteindre à 
 desired end? ï snould (carry on) the undertaking with suc 
 désiré 2 but m. 1. conduire entreprise ù 
 
tu 
 
 OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 past. (/ should have) 
 
 BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5 
 
 render td pleased appeared reduced joined 
 
 i'aorais rend-u pl-u par-u 
 
 réduit 
 
 joi-nJ 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 render (thou) please appear reduce join 
 
 rend-* pl-aia par-ais rédui-s joi-rw 
 
 qu'il rend-e rA-aise par-aim rédui-se joigne 
 
 rend-oîis faisons y&r-aissons réduisons joi-gnon. 
 
 rend es pl-aùes par-aisses réduises joi-gnez 
 
 qu'ils rend-en/ v\-aigent par-aissent rédui-serif joi-gnem 
 
 ^ess. Would his mother wait with (so much) patience ? Coukl 
 
 tant de 
 
 sincerity displease the man (of sense) ? Should we sell 
 
 irt. = f . à sensé vendra 
 
 our liberty ? Should we build our house upon that plan ? 
 
 construire — m. 
 
 ^Vould you oblige young people to live as you 
 
 astreindre de art. gens pi. vivre comme 
 
 do ? Would you reduce your child to despair ? The\ 
 
 art. désespoir m. 
 hould dread the (public) censure. Would my pro- 
 
 craindre 1 du public 3 f. 2. 
 .ectors introduce an unknown person into the world ? 
 - introduire inconnu m. * 
 
 Imperative. Depict in thy idyl all the charms of a 
 peindre idylle douceur f. 
 
 «ural life. Expect not happiness from exter- 
 
 ihamp'etre 2 1 attendre art. art. exit» 
 
 nal objects ; it is in thyself. Know the powers of thy mine. 
 neur 2 in. pi. 1 force f. 
 
 before thou writest. Let us unite prudence with 
 
 avant de • écrire joindre art. f à 
 
 «courage. Let us not descend to useless particulars. 
 
 m. descendre dans des ï — larité \ 
 
 Let us not (give offence) by an air of haughtiness. Seem 
 
 d* plaire * des m. pi. paraître 2 
 
 neither to cheerful nor too grave. Ye sovereigns, make 
 ne 1 ni gai ni sérieux * souverain pi. rendre 
 
 the people happy. Do not despise H- friendship. Sweet 
 déda 4ow 
 
OF THE REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 165 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 present, (that I may) 
 
 BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. 
 
 render 
 
 le 
 
 ÎU 
 
 il 
 
 nous 
 yous 
 .la 
 
 rend-e 
 
 rend-es 
 
 rend-e 
 
 rend-to ns 
 
 rend-ies 
 
 rend-ent 
 
 please 
 
 pl-aise 
 
 plaises 
 
 plaise 
 
 plaisions 
 
 plaisiez 
 
 plaisent 
 
 PRETERIT, 
 endered pleased 
 
 que j'aie rend-u pl-w 
 
 appear 
 
 p&r-aisse 
 
 pa.r-aisses 
 
 par-ame 
 
 pa.r~aissions 
 
 pa.r-aissie8 
 
 pav-aissent 
 
 (that I may have) 
 appeared reduced 
 par-u rédui-J 
 
 reduce 
 
 réduire 
 
 rédm-ses 
 
 rédui-se 
 
 rédui-5io?z5 
 
 réduits 
 
 rédui-sen£ 
 
 BRANCH 5, 
 
 join 
 
 joigne 
 
 joignes 
 
 joi -gne 
 
 joignions 
 
 joigniez 
 
 joignent 
 
 joined 
 joi-n£ 
 
 illusions, vain phantoms, vanish. (Keep to yourself) such 
 
 — f . — fantôme m. disparaître taire certain 
 
 truths as may offend, 
 
 f. pi. qui peuvent offenser. 
 
 Subjonctive psesent. That I may fear that cloud of ene» 
 
 nuée f 
 mies. That I should please everybody, is impossible 
 
 à ce 
 
 That he may not reply to such absurd criticism. That 
 
 répondre un si 2 3 critiqu f. pi, 
 he may lead his pupil step by step to a perfect knowledge 
 conduire élève pas à connaissance 
 
 of the art of speaking and writing. That we may entice by an 
 
 inf-1 pr. inf 1 séduire 
 
 enchanting style. That we may confound the arts with the 
 
 — teur 2 ra. 1 
 sciences. That you may have the same end in view. That 
 
 but m. 2 tendre à 1 
 they may not depend on any body. That they may not in- 
 dépendre de personne ac* 
 
 crease our sufferings. 
 croître peines. 
 
 Imperfect. That I might not melt into tears. That 
 
 fondre en larme 
 I would acknowledge the truth. That he might (draw a picture) 
 
 reconnaître peindre 
 
 •)f distressed virtue. That he might please by her accom- 
 
 art. malheureux 2 1 grâce 
 
♦ I 
 
 166 OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 imperfect* {that I might) 
 
 BRANCH 1. BRANCH 2. BRANCH 3. BRANCH 4. BRANCH 5* 
 
 render please appear reduce join 
 
 que je rend-me p\-usse par-ime réduisisse joi-gnisse 
 
 tu renà-isses pl-usses par-vmes rédui-siwes joi-gnisses 
 
 il rend-it pi-iU par-itf rédui-s# jol-gnît 
 
 nous rend-issions pl-imions pnr-ussions réduisissions jo'i-gîiissions 
 
 vous rend-issies p\-ussiez par-ussies réduisissiez joi-gnïtties 
 
 ils rendissent pl-ussent \mT-usse7it réduisissent joignissent 
 
 pluperfect, (that I rtùghl have) 
 
 rendered pleased appeared reduced joined 
 
 que j'eusse pl-w par-u rédui-/ joi-w* 
 
 reud-u 
 
 PARADIGM, OR MODEL FOR PRONOMINAL 
 VERBS. 
 
 Se repentir to repent. 
 
 Tronominal verba, as was said pago 121, are con- 
 jugated throughout, in each person, with a double per- 
 sonal pronoun, and as all their compound tenses are 
 formed by means of the auxiliary verb être, their par- 
 ticiple past must always agree in gender and number 
 with the objective pronoun, when it is direct, otherwise 
 not. Their inflections all follow the conjugations to 
 which they belong. 
 
 plishments more than by her beauty. That we might conduc 
 f. pi. conduira 
 
 him to court. That we should affect such low 
 
 art. cour f. feindre de art. si bas il 
 
 sentiments. That you might hear their justification. Tha' 
 
 1 entendre 
 
 you might know your real friends. That they might (wait for 
 vrai attendre 
 
 *he opinion of sensible persons. That they wonld not ap 
 
 art. sense 2 f. pi. 1. f. 
 
 pear so scornful and vain. 
 
 dédaigneux f. pi. ni si f. pi 
 
OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 
 
 167 
 
 în all participles past, except absous, dissous, résous^ 
 which are to be seen in their places, the feminine is 
 formed by adding e mute to the masculine, and the 
 plural by adding s to the singular, both masculine and 
 feminine, when it does not already end with this letter, 
 the French language not admitting a final double conso- 
 nant. 
 
 As there is some difficulty in conjugating pronomi- 
 nal verbs, some few are here selected, which it will prove 
 advantageous to practise. 
 
 %' alarmer 
 
 5' assoupir 
 S apercevoir 
 se défendre 
 se hâter 
 se dépêcher 
 se ressentir 
 se pouvoir 
 •se taire 
 <e promener 
 se coucher 
 se lever 
 s' asseoir 
 s' arroger 
 5e procurer 
 se visiter 
 
 s' abstenir 
 se servir 
 se souvenir 
 se prévaloir 
 se repaître 
 se conduire 
 s' enrhumer 
 s* ennuyer 
 s' orienter 
 s' endormir 
 se morfondre 
 se perdre 
 s' évanouir 
 s' applaudir 
 s' attribuer 
 s* entr'aider 
 
 s ? habituer 
 se nantir 
 se contraindre 
 se rendr* 
 s' évertuer 
 s' impatienter 
 se fâcher 
 se reposer 
 s' enquérir 
 se méfier 
 se formaliser 
 se rapetisser 
 se réconcilier 
 se savoir gré 
 se prescrire 
 s' entr'ouvrir 
 
 s' enorgueillir 
 se méconnaître 
 s' immortaliser 
 se dorloter 
 s' ingénier 
 s' obliger 
 se recueillir 
 se blesser 
 s* enrouer 
 se réjouir 
 s' embarrasser 
 s' habiller 
 s' émanciper 
 se dire 
 
 se rendre compte 
 s' entrevoir 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 se repentir to repent 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 se repentant repenting 
 PAST. 
 
 33L J**"" 
 
 PAST. 
 
 C repenti ) 
 s' être < or Ho Aare repented. 
 ( repentie ; 
 
 PARTICIPLE FRESFNT and PAST. 
 
 I étante' {**£# 
 S < repentie S ^^ 
 
T68 
 
 OF THE FROtfOMINAL VERBS* 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 
 
 J repent. 
 
 / have repented. 
 
 
 je me repens 
 
 je me mis 
 
 1 repenti, 
 
 tu te repens 
 
 tu t 1 es 
 
 r or 
 
 il, or elle se repent 
 
 il, or elle s 1 est 
 
 ^repentie 
 
 nous nous repentons 
 
 nous nous sommes 
 
 ) repentis, 
 
 vous vous repentez 
 
 vous vous êtes 
 
 > or 
 
 ils, or elles se repentent 
 
 ils, cr elles se sont 
 
 ) repenties 
 
 IMPERFECT. 
 
 PLUPERFECT. 
 
 
 / did repent. 
 
 / have repented. 
 
 
 je me repentais 
 
 je m' étais 
 
 ) repenti. 
 
 tu ie repentais 
 
 tu V étais 
 
 > or 
 
 il, or elle se repentait 
 
 il, or elle s 1 était 
 
 ) repentie 
 
 nous nous repentions 
 
 nous nous étions 
 
 I repentis, 
 
 vous vous repentiez 
 
 vous vous étiez 
 
 > or 
 
 ils, or elles se repentaienl 
 
 . ils, or elles 5' étaient 
 
 ) repenties 
 
 ne se plaire 
 we not (nurse our- 
 s'écoutcr 
 They mean to 
 se proposer de 
 
 Indicative present. — I commonly walk by moon 
 d'ordinaire se promener à art. clair 
 tight Dost thou not deceive thyself ? He (is never happy) 
 
 de la lune m. se tromper * 
 
 but (when he is doing) wrong ! Do 
 
 que à faire de art. mal m. 
 
 selves) too much ? How do you do ? 
 
 se porter 
 travel in the spring. 
 voyager à m. 
 
 Preterit indefinite.— I (have been) tolerably well for 
 
 se porter assez bien depuis 
 
 some time. Didst thou not lose thyself in the wood ? (It is 
 s' garer * On 
 
 said) that he killed himself (out of) despair. Have we flattered 
 dit se tuer * de se flatter 
 
 ourselves without foundation ? Ladies, have you walked 
 
 fondement Mesdames, se promener 
 
 this morning ? Did those ladies recognise themselves in 
 
 iliis portrait ? 
 — m. 
 
 dame se reconnoitre 
 
OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS* Î69 
 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 
 
 I repented. I had repented. 
 
 je me repentis je me fus ) repenti, 
 
 tu te repentis tu te fus > or 
 
 il, or elle se repentit il, or elle se fut > repentie 
 
 nous nous repentîmes nous nous fûmes ) repentis, 
 
 vous vous repentîtes vous vous fûtes > or 
 
 ",1s, or elles se repentirent ils, or elles se furent ) repenties 
 
 Imperfect. — J tormented myself incessantly about the 
 se tourmenter * sans cesse pour 
 
 affairs of others. Wast thou not (laying the foundation for) 
 
 autrui se preparer 
 
 much sorrow by thy foolish conduct ? He made himself 
 
 bien des regrets se rendre * 
 
 more and more unhappy (every day.) We despaired without 
 
 de jour en jour se désespérer 
 reason. Did you not laugh at us ? They ruined them- 
 
 se moquer de se verdre * 
 
 selves wantonly. 
 
 de gaieté de cœur. 
 
 Pluperfect. — I had trusted myself to (very uncertain) 
 se livrer à des peu sûr 2 
 
 guides. Didst thou not confide too inconsiderately in this 
 m. pi. 1. se confier légèrement à 
 
 man ? Had that officer rushed richly into this 
 
 — cier se précipiter témérairement dans 
 danger? We had condemned ourselves. Had you not (been 
 — m. se cmdamner nous-mtmes s'oc- 
 
 engaged) in trifles ? Had those travellers (gone out) of 
 
 cuper de bagatelle f. pi. voyageurs se détourner 
 
 the right way ? 
 droit chimin m. 
 
 Preterit. — I repented but too late of having taken snch e. 
 
 tard ir.f-2 fait 2 1 
 step. Wast thou not well entertained yesterday even 
 
 démarche f. s'amuser hi< r au 
 
 ing ? He suffered for his imprudence. We 
 
 ne se iro-ver pas bien de 
 met in the street but did not speak. Did you sny 
 
 st rencontrer rue * parier Uîtes-vous 
 
 nothing (to each other) ? Did not those rash children ap« 
 
 téméraire 2 1 «'ap- 
 plaud themselves for (heir folly ? 
 ylaudir * de sottise. 
 
 16 
 
OF THE PRONOMINAL VERSJS- 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 FUTURE ANTERIOR. 
 
 / shall have repented. 
 
 FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 
 
 I shall repent, 
 
 me repentirai je me serai 
 
 te repentiras tu le seras 
 
 ii, or elle se repentira il, or elle se sera 
 
 nous nous repentirons nous nous serons 
 
 vous vous repentirez vous tousserez 
 
 ils, or elles se repentiront ils, or elles se seront 
 
 r 
 
 epenti 
 or 
 
 epentic 
 ) repenti^ 
 V or 
 ) repenties 
 
 Preterit anterior. — (As soon as) I discovered that they 
 aès-que s'apercevoir on 
 
 sought to deceive me, I was . on my guard. 
 
 chercher uitl*2 tromper se tenir ind-3 g rde f. pi. 
 
 What didst thou, when thou saw'st thyself thus forsaken? 
 fis quand , se trouver * ainsi abandonné 
 
 1 When she recollected all the circumstances, she was quite 
 se souvenir de f. ind 3 toute 
 
 ishamed. When he had rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. 
 honteux te réjouir assez se séparer ind-3 
 
 When you had amused yourself sufficiently at his expense, 
 
 s\amu$it * à dépens- m. pi. 
 
 did you not leave him quiet? When they had walked 
 
 laisser ind-3 tranquille 
 enough, they (sat down) at the foot of a tree. 
 iirrnl à 
 
 Future absolute, — I will yield, if they convince me 
 
 se rendre on convainc 
 
 Wilt thou remember the engagement that thou makest ? What 
 
 se souvenir de prends 
 
 will nut he reproach (him. c ;clf for) ? We shall not forget our- 
 lui-même s'oublier 
 
 res 6ct towards him. Will 
 
 
 (point out) to you ' Will 
 
 d myself? 
 ahir moi-même 
 thou ru He will 
 
 II have 
 
 not 
 
 Wilt 
 have 
 
OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 171 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 SIMP LE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. PAST- 
 
 I should repent. I should have repented. 
 
 *3 me repentirais je me se ais 
 
 tu te Repentirais tu te serais 
 
 il, or elle se repentirait il, or elle 5e serait 
 
 nous lions repentirions nous nous serions 
 
 vous vous repentiriez vous vous seriez 
 
 ils, or elles se repentiraient iis^cr} ^ ^^ 
 
 ,'atigued ourselves (to no purpose). In the end, you will have 
 se fatiguer * inutilement à 
 
 been undeceived). Will your children have (loved each other; 
 se désabuser s'entr'aimer 
 
 oo much ? 
 * 
 
 Conditional. Present. Should I suffer myself tc 
 
 se lasser * * 
 
 v be drawn) into the party of the rebels : Wouidst thou be 
 intraîner parti' m. 2 * 
 
 ^'so easily) frightened ? Would not the nation sub- 
 
 de si' peu de chose 3 s'effrayer î — f. se sou 
 
 iiîit to so just a law ? We should not rejoice to see the 
 
 nettre 3 4 12 se plaire voir 
 
 triumph of guilt. Would you dishonour yourselves bj 
 "riomphe art. crime m. se déshonorer * 
 
 *uch an action ? Would those lords (avail themselves) of 
 
 2 1 seigneur se prévaloir de 
 
 their birth and fortune, ^in order to) hurt 
 
 naissance f. de leurs richesses pour faire vio^ 
 
 our feelings ? 
 Itnce à sentiment. 
 
 Past. Should I not have devoted myself entirely to 
 
 se- dt vouer * entièrement 
 the service of my country ? (Had it not been for) thy careless 
 pays m . sins insouci- 
 
 ness, thou wouidst certainly have (grown rich). Would thie 
 ance f. s'enricher 
 
 pleasing hope have vanished so soon ? Should we have 
 
 doux espoir m. s'évanouir 
 
 degraded ourselves to such a degree ? You would have 
 €e dégrader * 2 1 point m. 
 
Yi% 
 
 OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS, 
 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 AFFIRMATIVE. 
 
 Repent (thou). 
 repens-/oi 
 te 
 
 NEGATIVE. 
 
 Do not repent, 
 
 ne te repens 
 qu'il, or ) nu'il, or • 
 
 qu'elle J«.«pente ,) u , el ' le Jaeie repente 
 
 repentons-7io us ne nous repentons 
 
 repentez-rows ne vous repentez 
 
 sa^H*-* 
 
 &^i nese repentent 
 
 >v^ 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 PRESENT. 
 
 Tliat I may repent. 
 
 que 
 
 je 
 
 tu 
 
 il, or elle 
 
 nous 
 
 vous 
 
 me repente 
 
 te repentes 
 
 se repente 
 
 nous repentions nous 
 
 vous repentiez vous 
 
 ils, or elles se repentent ils, or ) 
 
 lies J 
 
 PRETERIT. 
 
 That I might have repented 
 
 que 
 
 je me sois 
 
 tu te sois 
 
 il, or elle se soit 
 
 nous soyons 
 
 vous soyez 
 
 elles 
 
 ) repenti, 
 
 \ ° r • 
 ) repentie 
 
 I repentis, 
 
 C or 
 
 se, soient % repentie- 
 
 reduced yourselves to every kind of want. The\ 
 
 se réduire * sorte {. privation f. pi. 
 
 would have (been drowned,) if (they had not had assistance). 
 se noyer on ne les avoit secourus. 
 
 D« 
 
 Let 
 
 Imperative. man, remember that thou ait mortal. 
 se souvenir 
 not flatter (thyself that thou wilt succeed easily). 
 
 tc pro, net^ un succès facile 
 
 is take an exact account of our actions Let us not deceive 
 levendre — 2 compte 1 se séduire 
 
 ourselves. Rest yourself under the shade of this tree. 
 
 u-mèmes. Se reposer 
 Do not expose yourself so rashly. 
 
 s'exposer * témérairement 
 
 ombre 
 
 I must 
 
 // faul que se 
 
 rise to-morrow a 
 lever d . 
 
OF THE TRONOMINÀL VERBS. 173 
 
 aiïMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 1 
 
 IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 
 
 That I may repent. That I might have repented 
 
 que que 
 
 e me repentisse je me fusse ^repenti 
 
 tu te repentisses : tu te fusses J» or 
 
 il, or elle se repentît , il or elle _$e fût ) repentit 
 
 nous nous repentissions nous ^ousfussions ) repenti?, 
 
 vous vous repentissiez vou? .vous fussiez S or 
 
 î?, or elles se repentissent , ils, or elles se fussent •> repentie 
 
 m earlier hour. I wish that thou roay'st be 
 
 * meilleur heure £ $puk,aiter se portes 
 
 better. I wish him to conduct ijimself better. Is it not es- 
 nieux veux qu'il * st conduire * 
 
 ^ential that we should contain ourselves? They wish thai 
 — tiel se contenir * 0:i désirer 
 
 you should accustom yourselves early to labour» ! 
 
 s'habituer ' * de bonne heure art. travail m 
 Jt is time that they, should (have relaxation) from the fatigue 
 
 , se délasser — f , 
 
 )f business, 
 art. f. pi 
 
 Preterit. Can I have (been deceived) so grossly ? 
 
 Se peut-il que se tromper grossiers- 
 
 It is astonishing that thou hast determined to stay. Jt is 
 iicnt ? étonnant se décider rester On* 
 
 not said that he interfered in this business It will never be 
 dit se uêler de On * 
 
 believed that we have conducted ourselves so ill. It is not 
 croira se^comporter niai On * 
 
 suspected that you have disguised yourselves so ingeniously, 
 soupçonner se aiguiser * adroitement 
 
 Jt is not feared that they have behaved ill. 
 "raindre se conduire. 
 
 Imperfect. They required; that I should (go to bed) at ter. 
 On fxigedit se coucher a 
 
 o'clock. They wish that thou shouldst walk oftener. 
 
 heure On voudrait sepromener 
 
 Did they not wish that he should practise fencing ? 
 J&n voulait s'exercer à faire des arme* 
 
 jP^as it necessary that we should (make use) of this method ? 
 ~ se servir moyen m. 
 
 76 * '' 
 
OF THE PASSIVE VEKBS, 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE PASSIVE VE^BS. 
 
 There is but one mode of conjugating passive verbs ; it is by 
 ldding to the verb tire, through all the moods and tenses, the 
 participle past of the verb active, which then must agree in gen- 
 der and number with the subject ; as, 
 
 Te suis aimé, or aimée / am loved 
 
 «u étais estimé, or estimée thou wast esteemed 
 
 „e toi fut chéri de son peuple that king was beloved by his people 
 
 2lle fut toujours chérie she was always beloved 
 
 mon père fut respecté my father was respected 
 
 ma mère fut révérée my mother was revered 
 
 nous serons louée, or lonées we shall be praised 
 
 sjvls en serez blames, or blâmées you will be blamed for it 
 
 •is seroient craints et redoutés they would be feared and dreaded 
 
 e voudrais que les portes dissent ? , . , ., , , 
 
 ""„ H v C I wish the doors mere opened 
 
 ouvertes t > * 
 
 tu en avais" été averti, or avertie thou hudst been apprised of it 
 
 lorsqu'il eut été mordu zaken ke had leen bîttax 
 
 je soupçonne que la ruse aura été 1 suspect theartif.ee vcill have been dû 
 
 découverte covered 
 
 vous auriez été aperçus, or aperçues you wovfd have been perceived 
 
 Heu qu'elles aient été reconnues although they were-rveognised 
 
 supposez que les lumières eussent £ „ ., ,. ._ . . , 
 
 été éteintes. ] suppose the lights had been put out. 
 
 Did they wish that you should complain without reason 
 
 on voulait se plaindre 
 
 Did they not wish them (to make more'ha<te) ? 
 
 on désirer ind-2 que ils se hâter davanta 
 
 Plvperfect. Would they have wished that I had revenger 
 
 voulu tenger 
 
 'myself? I could have wished that thou hadst shewn 
 
 désirer se montre, 
 
 thyself more accommodating. 1 could have wished that thi: 
 
 * moins dijjici U rou'u 
 
 painter had (been less negligent). -Would you have wished tbsrt 
 j?e>nfre se, négliger moins voulu 
 
 we.should have ruined ourselves in the public opinion, (in order 
 se perdre * 2 t. 1 pour 
 
 to) satisfy your resentment ? I could have wished perhaps 
 satisfaire ressentiment désirer peut être 
 
 that you had applied yourselves more to your studies 
 
 s appliqua- dam 
 
 We could have wished that they had extricated themselve; 
 
 se tirer 
 more skilfully from the difficulties (in which) they (had 
 
 adroitement embarras 
 
 involved thcmsel 
 
OF THE NEUTRAL VERBS» 
 
 w« 
 
 la the following exercises upon the ^erbs, the 
 senses will now be promiscuously intermixed. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
 
 That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that 
 
 jeune demoiselle doux honnête bon 
 
 ihe is beloved by every body. He performed with (so much) 
 aimé de jouer ind-4 tant £c 
 
 ability, that he was universally applauded. He is known 
 
 intelligence ind-4 applaudi 
 
 by nobody. How many countries, unknown to the ancients 
 de que de pays inconnu 
 
 have been discovered by modern navigators ? 
 
 art. 2 navigateur m. pi. 1 ; 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE NEUTER VERBS. 
 There are in the French language about sis hundred neutei 
 v'cîi'bs, which are conjugated with the auxiliary avoir in theii 
 compound tenses; the only excepted are the following, which 
 lake être ; even some of them, and particularly those marked with 
 an asterisk, take either, according to the sense. 
 
 •Viler 
 
 to go 
 
 venir 
 
 to come 
 
 >ccouru- 
 
 to run to 
 
 revenir 
 
 to come back 
 
 arriver 
 
 to arrive 
 
 devenir 
 
 to become 
 
 choir 
 
 iofull 
 
 redevenir 
 
 to become again 
 
 «1 échoir 
 
 to decay 
 
 avenir 
 
 to happen 
 
 échoir 
 
 to become due 
 
 intervenir 
 
 to intervene 
 
 monter* 
 
 to go up 
 
 parvenir 
 
 to attain 
 
 descendre • 
 
 to go doivn 
 
 provenir 
 
 to come from 
 
 remonter * 
 
 to go up <igain 
 
 survenir 
 
 to befall 
 
 redescendre 
 
 to go down agai:i 
 
 disconvenir 
 
 to deny, or disoivn 
 
 entrer 
 
 to enter 
 
 naître 
 
 to be born, 
 
 rentrer 
 
 to come in again 
 
 mourir 
 
 to die 
 
 retourner 
 
 to return 
 
 décéder 
 
 to die 
 
 tomber 
 
 to fall 
 
 éclore 
 
 (to be hatched, ic- 
 I blow 
 
 retomber 
 
 to full -again 
 
 partir 
 
 to set out 
 
 accoucher 
 
 5 to be brought to 
 ) led 
 
 repartir 
 
 to set out again 
 
 rester 
 
 to stay 
 
 demeurer * 
 
 to stay, or remain 
 
 échapper ; 
 
 to escape 
 
 apparaître >v 
 
 to appear 
 
 expirer * 
 
 to expire 
 
 périr * 
 
 *o perish 
 
 passer * 
 
 to pass away 
 
 résulter* 
 
 to result 
 
 sortir 
 
 to go out 
 
 convenir * 
 
 to agree, to s-tii 
 
 ressortir 
 
 to go o»t again 
 
 contrevenir * 
 
 to contravene 
 
 aborder * 
 
 to land, k.c. 
 
 
 
 Remark, The participle of these neuter verbs, which take 
 tlreidv auxiliary, must accordingly agree both in gender an< 
 number with their subject ; as 5 
 
 Je suis tombé, or tombée 
 quand tu fus venu, or venue 
 il était arrivé avant moi 
 elle était déjà arrivée 
 ma sœur était partie avant lui 
 • nous serons revenus, or revenues 
 $uand voss serez descendus, or\ 
 .descendues J> 
 
 / have fallen 
 
 when thou hadst come 
 
 he had arrived before me 
 
 she had already arrived 
 
 my sister had set off before him 
 
 \oe shall have returned 
 
 when von shall have come (fan?) 
 
 
Ï76 
 
 OF THE IMPillSOXAL VERBS* 
 
 .'!$ seraient reparti» ? 
 
 ?Ues seraient repartie* S 
 
 v os sœurs étaient Sorties, so?U-ellcs à 
 présent rentrées ! 
 ela lui est échu en partage 
 ette maison m'a convenu et je suis 
 
 convenu du prix 
 il n'en est pas disconvenu 
 ette chose m'eai échappée de la mé- 
 moire, de la main 
 ? a trêve est expirée 
 ?es délais sont expirés 
 ''lie a expiré dans les bras dé sa mère 
 
 they xvould have set off again 
 
 your sisters xoent out, are they now come 
 
 back ? 
 that/ell to his lot 
 thai house suited me and I have agreta 
 
 about the price 
 he did not deny it 
 that thing escaped from my memory 
 
 dropped from my hand 
 the truce has expired 
 the delays have expired 
 she expired in the arms of her mother 
 m' a-t-ïf résulté de là ? qu'en est il ré- what has been the result, o*- consequence 
 
 suite ? of it ? 
 
 'ous ceux qui étaient sur ce vaisseau all those that were onboard of that shit 
 
 have perished 
 have they carried down the wins into th 
 
 cellar 7 
 
 ont péri, ou sont péris 
 a-t-on descendu le vin à la cave 
 
 le baromètre a descendu de quatre de- 
 grés pendant la journée. 
 "es actions ont monté beaucoup. 
 :o n'ai pas remonté ma montre 
 
 the barometer fell four degrees du"ir{ 
 
 the day 
 the stocks rose very much 
 have not wound up my watch 
 
 il a monté quatre fois à sa chambre he went up to his room four tiincs in the 
 
 pendant la journée. contrit of the day 
 
 1 est monté dans sa chambre, et il y he is gone up to his room, and has re 
 est resté. maincd there 
 
 And so on through all the compound tenses of the other verbs- 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 They came to see us with the greatest haste. When 
 
 ind 4 * voir empressement Quana 
 
 did they arrive ? That estate fell to hi? 
 
 p.sl-u que arriver ind-4 terre f. lui est échu en : 
 
 lot. He fell from his horse, but happily received 
 
 partage tomber ind-4 * il — ind-4 
 
 only a slight contusion on the knee. 
 ne que Itgtr — f. à gtno.u m. 
 
 OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 Observe that, in impersonal verbs, il has no relation to a sub 
 tantive, as may be seen by the impossibility of substituting h 
 noun in its place. 
 
 IM PERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 ■I pleut 
 
 
 
 il bruine 
 
 it drizzles 
 
 il neige 
 
 it snows 
 
 
 il importe 
 
 it mat l ers 
 
 
 it huils 
 
 
 il semble 
 
 it seems 
 
 ri tonne 
 
 it thunders 
 
 
 il parait 
 
 it appears 
 
 l éclaire 
 
 it lighten* 
 
 
 il suffit que 
 
 it S'Jices 
 
 il gèle 
 
 il feces 
 
 
 il convient 
 
 it becomes 
 
 il dégèle 
 
 it thaïes 
 
 
 il s'eiuult que 
 
 it follows thai 
 
 Il arrive 
 
 it happens 
 
 
 il est à propos 
 
 it is proper 
 
 : 1 sied 
 
 it i% becoming 
 
 il faut 
 
 it is necessary 
 
 1 nu-.ssied 
 
 it is unbecoming 
 
 il y n. &c. 
 
 there is, or art 
 
 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 
 T^oes it r;nn 
 
 
 morning ! Did it hail 
 
 
 matin 
 
 ro. grè 
 
 'cr ind^ 4 ar' 
 
OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 177 
 
 last night ? It does not snow. I thought it had thun- 
 
 Sernier 2 f . 1 neiger Croyais que 1on- 
 
 dered. Does it not lighten ? Do you think it freezes ? 
 
 ner iud-6 éclairer croyez que geler 
 
 It is a remarkable thing. It was a terrible hurricane, 
 
 ce ce ind-2 2 ouragan I 
 
 It is ten o'clock. It (was not my friend's fault) that it 
 
 heure pi. ne tenir md-3 pas à mon ami la chose 
 
 was not so. It will freeze long. I do not think so ; it 
 
 subj-2 ne ainsi long-temps crois 
 
 seems, on the contraiy, that it thaws. It (is fit) to act 
 
 sembler à contraire dégeler convenir de 
 
 so. It (was of great importance) to succeed. Would it be 
 
 iinporter beaucoup ind-2 de réussir ëtrt 
 
 proper to write to your friends? It appears that he has 
 
 à propos de 
 not attended to that business. Perhaps it (would be} better to 
 
 s'occuper de vaudrait 
 
 (give up) the undertaking. It (was sufficient) to know his 
 
 abandonner entreprise suffisait de 
 
 opinion. 
 
 CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB 
 
 Falloir j il faut, it must, it is necessary. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 present falloir . past avoir fallu 
 
 partîc. près. wanted fast fallu, ayant fallu. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 present. il faut preterit isD. il a fallu 
 
 imperfect. il falloit pluperfect, il avait fallu 
 
 PRETERIT DEF. il faillit PRETERIT ANT. il eut fallu 
 
 future absol. il faudra future anter. il aura fallu. 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 present il faudrait past il aurait fallu 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 present qu'il faille preterit qu'il ait fallu 
 
 imperfect qu'il fallût pluperfect qu'il eût fallu 
 
 Remark. The English verb, must, not being im 
 personal, may take any noun, or pronoun, for its sub- 
 ject, whereas the French verb falloir, being always 
 
178 OF THE IMPERSONAL VE11US. 
 
 impersonal, a change ©f construction in the translation 
 becomes necessary, and this may be done in two differ- 
 ent ways. 
 
 The most common method is by putting the con- 
 junction que after il faut, il fallait, &c. then transport- 
 ing the subject of the English verb must to the second 
 verb, which is to be put in the subjunctive in French : 
 thus, I must sell my house, il faut que je vtnde mo 
 maison. 
 
 The other way is by allowing the second verb to 
 remain in the infinitive, as in English, and substituting 
 in the place of the personal pronoun, which is the 
 subject of the verb must, its corresponding objective 
 me, te, lui, nous, vous, leur, which are to be placed 
 between il and faut, fallait, &c. as, I must begin that 
 work to-day, it me faut commencer cet ouvrage au- 
 jourd'hui. 
 
 Observe. That all expressions implying necessity > 
 obligation, or want, may be rendered by falloir ; as, ] 
 want a new grammar, il me faut une nouvelle gram- 
 maire. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Vou must speak to him about that affair. It was necessary 
 
 sub-l de . f. ind-2 que 
 
 tor him to consent to that bargain. We were obliged to (se\ 
 1 it * sub-2 marché m. ind-3 parti; 
 
 out) immediately. Children should learn every day some 
 sub-2 sur-lc-champ art. cond- 1 sub-2 
 
 'hing by heart. Shall I suffer patiently such an insult ? Hr 
 
 ind-7 sub-l 2 1 
 
 must have been a blockhead not to understand 
 
 •;ond-2 * sub-2 sot 2 pour l comprendre inf-1 des 
 
 such easy rules. (How much) do you want ? He doe. 
 
 « 2 3 règle f. 1 combien fai 
 
 what is requisite. Do that as it (should be). What must he 
 faites ind-1 que 2 lui I 
 
 have for his trouble ? You are the man I want. Do n ^ 
 
 peine f. que 
 
 give me any more bread, I have already more than 1 
 
 * de en déjà ne 
 
 want. I need not ask you whether you will romp. T do n . r 
 inf-1 ri 
 
OF THE IMPERSONAL VEHBS. 
 
 n9 
 
 iiiink that it is necessary to be a conjurer to guess his motives. 
 crois' il sub-1 * * sorcier pour deviner motif 
 
 I could not suspect that I ought to ask pardon for a fault 
 pouvais soupçonner sub-2 * inf-1 — de faute f« 
 
 I have not committe 
 que commise. 
 
 <♦ 
 
 Present 
 
 Past 
 
 Participle Près 
 Participle Past 
 
 Present 
 Preterit Indef 
 
 Imperfect 
 Pluperfect 
 Preterit Def. 
 Preterit Ant. 
 Future Absolute 
 
 CONJUGATION OF TIIE IMPERSONAL VERB 
 
 F avoir, there to be. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 
 y avoir there to be 
 
 y avoir eu there to have been 
 
 y ayant there being 
 
 y ayant eu there having been 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 (here is, or there are* 
 
 [here has been, or there have 
 
 been* 
 Inert was, or there were* 
 there had been 
 there was, or there were* 
 there had been 
 there wilt be 
 there will have been 
 
 iiya 
 
 il y a eu 
 
 il y avait 
 il y avait eu 
 il y eut 
 il y eut eu 
 il y aura 
 
 Future Anterior il y aura eu 
 
 Present 
 Past 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 il y aurait there would be 
 
 il y aurait eu there will have been 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Present qu'il y ait that there may be 
 
 Preterit qu'il y ait eu that there may have been 
 
 Imperfect qu'il y eût that there might be 
 
 Pluperfect. qu'il y eût eu that there might have been 
 
 N. B. This verb in English is used in the plural, when 
 followed by a substantive plural ; in French it remains 
 always in the singular. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 There must be a great difference of age between those two 
 doit — f 
 
 persons 
 
 il doit — f 
 
 is. There being (so many) vicious people in this v 
 tant de, l gens m. pi. 1 
 
'ISO 
 
 OP THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 is it astonishing that there are so many persons who become 
 
 étonnant sub-1 devenir 
 
 the victims of the corruption of the age ? // is a thousand 
 
 perversité f. siècle m. * mille à 
 
 to one that he will not succeed. There would be more 
 
 parier contre réussir 
 
 happiness if (eveiy one) knew how to moderate his desires. 
 de bonheur chacun savait * * modérer désir 
 
 T did not think that there could be (any thing) to blame in 
 
 croyais sub -2 rien reprendre 
 
 hh conduct There would not be so many duels, did people 
 
 conduite f. — si Con 
 
 reflect that one of the first obligations of a Christian is to 
 
 réfléchir \nà-2 f — f. Chrétien de 
 
 forgive injuries. Could there be a king more happy 
 
 pardonner art. Pourrait-il 
 
 than this, who has always been the father of his subjects ? 
 celui-ci sujet 
 
 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF I HE FIRST CONJUGATION. 
 
 INFINITIVE. 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES. 
 
 To (go awcy) 
 
 To have gone (wtocy) 
 
 PRESENT. (s' 
 
 en) aller (s' 
 
 fin) être : 
 
 allé, allé* 
 
 PARTICIPLE PRES, (s» 
 
 en) allant ? 
 
 en) allé 5 (•' 
 
 
 ' 
 
 PARTICIPLE PAST. ( 
 
 en) étant \ 
 
 allée, allée* 
 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 
 • je (m? 
 
 **n) vais* je (m* 
 
 en) suis 
 
 î n t 
 
 i tu (V 
 
 en) vas tu (t» 
 
 en) es 
 
 f allé, or 
 
 PRES. < il '°* cUc f 
 
 \ nous (nous 
 
 en) va il, or elle (s' 
 
 en) est 
 
 $ ailée 
 
 en) allons nous (nous 
 en) aller vous (vous 
 
 en) sommes 
 
 
 f vous (vous 
 
 en) êtes 
 
 (allés, or 
 
 v Us, or elles (s' 
 
 en) vont ils, or elles (s' 
 
 en) sont 
 
 } allée* 
 
 IMP. je (m» 
 
 en) allais je (m' 
 
 en) étais 
 
 allé, kc 
 
 PRET. je (m' 
 
 en) allai je (m' 
 
 en) fus 
 
 allé. kc. 
 
 FUTURE, je (m' 
 
 en) irai je (m 1 
 
 en) serai 
 en) serais 
 
 allé, fcc. 
 
 COND. je (m' 
 
 en) irais je (m* 
 
 aUé, kc 
 
 Or je (m' en) vas. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 IMPERATIVE. 
 
 AFFIRMATIVE. 
 
 NEGATIVE, 
 
 182 
 
 4u11 
 
 ^o'ils 
 
 allons 
 allez 
 
 (t' en) 
 
 (s* en) aille 
 
 (nous en) 
 
 (vous en) 
 
 (s' en) aillent 
 
 qu'il 
 
 qu'ils 
 
 ne(t> 
 ne (s* 
 ne (nous 
 ne (vous 
 ne (s' 
 
 en) va 
 en) aille 
 en) allons 
 en) allez 
 en) aillent 
 
 pat 
 
 -SUBJUNCTIVE, 
 SIMPLE TENSES. COMPOUND TENSES, 
 
 
 Y je (m' 
 
 en) aille je (m* 
 
 en) sois 
 
 îallé. or 
 t allée 
 
 
 4 tu (t' 
 
 en) ailles tu (t* 
 
 en) sois 
 
 PRES. 
 
 J il, or elle (s' 
 
 en) aille il, or elle (s' 
 
 en) soit 
 
 iue 
 
 \ nous (nous 
 
 en) allions nous (nous 
 
 en) soyons 
 
 ) allés, o: 
 l allées 
 
 
 f vous ( y ous 
 
 en) alliez vous (vous 
 
 en) soyez 
 
 
 ^ ils, or elles (s' 
 
 en) aillent ils, or elles (s' 
 
 en) soient 
 
 mjp. 
 
 je (m' 
 
 en) allasse je (m' 
 
 en) fusse 
 
 allé, kc 
 
 REMARKS. 
 
 Je fus, j'ai été, j'avais été, j'aurais été, are some- 
 times used for j'allai, je nuis allé, j'étais allé, je serais 
 illé. 
 
 The imperative va takes an s when followed by y, 
 or by en ; as, vas-y, vas en savoir des nouvelles, go thi- 
 ther, go to hear some tidings of it ; however it takes no 
 s when the y is followed by a verb ; as, va y donner or- 
 are, go and order that affair. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 Will you go this evening into the country ? 
 
 soir a 
 
 pay some visits, and if I be 
 faire ind-1 
 
 shall certainly go home. 
 
 s'en aller chez-moi 
 Goandrfo that errand, 
 
 * faire commission f. 
 
 thing in order. Let him go to 
 
 en art. église f. 
 
 By being loaded with scents, 
 
 campagne f. 
 early 
 
 de bonne heure 2 * libre I 
 Go there with thy brother 
 
 I am going to 
 (at liberty) I 
 
 Go there and put every 
 * mettre 
 church on holidays. 
 
 art. jour pi. de 
 
 and particularly 
 
 /8H. a force de inf-1 chargéde odeur f. pi. surtout 
 
 amber, he (offends the smell.) They have woven 
 
 pr. ambre m, sentir mauvais. de art. £ 
 
 17 
 
182 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS» 
 
 Puer ^ to stink, is by no means irregular, but simply' 
 defective in the preterit of the indicative, and in the inv 
 perfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 Tisser, to weave, is a verb defective, which, to form 
 its compound tenses, borrows the participle past iissu. 
 from the obsolete verb tistre. 
 
 Envoyer and renvoyer, make in their future absolute 
 and conditional present, j'enverrai, j'enverrais, and je 
 renverrai, je renverrais. 
 
 XRREGULAIl VERBS OF THE S COND CONJUGATION 
 BRANCH I. Punir. 
 
 Bénir, to bloss, has no irregularity, except in one ot 
 Us two participles past, bénit, bénite ; as, pain bénit , 
 hallowed bread ; eau bénite, holy water. The other, 
 béni, bénie, being regular ; as. bé>àe entre tontes les fem- 
 mes, blessed among all women. 
 
 îinr, signifying to blossom, is regular ; but when 
 it means to flourish, to be in repute, honour, esteem. 
 
 silk ami cotton together, and made a very pretty 
 
 pr-art. rn. en ont fait 
 
 stuff. I shall send spring flowers to those 
 
 étoffe f. de art. printaaier 2 f. pi. 1 
 
 ladies. I would go to Rome, if I r'/uld. We wpulu 
 
 dame f. pi. pouvais 
 
 (send back) our horses. Why do they go away so soon ? 
 
 pourquoi 
 My brother and twenl yesterday to Windsor I 
 
 pron ind-4 
 
 will not iro (arçy more) a bunting. 
 plus à * art. chasse f. 
 
 ilCISE ON BRANCH T. 
 
 May the name of that ;;ood king : from gene 
 
 to generation ! Thi immerf -twice every 
 
 en fa's tout art. 
 
 year. iris and sciçn- 
 
 «nph 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 183 
 
 lakes, in the participle present, florissant, and in the 
 imperfect of the indicative, florismit, jlorissaiew . 
 
 In hair, to hate, the letters -<•?' form throughout two 
 syllables, except in the three persons singular of the 
 present of the indicative, y hais, tu hais, il hait, and 
 in the second person singular of the imperative hais, 
 which are pronounced as one syllable, as if written, Je 
 hès, tu lies, il hèt. 
 
 Gésir, to lie, is a defective verb, and has only pre- 
 served gisant, gît, nous gisons, ils gisant, il g? sait, used 
 in familiar discourse, or poetry, and particularly in 
 monumental inscriptions : ci-gît, here lies. 
 
 branch il. on Sentir. 
 
 EOUILLIR, tO boil. COURIR, to Mil. 
 
 Par. près. Bouillant — Past, bouilli Courant — couru 
 
 ( bous, bous, bout cours, cour*, court 
 
 Înd. près. < bouillons, bouillez, courons, courez, coureîU 
 
 Imperf. bouillais — Prêt, bouillis courais— courus 
 
 Future. bouillirai— Cond bouil- courrai — courrais 
 
 lirais 
 
 Imp. bous, bouillons, bouillez cours, courons, courez 
 
 Sub. près, bouille — Imp. bouillisse coure — courusse 
 
 Rehouillir, to boil again, and ébouillir, to boil away. 
 
 are conjugated like bcuiltir ; this latter is only used in 
 
 • 
 
 time of Pericles. Horace and Virgil flourished under the 
 
 Périclès Virgile ind-2 sous 
 
 reign of Augustus. We discovered from the top of the 
 
 règne Auguste. découvrir haut 
 
 mountain a vast plain full of flowery meadows. 
 
 plaine f. retupli de fleurissant 2 pré m, pi. 1 
 The empire of the Babylonians was long zflou- 
 
 — — uien ind-3 long-temps * 
 
 risking one. We did not hate the man, but his vices. Doe? 
 
 she really hate that vain pomp and all the parade of 
 
 pompe f. appareil ctfl 
 
 grandeur ? 
 
184 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS, 
 
 compound tenses, and the infinitive ; as, celle sauce est 
 trop ébouillie, this sauce has boiled away too much. 
 
 Like courir are conjugated, 
 accourir to run to parcourir to run over 
 
 concourir to concur recourir to have recourse 
 
 discourir to discourse secourir to assist 
 
 mc\)urir to incur 
 
 Faillir, to fait. 
 Part. près, faillant.* Post, failli. 
 
 End. près, faux,* faux,* faut,* faillons,* faillez,* faillent.* 
 fmpsrf. faillais.* Prêt, faillis, &lc. Fut. faudrai* 
 Cond. faudrais.* Subj. imperf. que je faillisse. 
 
 Défaillir, tofaiv.t, has now only the plural of the 
 Tnd. prts. nous défaillons, ils défaillent Imperf. défaillons. 
 Prêt, défaillis. Prêt, indef j'ai défailli, and Inf. près, défaillir. 
 
 N. B. The tenses marked with an asterisk are obsolete. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH II. 
 
 Take that water off the fire, it boih too fast. Do not 
 
 Retirer f. de dessus m. f. fori 
 
 let the soup (boil away) (so much). That sauce ha* 
 
 laisser 1 pot 3 tant 2 f. est 
 
 'boiled away) (too much). Boil that meat again j 
 
 f . trop Faites rebouillir viande f. * 
 
 It has not boiled long enough. He runs faster than I. He 
 
 f. 2 * asses 1 vite moi 
 
 ran about uselessly all the morning, We ran at the 
 
 nd-4 * inutilement matinée f. ind-3 
 
 voice of that honest man, and assisted him. (The moment) he 
 
 f. . dès- que 
 
 >aw us in danger, he ran to us and delivered us. By so 
 
 vit en * délivrer ind-3 2 
 
 whimsical a conduct, should we not contribute to our destruc 
 bizarre 3 1 concourir petie f. , 
 
 tion ? lie discoursed so long on the immortality of the soul, 
 
 sur = 
 
 and the certainty of another life, that he left 
 
 certitude f. laisser ind-3 
 
 nothing unsaid. If wc (were to act thus), we should 
 
 en arrière agir ind 2 ainsi 
 
 certainly incur the displeasure of our parents. I would not 
 
 disgrâce f. 
 huve recourse to so base a method. Will men always 
 
 bas 2 moyen m. 1 art. 
 
 run after shadows 7 
 
 de art. chimère f. pt; 
 
pF THE IRREGULAR VERBS* 185 
 
 Fuir, to fly, to run away. 
 
 .l J arl. près, fuyant. Past. fui. 
 
 Ind. près, fuis, fuis, fuit, fuyons, fuyez, fuient. 
 
 Tmperf. fuyais. Prêt. fuis. Fut fuirai. Cokd. fuirais* 
 
 Tmp. fuis, fuie, fuyons, fuyez, fui 
 
 Scbj. près, fuie, fuies, fuie, fuyions, fuyiez, fuient, 
 
 Imperf. je fuisse, or rather, prisse ia fuite. 
 
 Mourir, to die. 
 
 Pari. près, mourant. Past. mort. 
 
 Ind. près, meurs, meurs, meurt mourons, mourez, meurent. 
 
 Imp» mourais. Prêt, mourus. Fut. mourrai. Cond. mourrais* 
 
 Imp. meurs, meure, mourons, mourez, meurent. 
 
 Subj. près, meure, meures, meure, mourions, mouriez, meurent, 
 
 Imperf. mourusse. Comp. tentes, je suis mort, j'étais mort, &c. 
 
 Rem. S 1 enfuir, to run away, is conjugated after fuir. 
 Mourir takes the auxiliary ê re ; and when reflected. 
 se mourir signifies to be dying, or at the point of death. 
 It is seldom used except in die present and imperfect of 
 the indicative. 
 
 EXERCISE ON FAILLIR, &c. 
 
 He (w?as near) kisiug his life in that rencounter. He. 
 
 faillir perde .art. r&nrontrt L 
 
 {was near ) falling into the snare wbfrsh wa's laid for him. 
 
 faillir ind 4 don ntr piège m . qu'on avait t<ndu lui 
 
 His strength fails him every da . Let us 
 
 * art. f. pi. défaillir lui art. m pJ Donnez-vous 
 
 liave something to eat directly ; we a c fainting witfc 
 
 * manger 2 vite 1 dt 
 
 fatigue and hunger. I canhoft meet him, he shuns 
 
 — P ,v foi il ne puis reucofdrer 
 
 We. When we have no employ, we endeavour to 
 
 0.7 .si 'it .*.' ore -j p, ■■' hrr St 
 
 fly from ourselves. Wou-d he" not avoid a rs, 
 
 * soi-même fuis iv. pi. 
 
 if he knew all their falsehood ? He die painful) 
 
 ind-2 fwMSeté f 2 
 
 disease She i.ed of gnef er son» 
 
 maladie f. 1 ind-4 o'iaxrinm. d'iro 
 
 He is dying She was xp'.rins with £i r 
 
 se mourir v ; mourir do àntcff' 
 
 *éi death at last wrested he<' 
 
 art» enfin. arracher w-i-3 
 
 \7* 
 
t;o of the ib lR verbs. 
 
 Quérir, to fetch, is used in familiar conversation al- 
 >er venir, envoyer, aller, as, envoyez quérir, send for ; 
 liiez quérir, go and fetch. 
 
 Acquérir, to acquire. 
 Part. près, acquérant. Fust, acquis. 
 
 înd. près, acquiers, acquiers, acquiert, acquérons, acquérez, ac- 
 quièrent. 
 Tmper. acquérais. Prêt, acquis. Fut. acquerrai. Coxd. acquerrais. 
 Imp. acquiers, acquière, acquérons, acquérez, acquièrent. 
 Subj. près acquière, -es, -e, acquér-ions, -iez, acquièrent. 
 Imperf acquisse. 
 
 S'enquérir, fo inquire, and requérir, to request, are 
 conjugated as acquérir. 
 
 Conquérir, to conquer, is seldom used but in the 
 Ind. prêt, je conquis, &c. and in the Subj. i m per/, je» 
 conquisse. Its chief use is in the compound tenses. 
 
 Ouïr, to hear, is only employed in the Inf. près. 
 ouïr. Part, past, ouï. Lvd. prêt, j'ouïs, tu ouïs. &c. 
 and Subj. imperf. j'ouïsse, tu ouïsses, &c. Its princi- 
 pal use is in the compound tenses, when it is generally 
 accompanied by another verb; as, je Vai, or je Pat 
 ouï dire, I have, or I had heard it said» 
 
 Vetir, to clothe. 
 Pari. près, vêtant.* Past. vêtu. 
 Ind près, vêts,* vêts,* vêt,* vêtons, vêtez, vêtent. 
 Imperf. vêtais. Pre(. vêtis. Fut. vêtirai. Cosd. vêtirais. 
 Imp. vêts,* vête,* vêtons, vêtez, vêtent. 
 ;. près, vête, Imperf. vêtisse. 
 
 X. B. Vêtit* is seldom used in the forms marked 
 with an asterisk, and is most frequently reflected. 
 
 Revêtir, to clothe, to invest, is used through all the 
 lenses ; dévêtir, to divest, is principally used as a re- 
 flected verb, and in some forms only. 
 
 ~ÊXERCISE"ON QUERIR, kc. 
 Send for the physician and follow exactly his advice. Go 
 
 médecin suiwz 
 
 •and fttch my cane- Every day he acquired 
 
 * canne f. art. jour m. pi. ind-3 de art/ 
 
 celebrity by works calculated to fix the atten- 
 
 = f . de art. ouvrage m. pi. fait pour 
 
 tiou of an enlightened public. That I would acquire 
 
 2 1 subj-2 <fe art. 
 
 riches at the expense of my honesty ! He had acquired 
 
 dépens m. pK probité f. 
 
<3F THE IRREGULAR VERBS'. 18Y 
 
 branch m. Ouvrir* 
 Cueillir, to gather. 
 
 Pari.prts. cueillant. Past, cueilli. Ind. prêt, cueille* 
 
 Imperf. cueillais. Prêt, cueillis. Fut. cueillerai; 
 
 Cond. cueillerais. Ijmper. cueille. Subj. près, cueille, 
 
 Imperf. cueillisse. 
 
 Thus, accueillir, to welcome, and recueillir, to cof» 
 Iect. 
 
 Saillir, to project, has only saillant, sailli ; and the 
 following forms : il saille, il saillait, il saillera, il sail- 
 lerait, qu'il saille, qu'il saillît. But saillir, to gusîi 
 vut, is regularly conjugated like finir ; saillissant, je 
 
 by his merit great influence over the opinions of his con 
 m. une — f. sing con- 
 
 temporaries. I have inquired about that man (every where) 
 temporain de — là partout 
 
 and have not (been able) (to hear any thing of him). Who 
 je pu en avoir dt nouvelles Qui est- 
 
 has requested it of you ? Sesostris, king of Egypt, 
 ci qui 3 4 en 2 * 1 
 
 conquered a great part of Asia. The formidable empire 
 
 art. 2 1 
 
 which Alexander conquered did not last longer thafc 
 
 — dre ind-6 durer plus long-temps 
 
 his life. I have heard that important news. He dressed 
 
 f. ouïr-dire 2 sing. I sevtth 
 
 himself in haste and (went out) immediately. I wish 
 
 à art. hâte f. sortir sur-le-champ. voudrais 
 
 she would dress the children with more care. If hk 
 que vêtir subj -2 de 
 
 fortune permitted him, he would clothe all the poor of his 
 
 permettait le lui 
 parish. Two servants clothed him with his duca{ 
 
 paroisse f. domestique revltir de 2 
 
 mantle. , He only passed for a traveller; but 
 
 manteau m. 1 ne ind-2 que voyageur 
 
 lately he has assumed the character of an envoy. It 
 
 depuis peu revêtir un * envoyé 
 
 begins to be very warm; it is time to (throw off 
 
 commencer faire chaud; de se dé* 
 
 some clothing.) 
 vêtir. 
 

 OF THE IRREG'JLAU VERES, 
 
 saillis, &c. ils saillissent, &c. 
 third persons. 
 
 Assaillir, to assault. 
 
 Part, près-, assaillant. Past, assailli. 
 
 imper f. assaillais. Prit assailli?. 
 
 Cond. assaillirais. Imper, assaille. 
 
 fmperf. assaillisse. 
 
 Its principal use is k the 
 
 Jxd. près, assaille. 
 Fut. assaillirai 
 
 Sur. assaille. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH III. 
 
 I will gaUnr with pleasure some of these flowers and 
 
 pr-pron. 
 fruits, since you wish to have some. Do not gaihei 
 
 puisque tire hien-aise de en 
 
 these peaches, before they are ripe. That is a 
 
 f. pi. av-nt que de subj-1 mûr. Ce 
 
 country where they neither renp corn, nor (gather) 
 
 pays on on ne recueillir ni b 
 
 crapes. We shall collect in ancient nisi important 
 
 vin recueillir 2 1 de art. — 2 
 
 and ral u able facts, lie received us in the most po'.iie mar 
 précieux 3 fait I. i a£€ueiltir d 
 
 Poverty, misery, sickness persecution, in a 
 
 f.' Î art f art. f. art. maladie f. art. f. en 
 
 word, all the misfortunes in the worldyhave (fallen upon 
 malheur m . pi de accueillir 
 
 him. You will give six inches to that cornice ; it wi! 
 
 vu/> pouce, m. pi. corniche L i 
 
 project tof> much. That balcony fi : i' 
 
 hid 2 
 darkened the di ihig-room. W hen Moses struck 
 
 obscurcir ind-2 Quand Moïse frapper ind-3 
 
 the rock-, there gwhed out (of it a spring of fresh running; 
 
 reckirm il itid-3 en source f. ri/2 
 
 water. The blood gushed from his Vein with impetuosity, 
 
 f. 1 veine f = 
 
 We shall assault the >-morrow in their entrenchments. 
 
 pi de> r>int; chtment. 
 
 Were ne not overlak n by a horrible <=torm ? At every word 
 
 • c he que 
 
 old man) 
 vieillard' 
 h fear? 
 pevri. 
 
 ind-3 
 
 they said to 
 que o.i 
 leaped 
 tressaillir ind-2 de joie. 
 
 N. Ï5. 2 
 
 ne mi inn his 
 de 
 
 to start, i ssaillir, 
 
 snakes in the fut. je tressaillirai \ \> saillerait &c. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 189 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 
 
 Avoir, to have, is conjugated at length, p. 123. 
 
 Ravoir, to have again, and se ravoir, to recover, are 
 only used in the present of the infinitive. 
 
 Choir, to fail, has only the participle past, chu, chue. 
 formerly chute, preserved in chape-chute, 
 
 Déchoir, to decay. 
 
 (No Part, près.) Part. past, déchu. 
 
 IsD.pres. déchois, déchois, déchoit, déchoyons, déchoyez, dé- 
 choient. 
 
 (No Imperf.) Prêt, déchus Fut. décherraL Cond. décherrais. 
 
 Imper, déchois, déchoie, déchoyons, déchoyez, déchoient. 
 
 Sub. pre s. déchoie, déchoies, déchoie, déchoyi-ons, — ez, décl'j 
 ient. Imperf. déchusse. 
 
 Echoir, to fall to, to expire, has only now in use, the 
 ind. près, il échoit, sometimes pronounced il échet ; the 
 prêt, i l échut; fut. il écherra; cond. il écherrait; the 
 imperf. Subj. que féchusse, &c.,and Inf. échoir, échéant, 
 échu. 
 
 N. B. Choir, déchoir, échoir, take the auxiliary être. 
 
 Falloir, to be necessary, is an impersonal verb, the 
 conjugation of which has been given, p. 1/7. 
 
 EXERCISE ON AVOIR, RAVOIR/ fcc. 
 
 I had apartments that I liked ; I will endeavour to have them 
 ind-2 un logement aimer veux essayer de s. 
 
 again. Beware of falling. How has he fallen into 
 
 prenes-garde inf-1 comment en 
 
 poverty ? Since the publication of his last work, he has 
 pauvreté ? Depuis dernier 
 
 much fallen in the esteem of the public. If he do not alter 
 déchoir change; 
 
 his conduct, he will decline every day in his reputation 
 de * déchoir de jour-en-jour de — f. 
 
 and credit. He has put in the lottery, and he hope? 
 
 pr. pron. — m. mis à loterie f. 
 
 that a capital'prize will fall (to his share). That bill 
 
 * art. gros lot m. échoir lui lettre i 
 
 of exchange has expired. The first term expires at Mkl 
 rhange échoir. terme m. à la l 
 

 OF THF. IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Mouvoir, tu more. , 
 Part. près, mouvant. . past. mu. 
 
 isd. près, meus, meus, meut, mouv-ons, — ez, meu 
 Imperf mouvais. f 'rtl. mus. Fut. mouvrai. Con d. mouvrais. 
 Lmper. meus, meuve, mouvons, mouvez, meuv 
 Suej. près, meuv-e, — es, — e, mouv-ions, — iez ? meuve 
 Imperf. musse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, émouvoir, to stii 
 up, to move ; promouvoir, to promote ; a:; :oir. 
 
 to make one -aisU 
 
 The first, \\ ether in an actual or figurative sense, is 
 much used. he second, is employed in speaking of a 
 dignity. The third, is a law term, and is only used in the 
 L\f. près* 
 
 Pleuvoir, to rain {impersonal). 
 Part. près, pleuvant. Pad. plu. Ixd. près, il pleut 
 
 Imperf il pleuvait. Fret, il plut. Fut. il pleuvra. 
 
 Cond. il pleuvrait. Sub. près, qu'il pleuve. Imperf. qu'il plût. 
 
 summer. You have drawn on me a bill of exchange ; when 
 
 Jean. iir^r • sur moi 
 
 is it payable ? I did not believe that I must so soon (have taken' 
 
 échoir ind-1 croyais sub- 2 faire 
 
 that journey. He must have sunk under the efforts 
 
 voyage m. ind-4 que succomber sub-2 
 
 of (so many) enemies. 
 
 tant de 
 
 EXERCISE ON MOUVOIR, &c. 
 
 The spring which moves the whole machine is very inge 
 
 ressort m. 2 tout 1 — f. 
 
 nious, though very simple. It was passion which moved 
 
 = quoique — Ce iud-1 art. f. ind-4 
 
 him to that action. Can you doubt that the souî, though it 
 
 — f Pouvez f. 
 
 is spiritual. moves the body at pleasure ? That is a mari 
 >: — tuel ne sub-1 à sa volonté ? Ce 
 
 whom nothing moves. We had scarcely lost sight of 
 
 i mouvoir ind-3 à peine perdu vue f. 3 2 art. 
 
 land when th ore arose a violent tempest. Wt 
 
 terre, f. 1 que il l'émouvoir ind-3 grande tempête f. 
 were moved with fear and pity. When the famous 
 
 Jnd-2 émus de crai?ite f. pr. pitié f. Quand célèbre 
 
 d'Aguesaeau was promoted to the dignity of chancellor, all 
 
 ~f. chancelier art J 
 
OB THE iHKEGULAE. VERBS* Î9| 
 
 Pouvoir, to be- able. 
 Part. près, pouvant. Part. past. pu. 
 
 (nd. près, puis or peux, peux, peut, pouv-ons, — ez, peuvent. 
 Imperf. pouvais. Fret. pus. jFu£. pourrai. Cond. pourrais. 
 [JVà imperative). Subj. près, puisse. Imperf. pusse. 
 
 Remark. Conversation and poetry admit je peux ; 
 but in interrogations, puis-je ? and not peux je ? must be 
 used. 
 
 Savoir, to know, 
 Part. près, sachant. Part, past su. 
 
 Ikd. pre*, sais, sais, sait, savons, savez, savent. Imperf. savais, 
 PrJ. sus. Fat. saurai. Cond. saurais. 
 
 Imper, sache, sache, sachons, sachez, sachent. 
 Sum. près, sache. Imperf. susse. 
 
 Seoir, to become, to befit, has only the part, près* 
 ieyant ; and the third person of the simple tenses ? 
 il ned, ils siéent, il seyait, il siéra, il siérait, qu'il siée. 
 But seoir, to sit is used oniy in the two participles, néant 
 and sis. This vsrb is also used impersonally. 
 
 France shewed the greatest joy. That bishop well 
 
 f. en témoigner ind-3 f. évêque 
 
 deserved by his talents and by his virtues, that the king 
 
 mériter ind-2 
 should promote him to the dignity of primate. The people 
 
 sub-2 primai sing, 
 
 think that it rains frogs and insects 
 
 croit de art. grenouille f. pi. pr-art. insecte m. pî. 
 
 at certain seasons. It will not rain today. but .1 
 
 * en -— ' temps pi. d'aujourd'hui 
 
 (am fearful) of its raining to-morrow. 
 idre que * ne sub- 1 
 
 EXERCISE 0!V POUVOIR, SAVOIR, &c. 
 
 When he arrived at home, he (was quite ex- 
 
 ind-5 .with îire chtz-lni n'en pouvoir 
 
 hausted). - The minister had (so many) people at hi? 
 
 iml-2 plus rtfinist re ind-2 tnvt demovdea 
 
 that 1 cou Id not speak to liim. Are you afraid 
 mh*i i^d-2 ■ * 2 craignez 1 
 
 that he will not' accomplish that, affair? I know 
 
 pouvoir sub-1 rsnir à /><>/</ // 
 
 that he is not your friend, but I know liUwise that he is a 
 de pi. aussi 
 

 • 
 
 "j92 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS* 
 
 Asseoir, to set. 
 Part. près, asseyant. Pari. past, assis. 
 
 ïnd. près, assieds, assieds, assied, assey-ons, — ez, — ent. 
 Jmperf. asseyais, fret, assis. Fut. assiérai, or asseyerai. 
 Cond. assiérais, or asseyerais. Imper, assieds, asseye, asseyons, 
 — ez, — ent. Subj. près, asseye. Imperf. assisse. 
 
 N. B. This verb is more frequently reflected, as 
 s'asseoir, to set down. Its compound rasseoir, to set 
 again, to calm, or to sit down again, is conjugated in the 
 same manner. 
 
 • • 
 
 Voir, to see. 
 Pari. près, voyant. Part. past. vu. 
 
 Ind. près, vois, vois, voit, voyons, voyez, voient. 
 Jmperf '. voyais. .. ret. vis. Fut. verrai. Cond. verrais. 
 Imper, vois, voie, voyons, voyez, voient. 
 Subj. près, voie, voies, voie, voyions, voyiez, voient. Imp. v 
 
 man of probity. Let them know that their pardon depends on 
 
 bien grâce dépendre de 
 
 their submission. 1 could wish that he knew his lessen? 
 
 soumission. désirer cond-1 sub-2 
 
 a little better. Let us see if this new-fashioned 
 
 voyons d'un nouveau goût 2 
 
 gown becomes you, or not. Be assured that too gaudy 
 
 robe f.l non' art. voyant 
 
 colours will not become you. The head-dress which that 
 
 f. coiffure f. que 
 
 lady wore became her very ill. These colours become 
 
 porter ind-2 ind 2 lui inf-3 
 
 you so well, you (would do wrong) to wear any others, 
 
 avoir tort cond-1 de en porter de 
 Set that child in this arm-chair, and take care lest he 
 
 asseoir m. fauteuil m. prenez-garde que 
 
 fall. I will sit down on the top of that hill, 
 
 ne subj-1 s'asseoir sommet m. coteau m. 
 
 whence I shall discover a prospect (no less) magnificent 
 
 découvrir scènr f. aussi — que 
 
 than diversified. We (were seated) on the banks of the 
 
 varié s'asseoir ind-6 bord m. pi. 
 
 Thames, whence we (were contemplating) myriads of 
 
 Tamise f. ind-2 de art. millier 
 
 vessels, which bring every year, the riches of the two 
 vaisseau apporter art. pi. 
 
 hemispheres. 
 

 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Revoir, to see again, and entrevoir, to have a glimpse ^ 
 
 vjf, are conjugated in the same manner ; but prévoir, to 
 foresee, makes in the future and the conditional, je pré- 
 voirai, &c. je prévoirais, &c. 
 
 Pourvoir, to provide, differs in the prêt, je pourvus, 
 tu pourvus, &c. fut. je pourvoirai, &c. cond. je pour- 
 voirais, &c. and imperf. subj. que je pourvusse, &c. 
 
 Surseoir, to supersede, though a compound of seoir, 
 is conjugated like voir, except that it makes fut, je sur* 
 voirai, &c» gond, je surseoirais, &c. and part, past» . 
 sursis. 
 
 Valoir, to be worth. 
 Par?, 'près, valant. Part. past. valu. 
 
 ïxd. près. vaux, vaux, vaut, valons, valez, valent. 
 Imperf. valais. Prêt, valus. Fut. vaudrai. Cond. vaudrais. 
 Imper, vaux, vaille, valons, valez, vaillent. 
 ^tjbj. près, vaille, vailles, vaille, valions, valiez, vaillent. 
 împerf. valusse. 
 
 Revaloir, to return like for like, and équivaloir, to be 
 equivalent to. follow valoir; but prévaloir, to prevail, 
 makes in the subj. pre s. que je prévale, que tu prévales, 
 jûHl prévale, que nous prévalions, &c. 
 
 Vouloir, to be willing. 
 Part. près, voulant. Part. past, voulu. 
 lsD.pres. veux, veux, veut, vouions voulez, veulent 
 Imperf. voulais. Prêté voulus. Fut. voudrai. Cond. voudrais. 
 Subj. près, veuill-e, — es, — e, voulions, vouliez, veuillent. 
 Imperf. voulusse. 
 
 N. B. The imperative zeuille, veuillons, veuillez, is 
 also used, particularly veuillez, with the sense of, be so 
 good as, so kind as to, &c. 
 
 EXERCISE ON VOIR, &c. 
 
 See the admirable order of the universe : does it not announce 
 2 m. 1 
 
 a supreme architect ? Has h*» again seen with pleasure his 
 
 — 2 artisan m. 1. 
 
 country and his friends ? (Ha» he hid a glimpse of) the dawn 
 
 fays aurore 
 
 of this fine day? To finish their affairs, it would be necea- 
 
 Pour falloir 
 
 18 
 
94 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS; 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION 
 
 branch i. on Rendre. 
 
 Soudre, to solve, now obsolete, and replaced by 
 Résoudre, to resolve. 
 } :in. près, résolvant. Pari. past, résolu, or résous- 
 Lnd. près, résous, résous, résout, résolv-ons, — ez, — >erit. 
 fmpcrf. résolvais. Prêt, résolus. Fut. résoudrai. 
 Coxd. résoudrais. Impkr. résous, résolve, résolv-ons, -ez, -en! 
 Subj. près, résolve. fmperf. résolusse. 
 
 This verb has two participles past, rcsolu, when i: 
 means determined ; and résous, when it means resolved 
 into ; in this last sense it has no feminine. 
 
 Absoudre, to absolve, is conjugated like résoudre , 
 but has neither prêt. ind. nor imperf. suej. ; its parti- ' 
 cjple past is absous, m. absoute, f. 
 
 sary for them to (ste one another). I clearly foresaw, (from 
 
 ,-pic * Us * s'entrevoir subj-2 bien dès- 
 
 hat time), all the obstacles he would have to surmount. Would 
 
 — m surmonter, ind-i! 
 
 yon have the judge 'put off) the execution of the 
 
 * que surseoir subj-2 
 
 sentence lhat he had pronounced ? I shall not put off th< 
 arret rendu pour- 
 
 voit of that affair. If men do notprovide (tor it), God 
 
 uite f, pi. art. y 
 
 ;riil provide for it. Would this book Le good for nothing ? You 
 
 valoir * 
 
 îave not paid fortius ground more than it is north; (an 
 
 * terre f. i ne craèn- 
 
 ifraid) that it is not worth six hundred pounds ? Let os 
 
 dre que subj-1 livre f. pi. 
 
 ake arbitrators. One ounce of gold is equivalent U>. 
 
 nrcnons de art. arbitre once f. 
 
 fifteen ounces of silver. Doubt not that reason and 
 
 art. art. 
 
 ruth will prevail at last. I can and will tell the truth. 
 
 * ne subj-1 à la longue prou. dire 
 
 ',ï you art wiling^ he will be willing too. Let us rtséht tc 
 /e /e rtuwi ifetr 
 
 our passions, and we shall be sure to conquer tl 
 (imbattre de vm 
 
 He so good as) to leml -\y 
 
 vouloir * pi 
 
ÔF THï: ÏRÏIEGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Dissoudre, to dissolve, has the same irregularities, and 
 ■rants the same tenses, as absoudre. 
 Coudre, io sew. 
 Part. près, cousant. Pari. past, cousu. 
 
 Ind. près, couds, couds, coud, cousons, cousez, cousent. 
 Imperf. cousais. Prêt, cousis. Fut. coudrai. Cond. coudrais. 
 Imper, coud:- Sujbj. -près, couse. Imperf. cousisse. 
 
 Découdre, to unsew, and recoudre, to sew again, arc 
 conjugated in the same manner, so likewise sourdre, to 
 issue from a fountain, which is only used in ihe infini- 
 tive sourdre and present of the indicative il soi 
 Mettre, to put. 
 
 Part. près, mettant.. Part. past. mis. 
 
 Ind. près, mets, mets, met, mettons, mettez, mettent. 
 Imperf. mettais. Prtt. mis. Fut. mettrai. Coxd. mettrais. 
 Imper, mets. Sujbj. près, mette. Imperf misse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated the derivatives. 
 
 ?ttre to admit permettre to permit 
 
 commettre io commit promettre to promise 
 
 compromettre to compromise remettre to replace 
 
 ^e démettre \ toput out of joint soumettre to subject 
 
 ( io resign transmettre to transmit 
 
 omettre to omit s'entremettre to intermeddle 
 
 EXERCISE UPON RESOUDRE., kc 
 
 Wood which is burned resolves itself into ashes 
 
 art. lois m. on briïltr ind-2 se résoudra * en cendre f. 
 
 and smoke. Have they resolved on poaee or war. 
 
 pr. fumée i. on' * art. f. art, f. 
 
 The fog has resolved itself into rain. Could tha: 
 
 brouillard m. se résoudre ind 4 * pluie f. 
 
 judge thus lightly absolve the guilty ? Strong 
 
 si légèrement cond-1 coupable m. pi. art. fat 2 
 -waters dissolve metals. Those drugs (were dissolved) 
 
 f. pi. 1 art* on I drogue 3 ind-42' 
 
 before they were put into that medicine. My sister 
 
 aranf que de les * mettre remède m. 
 
 was sewing all day yesterday. That piece is not well sewed, i 
 înd-3 * hier m 
 
 must (be sewed over again.) Unpick that her, and sac ii 
 
 lu inf-1 Découdre dentelle f. 2 1 
 
 very carefully. - he set à great value 
 
 avec beaucoup de soin vu ' ' c. m 
 
196 OP THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Mocdri:, to grind (corn, Sic.) 
 
 Pari. près, moulant. J'art. past, moulu. 
 
 Jnd. pris, mouds, mouds, moud, moul-ons, — ez ? — eut. 
 
 Jmperf. moulais. Prêt, moulus. Fui. moudra* 
 
 Cosd. moudrais. 
 
 Jmper. mouds, moule, moulons, moulez, moulent. 
 
 £ubj. près, moule. Jmperf. moulusse. 
 
 Iïn the same manner are conjugated the derivatives ; 
 l, \ to grind remoudre to grind again (corn, &c.) 
 
 ou rc \ (knives, &c.) remoudre to grind again (knives, &c. 
 
 Prendre, to take. 
 
 JParl. près, prenant. Part. past. pris. 
 
 îkd. près, prends, prends, prend, pren-ons, — ez, prennent. 
 
 Imperf. prenais. Prêt, pris Fut. prendrai. Cond. prendrais 
 
 Imper, prends, prenne, prenons, prenez, prennent. 
 
 Subj. près, prenn-e, — es, — e, pren-ions, — iez, prennent. 
 
 fmperf. prisse. 
 
 iippn riches? I never admitted those principles. Ha> 
 
 à art. 
 ie committed that fault? If he (would take m\ 
 
 faute f. me 
 
 advice,) he would resign his charge in favour of his 
 
 croyoit se démettre cond-1. de f. en = 
 
 soû. He put his arm (out of joint) yesier 
 
 se démettre ind-3 * art. bras m. 
 lay. I will omit nothing that depends on me to 
 
 de ce dépendre ind-7 de paw 
 e- you. God frequently permits the wicked tt 
 
 souvent que méchant m. pi. » 
 
 prosper. Put this book in its place again. Undei 
 
 prospérer sub-1 remettre à — f. * 
 
 whatever form of government you (may live), remem 
 
 quelque gouvernement m. que vi< se sou- 
 
 ber that your first duty is to be obedient to the laws. I- 
 
 'venir de coir m. de tournis 
 
 [uently happens that fathers ira?ismit to their childre: 
 
 anriter art. 
 
 •ioth their vices and their virtues. He has long vieddlea 
 
 long -temps s'entre- 
 witli public affairs; but his endeavours have not been 
 mettre de art. - 1 
 crowned with sue. 
 oilier de art. in. 
 
0,F THE IÎIREGIFLAR V£ttB8. If5| 
 
 în the same manner are conjugated, 
 
 apprendre to learn entreprendre to undertake 
 
 désapprendre to unlearn se méprendre to mistake 
 
 comprendre io understand reprendre ioietake^to reply 
 
 déprendre to separate surprendre io surpris* 
 
 Rompre, to break. 
 Part. près, rompant. Part. past, rompu. 
 Jnd. près, romps, romps, rompt, romp-ons, — ez, — ent. 
 Jmperf rompais. Prêt, rompis, Fut. romprai. Cond. romprais 
 Jmper. romps, rompe, rompons, rompez, rompent. 
 Subj. près, rompe. Imperf. rompisse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated corrompre, to cor» 
 rupt, and interrompre, to interrupt. 
 
 EXERCISE ON MOUDRE, PRENDRE, &c. 
 
 i took great pains : but, at last, I ground all the 
 
 ind-3 beaucoup de sing. enfin 
 
 coffee. Grind those razors with care. Those knives 
 afém. rasoir m. couteau m. 
 
 (are just) ground. This grain is not sufficiently ground, it 
 
 Lcnir d/ttrt asses 
 
 should be ground again. I wish that you would take 
 
 falloir ind-1 h inf-1 vouloir 
 
 courage.. What news have you Uarnt? Philosophy com- 
 
 f. pi. art. 
 prthtnds logic. ethics, physics, and 
 
 logique f. art. morale^ art. physique f. art. 
 
 metaphysics. it is (with difficulty that he divests himself oi 
 métaphysique f. Ce difficilement que se déprendre 
 
 his opinions. He has forgotten all that he knew. I fear 
 désapprendre ce que ind-2 que 
 
 you will under lake a task above your strength. Could 
 
 ne subj-î tâche f. au-dessus de f. pi. 
 
 he have been mistaken so grossly ? I reproved 
 
 cond-2 grossièrement reprendre ind-2 
 
 ; him continually for his faults, but (to no purpose). We 
 
 sans cesse de défaut inutilement 
 
 surprised, the enemy, and cut them to pieces. In the middle 
 
 ind 3 pi. tailler en à 
 
 of the road the axletree of our carriage broke. Bad 
 
 chemin essieu m. carosse se rompre art. 
 
 company corrupts the minds of young people. Why d'. 
 
 f. pi. sing. gens pourquoi 
 
 you interrupt your brother, when you see him busy ? 
 quand oecupt 
 
 18* 
 
 <f 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR. VERBS 
 
 Suivre, to follow. 
 
 Part. pns. suivant. Part. past, suivi. 
 
 IxD.pres. suis, suis, suit, suivons, suivez, suivent. 
 
 fmptrf. suivais. Fret, suivis. Fut. suivrai. Co.vd. suivrais. 
 
 Ïmpek suis, suive, suivons, suivez, suivent. 
 
 ^ubj. près, suive. Imper f. suivisse. 
 
 N. B. S'ensuivre, to ensue, only used in the thin, 
 person singular and plural of every tense, and poursvi 
 rrc, to pursue, are conjugated in the same manner. 
 
 Vaincre, io conquer, to vanquish. 
 
 Pari- près, vainquant. Part. past, vaincu. 
 
 IsD.pres. vaincs,* vainc,* vainc,* vainqu-ons,* — ez, — ent 
 
 fmptrf. vainquais. Pr»t. vainquis. Fut. vaincrai. Ces. vaincrais 
 
 (aiPER. vaincs,* vainque, vainquons,* vainqu-ez, — eut. 
 
 : ; ubj. près, vainque. Imperf. vainquisse. 
 
 All the persons of this verb, marked with an asterisk. 
 aje very little used. But its derivative, convaincre, to 
 convince, is used in all its tenses and persons. 
 
 EXERCISE ON SUIVRE, &c. 
 
 (For a long while) we followed that method, which wa« 
 long-temps 2 ind-3 1 f. ind-i^' 
 
 only calculated to mislead us. What (is the consequence f) 
 ne que propre égarer que s'ensuivre 
 
 See the errors that have sprung from this propo- 
 
 s 1 ensuivre ind-4 f. pi. — L 
 
 sition, which appeared so true. We pursued our course 
 
 ind-2 suivre ind-2 chemin 
 
 when some cries, which came from the midst of the 
 lorsque de art. cri, m. pi. * sortis fond m. 
 
 forest, excited terror in our souls. The Greek:- 
 
 fortt f. porter ind-3 art. = f. Grec 
 
 vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Salamis, Platea 
 
 Perse à pr. Salamine pr. Platée 
 
 and Mycale. I have, at last, convinced him, by sucl> 
 pr. de art. si 2 
 
 powerful reasons, of the greatness of his fault, that [ (havt 
 
 fort 3 f. pi. 1 énormité faute f. ne 
 
 no doubt) but he will repair it. It is during 
 
 douter nullement que ne réparer subj-1 Ce pendan 
 
 winter that they thrash the corn in cold countries, 
 
 art. on battre froid 2 art. pays ra- pi. 1 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS, 199 
 
 Battre, to beat. 
 
 Part. près, battant. Part. past, battu. 
 
 IvD.pres. bats, bats, bat, battons, battez, battent. 
 
 Imperf. battais. Prêt, battis. Fut. battrai. Cosd. battrais. 
 
 Imper, bats. Svvj.pres. batte- Imperf. battisse. 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner, 
 
 abattre to putl down combattre to fight 
 
 rabattre to abate débattre to debate 
 
 rebattre to beat again s'ébattre to be merru 
 
 tire, to be, is conjugated at full length, p. 134. 
 
 Vivre, to live. 
 
 Part. près, vivant. Part. past. vécu. 
 
 Ind. près, vis, vis, vît. vivons, vivez, vivent. Imperf. vivais. 
 Prêt, vécus. Fut. vivrai. Goifp. vivrais, bip. vis. 
 Subj. près. vive. Imperf. vécusse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, revivre, to re- 
 vive ; and survivre, to survive. 
 
 The enemy was so completely beaten in that engagement, thai 
 
 pi. — ment rencontre f. 
 
 lie was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the country. TIk 
 
 pi. de lieue f. * pays 
 
 cannon (beat down) the tower. They were fighting with 
 canon abattre ind-3 tour f, * ind-2 UK 
 
 unexampled fury, when a panic terror made 
 
 sans exemple 2 acharnement m. 1 panique 2 — f . 1 ind-o 
 
 them take flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beat 
 leur art. fuite f. m. rebattre 
 
 these mattrasses again. Happy are those who live in soli - 
 matelas m. pi. * * art. re- 
 
 tude ! Long live that good king ! He 
 
 >raile f. que 1 long-temps 4 subj-1 3 2 
 
 did not long survive a person, who was so dear to him 
 
 ind-3 à f. art. 
 
 Fathers live again in their children. He was in a strange de- 
 
 a'. 
 jection of mind ; but the news which he has received has 
 tablement f. pi. f. pK ont f ai! 
 
 revived him, 
 inf-1 
 
3CLAK VERBS, 
 
 BRANCH IK Phi re. 
 
 Braire, to bray, and ?7 6rot>, i7s braient, il braira 
 ils brairont, il brairait, i?s brairaient, are only used 
 when speaking of aises ; though it may be used wftb 
 propriety in the other persons by comparison. 
 Faire, to do. 
 
 Part, free, faisant Part past. fait. 
 
 iKD.prcs fais, fais, fait, faisons, faites, font. 
 
 Imperf. faisais. Prêt. fis. Fut. ferai. Cond. ferais. 
 
 Jmper. fais, fasse, taisons, faites, fassent. Subj. près, fasse 
 
 T.'iiperf. tisse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, 
 
 contrefaire to counterfeit refaire to do again 
 
 défaire to undo • satisfaire to satisfy 
 
 redéfaire to undo again surfaire to exact 
 
 forfaire* to trespass méfaire* to mi «du 
 
 malfaire* to do ill parfaire* to perfect 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH II. FAIRE, &c. 
 
 What will you have him do ? Do not make (st 
 
 'Que vouloir * que il subj-1 
 
 much) noise. Do they never exact ? That woman mimicked 
 tant de bruit ind-2 
 
 all the persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered 
 
 f. pi. que f. pi. légèreté £ ind-Lî 
 
 her odious. It was with difficulty he (divested himself) of th< 
 
 f. ind-3 peine que se défaire 
 
 false opinions which had been given him in his infancy, 
 
 — f. on * f. pi. lui {. 
 
 Could it be possible that we should not again make a jour- 
 
 subj -2 art. * toy- 
 
 Jicy to Paris, Rome, and Naples ? He says that you 
 
 age de pr. pr. dit 
 
 ïiave offended him, and that, if you do not satisfy him quickly 
 
 offensé prompte - 
 
 he will 6nd means to satisfy himself. Even 
 
 ment art. moyen sing, de se lui-même 
 
 \ night, she milked her sheep, which gave her a (great 
 
 art. soiVm.pl. ind-2 brcbuph ind-2 lui a 
 
 quantity) of wholesome milk. Have you milked youi 
 
 Jant2 * ctsainS lait m. 1. 
 
 * These four verbe are only used in this form, and the pi 
 
 i or fait, malfait, mifait, and parfait. 
 
 * 
 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS, 203 
 
 Traire, to milk (defective). ,| 
 
 Part. près, trayant.* Part, past, trait. 
 
 iifD. près, trais, trais, trait, trayons, trayez, traient. 
 
 ».perf. trayais. (No prêt.) Fut. trairai. Cond. trairais. 
 Imper, trais, traye, trayons, trayez, traient. 
 Subj. près, traye. (No imperf.) 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner 
 
 attraire 
 
 to allure 
 
 rentraire 
 
 tofinedraw 
 
 abstraire 
 
 to abstract 
 
 retraire 
 
 to redeem 
 
 distraire 
 
 to divert 
 
 soustraire 
 
 to subtract 
 
 extraire 
 
 to extract 
 
 
 
 All these verbs are principally used in the compound 
 tenses. 
 
 branch hi. Parcitre. 
 
 Naître, to be bom. 
 
 Part. près, naissant. Part. past. né. 
 ïnd. près, nais, nais, naît, naissions, naissez, naissent. 
 Imperf. naissais. Prêt, naquis Fut. naîtrai. CoifD. naîtrais. 
 [ Ïmpitr. nais. Subj. près, naisse- Imperf. naquisse. 
 
 This verb takes the auxiliary être ; but its derivative. 
 ï renaître, to be born again, has no participle past, and. 
 bonsequently, no compound tenses. 
 
 goats? Are the cows milked? Salt is good to 
 
 chèvre f. pi. vache f. pi. art. Sel m. pour 
 
 entice pigeons. You will never know the nature o 
 
 attraire art. m. pi. connaître 
 
 bodies, if you do not abstract their necessary qualities frou 
 art * =2 = 1.1 
 
 those which are inherent (in them). The least thing (diverts 
 
 — leur moindre le 
 
 his attention.) Will you not extract that charming passage 1 
 distraire — m. 
 
 Have you darned your gown ? Should he not redeem thai 
 
 rentraire 
 'and? What! would you have me screen those 
 
 Quoi ! ind-1 * que je soustraire sub- 1 
 
 guilty persons from the rigour of the laws ? 
 
 coupable m. pi. * à rigueur f. 
 
202 OF THE IRREGULAB VERBS. 
 
 Paître, to graze (defective). 
 
 Pari. près, paissant. Part, patt. pu. 
 Ïnd. près, pais, pais, paît, paissons, paissez, paissent. 
 Imperf. paissais. (No prêt.) Fut. paîtrai Cond. paîtrai. 
 Imper, pais Subj. près, paisse. (No imperf.) 
 
 Repaître, to feeà, to bait, is, like paraître, regular ir 
 all its tenses, .making in the prêt. /no. je repus, &c. an< 
 in the imperf. subj. je repusse, &c. 
 
 branch iv. Réduire. 
 
 Bruire, to roar, which is defective, has, besides this 
 form, the part» près, bruyant, oftener used as an adjec- 
 tive, as, des flots bruyons ; and the two third persons of 
 the imperf. i.vn. il bruyait, ils bruyaient. 
 
 Luire, to shine, and rehire, to glitter, make the part, 
 past, lui, relui, neither the prêt. jnd. nor imperf. sub.7. 
 are in use. 
 
 Nuire, to hurt, making part. près, nuisant, past, mil 
 has all its tenses. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH HT. NAITRE, &c. 
 
 Was not Virgil born at Mantua ? It is from that poisoned 
 ind-3 Mantoue ? Ce empohor 
 
 source that have arisen all the cruel wars that hav< 
 
 f. 1 que naître f. pi. 2 f. pi. 1 
 
 .losolated the universe. The fable says that, as soon r. c 
 
 désôîèr f dit aussitôt que 
 
 •Mercules had (cut off) one of the heads of the hydra, 
 Hercule h m. couper tête f. pi. h yd 
 
 others sprang vp. While their uni 
 
 d'autres 2 il en renaître ind-2 1 Tandis que rlxx 
 
 Hocks fed on the tender and flower} 
 
 ■roupeau m. pi. 1 paître ind 2 * 2 fleuri 8 
 
 ^rass. they sunc: under the shade of a tree tin 
 
 Utrbei.l chanter ind-2 à ombre 
 
 wcv\i of rural life Your horses have n 
 
 douceur f. pi. art chnmpclre 2. f. 1 
 
 fyd to-day ; you must have them Jed. 
 
 repaître d'aujourd'hui * * faire 2 1 inf-1 
 
 He is a man who thirsts after nothing but blbo< 
 
 Ce ne s? repaître de 2 * que 1 
 
 md slaughter, 
 pr. carnage m. 
 
 
HE IRREGULAR VERBS. SOSÏ 
 
 Confire, to pickle. 
 Part, près, conusant. Part. past, confit. 
 IsD.pres. conf-is, — is, — it, — isons, — isez, — isent. 
 Fmperf. confisais. Prêt, confis. Fut. confirai. 
 
 Cond. confirais. Imp. confis. Subj. près, confise. 
 
 ïmperf. confisse. 
 
 Its derivative déconjire, to discomfit, is rather obsolete, 
 
 Circoncire, to circumcise, and suffire to suffice, make 
 
 in the part. past, circoncis and siiffi, the rest is as confire* 
 
 Dire, to say. 
 Pari. près, disant. Part. past. dit. 
 
 (nd. pre:;, dis, dis, dit, disons, dites.* disent. 
 fmperf. disais. J'rct. dis. Fut. dirai. Cond. dirais. 
 
 Imper. dis, dise, disons, dites,* disent. 
 Subj. près. dise. ïmperf. disse. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BRANCH IV. BRUIRE, &c. 
 The thunder which roared from afar an- 
 
 tonnerre ni. bruire ind-2 dans art. lointain m. 
 
 aounced a dreadful storm. T bey heard roar the waves 
 
 ind-2 terrible*! orage m. Î On ind-2 inf-1 fiot m. ph 
 
 of an agitated sea. That street is too noisy for those who 
 
 agité 2 mer f . 1 rue f. bruyant 
 
 love retirement and study. (I have a glimpse of ) some- 
 art, retraite f. art. entrevoir quelque 
 thing that shines through those trees. À ray of hope 
 chose au-tr avers de ray an m. 
 shone upon us in the midst of the misfortunes which over- 
 ind-4 * à milieu malheurm.pl. at- 
 whelmed us. Every thing is well rubbed in that house ; every 
 cahier ind-2 frotté 
 thing shines, even the floor. Would he not have 
 
 y reluire jusque à plancher m. * 
 
 injured you in that affair ? Jesus Christ was circumcised eight 
 
 cond-2 
 
 * Redire^ to say again, conformably to its primitive, makes re 
 dites, but 
 
 f vous contredise.? 
 J vous dédises 
 
 I make \ vous interdÎ5e * 
 f ' j vous médises 
 
 i vous prédises 
 J ' t vous maudisses 
 
 This last makes part. près, maudissant, with two ss, and cfcnse- 
 imently nous maudissons, fcc. jo maudissais, &c« 
 
 contredire 
 
 to contradict 
 
 dédire 
 
 to unmy 
 
 interdire 
 
 to forbid 
 
 médire 
 
 to slander 
 
 prédire 
 
 to foretell 
 
 maudire 
 
 to curse 
 
304 
 
 OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS. 
 
 Ecrire, to write. 
 Part. près, écrivant. Part, past, écrit. 
 
 Ind. près, écris, écris, écrit, écrivions, — ez, — ent. 
 Tmperf. écrivais. Prêt, écrivis. Fut. écrirai. Cond. écrirais. 
 Imp. écris. Subj. près, écrive. Imperf. écrivisse. 
 
 Conjugate in the same manner, 
 
 circonscrire to circumscribe proscrire to proscribe 
 
 décrire to describe récrire to write again 
 
 'nscrire to inscribe souscrire tosnbsiribe 
 
 orescrire (o prescribe transcrire to transcribe 
 
 Lire, to read. 
 Part. près, lisant. Part. past. In. 
 
 Ind. près. lis. lis, lit, lisons, lisez, lisent. Tmperf. lisais. 
 Près. lus. Fut. lirai. Cond. lirais Imper, lis. 
 Subj. près. lise. Imperf. lusse. 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, 
 -lire to elect relire to read over again 
 
 'lays after his birth. 
 
 naissante f. 
 with sugar, with honey, or with 
 à art. sucre m. art. miel m. art 
 
 Did you jnckle cucumbers, 
 
 de art- concombre m. pi. prart 
 ind sea-fennel ? 
 
 pr. art. perce -pierre f. 
 property will not suffice, 
 bien 
 
 Will you preserve these peacher 
 confire 
 
 brandy? 
 eau-de-vie f. 
 purslane, 
 .pi. prart pourpier m 
 If he loses his lawsuit, all his 
 procès m. 
 
 EXERCISE ON DIRE, he. 
 
 Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never contra- 
 dire art. f. 
 ticl (any one) in public. You thought you were serving 
 
 personne en penser ind-4 * * inf-1 
 
 me in speaking thus: well,. (lrt i< be go); you shall not 
 
 en parler ainsi eh! bien. soit en 
 
 be contradicted. What ! would you forbid him aH commu- 
 
 didire Quoi ! * interdire 
 
 nication with his friends ? That woman who slandered 
 
 f. ind 2 de 
 
 every one, soon lost all kind of respect. You bad 
 
 ind-3 etpèce f. considération 
 
 foretold that event. Let us curse no one ; let us remember 
 
 v e personne se rappeler 
 
 that our law forbids us to curse even those who persecute us 
 défendre * de pets- 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS, 20u 
 
 Rire, to laugh» 
 
 Pari. pre*, riant. Past, ri. Ind. près, ris, ris, rit, rions, riez, rient 
 fmperf. riais. Prêt. ris. Fut. rirai Cond. rirais 
 
 hiPER. ris. Subj. près. rie. Imperf. risse. 
 
 Sourire, to smile, is conjugated as rire. 
 Frire, to fry, besides the present of the infinitive, ha^ 
 only the part. past, frit ; indic. près, je fris, tu fris, il 
 frit ; fut. je frirai, tu, &c. ; cond, je frirais, tu, &c. : 
 , biper. sing. fris. But it has all the compound tenses 
 The forms that are déficient are fully supplied by faire., 
 prefixed to frire, as faisant frire, je faisais frire, &c. 
 
 Boire, to drink, 
 
 Part. près, buvant. .Past. bu. 
 
 Ind. près, bois, bois, boit, buvons, buvez, boivent. 
 
 Imperf. buvais. Prêt. bus. Fut boirai. Cond. boirais. 
 
 (mper. bois, boive, bavons buvez, boivent. 
 
 ^vnj.pres. boiv-e, — es, — e, buvions, buviez, boivent. 
 
 fmperf. busse. 
 
 Write every day the reflections which you make on tht 
 
 art. pi. 
 books vou read. Did he not read that interesting his 
 
 ind-2 2 I 
 
 tory with (a great deal) of pleasure ? God is an infinite being 
 
 2 être m 
 who is circumscribed neither by time nor place. 
 
 î ne ni art. ni pr. art. lieuin.pl 
 
 Will you not describe in that episode the dreadful tempest 
 
 — m. horrible 2 f. 1 
 
 which assailed your hero ? Get those soles and whiting: 
 
 ind-3 faire 1 — pron. merlan £ 
 
 fried. If you wish to form your taste, read over and over, un- 
 inf-1 2 vouloir * * relire 
 
 oeasingiy, the ancients. He was elected by a great majority of 
 zans-cesse ind -4 à ~- r 
 
 voices. We have laughed heartily, and have resolved 
 
 de bon cœur nous résolu 
 
 to (go on). He did w>f answer him (any thing ) : bnt 
 
 it continuer répondre ind-3 lui rien 
 
 he smiled at him, as a sign of approbation, in the kindest 
 
 ind-3 * lui en * — de gracieux 2 
 
 manner. 
 •air m. 1 
 
 19 
 
 It 
 
'206- ÙF THE IRREGULAR VERBS» 
 
 In the same manner are conjugated, 
 
 -aboire to drink again s'emboire to inhibe* a technical Uni. 
 
 used in painting. 
 
 Clore, to close, has only the part, past, clos ; ind< 
 vres. je clos, tu clos, il clot ; fut. je clorai, tu cloras, &c: 
 cond. je clorais, tu clorais, &c. ; and the imp. sing. clos. 
 
 Declare, to unclose, enclore, to enclose, are defective 
 in the same tenses as clore ; but forclere, to debar, a law 
 term, is only used in the inf. and part, past, forclos. 
 
 Eclore, to be hatched, as birds, or to blow like a flow- 
 er, has only these forms ; inf. eclore ; part, past, éclos : 
 ind. près, il éclot, ils éclosent ; fut. il éclora, ils éclo- 
 ront ; cond. il éclorait, ils écloraient ; and the subj. près, 
 qu'il éclose, qu'ils éclosent. But its compound tenses 
 which are formed with être, are much used. 
 
 Conclure, to conclude. 
 
 Part. près, concluant. Past, conclu. 
 
 End. près, conclus, conclus, conclut, conclu-ons, — ez, — ent. 
 (mperf. concluais. Prêt, conclus. Fut. conclurai. 
 Gond. conclurais. Imper, conclus. Subj. près, conclue. 
 
 ïmperf. conclusse. 
 
 N.B. Exclure, to exclude, is conjugated like con- 
 clure, except that its participle past is either exclu, or ex 
 dus. 
 
 EXERCISE ON BOIRE, CLORE, &c. 
 
 Seated under the shade of palm-trees, they were milking 
 Assis à art. palmier pi. * ind-2 
 
 •heir goats and ewes, and merrily dr 
 
 chèvre f. pi. pron. brebis f. pi. joie2 ind-2 1 
 
 that nectar, which (was renewed) every day. Should 
 
 m. se renouveler ind-2 art. pi. * 
 
 'they not have drunk with ice ? This window does not 
 
 zul 2 a art. f. f. 
 
 mut well; when you have made some alterations (in it) 
 
 ind-8 r f paration f. pi. y 
 
 it will shut better. He had scarcely do rd his eyes, Wnen 
 
 f. wdeux. àptine ind-6 * art. que 
 
 the noise which they made at his door, awoke him. 
 
 que on ind-3 à Mir ind-3 
 
 Have they not enclosed the suburbs within the ci' 
 
 on faubourg m. pi. 
 
OF THE IRREGULAR VERBS 20? 
 
 Croire. , to believe. 
 
 Pari. près» croyant. Past, cru. 
 
 Isd. près, crois, crois, croit, croyons, croyez, croient. 
 
 Imperf. croyais. Prtt. crus. Fut. croirai. Coa*d. croirais. 
 
 Imper, crois, croie, croyons, croyez, croient. 
 
 Sobj. près, croie, croies, croie, croyions, croyiez, croient. 
 
 Imperf. crusse. 
 
 It has no derivative but accroire, which is only used 
 with faire, as, faire accroire, or en faire accroire, to im- 
 pose upon credulity ; and s* en faire accroire, to be self- 
 conceited. 
 
 Poindre (upon joindre), v. a. to sting, and v. n. to 
 shoot forth, to dawn, has, besides the inf. poindre, the 
 ind. près, il point, and \hefut. il poindra. 
 
 Will you enclose your park with a wall, or a hedge" 
 
 parc de mur m. pr. haie f 
 
 Pat the egg* of those silk- worms in the sun, 
 
 mettes œuf. m. pi. ver-à-soie m. pi. à soleil m 
 
 that they may hatch. Those flowers just blown, 
 
 sub-1 nouvellement 
 
 -pread the sweetest fragrance. When did they conclude thir 
 réprandre doux parfum m. ind-4 
 
 treaty ? His enemies managed so well, that he was unani- 
 traité m. faire ind-3 ind-3 unani- 
 
 mously excluded from the company» Did you think rae 
 
 mement compagnie f. croire ind-1 
 
 capable of so black an act ? He possesses some kind oi 
 
 noir 2 trait m. 1. avoir espèce 
 
 knowledge ; but (not so much as he thinks.) 
 savoir il s'en faire trop accroire. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS 
 
 UPON THE TWO FOLLOWING TABLES. 
 
 The following Tables, which exhibit at one view ali 
 the primitive tenses, both of the regular and irregular 
 verbs, and most of the defective, with reference to the 
 pages, where the other tenses are to be found, will, it is 
 presumed, prove useful to those who will consult thenv 
 
 <t 
 
208 
 
 TABLE OF THE PRIMITIVE TENSES OF THE FOUR ! 
 REGULAR CONJUGATIONS. 
 
 IN FIN. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 I 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Present. 1 Present. \ Past. I Present. \ Prêter. JJef. 
 
 Parler. 
 
 FIRST CONJUGATION, 
 r Harlan*. } Parle. | Je parle. \ I 
 
 Page' 
 I Hi Ï 
 
 Punir. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 Je punis. 
 
 1 
 
 151 
 
 Punissant 
 
 Puni. 
 
 Je punis. 
 
 Sentir. 
 
 Sentant. 
 
 Senti.. 
 
 Je sens. 
 
 Je senti*. 
 
 151 
 
 Mem ir. 
 
 Mentant. 
 
 Menti. 
 
 Je mens. 
 
 Je mentis. 
 
 
 Se repentir. 
 
 Se repentant. 
 
 Repenti. 
 
 Je me repent. 
 
 Je me repentis. 
 
 167 
 
 Para'?-. 
 
 Partant. 
 
 Parti. 
 
 Je pars. 
 
 Je parti*. 
 
 
 Sortir. 
 
 Sortant. 
 
 Sorti. 
 
 Je sors. 
 
 Je sorti*. 
 
 
 Dormir. 
 
 Dormant. 
 
 Dormi. 
 
 Je dors. 
 
 Je dormis. 
 
 
 j^faui 
 
 Servant, 
 
 Servi, 
 
 Je ser*. 
 
 Je servis. 
 
 
 i Ouvrir. 
 
 Ouvrant. 
 
 Ouvert. 
 
 j ouvre. 
 
 j ouv ru. 
 
 15* 
 
 1 Couvrir. 
 
 Couvrant. 
 
 Couvert. 
 
 Je couvre. 
 
 Je couvris. 
 
 
 | Offrir. 
 
 Offrant. 
 
 Offert." 
 
 J' offre. 
 
 J'offris. 
 
 
 f Souffrir. 
 
 Souffrant. 
 
 Soufftrt. 
 
 Je souffre. 
 
 Je souffris. 
 
 
 Tenir. 
 
 Tenant. 
 
 Tenu. 
 
 Je tien*. 
 
 Je tins. 
 
 151 
 
 Venir 
 
 Venant. 1 Venu. 
 
 Je viens. 
 
 Je vins. 
 
 
 'Recevoir, i 
 
 THI 
 
 Recelant. 
 
 RD CONJU 
 
 GATION. 
 
 Je reçus. 
 
 155 
 
 Reçu. 
 
 Je reçois. 1 
 
 Devoir. 
 
 Devant. \ Du. 
 
 Je do is. 1 
 
 Je dus. j 
 
 
 Répandre 
 
 FOU 
 
 RTH- CONJ 
 
 UGATION 
 
 Je répandis. 
 
 
 Répandant. 
 
 Répandu. 
 
 Je répands. 
 
 Rendr». 
 
 Rendant. 
 
 Rendu. 
 
 Je rends. 
 
 Je rendis. 
 
 1G9 
 
 Fondre. 
 
 Fondant. 
 
 Fondu. 
 
 Je fonds. 
 
 Je Tondis. 
 
 
 Répondre. 
 
 Répondant. 
 
 Répondu. 
 
 Je réponds. 
 
 Je répondis. 
 
 
 Tondre. 
 
 Tondant. 
 
 Tondu. 
 
 Je tonds. 
 
 Je tondis. 
 
 
 Perdre. 
 
 Perdait. 
 
 Perdu. 
 
 Je perds. 
 
 Je perdiV. 
 
 
 Mordre. 
 
 Mordant. 
 
 Mordu. 
 
 Je mords. 
 
 Je mordis. 
 
 
 Tordre. 
 
 Tordant. 
 
 Tordu. 
 
 Je tords. 
 
 Je tordis. 
 
 
 Plaire. 
 
 Plaisant. 
 
 Flu. 
 
 Je plow. 
 
 Je plu*. 
 
 160 
 
 Taire. 
 
 Taisant. 
 
 Tu. 
 
 Je t it's. 
 
 Je tus. 
 
 
 Paraître. 
 
 raraiisan.'. 
 
 Paru. 
 
 Je parais. 
 
 Je parus. 
 
 160 
 
 Croître. 
 
 Croissant. 
 
 Cru. 
 
 Je crois. 
 
 Je crus. 
 
 
 Connaître. 
 
 Connaissant. 
 
 Connu. 
 
 Je connais. 
 
 Je connus. 
 
 
 Repaître. 
 
 Repaissant. 
 
 
 Je repais. 
 
 Je repwrf. 
 
 
 Réduire. 
 
 Réduisant. 
 
 Réduit. 
 
 Je rîduis. 
 
 Je réduisis 
 
 160 
 
 Instruire. 
 
 Instruisant. 
 
 Instruit. 
 
 J' instruis. 
 
 J 1 instruisis. 
 
 
 Crnhidre. 
 
 C rainant. 
 
 Craint. 
 
 Je crains. 
 
 Je craignis. 
 
 
 Peindre. 
 
 Peignant. 
 
 Peint. 
 
 Je peins. 
 
 Je peign is. 
 
 
 J Joindre. 
 
 Joignant! 
 
 Joint. 
 
 Je joint. 
 
 Je joignis. 
 
 160 
 
20Ô. 
 
 PRIMITIVE TENSES OF THE IRREGULAR WITH 
 
 
 SOME DEFECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 
 INFIN. | 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Present. \ 
 
 Present. j Past. j 
 
 Present, J Prêter. Def. , 
 
 
 Fl 
 
 RST CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 Page 
 
 
 
 Aller. 
 
 Allant. | Allé. 
 
 Je vais. | J' allai. 
 
 | 180 
 
 Fleurir. S 
 Haïr. 
 
 SECOND CONJUGATION. 
 
 
 132 
 
 Fleurissant. 
 Florissant. 
 
 > Fleuri. 
 Haï. 
 
 Je fleuris. 
 
 Je fleuris. 
 
 Haïssant. 
 
 Je haï£. 
 
 Je haïs. 
 
 183 
 
 Gésir.* 
 
 Gisant. 
 
 
 Hgit. 
 
 
 133 
 
 Bouillir. 
 
 Bouillant. 
 
 Bouilli. 
 
 le bous. 
 
 Je bouillis. 
 
 183 
 
 E bouillir. 
 
 
 Ebouil'L 
 
 
 
 133 
 
 Courir. 
 
 Courant. 
 
 Couru. 
 
 Je cours. 
 
 Je courus. 
 
 183 
 
 Faillir. 
 
 Faillant.* 
 
 Failli. 
 
 Je faux.* 
 
 Je faillis. 
 
 184 
 
 Défaillir. 
 
 
 Défailli. 
 
 Nous défaillons 
 
 Je défailUs. 
 
 184 
 
 Fuir. 
 
 Fuyant. 
 
 Fui 
 
 Je fuis. 
 
 Je fuis. 
 
 135 
 
 Mourir. 
 
 Mourant. 
 
 Mort. 
 
 Je mours. 
 
 Je mourus. 
 
 185 
 
 Acquérir. 
 
 Acquérant. 
 
 Acquis. 
 
 J'acquiers. 
 
 J' acquis. 
 
 186 
 
 Conquérir. 
 
 Conquérant. 
 
 Conquis. 
 
 Je conquiers. 
 
 Je conquis. 
 
 186 
 
 Ouïr. 
 
 Oyant.* 
 
 Ouï. 
 
 
 J' ouïs. 
 
 186 
 
 Vêtir. 
 
 Vêtant. 
 
 Vêtu. 
 
 Je vêts. 
 
 Je vêtis. 
 
 136 
 
 Revêtir. 
 
 Revêtant. 
 
 Revêtu. 
 
 Je revêts. 
 
 Je revêtis. 
 
 186 
 
 Cueillir. 
 
 Cueillant. 
 
 Cueilli. 
 
 Je cueille. 
 
 Je cueillis. 
 
 187 
 
 Saillir. 
 
 Saillant. 
 
 Sailli. 
 
 Il saiile. 
 
 Il saillit. 
 
 187 
 
 Tressaillir. 
 
 Tressaillant. 
 
 Tressailli. 
 
 Je tressaille. 
 
 Je tressaillis. 
 
 18.9 
 
 Avoir. 
 
 TI 
 
 IIRD CONJ 
 
 UGATION. 
 
 
 i 
 
 « 
 
 i 
 
 128 
 
 Ayant. 
 
 Eu. 
 
 J'aî. 
 
 J' eus. 
 
 Ravoir. 
 
 
 
 
 
 189 
 
 Choir. 
 
 
 Chu. 
 
 
 
 189 
 
 Déchoir. 
 
 
 Déchu. 
 
 Je déchois. 
 
 Je déchus. 
 
 189 
 
 Echoir. 
 
 Echéant. 
 
 Echu. 
 
 Il échoit 
 
 J' échus. 
 
 139" 
 
 Falloir. 
 
 
 Fallu. 
 
 Il faut. 
 
 Il fallut. 
 
 177 
 
 Mouvoir. 
 
 Mouvant. 
 
 Mu. 
 
 Je meus. 
 
 Je mus. 
 
 190 
 
 Premouvoir. 
 
 
 Promu. 
 
 
 Je promus.* 
 
 190 
 
 Pleuvoir. 
 
 Pleuvant. 
 
 Plu. 
 
 Il pleut. 
 
 Il plut. 
 
 190 
 
 Pouvoir. 
 
 Pouvant. 
 
 Pu. 
 
 Je puis. 
 
 Je pus. 
 
 191 
 
 Savoir. 
 
 Sachant. 
 
 Su. 
 
 Je sais. 
 
 Jésus. 
 
 191 
 
 Seoir* 
 
 Seyant. 
 
 
 Il sied. 
 
 
 191 
 
 Seoir* 
 
 Séant. 
 
 Sis. 
 
 
 
 191 
 
 Asseoir. 
 
 Asseyant. 
 
 Assis. 
 
 V assieds. 
 
 J' assis. 
 
 192 
 
 Surseoir. 
 
 
 Sursis. 
 
 Je sursois. 
 
 Je sursis. 
 
 193 
 
 Voir. 
 
 Voyant. 
 
 Vu. 
 
 Je vois. 
 
 Je vis. 
 
 192 
 
 Prévoir. 
 
 Prévoyant. 
 
 Prévu. 
 
 Je prévois. 
 
 Je prévis. 
 
 193 
 
 Pouvoir. 
 
 Pourvoyant. 
 
 Pourvu. 
 
 Je pourvois. 
 
 Je pourvus. 
 
 193 
 
 Valoir. 
 
 Valant." 
 
 Valu. 
 
 Je vaux. 
 
 Je valus. 
 
 193 
 
 Vouloir. 
 
 Voulant. 
 
 Voulu. 
 
 Je veux. 
 
 Je voulus. 
 
 193 
 
 ? 
 
 i. B.. The forms Tiarked witl 
 
 i an asterisk a re obsolete 
 
 
 
 
 19* 
 
 
 
 
210 
 
 j "INFÏN. ~ 
 
 ) PARTICIPLES. 
 
 j INDICATIVE. 
 
 
 Prêtent. 
 
 j Present. 
 
 | Past. 
 
 Present. 
 
 ! Preterit. 
 
 ! 
 
 FOI 
 
 r RTH CONJUGATION. 
 
 Page 
 
 
 
 \ Soudre. 
 
 Solvant.* 
 
 
 
 
 194 
 
 \ Résoudre. 
 
 Résolvant;. 
 
 Résou?, résolu. 
 
 Je résous. 
 
 Je résolus. 
 
 194 
 
 Absoudre. 
 
 Absolvant. 
 
 Absous. 
 
 J' absous. 
 
 
 194 
 
 Dissoudre. 
 
 Dissolvant. 
 
 Dissou--. 
 
 Je dissous. 
 
 
 195 
 
 Coudre. 
 
 Cousant. 
 
 Cousu. 
 
 Je couds. 
 
 Je cousis. 
 
 195 
 
 Sourdre. 
 
 
 
 Il sourd. 
 
 
 195 
 
 j {Mettre. 
 
 Mettant. 
 
 Mis. 
 
 Je mets. 
 
 Je mis. 
 
 195 
 
 Moudre. 
 
 Moulant. 
 
 Moulu. 
 
 Je mouds. 
 
 Je moulus. 
 
 195 
 
 ! Prendre. 
 
 Prenant. 
 
 Pris. 
 
 Je prends. 
 
 Je pris. 
 
 196 
 
 | Rompre. 
 
 Rompant. 
 
 Rompu 
 
 Je romps. 
 
 Je rompis. 
 
 197 
 
 ! Suivre. 
 
 Suivant. 
 
 Suivi. 
 
 Je suis. 
 
 Je suivis. 
 
 198 
 
 : S'ensuivre. 
 
 S 'ensuivant. 
 
 Ensuivi 
 
 ïl s'ensuit. 
 
 Il s'ensuivit. 
 
 19? 
 
 1 Vaincre. 
 
 Vainquant. 
 
 Vainoi 
 
 Je vaïcco.* 
 
 Je vainquis. 
 
 19G - 
 
 Battre. 
 
 Battant. 
 
 Battu. 
 
 Je bats. 
 
 Je batti;. 
 
 199 
 
 Etre. 
 
 Etant. 
 
 Eté. 
 
 Je suis. 
 
 Je fus. 
 
 134 
 
 Vivre. 
 
 Vivant. 
 
 Vécu 
 
 Je vis. 
 
 Je vécus. 
 
 199 
 
 j Braire. 
 
 
 
 Il brait- 
 
 
 200 
 
 j Faire. 
 
 Faisant. 
 
 Fait. 
 
 Je fais. 
 
 Je fis. 
 
 200 
 
 j Traire, 
 
 Trayant. 
 
 Traiï. 
 
 Je trais. 
 
 
 -201 
 
 i Naître. 
 
 Naissant. 
 
 Né. 
 
 Je nais. 
 
 Je naquis. 
 
 201 
 
 J Renaître. 
 
 Renaissant. 
 
 
 Je renais. 
 
 J e renaquis.* 
 
 201 
 
 1 Paître. 
 
 Paissant. 
 
 Pu. 
 
 Je pais. 
 
 
 202 
 
 | Bruire. 
 
 Bruyant. 
 
 
 
 
 302 
 
 ! Luire. 
 
 Luisant. 
 
 Lui. 
 
 Je luis. 
 
 
 20: 
 
 î Nuire. 
 
 Nuisant. 
 
 Nui. 
 
 Je nuis. 
 
 Je nuisis. 
 
 20 J 
 
 Confire. 
 Suffire. 
 
 Confisant. 
 
 Confit. 
 
 Je confis. 
 
 Je confis. 
 
 203 
 
 Suffisant. 
 
 Suffi. 
 
 Je suffis. 
 
 Je suffis. 
 
 203 
 
 Circoncire. 
 
 Circoncisant. 
 
 Circoncis. 
 
 Je circoncis. 
 
 Je circoncis. 
 
 203 
 
 Dire. 
 
 Médire. 
 
 Disant. 
 
 Dit. 
 
 Je dis. 
 
 Je dis. 
 
 203 
 
 Médisant. 
 
 Médit. 
 
 Je médis. 
 
 Je médis. 
 
 203 
 
 Maudire. 
 
 Maudissant. 
 
 Maudit. 
 
 Je uaudis. 
 
 Je maudis. 
 
 203 
 
 Ecrire. 
 
 Ecrivant. 
 
 Ecrit. 
 
 J' écris. 
 
 J' écrivis. 
 
 204 
 
 Lire. 
 
 Lisant. 
 
 Lu. 
 
 Je lis. 
 
 Je lus. 
 
 204 
 
 Rire. 
 
 Riant. 
 
 Ri. 
 
 Je ris. 
 
 Je ris. 
 
 205 
 
 Frire. 
 
 
 Frit. 
 
 Je fris. 
 
 
 205 
 
 Boire. 
 
 Buvant. 
 
 Bu. 
 
 Je bois. 
 
 Je bus. 
 
 205 
 
 Clore, clorre. 
 
 
 Clos. 
 
 Je clos. 
 
 
 206 
 
 Conclure. 
 
 Concluant. 
 
 Conclu. 
 
 Je conclus. 
 
 Je conclus. 
 
 206 
 
 Exclure. 
 
 Excluant. 
 
 Exclu, or exclus. 
 
 J' exclus. 
 
 J' exclus. 
 
 206 
 
 Croire. 
 
 Croyant. 
 
 Cru. 
 
 Je crois. 
 
 Je crus. 
 
 207 
 
 Poindre. 
 
 
 
 Il point. 
 
 
 207 
 
 N, B. Tin 
 
 î derivatives, v 
 
 vhich are not in th 
 
 is Table, will 
 
 be found with 
 
 
 
 the primitives 
 
 , to which we hav 
 
 ï given réfère 
 
 nces. 
 
 
OF THE PREPOSITIONS?. 21 1 
 
 CHAP. VI. <f 
 
 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Prepositions, which are so called, from being pre 
 fixed to the nouns which they govern, serve to connect 
 words with one another, and to show the relation be- 
 tween them. Thus, in this phrase, le fruit de V arbre, 
 the fruit of the tree, de expresses the relation between 
 fruit and arbre. Likewise in this, utile à Vhomme. 
 useful to man ; à forms the relation between the noun 
 homme and the adjective utile. De and à are preposi- 
 tions, and the word to which they are prefixed, is called 
 their regimen. 
 
 There are difFerent kinds of prepositions. 
 
 Some are used — to denote place, as : 
 Chez. II est chez-lui, he is at hpme. 
 Dans. // se promène dans le jardin, he is walking in 
 
 the garden. 
 jIevant. // est toujours devant mes yeux, he is always 
 
 before my eyes. 
 Derrière. // ne regarde jamais derrière lui, he never 
 
 looks behind him. 
 Parmi. Que de fous parmi les hommes ! how many fools 
 
 among men ! 
 Sous. La taupe vit sous terre, the mole iives under 
 
 ground. 
 Sub. Il a le chapeau sur la tête, he has his hat on (his 
 
 head.) 
 Vers. D aimant se tourne vers le nord, the loadstone 
 
 points towards the north. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THESE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 We find less real happiness in an elevated condition than in 
 On de 2 bonheur 1 2 f 1 
 
 •a middling state. One is never truly peaceful but a 
 
 moyen 2 1 véritablement tranquille que 
 
 home. He walked before me to serve me as a guide, 
 soi marcher " pour de * 
 
 'There was a delightful grove behind his house, Amoirj^ 
 ind-2 2 bosquet m. 1. 
 
22â OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Some — to mark order, as : 
 
 Ayant. La nouvelle est arrivée avant le courrier, the 
 news is come before the courier. 
 
 A.PRES. // est trop vain pour marcher après les autres : . 
 he is too proud to walk after other people. 
 
 Entre. Elle a son enfant entre les bras, she holds hev 
 child in (for between) her arms. 
 
 Depuis. Depuis la création jusqu'à nous, from the crea- 
 tion to the present time. 
 
 Des. Dès son enfance, from his infancy ; dès sa source, 
 from its source, f 
 
 SomQ — to denote union, as : 
 Avec. U faut savoir avec qui on se lie, we ought U 
 know with whom we associate. 
 
 (so many) different nations, there is not one that has not h 
 
 tant de 2 1 y en avoir subj-1 
 
 eUgious worship. Nature displays her riches with mag 
 
 2 culte m. 1 art. déployer 
 
 nificence under the torrid zone. Eternal snows 
 
 torrideS f. 1 de art. 3 5 f. pi. 4 on t 
 are to be seen) on the summit of the Alps. Towards the north 
 ?ojr ind-1 2 sommet 
 
 nature assumes a gloomy and wild aspect. 
 irt. triste 2 sauvage 3 aspect m. 1. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 We (were up) before day -light, (in order to) enjoy 
 
 se lever ind-6 art. * pour " dr 
 
 ;lie magnificent spectacle of the rising sun. After such great 
 
 magnifique 2 — m. 1 levant 2 1 de si 
 
 faults, it only remained for us to repair them (a- 
 
 faute f. pi. ne rester ind-2 * que réparer 
 
 well as we could). Between those two mountains runs a deep 
 de notre mieux est profond S 
 
 hollow road. Many very astonishing event* 
 
 el creux 2 chemin m. 1 * de art. 2 4 3 
 
 ♦ have taken place < within these ten year.-. JFromray earlier 
 
 il se passer ind-4 1 depuis * art. U 
 
 nfancy I have had an abhorrence of lying. 
 
 * horreur wt..mensengt m 
 
OP THE PREPOSITIONS, 
 
 Durant. Durant la guerre, during the war : durant <f 
 
 Vêlé, during the summer. 
 Pendant. Pendant l'hiver, in winter ; pendant la 
 
 paix, in time of peace. This preposition denotes a 
 
 duration more limited than durant. 
 Outre. Outre des qualités aimables, il faut encore, &c. 
 
 besides amiahle qualities, there ought still, &c, 
 Suivant. Je me déciderai suivant les circonstances : 
 
 I shall determine according to circumstances. 
 Selon. Le sage se conduit selon les maximes de la 
 
 raison, a wise man acts according to the dictates ot : 
 
 reason.]; 
 
 Some — to express opposition, as : 
 Contre. Je plaide contre lui, I plead against him. 
 Malgré. Il Pa fait malgré moi, he has done it in 
 
 spite of me? 
 Nonobstant. Nonobstant ce qu'on lui a dit, notwith- 
 standing what has been said to him.1T 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 With wit, politeness, and some (readiness tc 
 
 de art. pr. art. peu de 'prévenance 
 
 oblige), one generally succeeds in the world. We are fit 
 
 réussir on propria 
 
 for meditation during winter. (Jn the course of) that siege 
 «art. f. pendant siégem. 
 
 the commandant of the city made some very successful 
 
 ind-3 de art. hzureuxV. 
 
 sallies. Besides the exterior advantages of figure and 
 
 sortie f. pt. 1 2 1 art. 
 
 the graces of deportment, she possesses an excellent heart, i 
 
 art. maintien m. avoir 2 1 
 
 correct judgment, and a sensible soul. Always act 
 sain 2 jugement 1 2 1 se conduire 
 
 according to the maxims which I have given you. 
 
 * f. pi. inculquer f. pi. 
 
 !T EXERCISE. 
 We cannot long act (contrary to) our own character; 
 
 savoir cond-1 agir contre * 
 
 notwithstanding all the pains we take to disguise it, it 
 
 que pour 
 
 «hews itself, and betrays us on many occasions. In 
 
 *e montrer trahir en bien de art. 
 
214 OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Some — to express privation, or separation, as : 
 
 Sans. Des troupes sans chef, troops without com- 
 manders. 
 
 Excepte. Excepté quelques malheureux, except some 
 wretches. 
 
 Hors. Tout est perdu hors V honneur 9 all is lost save 
 honour. 
 
 Hormis. Tous sont entrés hormis mon frère, they are 
 all come in except my brotherj. 
 
 Some — to denote the end, as : 
 Envers. // est charitable envers les pauvres, he is cha 
 
 ritable to the poor. 
 Touchant. // a écrit touchant cette a {faire, he has 
 
 written respecting that business. 
 Pour. Jl travaille pour le bien public, he labours for 
 
 the public good.1T 
 
 /ain we dissemble ; in spite of ourselves, we are known a 
 
 * avoir beau faire on nous connait à 
 
 Jast. 
 la longue. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 {Had it not been for) your care, I should have been ig 
 sans pi. un 
 
 norant all my life. All the philosophers of antiquity, 
 
 art. 
 except a few, have held the world to be eternal. A! 
 
 très-petit nombre croire * * 
 
 laid down their arms, except two regiments, who pre 
 
 mettre bas * art. 
 ferred (making their way) through the enemy. Even 
 
 se faire jour au- travers de pi. 
 
 thing is absurd and ridiculous in that work, except a chaptei 
 or two. 
 
 If EXERCISE. 
 
 I ]iave written to you concerning that business, in which 1 
 
 à laquelle 
 
 take the most lively interest ; and as I know your benevo 
 
 vif connaître bitnveil 
 
 îence towards the unfortunate, I (make not the least doubt; 
 
 t-miref. malheur c ne douter nulle 
 
OP THE PREPOSITIONS, *Àl% 
 
 Others — to mark the oause and means, as; jf 
 
 Par. // Pa fléchi par ses prières, he has softened him 
 
 by his entreaties. 
 Moyennant. // réussira moyennant vos avis, he will 
 
 succeed by means of your counsels. I 
 
 Attendu. // ne peut partir, attendu les vents contraires, 
 
 he cannot sail on account of contrary winds. J 
 
 The use of the prepositions, — à, — de, — en, is very 
 extensive. 
 
 \ is generally used to express several relations, as des- 
 tination, tendency, place, time, situation, &c. being 
 often a substitute for various other prepositions : 
 ex. : — destination -to : aller à Londres, to go to Lon- 
 don — Tendency -to, toward: courir à sa perte, to 
 hasten to one's ruin. — Aim -at, for : aspirer à la 
 gloire, to aspire to glory. — Residence -at, in : être à 
 Rome, to be at Rome. — Time -at ; à midi, at twelve 
 o'clock. — Concern -on: à ce sujet, on this subject. — 
 Manner -with : supplier à mains jointes, to entreat 
 earnestly. —Means -with : peindre à V huile, to paint 
 in, or with oil ; -with : bas à-trois-fds, three thread- 
 stockings, that is, with three threads. — Situation -Gt* 
 
 lhatyou (will carefully attend) (to it), (not so much) for the 
 
 ne donner tous vos soins subj-1 y moins 
 satisfaction of obliging me, as for the pleasure of justifying 
 
 inf-1 justifier inf-1 
 
 innocence and confounding calumny, 
 art. pr. confondre art. f. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 Is there any man that has never been softened by tears 
 aucun subj-1 fléchir art. 
 
 or disarmed by submission ? . Through the pre caution ^ 
 
 ni désarmer art. 
 
 which we took, we avoided the rocks of that dangerous 
 
 mit ind-3 ind-3 écucil m. pi. 2 
 
 toast. Owing to the bad state of my father's health, I shall 
 côte f. 1 2 1 
 
 iîoi travel this year. 
 voyager année (. 
 
&16 OP THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 *mth : être à son aise-, to be at ease. — Purpose for : une 
 table à manger, a dining fable. — Suitableness -for, to : 
 homme à réussir, a man likely to succeed : — Desert : 
 crime à ne pas pardonner, a crime not to be forgiven, &c 
 
 De is generally used to express separation, extraction, 
 possession, appartenance, cause, shift, result, &c. and 
 supplies the place of several prepositions, as — from : 
 je viens de France, I come from France ; d'un bout 
 à-V autre, from one end to the other. — Of: le palais du 
 roi, the palace of the king; les facultés de Vâme, the 
 faculties *f the soul ; un homme à' esprit, a man of wit. 
 In a partitive sense — of : moitié de, quart de, &c. the 
 half of, the fourth of, &c. : it is used for par — by : il 
 est aimé de tour le monde, he is beloved by every body : 
 for — through, or by, &c. ; mourir de faim, de soif, to 
 die of hunger, of thirst: — on, upon, with : vivre de 
 fruits, to live upon fruit. — On account of, or for : sau- 
 ter de joie, to leap for joy. IT 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION à. 
 
 Fathers ! give good counsels, and still better 
 
 de encore 3 pr. meilleur i 
 
 .^samples to your children. A good minister only aims 
 
 2 ne aspirer 
 
 at the glory of serving his country well. When we were 
 'pie à inf-12 pays 3 1 ind-2 
 
 in, the country, we devoted the morning to 
 
 i campagne f. consacrer ind-2 matinee f. art. 
 
 study « we walked at noon, and at three or four 
 
 sa promener ind-2 midi 
 
 o'clock we went a bunting, or fishing. Michael 
 
 heure pi. ind-2 art chasse f pr nri.pèchti. Michel- 
 
 'Angelo has painted a great deal) in fresco. It is a bed with 
 — Ange beaucoup art. fresque f. ce lit m. 
 
 ivory posts and mahogany feet. That man, with his 
 colonne d'ivoire pr. pied d acajou * art. 
 
 gloomy looks and surly behaviour, seems 
 
 sombre 2 regard m. 1 pr. art. brusque 2 maintien m. 1 nt semble 
 nt only to serve as a scarecrow. 
 propre que de * épouvantait. 
 
ÔP THE PREPOSITIONS. 217 
 
 En serves to mark the relations of time, place, situa- 
 tion, &c. and is variously expressed, as, c'était en 
 hiver, it was during winter ; être en Angleterre, to be 
 in England ; aller en Italie, to go into Italy ; elle est 
 en bonne santé, she is in good health ; il vaut mieuoz 
 être en paix, qu'en guerre, it is better to be at 
 peace than at war ; il Va fait en haine de lui, he did 
 it out of hatred to him, &c. \ 
 
 IT EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION de. 
 
 I come from London, where I have spent a week very 
 où passé huit jours 
 
 dgreeably. From one end of the horizon to the other, the 
 
 bout m. m. 
 
 sky was covered with thick black clouds. 
 
 ciel m. épais 2 et noir 3 nuage m. pi. 1 
 
 The marble of Paros is not finer than that which we get 
 
 qui nous vient 
 from Carrara. Montaigne, Mad. de Sévigné, and la Fontaine, 
 
 Carrare. 
 were writers of truly original genius. One half 
 
 înd-2 de art. écrivain un 2 3 1 moitié f. 
 
 of the terrestrial globe is covered with water, and above a 
 terrestre 2 globe m . 1 plus de 
 
 (third part) of the rest is uninhabited, either through extreme 
 tiers m. inhabité ou par un 2 
 
 heat, or through excessive cold. In that happy 
 
 chaleur f . 1 un = 2 froid m. 1 
 
 retreat, we lived on the milk of our flocks, and the delicious 
 asile m. ind-2 brebis pr. 2 
 
 fruits of our orchards. 
 1 verger m. pi. 
 
 ; EXERCISE ON THE PREPOSITION en. 
 
 He had for a (long while) lived in France ; the 
 
 3 * depuis 1 * long-temps 2 vivre ind-2 
 troubles which agitated that fine kingdom obliged him to 
 
 ind-4 royaume m. ind-4 de 
 
 retire to Switzerland, whence he soon after (set off) 
 
 se retirer Suisse d'où 3 1 2 se rendre ind-4 
 
 for Italy. We were at peace, and enjoyed all 
 
 ind-2 pron. en goûter ind-2 art. 
 
 its blessings, when ambition rekindled the flames of 
 
 I * charme m. art. rallumer in d-3 feus. 
 
 war, and forced us to put our frontiers in a state 
 art. ind-3 de mettre frontière f. pi. * 
 
 20 
 
21 S Off THE ADVER£> 
 
 ^ CHAP. VIL 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 The adverb, is a word which accompanies verbs, an 
 jectives, or even other adverbs, to espress their mam 
 aer, or circumstances. 
 
 Remark. There are adjectives which 'Are some- 
 times used as adverbs, as, il chante juste, he sings 
 well ; elle chante faux, she sings out of tune ; ils ne 
 voient pas clair, they do not see clear ; cette fleur sent 
 bon, this flower has a good smell, &c. The adjec : 
 lives, juste, faux, clair, and bon, here supply the place 
 of abverbs. 
 
 Adverbs are of different kinds. 
 
 The most numerous are those which express manner, 
 and are formed from adjectives by the following method : 
 
 Rule I. When the adjective ends, in the mascu- 
 line, with a vowel the adverb is, formed by adding 
 ment ; as, modeste -ment, modestly ; polumenl, politely : 
 nîi-ment, ingenuously, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. Impuni makes impur, ment, and traître. 
 ,'TJreusement. 
 
 The following six take e close before -mcnt,tmt€\\o 
 of the e mute in the adjective. 
 
 aveuglément blindly conformément conformably 
 
 Commodément con énormément enormously 
 
 - amodëment incomirtodiotlsly cpiniàirémcnt ôb^inatcly 
 
 Observe that the adverbs, 
 :nent foolishly bellement 
 
 i lollement effeminately nouvellement 
 
 o be considered a? coming from the a< ^, bel. 
 
 rf, and accordingly belong to the folio 
 
 Rule IL When (he adjecth nso-' 
 
 mint, in the masculine, the adverb is formed from the 
 feminine termination, by adding ment ; 
 
 The savage is almost continually at v. 
 prcj'/nc te 
 remain at H? has acted, on ihi' like 
 
 en r 
 peat wan 
 
OF THE ADVERB. 219 
 
 grandement, greatly ; franc, franchement, frankly: 
 
 naïf, naïvement, artlessly, &c. 
 
 Exceptions. 1st. Gentil, makes gentiment, prettily. 
 
 2nd. The following eight adverbs, 
 communément commonly importunément importunately 
 
 l'onfuséraent confusedly obscurément obscurely 
 
 diffusément diffusedly précisément precisely 
 
 expressément expressly profond ment deeply 
 
 lake before ment the é close instead of the e mute, in 
 the feminine of the adjectives from which they are 
 derived.,?-- 
 
 Re3i. The six following adverbs are not derived 
 from adjectives. 
 
 comment how profusément lavishly 
 
 incessamment presently nuitamment by night 
 
 notamment especially sciemment knowingly 
 
 3rd. Adjectives ending in -nt, form their adverbs by 
 changing -nt into -mment, as consta-nt, consta-mment, 
 constantly ; éloque-nt, éloque-mment. Except lent and 
 présent, the only two of this class, that follow the se- 
 cond general rule, making lentement and présentement. 
 
 Rem. Most adverbs denoting manner, and a few 
 others, have the three degrees of comparison, as, pro- 
 fondément, aussi, plus, or moins profondément, fort* 
 bien, or très -profondément, and le plus profondément. 
 
 The following degrees of comparison are irregular. 
 
 POSITIVE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. 
 
 bien well mie*ix better le mieux the best 
 
 mal bad pis worse le pis the worst 
 
 peu little moins^I less le moins the least 
 
 EXERCISE ON THESE ADVERBS. 
 
 Bourdaloue and Masillon have both spoken very 
 
 Vun et Vautre 
 eloquently on evangelical truths ; but the former has prin- 
 
 art. évangélique 2 1 
 "Àpally (proposed to himself) to convince the mind ; the latter 
 
 se proposer de convaincre 
 
 has generally had in view to touch the heart. Several of 
 
 en vue de art 
 
 h "Bruyère's characters are as finely drawn as they are deli 
 ? 1 finement tracé 
 
320 
 
 OF THE ADVERB, 
 
 There are likewise various other sorts of adverbs 
 
 f 
 
 OF<> 
 
 Affirmation, 
 Consent, 
 Doubt, 
 Denial, 
 
 Order, or ' 
 Rank, * 
 
 Place, or I 
 Distance, ] 
 
 Certes, certainly : oui, yes. 
 Soit, be it so ; volontiers, willingly. 
 Peut-être, perhaps. 
 non, ne, ne-pas, ne-point, no, not,t 
 Premièrement, first ; secondement, 2dly, âcc. 
 D'abord, at first ; ensuite, après, afterwards . 
 
 auparavant, before. 
 Où, where ; ici, here ; là, there ; dc-ça, on thi- 
 side ; de là, on that side ; par-tout, even 
 where ; près, procJie, near, nigh ; loin, far 
 &€-4 
 
 lately expressed. Button is one of the best writers of the iasi 
 
 2 
 century ; he thinks deeply, describes forcibly, and expresses 
 siècle m. 1 peindre fortement 
 
 himself (with dignity.) Corneille and Racine are the two best 
 
 noblement 
 French tragic poets ; the pieces of the former are strongly. 
 
 3 tragique 2 If. 2 
 
 but incorrectly written ; those of the latter are more regularly 
 
 3 1 
 
 beautiful, more purely expressed, and more delicately conceived 
 beau pensé. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF AFFIRMATION, &c. 
 
 Certainly, either I mistake, or the business passed (in 
 
 ou se tromper se passer ind-4 
 
 :hat manner.) Do you think that he listens icillingly to this 
 
 ainsi écouter 
 
 proposal ? Have you ever read in Racine the famous scemt oi 
 
 Phaidra's delirium ? Yts, I have, and I own it is one 
 
 Phèdre 2 art. délire m. 1 la lue avouer que ce 
 
 ty£ the finest of the French theatre. Perhaps you will discover, 
 2 m. 1 
 a second perusal of la Fontaine's fable?, beauties 
 
 dans lecture f. 2 art. 1 de art. f. pi. 
 
 which you did not perceive at first. Will you have some \ 
 
 avoir aperçues à art. f. * en 
 
 No. Will you not have some 1 The man who (is willing) to 
 
 voidoir *■ 
 do good is not stopped by any obstacle. I will pay him 
 * art. arrcti aucun 
 
 what I owe, but noi allât once. 
 v our ■ lui nonyas d art. foil 
 
OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 221 
 
 ( 
 
 Ot time. < 
 
 Present. 
 Past. 
 Future. 
 Indeterminate.. 
 
 Maintenant, now ; à présent, at 
 present ; actuellement, this mo 
 merit, &c. 
 Hier, yesterday ; avant-hier, the 
 day before yesterday ; autre- 
 fois, formerly, &c. 
 C Demain, to-morrow; après-de- 
 -< main, the day after to-mor- 
 ( row, &c. 
 
 (Souvent, often ; d'ordinaire, gene- 
 rally ; quelquefois, sometimes ; 
 matin, early; tôt, soon^ tard, 
 late, &c.H 
 
 df 
 
 X EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF ORDER, &c. 
 
 We ought first to avoid doing evil ; afterwards we 
 
 * faUoir ind-1 * «Ze inf-1 art, * 
 
 m ght to do good. Read books of instruction first, and 
 
 * art. 1 art. 3 4 2 
 
 *]ien you may proceed to those of entertainment. If 
 
 * passer in d-7 agréjnent 
 
 you will go, settle first what is to be done. 
 
 vouloir s'ew aller régler auparavant falloir * * inf-1 
 
 The painter had (brought together) in the same picture several 
 
 rassembler un tableau 
 
 different objects : here, a troop of Bacchants; there, a troop of 
 
 2 1 Bacchante 
 
 young people ; here, a sacrifice ; there, a disputation of philoso- 
 
 gens dispute 
 
 pliers. Sesostris carried his conquests farther than Alexander 
 
 pousser conquête ne , 
 
 did afterwards. Call upon your cousin ; he lives near litre. 
 ind-4 depuis Passer chez loger 2 ici 1 
 
 I cannot see that, if I be not near it. When he knew 
 
 ind-1 auprès * Quand savoir ind-3 
 johcre he was, he began to fear the consequence of his 
 
 ind-2 commencer ind-3 suite 
 
 imprudence. Contemplate (at a distance) lofty mountains, if 
 
 de loin art. haut f. 
 
 you wish to behold prospects ever varied and ever new. 
 
 voidoir * découvrir de art. site m. 
 
 IF EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF TIME. 
 
 Ï have finished the work you prescribed me ; what do 
 achever que ordonner ind-6 que 
 
 20* 
 
22^ 
 
 THE A.DVEKB, 
 
 Quantity. 
 Comparison, 
 
 ( Peu, little ; assez, enough ; trop, tot 
 1 much ; beaucoup, much, ve*y much ; 
 / tant, so much, &c. 
 < Plus, more ; moins, less ; aussi, so ; au 
 l tant, as much, &ct 
 
 you wish im to do now? Formerly, education 
 
 vouloir 1 que je * subj-1 3 2 
 was neglected; it is now (very much) attended to ; it is (to 
 
 on 3 beaucoup 2 s'occuper en 1 falloir 
 foe hoped) that new views will soon (be adopted.) They 
 
 espérer on * 4 2 adopter ind-7 1 <Ze 3. Ow 
 
 grieved (at it) yesterday ; 7*010, they laugh (at it) ; 
 
 s'affliger ind-2 ew aujourd'hui rire en 
 
 lo-morrow, it will no longer (be thought) of. It is one ot 
 
 on plus penser ind-7 # 
 
 those accidents which it is sometimes impossible to avoid. The 
 
 de 
 dew incommoded me (very much) ; I shall not (in future 
 serein m. ind-4 désormais 
 
 walk so late. Rude and coarse criticisnr 
 
 se promener Malhonnête 2 grossier 3 un f. 1 
 
 generally (does greater injury) to the person who indulges 
 
 ' nuire plus scpermettn 
 
 himself in it, than to him who is the object (of it.) 
 * celle en 
 
 i EXERCISE ON THE ADVERBS OF QUANTITY, &c. 
 
 There are many people who have pretensions ; but ven 
 beaucoup de * * à 
 
 few who have such as are well founded. To embellish a 
 
 ewsub-1 * * * '* de fondé (. pi. * 2 
 subject too much, frequently betrays a want of judgment and 
 
 3 1 souvent être faute 
 
 taste. One very often experiences disgust in the midst of ' 
 
 trouver art. ennui à 
 the most riotous pleasures. She is a giddy and thoughtless 
 
 bruyant 2 1 Ce léger 2 inconséquente 
 
 woman, who speaks much and reflects Utile. She has so much 
 1 réfléchir 
 
 kindness, that it is impossible not to love her. These stuffs 
 de de étoffai 
 
 are beautiful ; consequently they are dear. This book hae 
 aussi coûter c)vrr. 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS, 
 
 
 CHAP. VHI. 
 
 OF CONJUNCTIONS, 
 
 It 
 
 I/he conjunction is a word which serves to connect 
 tyords, or sentences, as, II pleure et rit en même temps , 
 he cries and laughs at the same time; the word et 
 unites the first sentence, il pleure, with the second, ti- 
 nt Likewise in Pierre et Paul rient, Peter and Paul 
 laugh ; the word et unites these two sentences into one*- 
 Bier re rit and Paul rit. 
 
 There are different kinds of conjunctions. 
 
 To unite two words under the same affirmation, oi 
 under the same negation, et is used for the affirmation^ 
 and ni, neither, nor, for the negation. 
 
 To denote an alternative, or distinction* ou, either^ or f - 
 spiiy que, whether, or ; tantôt, sometimes, &c. 
 
 To restrict an idea ; sinon, but, except ; quoique, en* 
 r\ore que, though, although ; à moins que y unless, till.f 
 
 merit ; but there are others as good. If he has done thal^ 
 du en * de 
 
 I can do (as much.) What I say to you (about it) is mean? 
 
 en autant en * 
 
 less to give you pain, than to apprize you of the Ian - 
 pour faire de art* avertir pro 
 
 guage that is used. She is six years younger than her bro 
 pos pî. on tenir avoir de moins 
 
 titer. Nobody is more interested than you are (in the 
 
 ne * à ce que réussir 
 
 success) of the affair. You do not offer enoygh for this garden :. 
 ssubj-i 2 * 1 offrir de 
 
 %ive something more. TJie mote ignorant we are, the less we 
 
 de * 1 4 on 2 S * 
 
 (believe ourselves so.) 
 croire Vêtre. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THESE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Gold end silver are metals less useful than iron,, 
 *] I art. de art. art> 
 
924 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 To express opposition, mais, but; cependant, yet 
 nevertheless ; néanmoins, for all that, however; pour, 
 font, however, though ; toutefois, bien que, although. 
 
 To express a condition ; si, if ; sinon que, except 
 that ; pourvu que, provided that ; à condition que, on 
 condition that. 
 
 To express consent; à la vérité, indeed ; à la bonne 
 heure, very well. 
 
 For explanation ; savoir, c'est-à-dire, viz, that is to 
 say ; comme, as. j* 
 
 To listen with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to 
 * médisant * lui ce * 
 
 cherish the serpent who stings, that he may sting mor< 
 f échauffer piquer afin que plus 
 
 effectually. I like neither flatterers nor the wicked. Those 
 sûrement flatteur pi. 
 
 vvho have never suffered, know nothing ; they know neithei 
 savoir connaître 
 
 good nor evil. You may choose either a happ\ 
 art. bien pi. art. mal pi. avoir à cJioisir de 
 
 mediocrity, or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to many 
 
 f. de f. bien a\ 
 
 dangers. He is an inconsistent man ; he i* sometime? i - 
 art. Ce inconséquent 2 1 tantôt 
 
 one opinion, and sometimes of another. I have (nothing more 
 
 avis ne autre chose 
 
 (o say to you, only that I will have it so. 1 shall not yet 
 
 sinon que vouloir * encon 
 
 proceed to the perusal of the authors of the second class, unies: 
 
 lecture f. ordre ni . 
 
 jou advise me to do so. 
 
 ne conseiller subj-1 * * le 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 The serpent bites ; it is only a bite ; but from this bitr 
 ce ne que mars 
 
 ihe venom communicates itself to the whole body ; the 9landerei 
 
 venin 
 «peaks ; it is but a word ; but this word resounds ever\ 
 
 ne que parole f. retentir 
 
 cvhere, (That is) certainly a superb picture: nevertheless, \htre 
 Voilà tqMf 
 

 OF CONJUNCTIONS^ 225 
 
 To express relation, or parity; comme, as, ainsij 
 thus, so ; de même, as, just as ; ainsi que, as ; autant 
 que, as much as ; si que, as, &c. 
 
 To express augmentation, d'ailleurs, besides, more- 
 over ; outre que, besides that ; de plus, au surplus, be- 
 sides, furthermore. 
 
 For diminution, au moins, du moins, pour le moins, af 
 least. 
 
 To express the cause, or the reason of a thing ; car 9 
 for ; comme, as ; parce que, because ; puisque, since ; 
 your que, that, in order that, &c. £ 
 
 is some incorrectness in the design. Although Homer, accord- 
 
 incorrection pi. dessin 
 
 mg to. Horace, slumbers (at times), he is never- 
 
 sommeiller sub-1 quelquefois en 2 3 we 1 pas 
 thcless the first of all poets. You will succeed, provided 
 moins art. réussir pourvu 
 
 you act with vigour. We have within us two faculties 
 
 'que agir sub-1 en 
 
 that are seldom united, viz. imagination and judgment, 
 * * art. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 The most beautiful flowers last but a moment : thus hu -. 
 durer ne que art. 2 
 
 man life passes away. The (greatest part) of mankind 
 
 4 3 1 * plupart f. art. homme pL 
 
 have, UJce plants, hidden qualities that chanco 
 
 pi. art. de art. caché 2 propriété f. 1 art. hasard 
 
 discovers. Mad. de Sévigné's letters are mo- 
 
 faire découvrir 2 art. f. 1 de art. 
 
 dels of elegance, simplicity, and taste ; besides, they are 
 
 pr. pr. 
 
 replete with interesting anecdotes. Nothing is more enter 
 plein de 2 f . 1 * de amu 
 
 iaining than history; besides, nothing is more instructive. 
 sant art. . * de 
 
 Circumstances show us to others, and still 
 
 art. occasion pi. faire connaître encore 
 
 wore, to ourselves. I shall always advise you to take the 
 
 conseiller de 
 
2'26 OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 To draw a conclusion ; or, now ; done, then ; 
 conséquent, consequently ; c'est pourquoi, therefore. 
 
 To express a circumstance ; quand, lorsque, when ; 
 pendant que, tandis que, &c. whilst, • while ; tant que 
 as long as ; depuis que, ever since ; avant que, before : 
 dès-que, aussi-tôtque, d'abordque, as soon as $ à-peine, 
 hardly, scarcely ; après que, after that ; enfin, in line, 
 finally, to conclude, &c. 
 
 To express a transition ; car, for ; en effet, indeed. 
 in effect ; au reste, besides, otherwise ; à propos, nou 
 1 think of it ; après tout, after all. f 
 
 ancients as your guides ; at least, quit but seldom 
 
 pour * pr. s'écarter de ne que 
 
 (he way which they have traced for you. We must, at 
 
 route f. que tracée * * falloir 
 
 least, know the general principles of a language, before (we 
 
 2 1 langue f. de 
 
 fake upon ourselves) to teach it. Certain people bate 
 
 se mêler de * enseigner f. gens art. 
 
 grandeur, because it lowers and humiliates them, and 
 
 • — f. pron. rabaisser pron. 
 
 makes them feel the privation of the advantages which 
 que elle leur bien pi. 
 
 they covet. 
 aimer. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 We ought to love what is amiable : note, virtue i 
 
 * fauoir ind-1 * art. 
 
 rimiable; therefore we ought to love virtue. We ouçht to 
 
 * * * falloir * 
 
 practise what the Gospel commands us ; now it command? 
 
 évangile m. 
 u \ not only to forgive our enemies, but also to love 
 
 non de pardonnera encore de 
 
 them. Despréaux was extremely particular in not 
 
 de la plus grand ciacttiude d 
 coming late, iqhen he was invited to dinner ; he said thai 
 inf-1 trop ind-2 ind-2 
 
 all the faults of those who (are waited for) present themselves 
 
 défaut se faire attendre 
 
 v those who wait for them. The pride which possesses u* 
 attend post 
 
OF CONJUNCTIONS, 22? 
 
 The conjunction que is always placed between two ^ 
 
 ideas, bi f h necessary to complete the sense, as, II est 
 très -important que tout le monde soit instruit, it is of 
 great importance that every body should be well in- 
 structed. It differs from the relative pronoun que, as I 
 it can never be converted into lequel, laquelle. The 
 conjunction que is generally repeated before every 
 member of a period. IF 
 
 visible as it is, escapes our eyes, while it manifests itself 
 tout que à 
 
 to the eyes of the public, and displeases every one. 
 
 choquer art. esprit pL 
 
 After we had examined that singular effect, we (inquired into) 
 ind-5 2 1 rechercher ind-3 
 
 its causes. We had hardly done, when he came in. Pride 
 f>M ind-2 finir que entrer 
 
 counterbalances all our imperfections ; for, whether it hides 
 rontre-peser misère pi. ou cacher 
 
 them, or whether it discovers them, it glories in knowing them 
 
 si se glorifier de inf-1. 
 
 None but an Englishman can (be a judge) of Shak 
 Uni} a que qui suh]-l juger 
 
 speare*, for, what foreigner is sufficiently versed in the English 
 
 language to discover the sublime beauties of that author? 
 langue L pour 2 1 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 
 (As long as Hive), this image will be before my eyes; 
 
 tout ma vie — f . peint 
 
 and, if ever the gods permit me to reign, I shall not forge! . 
 
 faire 
 after so terrible an example, that a king is not 
 
 (pas not expressed) 
 y to govern nor happy in his power, (hut in 
 de commander et n'est puissance f. qu 
 
 proportion as} he'subject? it to . reason. I am very glad to 
 autant que soumettre art. 
 
 hat you do not love flettery, and that one (runs no risk) 
 
 ne hasard' 
 in speaking to you with sincerity. 
 
 Hf.1 " . 
 

 *^8 
 
 OP INTERJECTIONS. 
 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 OF INTEBJECTIONS. 
 
 Interjections are words, which serve to express the 
 sudden emotions of the soul. The only point to be 
 attended to, is not to place them between words which 
 custom has made inseparable. There are interjections 
 for every feeling, viz. 
 
 pain ahi, aie ! ouf ! ah ! 
 
 grief hélas ! mon Dieu, &c. 
 
 fear ha ! hé ! 
 
 joy ah ! bon, bon I o I 
 
 aversion ii ! fi done ! oh, oh i 
 
 disgust pouah, pouah ! 
 
 indignation foin de. 
 
 imprecation peste de, la peste de. 
 
 disbelief chansons, tarare. 
 
 4 surprise ouais ; 
 
 | astonishment oh ! bon Dieu ! miséricorde ! pestt 
 
 { warning gare ! hem ! holà, ho ! 
 
 checking tout beau ! holà. 
 
 encouraging alerte ! allons ! ca, courage ! 
 
 applauding bravo, vivat î 
 
 encoring bis, bis. 
 
 calling hôla '. ho ! hem, hem ' 
 
 derision oh ! eh ! zest ! oh ! oh ! oh î 
 
 \ silence chut .' paix ! st 
 
PART II. 
 
 THE SYNTAX, 
 
 OR 
 
 WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR CONSTRUCTION. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 §1. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 There are some substantives which are never used 
 in the plural ; such are — 1. The names, of metals, con- 
 sidered in their original state ; as, For, gold, le platine^ 
 platina. 2. The names of virtues and vice ; as, la chas- 
 teté, chastity, Vwrognerie, drunkenness. 3. Some 
 words of a physical or moral nature ; as, Vouie, hear, 
 ing ; Vodorat, smelling ; le sang, blood, le sommeil, 
 sleep, la pauvreté, poverty. 4. The infinitive of verbs 
 and adjectives used substantively, together with some 
 other words, which cannot be reduced to any particu- 
 lar class. 
 
 Others, on the contrary, which likewise cannot be 
 reduced to any particular class, are never used in the 
 singular ; as, annales, annals ; ancêtres, ancestors : 
 i, couchettes, snuffers, &c. 
 
 OF COMPOUND NOUNS 
 
 Of the formation of their plural. 
 
 1. When a noun is compounded of a substantive 
 and an adjective, they both take the sign of the plural ; 
 as, un gentilhomme, a nobleman ; des gentilshommes, no- 
 blemen. 
 
 2. When a noun is compounded of two substantives, 
 united by a preposition, the first only takes the sign of 
 the plural ; as, arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; des arcs-en-cie^ 
 rainbows. 
 
 21 
 
 <t 
 
230 SYNTAX OP THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 3. When a noun is compounded of a preposition, qi 
 verb, and a substantive, the substantive alone is put in 
 the plural ; as, un entresol (a low room between two 
 floors,) des entresols ; un garde-fou (rails on bridges) 3 
 des garde-fous. 
 
 Remark. There is a small number of substantives 
 composed of a verb and an adverb ; as, un passe- 
 partout, a master or general key ; or of a verb repeat- 
 ed ; as, passe-passe, sleight of hand : they never take 
 the sign of the plural. 
 
 EXERCISE ON SUBSTANTIVE AND COMPOUND 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 Gold is the most pure, the most precious, the most ductile 
 art. parfait 
 
 and, after platina, the heaviest of all metals. Chastity is an 
 
 pesant art. 
 
 obligation of all times, all ages, and all conditions. 
 
 art. pr. art. pr. art. état to. pi. art, 
 
 Intoxication, which proceeds from beer, is of longer duration 
 ivresse veiiir art. * * 
 
 than that which proceeds from wine. It is the sense of 
 
 art. Ce ar(. 
 
 feeling, which teaches to guard against the errors of sight. 
 toucher apprendre se garantir de art. 
 
 Sleep is the image of death. Early learn 
 
 art. art. de bonne-heure 2 apprendre 1 
 
 to distinguish truth from falsclwod. That is more bitter 
 
 — guer art. vrai art. faux amer 
 
 than wormwood. Dignity of mind was 
 
 de art. absinthe art. Elévation art. sentiment in. pi. ind-2 
 formerly the (distinguishing mark of) noblemen. One of 
 
 ce qui * distinguer ind-2 art. 
 
 the buttresses of the vault has fallen. He is always 
 
 arc-boutant m . pi. tomber * 
 
 making (cock and bull stories.) The Tartars always form 
 
 fait de art. coq.à-Vânem. pi. Tartare être 
 
 the scouts of an army. The fish-carriers did 
 
 avant-wurier m. pi. chasse-marée m. pi. 
 
 not arrive in time. This door is only fastened with a 
 
 ind-3 d ne que fermer à *art. 
 
 latch ; and all (the persons) in the house have each thHr 
 loqttetm. * ceux de 
 
 key. 
 passe-partout m. 
 
OF THE ARTICLE, 231 
 
 CHAP II. (1 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 §1. 
 
 1. The difficulty attendant on rendering into French 
 the a, or an which precedes a substantive, when it fol- 
 lows the verb to be, will easily be removed by examin- 
 ing whether that substantive be restricted by a particu- 
 lar idea; if it be not restricted, the a, or arc is not ex- 
 pressed in French ; thus, I am a Frenchman, 1 am a 
 prince, must be translated by je suis Français, je suis 
 prince. But if it be restricted, then the a or an must 
 be expressed by the word un placed before the substan- 
 tive, as, I am a Frenchman of an illustrious family, 1 
 am a very unfortunate prince, must be translated by je 
 suis un Français d'une illustre maison, je' suis un prince 
 très -malheureux. 
 
 2. When the verb être is preceded by the demon- • 
 strative ce, in phrases of this kind, un is always requis 
 ed before the substantive, as, c'est un trésor, &c. 
 
 3. The French do not use the article before sub* 
 stantives, expressing the quality of a preceding noun : 
 though, in cases of this kind, the English usually em- 
 ploy the article the, and still more frequently a, or an; 
 as, Têlémaque, fils d'Ulysse, roi d'Itaque, Telemachus, 
 the son of Ulysses, king of Ithaca ; le Duc d' York, 
 prince du sang, the Duke of York, a prince of the 
 blood. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 
 
 I am a Frenchman and a merchant ; after having (been at) 
 
 négociant inf-1 parcouru 
 
 l he most famous (trading towns) in the Levant, my commercial 
 
 = écMle f. pi. de — m. les affaires 
 
 concerns have brought me here. I am an unhappy 
 
 de mon commerce conduire 
 
 Frenchman who, a striking example of the vicissitudes of 
 * mémorable 2 1 — 
 
 fortune, seek an asylum where I may end my days 
 ftrt chercher, asile m. puisse finir 
 
232 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE 
 
 §2. 
 
 Without entering more minutely into this subject 
 the following ^omna^aUve table, in which the same 
 words are exhibited, according tu circumstances, both 
 with and without the article, in conjunction with the 
 phrases which have been inserted at the end of thi> 
 grammar, will, it is presumed, be considered as a suf- 
 ficient illustration of custom, IF 
 
 in peace. He was a man of uncommon probity and of 
 
 Ce un rare 2 f. 1 iw 
 
 tried virtue: (as a) reward for the services he had 
 
 éprouvé 2 1 pour le récompenser de que 
 
 rendered to the church and state, the king has made kim a 
 
 m. pi. église pr. art. 
 
 bishop. Neoptolemus had hardlv told me that he was c Greek 
 évêque. Ncoptolème eut â peine dit 
 
 when I (cried out) : O enchanting words, after so many 
 que s'écrier ind-3 doux parole f. pi. de 
 
 years of silence and unceasing pain ! o my son, what 
 
 sans consolation 2 pr. 1 
 misfortune, what storm, or rather what propitious wind ha* 
 malheur m, tempête f. plutôt favorable 9 1 
 
 brought you hither to end my woes ? He replied, 
 
 conduire pour mal?m.\>\. répondre ma-?* 
 
 I am of the island of Scyros, I am returning thither ; (I am 
 
 île retourner y on 
 
 said) (to be) the son of Achilles. 
 dit que ind-1. 
 
 % COMPARATIVE TABLE. 
 
 WITH THE ARTICLE. WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 
 
 The writings of Cicero are full The writings of Cicero are full 
 
 of the soundest 2 ideas!. of sound 2 ideas 1. 
 
 Divest yourself of the preju- Have no prejudice (with regard 
 
 se défaire préjugé to) this question. 
 
 dices of childhood. sur 
 
 The different kinds of animals There are different kinds of 
 
 that are upon the earth. animals upon the earth. 
 
 He enters into a detail of the He enters into a long detail o\ 
 
 rules of a good grammar. frivolous 2 rules 1. 
 
 He affects circumlocution* He affects long 1 circumloa,- 
 
 chercher de détour dons 2 in order to expiait 
 
 he simplest 9 Uiin^s 1 
 
STOTÀX OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 23& 
 
 WITH THE ARTICLE. 
 
 WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 
 
 <t 
 
 He loads his memory with :the 
 
 verses of Virgil and the 
 
 phrases of Cicero. 
 Essays supported by strong 2 
 
 discours soutenu. 
 
 expressions 1 
 He has collected precepts of 
 recueillir sur 
 
 morality. 
 
 mœurs pi. 
 Make use of the tokens we 
 
 se servir signe (dont) 
 
 agreed upon.* 
 
 être convenu. 
 The choice of studies, proper, 
 
 &c. 
 Knowledge has always been 
 Connaissance pi. 
 
 the object of the esteem, the 
 
 praise, and the admiration of 
 
 éloge pi. 
 
 men. 
 the riches of the mind can only 
 
 (be acquired) by study. 
 
 ne que s'acquérir. 
 f he gifts of fortune are un- 
 certain. 
 
 fragiles. 
 The connexion of proofs 
 
 encJutinement preuve 
 
 makes them please and 
 qu'elles 
 
 persuade, 
 it is by meditation upon what 
 
 we read, that we acquire 
 
 fresh 2 knowledge 1. 
 
 connaissance pi. 
 The advantages of memory. 
 
 i'he memory of facts is the 
 
 most showy. 
 brillant. 
 Che aim of good masters 
 
 should be to cultivate the 
 
 devoir ind-1 de 
 
 He loads his memory with in- 
 sipid 3 verses 1 and phrases 2. 
 
 Essays supported by lively ] 
 vive 
 expressions 2. 
 A * collection of precepts in 
 recueil sur 
 
 morals. 
 
 We are obliged to use some ex- 
 terior 2 signs 1, in order to 
 make ourselves understood. 
 nous entendre 
 
 He has made a choice of booh 
 which are, &c. 
 
 It is an object of esteem, of 
 
 Ge 
 praise, and admiration. 
 
 Sphere is in Peru a prodigious 
 le Pérou 
 abundance of useless 2 rkltes 1 
 Gifts of fortune. 
 Bien. 
 
 There is in this book an admi 
 rable connexion of solid 2 
 proofs 1. 
 
 It is by meditation that we ac 
 quire fresh 1 knowledge 2, 
 nouveau. 
 
 There are different kinds of 
 
 memory. 
 He has only a memory of 
 
 facts. 
 
 He has an air of pedaotxr 
 ton m, mafare ' 
 
 21* 
 
234 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 WITH THE ARTICLE. 
 
 WITHOUT THE ARTICLE. 
 
 mind and reason of their pu- 
 pils. 
 
 The tasle of mankind is liable 
 homme pi. 
 to great changes. 
 
 He has no need of tlie lessons 
 you wish to give him. 
 
 France, Spain, England, &c. 
 
 The isle of Japan. 
 Tie comes from China. 
 He arrives from America, 
 The extent of Persia. 
 
 He is returned from the East 
 Indies, from Asia, &c. 
 
 He lives in Peru, in Japan, in 
 à 
 the Indies, in Jamaica, &c. 
 
 The politeness of France, &c. 
 
 The circumference of England. 
 
 The interest of Spain. 
 
 The invention of printing is at- 
 tributed to Germany. 
 
 He comes from French Flan- 
 ders, 
 
 that shocks you at first sight. 
 abord 
 Society of cJiosen 2 men 1. 
 
 He has no need of lessons. 
 
 avoir besoin 
 Kingdom of France, of Spain 
 
 of England, &c. 
 Island of Candia. 
 He comes from Poland '. 
 He arrives from Italy. 
 He is gone to Persia. 
 
 en 
 He is returned from Spain 
 
 from, Persia, &c. 
 He lives in Italy, in France 
 
 in London, in Avignon, &c. 
 
 à à 
 
 The fashions of France. 
 The horses of England. 
 The wines of Spain. 
 The empire of Germany is di 
 
 vided into a great number o* 
 
 states. 
 He comes from Flanders. 
 
 §111. 
 
 • 03NT MEASURE, WEIGHT; &C. 
 
 1. The English make use of a, or an, before noun^ 
 of measure, weight, and purchase; as, wlieat is sold 
 for a crown a bushel ; butter sells for sixpence a pound ; 
 
 wine sold yesterday for forty crowns a hogshead, 'tis 
 more than a groat a bottle. But the French make use 
 of the article le, la, as, le blé se vend un ecu le boisseau ; 
 le beurre se vend six som la livre ; le vin se vendit hier 
 quarante t'eus le muid, c'est plus de quatre sous h 
 bouteille. 
 
 2. When speaking of time, a or an is expressed in 
 Frêne' r< ,ositi on par, as, so much a week, tan* 
 par si 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE, 235 
 
 S. In English, a is sometimes put between the pro- 
 noun which expresses admiration, and the substantive 
 that accompanies it, as, what a beauty! but, in French, 
 the un is never expressed in similar cases, as, quelh 
 beauté ! 
 
 4. In English, when the adverbs more and less are 
 repeated to express a comparison, they must be pre- 
 ceded by the article, as, the more difficult a thing is. 
 the more honourable it is. But, in French, the article 
 is omitted, as plus une chose est difficile, j?7ws elle est 
 honorable.^ 
 
 * CHAP. III. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 It has been said (p. 95), that an adjective agrees in 
 gender and number with the substantive which it qua- 
 lifies ; from this rule, however, must be excepted nu, 
 bare, and demi, half, when placed before a substantive, 
 and feu, late, when before the article or a pronominai 
 
 t EXERCISE ON MEASURE, &c. 
 
 Corn sells for eight shillings a bushel. Veal and 
 
 art. bit m. se tendre * schilling boisseau art. veau 
 
 mutton cost ten pence a pound. This lace is sold at 
 art. coûter sou livre f. f. se vendre * 
 
 half a guinea an ell. The best French wines are sold at 
 demi 2 1 f . aune de France 2 1 ind-1 
 
 from twelve to fifteen shillings a bottle. My father goes to 
 
 bouteille f. va en 
 
 Ireland four or five times a year. He gives his son seven 
 Irlande fois an 
 
 shillings a day. It (is necessary), if you desire to 
 falloir * 
 
 (improve fast) that you should take a lesson three times a 
 
 faire des progrès rap ides p renie z * 
 
 week. Themore I contemplate those precious remains of anti- 
 
 = reste m. pi. art. 
 quity, the more I am struck with wonder. What a beautiful 
 = frappé de étonnement 
 
 siorning Î come, let us go and walk in the fields. 
 ■matinée f se promener champ m pi. 
 
23t> 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 adjective, as, il va nu-pieds, he goes barefoot; pe sids 
 à v>ous dans une demi-heure, I will be with you in half 
 anhour;/ew la reine, the late queen ; feu ma mère. 
 my late mother. But the agreement takes place, if nil 
 and demi be placed after the substantive, and feu be- 
 tween the article or pronominal adjective and the sub 
 stantive, as, il a les pieds nus, his feet are bare ; je suk 
 à vous dans une heure et demie, I will be with you it: 
 an hour and a half; la feue reine, ma feue mère. 
 
 2. An adjective frequently serves to qualify two, c: 
 more substantives expressing either persons, or things 
 of different genders. 
 
 If it be used to qualify more than two substantives 
 it must agree with them ; for, either these substantives 
 perform the office of subject, as, la grammaire, la 
 logique, et la rhétorique, méthodiquement enseignées, 
 ne s'oublient guère, grammar, logic, and rhetoric, when 
 taught with method, are seldom forgotten ; or they 
 constitute the regimen, as, c'est un homme d'une valeur, 
 d'une vertu et d'une fidélité, éprouvées, he is a man of 
 tried courage, virtue, and fidelity. 
 
 If it be used to qualify only two substantives, the 
 substantive of persons must be distinguished from the 
 substantive of things; with the first, the rules oi 
 agreement are to be observed in all cases: wkh the 
 second, custom allows, when the substantives form the 
 regimen, to make the adjective agree with the last 
 only ; as, elle avoit les yeux et la potiche ouverte 
 Nevertheless, modem grammarians prefer the agree- 
 ment, even in this case. 
 
 3. With respect to phrases like the following, les 
 tangues Anglaise et Française sont fort cultivées. 
 though they are in opposition to the rules of grammar, 
 yet, it is allowable to use them. However, in strict 
 propriety, it seems better to say, la langue Franc aist 
 et l'Anglaise sont très -cultivées.^ 
 
 TÉXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE. ~ 
 
 He ran through the streets like a madman, &4?«4bôt ajjo 
 iod-2 * ruef. p!. 
 
SXNTAX OF THE ADJECTIVE* 23? 
 
 IL 
 
 DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUCTION BETWEEN THE ENGLISH 
 A:SD FRENCH LANGUAGES. 
 
 1. In English, the substantive of measure is placed 
 before the substantive, or adjective expressing the di- 
 mensions, as, a tower two hundred feet high, or in 
 height. In French, the word which expresses dimen- 
 sion, is placed first, it* it be • adjective, and the pre- 
 position de be added to it a^ a i :gimen, as, une tour haute 
 de deux cents pieds. Bot, if it be a substantive, or an 
 adjective used substantive!', it is placed af + er, with the 
 preposition de, either before the noun of measure, or 
 of dimension, as : une tour de deux cents pieds de haut. 
 or de hauteur. This last mode is the most elegant, 
 
 bare-headed. His legs were bare. Give me 
 
 tête . il * art. jambe, f. 2 avoir 1 
 half a guinea, and then you (will only owe) me a guinea 
 
 ne devoir plus que 
 and a half. I shall be at home in half an hour. Come 
 
 chez-moi dans 
 before half past one. The late queen was idolized. The 
 
 2 une heure et I 2 1 ind-2 adoré 
 
 late queen was universally regretted. His impetuosity and 
 ind-3 
 courage, long restrained, soon surmounted all obsta- 
 pron. enchaîné ind-3 art. 
 
 cles, The imagination and genius of Ariosto, although ir- 
 ait. VArioste quoique 
 regular in their course, yet interest, (hurry along,) and 
 
 march néanmoins attacher entraîner 
 captivate the reader, who can never be tired of admiring them, 
 
 lecteur se lasser inf-1 
 
 There are in Gessner's idylls sentiments and a 
 
 2 art. idylle 1 de art. 
 grace altogether affecting. The good taste of the Egyptians 
 
 tout-à-fait touchant 
 (from that time) made them love solidity and unadorned 
 dès-lors ind-3 leur art. = tout nu 2 
 
 regularity. In those climates, the dry and the rainy mon- 
 sa 1 sec pluvieux mous 
 
 :oons divide the year. 
 son f. pi. se diviser année. 
 
238 SXNTJLfc OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 2. The English manner of expressing dimensions, i» 
 to use the verb to be, as, the walls of Algiers are twelve 
 feet thick, and thirty feet high; the French in general, 
 make use of the verb avoir, when there are two con- 
 structions : as, les murs d'Alger ont douze pieds d'épais- 
 seur, et trente de hauteur ; or, les murs d'Alger ont dowzt 
 pieds d'épaisseur sur trente de hauteur. This second 
 mode of expression is most generally adopted. 
 
 3. In comparative sentences, to express difference, 
 the English sentence often runs thus : she is taller than 
 her sister by the whole head. The French, in this man- 
 ner ; elle est plus grande, que sa sœur de toute la tête.']' 
 
 f EXERCISE ON THE DIFFERENCE OF CONSTRUC- 
 TION. 
 
 This trunk, which is six feet long, is very convenient. You 
 coffre m. commode 
 
 will be stopped in your march by a river three hundred feet broad 
 arrêté f. 
 
 This observatory, which is twelve hundred feet high, is very pro 
 
 per for knowing the true position of the stars. It is a terrace 
 inf-1 astre m. pi. ce terrace I 
 
 a hundred and eighty feet broad, and twelve hundred 
 
 large 
 feet long. The walls of our garden are twenty feet high 
 
 mur m. pi. 
 and three broad. It is one of the finest stones that wa> 
 
 on au 
 ever seen: it is twenty feet long md six thick. Thi> 
 
 jamais vues longueur épaisseur. 
 
 ditch is nine feet six inches deep and six feei 
 
 fossé m. pouce m. pi. profondeur f. 
 
 broad. My son is taller than yours by two inches. 
 
 REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Several adjectives have a regimen ; some require 
 \ he preposition de, and others the preposition à before 
 a noun, or a verb, which is then called the regimen o v 
 government of the adjective. 
 
SÏ&ÏAS ÔF THE ADJECTIVE 23S 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Oigne de récompense, Worthy of reward. 
 
 fAUe à Vliomme, Useful to man. 
 
 Digne de régner, Worthy of reigning. 
 
 Content de son sort, de vivre, &c. Satisfied tc&A his lot, with living. 
 
 Beau à voir, bon à manger, Fine to the sight, good for eat- 
 
 ing. 
 
 ipre au ^aiw, amrfe àlionneur, Eager after gain, greedy of ho- 
 nour. 
 
 Propre à fo guerre, Fit /or war. 
 
 Recompense is the government of the adjective digne, 
 
 as it is joined to that adjective by the word de : V homme 
 
 is the government of the adjective utile, because it is 
 
 /joined to that adjective by the word d, and so of the rest. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Virtuous men are always worthy of esteem. A weak 
 art. Vertueux 2 1 toujours estime f. faible 2 
 
 mind i5 liable to many contradictions. A heart free from 
 1 m. sujet bien des — f. pi. cœur m. libre de 
 
 ares enjoys the greatest possible felicity. Voltaire was 
 
 soin m. pi. jouit de 1 — 3 = f . 2 — fut 
 
 always greedy of praise, . and insatiable of glory. Rousseau, 
 
 avide louange f. pi. — = — 
 
 endowed with a strong and fiery imagination, was all his 
 
 doué de fort 2 bouillant 3 — f . 1 
 
 'life-time) subject to frequent fits of misanthrophy, and 
 
 vie f. enclin à de — accès m. pi. = 
 
 liable to all tlie variations attendant upon it. 
 sujet — f. pi. qui en sont la suite. 
 
 PR03IISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE ARTICLE AND 
 THE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 THE FAULTS OF INFANCY. 
 
 défaut m. pi. art. enfance. 
 
 The amiable Louisa and her young brother Charles were 
 Louise — jnd <j 
 
 gentle, humane, and sensible. To the most interesting 
 doux sensible spirituel intéressant 2 art. 
 
 person, Louisa joined all the modesty, ;the pleasing ingenu- 
 figure f. 1 ind-2 = f. heureux ingé- 
 
 ousness and artless graces of her sex ; and Charles, the 
 nuitéî. naïf dart. — f. sexe m 
 
&fô 
 
 SYNTAX OP THE ADJECTIVE, 
 
 vivacity, the fire, and the manly gracefulness of his, 
 
 =3 f. feu m. mâle agrément m. pî. 
 
 But these advantages, the precious ^fts of nature, 
 
 avantage m. pi. * =3 donm.pl. art. — f. 
 were obscured by great defects. They were both 
 
 ind-2 un peu obscurci de défaut m. pi. ind-2 Vun et 
 
 inclined to idleness, and liable to fits of sullenness 
 Vautre enclin art. paresse i. sujets des accès bouderie f. 
 and ill humour when they were contradicted. Faults are 
 de * km. lorsque contredit art. Défaut 
 
 diseases of the soul, the cure (of which) is the work 
 
 des maladies guérison f. 2 dont l ouvrage 
 
 of time, 
 art. m. 
 
 In good dispositions, it is generally the fruit of the deve- 
 
 Les âmes bien nées elh d'ordinaire — m. déve- 
 
 îopement of reason, and the desire of pleasing. Though 
 
 hppement m. art. de m. inf-1 Quoique 
 
 their parents were persuaded (of this), they employed, 
 
 — sub-2 2 — dé 3 enl employer ind-3 
 
 to hasten it, an expedient, which succeeded. If they 
 pour hâter 2 la 1 moyen m. leur réussir ind-3 * 2 
 
 were satisfied with them, contentment and joy were 
 ind-2 1 content de art. satisfaction f. art. f. 
 
 painted in their countenances; if . dissatisfied, they 
 
 peint sur figure f. pi. * en étaient-Us mécontent 
 
 did not scold, but they received them with a sorrow- 
 
 * les gronder ind-2 ind-3 triste .0 
 
 ?d air, â dejected countenance, and every sign of 
 
 regard 1 abattu 2 maintien 1 tous art.sionem.pl. 
 
 chagrin and trouble. Louisa and Charles were natu- 
 
 art. — m. de art. douleur natu- 
 
 vally kind and feeling ; they could not long support 
 
 rcllement bon sensible ne pouvaient long-temps résister à 
 
 the idea of having afflicted such tender parents. They felt 
 
 idle inf-1 affligé des si tendre 2 — 1 ind-*2 
 
 (heir error, burst into tears. and asked pardon. All was 
 faute f. fondre en larme 1. pi. — m. 2 3 
 
 and satisfaction again smiled 
 
 art. contentement m. renaître ind-2 
 this means that these amiabl< 
 
 by 
 
 immediately forgotten, 
 aussi-tôt 1 oublié 
 around. Jt was 
 
 autour d'eux. Ce fut 
 children soon became 
 
 bientôt 2* dictnir 1 
 plaisance and application. 
 — de — 
 
 moyen sing. • que 
 models of 
 
 des modèle m. pi. 
 
 docility, com- 
 de 
 

 SYNTAX OP THE PKONOIÔÏS* 241 
 
 CHAP ÏV. If 
 
 OF THE PRONOUNS, 
 
 §1. 
 
 OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. , 
 
 Of the Place of Personal Pronouns. — See p. 100. 
 
 There is no difficulty in placing personal pronouns. 
 when they act as subjects : the person who speaks al- 
 ways names himself last, and the person addressed is 
 generally named first, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vous et moi, nous irons à la You and I will go into the 
 
 campagne, country. 
 
 Vous irons ce soir à la prome- Will you take a walk this even 
 
 node, tous, votre frère, et moi, 1T iug, you, your brother, and I 
 
 Rule. The pronouns il and Us always represent a 
 substantive masculine, il, if it be singular ; and Us, if 
 it be plural ; and elle and elles, on the contrary, repre 
 
 IF EXERCISE. 
 
 My sister and I were walking by the last rays of 
 
 nous * ind-2 à rayonsm.pl. 
 
 he setting sun, and we were saying, what a mild splendour 
 
 coiicliant 3 1 * disions éclat m. 
 
 does it still spread over all nature ! In the Ion*» 
 
 * 2 pas 3 5 ne répand 1 art. 
 
 winter evenings, my father, my brothers, and I used 
 U 2 5oireef.pl. 1 nous pas- 
 
 do spend) two hours in the library, and to read there, 
 
 ser ind-2 bibliothèque f. nous lisions y 
 
 ;in order to) (unbend our minds) from *he serious studies of the 
 
 pour se délasser =2 1 
 
 'lay, those amiable poets who interest most the heart, by the 
 2 1 le plus 
 
 harms of a lively imagination, and make us love truth, by 
 riant 2 1 art. ' en 
 
 disguising it under the mask of an ingenious fiction 
 
 déguiser inf-3 trait m. pi. — 2 f . 1 
 
 You and your friend shall accompany me to the museum, 
 — pagner musée m. 
 
 vhere we shall study nature in her three kingdoms. 
 w> règne m. pi. 
 
 22 
 
04\î SYNTAX ÔF THE PRONOUNS» 
 
 sent a substantive feminine, elle, if it be singular: elles, 
 if plural. 
 
 Thus in speaking of the rose; we should say, elle a 
 an parfum exquis, aussi est-elle la fleur la plus recher- 
 chée, it has an exquisite fragrance, and is indeed the 
 choicest of flowers ; because rose is feminine and singu- 
 lar ; and in speaking of severalladies : elles ont autant 
 de modestie que de beauté, d'esprit et de grâce, they have 
 as much modesty as they have beauty, wit, and accom- 
 plishments ; because dames is feminine and plural, j 
 
 With respect to pronouns, when used as a regimen, 
 custom has established the following rules : 
 
 Rule I. The pronouns me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, 
 and en, are generally placed before verbs, as are nou? 
 vous, and lui, when without a preposition. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 H me dit he tells me Je lui parle I speak to him 
 
 Je le vois I see him J r y songerai I will think of it 
 
 Je les écoute I listen to them t J'tn suis ravi I am delighted at i 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 Look at) that magnificent building ; it unites grace tô 
 iracr — fique bâtiment m. réunir art | 
 
 beaut v, and elegance to simplicity. Ignorant 
 art. =•=£ art. — f . art. =ï. 
 
 jealous, presumptuous, and vain : it sees difficulties in 
 omylueux — no dc = f. pi. à 
 
 nothing, (is surprised) at nothing, and stops at nothing. 
 run ne s'flonncr de ne s'arrêter à 
 
 Let us gather these roses; Heavens! what a sweet fragrance 
 
 cueillir Ciel! I * parfum 
 
 tîiey exhale ! Never judge from appearances; thty are ofteu 
 
 — 1er sur art. f. 
 
 deceitful : the wise man exannues them, and does cot decide 
 
 seat 
 upon them till he has had time to fix his judgment. 
 if après f. art. m. 
 
 t EXÏ 
 
 explained to us the maxims of So- 
 
 qut expliquer ind-5 
 
 crates, he said: you see (nat • «sob he 
 
 ind-3 
 

 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 24$ 
 
 Rule II. The pronouns moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, lui. 
 eux, elle, and elles, are placed after verbs, when they 
 are preceded by a preposition. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Cela dépend de moi, That depends on me. 
 
 Je pense à toi, I think of thee. 
 
 Qn s'occupe trop de soi, We are too attentive to ourselves 
 
 Que dites-vous d'eux ? What do you say of them ? 
 
 Rule III. In imperative phrases, when affirmative. 
 moi, foi, nous, vous, lui, leur, eux, elle, elles, le, la, les. 
 y, and en, are placed after verbs ; but, with a negation. 
 
 is looked upon) as truly wise. He was continually saying to 
 
 regarde un vrai ind-2 * 
 
 vie : yet a little patience, and you will disarm even envy 
 
 de désarmer * art. 
 
 itself. You have, no doubt, (some foundation) for reproaching 
 
 être sans doute fondé à inf-1 
 
 him with his faults : but is there (any man) on earth that 
 lui de * art. m. pï. ( iïun art. qui 
 
 is exempt (from them)? To please her, you must never 
 subj-1 en Pour lui * 
 
 flatter lier. To abandon cne's self f o metaphysical abstrac- 
 ts métaphysique 2 — 
 lions, is to plunge icito an unfathomable abyss. 
 1 ce * se jeter sans fond 2 abîme m. 1. 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 My father loved me so tenderly, that he thought of none 
 
 ind-2 penser m d-2 à tu 
 
 but me, (was wholly taken up) with me, and saw none but me 
 
 que ne s'occuper ind-2 que de ind-2 
 
 in the universe. If you wish to obtain that favour, you must 
 
 de 
 speak to him himself It depended on you to excel 
 
 ind-2 de de remporter sur 
 
 your rivals, but you would not. Philip, father of 
 
 h vouloir ind-4 Philippe 2 
 
 Alexander, being advised to expel from his dominion 
 
 comme on conseillait à 1 de chasser (tat m. pi 
 
 a man, who (had been speaking) ill of him ; I shall take care not 
 
 parler ind-6 se garder bun 
 
 to do that, said he, he would go and slander mc every where, 
 en ind-3 * midire dc 
 
244 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 me, le, se, nous, vous, lui, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are 
 placed before verbs. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 AFFIRMATIVELY. NEGATIVELY. 
 
 Dites-moi Tell me Ne me dites pas Do not tell me 
 
 Donnez-m 'en Give me half Ne m'en don- Do not give mi 
 
 la moitié of it nez point any 
 
 Hongez-y se- Think of it se- Ny songez pas Do not think 01 
 
 rieusement riously it 
 
 Rem. If the pronouns me, te, moi, toi, intervene be- 
 twixt an imperative and an infinitive, me, te, are used 
 when the imperative is without a regimen direct. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Venez me parler, Come and speak to me. 
 
 Va te faire coëffer, Go and get thy hair dresse d . 
 
 But moi, toi, are used if the imperative have a regi- 
 men direct. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Laissez-moi faire, Let me do it. 
 
 Fais-toi coëffer, Get thy hair dressed. 
 
 2. If moi, toi, when placed after the imperative, be fol- 
 lowed by the pronoun en, they are changed into me, te. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Donnez-m' en, Give me some. Retourne-Ven, Go back. 
 
 3. When there are two imperatives joined together 
 by the conjunctions et, ou, it is most elegant to place the 
 second pronoun before the verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 PolissezAe sans cesse et le repo- Polish and repolish it continu - 
 
 lissez, ally. 
 
 Gardez-les, ou les renvoyez, t Keep them or send them back. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 Listen to me, do not condemn me, without a hearing. 
 
 (conter * * m' écouter 
 
 Complain, thou hast just cause of complaint ; however, do 
 
 se plaindre un sujet plainte 
 
 not compUin too bitterly of the injustice of mankind. Give 
 
 amèrement art. homme pi. 
 
 wm€. Do not give any. Think (of it.^ Do not think of v 
 
SYNTAX OF THE TRONOUXS. 245 
 
 Rule IV. When several pronouns accompany a 
 verb, me, te, se, nous, vous, must be placed first ; le, la, 
 les, before lui, leur ; and y before en, which is always 
 the last. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Prétez-moi ce litre; je vous le Lend me that .book ; I will re- 
 rendrai demain; si tous me turn it to you to-morrow; if 
 le refusez, je saurai m'en you refuse me, I can makf^ 
 passer, shift without it. 
 
 hirez-vous la force de le leur Will you have resolution 
 dire ? enough to mention it to them I 
 
 Il n'a pas voulu vous y mener, He would not take you there. 
 Je vous y en porterai, I will bring you some there. 
 
 Exception. In an imperative sentence, when affir- 
 mative, le, la, les, are always, placed first, as, donnez - 
 h~moi, give it me, offrez-la-lui, offer it to him ; eon- 
 luiscz-les-y, conduct them thither ; and moi is placed 
 after y, as menez-y-moi, carry me thither; but wows will 
 precede y, as, menez -nous -y, take us thither. + 
 
 Repeat to them continually, that, without honesty, one can neve»-. 
 succeed in the world Do not repeat to them continually the 
 .rame things. Acknowledge him as your master, and obey 
 
 reconnaître pour 
 
 him. Tread upon that spider and kill it. 
 
 lui marcher arraignêi. écraser 
 
 X EXERCISE. = 
 
 You wish to make a present to your sister. (There is) a 
 vouloir * Voilà 
 
 beautiful fan ; you should present her with it 
 
 éventail m. devoir cor.d-2 offrir lui * 
 
 ( How many) people are there (destitute of) merit and without oc 
 que de gens * * sans 
 
 cupation, (who would be mere nothings) in society, did not 
 
 ne tenir à rien con d-1 art. si art 
 
 earning introduce them (into it.) I shall speak to them 
 
 jeu m. introduire ind-2 . y 
 
 'aboutit), and give you a faithful account of it T 
 
 en je rendre ind-7 exact 2 compté m. 1 
 
 ik certain that old Géronte has refused his daughter to W 
 
 art. 
 (ere; but because he does not. give ker to him, it does not fol 
 
 tow that be will give lier to you. 
 peart 
 
 2g 
 
ïtttt SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUN? 
 
 Remark. The word même is sometimes added to tht 
 pronouns moi, toi, soi, nous, vous, eux, lui, elle, elles, to 
 specify the person, or thing spoken of. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 J Is se sont perdus eux-mêmes, They have ruined themselves. 
 
 Le monde estime bien des choses The world prizes many things 
 qui, en elles-mêmes, sont fort which, in themselves are 
 p risables, worth I es= . 
 
 §ir. 
 
 OF THE RELATIVE FRONOUXS. P. 111. 
 
 The relative pronouns are qui, que, dont, lequel, &c< 
 see p. 111. 
 
 Rule I. Qui, when a relative, is always of the num 
 1>er, gender, and person of its antecedent. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Moi qui suis son fils, I who am his son. 
 
 Toi qui es si jeune, Thou who art so young 
 
 I j 1 enfant qui joue, The child who plays. 
 
 Nous qui étudions, We who study. 
 
 Vous qui riez, You who laugh. 
 
 Les livres qui instruisent, The books which instruct. 
 
 In the first example, qui is singular, and of the firsl 
 person, because the pronoun moi is in the singular, ano 
 of the first person. In the second, it is singular, anc 
 of the second person, for a similar reason, &c. IT 
 
 If EXERCISE. 
 
 1 wlio did not suspect (so much) falsehood, cum 
 
 soupçonner ind-2 tant de fausseté f. pr. rust 
 i Ting, and perfidy, in aman whom I loved, blindly follow 
 f. pr. ass f. ind-2 aveuglément je sui 
 
 ed his counsels. Thou who art candour and innocence 
 vre ind-?> conseil m . art. = f , art. — f. 
 
 itself, trust not too lightly. The great empire of the Egyp- 
 mtme te confie légèrement — m. — 
 
 {ians which was, (as it were) detached from all others, wa^ 
 rien ind-3 comme détaché art. 
 
 #Jot of long duration. We icho know the value of tira*- 
 
 dxirte f connaîtra prix m. art.. 
 
SYNTAX OP THE î>RONOÎJNS« Ô47 
 
 Rule II. Que, when a relative, is of the number and 
 gender of its antecedent. If 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Cas! ?«oi cue Von demande, It is I whom they ask for. 
 
 C'est toi qiCon appelle, It is thou whom they call. 
 
 La femme que je, vois si bien The woman whom I see so we!" 
 
 parée, dressed. 
 
 ■'"est nous que vous offensez, It is we whom you offend. 
 
 1 "est vous que je clierche, It is you I am seeking. 
 
 ies dames que vous voyez. The ladies whom you see.f 
 
 Dont sometimes represents dequi, duquel, de laquelle^ 
 desquels, desquelles, and even de quoi. 
 
 EX AMPLES. 
 L'homme dont vous parlez est The man of whom you art 
 parti, speaking is gone. 
 
 ought to make a good use (of it), instead of wasting 
 
 nous devoir ind-1 * emploi m. au lieu perdre 
 
 il in idleness and frivolity. What ! is it you. my 
 
 dans art. oisivetef. art. inutilité f. Quoi ce 
 
 'laughter, who (would wish) that I (should love) you less ? Tht 
 vouloir con-1 que sub-2 
 
 non, who were the ornament and glory of Greece 
 ind-4 ornement art, = f. art. Grèce f 
 
 Homer, Pythagoras, Plato, even Lycurgus and Solon, wen;: 
 ïïomcrc — gore Platon, même — gue — ind-0 
 
 to learn wisdom in Egypt. 
 
 apprendre art. sagesse f. en Egypte, 
 
 TCXERCISE. 
 
 / whom temptation surrounded on every side 
 
 art. séduction f. environner ind-2 de tout partf.pl 
 (II into the snare. It is thou whom the public voice 
 
 v 'tombai dans piège m . Ce 2 f . 1 
 
 •alls to that employ. A power which terror and 
 appeler place f. puissance f. art. = f. art 
 
 force have founded, cannot be of long duration. It is we whom 
 — f. fondé f. ne peut durée f. 
 
 Ihey persecute with unexampled rage. You whom 
 
 l'on poursuivre avec une sans exemple 2 fureur f. 1 
 every body respects, hasten to (come forward.) (Every 
 tout It monde respecter se hâter de paraître Tout 
 
 thing) in the universe alters and perislhes ; but the writings 
 dans univers m. s'altérer périr écrit m. pi 
 
 wkûh genius h as dictated, shall be immortal. 
 geniem. dicté m. pi. -r-tel. 
 
248 SYNTAX OF TUE PRONOUXb. 
 
 ha tour dont nous apercerons les The tower whose battl. 
 
 créneaux doit être très-élevée, we perceive must be very high 
 
 Ce dont je vous ai parlé Vautre What I was speaking to you ot 
 
 jour iïa pas réussi, the other day did not succeed 
 
 Observe 1. — That qui, que, and dont, may equalh 
 apply to persons and things ; but qui, preceded by <> 
 preposition, can never apply to things ; in this case. 
 lequel, duquel, auquel, &c. must be used. 
 
 2. — Lequel, laquelle, &c. apply both to persons one! 
 things; but — quoi applies only to things. 
 
 The adverb où is likewise employed as a relative pro 
 noun, for dans lequel, auquel, dans laquelle, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Voilà le hut où il tend, That is the object betas in view 
 
 Ce sont des affaires, où je suis Those are affairs with which 1 
 
 <mbarrasse, am perplexed. 
 
 Remark. Où admits the prepositions de and par. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 i uilâ anc clwsc &où dépend le That is an affair on which tin 
 lo iiheur public, public happiness depends. 
 
 Pels sont les lieux par où il a These are the places through 
 pass?, t which he passed. 
 
 tEXERCISE. 
 
 Persons of ordinary condition have not the same 
 
 ixt.ttcrawwcf.pl. commune — f.l mem* 
 
 need of being cautioned against the dangers to u 
 
 ''csoin m. inf-1 pr ca itionn f. pi. contrn écueil m. pî. 
 
 elevation and authority expose those who are des 
 art. — f. art. autorité f. expose r ceux des 
 
 tined to govern mankind. The protection on which 
 
 line m. pi. gouverner ail. homme pi. — f. sur — 
 
 he relied has been too w^ak. That after ichich & true 
 
 compter ind-2 faible Ce après vra\ 
 
 philosopher sighs most ardently, is to spread thai 
 
 — plum, soupirer art. ardemment d~ rfpandre 
 
 sentiment of universal benevolence which should unite anc. 
 
 — m. — sel 2 bie nv rill anc p f. 1 devrait unir 
 
 .bring together) all men. These are conditions without 
 
 rapprocher art. Ce sont des sans 
 
 which the thing would not have been concluded. Nature 
 
 fait f. art. — f. 
 of ic/iose secrets we (are ignorant) will be always #v 
 
 ] art. — m. pi. 4 2 ignorer o 
 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 249 
 
 §111. 
 
 OF PRONOUNS ABSOLUTE. P. 112. 
 
 See p. 112, the pronouns absolute, qui, que, quoi, 
 quel, lequel. 
 
 Qui signifies quel homme, what man ; quelle 'personne 
 what person. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 (lui vous a dit cela ? Who told you that ? 
 
 J'ignore qui a fait ctld, I don't know who did that. 
 
 Que signifies quelle chose, what ihing. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Que dit-on ? What do they say ? 
 
 Je ne sais qu'en penser, I don't know what to think of i; 
 
 Quoi has the signification of que. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 À quoi s'Occupe4~on ? What are they engaged in ? 
 
 Dites-moi en quoi je puis vous Tell me how I can serve you. 
 
 servir, 
 
 Rem. If que, or quoi be followed by an adjective, 
 it requires the preposition de before that adjective. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Que dit-on de nouveau ? What news is there ? 
 
 Quoi de plus instructif et de What is more instructive and 
 plus amusant ? ^ amusing ? 
 
 source of conjecture to mankind. That of which we 
 
 — f . 3 — f. pi. 4 pour 1 art. homme 2 Ce 
 
 complain most bitterly is not always what affects m 
 
 se plaindre amèrement ce qui affecter 
 
 tiie most. The only moments in which his soul still 
 
 seul — m. pi. encore S 
 
 expands to pleasure, are those which he devotes to 
 s'ouvrir 1 art. ceux consacrer art 
 
 study. The mountains from whence gold (is extracted 
 
 Hude f. f. pi ou 1 art. or 3 tire 2 
 
 are not in general fruitful. The different countries through 
 
 * en — infertile pi. — pays m. pi. par 
 
 which he has passed have furnished his pencil with ro 
 
 passé fourni à pinceau m. de art. 
 
 mantic and picturesque scenes. 
 — tique 2 pittoresque 3 — 1. 
 
 U EXERCISE. 
 iVho will not agree that life has few real pleasure* 
 convenir art. f. peu de vrai 
 
 <♦ 
 
250 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 In interrogations, or after a verb, quel is used to ask 
 the name, or qualities of a person, or thing. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quel homme est-ce ? What man is it ? 
 
 Quel temps fait-il ? What weather is it ? 
 
 Je ne sais qwl homme c'est, I don't know what man 
 
 ft sait quel parti prendre. He knows what steps to p 
 
 The adverb où, it has been already seen, is employed 
 as a relative pronoun ; it is likewise used as a kind of 
 absolute pronoun. 
 
 Où represents en quel endroit, in what place, or v 
 quoi, to what. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Gît allez-vous ? Where arc you going ? 
 
 Où cela nous mener a-t-il ? Where will that take us ? 
 
 T ignore où Von me conduit, I don't know where they are 
 
 taking me. 
 Il n'a pas prévu où cette con- He did not foresee where such 
 
 duite le mènerait, conduct would lead him. 
 
 Remark I. When on is preceded by the preposition 
 <le, it marks the place, or cause, spoken of. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 D'où vient-il 1 Where does he come from ? 
 
 D'où sa haine procêdf-t-e Iff ? Whence proceeds his hatred ? 
 
 and many dreadful pains ? (Some one) entered sc 
 
 beaucoup (V affreux 2 peine f. pi. 1 On entra se- 
 
 cretly ; guess who it was. What have you read in that 
 crètement deviner * * 
 
 book that can have excited in your soul emotion am; 
 
 m. qui puisse porté art. — f. 
 
 enthusiasm? I know not whit to think (of it.) AXwhni 
 art. enthousiasme m. saroi> * 
 
 did you find them occupied ? There is in that dis- 
 
 ais trouv's occupé m. pi. dis 
 
 course I know not wliat which appears to me designing. IVha; 
 cours m. savoir sembler * insidieux. 
 
 have you remnrked good, beautiful, and sublime in Homer 
 
 remarqué pr. pr. pr. 
 
 Wliat more brilliant, and. at the same time, more false, than 
 
 pr. brillant en * même pr. 
 
 the expressions of a man, who has (a great deal) of wit, but 
 
 — beaucoup ' esprit 
 
 vvants judgment ? 
 Ttanque de jugement ? 
 
S1TOTAX OF THE PBONOtfKS. 
 
 %6l 
 
 Voilà d' oil U vient, It was there he came from. jf 
 
 r ,e raaZ wœ went <foà fatten- The evil proceeds from that 
 dais men remède, quarter whence I had expect- 
 
 ed a remedy. 
 
 Remark IL Où preceded by the preposition par, sig- 
 nifies through what place, or by what means. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Par où azcz-zous passé ? Which way did you come ? 
 
 Par où me tirerai-je d'affaire ? Which way shall I extricatt 
 
 myself ? 
 Voilà par où j 'ai passé, This is the way I came. 
 
 Je ne sais par où je me tirerai I don't know which way I shall 
 d'affaire, extricate myself. 
 
 By the manner in which these pronouns are employed, 
 it will be seen they are only interrogative, when at the 
 beginning of a sentence, and, consequently, the most 
 proper name for them is that of pronouns absolute, j* 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 What grace, ichat delicacy, what harmony, wluit co- 
 grace f. délicatesse f. = f. c<^ 
 louring, what "beautiful lines in Racine ! Wliat then 
 'oris m. vers m . — 1 donc 3 
 fnust have been that extraordinary man, to whom seven cities 
 doit 2 = 2 — 
 
 contested the glory of having given birth ? He does 
 se sont disputé. — f. avoir donné art jour m. * 
 
 not know what model to follow. I have told you ichat 
 
 savoir modèle m. * suivre 
 
 man it is. Which of those ladies do you think the 
 
 ce f. dames f. * 2 trouver 1 
 
 nost amiable ? Choose which of those two pictures 
 
 f. Choisir m. 4 5 6 tableau m. 7 
 
 you like ■ best. Where am I ? He knows not 
 
 1 a imer 2 art. mieux o en savoir 
 
 whence he is. He is gone Ï don't know where. Where 
 
 en allé ne savoir De 
 
 •iocs he get that pride ? (It is) from there he derives his 
 
 lui vient orgueil m. Voilà de tirer 
 
 origin. ( Which icay) did you come? (That is) (the 
 
 origine. Par êtes-vous (i Voile par 
 
 ~oad) Icaine. 
 
 d-4 
 
252? SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS* 
 
 §IV. 
 
 OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. P. 113. 
 
 Ce, cette, ces, are often joined to the adverbs of place- 
 rai, here, and là, there, in order to point out in a more 
 precise manner the thing spoken of, the demonstrative 
 pronoun is then placed before the substantive, and ci 
 and là after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ce livre-ci this book Cet homme-là that man 
 
 Cette fieur-ci this flower Ces femmes-là those women 
 
 Celui, celle, ceux, celles, are followed by the preposi- 
 tion de, when placed before a substantive, and by a pro- 
 noun relative, when placed before a verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les maladies dc fame sont plus The disorders of the mind are 
 
 dangereuses que elks du more dangerous than those of 
 
 corps, the body. 
 
 L'homme dont je vous ai parlé, The man of whom I spoke le 
 
 est celui que vous voyez, you is he whom you see 
 
 De toutes Its choses du monde, Of all the tilings in the work! 
 
 c'est celle que f aime le moins, it is that which I like least. 
 
 Remark. The pronouns celui, celle, ceux, celles. 
 when followed by a pronoun relative, are expressed in 
 English, by the personal pronouns, he, she, tliey, or b\ 
 f hat lohich, those which, such as, &c. 1f 
 
 IF EXERCISE. 
 
 The pleasures of the wise resemble in nothing Uiose of 
 
 rassembler 2 3 1 4 à 
 ix dissipated man. He that suffers himself to (be ruled) b\ 
 
 dissipée 1 se laisse * dominer 
 
 his passions, mu.^t renounce happiness. This stuff 
 
 doit renoncer à art. bonheur m. éto[j 
 
 will become you wonderfully. That action is worthy oi 
 
 * siéra à merveille — f. -là 
 
 blame. This scene is calculated to interest all men, 
 Maine — f. -ci faite pour intéresser art. 
 
 hut that cannot succeed. 
 -Id ne saurait réussir 
 
SYKTAX OF THE PfiOKOUNS. 253 
 
 Celui-ci and celui-là adopt the gender and number of rft 
 
 he substantives whose place they supply. When op- 
 posed to each other, celui-ci marks the nearest object ; 
 and celui-là the remotest. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cdui-ci plaît j mais celui-là cap- This pleases, but that capti 
 tive, vates. 
 
 Ci and là coalesce with ce, and form two other de- 
 monstrative pronouns, ceci and cela, the first of which 
 signifies cette chose-ci, this object ; the second, cette 
 chose-là, that object. 
 
 They may be used singly ; but when they are op- 
 posed to eacb other, ceci expresses the nearest object., 
 and cela the remotest. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Je n'aime point ceci, donnez- I don't like this, give me 
 moi cela, that. 
 
 Remark. When cela is alone and not opposed to the 
 pronoun ceci, it refers, like this last, to an object point- 
 ed to. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Que dites-vous de cela ? What do you say of that ? 
 
 Cela est fort beau, f That is very handsome. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 (Here are) certainly two charming prospects ; this 
 
 Voilà certainement beau perspective f. pi. 
 
 bas something more cheerful, but many people 
 
 quelque chose de riant bien de art. personne 
 
 think that more striking and more majestic. The body 
 
 f. p\. trouver imposant majestueux m. 
 
 perishes, the soul is immortal ; yet all our cares are for 
 
 périr f. — tel cependant soin 
 
 that, while we neglect this. What means this? That 
 
 tandis que négliger veut dire 
 
 is true. It is no' ikat. This is low and mean, but that is 
 Ce bas rampant 
 
 grand and sublime. 
 
 23 
 
254: SYxNTAX OF THE PKONOUNS. 
 
 §V. 
 OF INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 FIRST CLASS. 
 
 Of those that are never joined to a Substantive» — P. 114. 
 Quelqu'un means un, une, one. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vous attendons des hommes, il We expect men, some one \vii< 
 
 en viendra quelqu'un, come. 
 
 Plusieurs femmes m'ont promis Several ladies have promiseu 
 
 de venir, il en viendra quel- me to come, some one of them 
 
 qu'une, will come. 
 
 Quelqu'un taken absolutely and substantively, is of 
 both genders, and means une personne, a person, 
 
 EXAMPLE 
 'attends ki quelqu'un, I wait here for somebody. 
 
 Quelques-uns signifies plusieurs dans un plus grand 
 n ombre several out of a great number. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelques-uns assurent, Some people affirm 
 
 Entre les nouvelles qu'il a débi- Among the reports he bas eifeu 
 
 tées, il y en a quelques-unes lated, several are true. 
 de vraies, 
 
 Quiconque, whoever, signifies quelque personne que ci 
 .<oit, qui que ce soit, any person whatever. It takes no 
 plural, and is never used but of persons. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ce discours s'adresse à quicon- This speech is addressed to 
 que est coupable, whoever is guilty. 
 
 Chacun, each, every one, is used either distributive! \ 
 >r collectively. It has no plural. 
 
 Distributively, it means chaque personne, chaque chose. 
 each person, or thing. It is then used likewise in th<*. 
 feminine, and requires the preposition de after it. 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 Chacun de nous vit à sa mode. Each of us lives as ne please* 
 Voyez spa re went chacune de ces Look at each of the?e medal- 
 médauto separately 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUKS, v 255 
 
 Collectively, it signifies toute personne, every person. jf 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 l hactin a ses défauts, t Every body has his faults. 
 
 Autrui, means les autres personnes, other people : it 
 only applies to persons, is never accompanied by an 
 adjective, has no plural, and is never used in a sentence 
 without being preceded by a preposition. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 La charité se réjouit du bonheur Charity rejoices in the happi 
 d'autrui, ness of others. 
 
 Personne, which is always masculine and singular 
 means nul, qui que ce soit, nobody, whosoever. In this 
 sense, it is preceded or followed by the negative ne 
 which is placed after personne, when this word stands 
 before the verb ; and before the verb, when personne 
 -stands after. The same observation applies to rien. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Can any one (be still ignorant) that it is from the 
 
 Pourrait-U 2 1 ignorer encore ce dès 
 
 earliest infancy we ought to form the mind, the heart, and the 
 tendre enfance f. on doit * former 
 taste ? Will not some one of these ladies be of the party ? Sorn> 
 
 * f . partis f . 
 
 people like, to read (every thing new.) (These are) beautiful 
 
 aimer toutes les nouveautés Voilà da superbe 
 
 pictures ; I could wish to buy some. JVhoever has stu 
 
 tableau m. vouloir en * acheter 
 
 died the principles of an a t, knows that it (is only) (by length 
 
 — pes — m savoir ce n'est que à la 
 
 of time) and by deep reflections, that he can succeed in 
 longue de profond r-flexwn f. réussir a 
 
 making it his own. All the ladies at the ball were 
 
 se 2 rendre 4 le 3 * propre 5. bal m. ind-2 
 
 very finely dressed, and each differently. 
 
 * superbement par-' avait une parure différente. 
 
 Every one should, for (the sake of) his own happiness, listen 
 devrait pour propre m. riécou- 
 
 only to the voice of reason and of truth. What is the 
 cr que * voix f. art. raison f. art. vérité f. 
 
 price of each of these medals ? 
 prix m, f. médaille f. 
 

 
 256 syjVtax of the pronouns. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 il ne faut nuire à personne, We must injure nobody. 
 
 Personne n'est assuré de vivre Nobody <s certain of living tili 
 jusqu'au lendemain, to-morrow. 
 
 Rem. I. The negative is sometimes understood, as. 
 y a-t-il quelqu'un ici ? is there are any body here ? 'per- 
 sonne, nobody. Personne stands for il n'y a personne, 
 there is nobody here. 
 
 Rem. II. In interrogative phrases without negation. 
 >r in those expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqu'un. 
 any body. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Personne oserait-il nier ? Would any body dare deny ? 
 
 Je doute que personne soit assez I doubt whether any body be 
 
 hardi. bold enough. 
 
 Rem. III. When personne is placed in the second 
 member of a comparison, it means any body.. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cette place lui convient mieux That place suits him better than 
 qu'à personne, any body. 
 
 • Rien, nothing, which is masculine and singular, is 
 used with, or without a negation. When with a nega- 
 tion, it means nulle chose, nothing. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 // ne s'attache a rien de solide, He applies himserf to nothing 
 
 fixed. 
 
 When used without a negation it means quelque chose 
 something. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je doute que rien soit plus pro- I doubt whether any thing be 
 pre à faire impression que, more suited to make an im- 
 &c. pression than, &c. 
 
 The negation is sometimes understood, que vous a 
 unité cela ? rien, how much did you pay for it? nothing. 
 
 It always requires the preposition de before the ad- 
 jective, or participle that follows it, and then the verb i? 
 understood, as is likewise the negation, as, rien de bea>? 
 lite le vrai, nothing is noble but truth. *T 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 25/ 
 
 SECOND CLASS. 4t 
 
 Of those which are always joined to a Substantive. -9* 116, 
 Quelque, some, signifies un, une, entre plusieurs, one 
 jut of several ; it is of both genders, and takes the I 
 
 number of the substantive. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Adressez-vous à quelque autre Apply to somebody else. 
 •personne, 
 
 Chaque, each, every, which is of both genders, has 
 uo. plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Cliaquepays a ses coutumes, Each country Las its customs. 
 
 Quelconque, aucwiy any, quel que ce soit, whatever it 
 be ; quel quHl soit, whoever he be, is of both genders, 
 
 IF EXERCISE. 
 
 To most men the misfortunes of otfiers are but 
 
 Pour ta plupart de art. mal m. ne qui 
 
 a dream. Do not to otJiers what you would not wisli (to be 
 * songe m. vouloir qu'on 
 
 done to you.) No one knows whether he deserves love or 
 vous fit savoir si est digne de de 
 
 hatred. An egotist loves nobody, not even his own children ; 
 
 égoiste pas même propre 
 
 in the whole universe he sees no one but himself. He is more 
 dans * univers ne voit * que lui seul. 
 
 (han (any body) worthy of the confidence (with which) the king 
 
 digne confiance f. dont 
 
 honours him. I doubt whether any one ever painted 
 
 honorer que ait jamais peint art. 
 
 nature in its amiable simplicity, better than the sentimental 
 — f. = f . sensible 
 
 Gessner. Has any body called on me this morning? 
 
 — * 2 est-il venu 1 chez matin m. 
 
 Nobody. There was nothing but what was great in the de- 
 ind-2 que * de * . grand dans det- 
 
 signs and works of the Egyptians. I doubt 
 
 sein ra. pi. art. ouvrage m. pi. — tiens 
 
 whether there is any thing better calculated to exalt thç 
 
 que subj-12 1 plus propre 
 
 2onl than the contemplation of the wonders of nature, 
 — r. merveille (, art. — * f. à 
 
 23* 
 
^58 SYNTAX OF THE PR030UN3. 
 
 and always is placed after a substantive ; when used 
 with a negative it is always singular. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Il ne veut se soumettre à aucune He will submit to no authority 
 autorité quelconque , whatever. 
 
 Certain, signifies quelque, certain, some. In this 
 sense it is used alike of persons and things ; but it is 
 always placed before the substantive. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 J'ai ouï dire à certain homme, I have heard some man say. 
 à un certain homme, 
 
 Un, une, a, or an, when used indeterminately foj 
 quelque, certain, some person, or some thing, takes the 
 render of the substantive to which it is joined. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 .Pai vu un homme qui courait, I saw a man who was running. 
 
 Je me suis promené dans une I walked in a large fine mea 
 grande et bdle prairie, t daw. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE SECOND CLASS. 
 
 Some enlightened people among the Egyptians pre* 
 
 éclairé 2 esjprifm.pl. \ parmi — tiens con- 
 
 served the idea of a first being, whose attributes 
 
 server ind-2 idée être art. — butm.pl.:'. 
 
 they represented under various symbols ; this (is 
 
 1 représenter ind-2 2 different symbole m. c'est ce que 
 
 proved) by the following inscription upon a temple, " I am 
 
 prouve * * cette * — f. de — m. 
 
 all that has been, is, and shall be : no mortal ever removed 
 ce qui 3 mortel 2 1 lever ind-J 
 
 the veil that covers me." Every nation has (in its turn) 
 voile m. Ù d son tour 2 
 
 shone on the theatre of the world. There is no reason whatever 
 hrillé 1 m. raison f. 
 
 that can bring him to it. Some figures appear monstrous 
 
 puisse déterminer — f. — trucur 
 
 and deformed, considered separately, or too near ; but, if ihey 
 difforme f. pi. séparément de près on ' 
 
 are put in their proper light and place, the true point of 
 
 tes met * jour à leur — — m. 
 
 view restores their beauty and grace. Yesterday F 
 
 vue f. leur rendre * art. = f. art. — f , 2 
 
 saw a lady remarkably beautiful 
 1 d'uni rare 2 beàtU 
 
SYNTAX OP THE PROKOUKS. 259 
 
 THIRD CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are sometimes joined to a Substantive, and 
 sometimes not. — Page 117. 
 
 Nul, and pas un, not any, not one, are employed ei* 
 ther alone, or in conjunction with a substantive. They 
 are accompanied by the negation, assume the feminine, 
 but have no plural, and may be followed by the preposi- 
 tion de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Xul de tous ceux qui y ont été Not one of those who went 
 n'en est revenu, there has returned. 
 
 Pas un ne croit cette nouvelle, Not one believes that intelli- 
 gence. 
 
 Je n'en ai nulle connaissance, I have no knowledge of it. 
 
 Il n'y a pas une seule personne There is not a single person that 
 qui le croie, believes it. 
 
 fiucun signifies nul, no, not any, when accompanied 
 by a negation, and may be followed by the preposition de> 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 l'ous n'avez aucun moyen de You have no means of succeed- 
 réussir dans cette affaire, in g in that affair. 
 
 This pronoun is seldom employed in the plural, ex- 
 cept before substantives, which, in some particular sense,, 
 are better employed in the plural. 
 EXAxMPLE. 
 Il n'a fait aucunes dispositions, He has made no dispositions; 
 
 Rem. Aucun may be employed without a negation in 
 interrogative sentences, or those which express doubt* 
 or exclusion. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Aucun homme fut-U jamais plus Was ever any man more sue- 
 * heureux? cessful ? 
 
 On doute qu'aucune de ces affaires They doubt whether any of 
 
 réussisse, those affairs will sucoeed. 
 
 Le plus beau morceau d'éloquence The finest piece of eloquence 
 
 qu'il y ait dans aucune langue, that exists in any language, 
 
 &c. 1F &c. 
 
 Autre, other, expresses a difference between two 
 
 H 
 
*260 SYNTAX OF THE PBONOUJÏS. 
 
 objects, or between one and several ; as, quelle autre 
 chose souhaitez -vous de moi ? what else do you wish oi 
 me ? 
 
 Rem. Autre is sometimes used to express a person 
 but indeterminate ; as, y aime mieux que vous V appreniez 
 de tout autre que de moi, I had rather you learn it of any 
 other person than me. 
 
 Un is sometimes opposed to autre ; in which case, 
 these two words are preceded by the article, supply the 
 place of the substantives to which they relate, adopt 
 \ heir gender and number, and form the pronouns Vuu 
 l'autre, Vun et Vautre, and ni Vun ni Vautre* 
 
 L'un Vautre, each other, one another, applies both 
 to persons and things : it takes both gender and num- 
 ber, and requires the article before the two words oi 
 which it is composed. If there be any preposition, il 
 must be placed before the last. When these two woraV 
 are used in conjunction, they express a reciprocal rela 
 fion between several persons or thing?. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Il faut se secourir Vun l'autre, We ought to assist each othei 
 
 IF EXERCISE ON THE THIRD CLASS. 
 
 No one likes (to see himself) as he is. No expression, no 
 se voir tel que — f. 
 
 truth of design and colouring, no strokes of genius in thai 
 
 f. dessein de coloris trait 
 
 great work. He is as learned as anyone. Not oneoi these 
 
 ouvrage m. savant 
 
 engravings announces any great skill. None of his work 
 
 gravure f. pi. annoncer un talent m. 
 
 will descend to posterity. He is so ignorant, and at the same 
 passer art. = f. — i m £ mc 
 
 time so obstinate, that he will not (be convinced) by any reason- 
 ttmps obstiné * se rendre à raison- 
 
 ing. Did any man ever attain to such a pitch oi 
 
 ntmtnt ra. jamais 2 parvenir 1 ce * comble m. 
 
 glory! I doubt whether there be in any science a more evi- 
 
 = que subj-1 — f. plus fife 
 
 dent principle. 
 7rmeux2 —pcvi. 1, 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 261 
 
 When used separately, they denote a difference. ^ 
 
 EXAMPLE 
 
 Les passions s'entendent les unes Our passions have a relation 
 avec les autres ; si Von se laisse with each other: if we in 
 aller aux mies, on attire bien- dulge some, the others will 
 tôt les autres, soon follow. | 
 
 Rem. In the latter case Vun is used for the person, or 
 thing first mentioned, and Vautre, for the person or thing 
 last spoken of. 
 
 L'un et Vautre, both; these two words mark union. 
 They require the verb to be in the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 L'une et Vautre sant bonnes, Both are good. 
 
 Ni Vun ni Vautre, neither ; these two words on the 
 contrary mark separation. The verb must be in the 
 plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Ni Vun ni Vautre n'on fait leur Neither has done his duty. 
 
 devêir, t 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 Ask another. Would any other have been so 
 
 Demander à * aurait-il eu * assez 
 
 self-conceited as to think that his private opinion could 
 d' amour-propre * pour penser particulier 2 — f . 1 pût 
 
 counterbalance the public sentiment? Reason and faith 
 
 balancer 2 opinion ? f. 1 art. Raison f. art. foi f, 
 
 equally demonstrate that we were created for another life, 
 2 démontrer 1 créer ind-4 f. 
 
 They speak ill of one another. The happiness of the people 
 
 mal m. 
 
 constitutes that of the prince ; their true interests are connected 
 faire — m. intérêt m. lié 
 
 with each other. Presumption and pride easily insinuate 
 à pi. pi. art. Présomption f. art. orgueOl 2 se glisser 
 themselves into the heart ; if we allow one the entrance, 
 
 1 m. Von y donne à2L 3 * entrée 1 
 
 it is much to fbe feared) that we shall soon (abandon our- 
 
 bien craindre on * bientôt 2 ne se livret 
 
 selves) to the other. Both relate the same story, thouel 
 
 rapporter fait m, 
 
 neither believes it to be true. 
 
 nepenser que * sait 
 
262 SYNTAX OF THE PRO^OUKS. 
 
 Même signifies qui riest pas autre, which is not difit 
 rent. It is of both genders, and takes the plural. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 C'est le même homme, It is the same man. 
 
 La même personne, The same person. 
 
 Ce sont les mêmes raisons, They are the same reasons. 
 
 Ce poème est le même que celui This poem is the same that i 
 dont je vous ai parlé, was mentioning to you. 
 
 Tel means pareil, semblable, de même, such, like, si- 
 milar. It takes both genders and both numbers. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Un tel projet ne saurait réussir, Such a scheme cannot succeed 
 fl n'y a pas de tels animaux, de There are no such animals, no 
 
 telles coutumes, such customs. 
 
 When used alone, it either preserves its proper sig- 
 nification, or it expresses a person indeterminately. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 rous ne sauriez me persuader You cannot persuade me of any 
 
 rien de tel, such thing. 
 
 Tel fait des libéralités, qui ne The same man is liberal in giv- 
 
 paye pas ses dettes, ing,who does not pay his debts 
 
 Plusieurs, several, which is plural and of both gen- 
 ders, is used alike of persons and of things. When 
 united to a substantive, or relating to it, it signifies an 
 indeterminate number, without relation to another. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Plusieurs motifs Vont déterminé, Several reasons determinedhim 
 Je crois cela pour plusieurs rai- I believe that for several rea- 
 sons, sons. 
 
 But it is likewise used as a part of a greater number. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Parmi un si grand nombre de Out of so great a number oi 
 cens, il y en eut plusieurs qui persons, several objected to 
 s'y opposèrent, it. 
 
 When plusieurs is employed absolutely as a substan- 
 tive, it always means plusieurs personnes, several per- 
 sons. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Plusieurs aiment mieux mourir Many would rather die th?c 
 
 que de perdre leur reputation, forlVit their character 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PROKOUtfS. 263 
 
 Tout is used either alone, or with a substantive. Iff 
 
 When employed alone, it signifies tout choses, all 
 things ; toute sorte de choses, every kind ol things ; 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Pout nous abandonne au moment Every thing forsakes us at the 
 de la mort ; il ne nous reste moment of death ; we retain 
 que nos bonnes œuvres, nothing but our good works. 
 
 When united to a substantive, it is used either coller- 
 lively, or distributively. 
 
 Considered collectively, tout signifies the totality of 
 a thing, and is then followed by the article. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tout VuniverSj The whole universe. 
 
 rotes les corps célestes, All the celestial bodies. 
 
 Considered distributively, tout signifies chaque, each : 
 n this case, it is not accompanied by the article. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Tout bien est desirable, t Every good is desirable. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 Does he always maintain the seme principles ? Yes, they arc 
 soutenir --ft Oui ce' 
 
 iutely the same. That general is the same that commanded 
 — ment pi. — — der 
 
 last year. Such a conduct is inexplicable. There 
 
 -irt. dernier 2 année f . 1 2 1 conduite f. — 
 
 pre no suck customs in this country. I never heard 
 
 de coutumes f. pays m. ai entendu due 
 
 [anything) similar. Ttie same man sows who often reaps 
 
 rien de * * semer recueilli, 
 
 nothing. I this morning received Several letters. Among those 
 
 1 3 matin 4 ind-4 2 lettre f, pi. 
 
 manuscripts, there are several much esteemed. Many 
 
 — crûs qu'on beaucoup 2 estime 1 
 
 by endeavouring to injure others, injure themselves morr 
 en s'efforcer de nuire à art. s>- nuire a 
 
 than they think. All is in God arid God is in all. The whole 
 
 ne penser en 
 
 course of his life has been distinguished by generous action 
 cours m. f. marqué des = 2 — î. 1 
 
 Every vice is odious. 
 — m. = 
 
564 SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Of those which are followed by que. — P. 118. 
 
 Qui, que, whoever, is only said of persons, and sig- 
 nifies quelque personne que, whatever person ; it requires 
 the verb following to be in the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Qui que ce soit qui ait fait cela, Whoever has done that, is h 
 
 c'est un habile homme, man of talent! 
 
 Qui que je sois, Whoever I may be. 
 
 Qui que c'ait été, Whoever it may have been. 
 
 Qui que c'eût été, Whoever it might have been. 
 
 Qui que ce puisse être, Whoever it may be. 
 
 When qui que, followed by ce soit, is used with a ne- 
 gative, it signifies aucune personne, nobody ; as, je n'y 
 trouve qui que ce soit, I find nobody there. 
 
 Quoi que, whatever it be, is only used of things, and 
 signifies quelque chose que, whatever thing ; it requires 
 also the verb following to be in the subjunctive 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quoi que ce soit qu'il fasse, ou Whatever he does or says, he 
 
 qu'il dise, on se défie de lui, is distrusted. 
 
 Quoi que vous disiez, je le Whatever you may say, I will 
 
 ferai, do it. 
 
 Rem. When quoi que, followed by ce soit, is used 
 with a negation, it signifies aucune chose, not anything. 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Sans application, on ne peut ré- Without application it is im 
 ussir en quoi que ce soit, t possible to succeed in any 
 
 thing whatever. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE FOURTH CLASS. 
 
 Whoever has told you so, he is mistaken. Pas 
 
 ce soit qui le se tromper ind-4 Pas 
 
 senger, whoever thou be, contemplate with religious veneration 
 
 sant mpl-r un =2 respectai. 1 
 
 this monument erected by gratitude; it is the tomb 
 
 — in. 7 it art. reCênnmissancef. ce tombeau m. 
 
 -»f a just and benevolent man. How ran he hope to l>r 
 2 bienfaisant 3 1 Comment ispercr de 
 
SYNTAX OF THE P&0X0UNS, 265 
 
 Quel que signifies de quelque sorte, de quelque espèce jf 
 
 que ce soil, of whatever sort, or kind it may be, when 
 relating to things ; or, qui que ce soit, whoever it may 
 be, whan relating to persons. It takes both gender and 
 number according to the person, or thing it relates to, I 
 
 and requires the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelles que noient vos affaires. Whatever business you may 
 
 venez, have, come. 
 
 Je rien excepte personne, quel I except nobody, whoever he 
 
 qu'il soit, may be. 
 
 Rem. Lequel que, whosoever, whichever, is also 
 ised ; as, lequel des trois que vous choisissiez, peu 
 m 'importe, whichever of the three you choose, I care 
 little. 
 
 Quelque— que, of both genders, when united to a 
 substantive, signifies quel que soit le, quelle que soit la, 
 <&e. whatever be the, &c. It has both numbers, and re- 
 quires the subjunctive. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelque raison qiC on lui apporte, Whatever reason is adduced, 
 il n'ei croit rien, lie believes nothing about it. 
 
 Quelques efforts que vous fas- Whatever attempts you may 
 siez, vous ne réussirez point, make, you will never succeed. 
 
 When united to an adjective, it operates as an ad- 
 verb, and signifies à quelque point que, however great 
 i degree ; it then neither takes gender, nor number. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quelque belle quelle puisse être, However beautiful she may be, 
 
 elle ne doit pas être vaine, she ought not to be vain. 
 
 oeloved who has regard for no one ? JVIuztever he may do» 
 
 lui ne d'égards 
 .)v say, he (will find it) very difficult to destroy pre > 
 
 qu'il aura bien de la peine détruire des pré< 
 
 iudices go deeply rooted. A mind vain, presumptuous, 
 
 )Ugé m. si profondément enraciné — présomptueux, 
 
 and inconsistent, will never succeed in any thing whatever* 
 
 sans consistance * réussir 
 
 Whatever a frivolous world may think of you, never swerve 
 
 frivule 2 monde 1 puisse se détourner 
 
 from the path of virtue. 
 
 chemin m art. f. 
 
 24 
 
96& SYNTAX OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Quelqite puissans qu'ils soient, However powerful they may 
 je rie les crains point, be, I am not afraid of them. 
 
 Tel que, such as, serves to mark a parity between 
 objects by comparison. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 C'est un homme, tel qu il vous He is just such a man as you 
 lefaut. want. 
 
 TouP — que signifies quoique, encore que, though, 
 quelque, however. On this occasion, tout is considered 
 as an adverb, and is employed with adjectives of every 
 kind, and even with some substantives. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Tout artificieux qu'ils sont, je Artful as they are, ï doubt 
 
 doute que le public soit long- whether the public will be 
 
 temps leur dupe. long their dupe. 
 
 Toute femme qu'elle est,\ Woman as she is. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 Lei the laws he (ichat they may), we must always 
 
 lot f. 4 subj-1 % quell il 
 
 respect them. Whatever efforts you make, I doubt whether 
 respecter — m. subj-1 que 
 
 you will succeed. All men, lioicever opposite they may 
 
 * réussir subj-1 art. . opposé 
 
 be, agree on that point. The man who descends 
 
 subj-1 s'accorder — m. ne rentrer en 
 
 himself only to discover his defects, and correct them, like- 
 
 que pour y démêler — in. se corriger en 
 
 to see himself as he is. Hoiccver surprising that phenomenon 
 
 surprenant 2 phénomène m. 3 
 may be, it is not against the order of nature. Children as 
 
 1 contre ordre m. art. 
 
 they are, they behaved remarkably well. 
 
 $e soul conduits fort hicn. 
 
 A GENERAL EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUI 
 
 The Evening Walk. 
 
 du 2 soir 3 promenade/. I. 
 
 On a fine summer evening, my brother, my sister, ano 
 
 Dans de 2 soirt'e 1*. 1 
 
 myself. (were walking) (by the side) of a wood 
 
 moi noifs 7:oi;s promenions >' hois m. qui 
 
EXERCISE OF THE PROXOUXS. 267 
 
 not far distant from the castle which we inhabit. We 
 
 pas bien éloigné château m. habiter O 
 
 were contemplating) with rapture the majestic scenery 
 contempler ind-2 transport — tueux 2 scène f. J , 
 
 which nature exhibits at the approach of night, when 
 art. déployer approche f. art. nuit f. quand 
 
 perceived at the foot of an ancient oak, a boy of a I, 
 
 apercevoir ind-2 à pied'm. vieux chêne m. enfant art.'?. 
 interesting countenance. His beauty, his air of in 
 
 intéressant 3 art figure f. 1 = f . — m. mg 
 
 ousness and candour, his gracefulness struck us, and we 
 tiê de = grâce pi. frapper ind-3 nous 
 
 approached him. What ! alone here, my boy ? said we 
 
 approcher ind-3 en seul ici enfant lui dîmes 
 
 whence art thou ? Whence comest thou ? What art thou 
 D'où * 2 
 
 doing here alone ? I am not alone, answered he smiling, 
 
 fais 14 3 répondre ind-3 d'un air riant 
 
 I am not alone ; but I was fatigued, and Ï (have seated my-: 
 ind-2 fatigué s'asseoir ind-4 
 
 under the shade of this tree, while my mother is busy 
 â ombre f. arbre m. tandis que oca'ipt 
 
 ithering simples to give some relief to the 
 
 'd cueillir des — pour apporter soulagement m. 
 
 pains which her aged father suffers. Ah Î (Iigw manv^ 
 
 douleur f. pi. 2 vieux 3 4 souffrir 1 que 
 
 troubles my good mamma has ! How many troubles ! 
 dépeint f. pi. 2 3 maman 4 1 
 Did you know them, there is not one of you that would no 
 
 connaître ind-2 qui *■■• . 
 
 be touched with pity, and who could refuse the tribi 
 .subj-2 de pitié * lui subj-2 un tribut 
 
 of your tears. We said to him, lovely child, thy ingénu 
 
 * larme f. pi. iad-3 * aimable 
 
 •usness. candour, innocence, (every thing), interests «> 
 
 pro. = f. pro. — f. int'resser 
 
 y misfortunes and those of thy mother. Relate them t- 
 
 d malheur m. pi. à Raconter 2 * 
 
 .«.s; whatever they be, fear not to afflict us. (Woe be) to 
 
 1 subj-1 de affliger malheur 
 whoever cannot feel for the misfortunes of other 
 
 ne sait pas s'attendrir sur malm.pl. 
 
 lie immediately related the history of his mother, with an ex 
 
 2 aussitôt 1 ind-3 = 
 
 pression, an artiessness, a grace, altogether affecting. Oir 
 naïveté f = f . touUà-fait touchant f. s, 
 
£68 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 CHAP. V. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 
 Agreement of the Verh with the Subject. 
 
 The subject is that of which something is affirmed, 
 and may always be known by the answer to this ques- 
 non, qui esUce qui ? who, or what is it ? as, Pierre 
 •oit, Peter lives ; Voiseau vole, the bird fiies ; if it be 
 asked, qui est-ce qui vit ? who is it that lives ? qui 
 est-ce qui vole ? what is it that flies ? The answers 
 Pierre and Voiseau, shew that Pierre and Voiseau are 
 the subjects of the verbs vit and vole. 
 
 Rule. The verb must be of the same number and 
 person as its subject. 
 
 hearts felt the liveliest emotions ; tears (trickled dow;. 
 
 éprouver ind-3 vif — f. nos couk? 
 
 our cheeks) and we gave him what little money we 
 ind-3 lui * art. peu de argent que 
 
 had about us. (In the mean time) the mother returned. 
 'md-2'sur cependant % revenir ind-?* 
 
 (As soon as) he saw her, he exclaimed, (make haste, N , 
 
 Dès-que apercevoir s'écrier accourir, s. 
 
 mamma; make haste ; see what these good little folks have 
 
 s. ce que gens f. pi. 
 
 given me ; I have related to them thy misfortunes ; they have 
 
 m. 
 heen affected (by them), and their sensibility (has not been 
 touché m. pi. en = f . re s'est pas 
 
 satisfied) with shedding tears. See mamma, see what the\ 
 home à des s. 
 
 have given me. The mother was moved ; she thanked us 
 
 ind-3 attendri f. remercier 
 and said: generous feeling souls, the good actioi 
 
 vous 11= 2 et sensible 3 ânu f. pi. 1 — f. 
 
 which you (have just been doing) will not be lost. He who 
 
 venez de faire perdu ï. 
 
 -ees (every thing) and judges (every thing) will not let it go 
 
 jw~ laisser 
 
 unrewarded. 
 a/tn$ récompense. 
 
SYNTAX Of THE VERB, 269 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Je ris, I laugh. Nous parlons, We speak. 
 
 Tu joue.»?, Thouplayest. Vous plaisantez, You jest. 
 
 II aime, He loves. Us sont fous, They are raad. 
 
 La vertu est aimable, virtuels amiable. 
 
 Ris is in the singular number, and the first person 
 because Je, its subject, is in the singular, and the firsl 
 person. Jones is in the singular, and the second per- 
 son, as tu is in the singular, and the second person, &c* 
 
 Re3i. I. When a verb has two subjects both singular 
 it is put in the plural. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Mon p ère et ma mère itC 'aiment My father and mother love nv 
 tendrement,] tenderly. 
 
 Rem. II. When a verb relates to subjects of differ- 
 ent persons, it agrees with the first, in preference to 
 the other two, and with the second in preference to the 
 
 IF EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 
 
 The most free of all men is he who can be free even in 
 libre art. celui même 
 
 slavery. Are we not often blind to our defects : 
 
 arc. esclavage m. * s'aveugler ind-I sur défaut 
 
 All men (are inclined) to idleness, but the savages of 
 
 art. tendre ind-1 art. sauvage art 
 
 hot countries are the laziest of all men. Do you think of 
 chaud 2 pays 1 * 
 
 imposing long on the credulky of the public ? Thou 
 
 en imposer long-temps à = f. * m. 
 
 canst not deny that he is agreatman. 
 pouvoir nier ne sub-1. 
 
 + EXERCISE. 
 His uprightness and honesty, make him courted by 
 
 droiture f. pron. honnêteté faire recherchera? 
 
 every body. Strength of body and of mind 
 
 art. f. art. celle art. se 
 
 meet not always together. A good heart and a noble sou T 
 
 reuesutrer ensemble. m. heati f 
 
 are precious gifts of nature. 
 
 de art, — 2 d*n m. pi. 1 art, — Ù 
 24* 
 
270 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 ê I third. The person addressed is named first, and the 
 
 person addressing last. On this occasion, the pronoun 
 plural nous, is generally placed before the verb, if the 
 rirst person has been mentioned before, or the pronom- 
 plural vous, if no first person has been mentioned. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 "5, votre frère, et moi, nous You, your brother, and I, read 
 lisons ensemble la brochure together the new pham- 
 nouvelle, phlet. 
 
 'Sous et votre ami, vous viendrez You and your friend will come 
 avec moi,X with me. 
 
 Rem. III. When a verb has the relative pronoui* 
 qui for its subject, it is put in the same number and 
 person as the noun, or pronoun, to which qui relates, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Est-ce moi qui ai ait cette nou- Is it I who told this nev, 
 
 vetle ? 
 Est'Ce nous qui V avons voulu ? Is it we who desired it ? 
 Ceux qui aiment sincèremtnt la Those who sincerely love virtue 
 
 vertu sont heureux^ are happy. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 You, your friend, and I, have each a different opinion. Ii 
 chacun 2 f. 1 
 
 our childhood, you and I (were pleased) with playing together 
 
 tnfancef. se plaire ind-â à inf-1 
 
 Neither I, nor (any one else) has been able to understand 
 
 ni vi d'autres ne pouvoir ind-4 * comprendre \ 
 -•any thing) in that sentence. .(Take good care) you and your bru 
 
 rien l à phrase f. se garder bien 
 
 îher, not to (give way to the impetuosity of your character. 
 * de s'abandonner = caractère m. 
 
 H EXERCISE. 
 He that complains most of mankind, is not always î i 
 Celui se plaindre le plus art homme pk* 
 that (has most reason) to complain (of them.) You that wish 
 
 êtn le plus fondé c;i vouloir 
 
 to enrich your mind with thoughts vigorously conceived and 
 * enrichir esprit de f. pi. fortement conçu f. pi. 
 
 nobly expressed, read the works of Homer and Plato. 
 
 noblement exprimé ouvrage. 
 
 JV. B. See the exercises, (rage 246 > 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 2?jfc. 
 
 OF THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 
 A verb is active, when it will admit after it quelqu'un. 
 or quelque chose ; and, the word, which is put after the 
 verb, is called the regimen of that verb. Observe that 
 this regimen may be known by asking the question. 
 qu'est-ce que ? It is called direct, and may be either a 
 noun, or a pronoun. 
 
 Rule. When the regimen of the active verb is a 
 noun, it is always placed after the verb ; when it is a 
 pronoun, it is generally placed before it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 }fa mère aime tous ses enfans, My mother loves all her children 
 
 Je vous aime, and not as in English, J'aime vous, I love you, 
 II m'aime, and not 11 aime moi, he loves me.t 
 
 Besides this regimen direct, some active verbs may 
 have a second, which is called indirect, and is marked 
 by the words à or de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 H a fait un present à sa sœur, He has made a present to his 
 
 sister. 
 
 Î EXERCISE OX THE REGIMEN OF VERBS. 
 
 He has discovered to all other nations his ambitiou- 
 
 montrer art. * peuple m. pî. = 2 
 
 design of enslaving • them, and has left U5 
 
 dessein m. 1 mettre dans l'esclavage inf-1 ne laisser 
 
 no means of defending our liberty, but by endeavouring to 
 aucun moyen inf-1 que en tâcher inf-3 de 
 
 overturn his new kingdom. Homer represents Nestor as him 
 renverser royaume m. celui 
 
 that restrained the ungovernable wrath of Achilles, the 
 
 modérer ind-2 bouillant courroux m. 
 
 vjride of Agamemnon, the haughtiness of Ajax, and the impetuous 
 
 furté f. = 2 
 
 courage of Diomed. He dared ■ not (lift up) his eyes, les' 
 — m. 1 Diomèdc. oser ind-2 lever * art. " de 
 
 they should meet tiiose of his friend, whose 
 
 peur de * * rencontrer inf-1 
 
 very silence condemned him.. He caresses them, because 
 art. même 2 m. 1 ind-2 
 be tines them. 
 
 it 
 
272 SYNTAX OF THE VEKB. 
 
 Jl accuse son ami d'imprudence, \ He accuses his friend of im- 
 prudence. 
 
 The second regimen is known by the answer to these 
 questions ; à qui ? to whom ? à quoi ? to what ? de qui ' 
 of whom 1 de quoi ? of what ? 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 l.qui a-t-ilfait un présent ? To whom did he make a present 
 4 sa sœur, To his sister. 
 
 Be quoi accuse-t-il son ami ? Of what does he accuse his friend 
 D'imprudence. Of imprudence 
 
 Passive verbs require de, or par, before the noun, 01 
 pronoun that follows them. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La souris est mangée par le chat, The mouse is eaten by the cat. 
 Un enfant sage est aimé de tout A good child is loved by even 
 le monde, body. 
 
 Rem. The French never use the word par, before 
 Dieu, God; they say, les médians seront punis de Dieu. 
 
 î EXERCISE. 
 
 In submitting to the yoke of Asia, Greece would have 
 En subir \nf-Z * joug m. art. art. 
 
 i bought virtue subjected to voluptuousness, the mina 
 ■ wire art. 3 assujettir iuf-1] art. volupté f. 
 fo the body, and courage to a senseless force, which consiste ; 
 
 art. insensée — f . 1 ind-2 
 
 only in numbers. Three hundred Lacedemonians, hast- 
 nc que art. multitude f. s. — niens, couri) 
 
 enrd to Thermopylae to certain death, content in dying, to 
 ind-:i art. —piles pi. un assuré 2 f . 1 en di 
 
 have sacrificed to their country, an inlinite number of barbarians 
 
 immoler pays m. 1 harbare 
 
 and to have left to their countrymen the example of an unheard 
 
 de laisser compatriote inouï 2 
 
 of bravery. You knew the importance which your parents 
 * hardiesse f. 1 savoir ind-2 — f. que ~~ 
 
 attached to the success of that aifair : why have you noi 
 
 ind-2 réussite f. f. pourquoi 
 
 hastened to announce it (to them ?) 
 
 r ind-4 de t f. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 27S 
 
 i. in order to avoid making use of by, may be thus 
 Englished ; God will punish the wicked. IF 
 
 Some few neuter verbs have no regimen ; as, dor- 
 
 to sleep ; but man}' of them have a government. 
 Rule. Some neuter verbs require à, others de, be- 
 fore their regimen, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Tout genre d'excès nuit à la Every kind of excess is hurtful 
 
 saute, to health. 
 
 Il médit de tout h monde,] lie slanders every body 
 
 '■• IT EXERCISE. ~~~ 
 The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the 
 Troit pris f. sacc &gé détruit 
 
 confederate Greeks, 1148 years before the Christian sera : this 
 confédéré 2 1 avant 2 ère f. 1 
 
 event has been celebrated by the two greatest poets of Greece 
 
 art. 
 Italy. You will only be beloved, esteemed, and 
 pr. art. 
 Girted by men, (in proportion as) you join the 
 
 rerhercher de que autant que joindre ind-7 
 
 «jiialities of the heart to those of the mind. God pu- 
 
 = f. pi. pr. 3 pu 
 
 jiished the Jews every time when 
 
 Ir (passive voice ind-3 2) peuple Juif 1 toutes les fois que 
 
 ;ieaf to the voice of the prophets, they fell into 
 
 >ourd f. prophète sing, tomber ind-3 dan* 
 
 idolatry and impiety. 
 = art. = 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 This sentiment has pleased the king and all the nation 
 à à 
 
 h\ his retirement, he (has the full enjoyment) of the 
 dans retraite f. jouir tout 
 
 faculties of his soul. To slander (any one) is to assassinate 
 — f. pi. * raédire de quelqu'un c'est * 
 
 !iim in cold blood. The honest man seldom (permits himself \ 
 de 2 ,sang 1 rarement 2 se permettre 1 
 
 to jest, because he knows the mosr 
 
 de * art. plaisanterie f. pi. parce que savoir que 
 
 innocent jests may sometimes hurt the reputation. It i^ 
 
 f. pi. * pouvoir quelquefois nuire à f. ce 
 
 only in retirement that one truly enjoys one's self 
 
 ne que. art. on véritablement 2 jouir l de soi 
 
 <♦ 
 
274 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 Reflected verbs have for their regimen the pei\s 
 pronouns me, te, se, nous, and vous, and this regimen is 
 sometimes direct, and sometimes indirect. 
 
 OF THE NATURE AND USE OF MOODS AND TENSE.-. 
 
 Of the Indicative. 
 
 The indicative is that mood which simply declare- 
 and affirms a thing. It contains eight tenses, viz. the; 
 present, the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in- 
 definite, the 'preterit anterior, the pluperfect, the future 
 simple, and the future anterior. 
 
 The present marks that a thing is now passing, that is, 
 either existing, or doing. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Jaime I love Us jouent They play 
 
 The imperfect expresses a present with respect to 
 something past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 J'entrais au moment oh vous I came in at the moment you 
 
 sortiez,' were going out. 
 
 Or it expresses something past, but habitual, without 
 fixing the time of its duration. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 César était un habile général, Caesar was an able general. 
 
 The preterit definite marks that a thing took place aj 
 a time completely past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 T écrivis hier à Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 
 
 The preterit definite expresses a tiling as having 
 taken place at a time which is neither precise, nor de- 
 terminate. 
 
 His work has pleased every one, because it unite> 
 
 ouvrage m. à art. monde joim1?> 
 
 to real utility the charms of style, and the beau 
 
 un 2 = f . 1 agrément ra. pi. art. m. 
 
 nos of sentiment, 
 art. pi. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE VERB* frW< 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Il m'a fait un vrai plaisir en He has given me real pleasure 
 venant me voir, by coming to see me. 
 
 Or at a time which is not absolutely past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 JFai vu cette semaine beaucoup dz I have seen many people this 
 
 monde. t week. 
 
 X EXERCISE ON THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 My sister is in her chamber, where she (is occupied) in reading 
 où s'occuper à inf-1 
 
 ancient history, the study (of which) pleases her extremely, 
 2 1 2 dont 1 lui infiniment 
 
 Benefits bestowed are (so many) trophies 
 
 art Bienfait que on répandre ind-1 de sri.tr 'ophée que on 
 
 ted in the heart of those whose felicity (has been 
 
 'jcr ind-1 1 art. = f. 4 on 2 faire 
 
 promoted) (by them.) The great Corneille was busy in his 
 1 3 * — occupé 
 
 g the pian of one of his tragedies, when a ser- 
 vd È inf-1 — m. == do- 
 
 ■ant, terrified, came to tell him that his house was 
 
 tout effrayé ind-3 * lui * art. 3 prendre 
 
 en fire : go and find my wife, replied he : I do 
 
 -6 2 art. 1 * trouver répondre ind-3 
 
 not understand household concerns. Some Hunga- 
 
 entendre rien à art. affaire pî. du ménage m. de art. Hon- 
 
 dan noblemen revolted from the Emperor Sigismund ; 
 
 2 seigneur. 1 se révolter ind-3 contre = — mond 
 
 this prince heard it, and marched boldly against 
 
 apprendre ind-3 fièrement au-devant de 
 
 them : which, among you, said he (to them), will lay hands 
 d'entre ind-3 mettre 1 art. f. 
 
 upon his king first ? If there be one bold enough 
 sing. 3 4 art. 2 en un hardi 2 1 
 
 in advance. This noble firmness struck the rebels 
 
 en imposer à séditieux 
 
 'with awe), who returned immediately to their duty. 1 have 
 
 * rentrer aussi-tôt dans le devoir 
 
 travelled through almost ali Europe, and I have visited the 
 voyager dans art. — f. 
 
 most celebrated places in Asia and Africa ; if, on the one 
 
 — Ire 2 lieu \ de art. Asie pr. art. Afrique dé * 
 hand, I admired the master-pieces of art. of every kind, whick 
 %ôtém. ind-4 cliefs-d 'œuvre art. en tout genre 
 
 it 
 
SYNTAX or THE VEBB. 
 
 The preterit anterior expresses that a thing had taken 
 place immediately before a time which is passed, and 
 this tense is either .definite, or indefinite. There is the 
 same difference between its two forms, as between the 
 two preterits, definite and indefinite. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 J 1 tus dinê hier à midi, I had dined yesterday at twelve 
 
 Quand feus dîné hier, midi When I had dined yesterday, it 
 
 sonna, struck twelve. 
 
 J'ai eu déjeuné ce matin à dix I had done breakfast this morn 
 
 heures, ing at ten o'clock. 
 
 The pluperfect is that past tense which expresses a 
 thing as having taken place at any period antecedent to 
 the time when another thing happened ; or it expresses 
 a thing habitually done before another. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 .Vavais soupe quand il entra, I had supped when he came in 
 
 Lorsque j'étais à la campagne, When I was in the country, as 
 dès que f avais d< jeûné, f allais soon as I had breakfasted, I 
 à la chasse, used to go a hunting. 
 
 The future absolute, is that tense which expresses thai 
 .in action or event will take place at a time which 
 riot yet exist. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Tirai demain à la campagne, I shall go to-morrow into the 
 
 country. 
 
 The future anterior is the tense which expresses thaï 
 at a time when a thing will take place, another thing will 
 have already taken place. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Quand j'aurai fini, je sortirai,^ When I have done, I shall g<- 
 
 out. 
 
 the protection of enlightened governments has produced, on 
 
 art. 9 1 faire naître 
 
 the other, I shed tears, (on seeing) the ravages of ig 
 
 ind-4 de art. sur — art 
 
 norance and barbarism. 
 
 pr. art. barbaric f. 
 
SYNTAX OT THE VERB. 
 
 27? 
 
 OF THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 The conditional is the mood which affirms on condi 
 ions ; it has two tenses, the present and the past. 
 
 The present of the conditional is 'hat tense which 
 expresses that a thing would take place on certain con- 
 ditions. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je ferais votre affaire axant peu, I would settle your business be 
 si elle dépendait uniquement de, fore long, if it only depended 
 mot, upon me. 
 
 The past of the conditional is that tense which ex- 
 presses that a thing would have taken place at a time 
 vhich no longer exists, dependant on certain conditions. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 t'aurais, ou f eusse fait votre I would have settled your bu- 
 affaire, si vous m'en aviez, ou siness, if you had mentioned 
 m'en eussiez parlé, t it to me. 
 
 «[ EXERCISE ON THE PRETERIT ANTERIOR, &c. 
 ï had done yesterday, at noou. I (went out) (as soon as) I 
 finir midi sertir iud-4 dès-que 
 
 <iad dined. As soon as Caesar had crossed the Rubicon, he had 
 
 passer — 
 
 ne longer to deliberate ; he (was obliged) to conquer or to die 
 
 plus devoir ind-2 * vaincre * 
 
 I had finished the task that you had imposed upon me, when 
 
 tâche f. imposer f. * 
 
 you came in. Those who had contributed most to his elevation 
 
 — biurleplus 
 to the throne of his ancestors, were those who laboured with 
 sur travailler 
 
 ,he most eagerness to precipitate him (from it.) I shall 
 de acharnement en ne point 
 
 shortly go into the country, where I intend to (collect 
 
 >arder à à campagne se proposer de herbo 
 
 plants), (in order to) (make myself perfect) in the knowledge 
 riser inf-1 pour se perfectionner 
 
 of botany. When I have done reading the di 
 
 art. botanique f. achever ind-8 de inf-1 
 
 vine writings of Homer and Virgil, and my mind has imbib- 
 l écrit m. 1 pr. que se p< 
 
 ed their beauties, I shall read the other epic poets. 
 
 nétrer ind-8 de ind-7 2 1 
 
 25 
 
278 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 
 
 OF THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 The imperative is that mood which commands, ex. 
 horts, entreats, or reproves. It is a present with re- 
 spect to the injunction, and a future with respect to the 
 thing enjoined. 
 
 In many verbs a compound of the imperative may be 
 used to express an injunction to have a thing done pre- 
 viously to another 1 , as, ayez dîné avant que je revienne, 
 have dined before I return. ;j: 
 
 { EXERCISE ON THE OONDITIONAL. 
 
 What would not be the felicity of man, if he always sough; 
 
 Quel * — f. chercher md*2 
 
 his happiness in himself? I shall be glad to see you harmo- 
 
 7twi.pl. 
 nions, happy, and comfortable. A dupe to my imagination, ï 
 
 tranquille * de 
 
 mould have (been bewildered) (but for) you in my search 
 
 s'égarer sans * art recherche f, 
 
 liter truth. Enquire whether he would have consented to 
 fie art. s'informer si consentir 
 
 ihose conditions, m case he had thought himself able 
 
 dans art. que se croire subj-4 capable 
 
 o fulfil them. 
 de remplir. 
 
 t EXERCISES ON THE IMPERATIVE. 
 
 Be not fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which 
 
 sing. passionnr pour art. louange f. art. 
 
 procures it. Let us remember that unless virtue guide 
 
 -Ulirer s souvenir à moins que art. ne 
 
 us, our choice must be wrong. Let us not be deceived b\ 
 d-.roir ind-1 mauvais se laisser prendre a 
 
 the first appearances of things ; but let us take lime to 
 
 art. se> donner art. <l 
 
 fix our judgment. Arbiters of the destinies of men, do 
 
 Arbitre — née art. art. 
 
 good if you wish to be happy; do good, if you wish that your 
 bien vouloir * 
 
 memory should be honoured ; do good, if you wish (bat 
 iubj-1 
 

 SYNTAX OF THE VERB. 279 
 
 OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 The subjunctive is that mood which expresses a sub- 
 ordination to what precedes. With this dépendance 
 it forms a sense, and none without. Je voudrais qu'il 
 lût, forms sense, but qu'il lût, alone and unconnected, 
 floes not. 
 
 This mood contains four tenses, the present, or future, 
 the imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect. 
 
 The present and the future of the subjunctive can 
 only be distinguished by the sense ; in this phrase, 
 il faut que je vous sois bien attaché pour venir vous 
 voir par le temps qu'il fait, I must have a great esteem 
 for you to come and see you in such weather as this ; 
 je sois, expresses a present time ; but in this, je ne 
 crois pas que vous obteniez cela de lui, I do not think 
 you will obtain that of him, vous obteniez expresses a 
 future, and stands for vous obtiendrez. 
 
 The imperfect, the preterit, and the pluperfect of 
 the subjunctive express also a past, or future, ac- 
 cording to circumstances ; in this phrase, soupçonniez- 
 vous qu'il ne le fît pas, did y <ya suspect he would not 
 do it, fît expresses a past ; but in this, je désirerais 
 qu'il vît du monde, I wish him to see company, vît marks 
 a future. IF 
 
 heaven should open to you its eternal gates. Never forget that 
 
 sub-1 2 porte f 1 
 
 the truly free man is he, who, superior to all fears, and 
 
 véritablement 2 3 1 dfgagé de f-s. 
 
 all desires, is subject only to the gods and to reason. 
 pr. ra-s. soumis ne que art. f. 
 
 1Î EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Men must be (very much) blinded by their pas 
 
 art. 3 it 1 que 2 subj-1 bien aveuglé 
 
 sions, not to acknowledge that they ought to (love 
 
 2 pour 1 devoir ind-1 * 
 
 one another) as parts of a whole ; and as (the members 
 fentfaimcj art font % 
 
i80 SYNTAX OF TIIE VEiU*. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 The infinitive is that mood which affirms indeterrm. 
 nately without either number, or person. 
 
 It denotes of itself, neither present, past, nor future, 
 except when it follows other verbs. The present al- 
 ways expresses a present, relative to the preceding 
 verb ; as, je Je rois, je le vis, je le verrai venir, I see. 
 Isaw, I shall see him come. The past always ex 
 presses a past, relative to the verb that precedes it, jt 
 crois, je croyais Vavoir vu venir, I think, I thought 
 that I had seen him coming. To express a future, the 
 
 of our body) (would do) if (every one) had a particular vitality 
 
 1 chacun md-2 sa 2 vie 1 
 
 You aslfed him to come with us; but I doubt whether he 
 
 prier ind-4 de q ue 
 
 will have that complaisance. Ï could not persuade myself that 
 
 subj-1 ind-2 
 
 lie was so vain as to aspire to that place. Though ever* 
 
 subj-2 assez * pour — f. 
 
 body says so, Î do not believe that he is gone to Rome 
 
 subj-1 M subj-1 
 
 Is it possible) that he should let slip so good an oppor- 
 
 s&pojmoir laisser subj-3 échapper beau occasi 
 
 tunity of acquiring immortal glory ? I could have wished 
 ont un 2 1 
 
 fhat he had availed himself of his abode in the country; to 
 
 profiter subj-4 séjour à campagne put' 
 
 perfect himself in the study of philosophy. 
 m perfectionner art. = f . 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 We only shut our eyes to truth, because we fear t< 
 
 ne * art. art. que parce que de 
 
 see ourselves as we are. We were yet far from the castle. 
 
 2 nous 1 tel que ind-2 encore 
 
 when one of our friends came to join us. I did not think ) 
 
 in d-3 * ind-2 
 
 was to set out so soon. He promises every day that he 
 devoir* ail. pi. de 
 
 vill amend, but I do not rely upon his promises. 
 * se corriger compter vromessr t 
 
SYNTAX OE THE PARTICIPLE. 281 
 
 infinitive must be preceded by the infinitive of the verb 
 devoir ; as, je croyais devoir y aller, I thought I was 
 to go there. 
 
 Remark. The infinitive also expresses a future 
 after the verbs permettre, espérer, compter, s'attendre 
 and menacer ; as, il promet de venir (qu'il viendra), 
 he promises to come (that he will come) ; il menace de 
 s'y rendre (qu'il s'y rendra), he threatens to go (that 
 he will go) there. f 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 The participle is a part of the verb which partakes 
 of the properties both of a verb and an adjective ; of a 
 verb, as it has its signification and regimen, of an ad- 
 jective, as it expresses the quality of a person, or thing. 
 
 There are two participles, the participle present, and 
 the participle past. 
 
 OF THÉ PARTICIPLE PRESEM. 
 
 The participle present always terminates in ant ; as, 
 aimant, finissant, recevant, rendant. 
 
 They talk of a secret expedition ; he hopes to be (in it.) He 
 on 2 — f 1 * en 
 
 relies upon seeing you very soon, to terminate 
 
 compter * inf-1 au premier jour pour 
 
 amicably his affair with you. You expected to take a 
 
 à V amiable s'attendre ind-2 faire 
 
 journey this year ; but your father has changed his mind. 
 voyage m. de * avis 
 
 He threatens to punish us severely, if we (fall again) into the 
 
 de sévèrement retomber 
 
 same error. 
 faute. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 
 
 That mountain being very high, and thus commanding a 
 ilerê ainsi dominer sur 
 
 vast extent of country, was very well calculated for out 
 grœrtde étemuz pays ind-2 * vropre 4 
 
 25* 
 
282 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE, I 
 
 Rule. The participle present remains unchanged, 
 and takes neither gender nor number when it ex- 
 presses an action, as, une montagne, or des montagnes 
 ilominanl sur des plaines immenses, a mountain, or 
 mountains commanding immense plains : un homme x 
 des hommes, une femme, des femmes lisant, parlant, 
 marchant, a man, men, a woman, women reading, 
 speaking, walking. But when, like an adjective, it 
 expresses simply a quality, it takes both the gender 
 and number of its substantive ; as, un homme obligeant. 
 an obliging man ; une femme obligeante, an obliging 
 woman ; des tableaux parlons, speaking portraits ; la 
 religion dominante, the established religion ; à la nuit 
 tombante, at night fall. 
 
 What grammarians call gerund, is nothing but thf 
 pariiciblé present, to which the word en is prefixed ; 
 on se forme V esprit en lisant de bons livres, we form oui 
 minds by reading good books. 
 
 observations. Tins woman is of good disposition, obliging 
 
 caractère m. 
 every one, whenever she (has it in her power). They go 
 'out le monde quand le pouvoir 
 
 cringing before the great, that they may be insolent to then 
 ramper devant pi. afin de * * inf-1 pi. arte 
 
 equals. The state of pure nature is that of the savage living in the 
 
 desert, but living in his family, knowing his children, loving then) 
 
 famille (.connaître 
 making use) of speech, and (making himself understood. 
 
 vs&r art. parole faire entendit 
 
 An agreeable languor imperceptibly (laying hold) of m\ 
 
 2 langueur f. 1 insensiblement s'enipar* r 
 
 senses, suspended the activity of my soul, and [ fell ''asleep.' 
 t&ts suspendre ind-3 dormit 
 
 Time h a peal blunderer, placin 
 ad-3 art. brouillon m m rt ranger 
 
 disordering, impressing, erasing, approach in . r loving, and 
 déranger imprimer effacer approch r suer 
 
 making all things, good and bad; and almost always (imposs : 
 rendre f. pi. presque 
 
 ,Ae to be known again.) 
 tnnaissablc 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPEE. 28S 
 
 OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 The participle past has various terminations ; as. 
 aimé, fini, reçu, ouvert, dissous, &c. 
 
 This participle may either agree with its subject, or 
 its regimen. 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST WITH 
 ITS SUBJECT. 
 
 Rule. I. The participle past, when accompanied b\ 
 the auxiliary verb être, agrees with its subject in gender 
 and number. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mon frère est tomhê. My brother is fallen . 
 
 Mes frères sont tombés, My brothers are fallen. 
 
 Ma sœur est tombée, My sister is fallen. 
 
 Mes sœurs sont tombées, My sisters are fallen. 
 
 La nuit sera bientôt passée, The night will soon be over 
 
 Les spectacles so ne fréquentés, The theatres are frequented. 
 
 Cette fleur est fort recherchée, This flower is much sought after. 
 
 fis sont fort estimés, They are very much esteemed 
 
 EXEPwCISE ON THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 
 
 Fire-arms were not known to the ancients. Isbmael. 
 
 art. armc-à-feu f. pi. ind-4 connu de ïsmaël 
 
 the son of Abraham, is known among the Arabs, as (the man 
 * — parmi Arabe celui 
 
 from whence they sprung, and circumcision has remained 
 
 être sorti art. f. être demeuré 
 
 ■'among them) as the mark of their origin. Heaven is tha 1 
 
 leur f. art. 
 
 permanent city, (into which) the just are to be received aft es 
 — 2 cité f. 1 où pi. devoir nprèt* 
 
 this life. In Abraham's time, the threatenings of the true 
 
 de 2 art. 1 menace f pi. 
 
 (Jod was dreaded by Pharaoh, king of Egypt ; but, in the tim» 
 
 ind-2 redouté de Pharaon 
 of Moses, all nations were corrupted, and the world, whici. 
 
 Moïse art. f. perverti 
 
 God has made to manifest his power, was become a temph 
 
 pour pouvoir m . detenu 
 
 ?M idols. That dreadful crisis which threatened the state with 
 terrible 2 crise f. 1 ind-4 de 
 
284 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPAS. 
 
 Rule. II. The participle past, when it follows the 
 verb avoir, never agrees with its subject. 
 
 Mon frère a écrit, My brother has written. 
 
 Mes frères ont écrit, My brothers have written. 
 
 Ma sœur a écrit; My sister has written. 
 
 Mes sœurs ont écrit, My sisters have written. 
 
 Les Amazones ont acquis de la The Amazons have acquired 
 
 célébrité, celebrity. 
 
 Vai contraint les soldats à mar- I have forced the soldiers to 
 
 cfœr, march. 
 
 Remark. The participle of the verb être, and of 
 all the neuter verbs which are conjugated with the 
 auxiliary verb avoir, never vary, as, il or elle a clé, he, 
 or she has been ; ils or elles ont été, they have been : 
 d or elle a dormi, he or she has slept ; ils or elles mi 
 nui, they have annoyed. IT 
 
 instant destruction, was happily soon after* She Is 
 
 prochain 2 f . 1 ind-3 heureusement passe 
 
 come to bring us all kinds of refreshment-. The sciences 
 
 * sorte f. sing. rafraîchissement f. 
 
 have afways been protected by enlightened government?. 
 protégé art. éclairé 2 1 
 
 IF EXERCISE. 
 The Romans successively triumphed over the most 
 
 Romain successivement 2 ind-4 1 de 
 
 warlike nations. Lampridius relates that Adrian erected 
 
 belliqueux 2 1 raconter Adrien élever 
 
 to Jesus Christ some temples, which (were still 
 ind-6 de art. on encore 2 
 
 to be seen) in his time. Happy those princes who have 
 voir in d-2 1 de * art. 
 
 never (made use) of their power but to do goodJ We 
 
 user pouvoir que pour art. bien 
 
 have spent the whole day in tormenting ourselves. One 
 
 jour it e f . à inf-1 2 nous 1 
 
 has seldom seen a great stock of good sense in a man oi 
 rarement fonds m. sens â 
 
 imagination. The errors of Descartes proved very useful 
 
 — = — htMHCUtp serrir 
 
 to Newton. 
 ind-4 — 
 
SïNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 28& 
 
 AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST WITH ITS REGIMEN, 
 
 Rule L The participle past always agrees with its 
 regimen direct, when that regimen is placed before the 
 participle, whether the auxiliary verb that accompanies 
 it be avoir, or être. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les écoliers que j'ai eus, ant The pupils, whom I have had. 
 
 fait de grands progrès, have made rapid progress. 
 
 fjiicrcce s'est tuée, Lucretia has killed herself. 
 
 Tai renvoyé les livres que vous I have sent back the book- 
 
 m' aviez prêtis, which you had lent me. 
 
 Que de soins je me suis donnés ! What pains ï have taken .' 
 
 Quelle affaire avez-vous entre- What business have you under 
 
 prise ? taken ? 
 
 Quand la race de Cain se fut mid- When the race of Cain had 
 
 tipliée, multiplied. 
 
 Ce yeux que n'ont émus ni soupirs Those eyes which neither sighr 
 
 ni terreur, nor terror have moved. 
 
 (.e Bum Mercure, est un de ceux The God Mercury is one oî 
 
 que les anciens ont le plus mul- those whom the ancients havt 
 
 tipliés, multiplied the most. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE AGREEMENT OF THE PARTICI 
 PLE PAST WITH ITS REGIMEN. 
 
 All the letters which I have received, confirm that import 
 t. pi. confirmer 
 
 ant news. The agitated life which I have ltd till 
 2 s. 1 agité 3 f . 1 mener jusqu'à 
 
 now, makes me sigh for retirement. The difficulties 
 
 présent soupirer après art. retraite f. f. pi. 
 
 which the academies (have proposed to one another) do not 
 
 se faire ind-4 
 seem easy to (be resolved.) The sciences which you have 
 paraître aisé résoudre f. pi. 
 
 studied, will prove infinitely useful (to you.) The death which 
 
 être f. 
 
 Lucretia (gave herself) has (made her immortal.) The 
 
 se donner ind-4 immortaliser ind-4 
 
 cities which those nations have (built for themselves) are 
 ville f. pi. peuple se bâtir ind-4 
 
 but a collection of huts. The persons whom you have in 
 ne que amas m. chaumière f. pi. 
 
$86 SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE. 
 
 Rem. The regimen which precedes the participle is 
 either one of these pronouns, que, me, te, se, le, la, les 
 nous, and vous, or a noun sometimes joined to the pro- 
 noun quel, sometimes preceded by the word of quantity. 
 combien, or que, signifying combien, how much, as ma} 
 be seen in the examples already given, f 
 
 Rule II. The participle past never agrees with its re- 
 gimen, either when that participle is without regimen di- 
 rect, or when, having a regimen direct, that regimen i? 
 placed after it. 
 
 structcd appear to me possessed of reason and taste. Nothing 
 
 plein pr. 
 
 can equal the ardour of the troops which I have seen (setting off. • 
 
 égaler f. pi. inf-1 
 
 The chimeras which she has got in her head, (are beyond 
 
 chimère f. pi. se mettre art. jyasser 
 
 all belief. What measures have I not taken ! What fortune? 
 
 croyance f. dmarchfsf.pl. faire f. pi. 
 
 has not this revolution ruined ! What tears has she not shed ; 
 renverser Que de f. pi. vtrscr 
 
 what sighs has she not htavtd ! The Amazons (made themselves • 
 
 m. pi. pousser f. pi. se rendre ind-4 
 
 famous by their courage. The city of London has (made itself. 
 célèbre f. 
 
 hy its commerce, the metropolis of the universe. I have thought 
 — m. — le f. croire 
 
 her agitated by the furies. This day is one of those which they 
 
 = in. pi. 
 
 have consecrated to tears. The language in which Cicero ami 
 
 consacrer art. langue f. * t icéron 
 
 Virgil have written, will live in their works. I could have wished 
 par ouvrage * vouloii 
 
 to avoid entering into those details, but I thought them nece? 
 * éviter (Centrer — m. croire ind-4 
 
 sary. The tribunes demanded of Clodius the execution ci 
 
 tribun m. pi. ind-3 à 
 the promises which the consul Valerius had gire n them, 
 f. faire leur. 
 
 H FAERCISK. 
 The persons whose visit you had announced to me, ar» 
 
 f. pi. I art. f. 5 * k 2 4 ^ 
 
SYNTAX OF THE PARTICIPLE, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 La lettre dont je vous ai parlé, 
 
 La perte et les profits auxquels 
 il a participé, 
 
 Les académies se sont fait des ob- 
 jections, 
 
 Vous avez instruit ces personnes 
 à dessiner, 
 
 Lucrèce s'est donné la mort,^ 
 
 The letter which I have men 
 
 tioned to you. 
 The loss and profits which he 
 
 has shared. 
 The academies have proposed 
 
 objections to one another. 
 You have taught these persons 
 
 to draw. 
 Lucretia has put a period to her 
 
 existence. 
 
 Rule. HI, The participle past takes neither gender 
 uor number when the participle and the auxiliary verb 
 to which it is joined are used impersonally, nor when 
 that participle is followed by a verb, which governs the 
 pronouns, or pronouns preceding it. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Les chaleurs excessives qu'il a The excessive heats, which we 
 
 fait cet été, ont beaucoup nui 
 
 à la recette, 
 Quelle fâchuse aventure vous 
 
 est-il arrivé ? 
 La maison que j'ai fait bâtir, 
 
 imitez les vertus que vous avez 
 
 entendu louer, 
 Les mathématiques que vous 
 
 n J avez pas voulu quej'ttudiasse, 
 
 have had this summer, havt 
 done great injury to the corn. 
 
 What unpleasant adventure 
 have you met with ? 
 
 The house which I have order- 
 ed to be built. 
 
 Imitate the virtues which you 
 have heard praised. 
 
 The mathematics which you 
 would not permit me to study. 
 
 come. Men built themselves cities. The Amazons 
 
 art. se bâtir ind-4 de art. 
 
 acquired great celebrity. I \mve forced the soldier? 
 
 ind-4 beaucoup de = contraindre 
 
 to march. That woman has bestowed on herself fine gowns. 
 
 se donner * * de 
 
 Letters and writing were invented to represent 
 
 art. 4 art. écriture 5 on 1 a 2 3 pour peindre 
 
 speech. She has at two (of her) fingers. Titus has made 
 
 art. se couper * doigt m. pi. rendre 
 
 his wife mistress of his riches. I have given myself (a great deal} 
 
 bun bien 
 
 of , trouble. Commerce has made this city flourishing 
 
 art.»ei'/ef. art. m. rendre f florissant 
 
 They have made an appointment 
 se donner * rendez-vous. 
 
t288 SYNTAX OP THE PABTICIPLE, 
 
 Elle s'est laissé séduire, She has suffered herself to be 
 
 seduced. 
 
 Remark. To make a right application of the second 
 part of this rule, we ought to examine whether we can 
 put the regimen immediately after the participle. As 
 we cannot say ; J'ai fait la maison, vous avez entendu 
 les vertus, vom n'avez pas voulu les mathématiques, it 
 follows that the regimen belongs to the second verb. 
 Sometimes, however, the regimen may relate either to 
 the participle, or to the following verb, according to the 
 meaning of the speaker. Thus, Je Vai vu peindre, 
 means, I saw her picture drawn ; but Je Vai vue pein» 
 dre, signifies, I saw her painting. 
 
 Sometimes it happens likewise, that, in sentences 
 which seem to resemble each other, the regimen in onu 
 belongs to the participle, and in the other to the verb 
 which follows it. For instance, this question, Avez- 
 vous entendu chanter la nouvelle actrice ? Have you 
 heard the new actress sing ? should be thus answered, 
 Oui, je Vai entendue chanter, yes, I have : but this ques- 
 tion, Avez -vous entendu chanter la nouvelle ariette ? 
 Have you heard the new song ? must be answered. Oui. 
 je Vai entendu chanter, yes, I have.f 
 
 ~~t EXERCISE" 
 The great changes which (have taltcn place) in admi 
 changement y avoir ind-4 art. 
 
 nistration, have astonished many people. The heavy rains 
 bien des personnes grand pluie 
 
 which we have had in the spring, have been the cause 
 
 f. pi. * il faire ind-4 
 
 of many diseases. The scarcity which there was last 
 
 maladie f. pi. disette f. ind-4 art. dernier it 
 
 winter, has afforded the opportunity of doing much good. What 
 
 1 donner occasion inf-1 bien 
 
 lews has r ached you 7 How many imprudent steps 
 
 est-il venu Que de faux demarche f. pi 
 
 were taken on that occasion Î How many large ships have 
 il s'est fa'fe en gros il se 
 
 heen built in England within 1hese fifty years ! The figures 
 construite ind-4 depuis * — 
 
 which you have learned to draw are of great beauty. \W 
 apprendre, dessiner un 
 
SYNTAX OF THE ADVERB, 28S 
 
 CHAP. VÏ. 
 
 OF THE ADVERBS. 
 
 Situation of the Adverbs. 
 
 Rule I. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally 
 placed after the verb ; and, in the compound tenses, be» 
 tween the auxiliary and the participle. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'homme h plus éclairé est ordi- The man who is most learned 
 
 nairement celui qui pense le is generally he who thinks 
 
 plus modestement delui-même, most modestly of himself. 
 
 % Avérons jamais vu un pédant Have you ever seen a pedant 
 
 plus absurde et plus vain '! more absurd and more vain ? 
 
 Compound adverbs, and those which have preserved 
 i.he regimen of the adjectives from which they are de- 
 rived, are placed always after the verb, as, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 C'est à la mode, That is fashionable. 
 
 // a agi conséquemment, He has acted consistently. 
 
 Adverbs which denote time in an indeterminate man 
 aer are likewise placed after the verb. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 U eût fallu se lever plus matin, It would have been necessary 
 
 to rise earlier. 
 On a ru cela autrefois, That has been seen formerly. 
 
 Exceptions. 1. Adverbs of order, rank, and those 
 which express a determinate time, are placed either be- 
 fore, or after the verb. 
 
 ought never to swerve from the good path which we 
 
 falloir ind-1 * s'éloigner route f. on 
 
 have begun to follow. The measures, which you advised 
 
 mesure f. pi . conseiller ind-4 
 
 me to adopt, have not succeeded. The rule, which I have be- 
 
 de prendre réussir règle f. 
 
 gun to explain, seems to me very easy to (be understood.) Yoj 
 
 expliquer sembhr saisir 
 
 see that I have not (been mistaken) respecting the affairs which 
 
 se tromper ind-4 
 I had foreseen you would have in hand. 
 prévoir que * * 
 
 26 
 
990 SYNTAX OF THE VEttB, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Nous devons premièrement/aire We ought, first, to do our duty \ 
 notre devoir ; secondement secondly, enjoy lawful plea- 
 chercher les plaisirs permis, sures. 
 
 Aujourd'hui il fait beau ; il To-day, it is fine ; it will rain 
 pleuvra peat-tire demain. perhaps to-morrow. 
 
 2. These adverbs, comment, où, d'où, par où, com. 
 bien, pourquoi, quand, used with, or without interroga- 
 tion, are always placed before the verb which they 
 modify. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Comme vous portez-vous ? How do you do ? 
 
 Oit allez-vous ? Where are you going ? [it. 
 
 Il ne sait comment s'y prendre, He does not know how to set about 
 Rule II. The adverb is always placed before the 
 adjective which it modifies. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Cest une femme fort belle, très- She is a woman very beautiful. 
 sensible, et infiniment sage, of great sensibility, and in- 
 
 finitely prudent. 
 
 Rule III. Adverbs of quantity and comparison, and 
 the three adverbs of time, souvent, toujours, jamais, an 
 placed before the other adverbs. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Si poliment, fort poliment, So politely, very politely. 
 
 Très-k(ur,u sèment, Very happily. 
 
 ï,e plus adroit t ment. The most skilfully. 
 
 Ils ne seront jamais étroitement They never will be intimately 
 
 unis, united. 
 
 Ils sont toujours ensemble, They are always together. 
 
 C'est souvent à V improviste qu'il He often comes unexpectedly. 
 
 arriie, 
 
 Sau\ I by an adverb of 
 
 quant mparison, as 3 '. assez sautent , fori 
 
 souvent, plus souvent, mains souvent* trop sonnent. 
 
 Rem. When adverbs of quantity and comparison meet 
 together iii a sentence, the following is the order which 
 custom has established. 
 
 Si peu Bien peu coup * trop Tant mieux 
 
 Trop peu Bien plus Beaucoup plus Tant pis, 
 
 Très-peu f > î - ;i davantage Beaucoup moins âne. 
 
 * Beaucoup is :mt as tltf» English much, * isceptible of beih£ modi;; 
 ■\ny adverb preceding, thas. trèj-ôeauc?»/», 
 barbarism. 
 
SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 2^1 
 
 When bien stands before another adverb, it means 
 eery, much, <&c. as in the preceding and following ex- 
 amples. 
 
 Bien assez Quite enough. Frapper Men fort To strike very hard* 
 Bien moins Much less Bien tard Very late. 
 
 But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies 
 well; as, 
 
 Assez bien Pretty well. Fort bien Very well. 
 
 Moins bien Not so well. Aussibien As well. 
 
 These rules have been sufficiently exemplified , P. 1 4L 
 
 CHAP. VIL 
 
 OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 The conjunction que serves to complete a comparu 
 son ; it is elliptically used to express a restriction, when 
 placed after ne, and it generally gives grace, energy, 
 and precision to sentences. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 ( L'Asie est plus ), 2 . - . . ., 
 
 expressing com-S ^ ' t Asia is larger than 
 
 parison j VEnropc $ Eur0 P e ' 
 
 î On ne parle que ) They talk of no 
 
 for rien (pie <^ de la nouvelle > thing but the new 
 
 / victoire. y victory. 
 
 I Q,u'i,' rive, pour ) May he live, for I 
 
 — je souhaite que < je souhaite > wish that he may 
 
 ( (\\vil vire. ) live. 
 
 — à moins que i Cela ne finira i There will be nc 
 vue <{ — avant que < /wrs qu'il ne > end to it, unless he 
 
 — saws que ( vienne. S come. 
 
 — dès que v Q,u'i/ /as^c le f If he commits the 
 
 — aussitôt que < moindre execs, > least excess, he i^ 
 
 — si, or quand ( il est malade. ) ill. 
 
 !Q,u'i/ perde, o& ^ IVliethr he gains, or 
 
 qu' i/ vn jjrne son I loses his lawsuit 
 
 procès, c'est un { he is a ruined 
 
 homme ruiné. J man. 
 
 -jusqu'dce que { ^g^ ^ J Wait 0« he comet 
 
-m 
 
 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 <&* < 
 
 for pourquoi ? 
 — comme 
 
 • combien ! 
 
 < Que ne se cor- ) 
 l *ige-t-il ? ) 
 
 Méchant qu'il est. 
 
 Q,ue Dieu est 1 
 grand ! ) 
 
 due je hais les ) 
 
 Wiy does he no: 
 
 reform ? 
 Wicked as he is. 
 How great is thf 
 
 Almighty ! 
 How much I haU 
 
 the wicked ! 
 
 f7 I,wa: * medians! 
 
 Another frequent use of this conjunction is to save 
 J lie repetition of comme, parceque, puisque, quand, quoi- 
 que, si, &c. when to phrases beginning with these words, 
 others are added under f he same regimen, by means of 
 the conjunction et ; as, 
 
 Si Von aimait son pays, et qu'on If we loved our country, and 
 
 en désirât sincèrement In gloire, sincerely wished its glory, we 
 
 on se conduirait de manière, should act so as, &c. 
 &c.t 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 We have every thing to fear from his wisdom, even moiv 
 
 encore 
 • han from his power. What men style greatness, glory, 
 
 Ce que art. appeler 
 
 power, profound policy, is in the eyes of God only misery,. 
 
 profond politique f. à 
 weakness, and vanity. May they understand, at last, that without 
 
 comprendre 
 internal peace there is no happiness. May she 
 
 wee soi-même 2 art. 1 point de 
 
 !>e as happy as she deserves to be ! Never write before yoic 
 
 de le 
 iiÂvè thoroughly examined the subject which you pro- 
 
 sous toutes ses faces 2 1 se 
 
 posé to treat. Let him but hear the least noise, his terrified 
 proposer de trailer * bruit effrayé- 
 
 imagination presents to him nothing but monsters, Dc 
 
 f. 1 * ne que de art. 
 
 not sift this question, till I can (be your guide.) 
 
 approfondir ne. subj-1 vous mettre sur la voit 
 
 Do not go out till your brother comes in. Why docs he noi 
 
 ne rentrer * 
 take advantage) of his youth, (in order to) acquire the know 
 profiter pour con 
 
 edge he wants ? 
 
 missance pi. dont avoir besoin ? 
 
éïNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 GOVERNMENT OF CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 The conjunctions which unite sentences to one ano- 
 ther are followed either by the infinitive, the indicative* 
 < >r the subjunctive. 
 
 Those that are followed by an infinitive, are, 
 
 1. Such as are distinguished from prepositions, only 
 by being followed by a verb ; as, 
 
 fl faut se reposer après avoir One ought to rest after having 
 travaillé, laboured, 
 
 2. Those which have the preposition de after them ; 
 
 as, 
 
 U travaille afin de vous sur- He works that he may surpass 
 passer,^ you. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 full as he was of his prejudices, he would not acknowledge 
 Rempli ind-2 préjugé ind-3 convenir de 
 
 any thing,) Full of self-love (as he is), expect nothing 
 
 rien pétri 13 2 de 
 
 good (from him-) Hoio beautiful is that cultivated nature '. 
 
 en 16 5 2 4 3 
 
 Ifoiv, by the care of man, is it brilliantly and richly adorned ! 
 par f. pompeusement orné 
 
 Had profound philosophers presided at the formation of 
 de ind-6 à art 
 
 anguagcs, and had they carefully examined the elements of 
 a ague avec sl in subj-4 — m. art 
 
 -peech, not only in their relations (to one another), but also 
 
 'njrs non entr'eux encore 
 
 i.i themselves, it is not (to be doubted), that languages 
 a m. douteux art. ne 
 
 would present principles more simple, and at me 
 
 offrir subj-2 de art. 
 same (ime, more luminous. 
 
 1Ï EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF CON- 
 JUNCTIONS. 
 
 They were going to spend a few days in towtt 
 
 ne * ind-2 * passer * quelques à art. 
 
 ojily that they might return with more pleasure to 
 
 Hue pour * * se retrouver inf-1 dans 
 
 their charming solitude. Many persons work only (in-order to) 
 
 ne que afin de 
 admire consideration and riches, bet the bones* 
 
 de art pr. art. % 4* , 
 
 26* 
 
294 SYNTAX OF THE CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Conjunctions that govern the indicative, 
 
 bien attendu que, autant que, puisque, peut-être que 
 
 a condition que, non plus que, lorsque, comme, 
 
 i la charge que, outre que, pendant que, comme si. 
 
 de même que, parce que, tandis que, quand, 
 
 ainsi que, attendu que, durant que, pourquoi, 
 
 aussi bien que, vu que, tant que, comment, &< 
 
 They are followed by the indicative, because the prin- 
 cipal sentence, which they unite with that which is inci- 
 dental, expresses the affirmation in a direct, positive, and 
 independent manner. 
 
 The use of the six following conjunctions, 
 si non que, de sorte que, tellement que, 
 
 si ce n'est que, en sorte que, de manière que, 
 
 varies according to the meaning expressed by the prin 
 oipal sentence. 
 
 EXAMPLE OF THE INDICATIVE. EXAMPLE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 Je ne lui ai répondu autre chose, Je ne veux autre cho^e, si noii 
 
 si non que j'avais exécuté ses que mus travailliez avec plut* 
 
 ordres. d'ardeur. 
 
 [ made hijn no other answer, I desire nothing else, but time 
 
 but that I had executed his you would study with greate 
 
 orders. ardour. 
 
 The indicative is required in the first sentence, by 
 the verb fai répondu expressing a positive affirmation, 
 and the subjunctive in the second, because je veux ex- 
 presses a compound, or jdesiaè.f 
 
 .humane man spends (so much) time in study, onh 
 
 sensible 3 1 ne. employer tant de à art. que, 
 
 ro be useful to his fellow-creatures. I reveal to you the 
 pour semblables. dévoiler 
 
 plot which your enemies have concerted in secret 
 r rame f. ourdir j art. ténèbres f. pi. 
 
 in order to warn you against their artil'n 
 prémunir 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 When you have a more extensive knowledge of geometrv 
 ind-7 2 1 art. f. " 
 
 and algebra, I shall give you a few lessons in astro 
 
 pr. art. algèbre f. * quelque de 
 
 nomy, and optics. Form your mind, heart, and taste» 
 pr. optique proji, pron, 
 
PBOMISCUOUa EXERCISES. 295 
 
 The conjunctions which govern the subjunctive are,. 
 
 ^oit que, jusqu'à ce que, supposé que, • afin que, 
 
 ?ans que, encore que, au cas que, de peur que, 
 
 pour que, à moins que, avant que, de crainte que 
 
 quoique, pourvu que, non pas que, &c. «fee. 
 
 They require the subjunctive, as they always imply* 
 doubt, desire, ignorance. J 
 
 while you are still young, Donotj^eep truth a prisoner 
 
 encore retenir art. * captive. 
 
 though you should (drawupon you) a cloud of enemies. 
 
 quand devoir cond-1 s'attirer nuée f. 
 
 V will give you this fine picture upon condition that you 
 
 tableau m . à 
 keep it as a testimony çf my friendship. 
 
 conserver ind-7. témoignage m. 
 
 t EXERCISE. " ~ ~ 
 
 Vou know too well the value of time, to make 
 
 connaître prix m. art. pour que être 2 
 
 it necessary to tell you to (make a good use of) it. Study only 
 tl 1 de de bien employer 
 
 great models, lest those which are but middling 
 
 art. de peur que * médiocre ne 
 
 should spoil your taste, before it be entirely formed. 1 
 
 gâter subj-1 
 
 make not the least doubt) that your method will succeed 
 
 ne douter nullement f. ne * subj-1 
 
 provided it be well known. Several phenomena. of nature are 
 
 f. art. 
 
 .îasy (to be explained), supposing the principle of universal 
 
 (by the active) art. 2 
 
 gravitation to be true, 
 f. 1 * 
 
 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES ON THE NINE PARTS 
 OF SPEECH. 
 
 The Good Mther. 
 
 What a fine morning! said the amiable Charlotte to her 
 matinee f. ind~3 
 brother George. Come, let us go into the garden and enjoy 
 sing. * inf.! 
 
 the magnificent sight of rich and abundant nature. 
 
 fte 2 spectacle m l une 2 fertile 3 1 
 
 We will gather there the freshest and sweetest flowers. 
 
 Cwffîr y fiais 2 art. **r. odorant 3 f. pi. 1 
 
;!\)Ù PROMISCUOUS EXEKCL 
 
 We will make a nosegay, which we will offer to mamma. You 
 bouquet m. maman sing, 
 
 know she loves flowers. This attention will give her plea* 
 savoir que art. faire lui 
 
 sure. An ! brother, it will obtain us a smile, a caress, perhaps 
 
 mon f. vn loir sourire m. f. 
 
 oven a kiss. Ah ! sister, replied George, your pro- 
 
 baiser m. ma répondre ind-3 sing- P r °- 
 
 posal delights me ; let us run, let us fly, that we may offer 
 jet enchanter courir voler afin de * 
 
 her (when she rises) this tribute of our gratitude and our love 
 lui à son lever hommage — , pr. 
 
 Full of this idea, Charlotte and George hastened 
 plein se hâter ind-3 de se rendre 
 
 into the garden. Charlotte gathered violets, jessamine 
 
 ind-3 de art. pr. art. 
 
 and young rose-buds which (had but just begun; 
 
 pr. d?.2 boulon m. 1 ne commencer que'md-^ 
 
 o open their purple cups, while George prepared 
 
 entrouvrir de pourpre 2 calice 1 ind-2 
 
 green sprigs of myrtle and tbyme ? intended 
 
 A; art. verdoyant 2 jet m. 1 myrte ipr.thym destiné 
 
 o support the flowers. Never had these amiable childrer 
 
 soutenir 1 ind-2 3 2 
 
 worked with (so much) zeal and ardour, Satisfaction and 
 ravailhr tant de zèle pr. art. f. ari 
 
 pleasure beamed in all their features, sparkled in then 
 
 m. être ind-2 peint trait m. pétiller 
 
 {•yes, and added still to their beauty. 
 While they (were employing themselves) (in this manner; 
 s'occuper ind-2 ainsi 
 
 their mother, who had seen them in the garden, came to join 
 
 ind-3 * joindre 
 (hem. (As soon as) they perceived her, they flew to her, anc 
 dès que ind-3 ind-3 tile 
 
 said: Ah! mamma, how glad we are to see you! how 
 lui que aise 31 2 de 
 
 (impatient we were) for this pleasure ! In the 
 
 jti'il tardait à not>e impatience d'avoir oe 
 
 pleasing expectation (of it) we (we're preparing) this nosegay for^ 
 doux attente f. * ind-2 
 
 you. What satisfaction should we have had in presenting 
 
 f. ne pas à offrir 
 
 it to you ! Look at these rose-buds, these violets, this jessamine, 
 
 voir * 
 >his myrtle, and this thyme. Well, we designed them for you. 
 Eh f bien, destiner ind-2 * 
 
PROMISCUOUS EXERCISE?. 297 
 
 These flowers, coming from us, would have been dear to you 
 
 cher 
 When you wore them, you would have said: My children 
 
 En * porter inf-2 
 
 were thinking) of me while Ï slept. I am always a t 
 
 s'occuper ind-2 dorniir ind-2 
 
 present to their minds as to their hearts. They love me, and it 
 
 sing. sing. cc 
 
 •s by giving me every day new proofs of their affection. 
 
 en art. pi. de preuve f. 
 
 that they acknowledge the care I have taken of them 
 
 reconnaître soin m pi. que 
 
 m their childhood, and all the marks of tenderness . I am up- 
 
 que fit 
 
 ceasingly giving them. 
 
 t csser de inf-1 leur. 
 
 My dear children, replied the mother, embracing: 
 
 répondre ind-3 en embrasser 
 
 *hem, how charming you render all my days ! your gra'.i- 
 
 quel charme répandre sur * 
 
 <ade, your tenderness, your attention to me, make me forget 
 
 pi. puar Oublw 
 
 my former misfortunes, and yield my heart again to the sefc 
 
 ancien mallieur m. rouvrir 
 
 impressions of pleasure. May Heaven continue 
 
 f. ' art. Pouvoir subj-1 art. continuer 
 
 to bless my labour ! May it be your guide and j^our support 
 de soin Pouvoir — s&utien 
 
 in the career which (will soon be opened) to you ! may it. 
 
 carrière f. aller ind-ï s'ouvrir devant 
 
 complete its kindness by preserving you from the 
 
 mettre le comble à bienfait pi. en garantir inf-2 de 
 
 dangers to which you cannot fail to be soon exposed 5 
 
 * ne pas tarder ind-7 * 
 Alas! I shudder (at them) beforehand, my dear children; the 
 
 frémir en d'avance 
 
 moment is come when you must enter the world. Your 
 
 oh devoir dans 
 
 persons, your birth, and your fortune call you there, and 
 figure sing. naissance appeler y 
 
 ensure you a distinguished rank (in it), I cannot always be your 
 assurer 2 m. 1 y ind-7 
 
 guide. Young and inexperienced, you will findyourselve:» 
 
 sans expérience aller ind-1 inf-1 
 
 surrounded by every kind of temptation. (Every thing) 
 entouré sorte f. séduction. Tout 
 
 even vice presents itself there under an agreeable 
 
 jusque à art. m. offrir y sous * tfeart. ° 
 
298 PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 
 
 form, and almost always in the shape of pleasure, which ha*» 
 pi. 1 sous image art. 
 
 (so many) attractions for youth. They will try to 
 
 tant de attrait f. art. jeunesse f. Ou chercher 
 
 mislead you, to corrupt you ; they (will make use of) artifice 
 égarer employer art. 
 
 raillery, and even ridicule, and, if necessary, they 
 
 art. = même art. — il est 
 
 will assume even the mask of virtue. If you abandon 
 
 prendre jusque à masque m. art. se laissej' 
 
 yourselves to first impressions, you are lost- The poison of 
 aller art 
 
 «sample will insinuate itself into your hearts, will corrupt th<- 
 
 se glisser altérer 
 
 innocence and purity (of them) and will substitute violent 
 
 en de art. déchirant 2 
 
 passions for the mild affections which have hitherto formed you: 
 f. pi. 1 à doux faire 
 
 happiness. 
 Do not imagine, my dear children, that in placing before youT 
 croire en mettre sons 
 
 f*yes a picture of the dangers of the world, my intention 
 
 art. tableau m. 
 s to prohibit you every kind of pleasure. God forbid. 
 
 $ubj-l de interdite espèce f. à ne plaire 
 
 Pleasure is necessary to man ; without it, our ex 
 subj-1 art. art. lui 
 
 istence would be dreadful ; (and therefore) Providence, ever 
 
 affreux aussi art. f. 
 
 attentive to our wants, has multiplied the sources of it, both 
 
 besoin -t-elle 
 in and out of ourselves. But, in tasting the pleasures oi 
 
 en nous nous en goiUer 
 
 tiie world, never (abandon yourselves) (to them.) Take care 
 
 se livrer y Avoir 
 
 I hat they do not govern you ; know how to quit them the mo- 
 
 domintr savoir * de 
 
 ment they have acquired (too much) sway over you. It i^ 
 
 que prendre ind-7 trop de empire Ce 
 
 • he only way to enjoy with deligh' that exquisite pleasure 
 
 moyen de vidupte de délicieux 2 1 
 
 which we can only find in ourselves, and which has its source 
 
 en 
 in an upright and pure conscience. Ah ! why cannot I give 
 dans droit 2 3 f . I que 
 
 rou r11 my experience ? Why cannot you, like me, read thf 
 
 dans 
 
pKOMiscrors exercises. S99 
 
 depths of the heart ? With what astonishment would you often 
 
 abtbie sing. pi. 
 
 see chagrin, agitation, and trouble, disguised under the 
 
 art. — m. art. art. — m. déguisé sous 
 
 appearance of joy and tranquillity ; hatred and 
 
 apparence pi. art. pr. art. calme art. f. art 
 
 envy concealed under the air of confidence and friend* 
 
 f. caché art. confiance f. pr. art. 
 
 ship; indifference and selfishness, affecting the most lively 
 
 art. égoïsme vif 
 
 interest ; the most dreadful and perfidious plots 
 
 2 art. adv. 3 tramei.plA 
 
 contrived deliberately in the dark ; in a word, the most 
 
 ourdi de sangfroid et ténèbres f. pi. en 
 
 odious vices endeavouring to show themselves under the 
 
 2 art. 1 s'efforcer de 
 
 features of (their opposite) virtues! In the world there 
 
 traits qui leur être opposé 2 art. 1 
 
 is but one (moving principle ;) that is self-interest. To 
 ne que seul mobile m. ce art. personnel 2 1 C'est a 
 
 T hat every action refers, every thing tends to that as 
 lui que ' art. pi. se rapporter lui 
 
 to its end. I know very well, my dear children, that your 
 
 Jin f. savoir 
 
 hearts will not be infected by this vice. The sentiments o* 
 de 
 [versai benevolence with which I (have always) 
 2 bienveillance 1 ne point cesser ind-4 de 
 
 inspired you, and of which I have seen you give (so many) 
 inf-1 tant de ' 
 
 proofs, (remove already every fear) (I might have) upon tha* 
 peuvre rassurer d'avance me sur 
 
 subject : but will you not yield to other vices not less danger- 
 
 t m. de non 
 
 ous ? Cruel idea ! terrible uncertainty ! If this misfortune 
 
 f. ajfrtux f. 
 
 were to happen, ah Î my dear children, instead of being 
 
 * * arricer ind-2 
 the joy and consolation of my life, you would be the torment, 
 
 art. f. 
 
 the shame and the disgrace (of it.) You would poison mj 
 
 honte f. opprobre en empoisonner 
 
 days, and you would plunge a dagger into the very bosom 
 
 porter art. t/iort f, même 2 sein m. 3 
 
 which gave you life. But whither is my tenderness for you 
 
 ind-3 art. où * 
 
 hurrying me? No, my children, no, I have nothing to fear; 
 
( 300 ) 
 
 PART III. 
 
 IDIOMS, 
 
 OR 
 
 WORDS CONSIDERED IN THEIR PARTICULAR 
 RULES. 
 
 CHAP. I. 
 
 OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 The substantive performs three functions in language, 
 that of the subject, the regimen, or the apostrophe. 
 
 The substantive is the subject, whenever it is that of 
 which something is affirmed. When we say, V oiseau 
 vole, the bird flies ; le lion ne vole pas, the lion does not 
 fly ; the substantives oiseau and lion are subjects ; be- 
 cause it is affirmed of the first that it flies, and of the se- 
 cond that it does not fly. 
 
 It is to the substantive as the subject that every thing 
 relates in a sentence. In the following, un homme juste 
 
 you love me (too much) to wish to afflict me so cruelly; and 
 
 trop pour vouloir * 
 I shall have the pleasure, (as long as) I live, of seeing you walk 
 
 tant que ind-7 
 
 in the ways of honour and virtue. 
 
 sentier art. pr. art. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE SUBSTANTIVE. 
 
 1. A king, who is inaccessible to men, is inaccessible to truth 
 also, and passes his life in a ferocious 2 inhuman 3 grandeur 1 : 
 as he is continually afraid of being deceived, he always 2 una- 
 voidably X is 1 and deserves to be so ; besides, he is at the mercv 
 of slanderers and tale-bearers, a base 2 malicious 3 tribe 1, who 
 feed on venom, and invent mischief rather than cease to injure. 
 
 2. The good which a man does, is never lost; if men forget it. 
 God remembers and rewards it. 
 
 (1.) Is inaccessible also, Test aussi ; ferocious, sauvage ; inhuman, et farouche : 
 as he is afraid, craignant ; is, l'est , to bt- so, de l'être j besides, de plus ; tale- 
 bearers, rapporteur } tribe, nation ; feed upon, se nourrir de j mischief mal ; to 
 injure, de nuire. 
 
 IX) Good, bien : a man, on ; rcrnrmèer, l'en souvenir. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE SUBSTANTIVE» 301 
 
 û ferme n'est ébranlé, ni par les clameurs d'une popu* 
 J ace injuste, ni par les menaces d'un fier tyran ; quand 
 même le monde brisé s'écroulerait, il en serait frappé, 
 mais non pas ému, the adjectives juste and ferme modify 
 the subject homme, and all- the rest modify un homme 
 juste et ferme. 
 
 The substantive is the regimen, when governed, either 
 by another substantive, by an adjective, by a verb> or 
 by a preposition, as, 
 
 ■a loi de Dieu, the law 0/ God. aimtr son pro- to love one ? s 
 
 chain, neighbour. 
 
 utile à l'homme, useful to man. chez son père, at his father's. 
 
 In French, a substantive cannot be governed by an- 
 other substantive, but by the help of a preposiuon ; such 
 as de, as, la difficulté de l'entreprise, the difficulty of the 
 undertaking ; or à, or pour, as, l'abandon à ses passions, 
 rhe giving way to one's passions ; le goût pour le plaisir, 
 'he love of pleasure. 
 
 General Rule. When two substances are found 
 together, the one governing, the other governed, the for- 
 mer is generally placed first. 
 
 EXAMPLE 
 
 La beauté des sentimens, la vio- r ifie beauty of sentiments, the 
 ience des passions, la grandeur/ violence of passions, the gran- 
 des évenemens et les succès n^ 1 deur of events, and the prodi- 
 raculeux des grandes épéerdes gious successes of the huge 
 
 .héros, tout cela m'entraîne com- swords of heroes, all these 
 
 me une petite fille. —S évgne. transport me like a little girh 
 
 Remark. Th^ order is not followed — I. When, in 
 English, two substantives are joined by an s and an 
 apostrophe, /laced after the first, thus, 's, as, the king's 
 palace. 2» When the two English substantives form a 
 compoupd word, as, silk-stockings.^ 
 
 11 EXERCISE. 
 1. The silence of the night, the calmness of the sea, the trent» 
 tiing 2 light 1 of the moon diffused over the surface of the' 
 
 (1.) Trembling, tremblant ; diffused, répandu ; dim, sombre ; bcspargleSj 
 parsemé ; with, de } heighten, rehausser ; scene, spectacie. 
 
 27 
 
30â PARTICULAIt RULES OP THE SUBSTANTIVE» 
 
 The substantive is an apostrophe, whenever it is the 
 object addressed ; as, rois, peuples, terre, mer, et vous, 
 deux, écoutez-moi ! In this sentence, the substantives 
 roi<s, peuples, terre, mer, and deux, form an apostrophe. 
 
 N. B. It is only in highly oratorical language that 
 •the address is thus directed to inanimate, or absent 
 objects, j* 
 
 water, and the dim azure of the sky bespangled with glittering : i 
 stars 1, served to heighten the beauty of the scene. 
 
 2 Nothing was heard but the warbling of birds, or the soft breath 
 of the zephyrs sporting in tïie branches of the trees, or the murmurs 
 of a lucid rill falling from the rocks, or the songs of the 
 swains who attended Apollo. 
 
 3. A smiling boy was, at the same time, caressing a lap-dog» 
 which ; :- ..is mother's favourite, because it pleases the child. 
 
 4. There are several gold and silver mines in this beautiful 
 country ; but t\\e inhabitants, simple, and happy m their sim- 
 plicity, do not even deign to ' reckon gold and silver anion 
 riches. 
 
 (2.) Nothing but, on n* plus que ; breathy haleine ; sporting, que se 
 ind-3 j branches, rameaux, hocid rill, eau ciaiie; falling, (which 
 bercer ; attended, suivre, ina_2. 
 
 (S.) wiling b oy, entant d'u» air riant; was cares sing, caressei 
 dug, bichon j pleases, arauser. (4.) Reckon 
 
 t EXAMPLE OF A BEAUlvFUL APOSTROPHE. 
 O Hippias ! Hippias! I shall neve* see thee again*-! O my 
 dear Hippias ! it is I, cruel and * void c/ compassion, who taught 
 thee to despise death. Cruel Gods I ye }j*olonged my life, only 
 that I might see the death of Hippias ! O my dear child, whoml 
 had brought up with so much care, I shall se* thee no more- O 
 dear shade, summon me to the banks of the Styx the IMit grows 
 hateful to me ; it is thou only, my dear Hippias. Vrhom I wish to 
 see again. Hippias ! Hippias ! my dear Hippia: ! I live but 
 to pay the last duty to thy ashes.. 
 
 Never, ne plus *, void of compassion, moi ii : >yable ; taught, up] 
 'nd-l •, prolonged, prolonger, ind- 1 ; oniy thai l , pour me faire ; brought 
 
 up, nourrir, ind- 1 ; with so much care, et qui me ceùier, ind-4, tant de soins f 
 ihade, ombre; summon, appeler ; to, sur; banks, rive ; grow* hateful, être 
 odieux -, / live but to, ne vivre encore qur pour : pay, rendre ; ashes, cendre. 
 
^ARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 CHAP. II. 
 
 OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 General Principle. The article is to oe used be 
 fore all substantives common, taken in a determine 
 sense, unless there be another word performing t/ie same 
 office ; but it is not to be used before those that are taken 
 in an indeterminate sense. 
 
 CASES IX WHICH THE ARTICLE IS TO BE USED. 
 
 Rule I. The article necessarily accompanies al] 
 substantives common, which denote a whole species of 
 things, or determinate things. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'homme se repaît trop souvent Man too often feeds on chi- 
 de chimères, meras. 
 
 Les hommes à imagination sont Men of fanciful dispositions arc 
 
 toujours malfteureux, always unhappy. 
 
 L'homme dont vous parlez est The man you speak of is very 
 
 trcs-instruit, learned, 
 
 In the first example, the word homme is taken in its 
 fullest sense ; it denotes a collective universality. In 
 the second, les hommes à imagination, denotes a particu- 
 lar class only. In the third, V homme denotes but one 
 individual, being restricted by the incidental proposition. , 
 dont vous parlez. 
 
 Remark. In English, the article is not used before 
 substantives taken in a general sense, as, Men of genius, 
 women of sound understanding t. 
 
 X EXERCISE ON THE ARTICLE. 
 
 1. The moment elegance, the most visible image of fine taste, ap 
 pears, it is universally admired : men differ respecting the other 
 constituent parts of * beauty, but they all unite without hesitation 
 in acknowledging the power of elegance. 
 
 2. Men of superior genius 2, while 1 they * see 3 the rest of 
 
 (1.) The moment, du moment que ;f.ne, délicat ; appears, se montrer ; is, ell» 
 est-, respecting, sur j cr*nst ituent, (which constitute) -, hésitation, hésiter} in-, 
 pour. 
 
 j2.) While, tandis que ; struggling, se tourmenter j obvious, qui s'offrent d'euV 
 mêmes \ glance, ils pénétrent en un instant } lightning, foudre ; (. ; thro\tg?i. 
 traverse ; track, espace ; that, qu'on 3 6c measured) mesurer. 
 
â04 PARïUCULAIt RULES OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 Rule II. The article is put before substantives em- 
 ployed in the sense of an extract, or denoting only a 
 part of a species ; but it is omitted, if they be preceded 
 by an adjective, or a word of quantity.. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Du yam et de l'eau me feraient Some bread and water would 
 
 plaisir, please me. 
 
 Je vis hier des savans qui ne pen- I yesterday saw some learned 
 
 sent pas comme vous, men, who do not think as you 
 
 do. 
 Voilà de beaux tableaux^ There are beautiful pictures. 
 
 .facilitai hier beaucoup de H- I bought yesterday many book?. 
 
 vres, 
 ^ue de livres j'achetai hier ! How many books I bought yes- 
 
 terday ! 
 
 Remark. Among the words of quantity must be 
 :reckoned plus, moins, pas, point, and jamais. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Jl n'y eut jamais plus de lumi- There never was more learning. 
 
 ères, 
 Jly a moins oVhabitans à Paris There are fewer inhabitants in 
 
 qu'à Londres, Paris than in London. 
 
 Je, ne manqutpas d'amis, I do not want for friends. 
 
 Exceptions. . Bien is the only word of quantitv 
 which is followed by the article. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Jl a bien.de Vesprit, He has a great deal of wit. 
 
 Elle a bien de la grâce, She is very graceful. 
 
 Remark.' The sense of extract is marked in En- 
 lisji by the word some, or any, either expressed or 
 understood, which answers to quelques, a particular 
 adjective, and consequently to du, de la, de V, des. 
 which are elegantly used instead of quelque, quelques, 
 
 mankind painfully * struggling to comprehend obvious 2 truths J. 
 glance themselves * through the most remote 2 consequences 1. 
 like lightning through a track that cannot be measured. 
 
 3. The man icho lives under an habitual 2 sense 1 of the divine 2 
 presence 1, preserves a perpetual cheerfulness of temper, and en 
 joys, every moment, the satisfaction of thinking himself * in com- 
 pany with the dearest and best of friends. 
 
 (3.) render, flans -, sense, conviction; preserves, conserver : perpetual, con 
 Ptant; chccrfvlncss, gaieté -, temper, caractère ; enjoys, jouir de \ of thinking 
 
 .. dans, art -, with-, d> 
 
OF THE IKKEGULAfc AKTIQLE; 5u<> 
 
 These expressions : des petits -maîtres, des sages-fern- 
 mes, des petits-pâtés, &c. are not exceptions to this rule, 
 because, in cases of this kind, the substantives are so 
 united with the adjectives, as to form but one and the 
 same word. We should likewise say : le propre des 
 belles actions, les sentimens des anciens philosophes, &c: 
 because, in expressions of this kind, the substantives are 
 taken in a general sense. II 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 1. We could not cast our eyes on either shore, without seeing 
 opulent cities, country houses agreeably situated, lands yearly 2 
 covered 1 with a golden 2 harvest 1, meadows abounding in flocks 
 and herds, husbandmen bending under the weight of the fruits, and 
 shepherds who made 1 the echoes 5 around them 6 repeat 2 the 
 cweet sounds 3 of their pipes and flutes 4. 
 
 2. Provence and Languedoc produce oranges, lemons, figs, olives., 
 almonds, chesnuts, p aclics, apricots, Bind grapes of an uncommon 
 sweetness. 
 
 3. The man who has never seen this pure light, is as * blind as 
 one who is born blind : he dies without having seen any thing ; 
 at most, he perceives nothing but glimmering and false lights, vain 
 shadows and phantoms that have no reality. 
 
 4 Among the Romans, those who were convicted of having 
 •used illicit or unworthy means to obtain an employ, were excluded 
 from v for ever, 
 
 5. TL^ewno govern are like the celestial 2 bodies 1, which 
 have great splendour and no n-st. 
 
 6. What beady, sir.pftncse, modesty, and at the same time what 
 nobleness and greatness of soul ! 
 
 7. Themistocles, in order to ruin Aristides, made use of many 
 artifices, which would have covered him with infamy in the eyes 
 of posterity, had 1 not 4 the eminent services 2 which he render- 
 ed his country 3 blotted out 5 that stain. 
 
 (1.) Could, pouvoir, ind-2; our, art ; eilhtr, les deux ; seeing, apercevoir ; 
 yearly, tous les ans ; covered with, qui se couvrir de, ind-2 5 abounding in, 
 remplis de ; flocks and herds, troupeau -, bending, qui étaient accablés ; weight, 
 poids .; shepherds, bergers ; pipes, chalumeau j the echoes, aux échos; around 
 them, d'a'entour. 
 
 (3.) IV ho is born blind, aveugle-né ; without having, n'avoir jamais, inf-3 ; any 
 thing, rien ; at most, tout au plus.; perceives nothing from, apercevoir ne que ; 
 glimmering, sombre ', lights, lueur : no reality, rien de réel. 
 
 (4.) Used, employer; illicit or unworthy means, moyen illicite, on voie in- 
 digne, pi. ; were, ind-2 ; from it, en. 
 
 (5.) Great, beaucoup de ; splendour, éclat ; no rest, (that have no rest) repos 
 
 (fi.) What, que de. (7.) R»in, perdre ; made use of many, employer 
 
 bien ; artifices, manoeuvres ; covered, cond-3 ; with, de ; infumy, opprobre^ 
 -&s, à •- had) si ; rendered, ind-3, à ; blotted out, effacer, coud 1 -? : stain, tecb" 
 
 27* 
 
#0t> PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE, 
 
 Rule III. The article is put before proper names of 
 countries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains. 
 EXAMPLES. ? 
 
 .*/,• France a les Pyrénées et la France is bounded on the soutL 
 Méditerranée au sud, la Suis- by the Pyrenees and the Me 
 Se et la Savoie à Vest, les diterranean, on the east bv 
 Pays-Bas au nord, et Vocêan Switzerland and Savoy, on 
 à l'ouest, the north by the Nether- 
 
 lands, and on the west by Uu 
 ocean. 
 La Tamise, le Rhône, Vaquilon, The Thames, the Rhone, the 
 les Alpes, le Cantal, north wind, the Alps, Ihc 
 
 Cantal. 
 
 Rem. By apposition we find the words : le mon: 
 Parnasse, le mont Valérien, &c. le fleuve Don, &c. 
 But, we should say, la montagne de Tarare, &c. la 
 Hvière de Seine, &c. though never, le fleuve du Rhône. 
 but simply, le Rhône, f 
 
 8. The consequences of great passions are blindness of mind 
 and depravity of heart. 
 
 9. Noblemen shouid never forget that their high birth impose? 
 ^rreat duties on * them. 
 
 (1.) Of mind, of heart, de, art. 
 
 ,9.) jYcbUnien, gentilhomme ; should, devoir, iml-1. 
 
 t EXERCISE 
 
 1. Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean ; oi 
 the south by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it fron 
 Africa; on the east by the continent of Asia; on the west b) 
 the Atlantic Ocean. It contains the following 2 states 1 : on 
 the north, Norway, Sweden, Denmark, and Russia ; in tbe 
 middle, Poland, Prussia, Germany, the United Provinces, tin 
 Netherlands, France, Switzerland, Bohemia, Hungary, tht 
 British Isles; on the south, Spain, Portugal, Italy, Turkey in 
 Europe. 
 
 2. The principal rivers in Europe, am, the JVolga, the Don or 
 Tanais, and the Boristhcnes, or Nieper, in Muscovy ; the Danube 
 
 (!.) Bounded, home ; on, à*, frozen ocean, mer glaciale, f. ; south, sud or 
 midi; .Mediterranean sea, Méditerranée, f. ; east, est or orient ; west, oues* 
 »r occident ; Norway, Lc. SEE P. 7< . ; British Islts, iies Britanniques ; Turkey 
 m, Turquie de. 
 
 (J.) Muscovy* Moscovie ; l'istula, Vistulc, f. ; Loire, f. ; Seine, f. ; Rhône, m. 
 'raronne. f. J Ehro, Ebrc j Tagus, Tage, m. ; Thames, Tamise, f : Severn, So 
 Verue, f. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE. 307 
 
 Exceptions. The article is not used before the 
 names of countries : 
 
 1. When those countries have the names of their ca- 
 pitals, as, Naples est un pays délicieux, Naples is a de 
 lightful country. 
 
 2. When these are governed by the preposition en- 
 as, il est en France, he is in France ; il est en Espagne, 
 he is in Spain. 
 
 3. When those names are governed by some preced 
 ing noun, and have the sense of an adjective, as, vins 
 de France, French wines ; noblesse d'Angleterre, the 
 English nobility. 
 
 4. W T hen speaking of those countries as of places we 
 come from, as, je viens de France, I come from France ; 
 i arrive d'Italie, I am just arrived from Italy. How^ 
 ever, when speaking of the four parts of the world, the 
 present practice favours the use of the article, as, je viens 
 de V Amérique, j'arrive de VAsie.t 
 
 he Rhine, and the Elbe, in Germany ; the Vistula, or Wezel in Po 
 iand ; the Loire, the Seine, the Rhone, and the Garonne, in France 
 
 lie Ebro, the Tagus, and the Dovro, in Spain ; the Po, in Italy ; 
 rhe Thames and the Severn, in England ; and the Shannon, in 
 Ireland. 
 
 3. The principal mountains in Europe are the ftaarne Fields, 
 between Norway and Sweden ; Mount Crapêl, between Poland 
 and Hungary ; the Pyrenean Mountains, between France and 
 Spain ; the Alps, which divide France and Germany from Italy. 
 
 4. The bleak north wind never blows here, and the heat of sum- 
 mer is tempered by the cooling 2 zephyrs 1, which arrive to refresh 
 Hie air towards the middle of the day. 
 
 (3.) Pyrenean Mountains, Pyrénées. 
 
 (-1.) Bleak, rigoureux ; north 'wind, aquilon ; heat, ardeur j cooling, re 
 fraîchissant 5 arrive, venir ; to refresh, adoucir. 
 
 I EXERCISE. • 
 
 1. Naples may be called a paradise, from its beauty and fertility 
 From this country 2 some suppose 1 Virgil took the model of the 
 Elysian 2 Fields 1. 
 
 2. I have been a * prisoner in Egypt, as a * Phœnician 
 
 (1.) From, à cause de ; from this country, que c'est là, où ; some suppa~ 
 quelques personnes penser. 
 
 V Priwner, captif ; under that namt, c'est sous ce ra>m que (both allkr 
 
308 PARTICULAR RULES OF THË ARTICLI . 
 
 The article is also used before the names of countries, 
 cither distant, or little known, la Chine, China ; le Ja- 
 yon, Japan ; le Mexique, Mexico ; and before those 
 which have been formed from common nouns : le Havre, 
 le Perche, la Flèche, &c. 
 
 Remark. In English the article is generally omitted 
 before the names of countries. 
 
 CASES IN WHICH THE ARTICLE IS NOT USED. 
 
 Rule I. The article is omitted before nouns common, 
 when in using them nothing is said as to the extent of 
 their signification. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 he sage n a ni amour ni haine, The wise man has neither love 
 
 nor hatred. 
 
 Jls out, renversé religion, mo- They have overturned religion, 
 rale, gouvernement, seien- morality, government, scien- 
 ces, beaux-arts, en un mot, ces, fine arts, in a word, every 
 tout ce qui fait la gloire et la thing which constitutes the 
 force d'un Elat, glory and strengtli of a - 
 
 Hence the article is not employed before nouns, 
 
 1. When they are in the form of a title, or an addi 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Préface, Preface. Il demeure Ke lives in 
 
 Livre premier, Book the 1st. Rue Piccadilly, Piccadilly 
 
 Chapitre dix, Chap, the 10th. Quartier St. James, St. James's 
 
 2. When they are governed by the preposition en, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Regarder en pitié, to look with pity. Vivre en Roi, to live as a king. 
 
 under that name I have long suffered, and under that name I have 
 been set at liberty. 
 
 o. He has received French and Spanish wines, Italian silks. 
 Provence oil, and English wool. 
 
 4. We set sail/row Holland {or the Cape of Good Hope. 
 
 5. I was but just arrived from Russia, when I had the misfor 
 lune to lose my father. 
 
 G. I had set oft from America, when my brother arrived there. 
 
 (4.) Stt sail, partir ; for, pour se rendre. 
 
 I zoas but just, ne faire que de. $6.) Set off, partir ; fte- 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ARTICLE» 3Ù& 
 
 3. When they are joined to the verbs avoir, or faire. 
 with which they form only one idea. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Avoir peur, To be afraid. Faire pitié, To excite pity 
 
 4. When they are used as an apostrophe, or inter 
 jection. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Courage, soldats, tenez ferme, Courage, soldiers, stand firm. 
 
 5. When they serve to qualify a noun, or pronoun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 /' est quelquefois plus quhom- He is sometimes more thai: 
 
 me, man. 
 
 ^on Altesse Royale le Duc His Royal highness the Duke ot 
 
 (V York, Princt du sang, &c. York, Prince of the blood. 
 
 G. The article is not put before the substantive be* 
 ginning an incidental sentence, which is opposed to 
 what has been said. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Tous les peuples de lu terre ont All the nations of the earth 
 idée plus ou moins dire- have an idea more or les= 
 foppée d'un Etre-Supré» u ■■ ; clear of a Supreme Being: 
 preuve évidente que le péché an evident proof that original 
 originel n'a pas tout-d-fait ob- sin has not totally obscurer! 
 scurci l'entendement, the understanding. 
 
 7. When they are governed by the words genre, 
 espèce, sorte, or terms of this kind. 
 
 ifÊXERCISE. 
 
 1. The highways are bordered with laurels, pomegranates, jes 
 ta mints, and other trees which * are * always green,. and always in 
 bloom. The mountains are covered with flocks, which yield a 
 Jine wool, in great request among all the known 2 nations 1 (ot 
 the world.*) 
 
 2. The fleets of Soiomon, under the conduct of the Phoeni- 
 cians, made freqiient voyages to the land of Ophir and Tharsis, (ot 
 the kingdom of Sophala, in Ethiopia) whence they returned at the 
 end of three years, laden with gold, silver, ivory, precious 2 stones 
 3, and other kinds of merchandise. 
 
 3. Costly furniture 2 is not allowed there 1, nor magnificent attire. 
 jior sumptuous feasts, nor gilded palaces. 
 
 (I.) Highways, chemin 5 with, de 5 pomegranates, grenadier ; in bloom, fleuri 
 yield, fournir ; wool, laine, pi. } in great request, recherché ; among-, de. 
 
 (3.) Made, ind-2 ; end, bout j laden, chargé. 
 
 (S.) Is not allowed there, ou n'y souffre ni: jurrriture : meuble; costly, pré 
 «"ieux ; attire, ornement ) feasts, rcpas. 
 
#10 PARTrCTTLAR RTJLES OF THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Sorte de fruit, 
 
 EXAM 
 A sort of 
 
 [PLES. 
 
 Bande de voleurs. 
 
 A troop ui 
 
 
 fruit. 
 
 
 robbers. 
 
 Genre d'ouvrage, 
 
 A kind of 
 
 Pile de livres, 
 
 A pile oJ 
 
 
 work. 
 
 
 books. 
 
 Monceau d'argent, 
 
 A heap of 
 
 Meute de chiens, 
 
 A pack oi 
 
 11 
 
 money. 
 
 &c. 
 
 dogs. 
 
 Rule IL The article is not used, either before nouns 
 preceded by the pronominal adjectives mon, ton, son. 
 notre, votre, leur, ce, nul, aucun., chaque, tout (used foi 
 chaque), certain, plusieurs, tel, or before those which are 
 preceded by a cardinal number without any relation 
 whatever. 
 
 EXAxOTLES. 
 Nos mœurs mettent le prix à nos Our manners fix the vaine of 
 
 richesses, our riches. 
 
 Toute nation a ses lois, Each nation has its laws. 
 
 Cent ignorans doiveut-Us Vem- Are a hundred blockheads to 
 
 porter sur un homme instruit ? be preferred to one learned 
 1T man ? 
 
 4. We contemplated with pleasure the extensive fields cc 
 with yellow ears of corn, the * rich gifts of bounteous Ceres 
 5 He was in a kind ofersfacy, when he perceived us. 
 0. In the most corrupt age, he lived and died a wise man* 
 
 7. Are you surprised that the worthiest 2 men 1 are but 
 
 and betray remains of the weakness of humanity, amid the innu- 
 merable 2 snares 1 and difficulties which * are ^inseparable 
 loyalty ? 
 
 8. He excited our pity , when we saw him aftevhis disgrace. 
 !). Hear then, nations full of valour! ai 
 
 wise and so united ! hear what Ï have * to * offer (o you. 
 
 10. Out of this cavern issued, from time to time, a bli 
 thick 3 smoke 1, which made a sort of night at mid-day. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. That good father was happy in his children, and his children 
 were happy in him. 
 
 (?.) Extensive., vaste-, fields, campagne j ears, épi . bounteous, fécond. 
 
 (A.) In a kind of, comme en. (fi.) . 
 
 (7.) That,ilece que -, worthy, estimable ; but, encore; betray, montrer : rt 
 maint, reste ; snares, pie^e ; dij/ic itties, embarras. 
 
 i".) lie excited our pity, il nous fit pitié. — ( \) Thar, écouter. 
 
 (10.) Ont of, de; issued, sortir ; thick, et épais; amofrr, fumée : mi,V(»v 
 lOilieu du jour. 
 
PARTICULAR BX7LES OP THE ARTICLE. bi^ 
 
 Rule III. Proper names of deities, men, animals^ 
 owns, and particular places, do not take the article, 
 
 EXAMPLES . 
 Dieu a créé le ciel et la terre, God has made heaven and 
 
 earth. 
 Jupiter était le premier des Jupiter was the first of the 
 
 dieux, gods. 
 
 Bucéphale était le cheval oV A- Bucephalus was Alexander's 
 
 lexandre, horse, 
 
 dome est une ville d'une grande Rome is a city of great beauty. 
 
 Exceptions. Proper names, however, take the ar- 
 ticle, when used in a limited sense. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Le Dieu des Chrc- The God of Le Buctphale, Alexander's 
 
 tkns, Christians. d'A'ecrindrc, Bucephalus. 
 
 Le Dku de paix, The Tod of V Ancle ne, Ancient Rome, 
 
 peace. Rome, 
 
 Le Jupiter d'Ho- Homer's Ju- La Rome Mo- Modern Rome. 
 mère, piter. dtrne, 
 
 N. B. In imita! ion of the Italians, thé French use 
 article before the names of several painters and 
 poets of that nation^ by an elliptical mode of expres- 
 sion, the words peintre, poète, or seigneur, being under- 
 stood, j- 
 
 2. Tliose imitative 2 sounds 1 are common to all languages, and 
 form, as it were, their * real basis. 
 
 3. Every mn has his foibles, his moments of ill * humour even 
 his irregularities. 
 
 4. Each plant has virtues peculiar to it, the knowledge 2 of 
 which 1 could not but be infinitely useful. 
 
 5. In all his instructions, he is careful to remember that gram- 
 mar, logic, and rhetoric, are three sisters, that ought never to be 
 disjoined. 
 
 (2.) Common, fondu ; to, dans j and form as it were, et ils en sont comme , 
 +cal % fondamentale. 
 
 (1.) Ptcvh'xr, qui sont propres ; to it. lui , covld, cond-1 -, not but, ne que. 
 
 (5.) He iscartfil to -member, ne point perdre de vue ; ought, on devoir, 
 Vid-1 ; to be disjoined, séparer. 
 
 t exercise - 
 
 1. Jupiter, son of Saturn and Ctjbele or Ops, after having ex- 
 (W Expelled, chasser -, divided, en partaker ; inheritance, héritage. 
 
312 PARTICULAR RUlES OF THE ADJECtïVJË» 
 
 CHAP. III. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 I. 
 
 OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE ARTICLE. 
 
 Rule I. Adjectives used substantively, are like sub- 
 stantives common, accompanied by the article, if the 
 occasion require it. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Les fous inventent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and wise 
 les sages s'y conforment,^ men conform to them. 
 
 pelled his father from the throne, divided the paternal * inheritance 
 with his two brothers, Neptune and Pluto. 
 
 2. On a dispute at a feast of the gods, between Juno, Pallas, 
 md Venus, for the pre-eminence of beauty, Jupiter, not being able 
 to bring them to an agreement, referred the decision to Paris, a 
 shepherd of Mount Ida, with directions that a golden apple should 
 be given to the fairest. Paris assigned to Venus 2 the golden : 
 yrize 1. 
 
 3. God said : let there * be 2 light 1, and there * was 2 light 1. 
 
 4. TJie Apollo di Belvidere, and the Venus di Medicis, are valu- 
 able 2 remains 1 of antiquity. 
 
 5. May and September are the two finest months of the year m 
 he south of France. 
 
 6. The God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, was the only true 
 God. 
 
 (2.) On, dans ; at a feast, qu'il y eut à un festin 5 being ohh, pouvoir *, to hri*r 
 to an agreement, accorder ; referred, renvoyer 3 directions, ordre ; that a gold' 
 Mi, _.o. to give a golden apple to ; assigned, adjuger. 
 
 (4.) J)i Belvidere, Beivéder ; di, de ; valuable, précieux. 
 Only, seul. 
 
 1f EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Were the learned of antiquity to come to life again, they 
 would be much astonished at the extent of our knowledge. 
 
 2. The ignorant have, in a * large stock of presumption, what 
 they want in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are ad- 
 mired by fools. 
 
 (1.) H'ere the, si les; to come again, revenir, ind- 2 ; life, monde j et , de , 
 kAowttfigt, connaissance, pi. 
 
 (:.) Large stock, forte dose ; they want, il leur manquer ; knowledge, sc\ev> 
 the reason, ce qui fait que ) they art, &c the fools admire them. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 313 
 
 Rule II. When a noun is accompanied by two ad- 
 jectives, expressing opposite qualities, the article must 
 he repeated before each adjective. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les vieux et les nouveaux sol- The old and the newly raised 
 dats sont remplis d'ardeur, soldiers are full of ardour. 
 
 H faut fréquenter la bonne com- We ought to frequent good and 
 pagnie et fuir la mauvaise, shun bad company. 
 
 Rex. But if those qualities be nearly similar, the ar- 
 ticle is not repeated, as, Le sage et pieux FénéJon ; — if 
 merely different, it is perhaps better to repeat it, as, Le 
 sensible et V ingénieux Fénélon. 
 
 N. B. In French the substantive must be joined to 
 the first adjective, when governed by different words. f 
 
 Rule III. The article is used before the adjective 
 which is "joined to a proper name, either to express its 
 quality, or to distinguish the person spoken of from those 
 who might bear the same name. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 ÏA sublime Bossuet, Le vertueux Fénélon, Le tendre Racine. 
 The sublime Bossuet. The virtuous Fénélon. The tender Kacine. 
 Louis le Gros, Louis le Juste, Louis le Grand, 
 
 Louis the Fat. Louis the Just. Louis the Great. 
 
 Rem. If the adjective, which is joined to a proper 
 name, precede that name, it expresses a quality, which 
 may be common to many ; if it follow, it expresses a 
 distinguishing quality. Thus — Le savant Vairon ; and 
 Vurron le savant ; do not convey the same meaning : in 
 the first example, Yarron merely obtains the quality of 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The ancient 1 and uw der n 3 writers 2 are not agreed upon 
 that point. 
 
 2. The wise man preserves the same tranquillity of mind in 
 «ood or bad fortune. 
 
 3. The man who is jealous of his reputation frequents good and 
 shuns bad company. 
 
 4. Grand and vigorous thoughts were always the offspring of 
 *enius. 
 
 (1.) Writers, auteur -, are agreed, s'accorder. (2.) The wise man, le sage. 
 
 .'*•) Vigorous, fort ; offspring, fruit. 
 
 28 
 
314 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 savant ; in the second, Yarron is distinguished for his 
 learning from ail of the same name 4 
 
 Rule IV. When a superlative relative precedes a 
 substantive, the article serves for both ; if it follow, the 
 article must be repeated before each. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Les plus habiles gens font quelquefois les plus grandes fa utes, or 
 Les gens les plus habiles font quelquefois les fautes les plus grandes- 
 The ablest men sometimes commit the grossest blunders.^" 
 
 II. 
 
 THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule I. Pronominal and numerical adjectives pre 
 ;ede their substantive, as do generally the following six- 
 teen, beau, bon, brave, cher, ckétif, grand, gros, jeune. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The great Corneille astonishes by beauties of the first order. 
 and by faults of the worst taste. If the tender Racine does not of 
 ten rise so high, at least, he is always equal, and possesses.the art 
 of always interesting the heart. 
 
 2. The more we read the fables of the good and artless La Fon- 
 taine, the more we are convinced they are a book for all ages, and 
 the manual of the man of taste. 
 
 3. It was only under the reign of Louis the Just, (XIII.) that 
 çood taste began to show ftseif in France : but it was under that 
 >f Louis the Great that it was carried to perfection. 
 
 ('•) §tyi P ar des j order, ordre ; is always equal, se soutenir : pessetst*. avoir. 
 (2.) The more we, plus on ; artless, simple : are conxmced, on 5e convaincre ; 
 they are, ({lie c'est; a } le ', for, de ; nmnuu!, manuel. 
 (o.) Only, ne que ; carried, porter à. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. It has been said of the Telemachus of the virtuous Fénélon. 
 that it is the most useful 2 present 1 the muses have made to man- 
 kind : for, could the happiness of man be produced by a poem, it 
 would be by that. 
 
 2. The smoothest 2 waters 1 often conceal the most dangerous 2 
 gulfs 1. 
 
 (1.) It has been said, on a «lit, present, don que ; have made, subj-3 ; eould. 
 if the, &a could, ind-2 ;) be prnh',cel '. , I be, naître. ec 
 
 (2.) Smoothest, tranquil;- 
 
Particular rules or the adjective. 315 
 
 mauvais, méchant, meilleur, moindre, 'petit, saint, vieux- 
 and vrai, when taken in their literal sense. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Mon père, My father. Plusieurs officiers, Several officer 
 
 Quel homme, What man. Grand homme, Great man. 
 
 Vieille femme. Old woman. Six arbres, Six trees. 
 
 Dix guinées, 10 guineas. Chétivemine, Mean look. 
 
 Exception 1. The pronoun quelconque. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 D'une manière quelconque, In whatever manner. 
 
 2. Adjectives of number, joined to proper names. 
 pronouns, and substantives, as quotations. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 George Trois, George Hid. Chapitre dix, Chapter 10tb. 
 J, id dixième, He the tenth. Page trente, Page the 30th. 
 
 3. The above sixteen adjectives, when connected b} 
 a conjunction with another adjective, which is to be 
 placed after the substantive. 
 
 EXERCISE ON THE PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. There have been ages, when a great man was a sort of prodi- 
 gy produced by a mistake of nature. 
 
 2. In almost all nations, the great geniuses that have adorned 
 'hem were contemporaries. 
 
 3. Young people, says Horace, are supple to the enticements of 
 vice, lavish, presumptuous, and equally impetuous and light in 
 Their passions ; old people, on the contrary, are covetous, dilatory. 
 timid, ever alarmed about the future, always complaining, hard 
 (o please, panegyrists of times past, censors of the present, anci 
 preat givers of advice. 
 
 4. What man was ever satisfied with his condition, and dissatis 
 ned with his abilities ? 
 
 5. Thirty chambers, which have a communication one with an- 
 other, and each of them an iron door, with six huge bolts, are the 
 places where he shuts himself up. 
 
 (I.) Jigts, des siècles ; when, où ; produced, enfanter. 
 
 (2.) /», chez -, nations, peuple -, adorned, illustrer, ind-4. 
 
 (3.) People, gens -, suppU, souple-, lavish, prodigue: impetuous, vif ; old. 
 T. pi. (the following- adjectives in. pi. ;) covetous, avare ; dilatory, temporiseur : 
 about, sur; complaining, plaintif 5 hard, difficile; please, contenter ; times, 
 sing. (4.) / titsatisjied, mécontent ; ah il Hies, esprit. 
 
 (5.) Have a communication, communiquer ; each nf them, dont chacun avoir 
 \ugt< gros : bolts, verrou -.plaits, lieu, sing.: shuts himself, se renfermer. 
 
$16 PARTICULAR RULES OIT THE ADJECTIVE,. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 C'est une femme grande et bien She is a tall well-made woman 
 faite, 
 
 Rem. In English, two, or even several adjectives 
 may qualify a substantive, without a conjunction : but 
 in French, this is generally required, as, c'est un homme 
 aimable et poli, he is an amiable well-behaved man ; 
 except when custom allows the substantives to be placed 
 between two adjectives ; as, c'est un grand homme sec, 
 he is a tall thin man. 
 
 Rule II. Adjectives formed from the participle pre- 
 sent of verbs, are, generally, placed after the substan- 
 tive ; ouvrage divertissant, entertaining work ; and from 
 the participle past, always ; figure arrondie, round 
 figure ; those expressing — form, table ovale, oval table ; — 
 colour, maison blanche, white house ; — taste, herbe 
 amère, bitter herb ; — sound, orgue harmonieux, harmo- 
 nious organ ; — action, 'procureur actif, active attorney : 
 — effect, coutume abusive, custom founded in abuse : — 
 arrangement, ordre grammatical, grammatical order ; — 
 species, qualité occulte, occult quality ; — nation, généro- 
 sité Anglaise, English generosity ; — those ending in 
 -esque, -il, -ule, -ic, -ique, -in : 
 
 Style burlesque, Buslesque style. Bien public, Public wel- 
 
 fare. 
 
 Jargon puéril, Childish jargon. Ris sardonique, Sardonic 
 
 grin. 
 
 Femme crédule. Credulous wo- Voix enfantine. Childish 
 man. voice. 
 
 in this, custom is the best guide. f 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . An afftcled simplicity is a rrfined imposture. 
 
 2. The smiling images of Theocritus, Virgil, and Gessner, ex 
 <ite in the soul a soft sensibility. 
 
 3. In that antique palace are to be seen neither wrcatJied 
 colamn$, nor gittled wainscots, npr valuable basso-relievoes, noi 
 
 l ) h'c/ine.d, délicat. (*2.) Smiling, riant ; excite, porter -, saft } doux. 
 
 (3.) Art to be teen, 00 ne voit ; weaihed, torse; wainscots, lamhris -, basso- 
 ret ievecs curiously, 
 •xteter. 
 
PAjmçULAB RULES OF THE ADJECT3Va> §1? 
 
 Rule III. Although it may seem that adjectives 
 expressing moral qualities are placed indifferently be- 
 fore, or after the substantive ; yet taste and a correct 
 <>ar will assign them their proper situation. 
 
 In conversation, or in a broken, loose style, it may be 
 indifferent to say femme aimable, or aimable femme : 
 Salens sublimes, or sublimes talens, &c. ; but in the dig- 
 nified style, the place of the adjective may, in a variety 
 •»f instances, affect the beauty of a sentence.! 
 
 Ill, 
 
 REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Rule, à noun may be governed by two adjectives, 
 provided these do not require different regimens, as : 
 
 eilings curiously painted, nor grotesque figures of animal? 
 which never had existence but in the imagination of a child or v. 
 n a dm an. 
 
 4. If hu man life is exposed to many troubles, it is also susceptible 
 if many pleasures. 
 
 5. A ridiculous man is seldom so by halves. 
 
 6. Spanish manners have, at first sight, something harsh and mi 
 t,ivilized. 
 
 7. French urbanity has become a proverb among foreign na 
 ions. 
 
 Wmty, bien de ; troubles, peine. (5.) So, le ; by halves, a deir.i. 
 
 ., Spanish, Espagnol ; manners, mœurs; at first sight, au premier abord ; 
 uncivilized, sauvage. 
 
 •come, passer en ; among, chez. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. An amiable woman gives to every thing she says an ina 
 prctsible grace ; the more we hear, the more we wish "to hear her 
 
 2. The majes'ic eloquence of Bo=suet is like a river, which car 
 riea away every thing in its rapid course. 
 
 3. The sublime compositions of Rubens have made 1 an English 
 traveller 3 say 2, that this famous painter was born in Fiander?^ 
 through a mistake of nature. 
 
 i.) (live te, répandre sur ; we, on. 
 (2.) River, fleuve ; carrits away, eetraîner ; its rapid course, la rapirlité (1 - 
 -son cours. 
 
 ^av. dire à : fj'noj.3, célèbre : through, par ; mistake, méprise. 
 
 28* 
 
3 18 P ARTICULAK RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Cet homme est utile et cher à sa famille, that mart 1^ 
 useful and dear to his family. But it would he incoi> 
 rect to say : Cet homme est utile et chéri de sa famille, 
 that man is useful and beloved by his family : because 
 the adjective utile does not govern the preposition de.^ 
 
 IV. 
 
 ADJECTIVES OF NUMBER. 
 
 Unième is used only after vingt, trente, quarante, 
 cinquante, soixante, quatre-vingt, cent, and mille. C'esi 
 la vingt-et unième fois, it is the twenty-first time ; set 
 page 99. 
 
 Cent, in the plural takes 5, except when followed by 
 another noun of number, as, 
 
 Us étaient deux cents, They were two hundred. 
 
 Trois cents hommes, Three hundred men. 
 
 Us étaient deux cent dix. They were two hundred and ten. 
 
 Vingt, in quatre- vingt, and six-vingt, also takes <r. 
 when followed by a substantive, as, 
 
 Quatre-vingts hommes, Eighty men. 
 
 Cent-vingt abricots, Six score apricots. 
 
 But it takes no s, when followed by another term ex- 
 pressing number, qualre-vingt.-un arbres, qualre-vingt-dii 
 hommes. 
 
 The ordinal numbers, collective and distributive, 
 always take the sign of the plural : les premieres dov- 
 
 H EXERCISE ON THE REGIMEN OF ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. A young man, whose actions are all regulated by honour, 
 
 ind whose only aim is perfection in every thing, is beloved and 
 courted by every body. 
 
 2. Cardinal Richelieu was all his life-time feared and haled by 
 the great whom he had humbled. 
 
 :>. A young lady, mild, polite, and delicate, who sees in the 
 advantages of birth, riches, wit. and beauty, nothing but incite- 
 ments to virtue, is very certain of being beloved and estecjned by 
 every body. 
 
 (1.) Ictinis mc regulattd by honour t l'honneur ilirige les actions; whose onlj 
 lim is, qui ne se propose que ; covrttd^ recherché. 
 
 (..) Young lady t demoiselle; delicate, décent; nothing ' 
 riisnfs, encouragement J certain. > 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADJECTIVE. 319 
 
 zaines, the first dozens ; les quatre cinquièmes, the four 
 fifths. 
 
 For dates the French write mil, as mil sept cent-qua- 
 tre-vingt-dix-neuf, one thousand seven hundred and 
 ninety-nine, &c. see p. 100. 
 
 Rem. Cent and mille are used indefinitely, as, 
 
 il lui ft cent caresses, He showed him a hundred marks 
 
 of kindness. 
 Faites-lui mille amitiés de ma Present him for me a thousand 
 part,\ compliments. 
 
 The French say, le onze, du onze, au onze, sur les 
 ■>uze heures, sur les une heure, pronouncing the words 
 onze and une, as if they were written with an h aspirated. 
 
 The cardinal numbers are used for the ordinal. 
 
 1. In reckoning time, that is, the hour of the day, 
 'he day of the month, the year of an era, as, il est 
 'rois heures, it is three o'clock ; le vingt de Mars, the 
 
 f EXERCISE ON THE ADJECTIVE OF NUMBERS. 
 
 1. It was the thirty-first year after so glorious a peace, when 
 the war broke out again with a fury of which history offers few 
 i samples. 
 
 2. There were only three hundred, and in spite of their infe- 
 riority in numbers*, they attacked the enemy, beat and dispersed 
 ill em. 
 
 ?>. He has sold his country house for- two thousand five hundred 
 ■ rttd fifty pounds. 
 
 4. Choose out of your nursery eighty fruit trees, and nhuiy 
 dvrarf-trees, divide them into dozens, and put in the two first 
 dozens of each sort, those whose fruits are most esteemed. 
 
 5. When Louis the Fourteenth made his entry into Strasbourg, 
 the Swiss deputies having come to pay their respects to him, Le 
 Tellier, archbishop of Rheims, who saw among them the bishop 
 of Basle, said to one near him : That bishop is apparently some 
 miserable character. — How, replied the other, he has a hundred 
 thousand livres a year. — Oh ! oh ! said the archbishop, he is then 
 i respectable man ; and showed him a thousand civilities. 
 
 Tear, année ; when, que ; broke out again, se rallumer. 
 nty, ne que; in spite of, malgré. (3.) Pounds, livre sterling. 
 
 (4.) Out of, dan? ; nttreery, pépinière*, fruit trees, pied d'arbre fruitier; 
 tixiarf -trees, arbre nain. 
 
 (5.) Swiss, (of the Swiss ;) pay, presenter ; respect, hommage, pi. ; one near 
 him, son voisin ; that bishop, kc. c'est un misérable anparcment que cet £v£que y 
 't r/tar-j de rente ; shirvsd. (aire ; civilities, CUT€ 
 
$20 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 twentieth of March ; Van mil sept cent dix, &e. Sec 
 pages 99, 100. 
 
 3. In speaking of the order of sovereigns, as, Louis 
 seize, George trois ; except the first two of the series, 
 as, Henri premier, George second. Quint for cinq is 
 only said of the Empereur Charles -quint, and the Pap*. 
 Sixte-quint.X 
 
 CHAP. IV. 
 
 OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 1. 
 
 OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 I. 
 
 Office of Personal Pronouns, 
 The personal pronouns have the three characteristics 
 of the substantive, that is, subject, regimen, and apostro 
 phe ; but with this difference, that some always form 
 the subject ; two only are used as an apostrophe: some 
 always form the regimen, and lastly, others are some- 
 times the subject and sometimes the regimen. 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 1. They made in the parish and in the neighbouring places : 
 collection which produced a hundred and twenty-one guineas. 
 
 2. William, surnamed the Conqueror, king of England and dula 
 of Normandy, was one of the greatest generals of the eleventh cen 
 Jury; he was born at Falaise, and was the natural son of Robert 
 duke of Normandy, and of Arlotte, a furrier's daughter. 
 
 3. Make haste ; it will soon be ten o'clock. We shall have 8 
 good deal of difficulty to arrive in time. 
 
 4. The winter was so severe in one thousand seven hundred an> 
 nine, that there was but one olive tree that resisted it*, in a piaii 
 where there had been more than ten thousand. 
 
 5. It was the twenty-first of January, one thousand seven hun- 
 dred and ninety-three, that the unhappy Louis th? sixteenth was led 
 tp (he scaffold. 
 
 (1.) They, on ; neighbouring placts, voisinage, sing. : collection, quête. 
 (2.) William, Guillaume ; furrier^ fourreur. 
 
 (3.) Make haste, se dépêcher ; will 6«, ind-i ; a good deal of difficulty , bier 
 de Ja peine ; in } h. (•«.) Severe, rude ; but. ne que -, hr. i been, iud-?. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 321 
 
 Je j tu, il, and Us, are always the subject ; these four 
 pronouns cannot be separated from the verb which they 
 govern, but by personal pronouns acting as a regimen, 
 or by the negative ne. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Je ne lui en veux rien dire, I will say nothing to him about 
 
 it. 
 Tu en apprendras des nouvelles. Thou wilt hear news of it. 
 Il nous raconta son histoire, He told us his history. 
 
 fis sont survenus à l 'improviste, They are come unexpectedly. 
 
 The two acting as an apostrophe are toi and vous? 
 whether they stand alone, or are preceded by the inter- 
 jection ô ; as, toi, ôtoi: vous, ô tws.1T 
 
 Me, te, se, leur, le, la, les, y, and en, are always used 
 as a regimen : — direct, when acted upon by the verb : 
 — indirect, when referable to the prepositions à or de s 
 (see p. 271, 272.) They always precede the verb, ex- 
 cept in the imperative when affirmative ; and can never 
 
 IF EXERCISE ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. The better to bear the irksomeness of captivity and solitude, 
 / sought for books ; for /was overwhelmed with melancholy, foi 
 want of some knowledge to cherish and support my mind. 
 
 2. Since thou art more obdurate and unjust than thy father, 
 mayest thou suffer evils more lasting and more cruel than his ! 
 
 3. What ! say they, do not men die fast enough without destroy- 
 ing each other ? Life is so short, and yet it seems that it appears 
 too long to them. Are tiey sent into the world to tear each 
 other in pieces, and to make themstlves wretched ? 
 
 4. O thou, my son, my dear son, ease my heart : restore me 
 what is dearer to me than my life. Restore to me my lost son, 
 and restore thyself to thyself. 
 
 5. O ye, who hear me with so much attention, believe not that 
 J despise men : no, no, I am sensible how glorious it is to toil to 
 make them virtuous and happy ; but this toil is full of anxieties 
 and dangers. 
 
 (1.) To bear, supporter ; irksomeness, ennui *, ovcnvhelmed with, accablé de 5 
 for want, faute ; to cherish, qui pût nourrir ; s pport, soutenir. 
 
 (3.) Obdurate, dur ; mayest, pouvoir, subj-i •, lasting, long". 
 
 (3.) Die fast enough, être assez niortei ; destroying each other, se donner en- 
 core une mort précipitée ; sent i-tto, su; ; world, terre *, tear in pieces, se dé- 
 chirer ; make themselves, se rendre. 
 
 (4.) Ease, soulager ; restore, rendre ; lost (whom I have lost), perdre. 
 
 (5.) / am sensible, savoir ; glorious, grand ; to toil) travailler à : toils, travail} 
 anxiety, inquietude. 
 
322 PARTICULAR RULES OF TUE PRONOUNS. 
 
 be separated from it by any other word, except tout, rieiu 
 and jamais, which may intervene before an infinitive. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 C'est leur tout refuser, It is refusing them every thing. 
 
 C'est ne me rien permettre, It is allowing me nothing. 
 
 Il a juré de ne lui jamais par- He has sworn he would never 
 dormer, pardon him. 
 
 Me, te, se, form a regimen sometimes direct, and 
 sometimes indirect; — direct, when they represent moi. 
 toi, soi ; — indirect, when they supply the place of à moi* 
 à toi, à soi, 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Vous me soupçonnez mal à pro- You suspect me unjustly 
 
 pos, 
 
 Je Ven remercie, I thank thee for it. 
 
 // se perd de gaieté de cœur. He ruins himself out of wanton 
 
 ness. 
 
 Vous me donnez un sage conseil, You give me prudent advice. 
 
 Je te donne cla, I give thee that. 
 
 R se donne bien du mouvement, He is an active stirring man. 
 
 Leur is alwavs indirect, as it stands for à eux, or à 
 elles. 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 Je leur représentai le tort, qu'ils, I represented to them the inju 
 
 ou qu'elles se faisaient^ ry they did themselves. 
 
 EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He has been speaking to them with such energy, as has as 
 tonished them. 
 
 2. Women*bught to be very circumspect ; for a mere appear 
 ance is sometimes more prejudicial to them than a real fault. 
 
 3. He comes up to me with a smiling countenance, and près 
 sing my hand, says : My friend, 1 expect you to-morrow at my 
 house. 
 
 4. He said to me: Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for 
 advantages, the enjoyment 2 of which 1 could not render thet 
 more happy ? Cast thy eyes round thee : see how every thing 
 
 (1.) Svch energy as, une force qui. 
 
 (!.) Mere, simple ; more prejudicial, faire plus de tort. 
 
 (3.) Comes up— zvith, aborder— de ; pressing, serrer ; viy hand, la main ; says . 
 il me dit ; at my honte, eheic moi. 
 
 (4.) Incessantly, sans cesse ; adva^tagr.s,i\e$ biens ; cedd, savoir, cond •] 
 porter : thy, art. } smiles, sourire. 
 
PARTICULAR ROLES OF THE PRONOUNS. 323 
 
 Le, la, les, are always direct ; as, 
 je le vois, je la vois, J for j je vois lui, je vois elle. 
 
 je les vois, j — j je vois eux, je vois elles. 
 
 But y and en are always indirect ; as, 
 
 je n'entends rien à cela.. 
 
 voulez-vous d'iceux ? 
 
 un peu une certaine soin 
 me, or quantité d'argent. 
 
 for 
 
 Je vJy entends rien, 
 
 :es fruits sont bons, en vou- } 
 
 iez-vous ? 5 
 
 anez-vous reçu de V argent ? > 
 
 — oui, j'en ai reçu, S 
 
 Though seeming to perform the function of regimen 
 direct, in this last and other phrases of the same kind, 
 it is obvious that there is in the word en an ellipsis» 
 which may be readily supplied. See p. 1064 
 
 smiles at thee, and seems to invite theeXo prefer a retired and tran- 
 quil life to the tumultuous pleasures of a vain 2 world 1. 
 
 5. The ambitious man f agitates, torments, and destroys him- 
 self to obtain the places or the honours to which he aspires ; and 
 when he has obtained them, he is still not satisfied. 
 
 (5.) Destroys, consumer ; to, pour. 
 
 " t EXERCISE. ~ 
 "1. I have known him since his childhood, and I always loved 
 him on account of the goodness of his character. 
 
 2. This woman is always occupied in doing good works : you 
 ?ee her constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving the poor, re- 
 conciling enemies, and promoting the happiness of every one 
 around her. 
 
 3. The more you live with men, the more you will be convinced 
 that it is necessary to know them well before you * form a con- 
 nexion with them. 
 
 4. Enjoy the pleasures of the world, I consent to it ; but never 
 give yourseif up to them. 
 
 5. I shall never consent to that foolish scheme ; do not mention 
 it any * more. 
 
 6. Have you received some copies of the new work ? Yes, I 
 bave, (received some.) 
 
 (1.) Have fcnoam, connaître, iud-1 ; loved, ind-4 5 on account, à cause; the 
 goodness of his, (his good.) 
 
 (2.) In, à ; works, œuvres, f. pi. ; constantly, sans cesse ; consoling, &c. inf-1 ; 
 relieving, assister ; promoting, faire -, every one around her, tout ce qui Penvi- 
 Yonne. 
 
 (3.) Live, ind-7 ; be convinced, se convaincre ; before* avant de ; form a con- 
 nexion, vous lier. 
 
 (4.) Enjoy, jouir de ; give yourself up, se livrer, 
 
 <$.) ScMme, entreprise ; mention, parier de. {6.) Copies, exemplaire, 
 
m 
 
 PARTICULAR RULES OT TIIE PROXOU^S. 
 
 The pronouns, which are sometimes the subject and 
 sometimes the regimen, are nous, vous, moi, toi, lui, elle, 
 eux, elles. 
 
 Nous and vous are the subject in, nous aimons, vous 
 aimez ; the regimen direct in, ils nous aiment, ils vous 
 aiment; and indirect in, ils nous parlent, ils vous par- 
 lent. 
 
 In general, moi, toi, are only the subject by apposi- 
 tion, or reduplication, whether they precede, or follow 
 the verb, as, 
 
 Moi, dont il déchire la réputation, 
 je ne lui ai jamais rendu que 
 de bous offices, 
 
 Toi, qui fais tant le brave, tu 
 oserais. &c. 
 
 Je prétends, moi, 
 
 Tu dis donc, toi, 
 
 I, whose reputation he is asper- 
 sing, always did him acts oi 
 kindness. 
 
 Wouldst thou, who pretendest 
 to be so brave, dare, &c. ! 
 
 I do maintain, I. 
 
 Thou sayest then, thou. 
 
 Rem. Sometimes the personal pronouns je and tu are 
 not expressed, but understood, as, 
 
 Mo', trahir le meilleur de mes I, betray my best friend ! 
 
 amis ! 
 Faire une lâcheté, toi! Thou, be guilty of such base. 
 
 ness ! 
 
 that is, je voudrais, &c. ! tu pourrais, &c. ! 
 
 They are likewise the subject, when they are placed 
 in a kind of apposition expressed by ce and zZ in imper- 
 sonal verbs, as, qui fut bien aise ? ce fut moi ; ce ne peut 
 être que toi ; que vous reste-t-il ? — moi. 
 
 After a conjunction, they are either the subject, or 
 regimen, according to the nature of the phrase, as, nous 
 y étions, mon père et moi ; il ne craint ni toi ni moi. 
 
 In phrases which are not imperative, toi and moi can 
 only be the object by apposition before or after the 
 verb, as, voudriez-vous me perdre, moi, votre allié, dec. 
 'oi, je te soupçonnerais de perfidie ! 
 
 After a preposition, they alone can be employed, as, 
 vous servirez-vous de moi ? selon moi, vous avez raison ; 
 il est fâché contre toi. 
 
 What has just been remarked of toi and moi, is 
 applicable to lui but with this difference, that lui can 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS, 325 
 
 Hiiiy be the object after we — que, signifying only, or in 
 distributive phrases, as, 
 
 Y } aimez que lui, je ne le trouve That you should like only him, 
 pas mauvais ; mais ne me I do not disapprove, but do 
 haïssez pas. not hate me. 
 
 So, protégez -nous, lui, à cause de, &c. et moi, parce 
 que, &c. we may likewise say by apposition, aimez-le : 
 lui qui, &c. 
 
 Eux is employed in the same manner as lui, but dif- 
 fers from it in this, that it cannot be the regimen indi- 
 rect, except after a preposition, as, parliez-vous <Feux ? 
 est-ce à eux que vous parlez ? 
 
 Rem, Lui and eux may be the subject in distributive 
 phrases without being in apposition, as, 
 
 Mes frères et mon cousin m 1 ont My brothers and cousin assist 
 secouru; eux m'ont relevé, et ed me ; they took me up, and. 
 lui m'wpanst, he dressed my wounds. 
 
 The natural office of elle and elles is to form the sub- 
 let ; however they are susceptible of all the other uses 
 just mentioned, except that they cannot be the regimen 
 indirect, unless preceded by a preposition, as, c'est à elles 
 que je parle ^ 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 ï. la the education of youth, we should propose to ourselves 
 o cultivate, to polish their understanding, and thus to enable 
 hem to fill with dignity the different stations assigned them ; but, 
 
 above all, we ought to instruct them in that religious worship 
 
 which God requires of them. 
 
 2. What! you would suffer uourself to be overwhelmed by ad- 
 versity ! 
 
 3. / .' stoop to the man who has imbrued his hands in the blood 
 of his king ! 
 
 4. Thou! take that undertaking upon thyself? Canst * thou 
 hink of it. 
 
 (I.) Youth, jeunes gens ; should, devoir, înri-1 ; to cultivate, (to them) ; to po- 
 ish, (to them,) orner ; understanding;, l'esprit ; enable, disposer ; stations, place 
 fwbich are) assigned, (to) them ; xuorship, culte 5 requires, demander. 
 (2.) Suffer yourself, se laisser, cond-1 ; to be overwhelmed, abattre. 
 '3.) Stoop to, s'abaisser devant, subj-l ; imbrued, souillçr -, in, d<*. 
 Take upon thyself, se charger, cond-1 : of it, v. 
 
 29 
 
326 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 II. 
 
 OX THE PRONOUN SOI. 
 
 Soi is generally accompanied by a preposition, and 
 is used in phrases, where there is an indeterminate 
 pronoun, either expressed or understood : on doit rare- 
 ment parler de soi; il est essentiel de prendre garde à soi. 
 
 5. Your two brothers and mine take charge of the enterprise ; 
 they find the money, and he will manage the work. 
 
 6. It is /who have engaged him to undertake this journey. 
 
 7. It is thou who hast brought this misfortune on thyself. 
 
 8. When you are at Rome, write to me as often as you can. 
 and give me an account of every thing that can interest me 
 
 9. He told it to thee thyself 
 
 10. Fortune, like a traveller, shifts from inn to inn : if she 
 lodges to-day icith me, to-morrow, perhaps, she will lodge icith 
 Ihee. 
 
 11. Whom dost thou think we were talking of? — it was of 
 tltee. 
 
 1*2. Descartes deserves immortal praise, because it is he who 
 lias made reason 2 triumph 1 over authority in philosophy . 
 
 13. He is dissatisfied toitkhimself. 
 
 14. She is never satisfied with herself. 
 
 15. The indiscreet often betray themselves. 
 
 16. S aumaise, speaking of the English authors, said, that he had 
 learned more from them than from any other. 
 
 17. To love a person, is to render him, on every occasion, all 
 the services in our power, and to afford him, in society, every 
 comfort that depends upon us. 
 
 (5.) Take charge, se charger ! find, fournir -, money, fond*, pi. 5 manage, con- 
 duire, ind-1. 
 
 (6.) Undertake, faire -, journey, voyage. 
 
 (7.) Hast brought on thyself, s'attirer, ind-4. 
 
 (8.) Are, hid -7 ; can, hid-7 ; give, faire; an account, le détail. 
 
 (9.) Told, dire, ind-4. 
 
 (10.) Shifts from inn to inn, changer d'auberge ; ivith. chez 5 she wHl lodge t 
 ce être. 
 
 (11.) Were talking, parler, SUbj-2. 
 
 (11.) Triumph over, triompher de. 
 
 (IS.) Is dissatisfied with, se déplaire. 
 
 (14.) Sàtisfed with, content de. 
 
 (15.) Betray, se trahir. 
 
 (17.) In our power, dont on être capable 5 afford, procurer ê ; comfort, agré 
 ment ; drptnai upon, dépendre 
 
ARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROXOUXS. 321 
 
 In this case, it is the regimen indirect ; but it may be 
 employed without a preposition. 
 
 1. With the verb être, as, En cherchant à tromper 
 les autres, c'est souvent soi qu'on trompe, or on est sou- 
 vent trompé soi-même, in attempting to deceive others, 
 we frequently deceive ourselves.. In this situation it is 
 the subject. 
 
 2. After ne que, or by opposition, as, 
 
 N'aimer que soi, c'est n'être bon To love only ourselves, is being 
 à rien, good for very little. 
 
 Penser ainsi, tf est s- aveugler soi- To think in this manner, is to 
 même, blind one's-self. 
 
 It is in these examples the regimen ; but when de 
 soi and en soi are used in a definitive sense in speaking 
 of things, they mean de sa nature, and dans sa nature.i 
 
 III. 
 
 CASES WHERE THE PRONOUNS elle, elles, CUX, lui, hui\ 
 MAY APPLY TO THINGS. 
 
 The personal pronouns elle and elles, when the regi^ 
 men, generally apply to persons only. Thus, in speak- 
 
 X EXERCISE ON THE PRONOUN soi. 
 
 1. To excuse in one's-self the follies which one cannot excuse in 
 others, is to prefer being a fool one's-slf to seeing others so. 
 
 2. To be too much dissatisfied with ourse:v?s, is a weakness ; 
 but to be too much satisfied (with ourselves) is (a) folly. 
 
 3. We eught to despise no one : how oft-n have we needed the 
 assistance of one more insignificant than ourselves ? 
 
 4. If we did not attend so much to ourselves, there would be 
 «ess egotism in the world. 
 
 5. Vice i3 odious in itself. 
 
 C. The loadstone attracts iron (to itself.) 
 
 (!.) Follies, sottises ; others, autrui ; prefer, aimer mieux )fool, sot j to seeing , 
 que de voir ; so, teL. 
 
 (J.) We ought, falloir, ind-1 ; hoiu often, combien de fois; :/•;. on ; needed the 
 assistance, n'avoir pas besoin ; insign(/ican1, petit 
 
 (4.) H'c, on ; attend to, s'occuper de ; egotism, égoTsme. 
 ' oadsione aimant. 
 
#28 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROXOUXS* 
 
 ing of a woman, we must say, Je m'approchai d'elle, je 
 m'assis près d'elle ; but, in speaking of a table, Je m'en 
 approchai, je m'assis auprès. 
 
 However, with the prepositions avec, après, à, de. 
 pour, en, &c. they may be applied to things. Thus it 
 is correct to say of a river, 
 
 te rivière est si rapide, quand That river is so rapid when it 
 
 die déborde, qu'elle entraîne overflows, that it carrier 
 
 avec elle tout ce qu'elle ren~ away every thing it meets 
 
 rontre ; die ne laisse après with in its course ; it leaves 
 
 ■lie que du sable et des cail- nothing behind but sand and 
 
 ioux, pebbles. 
 
 — of an enemy's army, 
 
 Nous marchâmes à elk, We marched up to it. 
 
 — of things, reasons, truth, &c. as, 
 
 es choses sont bonnes d'elles- These things are good in them- 
 
 mêmes, selves. 
 
 J'aime la vérité au point que je I love truth to that degree, that 
 
 sacrijicerais tout pour elle. I would sacrifice every thing 
 
 for it. 
 
 Ces raisons sont solides en elles- Those reasons are solid in them 
 
 mêmes, selves. 
 
 After the verb être, they are applied only to persons, 
 and likewise when they are followed by the relatives 
 qui and que, as, C'est à elle, c'esl d'elles que je parle. 
 >.'est elle-même qui vienL 
 
 The same may be said of the pronoun eux, which is 
 aiso generally applied to persons only, yet custom al- 
 lows us to say, 
 
 'e chien et ces oiseaux font tout This dog and these birds are my 
 monplaisir ; je n'aime qu'eux; only pleasure, I love ucthini: 
 eux seuls sont mon amusement ; but them ; they alone are my 
 je ne songe qu'à eux. diversion : I think of nothing 
 
 else. 
 
 Lui and leur are generally applied to persons, but an 
 sometimes used in speaking of animals, plants, and even 
 aianimate objects, as, 
 
 <'cs chevuux sont rendus, faites- Those horses are exhausted 
 leur donner un peu de vin, give them a little wine. 
 
 Ces orangers ront périr, si Oti tie Those orange-trees will die un 
 ? cur donne de Veau. les? they have a little water 
 
* ARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROMOTES. 329 
 
 l'es murs sont mal faits, on ne Those walls are not skilfully 
 leur a pas donné assez de built, they are not sufficiently 
 talus, sloped upward. 
 
 Upon these previous observations then may be found 
 ed the following 
 
 Rule. The pronouns elle, elles, eux, lui, and leur, 
 ought never to be applied to things, except when eus- 
 torn does not allow them to be replaced by the pronouns 
 y and eh.'f 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . Virtue is the first of blessings ; it is from it alone we are to 
 expect happiness. 
 
 2. The labyrinth had been built upon the lake Maeris, and they 
 had given if a prospect proportioned to its grandeur. 
 
 3. 3Iountains are frequented on account of the air one breathe? 
 on them : how many people are indebted to them for the recovery 
 of their health ? 
 
 4. War brings in its train numberless evils. 
 
 5. It is a delicate 2 affair 1 which must not be too deeply inve.^ 
 
 d, it must be lightly passed over. 
 
 6. I have had my house repaired, and have given it quite * a 
 new appearance. 
 
 7. Those trees are too much loaded ; strip them of part of then 
 fruit. 
 
 8. This book cost me a great deal, but I am indebted to it for 
 my knowledge. 
 
 9. Self-love is captious; we, however, take il for our* guide ; 
 to il are all our actions directed, and/raw it we take counsel. 
 
 10. These arguments, although very solid in themselves, ye\ 
 made no impression upon him, so powerful a chain is habit. 
 
 11. These reasons convinced me, and by them I formed my de- 
 cision. 
 
 12. Heave you the care of that bird; do not forget to give it 
 water. 
 
 (1.) Blessings, bien ; are, devoir. 
 
 (2.) Had been buift, on bâtir, ind-6 ; prospect, vue. 
 
 (3.) On account, à cause ; brfath.es, respirer ; on thein,y ; are indebted for, de 
 voir ; recovery, rétablissement. 
 
 (4.) Brings, entraîner ; in its train, avec elle ; numberless, bien de. 
 
 (5.) Affair, matière ; must, ind-1 ; 6e deeply investigated, approfondir, inf-1 y 
 rjr passed, glisser ; over, dessus. 
 
 (6.) Have had, faire, ind-4 ; appearance, air. 
 s u ip, ôter ; of part, une partie. 
 
 (8.) A great deal, cher ; knowledge, instruction. 
 
 (9.) We, (it is it that we ••) to it, (it is to it that we dlrçct all, kc. ;) direct, 
 .apporter ;from it, (and it is from it that, kc.) 
 
 (10.) JS"o, ne aucun ; so strong, kc. (so much habit is a, kc.) habit, habitude. 
 
 (11.) And from, (and it isfrnrn them that;) by, d'après ; formed my decuion^ 
 sc decider. 
 
 2Q* 
 
330 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUTfSf 
 
 IV. 
 
 DIFFICULTY RESPECTING THE PRONOUN U EXPLAINED 
 
 Le, la, les, are sometimes pronouns, and sometime.< 
 irticles. The article is always followed by a noun, k 
 roi, la reine, les hommes ; whereas the pronoun is always 
 joined to a verb, je le connais, je la respecte, je les estime. 
 
 The pronoun le may supply the place of a substantive \ 
 or an adjective, or even of a member of a sentence. 
 
 There is no difficulty, when it relates to a whole 
 member of a sentence ; it is then always put in the 
 masculine singular, as, 
 
 On doit s'accommoder à Vhu- We ought to accommodate our 
 ■mear des autres autant qu'on selves to the temper of other- 
 le peut, § as much as we can. 
 
 iVor is there any diiTïculty when le supplies the place 
 of a substantive ; it then always takes the gender and 
 number of that substantive, as, Madame, êtes-vous la 
 mère de cet enfant ? — Oui, je la suis. Madame, are you 
 the mother of that child ? — Yes, I am. Mesdames, 
 êtez-vous les parentes dont Monsieur m'a parlé ? — Oui», 
 nous les sommes. 
 
 Rem. Though the word relating to the following 
 questions, is not expressed in English, yet it must 
 
 § EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The laws of nature and decency oblige us equally to defend 
 the honour and interest of our parents, when we can dotï without 
 injustice. 
 
 2. We ought not to condemn, after their death, those that Irave 
 n,<Jt been condemned during their life. 
 
 (l.) Decency, bienséance. 
 
 O) Te ought, falloir ; condemned, le* 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 331 
 
 ilways be so in French : this word is le, which takes 
 either gender, or number, according to its relation. IT 
 
 It only remains, therefore, to lay down the following 
 Rule. The pronoun le takes neither gender no.i 
 number, when occupying the place of an adjective, 
 * EXAMPLES. 
 
 Madame, ctes-vous enrhumée ? — Oui, je le suis. 
 Mesdames, êtes-vous contentes de ce discours ? — Oui, nous it 
 sommes. 
 Y eut-il jamais une femme plus malheureuse que je le suis ? 
 
 Rem. This rule is observed, when the substantive 
 are used adjectively, as, 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous mère ? — Oui, je le suis. 
 Mesdames, êtes-vous parentes? — Oui, nous le sommes. 
 Elle est fille, et le sera toute sa vie. 
 
 But not if the adjectives be used substantively, as, 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous la malade ? — Oui, je la suis. 
 
 Therefore this question ; Etes -vous fille de M, le duc 
 
 is to be answered, Oui, je le suis ; but this, Etes-vous 
 
 J a fille de M. le duc ? — Oui, je la suis.f 
 
 IT EXERCISE, 
 j. Is that your idea 1 — Can you doubt that it is ? 
 % Are you Mrs. Such-a-one ? — Yes, I am. 
 3. Are those your servants ? — Yes, they are. 
 
 l.) Idea, pensée ; that it is, ce être, subj-1. 
 x i.) Mrs. Madame ; such-a-ont, un tel. (3.) Those, ce là ; they, ce, 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Ladies, are you glad to have seen the new piece ? — Yes, we 
 are. 
 
 2. I, a * slave ! I, born to command ! alas ! it is but too true 
 hat I am so. 
 
 3. She was jealous of her authority, and she ought to be so. 
 
 4. Was there ever a girl more unhappy, and treated with more 
 ridicule than I am I 
 
 5. You have found me amiable : why have I ceased to appear 
 so to you ? 
 
 6. Have we ever been so quiet as we are ? 
 
 7. Madam, are you married ? — Yes, I am. 
 
 8. Madam, are you the bride? — Yes, I am. 
 
 1.) Ladies, Mesdames. (-.) >luve, esclave ; but, ne que. 
 
 l$S Ought, devoir, intl-2 '.)) With more ridaitte, plus rkUôufttiien';, 
 
333 PARTICULAR RULES OF tfHE PK0KO0&&. 
 
 The same rule is likewise observed with the ai 
 placed before plus, or moins, and an adjective. It 
 lakes neither gender nor number, when there is no 
 comparison, as, 
 
 [je lune ne nous éclaire pas au- The moon does not give us so 
 tant que le soleil, même quand much light as the sun, even 
 elle est le plus brillante, when it shines brightest. 
 
 But it takes them when there is comparison, as, 
 De toutes les planètes, la lune est Of all the planets, the moon is 
 la plus brillante pour nous,\ the most brilliant to us. 
 
 V. 
 
 REPETITION OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS, 
 
 Rule I. Pronouns expressing the first and second 
 persons, when the subject must be repeated before all 
 the verbs, if those verbs are in different tenses ; it is al* 
 ways even better to repeat them, when the verbs are in 
 the same tense. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Je soutiens et je soutiendrai tou- \ I maintain, and (I) will always 
 
 jours, maintain. 
 
 Vous dites, ti vous avez toujours You say, and (you) have always. 
 
 dit, said. 
 
 Iccablé de douleur, je m'écriai et Overwhelmed with sorrow, I 
 
 je dis, exclaimed and (I) said. 
 
 Nous nous promenions sur le haut We were walking upon tht 
 
 du rocher, et nous voyions sous summit of the rock, and we 
 
 nos pieds, &c. saw under our feet. &c. 
 
 ï EXERCISE. 
 
 1. This father could not bring himself to condemn his children 
 even when they were most guilty. 
 
 2. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even when she U 
 least afflicted. 
 
 3. Out * of so many criminals, only the most guilty should be 
 punished. 
 
 4. Although that woman displays more fortitude than the 
 others, she is not, on that account, the least distressed. 
 
 (1.) Could, ind-2 ; bring himself, se résoudre. 
 (2.) Shedding, répandre de ; even when, dans le temps même que. 
 (3.) Only the most, kc- (one must punish only the most guilty ;) only, ne que.' 
 (4.) Displays, montrer ; fortitude, fermeté j on that account, pour. cQ& . 
 tfistrcssed, affligé- 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 333 
 
 In all cases these pronouns must be repeated, though 
 the tenses of the verbs do not change, if the first of these 
 is followed by a regimen, as, 
 rous aimerez le Seigneur votre You shall love the Lord your 
 
 Dieu, et vous observerez sa God, and (you shall) observe 
 
 loi,^ his law. 
 
 Rule II. The pronouns of the third person, when 
 they form the subject, are hardly ever repeated before 
 verbs, except when those verbs are in different tenses. 
 
 EXAMFLES. 
 La bonne grâce ne gâte rien ; A graceful manner spoils no 
 
 elle ajoute à la beauté, relève thing : it adds to beauty. 
 
 la modestie, et y donne du lus- heightens modesty, and givet: 
 
 ire, it lustre. 
 
 // najamais ritn valu, et ne van- He never was good for any 
 
 dra jamais rien, thing, and never will be. 
 
 Il est arrivé ce matin, et il repar- He arrived this morning, and 
 
 tira ce soir, (he) will set off again this 
 
 evening. 
 
 However, perspicuity requires the repetition of the 
 pronoun, when the second verb is preceded by a long 
 incidental phrase, as — Il fond sur son ennemi, et après 
 
 IF EXERCISE ON THE REPETITION OF THE PER- 
 SONAL PRONOUN. 
 
 1. My dear child, / love you, and /shall never cease to love 
 you : but it is that very love that I have for you which obliges me 
 to correct you for your faults, and to punish you when you de- 
 serve it. 
 
 2. /heard and admired these words, which comforted me a 
 little, but my mind was not sufficiently at liberty to make him a 
 reply. 
 
 3. Thou art young, and doubtless thou aimest at the glory of 
 surpassing thy comrades. 
 
 4. God has said : you shall love your enemies, bless those that 
 curse you, do good to those that persecute you, and pray for those 
 who slander you. What a difference between this morality and 
 that of philosophers ! 
 
 ( ! ..) Correct / or , reprendre de. 
 
 (■2)Jfeardy écouter, ind-2 ; words, discours, sin». ; my mind, kc. (I had not thfc 
 mind, &c.) sufficiently at liberty, aspez libre j to make a reply, répondre à. 
 (3.) Jiimest at, aspirer à ; stf-pas.ùr.fr, l'emporter, Le. 
 1.) Slander, calomnier : bchveen. de j and that, à celle. 
 
 
834 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PKOXOUâS- 
 
 V avoir saisi d'une main victorieuse, il le renverse, cor/r 
 me le cruel aquilon abat les tendres moissons qui dorem 
 la campagne.^ 
 
 Rule III. Any personal pronoun, when the subject 
 must be repeated before verbs, when passing from an 
 affirmation to a negation, and vice versa, or when the 
 verbs are joined by any conjunction, except et and ni. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 Il veut et il ne veut pas, lie will and he will not. 
 
 // donne oVexceltns principes, He lays down excellent princi- 
 pale qu'il sait que les progrès pies, because he knows that 
 ultérieurs en dépendent, upon them depends all further 
 
 progress. 
 // donne et reçoit, He gives and receives. 
 
 Il ne donne ni ne reçoit,i He neither gives nor receives. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He took the strongest cities, conquered the most consider- 
 able provinces, and oveiturned the most powerful empires. 
 
 2. He takes a hatchet, completely cuts down the mast which 
 was already broken, throws It into the sea, jumps upon it amidst 
 the furious billoAVs, calls me by my name, and encourages me to 
 follow him. 
 
 '3. He marshals the soldiers, marches at their head, advances 
 in good order towards the enemy, attacks and breaks them, and. 
 after having entirely routed them, (he) cuts them to pieces. 
 
 (1.) Overturned, renverser. 
 
 (2.) Completely cuts down, achever de couper ; jumps upon it, s'élancer des- 
 sus *, billows, onde. 
 
 (3.) Marshals, ranger en bataille : breaks, renverser ; entirely routed, achever 
 de mettre eu désordre ; cuts, tailler. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 1. It is inconceivable how whimsical she is; from one moment 
 
 ; other the will and she will not. 
 J . The Jews are forbidden to work on the sabbath ; they are 
 as it : were * locked in slumber ; they light no five, and carry no 
 water. 
 ',). For nearly a week she has neither eaten nor drunk. 
 4. The soldier was not repressed by authority, but stopped 
 from satiety and shame. 
 
 (1.) (She is of a whimsical cast inconceivable) whimsical east, bizarrerie, f. 
 p.) (It is forbidden to), forbidden, dt'-fondre : subbath. jour du sabbat ; locked, 
 inchainé ; slumber, repos liçht. allume' - 
 (J.) Far, depuis ; nearly, pré* de ; a ruede, huit jours -, has eaten.. 
 
 . réprimer ; stoj m, pa: 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Rule IV. Pronouns, when they form the regimen, 
 repeated before any verb. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Vidée de ses malîieurs h pour- The idea of his misfortunes 
 suit, le tourmente et Vacca- pursues (him), torments 
 ble, (him), and overwhelms him. 
 
 Il nous ennuie el nous obsède He wearies (us) and besets us 
 sans cesse, ' unceasingly. 
 
 Exception. It is not repeated before such compound 
 verbs as express the repetition of the same action, when 
 the verbs are in the same tense, as, . 
 
 Je vous le dis et redis, il le fait et refait sans cesse. 1[ 
 
 VI. 
 
 RELATION OF THE PRONOUNS OF THE THIRD PERSON TO 
 A NOUN AS EXPRESSED BEFORE. 
 
 Rule. The pronouns of the third person, il, ils, elle, 
 dies, le, la, les, must always relate to a noun, whether 
 subject or regimen, taken only in a definite sense, before 
 expressed irr the same tense, but they must not be ap- 
 plied to a subject and regimen at the same time. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 La rose est la reine des flturs, The rose is the queen of flow. 
 aussi csf-elle l 'emblème de la ers ; therefore it is the em- 
 btautt, blem of beauty. 
 
 If EXERCISE. 
 
 1. It is taste that selects th^. expressions, that combines, ar- 
 ranges, and varies them, so as to produce the greatest effect. 
 
 2. Horace answered his stupid critics not so much to instruct 
 them, as to expose their ignorance, and let them see that they did 
 not even know what poetry was. 
 
 3. Man embellishes nature itself; he cultivates, extends, and 
 polishes it. 
 
 (1 ) So as to, de manière à ce qu'elles, subj-1. 
 
 (2.) Stupid, sot ; not so much, moins ; at to. pour : show, (to tbero.) th; 
 li\ see, faire entendre ; was, c'était que. 
 
$36 tARÏICÏJLÀK BUÏJ2S OF THE PKOXOUK'S. 
 
 J'aiww Tananas ; il es* ezgwis, I like the pine-apple; it is dt- 
 
 licious. 
 
 But the two following sentences would be equivocal : 
 
 Racine a imité, Euripide, en Racine has imitated Euripides 
 tout ce qu'il a de plus beau in all that he has most beau- 
 
 ' dans sa Phèdre, tiful in his Phedra. 
 
 Le légat publia une sentence The legate published a sen- 
 d'interdit; il dura trois mois, tence of interdiction ; it last- 
 
 ed three months. 
 
 As in the first of these two sentences il may relate, 
 either to Racine or to Euripides, and from the con- 
 struction of the second sentence, il cannot, as it should, 
 relate to interdit. Again, it is not altogether correct, 
 to say, 
 
 Nulle paix pour V impie ; il la No peace for the wicked : he 
 
 cherche, elle fait, seeks it, it flies. 
 
 Because, from the construction, the pronouns la and 
 die seem to be used for nulle paix, whereas the mean- 
 ing requires that they should supply the place of the 
 substantive paix, in the affirmative, f 
 
 f EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Poetry embraces all sorts of subjects ; it takes in every 
 hing that is most brilliant in history; it enters the fields of 
 
 philosophy; it soars to the skies ; it plunges into the abyss: v 
 penetrates to the dead; it makes the universe its domain; and 
 if this world be not sufficient, it creates new ones, which it em- 
 bellishes with enchanting abodes, which it peoples with a thou- 
 sand various inhabitants. 
 
 2. Egypt aimed at greatness ; and wished to * strike the eye 
 at a distance, always pleasing it by the justness of proportion. 
 
 3. Egypt, satisfied with its own territory, where every thing 
 was in abundance, thought not of conquests ; it extended itself 
 in another manner, by sending colonies to every part of the globe, 
 and with Ihem civilization and laws. 
 
 (1.) Svljects, matière ; takes in. se charger de -, that is, y avoir de 5 (in) the 
 fields, soars to, s'élancer dans ; plunges, s'enloncer •, to, chez ; (its domain of 
 die universe ;) be sufficient, suffire ; ones, monde, enchanting, enchanté , abodes, 
 demeure ; various divers 
 
 (-2.) Greatness, grand ; wished, vouloir j eye, pi ; at a distance, dans l'éloi- 
 ^nemetlt ; (in) pleasing, contenter 
 
 " (3 ) IV as in abundance, abonder; thought of, songera} in, de; &y, en 5 to 
 nar : part of the globe, terre. 
 
PARTICULAR RUI*ES OF THE PRONOUNS» S3 1 ? 
 
 II. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXPLANATION OF SOME DIFFICULTIES ATTENDANT ON 
 THE USE OF THE POSSESSIVE PSONOUNS. 
 
 The possessive pronouns son, sa, ses, leur, leurs- relate 
 either to pronouns, to things personified, or simply to 
 things. If they relate to persons, or things personified, 
 their place can never be supplied by others : but if they 
 relate to things, the following rules must be ob&rçmd. 
 
 Thé possessive pronouns are always employed, 
 
 1. When the object to which they relate is. either 
 named, or designated by a personal pronoun in the same 
 member of a phrase. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 L'Angleterre étend son com- England extends her commerce 
 
 mercepar toute la terre, over the whole globe. 
 
 VAle envoie ses flottes dans toutes She sends hjer fleets into every 
 
 les mers, part of the ocean. 
 
 2. Before a noun, when qualified even by a single 
 adjective, unless the noun form the regimen. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Ses ressources immenses sont Her immense resources are în- 
 inépuisables, exhaustible. 
 
 3. After every preposition, 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 C'est par sa position, jointe à la It is by her situation, joined to 
 sagesse de se ru gouvernement, the wisdom of her govern- 
 qu elle réunit dans son sein da ment, that she unites such 
 si grands avantages, vast advantages within her- 
 
 self. 
 
 4. The Messiah is expected by the Hebrews ; he comes and 
 :alls the Gentiles, a3 it had been announced by the prophecies ; 
 the people that acknowledge him. as come, is incorporated wilh 
 the people that expected him, without a single moment of inter- 
 ruption. 
 
 (4.) Gentiles, Gentil; (tbe prophecies had announced it 5) acknowledges^ recoil 
 nattre ; with, a 3 without^ sans qu'il y ait j single, seul, 
 
 30 
 
TABTICVLAR RULES OF THE PBONOX7NS, 
 
 4.. Before all words which can govern the preposi- 
 tion de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Son parlement est le sanctuaire Her parliament is the seat of the 
 
 de la plus sage politique, wisest policy. 
 
 Son roi n'a de pouvoir que pour Her king possesses power only 
 
 faire te bkn f to do good. 
 
 On all other occasions, the article, with the pronoun 
 en, placed immediately before the verb, must be substi- 
 tuted. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Tout ;,i^ contribue à m 1 en In short every thing conspires 
 faire aimer le séjour ; fen to make me love that resi 
 admire surtout Vexacte po- dence : I particularly admire 
 lice, en même temps que les the strictness of her police, 
 lois m'en paraissent extrême- at the same time when hei 
 ment sagesj laws appear to me extremeK 
 
 wise. 
 
 i EXERCISE ON THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. A new custom was a phenomenon in Egypt : for which rea- 
 son, there never was a people that preserved so long its custom*, 
 
 . tis laws, and even its ceremonies. 
 
 2. Solomon abandons himself to the love of women : his un- 
 derstanding declines, his heart weakens, and fas piety degenerates 
 into idolatry. 
 
 3. That superb temple was upon the summit of a hill : its co- 
 lumns were of Parian marble, and its gates of gold. 
 
 4. Laocoon is one of the finest statues in France : not only the 
 whole, but all its features, even the least, are admirable. 
 
 5. The Thames is a magnificent river : its channel is so wide 
 and so deep below London-bridge, that several thousands of ves 
 sels lie at their ease in it. + 
 
 6. This fine country is justly admired by foreigners : its climate 
 is delightful, its soil fruitful, its laws wise, and its government ju«» 
 and moderate. 
 
 7. The trees of that orchard have sun enough, yet its fruits are 
 but indifferent. 
 
 (1.) Pkxnomenon, prodige ; for which reason^ aussi-, a, de ; preserved,s\\bj'$. 
 (2.) Understanding, esprit ; declines, baisser ; weakens, s'affaiblir. 
 (3.) Summit, bant*, hill, colline ', Parian, de Paros. 
 (4.) In, qu'il y ait en -, the whole, l'ensemble ; even, jusqu'à. 
 (5 ) Magnificent, superbe ; channel, lit : below, au dessous de j lie ai, être à 
 Heir, art ; in it, y. (•>.) Justly, avec raison *, soil, sol. 
 
 (7.) Have sun enough, être bien exposé ; but indifferent^ assez mauvais 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 339 
 
 Again, when there exists any doubt whether the pos* 
 lessive pronoun ought to be used, or not before a noun 
 that is the regimen, the following is the 
 
 Rule. The article, not the possessive pronoun, must 
 be put before a noun forming the regimen, when a pro- 
 noun which is either subject, or regimen, sufficiently 
 supplies the place of that possessive, or when there is 
 no sort of ambiguity. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 J'ai mal à la tête, I have the head-ache. 
 
 îl faudrait lui couper la jambe , It would be necessary to take 
 
 off his leg. 
 Ce cheval a pris le mors aux That horse has run away. 
 
 dents,t 
 
 8. The Seine has its source in Burgundy, its mouth is at Havre- 
 de-Grace. 
 
 9. The pyramids of Egypt astonish, both by the enormity of 
 heir bulk, and the justness of their proportions. 
 
 10. Egypt alone could erect monuments for posterity ; its obe« 
 lisks are to this day, as well for their beauty as for their height, the 
 principal ornaments of Rome. 
 
 11. History and geography throw mutual light on each other ; 
 perfect knowledge of them ought to enter into the plan of good 
 
 education. 
 
 (8.) J\foulh, embouchure •, Havre* le Havre. 
 (9.) Both, également et ; bvlk, masse ; and, et par. 
 
 (10.) Egypt alone could, il n'appartenait qu'a l'Egypte de ; erect, élever j tê 
 :kis day, encore aujourd'hui ; as -util for, autant par ; height, hauteur. 
 (11.) Throsi mutual light, ice. s'éclairer l'une par l'autre ; of them, (their.) 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. During the whole winter he has had bad eyes. 
 
 2. I had a fall yesterday, and hurt my back and head. 
 
 3. It would be better for a man to lose his life than forfeit * his 
 honour by a criminal 2 action 1. 
 
 4. In this bloody battle, he received a wound by a shot in kis 
 right arm, and another in his left leg : by dint of care his arm was 
 ^aved, but it was necessary to amputate his leg. 
 
 Ok) Has had bad, avoir mal à. 
 
 (2.) Had a fall, se laisser tomber ; hurt, se faire mal à ; lack, reins, pi. 
 
 (3.) Would he better, valoir mieux, cond-1. 
 
 (4.) A wound by a shot, un coup de feu ; in, à : by dint, d force ; his arm, kd 
 (they saved the arm to him :) was necessary, falloir, ind-3 } to * amputtttf t; 
 mm. 
 
Ô40 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROX017NS. 
 
 But should either the personal pronoun, or circum- 
 stances, not remove all ambiguity, then the possessive 
 pronoun must be joined to the noun, as, 
 
 Je roi; que ma jambe s'enfle, I see that rny leg is swelling. 
 
 Il lui donna sa main à baiser, He gave him his hand to kiss. 
 
 Elle a donné hardiment son bras She courageously presented her 
 au chirurgien,^ arm to the surgeon. 
 
 Ma, not la, because I may also see the leg of another 
 person swelling. 
 
 Rkm. 1. Although verbs which are conjugated with 
 two pronouns of the same person generally remove 
 every kind of amphibology, yet custom authorizes some 
 fatiiih'ar expressions, in which the possessive pronoun 
 seems to be redundant, as, 
 
 Il se tient ferme sur ses pieds, He stands firm upon his feet. 
 
 Je Vax vu, de mes propres yeux. I have seen it with my own eyes 
 
 2, When speaking of an habitual complaint, the pos 
 sessive pronoun is properly used, as, 
 
 Sa migraine ta repris, His head-ache is returned. 
 
 The possessive pronouns are subject to the same rules 
 as the article ; they mast therefore be repeated before 
 all substantives which are either subject or regimen, and 
 before adjectives which express different qualities, as, 
 
 Bon père, sa. mère, et ses frères His father, «mother, and bro- 
 
 sont de retour, thers are come back. 
 
 Je lui ai montré mes plus beaux I have shewn him my finest and 
 
 et mes plus vilains habits, my ugliest dresses. 
 
 1Ï EXERCISE. 
 
 1. In this interview, they made each other presents; she gave 
 him her portrait, and he gave her his finest diamond. 
 
 2. A young surgeon preparing to bleed the great Condô, thû 
 prince said to him smiling, do not you tremble to bleed me 1 I 
 my lord, no, certainly ; it is not I, it is you who ought to trem- 
 ble. The prince, charmed with the reply, immediately gave him 
 his arm. 
 
 (1.) Interview, entrevue; made each other, se faire mutuellement. 
 
 (2.) Preparing, se disposer *, bleed, saigiier ; smiling, d'un air riant ; ii is, 
 *ot /, (it is not to ine :) it is you. (it is to you ;) who ought to, de ; ftpty im- 
 partie. 
 
PARTICULAR BULES OF THE PBONOXJKS. 341 
 
 This rule, which is seldom observed in English, itf 
 common in French to all pronominal adjectives.f 
 
 HI. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Quiy when it is the subject, may very properly relate 
 both to persons and things. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 L'homme qui joue perd son The man who games loses his 
 
 temps, time. 
 
 Le livre, qui plaît le plus, n'est The book which pleases most is 
 pas toujours le plus utile, not always the most useful. 
 
 But when it is the regimen, it can only be used of 
 persons, or of things personified, whether the regimen 
 be direct, or indirect. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quand on est délicat et sage He who is wise and discriminate 
 dans ses gouts, on ne s* at- in his choice, does not form 
 tache pas, sans savoir qui Von an attachment, without know- 
 aime, ing the person he loves. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Whatever he may do, he always finds himself safe. 
 
 2. Can you still doubt the truth of what I tell you ? Would you 
 ask a stronger proof than that I give you, it is that I heard it, yes, 
 heard it with my own ears. 
 
 3. My gout does not ailow me a moment's repose, 
 
 4. It is in vain that I exhort you to work and study : your idle- 
 ness, that cruel disease under* which you labour, renders useless 
 all the exhortations of friendship. 
 
 5. If you wish to be beloved, fail not to perform the promises 
 you have just made. 
 
 6. In the retreat that I have chosen for myself, my study and 
 my garden are my greatest delight. 
 
 7. He brought me into his laboratory, and shewed me his large 
 and small vessels. 
 
 (1.) Finds himself, se retrouver -, saft, sur ses jambes. 
 (2.) Can, cond-1 j doubt , douter de ; ask, exiger. 
 (3.) Allo-j). laisser. 
 
 (4.) It is in vain that /, je avoir beau ; you labour, vous travailler. 
 (S.) Fail not, ne pas manquer ; perform, remplir -, have just made, veair 4fi 
 Caire. 
 <6.) For myself, (to me ;) study, cabinet ; are, faire ; greatest, plus <her. 
 (7.) Brought, mener : hxootatory. laboratoire kiseeau. 
 
 30* 
 
342 FARTICUIi&R RULES OP THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 L'homme a qui appartient ce The man to whom this fint 
 
 beau jardin est très-riche, garden belongs is very rich. 
 
 La femme de qui vous parlez. The woman of whom you are 
 
 speaking. 
 
 Rem. When the regimen indirect is expressed by 
 the preposition de, then dont should be preferred to de 
 qui. It is better to say : la femme dont vous 'parlez ; 
 however, when the verb expresses a kind of transfer or 
 conveyance, de qui must be used, as, 
 Celui de qui je tiens cette nou- The person from whom I had 
 
 velle, that intelligence. 
 
 Rule I. Qui must not be separated from its antece- 
 dent, when that antecedent is a noun. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Un jeune homme qui est docile A young man who is obedien; 
 aux conseils qu'on lui donne, to the advice that is given 
 et qui aime à en recevoir, him, and who loves to re 
 aura- infailliblement du mé~ ceive this, will infallibly have 
 rite, merit. 
 
 Rem. In some phrases qui may be separated from 
 the substantive, by several words : that is, when the 
 sense obliges us to refer it to that substantive, as, 
 
 Il a fallu, avant toute chose, vous faire lire dans récriture- 
 sainte, Vhistoire du peuple de Dieu, qui fait le fondement de la re 
 ligion. 
 
 This sentence is very correct, because, as du peuple 
 determines the kind of history, and de Dieu the kind of 
 people, the mind necessarily goes back to the substan- 
 tive histoire, to which it refers the incidental phrase. 
 
 Qui may likewise be separated from its antecedent, 
 when this antecedent is a pronoun used as the regimen 
 direct, as, 
 U la trouva qui pleurait à cîiaudes lie found her crying bitterly. 
 
 larmes, 
 Je le vois qui joue, I see him playing. 
 
 Because, in this case, the true place of the pronoun is 
 before the verb, and it is the same as saying, il trouva 
 elle qui pleurait, &c. je vois lui qui joue. Also in these 
 kinds of sentences, which are real gallicisms. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OP THE PRONOUNS. 34o 
 
 "Ceux-là m sont pas les plus Those are not the most un* 
 malheureux, qui 5e plaignent happy who complain the 
 le plus,t most. 
 
 Rule II. The relative qui must always have a re- 
 ference ta a noun taken in a determinate sense. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 L'homme est un animal raisonnable, qui, &c. lime reçut avec urn 
 politesse, qui, &c. 
 
 But we cannot say, Vaomme est animal raisonnable, 
 qui, &c. Il me re^ut avec politesse, qui, &c. 
 
 Rem. Though in many phrases, the determinate 
 nature of the nouns is not expressed, yet it is clearh 
 understood. Thus, all these phrases are correct : 
 
 Un! a point de livre, qui ne soit He has nota look that is not ol 
 
 de son choix, his own selecting. 
 
 Y a-t-il ville dans le royaume Is there a city in the kingdom 
 
 qui soit plus favorisée ? that is more favoured ? 
 
 Il se conduit en homme qui con- He behaves himself like a mai 
 
 naît le monde, who knows the w r orld. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. A young man who loves vanity of dress, like a woman, is un- 
 worthy of wisdom and glory ; glory is only due to a heart that 
 knows how * to * suffer pain and trample upon pleasure. 
 
 2. Thyself, O my son, my dear son, thou* thyself thai now en- 
 joyest a youth so cheerful and so full of pleasure, remember thai 
 this delightful age is but a flower which will be 1 withered 3 almost 
 as soon 2 as blown. 
 
 3. Men pass away like flowers, which open in * the morning, and 
 at night are withered and trampled under foot. 
 
 4. You must have a man that loves nothing but truth and you. 
 that will speak the truth in spite of you, that will force all your en- 
 trenchments ; and this necessary character is the very man whom 
 you have sent into exile. 
 
 5. We perceived him waiting for us, quietly seated under the 
 shade of a tree. 
 
 (1.) Vanity of dress, à se parer vainement ; trample upon, fouler aux pied*. 
 
 (2.) Cheerful, v\£-,full of, féconde en ; remember, se souvenir ; delightful, be! 
 withered, sécher ; blown, éclore. 
 
 (3.) Open, s'épanouir ; and, (which ;) at night, le soir ; withered, flétrir ; under 
 à ;foot, art. pi. 
 
 (4.) You must have, il vous falloir ; nothing but, ne que ; will speak, will 
 r orce, subj-1 ; entrenchments, retranchement j character, homme J Mm, môme . 
 ctnt into exile, exiler. 
 
 (5.) Waiting for i (who waited,) aUendrc j wider, à. 
 
344 PABTICULAK RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Il est accablé de maux, qui ne He is overwhelmed with mis- 
 lai laissentpas un instant de fortunes that do not allow 
 
 repos, 
 
 him a moment's rest. 
 
 C'est une sorte de fruit, qui m It is a sort of fruit that does not 
 mûrit pas en Europe, ripen in Europe. 
 
 From the translation of all the above examples, it is 
 evident that livre, ville, maux, are really determinate, 
 the meaning being : il ri a pas un livre qui, &c. y a-t-il 
 nue ville qui, ézc.V 
 
 Que relates both to persons and things. It is always 
 the regimen direct, and cannot subsist without an ante- 
 cedent expressed, which it generally follows. L'homme 
 que je vois, la pêche que je mange. We say, generally, 
 because, in some instances, it may be separated from 
 the antecedent by several words : that is, when the 
 mind necessarily goes back to that antecedent, as in 
 this sentence of Fléchier's, 
 
 Qu'est-ce qu'une armée ? — c'est un corps animé d'une infinité de 
 passions différentes, qu'un homme habile fait mouvoir pour la défense 
 de la patrie. 
 
 Rem. There are instances where que is apparently 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He received us with such goodness, civility, and grace, as 
 «harmed us, and made us forget all we had suffered. 
 
 2. There is no city in the world where there are more riches and 
 a greater population. 
 
 3. Is there a man can say ; I shall live till to-morrow ? 
 
 4. He has no friend but would make for him every kind of sa- 
 crifice. 
 
 5. He is surrounded by enemies, who are continually observing 
 him, and Would be veiy glad to detect him in a fault. 
 
 6. In his retreat, he lives like a philosopher, who knows mankind 
 and mistrusts them. 
 
 7. The pine-apple is a sort of fruit that in Europe ripens only ta 
 hot-houses. 
 
 8. That man is a sort of pedant, who takes words for ideas, and 
 facts confusedly heaped together for knowledge. 
 
 (1.) Such— as, un— qui ; civility, politesse. (2.) There are, sqbj. 
 
 (3.) Man, (who •,) con, subj. (A.) But, qui ne ; would make, gutjj-t. 
 
 (6.) /.%ke a, en ; philosopher, sage -, mistrusts, se défier de. 
 (7.) Pine-apple, ananas ; hoi-hpusts, serre chaude. 
 (3.J Heaped together, entasser ; frnoa'taZge^avoir. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PROXOUNS. 346 
 
 used as regimen indirect for à qui, or dont, as : C'est a 
 vous que je parle ; c'est de lui que je parle ; de la façon 
 que f ai dit la chose. But in this case, que is a con 
 junction.f 
 
 Lequel and dont relate both to persons and things. 
 But lequel ought never to be used either as a subject 
 or object, except to avoid ambiguity ; for, whenever the 
 sense is evident, qui or que must be used. 
 
 Lequel, with the preposition de, is either followed, or 
 preceded by a noun, which it unites to the principal 
 sentence. If it be followed, dont is preferable to du- 
 quel, both for persons and things. Thus : 
 
 La Tamise dont le lit, and not, de laquelle. 
 Le'prince dont la protection, and not, duquel. 
 
 If lequel be preceded by the noun, we can only make- 
 use of duquel when speaking of things, as, la Tamise, 
 dans le lit de laquelle ; and it is always better to use il 
 when speaking of persons, as, le prince à la protection 
 duquel ; de qui would not be so well. 
 
 With the preposition à auquel, when speaking ot 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The God wJwm the Hebrews and Christians have always 
 served, lias nothing in common with the deities full of imperfection 
 and even of vice worshipped by the rest of the world. 
 
 2. The Epic poem is not the panegyric of a ht ro who is proposed 
 as a* pattern, but the recital of great and illustrious actions. whicL 
 are exhibited for imitation. 
 
 3. The good which we hope for* preseuts itself to us, and di^ap 
 pears like an empty dream, which vanishes when we au 
 
 teach us, that the very things which we think we hold fa<t in 
 hands, may slip away in an instant. 
 
 4. Plato says, that, in writing, we ought to hide ourseh 
 disappear, to make the world forget us, that we may pretest 
 tiling but the truths we wish to impress. 
 
 (1.) (That the rest of the world worshipped.) 
 
 (2.) Is proposed, on propose ; on, pour ; pattern, modèle j is exhibited, oji 
 donner ; imitai ton, exemple. 
 
 (3.) Good, bien; disappears, s'envoler ; empty, vain j vanishes, Lc- 1 
 fait évanouir ; tue * holdfast, tenir le mieux ; in our hands * ; slip away, oout 
 échapper. 
 
 (4.) We, on ; to make the world forget, se faire oublier ; that we may vrtXn' 
 outpour ne produire «pit , wi/», couloir ;• intpra: 
 
346 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 things, as, les places aux-quelles il aspire, but we ought 
 to prefer à qui, when speaking of persons, as, 
 
 Les rois à qui on doit obéir. 
 
 Auxquels would not do so well. 
 So the relative qui, preceded by a preposition, never 
 relates to things, but to persons only.| 
 
 Quoi only relates to things. It is placed after the 
 word to which it relates, but is always preceded by a 
 preposition, and is generally followed by the subject of 
 the phrase with which it is connected, as, 
 
 La chose à quoi on pense ; voilà les conditions sans quoi la chose 
 ne peut se faire. 
 
 To this mode of expression are to be preferred, 
 lequel, duquel, auquel, as being much better ; for 
 quoi is never used with any degree of propriety, but 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The grand principle on which the whole turns is, that all * the 
 world is but one republic, of which God is the common father, and 
 m which every nation forms, as it were, one great family. 
 
 2. Homer, whose genius is grand and sublime like nature, i? 
 the greatest poet, and perhaps the most profound moralist of an- 
 tiquity. 
 
 3. The celebrated Zenobia, whose noble firmness 2 you have 
 admired 1, preferred dying with the title of queen, rather * than 
 accept the advantageous 2 offers 1 which Aurelian made her. 
 
 4. The Alps, on the summit of whir h the astonished eye discovers 
 perpetual snow and ice, present, at sun-set, the most striking and 
 most magnificent spectacle. 
 
 5. A king, to tvhose care we owe a good law, has done more for 
 his own glory, than if he had conquered the universe. 
 
 6. The ambitious man :< sees nothing but pleasure in the posses- 
 sion of the offices to which He aspires with so much eagerness, in- 
 stead of seeing the trouble that is inseparable from them. 
 
 7. Kings, whom religion makes it our duty to obey, are, upon 
 (îarth, the true representation of the providence of God. 
 
 .1.) Turns, rouler *, every, chaque -, as it xoere, comme. 
 
 v 3.) Preferred, aimer mieux ; than, que de. 
 
 (4.) Perpetual, éternel ; snow, ice, pi. ; sun-set, soleil, couchant } striking 
 onposan*. (5.) Care, solicitude. 
 
 '. 7 (To) whom; makes it our duty to. faire un devoir dej representation 
 inrasre. 
 
PARTÏCU.LAK RTJIiES OF THE rEOKOUKS. 347 
 
 when it relates to a vague and indefinite subject, such 
 as ce, or rien, as, 
 
 Cest de quoi je m'occupe sans cesse. 
 
 Il n'y a rien à quoi je sois plus disposé. 
 
 Où, d'où, par où, relate only to things. The\ 
 never used, but when the nouns, to which they refo . 
 express some kind of motion, or rest, at least metapho- 
 rically, as, 
 
 Voilà le but où il icnd, That is the end he aim3 at. 
 
 Cest une chose d'où depend le It is a thing upon which the 
 
 bonheu public, public happiness depends. 
 
 Les lieux par où il a passe, The places through which he 
 
 TJ has passed 
 
 IV. 
 
 ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Qui relates only to persons presenting but a vague 
 indeterminate idea, as, 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 
 1. What a young man, who begins the world, ought principally 
 to attend to, is not to give it a high opinion of his understanding, 
 but to gain numerous friends by the qualities of his heart. 
 
 2. A youth passed in idleness, effeminacy, and pleasure, lays uj 
 for * us nothing but sorrow and disgust in old age ; this, however, 
 is what we little think of when we are young. 
 
 3. There is nothing by which we are more affected than the lot 9 
 of fortune, although, being frail and perishable by its nature, i 
 cannot contribute to our happiness. 
 
 4. A grove, in ichkh I defy the burning heats of the dog-star, ;; 
 retired valley, where I can meditate in peace, a high hill, whence im 
 eye extends over immense plains, are the places where I spend th* 
 happiest moments of my life. 
 
 (1.) To what, ce à quoi; begins, entrer dans ; to attend, s'attacher ; it, 
 >ninion. îflite : under sta.ndin.a-. psnrit : to rain, se faire : numerous, beaucoup 
 
 (i.) io what, ce a quoi; begins, entrer aans ; to attend, s auarner , u, i , 
 opinion, idée ; understanding, esprit -, to gain, m faire ; numerous, beaucoup de. 
 
 (2.) Idleness, inutilité; effeminacy, mollesse; pleasure, volupté j lays up. 
 préparer ; of, a ; we, on. 
 
 (3.) By, à; we, on ; affected, sensible ; frail, frêle ; by, de ; cannot, subj-t , 
 our (the). 
 
 (4.) Orove, bosquet ; defy y braver ; burning heats, ardeur : Ja^-rfar, canicule : 
 sptnd, passer. 
 
348 PAKTICULAR RULES OP THE PRONOUNS» 
 
 Qui sera assez hardi pour V attar Who will be bold enough to at- 
 quer ? tack him ? 
 
 It is likewise used in the feminine, and in the plural 
 as, 
 
 Qui est cette personne-/^ ? Who is that person ? 
 
 Qui sont ces femmes-là ? Who are those women ? 
 
 Que and quoi relate to things only, as, 
 
 Que pouvait la valeur en ce com- What could valour do in that 
 
 bat funeste ? fatal combat? 
 
 A quoi pensez-vous ? What are you thinking of I 
 
 Que is sometimes used for à quoi, de quoi, as, 
 
 Que sert la science sans la ver- What avails learning without 
 
 tu ? virtue ? 
 
 Que sert à Favare d'avoir des What use is it to the miser to 
 
 trésors ? possess treasures ? 
 
 that is, a quoi sert, &c. de quoi sert, &c. 
 
 Quoi, when relating to a whole sentence, is the only 
 authorized expression that can be used, as, 
 
 La vie passe comme un songe ; c'est cependant à quoi on ne pense 
 guères. 
 
 Rem. Que and quoi require the preposition de before 
 the adjective or substantive that follows them, as, 
 
 Que dit-on de nouveau ? quoi de plus agréable ! 
 Que d'inconséquences dans sa conduite ! 
 
 Quel relates both to persons and things, as, 
 
 Quel homme peut se promettre un bonheur constant ? 
 Quelle grâce ! quelle beauté l mais quelle modestie '. 
 
 Où, d'où, par où, relate but to things.f 
 
 t EXERCISE ON ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. Who could ever persuade himself, did not daily experience 
 convince us of it, that, out of a hundred persons, there are ninety 
 who sacrifice, to the enjoyment of the present, all the best found 
 ed hopes of the future. 
 
 2. Who would not love virtue for its own sake, could he 
 in all its beauty ? 
 
 (1.) Did, si ; ont of, sur ; future, avenir. 
 
 (%) its cum take, elle même *, coitW he y si on pouvoir, ind-2» 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 34£ 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Ce, joined to the verb être, always governs this verl 
 in the singular, except when it is followed by the third 
 person plural. 
 
 Cest moi, c'est toi, c'est lui, c'est nous, c'est vous. - 
 
 But in different cases we must say, 
 
 Ce sont eux, ce sont elles, Sont-ce les Anglais, qui ont fait cela f 
 Ce furent vos ancêtres qui, Est-re les Anglais que vous aimez ? 
 Fût-ce nos propres fils qui, Fût-ce nos propres fils que. 
 
 Ce, when relating to a person, or thing mentioned 
 before, supplies the place of il, or elle. Ce must 
 always be used, when the verb être is followed by a sub- 
 stantive, accompanied by the article, or the adjective 
 un. 
 
 3. He who does not know how * to apply himself in his youth, 
 Joes not know what to do when arrived at maturity. 
 
 4. He was a wise legislator, who, having given to his country 
 men laws calculated to nake them good and happy, made them 
 swear not to violate any of those laws during his absence : after 
 whicfi, he went away, exiled himself from his country, and died 
 poor in a foreign land. 
 
 5. What people of antiquity ever had better laws than the Egyp- 
 tians ? JVkat other nation ever undertook to erect monument* 
 calculated to triumph over both time and barbarism ? 
 
 6. What more instructive dnd entertaining than to read celebrated 
 authors in their own language ? What beauty, wliat delicacy, and 
 «race, which cannot be transcribed into a translation, are discover- 
 ed in them ! 
 
 7. When Ménage had published his book on the Origin of the 
 French language, Christina, queen of Sweden, said : " Ménage 
 is the most troublesome 3 man 1 in the world 2 : he cannot let 
 one word 2 go 1 without its passport : he must know whence U 
 cornes, where it has passed through, and ichtiher it is going." 
 
 (3.)<To) what ; to do, s'occuper ; when arrived, fcc., dans l'âge mûr. 
 
 (4.) He, ce ; calculated, propre ; not to, (that they would not ;) went awuj,. 
 partir. ( 5 Calculated to, fait pour ; both, également ; over, de. 
 
 (6.) Language, langue ; delicacy, finesse ; which cannot, qu'on ne peut } bt 
 transcribed, faire passer ; translation, traduction -, are, kc. n'y déeouvre-t-oa 
 
 (j.)TFhen, après que; Christina, Christine; troublc-ow. incommo- 
 de, art. : carxnot, ne saurait ; go, passer ; must, vouloir 
 
 31 
 
 
850 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Lisez Homère et Virgile: ce sont Read Homer and Virgil : they 
 
 les plus grands poètes de Van- are the best poets of anti 
 
 tiquité, quity. 
 
 La douceur, V affabilité et une Gentleness, affability, and a cer- 
 
 certaine urbanité, distinguent tain urbanity, distinguish the 
 
 Vhomme qui vit dans It grand man that frequents polite com 
 
 monde; ce sont là les marques pany; these are marks ly 
 
 auxquelles on le reconnaît, which he may be known. 
 
 Avez-vous lu Platon ? c'est un Have you read Plato ? he is onf 
 
 des plus beaux génies de Van- of the greatest geniuses of an 
 
 tiquité, tiquity. 
 
 But, when the verb être is followed by an adjective,, 
 or by a substantive taken adjectively, z7, or elle, mast be 
 used. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Lisez Démoslhéne et Cicéron ; ils Read Demosthenes and Cicéro 
 sont très-éloquens, they are very eloquent. 
 
 Tai vu l'hôpital de Greenwich ; I have seen Greenwich Hospi 
 ii est * magnifique et digne tal ; it is superb and worthy 
 d'une grande nation, of a great nation. 
 
 Compter iez-vous sur Valère ? ig- Would you rely upon Valère ? 
 norez-vous qu'il est homme à do you not know that he is a 
 ne jamais revenir de ses pre- man who will never abandon 
 mières idées ?\ his first opinions ? 
 
 Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, relates to thing;- 
 only. It is always masculine singular, as it only denote? 
 
 X EXERCISE ON DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 1. It is we who have drawn that misfortune upon * ourselves 
 through our thoughtlessness and imprudence. 
 
 2. It was the Egyptians that first observed the course of thf 
 Stars, regulated the year, and invented arithmetic. 
 
 3. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero : they are the two phi 
 losophers of antiquity who have given us the most sound and lumi 
 nous ideas upon morality. 
 
 4. If you are intended for the pulpit, read over and over agaii 
 Bourdaloue and Massillon : they are both very eloquent ; but the 
 aim of the former is to convince, and that of the latter to per 
 suade. 
 
 (1.) Have drawn, s'attirer ; thoughtlessness, légèreté. 
 (2i First, les premiers ; stars, astre. 
 (s!) Peruse, lire ; sound, sain ; morality, morale. 
 
 (4.) Are intended f»r, se destiner à ; pulpit, rhaire $rtai ever and over again 
 life et réïfre sans cesse : aim, fciiK 
 
PABT1CULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 351 
 
 a vague object, which is not sufficiently specified to 
 !uiow its gender and number. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Ce qui flatte est plus dangereux What flatters is more dangerous 
 que ce qui offense, than what offends 
 
 Ce, joined to the relative pronouns, qui, que, dont, 
 and quoi, has. in some instances 1 a construction pecu- 
 liar to itself. Both ce and the relative pronoun that fol- 
 lows it, form, with the verb which they precede, the 
 subject of another phrase, of which the verb is always 
 être. Now, être may be followed by another verb, an 
 adjective, or a noun. 
 
 Wh^u être then is followed by another verb, the de* 
 rnonstrative ce must be repeated, as, 
 Ce que j' aime le plus, c'est d'être What I like most, is to be 
 
 seul, alone. 
 
 When followed by an adjective the demonstrative is 
 not repeated, as, 
 Ce dont vous venez de me parler What you have been mention 
 
 est horrible, ing to me is horrid. 
 
 When it is followed by a substantive, the demonstra» 
 tive may either be repeated, or not, at pleasure, except 
 in the case of a plural, or a personal pronoun. Thus, 
 we may say, 
 Ce que je dis, est la vérité, or, What I say is the truth. 
 
 c'est la vérité, 
 
 Though the former is best. But we must say, 
 Ce qui m'indigne, ce sont les What provokes me, are the iii 
 
 injustices, qu'on ne cesse de juries which are continual!) 
 faire, committed. 
 
 Ce qui m'arrache au sentiment What alleviates the grief tha' 
 
 qui m'accable, c'est vous, oppresses me, is you. 
 
 Most of-these rules contribute to the elegance of the 
 language. IT 
 
 IT EXERCISE. 
 1. What is astonishing is not always ichat is pleasing. 
 (!.) Ts astoni'Mv?. étonner : <* pleading, plair*v 
 
352 VAJtTlQVLm KULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 There are two ways of employing celui. In the first 
 it is followed by a noun, or pronoun preceded by the 
 preposition de. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Celui de vous qui, &c. Whichever of you that, &c. 
 
 Cette montre ressemble à celle de That watch is like that of yom 
 votre frère, brother. 
 
 In the second, it is followed by qui, que, or dont, as, 
 
 Celui qui ne pense qu'à lui seul He who thinks of nobody bu; 
 
 dispense les autres d'y penser, himself, excuses others fron. 
 
 thinking of him. 
 Votre nouvelle est plus sûre que Your intelligence i3 more au 
 celle qu'on débitait hier, thentic than that which wa^. 
 
 circulated yesterday. 
 
 In these two cases it is applied both to persons and 
 things. 
 
 In the latter of these instances, celui is sometimes 
 omitted, and this turn gives strength and elegance to 
 
 the expression, as, 
 
 Qui veut trop se faire craindre, se He who wishes to make himseH 
 fait rarement aimer ; too much feared, seldom 
 
 makes himself beloved. 
 
 2. Vtlim, îiië miser thinks least of, is to enjoy his riches. 
 
 3. What pleases us in the writings of the ancients, is to see that 
 they have taken nature as a model, and that they have painted her 
 with a noble simplicity. 
 
 4. What that good king has done for the happiness of his people 
 deserves to be handed down to the latest posterity. 
 
 5. 7f7uz£ constitutes poetry is wo? the exact number and regu 
 lar cadence of syllables: but it is the sentiment which animates 
 every thing, the lively fictions, bold figurer, and ^beauty and 
 variety of the imagery: it is the enthusiasm, fire, impetuosity, 
 force, a something in the words and thoughts which nature alone 
 can impart 
 
 6. What we justly admire in Shakspeare are those characters 
 always natural and always well * sustained. 
 
 7. What keeps me attached to life, is you, my son, whose tende; 
 age has still need of my care and advice. 
 
 (2.) What, (that to which ;) miser, avare. (3.) .fls a, pour. 
 
 (4.) Deserves, être digne ; to be handed down, être transmis ; latest^ la plifc 
 i-eculée. 
 (5.) Constitutes, faire ; exact, file ; lively, vif j imagery , image, pi. ; a some 
 \ing, un je ne sais quoi ■ words, parole ; impart, donner. 
 (60 tPc, en ; justly, avec justice ; naturul, daus la nature ; «u.<f aincu, soutenu 
 (7 ^ Kttps attachai attacb?-; : care, advia, p!. 
 
 \ 
 
PARTICULAB RULES OF TUE PRONOUNS. 353 
 
 Ceci and cela apply only to things ; however, in the 
 familiar style, custom authorises us to say, in speaking 
 of one person individually, or of many collectively ; 
 cela est heureux! cela croupit dans la fange; cela esf 
 <*ueux et fier, &c.f 
 
 CHAP. VF. 
 
 PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 
 
 Though on may generally be considered as a mascu- 
 line pronoun, as in the phrase, on n'est pas toujours maître 
 de ses passions, there are however occasions in which 
 it is evidently feminine, as, on n'est pas toujours jeune et 
 jolie : it may likewise be followed by a plural, as, on se 
 battit en désespérés ; est-on des traîtres ? 
 
 This pronoun must be repeated before all the verbs 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Whichever of you shall be found to excel the others both in 
 mind and body, shall be acknowledged king of the island. 
 
 2. There are admirable pictures ; these are after the manner of 
 Rubens, and those after the manner of Van-Huysum. 
 
 3. Why are the statues of the most celebrated modern sculp- 
 tors, notwithstanding the perfection to which the arts have been 
 carried, so much inferior to those of the ancients ? 
 
 4. He whose soul, glowing, as it w-ere, with divine fire, shall 
 epresent to himself the whole of nature, and shall breathe into 
 
 objects that spirit of life which animates them, those affecting 
 traits which delight and ravish us, will be a man of real genius. 
 
 5. He that judges of others by himself, is liable to many mi- 
 takes. 
 
 6. He that is easily offended, discovers his weak side, and affords 
 his enemies an opportunity of taking advantage of it 
 
 7. He who loves none but himself, deserves not to be loved by 
 others. 
 
 (1.) Be found to excel the others, on juger vainqueur , both in, et pour (re 
 peated. 
 (2.) There are, voilà de; picture, tableau; are after, être dans ; manner, 
 
 (3.) Are, (to be placed before so much inferior ;) have been carried, (active 
 voice,) with, on ; inferior, au-dessous. 
 
 (4.) Glowing with, enflammé de ; as it were, pour ainsi dire ; the whole of, 
 tout ; shall breathe into, répandre sur ; affecting, touchant ; delight, séduire , 
 real, vrai. (5.) #y, d'après ; liable, expose mistake, méprise. 
 
 (6.) Is offended, s'offenser: weak side, faible ; affords, fournir à ; ff taking 
 advantage, profiter 
 
 31* 
 
354 *ÀBÏTGI/LAB BULÈS OP THÉ PRONOUNS. 
 
 of a sentence, and refer to one and the same subject. 
 Thus, the sentence, 
 
 On croit être aimé et Von né nous aime pas 
 us incorrect ; it should be, 
 
 On croit être aimé et Von ne Vest pas» 
 Quiconque is generally masculine, however it is femi- 
 nine, when speaking of, or to females, as, quiconque di 
 vous, Mesdames, &c. Though, perhaps, celle de vous, 
 &c. is preferable.:): 
 
 Chacun, though always singular, may be followed, 
 sometimes by son, sa, ses, and sometimes by leur, leurs, 
 which, in many instances, is embarrassing. 
 
 There is no difficulty in those phrases where chacun 
 is not contrasted with a plural number ; for then son, 
 sa, ses, must be used, as, 
 
 Donnez à chacun sa part, Give to each his share. 
 
 Que chacun songe à ses affaires. Let every one mind his owe 
 
 business. 
 
 Rule. In phrases where chacun is contrasted with 
 a plural to which it refers, son, sa, ses, must be em- 
 ployed, when chacun is placed after the regimen ; bin 
 
 Ï EXERCISE ON PRONOUNS INDEFINITE. 
 
 1. Do you sincerely think, said Emily to Lucilla, that when 
 women are sensible and pretty, they are ignorant of r< it : no, they 
 know it very well : but if they are watchful over their character 
 they are not proud of these advantages. 
 
 2. We are. no.t slaves, to receive such treatment. 
 
 3. Do you know what tltey do here ? They eat, they drink 
 dance, they play, they walk, in a word, they kill time in the gayest 
 manner possible. 
 
 4. Whoever of you is bold enough to slander me, I will make 
 him repeat it. 
 
 5. Whoever of you is attentive and discreet, shall receive a re 
 ward that will flatter her. 
 
 (1.) Sincerely, de bonne Foi j Emily, Emilie j women, on ; Met/, on } know, 
 savoir; watchful over, jaloux de ; charucter, réputation 5 are p roud, s'enur 
 fueillir. (2) We, on ; slaves, (des) esclaves ; to receive, pour essuyer de. 
 
 ** (3.) They, on ; in the gayest manner, le plus gairaent ; possible, (that they can» 
 
 (4.) Is, ind-7 ; to slander, pour médire de ; it (<>f it) 
 
 (5.) Is, irA-1 ; that will, fait pour. 
 
PAKTICU&AB BULES OF THE PRONOUA 5 35*1 
 
 i-eur, fours, must be used, when cliacun is placed before 
 the regimen. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF son, sa, ses. 
 Remettez ces médailles chacune Return those medals each into 
 
 en sa place, its proper place. 
 
 Les hommes devraient s'aimer, Men ought to love one another 
 
 chacun pour son propre intérêt, each for his own interest. 
 EXAMPLE OF leur, leurs. 
 Les hommes devraient avoir, Men ought for their own inte 
 
 cliacun pour leur propre in- rest, to have an affection fo- 
 
 térêt, de Vamour les uns pour each other. 
 
 les autres, 
 
 Rem. In phrases where chacun is contrasted with o 
 plural, there are two senses, the collective and the dis 
 trikutive. When chacun is placed after the regimen, 
 the collective sense expressed by the plural is finished : 
 and the distributive chacun acts separately the part ol 
 each individual : but when chacun precedes the regi- 
 men, the collective sense remaining incomplete, mus: 
 be carried on to the end ; and then the pronoun which 
 follows chacun is put in the plural, as, 
 f.a reine dit ellt-même aux députés, qu'il était temps qu'ils s'en retour- 
 nassent chacun chez ewx.1T 
 
 Personne, used as a pronoun, is always masculine : 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Go into my library, and put the books which have been sen' 
 jack to me, each into its place. 
 
 2. They have all brought offerings to the tempie, every one ac- 
 cording to his means and devotion. 
 
 3. Thierry charged Uncelanus to carry his orders to the muti 
 neers, and to make them retire each under his colours. 
 
 4. Each of them has brought his offering, and fulfilled his reli 
 i/ious duty. 
 
 5. Had Ronsard and Balzac each, in his manner of writing, a 
 sufficient degree of merit to form after them any very <{reat man it 
 verse and in prose ! 
 
 6. After a day so usefully spent, we went back, each to our own 
 home. 
 
 (2.) Offerings, offrande. 
 
 {8.) To carry, aller porter ; mutineers^ mutin -, colours, drapeau. 
 4.) (They have brought each their, &c ) fulfilled, remplir. 
 (5.) Manner of writing, genre ; a sufficient decree. as=L-z . merit, n.jn ; any, un. 
 (ô.) Day, journées went back, retourner ; 
 personal.) 
 
356 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 of course the adjective relating to it must be of that gen 
 
 der, as, 
 
 Personne n'est aussi heureux Nobody is so happy as she. 
 
 qu'elle, 
 
 Vun et Vautre require the verb they govern to be in 
 the plural. See p. 261. 
 
 Ni Vun ni Vautre likewise generally govern the verb 
 la the plural, when both may at the same time receive 
 the action expressed by the verb : however, the two 
 following modes 
 
 Ni Vun nil' autre n'ont fair leur devoir, or 
 Ni Vun ni l'autre n'a. fait son devoir, 
 
 are authorized ; but whenever this action applies only 
 to a single object, the verb must be in the singular, as, 
 
 Ni l'un ni l'autre n'est mon père ; ni l'un ni l'autre de sera nom- 
 mé à cette ambassade. 
 
 But when ni Vun ni Vautre elegantly stand after the 
 verb, the verb is always in the plural, as, 
 Ils ne sont morts ni Vun ni l'autre.i 
 
 Tout, and rien, when the regimen direct, are placed 
 after the verb, in simple tenses, and between the auxi- 
 liary and the participle, in compound tenses, as, il 
 
 7. Minds that possess any correctness, examine things with at 
 iion, in order to give a fair judgment of them ; and they place each 
 2 of * them 1 in the rank it ought to occupy. 
 
 (7.) Possess any, avoir de ; correctness, justesse ; give a fair judgment, juger 
 avec connaissance ; place, mettre ; to occupy, avoir. 
 
 ~ t EXERCISE, 
 i. Nobody is so severe, so virtuous in public, as some women 
 who practise the least restraint in private. 
 
 2. Nobody could be happier than she ; but as a consequence of 
 lhat levity which you know she has, she has lost all the advanta- 
 ges that she had received from nature and education. 
 
 3. Racine and Fénélon will be always the delight of feeling 
 minds : both 2 possessed 1 in the highest degree the art of ex- 
 citing in us at pleasure the most tender and the most lively erao 
 lions. 
 
 (1.) Some, aussi *, some, certain ; practise the least restraint, être le moins re 
 tenu. 
 (2.) Could, ind-2 5 the, un ; hvity, légèreté, know she has, lui connaître. 
 
 Ihvays, dans tous les temps ; both, Tun et l'autre -, in the, au j pleasure, çré 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 357 
 
 avoue tout ; il n'avoue rien ; il a tout avoué ; # n'a rien 
 avoué. But when they form the regimen indirect, the> 
 are always placed after the verb, both in simple and 
 m compound tenses, as, il rit de tout ; il ne se mêle de 
 rim ; il a pensé à tout ; il n'a pensé à rien. 
 Tout is sometimes used as an adverb, as, 
 
 Il lui dit tout froidement, He told him quite coolly. 
 
 Sometimes also, it represents quoique, encore que, en- 
 tièrement, quelque, in which case the following rule 
 must be observed. 
 
 Rule. Tout before an adjective, or a substantive 
 which is used adjectively, never takes either gender, or 
 number, except when immediately followed by an ad- 
 jective feminine beginning with a consonant, or h aspi 
 rated, as, 
 
 Les en/ans, tout aimables qu'ils Children, amiable as (hey are 
 
 sont, 
 
 Us sont tout interdits, They are quite disconcerted. 
 
 La vertu tout austère qu'elle Virtue, austere as it may ap 
 
 paraît, pear. 
 
 Ces images tout amusantes qu'el- These images, entertaining a? 
 
 les sont, they may be. 
 
 (Pest une tête toute vide, It is quite a vacant head. 
 
 Ces dames, toutes spirituelles These ladies, witty as they ma\ 
 
 qu'elles sont, be. 
 
 Ce» fleurs sont tout aussi frai- These flowers are quite as fresl/ 
 
 ches que celles que vous as those which you have. 
 
 avez, 
 
 Ces dames sont, tout ainsi que These ladies, as well as you, 
 
 vous, tout comme vous, belles are handsome, young, and 
 
 jeunes el spirituelles, ingenious. 
 
 In this latter sense, tout is little more than a mere ex 
 :>letive.§ 
 
 5. Balzac and Voiture enjoyed in their time great celebrity ; 
 'jut neither 2 has been read 1 since by good taste 1 ; the native 
 ind simple graces 3 are preferred 2 to the bombast of the former, 
 i?nd the affectation of the latter. 
 
 (4.) Enjoyed, incM . neither, ni l'un ni l'autre-, has heen read, (thi-j 
 hem 
 
 hem no more); native, du naturel ; simply de la simplicité ; are py 
 
 depuis que le hon coût a fait préfé - *>ouffissur« 
 
358 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Quelque — que, joined to a substantive, either alone, 
 or accompanied by an adjective, takes the sign of the 
 plural. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Quelques richesses que vous Whatever riches you may pos- 
 iez, sess. 
 
 Quelques bonnes œuvres que vous Whatever good actions you 
 fassiez, may do. 
 
 Quelques 'peines affreuses que However dreadful pains you 
 vous éprouviez, may suffer. 
 
 But, when joined to an adjective separated from its 
 substantive, it does not take the sign of the plural. 
 
 § EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Children, amiable as they are, have, nevertheless, many 
 laults which it is of importance to correct. 
 
 2. The philosophers of antiquity, although very * enlightened, 
 have given us but very confused ideas of the Deity, and very 
 vague notions about the principal duties of the law of nature. 
 
 3. Those flowers, inodorous as they are, are not the less 
 esteemed. 
 
 4. Virtue, austere as it is, makes us enjoy real pleasures. 
 
 5. Fables, although very * entertaining, yet 4 truly 5 interest 3 
 as 2 only, when they convey instruction to us, under the disguise 
 of an ingenious allegory. 
 
 6. Although that absurd pedant is an incessant 2 scribbler 1, 
 yet his head is altogether empty. 
 
 7. Far be from us those maxims of flattery, that kings are born 
 with talents, and that their favoured souls come out of God'e 
 hands, completely wise and learned. 
 
 8. Those fountains glide quite gently through a mead ena 
 melled with flowers. 
 
 9. These peaches are quite as good as those of the south of 
 France, 
 
 (J.) Have nevertheless, ne laisser pas d'avoir ; faults, défaut J of importance, 
 essentiel. (2.) Enlight tned, éclairés qu'ils étaient ; of nature, naturel. 
 
 (3.) Inodorous, inodore ; not, n'en. (4.) Enjoy, goûter de. 
 
 (5.) Entertaining, amusantes qu'elles sont j truly, véritablement ; only, ne l 
 que 6 j convey, offrir , disguise, voile. 
 
 (6.) Irjcessant, infatigable ; scribbler, écrivailleur ; his head is, (he has not less 
 (be head :) not, n'en ; altogether, tout. 
 
 (7.) Far be, loin ; of de, art. . are bom, naître ; with talents, habile ; favoured. 
 privilégié ;come ou/, sortir 5 learned, savant. 
 
 (8.) Glide, couler ; gcy\t f u, doucement : through a mead, sur un gazon. 
 PwtfA, midi. 
 
PARTICULAR RULE3 OF THE PRONOUNS. 359 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Fous les hommes, quelque oppo- All men, however opposite thev 
 
 ses qu'ils soient, may be. 
 
 Ces actions, quelque belles qxCon Those actions, however bril 
 
 les trouve, liant they may be found. 
 
 Quelque — que and quel que, joined to a substantive, 
 (p. 118), have the same meaning, although they are not 
 used indifferently for each other. If the pronoun 
 stands before the substantive, we make use of quelque 
 —que ; as, 
 
 Quelques richesses que vous ayez ; 
 
 But, if the verb intervene, then we make use of quel 
 que in two separate words, as, 
 
 Quelles que soient les richesses que vous ayez.H 
 
 1T EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Wliatever talents you may possess, whatever advantages you 
 may have received from nature and education, with * wliatevei 
 perfections you may be endowed, expect only the suffrage of a 
 small number of men. 
 
 2. However great services you may have rendered mankind 
 rather look for their ingratitude than their acknowledgments. 
 
 3. However useful, Jwwever well written the works which you 
 have published, yet think not that you will immediately reap the 
 fruits of your labours; it is but by slow degrees that light intro- 
 duces itself among men. The course of time is swift : but it 
 seems to lag, when it brings reason and truth along with it. 
 
 4. Whatever may be the obstacles which ignorance, prejudice, and 
 envy oppose to the true principles of an art, yet we ought never to 
 be deterred from propagating them : the sun does not cease to 
 ^hine, because its light hurts the eyes of night-birds. 
 
 5. Wlmtever be your birth, whatever your riches and dignities, re 
 member that you are frustrating the views of province, if you do 
 not make use of them for the good of mankind. 
 
 (1.) Possess, avoir ; have received, tenir ; he endowed, posséder ; expect, ne 
 •^attendre à -, but, que. 
 
 (2.) Mankind, homme, pi. ; rather tool: for, compter plutôt 5 achnotoled^ 
 ment s . reconnaissance, sing. 
 
 (3.) Immediately, de suite ; reap, recueillir; by slow degrees, avec lenteur 
 among, chez ; swift, rapide ; to lag, se '.rainer -, along with it, à sa suite. 
 
 (4.) We, on: to be deterred, se rebuter -, propagating, répandre: stint. 
 éclairer ; its, the article -, hurts, blesser ; night birds, oiseau de nuit. 
 
 (9.) Are frustrating, fruslreV 
 
360 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 CHAP V. 
 
 OF THE VERB. 
 AGREEMENT of tre verb with its subject. 
 
 It has been observed that the verb which has two 
 subjects, both singular, is put in the plural ; but to thi? 
 rule there are the following 
 
 exceptions. 
 
 1. A verb with two subjects in the singu ar, is not 
 put in the plural, when the two subjects are only joined 
 together by the conjunctions, ou, comme, aussi-bien que, 
 autant que, &c. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 La séduction, ou la terreur, Va. Either persuasion, or terror has 
 
 entraîné dans le parti des re- drawn him into the party of 
 
 belles, the rebels. 
 
 Le roi, aussi-bien que son mi- The king, as well as his nii~ 
 
 nistère, veut le bien public, nistry, wishes for the publu 
 
 good. 
 Son honnêteté, autant que son es- His honesty, as much as his wit 
 
 prit, le fait rechercher, malces him courted. 
 
 U ) envie, comme V ambition, est Envy, Wte ambition, is a blinc 
 
 une passion aveugle, passion. 
 
 2. The verb is likewise put in the singular, though 
 preceded by plurals, either when there is an expression 
 which collects all the substantives into one, such as. 
 fout, ce, rien, &c; or when the conjunction mais is 
 placed before the last substantive, and this is in the sin- 
 gular. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Biens, dignités, honneurs, tout Riches, dignities, honours, every 
 
 disparaît à la mort, thing vanishes at death. 
 
 Jeux, conversations, spectacles. Games, conversations, shows. 
 
 rien ne la distrait, nothing divertt her. 
 
 Perfidies, noirceurs, incendies. Perfidies, enormities, confia 
 
 massacres, ce ?*'est là qu'une ^rations, massacres, all this 
 
 faible image, &c. is but a feeble representation 
 
 &c. 
 Non-seulement toutes ses richesses Not only all his riches and 
 
 ettous ses honneurs, mai? toute honours, but all his virtue 
 
 sa vertu s'évanouit,* vanishes. 
 
PARTICULAR EULES OF TUE VERB. Jtf 
 
 OF THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 
 
 The collectives general have nothing to distinguish 
 ihem from substantives common, with regard to the 
 laws of agreement ; but the collectives partitive appa- 
 rently deviate from those laws, in some instances. 
 
 Rule. The verb, which relates to a collective par 
 titive, is put in the plural, when that partitive is follow- 
 ed by the preposition de and a plural ; but it is put in 
 the singular, either when the partitive is followed by a 
 regimen singular, or when it expresses a determinate 
 quantity, or lastly, when it presents an idea independent 
 of the plural which follows it. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE VERB. 
 
 i. Either fear or inability prevented them from moving. 
 
 2. The fear of death, or rather the love of life began to I 
 ia his bosom. 
 
 3. Alcibiades, as will as Plato, was among the disciples of 
 Socrates. 
 
 4. Lycurgus, lik& Solon, was a wise legislator. 
 
 5. Euripides, as much as Sophocles, contributed to the 
 A the Athenians. 
 
 6. Riches, dignities, honours, glory, pleasure, every thing loses 
 its charms from the moment we possess it, because none ofthost, 
 ihings can fill the heart of man. 
 
 7. The gentle zephyrs which preserved, in that place, not 
 withstanding the scorching heat of the sun, a delightful cool- 
 ness : streams gliding with a sweet murmur, through meadow* 
 interspersed with amaranths and violets; a thousand springing 
 [lowers which enamelled carpets ever green ; a wood of those 
 tufted trees that bear golden apples, and the blossom of which, 
 renewed every season, yields the sweetest of all perfumes; the 
 warbling of birds ; the continual prospect of a fruitful country ; 
 in a word, nothing of what till then had made him happy, could 
 assuage the feelings of his grief. 
 
 (1.) fnabil ity, impuissance ; moving, remuer. 
 
 (2.) Began, to revive, se réveiller ; in, au fond de ; bosom, cœui . 
 
 (3.) Among, au nombre de. 
 
 ; ô.) JVe, on ; none, rien, those things, tout cela. 
 
 (7.) Preserved, entretenir; scorching heat, ardeur; interspersed with, par* 
 *eràerde ; springing, naissant ; carpets, tapis ; tufted, touilu ; golden, (o( j*oUJ) -, 
 renewed, (which renews) se renouveler ; (in) every season; yitlds, répandre , 
 nrsspect, spectacle ; morfe, rendre ; assuage, l'arracher à ;/t:h'jij, sentiment** , 
 
 32 
 
Ï62 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE PLURAL. 
 
 La plupart des hommes sont The greatest part of men are 
 
 bien prompts dans leurs juge- very hasty in their judg- 
 
 mens, ments. 
 
 Bien des philosophes se sont Many philosophers have been 
 
 trompés, mistaken. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF THE SINGULAR. 
 
 Une infinité dépeuple est ac- An immense number of people 
 
 courue, ' regimen singular), flocked together. 
 
 La moitié des soldats a péri, One half of the soldiers has 
 
 (determinate quantity), perished. 
 
 Le plus grand nombre des The greater number of the 
 
 troupes a péri, (idea inde- troops has perished. 
 
 pendent of the plural.) 
 
 Thus the substantives partitive, la plupart, une infi- 
 nité, une foule, un nombre, la plus grande partie, une 
 sorte, &c. and words signifying quantity, such as peu : 
 beaucoup, assez, moins, plus, trop, tant, combien, and 
 que used for combien, followed by a noun joined to them 
 by the preposition de, have not the least' influence on 
 the verb, and consequently, it is not with them that the 
 verb agrees, but with the noun which follows them» 
 
 Remark. The words infinité and la plupart, used 
 by themselves, require the verb in the plural, as : une 
 infinité pensent, la plupart sont d'avis.'jç. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE COLLECTIVE PARTITIVE. 
 
 1. Many persons experience that human life is, every where 
 a state in which much is to he endured, and little to be enjoyed. 
 
 2. Many poets think that poetry is the art of uniting pleasure 
 with truth, by calling imagination to (he help of reason. 
 
 3. Few persons reflect that time, like t money, may be lost by 
 unseasonable avarice. 
 
 4. So many years of familiarity were chains of iron which 
 linked me to those men who beset me every hour. 
 
 5. How many wise men * have thought that, to seclude one's 
 self from the world, was to pull out the teeth of devouring ani 
 
 (1.) Much is, kc. (one has a great deal of pains, and little of real enjoyments.) 
 (3.) Unseasonable, hors de propos. 
 
 (4.) Familiarity, habitude ; linked, lier ; beset, obséder. 
 
 (5.) Hop* many, que de ; to seclu ■•' ' t>f : arracher 
 
 à ; to, *,ake away /Vfflfe 6l t I 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. i*6& 
 i'j.ACE OF THE SUBJECT WITH REGARD TO THE VERB, 
 
 It has been seen that the subject of a verb is either a 
 noun, or a pronoun, and that this subject must always 
 be expressed in French. It remains to speak of the 
 place of this subject with respect to the verb. 
 
 Rule. The subject, whether a noun, or pronoun, is 
 generally placed before the verb. 
 
 ï/ambition effrénée de quelques The boundless ambition of a 
 
 homines, a, dans tous les few men has, in all ages, beer. 
 
 temps, été la xrau cause des the real cause of the révolu 
 
 revolutions des états, tions of empires. 
 
 Quand nous nageons dans Va- When we roll in plenty, we 
 
 bondance, il est bien rare que seldom think of (he miseries 
 
 nous nous occupions des maux cf others. 
 d'autrui,^ 
 
 mais, to take away from the wicked, the use of his poniard, from 
 calumny its poisons, and from envy its serpents ! 
 
 6. A company of young Phœnicians of uncommon beauty, clad 
 in fine linen, whiter than snow, danced a * long while the dances 
 of their own * country, then those of Egypt, and lastly, those ol 
 Greece. 
 
 7. A troop of nymphs, crowned with flowers, whose lovely 
 tresses flowed over their shoulders, and waved with the wind, 
 swam in shoals behind her car. 
 
 8. At the time of the invasion of Spain by the Moors, an tnMtt- 
 mcrablemuUitud ofpeonle retired into the Asturias, and there pro 
 claimed Pelagius king. 
 
 9. A third part of the enemy were left dead on the field of battle ; 
 the rest surrendered at discretion. 
 
 10. The innumerable crowd of carriages which are to be seen in 
 f ,ondon during the winter, astonishes foreigners! 
 
 (C.) Company, troupe ; clad in, et vé'u de ; linen, lin. 
 
 (7.) Lovely, beau ; tresses, cheveu ; JJowcd, pendre ; waved, flotter ; with, a«j 
 erré rte ; siuam, nager ; shoafs, foule, . car, char. 
 (8.) Moors, Maure 5 retired, se retirer ; ■flstnrias,Ast\ir\es ; Pelagius, Télagc 
 (9) A third part, un tiers; enemy, pi.; surrendered, se rendre. 
 (10.) Crowd, quantité; which are, (active voice, on.) 
 
 11 EXERCISE. 
 ]. Youth is full of presumption, it expects every thing froir. 
 
 (1.) Full of presumption, présomptueux ; expects, se promettre : itsrlf al! suffi 
 :itni. pouvoir tout : that it has, avoir 
 
364 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB, 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 1, la these interrogative phrases t^e question is mack 
 either with a pronoun, or a noun : if with a pronoun. 
 this is always placed after the verb, as, 
 
 Que dtt-on ? irai-je à la campagne ? de qui parle-t-on ? 
 
 If with a noun, the noun is sometimes placed before, 
 and sometimes after the verb ; it stands before, when 
 1he pronoun personal which answers to it, asks the ques- 
 tion, as, 
 
 Cdfc nouv die est-elle sûre ? les hommes se rendent-Us toujours à 
 la raison ? 
 
 It stands after, when a pronoun absolute, or an interro- 
 gative adverb, placed at the beginning of the phrase, al- 
 low the suppression of the personal pronoun, as, 
 
 Que dit votre ami ? à quoi s occupe votre frère ? oil demeure votre 
 
 QUSIR 
 
 7 
 
 Remark, In interrogative sentences, when the 
 verb which precedes il, elle, on, ends with a vowel, the 
 
 itself: although frail, it thinks itself all-sufficient, and that it hatf 
 nothing to fear. 
 
 2. Commerce is like certain springs; if you attempt to * divert 
 "heir course, you dry them up. 
 
 3. It is enough that falsehood is falsehood, to be unworthy oi 
 a man who speaks in the * presence of God, and who is to sacri 
 fice- every thing to truth. 
 
 4. The ambition and avnrice of man are the sources of his un 
 happiness. 
 
 5. They punished, in Crete, three vices which have remained 
 \inpunistied in all other nations : ingratitude, dissimulation, and 
 avarice. 
 
 6. Like the Numidian lion, goaded by cruel hunger, and rush 
 sng upon a flock of feeble sheep, he tears, he slavs, he wallows hi 
 blood. 
 
 (2.) Springs, source : attempt, vouloir ; dry vp, faire tarir. 
 
 (3.) It is enough, suflire ; falsehood, mensonge j û-, suhj. ; in, en ; U to sacri 
 fict. doit. 
 
 (.).) Punished, ind- ' ; have remained, être ; in, chez. 
 
 (6.) Like the, semblable à un ; jYumidian, de Numidie-, goaded by, fee. (th.i 
 '•ruel hunger goads) dévorer ; rushing, (which rashes upon.) entrer dans * ; tear* 
 irt*r ; slays, égorger : watlvai, nagvr 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 3B5 
 
 fetter -t- is put between that verb and the pronoun 
 as, 
 
 Arrive-t-il? viendra-t-ellc ? aime-t-on les vauriens ? 
 When je stands after a verb, which ends with c mute 
 that e mute is changed into é acute, as, aimé je ? puisse- 
 je ? But when the transposition of je after the verb be- 
 comes harsh, euphony then requires another turn, so 
 instead of cour s je ? dor s je ? which would be intole- 
 rable, we must say, est-ce que je cours ? est-ce que je 
 dors ?f 
 
 2. Incidental sentences which express that we are ; 
 quoting somebody's words, as, 
 
 Je meurs innocent, a dit Louis I die innocent, «aid Louts XVI. 
 
 XVI 
 Je le veux lien, dit-il, I ara very willing, said he. 
 
 3. Impersonal verbs, and these words, tel, ain&i, &c. 
 
 ' arrivé un grand malheur, A great misfortune has happen 
 
 ed. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Ll'ixz you forgotten all that Providence has done for you • 
 how have you escaped the shafts of your enemies ? how have \ 
 
 q preserved from the dangers which surrounded you on all 
 s ? could you he so hiind as not to acknowledge and adore the 
 /;! -powerful hand that has miraculously saved you ? 
 
 2. What loill posterity say of you, if, instead of devotin 
 
 ilje happiness of mankind the great talents which you ha-, ere. 
 d from nature, you make use of them only to deceive am! 
 iptthem. 
 
 3. Do not the misfortunes which we experience often contribute 
 *o our * prosperity ? 
 
 4. Why are tkt works of nature so perfect ? Because each 
 ivofk is a whole, and because she labours upon an eternal plan. 
 from which she never deviates. Why. on the contrary, are tht 
 productions of man so imperfect ? It is because the human mind 
 'feeing unable to create anything, and incapable of embracing the 
 
 universe at a single glance, can * produce only after having been 
 enriched by experience and meditatioa. 
 
 I.) F.ccaptd, échappera ; shafts, trait prescved, garantir : on alt sid<;, cc , 
 fcouië* part-; ; in «*, assez pour ; saved, conserver. 
 
 (2.) Ptvoting, consacrer ; mankind, nomine, pi. deceive, egparer. 
 
 Experience, éprouver ; contribute to, v urnri en- 
 ; i.) Beeerxst, c'est que ; imd because, et que : ht ing unable, ne p 
 •oublt. (not being4a>le J) at., -le : clan:r, vue : 
 
 32* 
 
36G PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB, 
 
 Tel était i acharnement du sol- Such was the fury of the sol 
 
 dat, que, &c. dier, that, &c. 
 
 Ainsi jink cette sanglante ira- Thus ended that bloody tra 
 
 gédie,t gsdy. 
 
 4. When the subjunctive is used to express a wish. 
 or for quand même and a conditional, as, 
 
 Puissent tous hs peuples se con- May all nations be convinced 
 
 vainrre de cette vérité, of this truth. 
 
 Ouasé-je y périr, fir ai, Should I perish there, I will go 
 
 5. When the subject is followed by several word? 
 which are dependent upon it, and form an incidental 
 sentence which, by its length, might obscure the rela- 
 tion of the verb to the subject; perspicuity then requires 
 'hat the subject should be displaced. 
 
 Sometimes, however, this transposition of the subject 
 is only the effect of taste, to avoid an inharmonious ca- 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 1. True glory, said Up, is founded in humanity ; whoever pre 
 fers his own glory to the feelings of humanity, is a monster o* 
 nnde, and not a man. 
 
 2. There have happened, for these * ten years, so many events 
 exceeding all probability, that posterity will find it very difficult 
 to credit them. 
 
 3. Such icas that in&rmptibh Plwcion, who answered the de- 
 puties of Alexander, who were telling him that this powerful mo 
 narch loved him as the only honest man : well, then 2, let him al- 
 low me 1 to be and to appear so. 
 
 4. Thus ended, by the humiliation of Athens, that dreadful wat 
 of twen-y-seven years, to * which ambition cave rise, which hatred 
 made atrocious, and which was as fatal to the Greeks; as their an 
 cierit confederation had proved advantageous to them. 
 
 (1.) h founded, ne se trouver pas hors de iftelingi, sentiment. 
 (?.) There have happened /ffcr, il se passer depuis ; tveeeding, hors de ; p -oha 
 oility, vraisemblance ; iaill find very difficult, avoir bien de la peine : to credit. 
 
 ajouter foi à. ,,.'.•■ •,,* 
 
 * (3.) Loved, chérir ; honest man, homme de bien ; well, ho . ; to be so, d'êtrr 
 r \ ; appear so, le paraître. 
 
 (4.) Ended, se terminer j grive rise, faire naître ; made, rendre ; had proved 
 are. 
 
 If EXERCISE. 
 1. The gods grant that you may never experience such misfor 
 innes Î 
 
 
 tfronf, faire •. neperitrce : éprom 
 
PARTICULAR ïftJLES Or TIIE VERB. 36* 
 
 dence : or it is used by an orator, who wishes to rouse 
 the attention of his hearers by a bold and unexpected 
 turn.1t 
 
 GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS. 
 
 When the regimen of a verb is a noun, it is gcneralh 
 placed after the verb : but to this rule there is one 
 exception, besides those which will hereafter be men- 
 tioned. 
 
 Exception. In an interrogative sentence, the -regi- 
 men is placed before the verb, when this regimen is 
 joined to an absolute pronoun. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 Quel objet voyez-vous ? What object do you see ? 
 
 1 quelle science vous appliquez- To what science do you appH 
 
 vous ? yourself? 
 
 Tr-, quelle affaire vous occupez- About what business are you 
 
 vous ? employed \ 
 
 Remark. In French, a verb can never have two re 
 gimehs direct ; therefore, when a verb has two regi- 
 mens, both nouns, one of them must necessarily be pre 
 <eded by a preposition. 
 
 2. May you, O wise old man ! in a repose diversified by plea? 
 *ng occupations, enjoy the past, lay hold of the present, and charm 
 
 it latter days with the hope of eternal felicity. 
 
 3. What is not in the power of the gods ! were you at th 
 est depths, the power of Jupiter could draw you from tb 
 were you in Olympus, beholding the stars- under your feet, Ju 
 niter could plunge you to the bottom p£ the abyss, or précipitât* 
 you into the flames of gloomy Tartarus, 
 
 4. There, through meadows enamelled with flowers, slide o 
 thousand various rivulets, distributing every where their purr 
 îand) limpid waters. 
 
 ' s 5. Already, for the honour of France, there * had come into ad 
 ministration a man more distinguished for his understanding and 
 irtues than for his dignities. 
 
 (2.) Old man, vieillard -, lay hold c/, saisir : -oith. de. 
 
 (3.) h not in the powsr of, ne peuvent } were, suhj- ; lowtst depths, fonJ d< 
 ["abîme; power , # puissance-, coùld. pouvoir, cond-i J Olympus, Olympe j start, 
 astre -, ?loomy } War ; 'I'artartts, Tartare. 
 
 (1.) Through, au milieu de ; with, de ; ç'.iJc, serpenter-, rh 
 distributing, (which distribute) ; their, uno. 
 
 (5.) Had com*, être entré j administration, (of affairs) :/or, pn 
 -•prit. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF TIIE VERii. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Oonntzcc livre à votre frère, Give that book to your bi 
 
 On a accusé Cictron iV impru- Cicero has been accused of im 
 dence ci de faiblesse, prudence and weakness. 
 
 Though the natural order of the ideas seems to re 
 quire that the regimen direct be placed before the indi- 
 rect, the perspicuity of the sentence does not allow it in 
 nil cases. 
 
 Rule. When a verb has two regimens, the shorter is 
 generally placed first ; but if they be of equal length, 
 the regimen direct will precede the indirect. 
 
 # EXAMPLES. 
 
 f.es hypocrites s'étudient à parer Hypocrites make ît their study 
 le vice des dehors de la xtr- to deck vice with the eyterio; 
 lu, of virtue. 
 
 Les hypocrites s'étudient à parer Hypocrites make it their study 
 des dehors de la vertu les to deck with the exterior o.i 
 Dices les plus honteux et les virtue the most shameful and 
 plus decries, most odious vices. 
 
 * 'ambition sacrifie le present à Ambition sacrifices the presen- 
 l'avenir, mais la volupté sacri- to the future, but pleasure 
 tie l'avenir au présenta sacrifices the future to tiiF 
 
 present. 
 
 Rule. A noun may be governed at once by tw« 
 *>erbs, provided those verbs do not require different re- 
 gimens. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 On doit aimer ct respecter les We ought to love and respec' 
 rois. kings. 
 
 >>>'ral attaqua et prit la That general attacked and took 
 ville, the city. 
 
 Î EXERCISE ON THE GOVERNMENT OF THE VERBS, 
 1. Illustrious examples teach us, that God has hurled from 
 
 heir thrones princes ivho contemned his laics : he reduced to the 
 
 condition of a beast tfu haughty Nebuchadnezzar, iclio wanted to usurp 
 honours. 
 1 Wretched is the man who feeds his mi?id with chimeras. 
 3. Our interest should prompt us to prefer virtue to vice, wisdom 
 
 *o pleasure, and nwdtiUj to vanity. 
 
 (I.) Illustrious, fameux J tea-k, apprendre ; hurled, renverser; kaughtv.fV'-- 
 ?erl*é : Nabuchodonosor j wanted, vouloir. . 
 it re. 
 Hcm/c/, devoir. ind-1 ; prompt, porter ] pleasure, volup-^ 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OP THE VERB. 369 
 
 But we must not sa3y-, 
 
 Cet officier attaqua et se rendit That officer attacked and made 
 maître de la vule, himself master of the city. 
 
 A different turn should be given to the sentence, by 
 placing the noun after the first verb, and adding en be- 
 fore the second, as, 
 
 Cet officier attaqua la ville et s 1 en That officer attacked the city 
 rendit maître,t and made himself master of 
 
 it. 
 
 OF THE USE PROPER, OR ACCIDENTAL, OF MOODS AND 
 TENSES. 
 
 Indicative. 
 
 The present is used to express an existing state, as ; 
 Je suis ici, I am here. 
 
 An invariable state, as, 
 J)ieu est de toute éternité, God is from all eternity. 
 
 A future near at hand, as, 
 E est demain fête, To-morrow is a holiday. 
 
 Or even a preterit, when, to give a sort of animated 
 picture, we relate a thing past as passing. Thus, we 
 find in Racine, 
 .Vai vu votre malheureux fils I have seen your unhappy sod 
 
 traîné par ses chevaux, dragged along by his horses. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Luxury is like a torrent, which carries away, and ovcrtlurows 
 every thing it meets. 
 
 2. Nothing can * resist the operation of time : it, at length, un- 
 dcrmnes, alters, or destroys every thing. 
 
 3. Among the Spartans, public education had two objects : the 
 first, to harden their bodies by fatigue ; the second, to exciCe and 
 nourish in their minds the love of their country, and an enthu 
 siasm for what is great. / 
 
 (1.) Carries oioay, entraîner ; overthrows, renverser j every thing, tout cc 
 que. 
 
 (2.) Operation, action ; at length, à la longue ; undermines, miner. 
 
 (3.) Among the Spartans, à Sparte ; to, de ; harden, endurcir 5 by, à : fTier 
 !niist be rendered by the article : for zshat is great, des grandes choses. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 But, suddenly passing from the preterit to the pi* 
 the speaker adds, 
 
 // veut les rappeler, et sa voix. He calls out to stop them, but 
 les effraie, his voice frightens them. 
 
 In English, the verb to be, is frequently used with 
 ihe participle present, as, 
 
 J am reading, I am translating, I shall be writing. 
 
 This construction is not adopted in French ; and 
 whenever found, it is to be translated in French simply 
 by the verb, put in the tense expressed by the verb to 
 be. Thus, I am reading, must be expressed by je lis : 
 I shall be writing, must be rendered f écrirai, &C.1T 
 
 The imperfect is used — 1. To denote the recurrency 
 of an action at a time which is past, as, 
 
 Quand fêtais à Paris, f allais When I was at Paris, I often 
 souvent aux Champs Elysées, went to the Champs Elysées. 
 
 H EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF MOODS, &c. 
 
 1. He is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from 
 ihe fatigue of business, by some instructive and agreeable read 
 ing. 
 
 2. Truth, eternal by its nature, is immutable as God himself. 
 
 3. I never let a day pass without devoting an hour or two to 
 trading the ancients 
 
 4. It is this week that the new piece comes out. 
 
 5. The armies were insight: nothing was heard on all side^ 
 hut dreadful cries: the engagement began. Immediately a 
 •'loud of arrows darkens the air and overs the combatants; no- 
 thing is heard but doleful cries of the dying, or the clattering 
 of the arms of those who fall in the conflict; the earth groans 
 hçneath a heap of dead bodies, and rivers of blood stream every 
 
 ; there is nothing in this confused mass of men enraged 
 t one another but slaughter, despair, revenge, and brutal 
 
 h relaxing, délasser ; reading, lecture. 
 /-'v,de •, immufab/r, immuable, 
 i.) Let * ; devoting, consacrer ; reading, la lecture de. 
 mue out, on donner. 
 
 e ; nothing uvi.s.&x.on ne que. ind-- ; the engagement began 
 
 enir aux mains, ind-3; cluud, nuée arrows, trait . darkens, obscurcir 
 
 is, Le. on ne phis que : d»Ufu!, plaintif: r'attering, bruit ; conflict'. 
 
 trroans, gémir ; beneath, totn ; heap, monc-au ; rivers', ruisieau ; stream. 
 
 tktn is wit*. ■. mass, amni i rhftrne' ; 
 
 . ' ' . massant' 
 
PARTICULAR KULES OF THE VERB, 
 
 «i 
 
 % For a past which has some duration, especially in 
 narrations., as, 
 
 Rome était d'abord gouvernée par Rome was at first governed by 
 des rois,\ kings. 
 
 In French, the preterit definite and the preterit indefi- 
 nite are not used indifferently. 
 
 The preterit definite is used, when speaking of a 
 cime which is entirely past, and of which nothing re« 
 mains, as, 
 
 Je fis un voyage à Bath le mois I took a journey to Bath lasi 
 . dernier, month. 
 
 Fécrivis hier à Rome, I wrote yesterday to Rome. 
 
 To authorize the use of this tense, there must be the 
 interval of, at least, one day. It is the most used in 
 the historic style, and for that reason called parfait his. 
 torique. 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE USE OF THE IMPERFECT. 
 
 1. When I was at Paris, I went every morning to take a walk 
 in the Cha-nps Elysées, or the Épis de Boulogne: afterwards I 
 came home, where I employed myself till dinner, either in reading 
 or writing ; and, in the evening, I generally went for amusement 
 to the French Theatre or the Opera. 
 
 2. When I ions in the prime of life, like the light butterfly, I 
 fluttered from object to object, without being able to settle to any 
 thing : eager for pleasure, I seized every thing that had its appear- 
 ance : alas ! how far was I then from foreseeing that I should de- 
 plore with so much bitterness the loss of that precious time. 
 
 3. For a short time after Abraham, the knowledge of the true 
 God still appeared in Palestine and Egypt. Melchisedec, king of 
 Salem, was the priest of the Most High *2 God 1. Abimelech, 
 king of Gerar, and his successor of the same name, feared God 
 swore by his name, and reverenced his power. But in Moses' time. 
 the nations adored even beasts and reptile?. Every thing icas God 
 but God himself. 
 
 (1.) Takz " ax»fib, se promener -, in, à ; came homs, rentrer chez soi ; zuas busy 
 i occuper ; reading, (by tbe verb) : for amusement, me délasser ) French Thta 
 ire, Comédie Française. 
 
 (2.) Prime of life, fleur de l'âge ; butterfly, papillon ; flittered, voler ; btivg 
 able, pouvoir ; settle, me fixer ; eager for. avide de ; had its appearance, m'en 
 présentait l'image ; how, que , with so much bitterness, (so bitterly). 
 
 (J.) $uw«,jurer • rectrtnetd] admirei : the nation*, oil ; eren ; jusqu'à; but 
 excepté 
 
372 PARTICULAR liULES UJr THE VERB* 
 
 The preterit indefinite is used either for a past inde< 
 Terminate, or for a past of which something still remains . 
 as, 
 
 Vai voyagé en Italie, I have travelled in Italy. 
 
 Pai d/ jeûné ce matin à Londres, I breakfasted this morning in 
 
 ttdinéà Richmonâ,\ London, and dined at Rich 
 
 mond. 
 
 The preterit indefinite is sometimes used instead of a 
 future just approaching, as, 
 
 ivf z-uous bientôt fini ? Have you soon done ? 
 
 Oui, j ai fini dans le moment, Yes I shall have done in a mo- 
 
 il ment. 
 
 ; EXERCISE ON THE PROPER USE OF THE PRETERIT. 
 
 Amenophis conceived the design of making his son a conqueror. 
 He set about it, after the manner of the Egyptians, that is, with 
 cent ideas. All the children who were born on * the same day 
 as Sesostris, were brought to court by order of the king : he had 
 'hem educated as his own children, and with the same care as 
 Sesostris. When he was grown up, he made him serve his ap- 
 prenticeship in a war against the Arabs': this young prince learned 
 there to bear hunger and thirst, and subdued that nation, till then 
 invincible. He afterwards attacked Lybia, and conquered it. Af 
 ',er these successes, he formed the project of subduing the whole 
 world. In consequence cf this, * he entered Ethiopia, which he 
 made tributary. He continued his victories in Asia. Jerusalem 
 teas the first to feel the force of his arms : the rash Rehoboam 
 :outi not resist him, and Sesostris arried away the riches of Solo- 
 mon. He penetrated into the Indies, farther than Hercules and 
 Bacchus, and farther than Alexander did afterward. The Scy- 
 thians obeyed him as far as the Tanais ; Armenia and Cappadocia 
 were subject to him. In a word, he extended his empire from the 
 Ganges to the Danube. 
 
 Jlakinç, faire de ; set about it, s'y prendre ; after, à ; ideas, pensée ; brought, 
 amener ; had educated, l'aire élever ; grown up, g-iand ; made serve, fit fail e ; ap- 
 prenticeship, apprentissage } in. pa ; tntered, entrer dans ; maie, rend; e ; as 
 appadociu, Coppudoce. 
 
 If EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Enflamed with the desire of knowing mankind, I have tra- 
 velled, not ©nly among the most polished nations, but even 
 imong the most barbarous. I hare observed them in the differ- 
 ent degrees of civilization, from the state of simple nature to the 
 
 ' UK, de-, DUmHntf, homme, pi. ; to, chez ; polished nations, peuple 
 fartarou*, nation sauvage ;, from, depuis ; simple, pur -, to. j 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 378 
 
 The two preterits anterior differ in the same manner 
 as the two preceding preterits, but they are always ac- 
 companied by a conjunction, or an adverb of time, as, 
 
 Je suis sorti dès que j'ai eu I went out as soon as I had 
 
 diné, dined. 
 
 feus fini hier à midi, I had done yesterday at noon. 
 
 The pluperfect denotes that a thing took place before 
 another, which had itself already taken place, as, 
 J'avais soupe quand il entra,\ I had supped when he came in, 
 
 most perfect state of society, and wherever I went, the result was 
 the same : that is to say, I have every where seen beings occupied 
 in drying up the different sources of happiness that nature had 
 placed within their reach. 
 
 2. I have travelled this year in Italy, where I had an * opportuni- 
 ty of seeing several master-pieces of antiquity, and where I made 
 a valuable collection of scarce medals. I there admired the per- 
 fection to which they have brought architecture, painting, and mu- 
 sic ; but what pleased me most there, was the beauty of the cli* 
 mate of Naples. 
 
 wherever I vient , dans tous les pays ; the result was the same, (I had the same re- 
 sult ;) in drying up, à tarir } within their reach, à leur portée. 
 
 (2.) Opportunity, occasion ; master-pieces, chef d'çeuvre j scarce, rare j pleased 
 me most, faire le plus de plaisir ; was, ind-1. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. As soon as I had examined this phenomenon, I tried to find 
 out its causes. 
 
 2. As soon as we had crossed the river, we found ourselves in a 
 ' wood where there was not a single foot-path traced, 
 
 3. As soon as the great Sesostris had satisfied his ambition by 
 the conquest of so many empires, he returned into Egypt, where 
 he devoted the whole of the day to administering strict justice to 
 his people, and, in the evening, he recreated himself by holding 
 conferences with the learned, or by conversing with the most up 
 right people of his kingdom. 
 
 4. I had only received, like most of the grandees, an education 
 in which I had imbibed nothing but sentiments of pride and in 
 sensibility ; that is, they had done every thing in their power, 
 
 (I.) As soon as, dés que ; tried to find out, en rechercher. 
 
 (2.) Crossed, traverser ; found ourselves, se trouver engagé ; foot-path, sentier 
 de. 
 
 (3.) The whole of the day, jour entier j administering, rendre, inf-1 j strict t 
 «xact ; recreated, délasser ; by holding conferences, à s'entretenir ; upright^ 
 honnête ; people, gens. 
 
 (4.) Grandee, grand ; imbibed, puiser ; they, on ; in their power P CC qu'oa 
 pouvoir, im!-<S ; stifle, étouffer ; bznevolent, bienfaisant, 
 
 m 
 
874 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 As the use of these different preterits is attended 
 with some difficulty, the following analysis is added, in 
 Order more clearly to explain the manner in which the) 
 are used. 
 
 We read in Marmontel the following extract ; 
 
 Célicour, à Cage de quinze Célicour, at the age 
 ans, avait été dans le monde ce teen, ïiadbeen in the world what 
 qu'on appelle un petit prodige. is called a little prodigy. 
 
 The author employs the pluperfect, as he speaks oi 
 a period of time anterior to all those which he is goin^ 
 to mention. 
 
 Il faisait des vers les plus go- He composed the most agree - 
 tans du monde ; il n'y avait pas able love-sonnets imaginable ; 
 dans le voisinage une jolie there was not a pretty woman 
 femme qu'il n'eût célébrée : c'é- in the neighbourhood that he 
 (ait dommage de laisser tant de had not celebrated : it was a 
 t.alens enfouis dans une petite pity to let so many talents bf 
 ville ; Paris devait en être le buried in a little town ; Paris 
 théâtre. was the theatre on which they 
 
 ought to be exhibited. 
 
 Here the author makes use of the imperfect, be 
 cause he speaks of the habitual employment of Céli- 
 cour. 
 
 Et l'on fit si bien, que son père And they contrived matte 
 se résolut de l'y envoyer. that his father determined to send 
 
 him there. 
 
 Now, the author passes to the preterit definite, be- 
 cause he is no longer speaking of what Célicour used 
 to do, but what he did at a time past, and of which no. 
 thing remains. 
 
 Ce père était un honnête This father was a good sort 
 homme, qui aimait l'esprit sans of man, who was fond of wit. 
 en avoir t et qui admirait, sans without having any, and ad 
 savoir pourquoi, tout ce qui ve- mired, without knowing why. 
 nait de la capitale. Il avait every thing that came from the 
 même des relations littéraires, metropolis. Nay, he even had 
 at du nombre de ses correspondans some literary connexions, and 
 tHait un connaisseur nommé M. among his correspondents was 
 de Fintac. a connoisseur of the name oi 
 
 Fintac. 
 
 to stifle in me happy and beaevolent dispositions which I U 
 Ttivtd from nature 
 
PARTICULAR RTJLES OP THE VERB. 376 
 
 Here, again, the author resumes the form of the 
 imperfect, as he is now speaking of the habitual state 
 of Célicour's father in his little town, and because, in 
 this passage, he merely relates what that father was 
 doing, at a time past, which has no kind of relation to 
 the present. 
 
 Ce fut principalement à lui It was paaticularly to him that 
 que, Célicour fut recommandé, Célicour was recommended. 
 
 The form of the preterit definite is now resumed. 
 because this is an action passed, at a time of which no- 
 thing is left, &c.i 
 
 There is this difference between the two future 
 
 i EXERCISE. 
 
 1. God, who had created his angels in holiness, would have 
 their happiness depend upon themselves : they could insure 
 their felicity, by giving themselves willingly to their Creator ; 
 hut they delighted in themselves, and not in God : immediately 
 those spirits of light became spirits of darkness. 
 
 2. There is a letter which Philocles has written to a friend of 
 his, about his project of making himself king of Carpathus. I 
 verused that letter, and it seemed to me to be the hand of Philo- 
 des. They had perfectly imitated his writing. This letter threw 
 >ne into a strange surprise. I read it again and again, and could 
 not persuade myself that it was written by Philocles, when I re- 
 called to my mind the affecting marks which he had given me of 
 his disinterestedness and integrity. 
 
 3. Those who had shewn the greatest zeal for the state and my 
 person, did not think themselves obliged to undeceive me, after 
 so terrible an example. I myself was afraid lest truth should 
 breakthrough the cloud, and reach me in spite of all my flatter- 
 ers. I felt within myself that it would have raised in me bitter 
 remorse. My effeminacy, and the dominion which a treacherous 
 minister luid gained over me, threw me into a kind of despair of 
 ever recovering my * liberty. 
 
 (1.) Have their happiness depend, (that their happiness,) dépendre, subj-2 : 
 could, pouvoir ; delighted in, se plaire en ; of light, lumineux ; darkness, tené 
 bres. 
 
 (2.) There is, voilà; about, sur; Carpathus, Carpathie ; to be, de ; they, on ; 
 -.gain and again, sans cesse ; by, de ; when I recalled to, repasser dans, inf-3 ; 
 integrity, bonne foi 
 
 (3.) Did not think themselves obliged to, se croire dispensé de ; was afraid 
 ïest, craindre que ; break through, percer, subj-2 ; reach, parvenir jusqu'à; in 
 tpite of, malgré ; raised in, causer à ; effeminacy, mollesse ; dominion, ascendant \ 
 ous. perfide ; gained, prendre : thrczv. plonger ; recovering, rentrer en 
 
376 PABTICULAK RULES OF THE VEBB. 
 
 tenses, that the period of time expressed by the futur* 
 absolute, may, or may not be determined, as, 
 
 Tirai à la campagne, or f irai demain à la campagne, 
 while, in the future anterior, the time is necessarily de- 
 termined, as, 
 
 J'aurai fini, quand vous arriverez.^ 
 
 CONDITIONAL. 
 
 The conditional is used— 1. To express a wish, as, 
 
 Que je serais, or, que f aurais été How glad I should be, or shouk; 
 content de réussir dans cette have been to succeed in that 
 affaire ! affair. 
 
 2. With si, if, whether, expressing a doubt, as, 
 Oemandez-lui s'il serait ve>:u Ask him whether he would have 
 
 avec nous suppose qu'il n'eût come with us, had he not 
 pas eu affaire, been busy. 
 
 3. Before, or after the imperfect, or pluperfect of 
 
 .lie indicative, preceded by si, as, 
 
 Vous nous épargnerions bien des We should spare ourselves 
 peines, si nous savions modérer much pain, did we know how 
 nos désirs, to moderate our desires. 
 
 IF EXERCISE, 
 i. Remember that youth is but a flower, which will witfiei 
 almost as soon as it * opens. Thou wilt see thyself gradually 
 changed. Smiling graces, sweet pleasures, strength, health, and 
 joy, will vanish like a pleasing dream ; nothing but the sad re- 
 membrance will be left thee. 
 
 2. I sJiall next yearta&e a journey into Greece, and I am pre- 
 paring myself for it by reading the travels of the young Ana 
 oharsis. 
 
 3. When you have read liie celebrated discourse of Bossuet or; 
 Universal History, ami stiidied in it the causes of the rise and fall 
 of states, you will be less astonished at the revolutions, more or 
 Jess sudden, that modern empires have experienced, which ap 
 peared to you in the most flourishing state. 
 
 (t ) Will wither, (will be almost U soon withered,) sécher -, opens, éclose , 
 gradually, insensiblement ; lively, riant ; pleasing, beau; nothing will be left^u 
 n'en r- 
 (2.) Take j faire ;for it, y ; reading, lecture de ; (the travels, celui.) 
 (î.) Have rcuil, ind-) -, antique vous, lnd-8 ; in it, y ; rise, grandeur; fall. 
 •hute y sudd*n, subite ; (thai have experienced the modern empires, whi«*h. fcc 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 37T 
 
 Vous auriez été plus heureux, si You would have been more 
 vous aviez suivi mes conseils, happy, if you had followed 
 
 my advice. 
 
 4. With quand, used instead of si, quoique, or quand 
 même ; the verb preceded by quand is generally in one 
 of the conditionals, as, 
 
 Quand Vavare posséderait tout Were the miser to possess all 
 Vor du monde, il ne serait pas the gold in the world, still he 
 encore content, would not he satisfied. 
 
 5. Lastly, for various tenses of the indicative, as, 
 roiriez-vous votre fils ingrat? C 
 
 which means, croyez-vous, &c 
 
 [j'auriez-vous soupçonné oVun tel ( 
 vice ? 
 
 which means, V avez -vous, &,c 
 
 Quelle raison pourrait m'empt- "\ 
 cher daller vous voir ? 
 
 which means, quelle cause pourra, &c.*(* 
 
 t EXERCISE ON THE CONDITIONAL. 
 
 1. If it were even possible for men always to act conformably 
 :o equity, as it is the multitude that must judge their conduct, 
 the wicked would always blame and contradict them from ma- 
 lignity, and the good sometimes from mistake. 
 
 2. What false steps I should have made but for you, at my en- 
 trance into the world ! 
 
 3. But for your counsels, I should have failed in this undertak- 
 ing. 
 
 4. How satisfied I slwuld have been, if you had sooner informed 
 me of your happiness ! 
 
 5. If we gave to infancy none but just and clear notions, there 
 would not De by far so many false wits in the world. 
 
 6. Had Alexander conquered the whole world, his amiiition 
 
 roiriez^cous votre fils ingrat ? Could you think your son un 
 
 grateful ? 
 
 (Muriez-vous soupçonné d'un tel Could you have suspected him 
 vice ? ofsuchavice? 
 
 Quelle raison pourrait m'empt- What cause could prevent me 
 cher daller vous voir ? from coming to see you ? 
 
 (1.) If even, quand même ; were, cond-1 ',for men, (tbat men ;) to act., sub-2 ; 
 htdge, juger de -, -would blame, ind-î ; contradict, croiser, ind-7. 
 (-2.) What, que de ; steps, demarche ; but for, sans. 
 
 (3.) But for, sans ; failed, échouer. (4.) How, que. 
 
 (5.) We, on ; there would not be by far so many, il y aurait bien moins de. 
 8 ) rwhen Alexander would have conquered 5) straitened, trop à l'étroit, 
 
 33* 
 
378 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 REMARK ON THE USE OF THE CONDITIONAL AND FUTURE. 
 
 Foreigners are very apt to use the future, or the 
 conditional after si, when meaning supposé que. They 
 
 say, 
 
 Tirai demain à la campagne, s'il I shall go into the country to 
 
 fera beau, morrow, if the weather be fine 
 
 Vous auriez vu le roi, si vous You would have seen the king 
 
 seriez venu, if you had come. 
 
 The impropriety of this construction will be obviated 
 by attending to the following 
 
 Rule. When a verb is preceded by n, meaning 
 supposé que, the present is used instead of the future 
 absolute ; the preterit indefinite instead of the future 
 anterior ; the imperfect instead of the conditional pre- 
 sent, and the pluperfect instead of the conditional past. 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 Hr ai demain à la campagne, s'il I shall go to-morrow into the 
 
 fait beau, country, if it be fine weather 
 
 il aura eu l 'avantage, s'il a suivi He will have had the advau- 
 
 vos conseils, tage, if he has followed your 
 
 advice. 
 Je serais content, si j e vous voyais I should be pleased, if I saw 
 
 appliqué, you apply to study. 
 
 /'aurais été content, si je vous 1 should have been pleased, it 
 
 avais vu appliqué, I had seen you attentive to 
 
 your studies. 
 
 loould not Jiave been satisfied ; he would still fiave found himself 
 straitened in it. 
 
 7. Could you belkve him vain enough to aspire to that high 
 re of honour? 
 
 8. Could you ever have thought him capable of deserting the 
 ^ood cause, to go and side with rebels ? 
 
 9. Would yon renounce being useful to the present generation 
 because envy fastens on you ? 
 
 (8,) Deserting, abandonner ; to go and side with, pour se ranger sous les dra 
 peaux de. 
 (9.) Renounce, renoncer à , fastens, s'attacher ; on you, à vos 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 379 
 
 Remark. This rule does not hold good, either when 
 si is placed between two verbs, the first of which im 
 plies doubt, uncertainty, as, 
 Je ne sais s'iZ viendra. 
 Or, with the second conditional post, as, 
 
 Vous m'eussiez trouvé, si vous fussiez venu ce matin.t 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 There are conjunctions which govern the indicative, 
 (p. 294), and others which govern the subjunctive, 
 (p. 295). We call principal proposition the phrase 
 which is followed by the conjunction, and incidental, or 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 i. A young man who is just entering the career of letters, 
 mil conciliate the good will of the public, if he consider his firs! 
 accesses only as an encouragement to do better. 
 
 *2. That absurd criticism will have amused only fools or mali- 
 cious people,* if attention has been paid to the spirit that per- 
 vades the whole, and the manner in which it is written, 
 
 3. Life would possess many more sweets and charms, if men. 
 instead of tearing one another to pieces, formed but one socieh 
 of brethren. 
 
 4. The Athenians would have found in the young Alcibiade. 1 
 the only man capable of insuring their superiority in Greece, 
 had not that vain thoughtless people forced him, by an unjust, 
 or, at least, imprudent sentence, to banish himself from his 
 country. 
 
 5. I know not whether reason will soon triumph over prejudice 
 and ignorance, but I am certain it will be the case sooner or 
 later. 
 
 6. Rome would have never attained that high degree of splen- 
 dour and glory which astonishes us, had it not extended its con- 
 quests as much by its policy as by its arms. 
 
 (1.) Is just entering, débuter dans ; career, carrière ; conciliate, s'attirer 
 vood will, bienveillance -, consider, regarder. 
 
 J (2.) Fool*, sot 5 malicious, méchant ; paid, faire : pervades the whole, régner 
 l ; un bout à l'autre : in which* dont. 
 
 (3.) Possess, avoir ; tearing one another to pieces* s'eniredéchirer. 
 
 (4.) Superiority, prépondérance ; thoughtless, léger ; sentence* condamnation. 
 
 ' 5.) Know, savoir ; it will be the case, cela être. 
 
 [fifc) Attained, parvenir à ; policy, politique, 
 
380 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 subordinate proposition, that which is placed after the 
 conjunction. In this sentence, 
 
 Je crois que vous aimez à jouer. 
 
 Je crois is the principal proposition, and vous aimez 
 a jouer is the subordinate proposition : que is the con- 
 junction that unites the tv/o phrases. 
 
 General Rule. The verb of the subordinate pro- 
 position must be put in the indicative, when the verb of 
 the principal proposition expresses affirmation, in a 
 direct, positive, and independent manner ; but it is put 
 in the subjunctive, when that of the principal proposition 
 expresses doubt, wish, or uncertainty. 
 
 Je sais qu'il est surpris, I know he is surprised. 
 
 Jr erois qu'il viendra, I believe he will come. 
 
 Je doute qu'il soit surpris, I doubt his being surprised. 
 
 Je doute qu'il vienne, I doubt his coming. 
 
 Je souhaite qu'il réussisse, I wish he may succeed. 
 
 tremble qu'il ne succombe,^ I tremble lest he should fail. 
 
 IF EXERCISE ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 1. The glory which has been ascribed to the Egyptians 01 
 Lag the most, grateful of all men, shows that they were likewise 
 
 • he most sociable. 
 
 2. In Egypt, when it teas proved that the conduct of a dead 
 man* had been bad, they condemned his memory, and he was 
 denied burial. 
 
 3. I am sure that by moderation, mildness, and politeness, yon 
 will disarm even* envy itself. 
 
 4. The new philosophers say that colour is a sensation of the 
 soul. 
 
 5. I believe you are as honest and disinterested as you seem to 
 he. 
 
 6. I doubt whether the Romans would ever have triumphed 
 over the Gauls, if the different chiefs of this warlike people had 
 not been disunited. 
 
 7. \ coidd wish i\mt \he love, which We ought to have for oik 
 another, were the principle of all our actions, as ifls the basis of 
 all virtues. 
 
 (1.) Which has,kv. qu'on ; ascribed, donner ; grateful, reconnaissant, sing 
 •*<:?», peuple (Q,) Was denied, priver de ; burial, sépulture. 
 
 (8.) Ky, avec ; politeness, tmnn. (5.) Seem to 6e, le paraître. 
 
 6.5 irhti 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 381 
 
 Do, did, will, would, should, can, coidd, may, and 
 might, are sometimes, with respect to the French Ian- 
 guage, simply signs of tenses, at others they are real 
 verbs. 
 
 There can be no difficulty about do and did ; these 
 ire mere expletives, denoting interrogation, negation, 
 or merely emphasis, when they are joined to a verb. 
 
 J do love, J'aime. 
 
 I did love, J'aimois, or, j'aimai. 
 
 Do I love? Aime-je? 
 
 Did I love ? Aimais-je, or, aimai-je ? 
 
 / do not love, Je n'aime pas. 
 
 I did not love, Je n'aimais pas, or, je n'aimai pas. 
 
 In all these cases they are not expressed in French. 
 
 But when they are followed by a noun, or a pronoun. 
 
 then they are real verbs, and mean, faire. 
 
 Do me that favour, Faites-moi ce plaisir. 
 
 He did it, j\ \ e fit. 
 
 In short, by any thing else, except the verb with 
 which they are necessarily connected, as, 
 
 He did more than could have Î1 fit plus qu'on n'eût pu espé 
 been expected, rer. 
 
 Should is only a sign of the conditional, when it ex 
 presses a thing which may happen upon some condition. 
 
 / should like a country life, if my J'aimerais la vie champêtre, si 
 affairs would permit me to in- mes affaires . me permettaient 
 dulge my inclination, de suivre mon goût. 
 
 But when it implies duty or obligation, it is a verb. 
 and must be expressed by the verb devoir, as, 
 
 8. Fear, lest it should be said that you feed upon chimeras, and 
 hat you take the shadow for the reality. 
 
 9. The new philosophers will have colour to he a sensation of 
 'he soul. 
 
 10. I will have you to be as honest and disinterested as yon 
 ,pem to be. 
 
 '3.) It, on ne \fttà upon, se repaître de. 
 9.) IV iU have, vouloir ;, colour to te, (that colour be/ 
 
382 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 We should never swerve from the Nous ne devrions jamais nous 
 path oj 'virtue t écarter du sentier de la vertu. 
 
 Can, could, may, and might, are not so difficult as 
 they appear at first sight ; because, in almost every in- 
 stance, there is no impropriety in rendering them by 
 the verb pouvoir. In general the first two imply a 
 power, a possibility, a capability, &c. and the others, a 
 permission, probability, &c. 
 
 Do, did, shall, will, &c. in English, are sometimes 
 used elliptically in the answers to interrogative sen- 
 tences. The French answer with the repetition of the 
 verb, accompanied with a pronoun expressive of the 
 idea of the interrogative sentence, as, 
 
 Will you do your exercise to- Ferez-vous votre thème au 
 day ? — Yes, IicHl. jourd'hui ?— Oui, je le ferai. 
 
 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Rule. When the first verb is in the imperfect, the 
 preterit, or the pluperfect, and the second denotes a 
 temporary action, this second verb is put in the imper- 
 fect, if we mean to express a present. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 h croyais, fax cru, pavais cm I thought, I have thought, I had 
 que vous étudiez les mathêma- thought that you were study 
 tiques, ing mathematics. 
 
 —In the luperfect, if we mean to express a past. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 // m'assura qu'il n'avait jamais He assured me that he had 
 tant ri, never laughed so much. 
 
 — And in the present of the conditional, if we mean to 
 express a future absolute. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 ) uni a dit que votre frère vien- I was told your brother would 
 drait à Londres ihir^r j)ro- come to town next winter. 
 
 ftain, 
 
 But. although the first verb mav be in some of these 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 383 
 
 tenses, yet the second is put in the present, when tins 
 second verb expresses a thing which is true at all times. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Je vous disais, je vous ai dit, je I told you, I have told you, I 
 
 vous avais dit, que la santé fait had told you, that health 
 
 la félicité du corps, et le savoir constitutes the happiness of 
 
 celle de fame, the body, and knowledge that 
 
 of the soul. 
 
 Remark, In phrases where the imperfect is pre* 
 ceded by que, it denotes, sometimes a past, sometimes 
 a present, with respect to the preceding verb. It de- 
 notes a past, when the verb which is joined to it by the 
 conjunction que is in the present, or future. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 l/ous savez, or vous saurez que le You know, or you must know 
 peuple Romain était aussi avide that the Romans were a 
 qu'ambitieux, people as covetous as they 
 
 were ambitious. 
 
 But it denotes a present, when the verb, which pre- 
 
 cedes it, is in the imperfect, one of the peterits, or the 
 
 pluperfect. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 On disait, on a dit, on avait dit It was said, it has been said, 
 que Phocion était le plus grand it had been said, that Pho° 
 et le plus honnête homme de son cion was the greatest and 
 temps, most upright man of his age. 
 
 Dès qu'on eut appris à Athènes As soon as it was known at 
 qu J Alcibiade était d Lacédé- Athens that Alcibiades was 
 mone, on se repentit de la pré- at Lacedemon, the Athene 
 cipitation avec laquelle on ans repented of the precipi- 
 V avait, condamné. tation with whjch they had 
 
 condemned him. 
 
 Nevertheless, the imperfect denotes the past, in 
 this last instance, when it signifies an action which was 
 past before that which is expressed by the first verb. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 En lisant Vhistoire des temps In reading the history of heroic 
 héroïques, vous devez avoir times, you must have re» 
 remarqué que ces hommes marked that those men who 
 dont on a fait des demi-dUux, have been made demi-gods, 
 étaient des chefs féroces et were ferocious and barbarous 
 barbares, dignes d peine du chiefs, scarcely deserving the 
 nom d'homme, i name of men. 
 
384 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCHV£ 
 AND THOSE OF THE INDICATIVE. 
 
 Rule I. When the verb of the principal propo* 
 sition is in the present, or future, that of the subordi- 
 nate proposition is put in the present of the subjunctive, 
 to express a present, or future ; but in the preterit, to 
 express a past. We say, 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. I iliought you were not ignorant that, to teach others the 
 principles of ari art or science, it is necessary to have experience 
 and skill. 
 
 2. I have been told that your sweetest occupation teas to form 
 your taste, your heart, and your understanding. 
 
 3. Darius, in his flight, being* reduced to the necessity of 
 drinking water muddy and infected by dead bodies, affirmed that 
 he never had drunk with so much pleasure. 
 
 4. Care has been taken to inculcate in me, from infancy, that 
 I should succeedin the world, only in proportion as I should join 
 to the desire of pleasing, a great deal of gentleness and civility. 
 
 5. Ovid has said, that study softens the manners and corrects 
 every thing that is found in us rude and barbarous. 
 
 6. You know that those pretended heroes, whom Pagan an- 
 tiquity has made gods, were only barbarous and ferocious kings, 
 who overran the earth, not so much to conquer as to ravage it. 
 and who left every where traces of their fury and of their vices. 
 
 7. It has been said of Pericles, that his eloquence was like a 
 thunderbolt, which nothing could resist. 
 
 8. As soon as Aristides had said, that the proposal of Themis^ 
 tocles icas unjust, the whole people exclaimed, that they must not 
 
 hink of it any longer. 
 
 9. Had you read the history of the early ages, you tcoidd know 
 that Egypt was the most enlightened country in the universe, and 
 1he original spot* whence knowledge spread into Greece and the 
 neighbouring countries. 
 
 (1.) Were ignorant, ignorer ; teach, instruire ilans ; it is necessary, avoir be- 
 iOin j skill, ha (-.) / have, &c. (by the active voice) on. 
 
 (3.) Flight, dén bourbeux ; affirmed, usurer. 
 
 (4.) Care hits, tic (active voire) on avoir; in me, me ; in proportion, autant ; 
 'ivility, honnêteté. (5.) Corrects, efiacer : is found, ?e trouver de. 
 
 (t>.) (herran, parcourir; not so much,' moins. 
 
 (7.) It, on ; thunderbolt, foudre, m. ; (to) whkh. 
 
 (8.) Exclaimed, s'écrier ; they must, falloir, ind-2 ; of it, y ; any long er, 
 plus. 
 
 (f.) Ages, temps ; the original spot * mhencf, celui d'oft : neighbouring, drcon- 
 voisin i countries, lieu 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 385 
 
 Il faut que celui qui parle se 
 mette à la portée de celui qui 
 V écoute, 
 
 U voudra que votre frère soit de 
 la partie, 
 
 But we must sav, 
 
 He that speaks should accom- 
 modate himself to the under- 
 standing of him that listens. 
 
 He will wish your brother to be 
 one of the party. 
 
 Pour s'être ilevé à ce point d-c 
 grandeur, il faut que Rome ait 
 eu une suite non interrompue de 
 grands hommes, 
 
 To have risen to that pitch of 
 grandeur, Rome must have 
 had an uninterrupted succes- 
 sion of great men. 
 
 Exception. Though the first verb be in the present. 
 or future, yet the second may be put in the imperfect, 
 or pluperfect of the subjunctive, when some conditional 
 expression is introduced into the sentence. 
 
 Il n'est point oVlwmme, quelque There is no man, whatever 
 -mérite quil ait, qui ne fût très- 
 mortifié, s'il savait tout c t q\Con 
 pense de lui, 
 
 )ù trouvera-t-on un homme 
 qui ne fit la même faute, s'il 
 était exposé aux mêmes tenta- 
 tions ? 
 
 Je doute que votre frère eût ré- 
 ussi sans votre assistance t \ 
 
 is no man, wr 
 merit he may have, that 
 would not feel very much 
 morticed, were he to know 
 ail that is thought of him. 
 
 Where will you find the mai. 
 who would not have commit- 
 ted the same error, had he 
 been exposed to the same 
 temptations ? 
 
 I doubt whether your brother 
 would have succeeded, had 
 it not been for your assist- 
 ance. 
 
 X EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He who wishes to teach an art, must know it thoroughly, 
 he must give none but clear, precise, and well-digested notions of 
 it : he must instil them, one by one, into the minds of his pupils, 
 and, above all, he must not overburden their memory with use- 
 less, or unimportant rules. 
 
 2. He must yield to the force of truth, when they shall have suj 
 fcred it to appear in its real light. 
 
 3. There is no work, however perfect people may suppose it 
 that would not be liable to criticism, if it were examined with se- 
 verity and in every point of view. 
 
 ^ (1.) it must (that be who, kc. know it) ; he must (Dot repeated), que ; instil, 
 faire entrer ; by, à ; overburden, surcharger : unimportant, insignificant. 
 
 (?.) (It must, ind-7, that he) ; yithl, se rendre ; suffered, permettre ; it to ap 
 pear, (that it appear) ; real light, vrai jour. 
 
 (3.) Would be liabk : prêter, subj-2 ; with severity, à la rigueur ; in, sous f 
 point of view, face. 
 
 34 
 
386 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 Rule II. When the first verb is in the imperfect, 
 .'ither of the preterits, the pluperfect, or either of the 
 conditionals, the second is put in the imperfect of the 
 subjunctive, if we mean to express a present, or-future ; 
 but it is put in the pluperfect, if we wish to express a 
 past. 
 
 Jt voulais, fai voulu, feus voulu, je voudrais, or f eusse voulu 
 -lue vous finissiez cette affaire . «.. 
 
 Je ne savais pas, je ri ai pas su, &c. que vous eussiez étudie les 
 
 jues. 
 Remark. With the preterit indefinite the second 
 verb is put in the present, if it expresses an action which 
 
 • ; may be done at all times, as, 
 Dim a entouré Its yeux deluni- God has surrounded the eyec 
 mes fori minces, transparentes with very thin tunics, trans- 
 uu dehors, afin qu'on puisse parent on the outside, that 
 à travers, we may see through them. 
 
 Vnd in the preterit, if we mean to express a past, as, 
 
 fattu qriW ait sollicité ses He must have been obliged to 
 -,-5,^1 solicit his judges. 
 
 4. I doubt whether his piece would have had the approbation 
 of connaisseurs, if he had not determined to make in it the changes 
 
 you judged necessary. 
 
 approbation, suffrage -, hud determined, se décider: in xi, y : judged, 
 
 IF EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Mr. de Turenne never icould buy any thing on credit, of 
 tradesmen, for fear, he used to say, they should lose a great pal t 
 of their demand, if he happened to be killed. All the workmen 
 who wor- employed about his house, had orders to bring in their 
 bill, bi i out for the campaign, and they were regularly 
 naid. _ - 
 
 2. It would be better, for a man who truly loves himself, to lose 
 hi» life, than tu forfeit his honour by some base and shameful ac- 
 tion. 
 
 3. Lycureus, in one of his laws, had forbidden to light home* 
 
 1.) Would, vouloir, hm--' -, hmj oncredit, prendre à credit -, of chez -, happen- 
 ./, venir -, were employed, travailler •, about, pour j bills, mémoire ; Ac, on ; set 
 iut for, se mettre en. 
 (2.) To lose, (thai bo mould lose) ; forfeit, ternir. 
 
 3.) /n, par ; ! > light, que on éclairer, subi-.' ; that, ?.d:i que ; reach iheir hontes, 
 
 livrer. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OP THE VERB. 38f 
 
 In interrogative and negative sentences, the second 
 verb is generally put in the subjunctive, as, 
 
 Quel est l'insensé qui tienne pour sûr qu'il vivra demain ? 
 Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les choses pussent tourner si 
 mal. 
 
 The verb is likewise in the subjunctive after the su- 
 periative relative, and frequently after an impersonal 
 verb, as, 
 
 Le meilleur cortege qu'un prince puisse avoir, c'est le cœur de ses 
 sujets. 
 
 The subjunctive is elegantly used in elliptical phrases, 
 where the principal proposition is omitted, as, 
 
 Qu'il vive ! (je souhaite qu'il), May he live ! 
 
 Qu'il se soit oublié jusqu'à ce That he should have so far for 
 
 point ! (je suis surpris qu'il) , gotten himself ! 
 
 Qui m'aime, me suive ! (jr veux Whoever loves me let him fol- 
 
 que celui qui), low me. 
 
 Heureux V homme qui ptut, ne Happy the man that can, were 
 
 fût-ce que dans sa vieillesse, it only in his old age, enjoy 
 
 jouir de toute la force de sa the whole strength of his re à- 
 
 raison ! (quand ce ne serait son. 
 
 que),\ 
 
 those who came from a feast in the evening, that the fear of not 
 being able to reach their houses might prevent them from getting 
 intoxicated. 
 
 4. People used the bark of trees, or skins, to write upon*, be- 
 fore paper was known. 
 
 5. Go and* ask that old man : for whom are you planting ? 
 he will answer you : for the immortal gods, who have ordered both 
 that I should profit by --the labour of those that have preceded 
 me, and that those who should come after me, should profit by 
 mine. 
 
 (4.) People, on j bark, écorce ", shins, peau j known, en usage. 
 (5.) Have ordered^ vouloir ; both, et ; by, de. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1. is there any one who does not feel that nothing is more de- 
 grading in a writer, than the pains he takes to express ordinary 
 and common things in a singu-ur and pompous style. 
 
 2. Do you think that, in forming the republic of bees, God has 
 
 1.) h de grading in, dégrader-, in, de. (2.) Had in view, vouloir. 
 
388 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 
 
 Remark. The relative pronouns qui, que, quel, dont : 
 ind où, govern the subjunctive in similar circumstan^ 
 cee.$ 
 
 Further Observations upon the Conditional and 
 Subjunctive» 
 We have said the English auxiliaries should, would 
 could, may, and might, are not always to be considered 
 as essentially and necessarily appertaining to the con- 
 ditional and subjunctive. Indeed it seldom happens 
 that the French tenses are the same as the English, at 
 
 not liad in view to teach kings to govern with gentleness, and sub- 
 jects to obey with love ? 
 
 3. You will nevtr be at peace, either with yourself or with 
 others, unless you seriously endeavour to restrain your natural im- 
 petuosity. 
 
 (3.) lie at peace, avoir la paix ; either, ni ; or. ni ; endeavour, s'appliquer. 
 
 t EXERCISE. 
 
 1 . Who is the writer that does not sometimes experience momenta 
 >f sterility and languor ? 
 
 2. There is not in the heart of man a good impulse that God 
 does not produce. 
 
 3. Choose a retreat where you may be quiet, a post whence you 
 may defend yourself. 
 
 4. The most flattering reward that a roan crm reap from his la 
 tours, is the esteem oi an enlightened public. 
 
 5. May he live, reign, and long constitute the happiness of a 
 nation which he loves, and by which he is adored ! 
 
 (). That he should thus degrade himself, is what posterity will 
 find very difficult to believe. 
 
 '/. A man just and firm is not shaken, either by the clamours oi 
 an inconsiderate mob, or by the threats of an imperious tyrant : 
 'hough ■ the whole world icerc .o fall into ruins, hj would be 
 -truck by it, but not moved. 
 
 (2.) Impulse, mouvement. (3.) May, pouvoir. 
 
 (5.) (./Way he, repeated before every verb) ; constitute, faire ; which he lovu 
 liéiir. 
 (f>.) Find dijficult, avoir de la peine ; believe, se persuader. 
 Çt.) Is shaken, ébranler ; inconsiderate, insensé' mob, populace* imperious r 
 ••err, devoir j mi 1er 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 38£ 
 
 least in subordinate, though they may be in the princi- 
 pal propositions. For instance. 
 
 / wish you would come to-night, 
 Cannot bé translated by 
 
 Je souhaite que vous viendriez ce soir, 
 Because, " when the verb of the principal preposition 
 is in the present, the verb of the subordinate proposition 
 is put in the present of the subjunctive, if we mean to 
 ess a future." Therefore we must say, 
 Je souhaite que vous veniez. 
 Or, " if the first verb is in either of the conditionals, 
 the second must be in the imperfect of the subjunctive/ 5 
 which reason we must also say, 
 
 Je voudrais que vous vinssiez. (See Rule II.) 
 
 . in the first example, que vous veniez is marked 
 
 conjunction of the verb by, thai you may come. 
 
 in the second, que vous vinssiez, by, that you might 
 
 c, neither of which is in the examples given. Again, 
 
 11 it y a personne qui le croie, 
 «not be translated by, there is nobody who may be 
 îieye it, although may is the sign of the subjunctive in 
 the meaning ; but the meaning is, 
 
 TJtere is nobody that believes it, or simply nobody believes it, 
 
 RELATIONS BETWEEN THE TENSES OF THE 
 DIFFERENT MOODS. 
 
 Remark. Our intention is not to give the relations 
 which all the tenses bear to each other, but simply to 
 mention some of the principal. 
 
 relations of the indicative. 
 
 To the imperfect are subjoined three teases, 
 l quand vous et 
 Staxdaed. — Je lisais < quand tous avez écrit - 
 ( quand torn écrivUm, 
 
 34* 
 
;{J0 iVitt'ilCULAU KCLES 0Ï' rHB vr.BB. 
 
 The preterit anterior requires the preterit definite, as. 
 f timid feus fini, vous entrâtes. 
 
 To the pluperfect are subjoined the preterit definite, 
 he preterit indefinite, the preterit anterior, and the inv 
 
 (quand vous entrâtes 
 
 ■ i } quand vous êtes entré 
 :,ards.~ J avais lu\ f juflrd vousf(Ues entr6 
 
 {quand vous entriez. 
 the preterit anterior indefinite is subjoined the 
 preterit indefinite, as, quand fai eu dîné, vous êtes 
 ' titré. 
 
 fa conjunction with si, for supposé que, the future ab- 
 îolute requires the present, and the future anterior, th< 
 ; it indefinite. 
 
 Vous partirez, si je veux. 
 " sera parti, si vous Pavez x 
 
 S Von 
 "\ lise, 
 
 Relations to the Conditional and of the Conditional. 
 In conjunction with si, for supposé que, the condition 
 al present is accompanied by the imperfect, and the 
 •irst conditional past by the pluperfect, or by the seconè 
 'Conditional past. 
 
 ( Vous partiriez, tijc le voulais. 
 
 Standards. — < jr . .. ( si je l'avais voulu 
 
 j Vous senvz parti / A ,, , 
 
 ( * { si je l eusse voulu. 
 
 f he tenses of the conditional present, and of the two 
 conditionals past are likewise accompanied by them- 
 selves. 
 
 ( Quand Vamrt posséderait tout l'or du monde 
 il ne serait pas encore content. 
 Standards. — <J Quand Alexandre aurait conquis tout l'univers, 
 il n'aurait pas (té coi, tent. 
 I Vous fussiez parti, si je l'eusse voulu. 
 
 It lias been observed that when two words are join- 
 ed by the conjunction que, the second verb is pu f 
 sometimes in the indicative and sometimes in the <»uh 
 junctive. 
 
STANDARD 
 
 p Articulas rules of the verb. 391 
 
 Relations of the Present and Future Absolute, of the In- 
 creative to the Tenses of their own Mood and of the 
 Conditional. 
 
 These two tenses may be accompanied by all the 
 tenses of the indicative and conditional. 
 
 f vous parlez aujourd'hui 
 vous partirez demain 
 vous >erez parti, quand, &c. 
 vous partiez hier 
 vous partîtes hier 
 __ ( On dit ) ! vous ê 1 es parti ce matin 
 
 \ On dira ) " \ vous fûtesparii hier, quand ,&c- 
 vous étiez parti hier, quand, &c . 
 vous partiriez aujourd'hui, su 
 
 &c. 
 vous seriez parti hier, si, &c- 
 vousfHS$iezpartiplustôl,si,&LQ> 
 
 Remark. The same relation subsists when the 
 sentence is negative ; except that for the present ab~ 
 solute of the indicative, the present of the subjunctive 
 is substituted. Instead of, on ne dit pas que vous par- 
 lez aujourd'hui ; the genius of the French language re- 
 quires that we should say, on ne dit pas que vous par- 
 liez aujourd'hui. 
 
 The imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in- 
 definite, and the pluperfect, are accompanied either by 
 the imperfect, or by the pluperfect. 
 
 S On disait ) ( ^ .. .,* . 
 
 On dit hier ( ) XG ^ Valiez aujourd'hui 
 
 On a dit (*";< 
 
 On avail dit ) ( vous étiez parti. 
 
 The future anterior requires the preterit indefinite, 
 as, on aura dit que vous avez menti. 
 
 The conditional present may be accompanied by the 
 present, the imperfect, the preterit indefinite, the plu- 
 perfect, the future of the indicative as well as by the 
 'hree conditionals. 
 
892 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB» 
 
 r qu'il se trompe 
 
 qu'il se trovipait 
 
 qu'il s'est trompé 
 
 ~ . ., ! qu'il s'était trompé 
 
 E , <s»Ams.-On croirait. <j ^ je twmpfr / 
 
 qu'il st tromperait, si, &c 
 qu'il se strait trompé, si, &,< . 
 K qu'il se fût trompé, si, &c. 
 
 The first conditional past may be accompanied by th 
 imperfect, the pluperfect, as well as by the two other 
 conditionals. 
 
 C qu'il tombait 
 
 ri * } qu'il était tombé 
 
 standards. — Onaurovtcrut 1 ,., u.TlZ* 
 
 ] qu'il serait tombe 
 
 {qu'il fïU tombé 
 
 The second conditional past may be accompanied by 
 he same tenses. 
 
 Principal Relations with the Subjunctive. 
 
 To the present, the future absolute, and the future 
 anterior of the indicative is generally subjoined the pre- 
 senl of the subjunctive. 
 
 C II veut ^ 
 
 mjard. — < Il voudra > que vous parti 
 
 ( 11 aura voulu ) 
 
 To the imperfect, the preterit definite, the preterit in 
 definite, the pluperfect, and the preterit anterior ma^y 
 >f subjoined the imperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 C Je voulais "] 
 
 I Je voulus 
 S i an dard. — { J'ai voulu } que vous partissiez. 
 
 J'avais voulu 
 
 y J'ûoS 
 
 To the future i preterit of the subjunctive^ 
 
 *s : Il aura voulu qu'il soit 
 
 Tiie conditional present ia accompanied either by the 
 imperfect, or I of the subjunctive. 
 
 «r/Nn, KD .-J /, M S vous partisse 
 
 I l vous fuissiez parti. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE VERB. 393 
 
 To the first and.second conditionals past is subjoined 
 the pluperfect of the subjunctive. 
 
 -. < J'aurais voulu > r • • . • 
 
 Statoabd— I ^^ ^^ J ?«e to» /«mrcz port*. 
 
 &C. &C. &c, &c. 
 
 OF THE INFINITIVE. 
 
 The preposition to before an infinitive, is, according tc 
 circumstances, rendered either by pour, by à, or by de ; 
 .sometimes even, it is not expressed at all. 
 
 When to means in order to, it is expressed in French» 
 by pour, as, 
 
 Tie came to speak to me, Il vint pour me parler, 
 
 As for the other two cases, there is hardly any fixed 
 rule to distinguish whether à or de, is to be used ; the 
 regimen which the preceding French verb requires af- 
 ter it is the only guide. Thus, 
 
 He likes to play, will be expressed by il aime à jouer ; he told 
 me to go, by U me dit d'aller ; and he preferred dying, by il aima 
 mieux mourir. 
 
 The participle present is used in English both as a 
 substantive and an adjective, and frequently instead of 
 the present of the infinitive, 
 
 J lis ruling passion is hunting, Sa passion dominante est la 
 
 chasse, 
 
 lleis gone a walking, Il est allé se promener. 
 
 Prevent him from doing mis- Empêchez-le de faire le mal. 
 
 chief, 
 
 There is a pleasure in silencing H y a plaisir à fermer la bouche 
 
 great talkers, aux grands parleurs. 
 
 It likewise takes almost every other preposîtîon. In 
 the first of the above examples it is translated by the 
 substantive ; in the second by the verbal adjective ; 
 and in the others by the present of the infinite e. But 
 sometimes it must be expressed by the relative qui, 
 with the verb in the indicative, especially when a differ- 
 ent mode might create any ambiguity in the sense ; as-, 
 
391 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 fmct them riding post, Je les al rencontres qui cop 
 
 raient la poste. 
 
 Sometimes it must be expressed by the conjunction 
 
 que, with the verb in the indicative, or in the subjunc- 
 tive, as circumstances may require : this is when the 
 participle present is preceded by a possessive pronoun, 
 as, 
 
 Vie fear of his coming vexed La crainte qu'il ne vint nou- 
 ns, tourmentait. 
 ï doubt his Icing faithful, Je doute qu'il soit fidèle, &c. 
 
 It may be proper to observe that, in French, thr 
 preposition en alone is followed by the participle pre- 
 sent. All other prepositions require the present of the 
 infinitive. 
 
 Foreigners are apt to mistake in the use of the parti, 
 ciple present, because they do not consider that, as it 
 express^- in inciden imposition, it must evidently re- 
 late to the ord v ^strains and modifies. 
 
 Rule. r iue participle present always forming a 
 phrase incidental and subordinate to another, must ne- 
 cessarily relate to the subject of the principal phrase, 
 when it is not preceded by another noun, as in this sen 
 tence : 
 
 Je ne puis vous accompagner à I cannot accompany you into 
 
 la campagne, ayant des «/- the country, having some 
 
 faires qui exigent ici via pré- business that requires my pre- 
 
 tence, sence here. 
 
 The participle present ayant relates to the subject je, 
 .ince the subordinate proposition, formed by ayant, could 
 have no kind of relation to the principal proposition, if 
 it could not be resolved into this, parce que fai de* 
 affaires qui, &c. But, in this sentence ; 
 
 Combien voyons-nous de gens, How many people do we see. 
 
 qui, connaissant le vrix du who, knowing the value ol 
 
 temps, le perdent mal-à-pro~ time, waste it improperly Î 
 vos ! 
 
 Connaissant relates to the substantive gens, because 
 lliis is the word which it restrains and modifies, and 
 he c anse (he relative qui, placed between that sûbstàn 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS* &0à 
 
 tive as the regimen, and the participle present, obviates 
 every kind of ambiguity , 
 
 Remarks. 1. Two participles ought never to be 
 used together without being united by a conjunction, 
 as, &c. 
 
 C'est un homme aimant et craig- He is a man loving and fearing 
 nant Dieu, God. 
 
 2. The relative en ought never to be put either be- 
 fore a participle present, or before a gerund. We can- 
 not say : 
 
 Je vous ai remis mon fils entre les mains, en voulant faire quelque 
 'Jiose de bon. 
 
 Because the sense would be ambiguous : for, the mean- 
 ing is not : 
 
 As I wish to do something good, or, as I wish to do well, I have put 
 my son into your hands, 
 
 But, 
 
 I have put my son into your hands, as I wish to make something of 
 
 him. 
 
 We should say : Voulant en faire, &c. 
 Likewise this sentence would be improper : 
 Le prince tempère la rigueur du pouvoir, en en partageant Us 
 fondions, 
 
 on account of the repetition of the word en, used in two 
 different senses, viz., as a preposition and a relative. 
 Another turn must be then adopted, as, 
 
 C'est en partageant les fonctions du pouvoir, qu'un prince en tern» 
 ■père la rigueur. 
 
 CHAP. VI. 
 
 OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 The office of prepositions is to bring the two terms 
 between which they are placed, into a state of relation. 
 \nd that relation is generally expressed by their own 
 signification, as, 
 
 Avec, sur, pendant, dans, &c, 
 
396 FAETICULAB RULES OF TUE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 But à, de, and en, express it, either by their primi- 
 tive and proper meaning, or figuratively and by exten- 
 sion ; so that, in this last case, they are merely preposi- 
 tions serving to unite the two terms ; whence it happens 
 that they often express, either the same relations that 
 others do, or opposite relations. For instance, iirtbese 
 two sentences : 
 
 \pprochez-vous du feu, Come near the fire. 
 
 Etoignez-vous du feu, Go from the fire. 
 
 De merely establishes a relation between the t\\v 
 terms, without expressing in the first, the relation of ap. 
 proximation, or in the second, the relation of distance. 
 In order, therefore, to form a just idea of these three pro- 
 positions, it is of importance to consider only their pri- 
 mitive and proper signification. 
 
 En and dans have nearly the same meaning ; but 
 they differ in this, that the former is used in a more 
 vague, the latter in a more determinate sense, as : 
 J'étais en Angleterre, dans la province de Middlesex. 
 
 From what has just been said, it follows then that en. 
 on account of its indeterminate nature, ought not to ])♦ 
 followed by the article, except in a small number ol 
 • >hrases sanctioned by usage, such are, 
 
 En la présence de Dieu; en la grand 1 cîiambrc du parlement ; en 
 ! * absence d'un tel ; en Vannée mil liait cent diz-sept, &c. 
 
 with respect to the expressions 
 
 En Vhonncur, en Vâgc, it is better to say, à VItonneur, k Yàgt 
 
 Avant is a preposition in this phrase : 
 Avant le jour, Before day-light. 
 
 But it is an adverb in this : 
 .V allez pas si avant, Do not go so forward. 
 
 Some other prepositions are likewise occasionally ad- 
 verbs. 
 
 Autour and alentour, must not be confounded ; ai 
 (S a preposition, and alentour an adverb, thus ; 
 
 Vous les grands étaient autour Al' the grandees stood round 
 
 du tronc, the throne. 
 
 Le rai était sur son trône, cl les The king was upon the throne. 
 
 «rands étaient alentour, and the grandees stood roi 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 39? 
 
 Avant and auparavant are not used indifferently. 
 
 Avant is followed by a regimen, as. 
 
 Avant Pâques, Before Easter. 
 
 Avant ce temps, Before that time. 
 
 Auparavant is followed by no regimen, as, 
 
 Si vous partez, venez me voir au- If you set off, come and see me 
 paravant, first. 
 
 Prêt à and près de, are not the same expressions. 
 Prêt is an adjective : 
 
 Je suis prêt à faire ce que vous I am ready to do what you 
 voudrez, pîease. 
 
 But près is a preposition : 
 
 Mon ouvrage est près d'être My work is nearly finished. 
 fini, 
 
 Au travers and à travers differ in this ; the first is 
 followed by the preposition de, the second is not, as, 
 
 H se fit jour au travers des en- He fought Ms way through Ute 
 nemis, enemy. 
 
 f l se fit jour à travers les en- 
 nemis, 
 
 Avant denotes priority of time and order, as, i 
 
 U est arrivé avant moi, l'article se met avant le nom. 
 
 Devant is used for en présence, vis-à-vis, as, 
 
 Il a paru devant le juge ; il loge devant V église. 
 
 Remark. Devant is likewise a preposition marking 
 order, and is the opposite of après, as, 
 
 R a le pas devant moi, He has precedence of me. 
 
 Si vous êtes pressé, courez de- If you are in a hurry, run 1>t* 
 vant, fore. 
 
 THE USE OP THE ARTICLE WITH PREPOSITIONS, 
 
 Some prepositions require the article before their re^ 
 gimen ; others do not ; and others again, sometimes 
 admtt, sometimes reject it. 
 
 m 
 
Î98 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIO. 
 
 Rule I. The following prepositions, gcneralh 
 quire the article before the noun, which they govern. 
 
 avant, depuis, envers, nonobstant, selon, 
 
 après, devant, excepté, parmi, suivant, 
 
 chez, derrière, hors, pendant, touchant- 
 
 dans, durant, hormis, pour. vers, 
 
 avant V aurore, chez le prince, envers les pauvres, 
 
 iprès la promenade, dans la maison, devant l'église, &c. 
 
 There are however exceptions, as, 
 
 avant terme, avant diner, pour lit une paillasse, 
 
 avant midi, après diner, depuis minuit, &c. 
 
 Rule II. A noun governed by the preposition en 
 \s not, in general, preceded by the article, as, 
 
 En ville, en campagne, en extase, en songe, en pièces <fcc. 
 
 Remark. L'armée est entrée en campagne, means the 
 army has taken the field ; but Mr. N. est allé à la cam 
 r>agne, means Mr. N. is gone into the country. 
 
 Rule III. These eleven prepositions, à de, avec, 
 contre, entire, malgré, outre, par, pour, sur, sans, some - 
 times admit, sometimes reject the article before their rp 
 gimen. 
 
 If the article is used in these phrases : 
 
 Jouer sur le velours, 
 
 St. Paul veut de la subordination entre la femme et le mari 
 
 Sans les passions, où serait le mérite ? 
 
 It is suppressed in, 
 
 Etre sur pied ; un peu de façons ne gâte rien entre mari tf 
 femme. 
 
 Vivre sans passions, c'est vivre sans plaisirs et sans peines 
 
 REPETITION OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Rule I. The prepositions de, a, and en, must b< 
 peated before all the nouns which they govern, as, 
 
 Voyons qui V emportera de vous. Let us see which of us wiO u J 
 cte lui. on <\o moi. eel, you, he, or I. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 39Ô 
 
 bMe a de Vhonnêteté, de la dou- 
 ceur, tes grâces, et de V esprit, 
 
 ; a loi, que Dieu a gravée au 
 fond de mon cœur, m'instruit 
 de tout ce que je dois à Vau- 
 tour de mon être, au prochain, 
 à moi-même, 
 
 En Asie, en Europe, en Afrique, 
 et jusqu'en Amérique, on trouve 
 le même préjugé. 
 
 She has politeness, sweetness^ 
 grace, and abilities. 
 
 The law which God has deeply 
 engraven on my heart, in- 
 structs me in every thing I 
 owe to the author of my be- 
 ing, to my neighbour, and to 
 myself. 
 
 In Asia, in Europe, in Africa 
 and even in America, we find 
 the same prejudice. 
 
 Rule II. The other prepositions, especially those 
 insisting of two syllables, are generally repeated — 
 before nouns, which have meanings totally different ; 
 but seldom before nouns, that are nearly synonymous. 
 
 Pden n'est moins selon Dieu et 
 selon le monde, 
 
 Cette action est contre l'honneur 
 et contre toute espèce de prin- 
 cipes, 
 
 But we ought to say, 
 
 (l perd sa jeunesse dans la tnol- 
 lesse et la volupté, 
 
 Notre loi ne condamne personne 
 sans Vavoir entendu et ex- 
 aminé. 
 
 Nothing is less according to 
 
 God and according to the 
 
 world. 
 That action is contrary to 
 
 honour, and to every kind oi 
 
 principle. 
 
 He wastes his youth in effemi- 
 nacy and pleasure. 
 
 Our laws condemn nobody 
 without having heard and ex- 
 amined him. 
 
 OF THE GOVERNMENT OF PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Some prepositions govern nouns without the help of 
 another preposition, as, 
 
 Devant le maison, Before the house, 
 
 Hormis son frère, Except his brother. 
 
 Sans son épée, Without his sword, &c. 
 
 Others require the help of the preposition de, as, 
 Près de la maison, Near the house. 
 
 A Vinsu de son frère. Unknown to his brother. 
 
 Au-dessus du pont, Above the bridge, &c. 
 
 These four, jusque, par rapport, quant and sauf are 
 s bllowed by the preposition à, as, 
 
 Jusqu'au mois prochain , Till the next month. 
 
 Qnfjv.t à moi. As for me, &-c. 
 
400 PAETICULAR RULES OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 Practice alone can teach these different regimens. 
 
 Rule. A noun may be governed by two preposi- 
 tions, provided they do not require different regimens ; 
 thus we may say with propriety, 
 
 Celui qui écrit selon Its circuit- He who writes according to 
 
 stances, pour et contre un circumstances, both for and 
 
 parti, est un homme bien mé- against a party, is a very con- 
 
 yrisable, temptible man. 
 
 But it would be wrong to say, 
 
 Celui qui écrit en iaveureJ contre un parti, &c. 
 
 because en faveur requires the preposition de. 
 
 Rule. Prepositions which, with their regimen, ex- 
 press a circumstance, are generally placed as nearly as 
 possible to the word to which that circumstance relates, 
 
 as, 
 
 On voit des personnes qui, avec We see persons who, with e 
 
 beaucoup d'esprit, commettent great deal of wit, commit 
 
 de très-grandes fautes. very great faults. 
 
 l'ai envoyé à la poste les lettres I have sent to the post-office the 
 
 que vous avez écrites, letters which you have written 
 
 Croyez-vous pouvoir ramener Do you think you can reclaim 
 
 par la douceur ces esprits by gentleness, those mistaken 
 
 Cgarés ? people ? 
 
 If we attempt to alter the place of these preposi- 
 tions, we shall find that the sentences will become am- 
 biguous. 
 
 CHAP. VII. 
 
 OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 OF THE NEGATIVE 72C 
 
 Negation is expressed in French by ne, either alone 
 >r accompanied by pas or point. On this point the Aca 
 'iemy has examined the four following questions : 
 
 1. Where is the place of the negatives? 
 
 2. When is pas to be used in preference to point, and 
 versa ? 
 
ï>ARTICUIiAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 401 
 
 3. When may both be omitted ? 
 
 4. When ought both to be omitted ? 
 
 As this subject is of very material importance, wc 
 shall treat it upon the plan of the Academy, and agree- 
 ably to their views. 
 
 First Question. Where is the place of the nega- 
 tives ? 
 
 Ne is always prefixed to the verb ; but the place of 
 pas and point is variable. 
 
 When the verb is in the infinitive, these are placed in- 
 differently before, or after it ; for we say, 
 
 Pour ne point voir, or, pour ne voir pas. 
 
 In the other moods, except the imperative, the tenses 
 are either simple, or compound. In the simple tenses. 
 pas or point is placed after the verb. 
 
 // ne parle pas ; ne parle-t-ïl pas ? 
 
 In the compound tenses, it is placed between the 
 auxiliary and the participle. 
 
 R rfa pas parlé ; n'a-t-il pas parlé ? 
 
 In the imperative, it is placed after the verb. 
 
 Ne badinez pas. Ne vous en allez pas. 
 
 Second Question. When is pas to be used in pre, 
 ference to point, and vice versa ? 
 
 Point is a stronger negative than pas : besides, it de* 
 notes something permanent : Il ne lit point, means, he 
 never reads. 
 
 Pas denotes something accidental : II ne lit pas. 
 means, he does not read now, or he is not reading. 
 
 Point de denotes an absolute negation. Thus : 
 
 17 n'a point d'esprit, is to say, he has no wit at all. 
 
 Pas de allows the liberty of a reserve. So : 
 
 Il n'a pas d'esprit, is to say, he has nothing of wha< 
 f*an be called wit. 
 
 35* 
 
9 
 
 402 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 Hence, the Academy concludes, that pas is more pro 
 per, 
 
 1. Before plus, moins, si, autant, and other words de 
 noting comparison, as, 
 
 Wilton n'est pas moins sublime Milton is not less sublime than 
 qu'Homère, Homer. 
 
 2. Before nouns of number, as, 
 
 il n'y apas dix ans, It is not ten years ago. 
 
 Point is elegantly used, 
 
 1. At the end of a sentence, as, 
 
 On s'amusait à ses dépens, et il They were amusing themselves 
 ne s'en aperccvaU point, at his expense, and he did not 
 
 perceive it. 
 
 2. In elliptical sentences, as, 
 
 fe croyais avoir affaire à un lion- I thought I had to deal with an 
 nête homme ; mais point, honest man ; but no. 
 
 3. In answer to interrogative sentences, as, 
 
 hez-vous ce soir au pare 1 . — Shall you go this evening to ÙV 
 point park ? — no. 
 
 The Academy also observes, that when pas, or point 
 is introduced into interrogative sentences, it is with mean- 
 ings somewhat different. We make use of point, when 
 we have any doubt on our minds, as, 
 
 N'avez-vous point été là ? Have you not been there ? 
 
 But we use pas, when we are persuaded. Thus, 
 
 N'avez-vous pas été là ? • But you have been there, have 
 
 not you ? 
 
 Third Question. When may both pas and point be 
 omitted ? 
 
 They may be suppressed, 
 
 1. After the words cesser, oser, and pouvoir ; but this 
 omission is only for the sake of elegance, as, 
 
 Je ne cesse de m'en occuper, I am incessantly attentive to it. 
 
 Je n'ose vous m pnrh r, 1 dare not speak to you about it. 
 
 Je ne puis y penser sans frémir, I cannot think of it without 
 
 shuddering. 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB* 403 
 
 We likewise say, but only in familiar conversation, 
 
 Ne bougez, Do not stir. 
 
 2. In expressions of this kind, 
 
 Y a-t-U un homme dont elle ne Is there a man that she does not 
 
 médise ? slander ? 
 
 ivez-vous un ami qui ne soit des Have you a friend that is not 
 
 miens ? likewise mine ? 
 
 Fourth Question. When ought both pas and point 
 to be omitted ? 
 
 They are omitted, 
 
 1. When the extent which we mean to give to the ne- 
 gative is sufficiently expressed either by the words which 
 restrict it, by words which exclude all restriction, or 
 lastly, by such as denote the smaller parts of a whole, 
 mid which are without the article. 
 
 To exemplify the first part of this remark, we say. 
 
 Je ne sors guère, I go out but seldom. 
 
 Je m sortirai de trois jours, I shall not go out for three days. 
 
 To exemplify the second, we say, 
 
 Je n'y vais jamais, I never go there. 
 
 Je n'y pense plus, I thiuk no more of it. 
 
 Xid ne sait s'il est digne d'amour, Nobody knows whether he be 
 
 ou de haine, deserving of love, or hatred. 
 
 S 'employez aucun de ces strata- Use none of these stratagems. 
 
 gêmes, 
 
 Il ne plaît à personne, He pleases nobody. 
 
 Rien n'est plus charmant, Nothing is more charming. 
 
 Je n'y pense nullement, I do not think of it at all 
 
 To exemplify the third, we say, 
 U n'y voit goutte, He cannot see at all. 
 
 Je n'en ai cueilli brin, I did not gather a sprig. 
 
 U ne dit mot, He speaks not a word. 
 
 But if to mot we join an adjective of number, pas must 
 be added, as, 
 Il ne dit pas un mot qui n'inté- He speaks ?iot a word but what 
 
 resse, is interesting. 
 
 Dans ce discours, il n'y a pas In that speech, there are not 
 trois mots à reprendre, three words that are excep- 
 
 tionable. 
 
 Pas is likewise used with the preposition de, as, 
 
 R ne fait pas de démarche inu- He does not take any useless 
 tile, step, 
 
m 
 
 PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 Remark. If, after the sentences we have just men- 
 tioned, either the conjunction que, or the relative pro- 
 nouns qui or dont, should introduce a negative sentence, 
 then in this last pas and point are omitted, as, 
 
 Je ne fais jamais d'excès que je I never commit any excess 
 
 n'en sois incommodé, without being ill after it. 
 
 Je ne vois personne qui ne tous I see nobody but what com 
 
 loue, mends you. 
 
 2. When two negatives are joined by ni, as, 
 Je ne Vaime ni ne V estime, I neither love nor esteem him. 
 
 And when the conjunction ni is repeated, either in the 
 subject, as, 
 
 Ni Vor ni la grandeur ne nous Neither gold nor greatness can 
 rendent heureux, make us happy. 
 
 Or, in the attribute, as, 
 // n'est ni prudent ni sage, 
 
 Or, in the regimen, as, 
 H n'a ni dettes ni procès, 
 
 He is neither prudent nor wise 
 
 He has neither debts nor law 
 suits. 
 
 Remark. Pas is preserved, when ni is not repeated. 
 ;ind when this last serves only to unite two members of a 
 negative sentence, as, 
 
 Te n'aime pas ce vain étalage I do not like that vain displa) 
 d'érudition, prodiguée sans of erudition, lavished withou r 
 choix et sans goût, ni ce luxe de choice and without taste, nor 
 mots quine disent rien, that pomp of words which 
 
 have no meaning. 
 
 3. With the verb which follows que, used instead of 
 pourquoi, and with à moins que, or si, used instead of it. 
 
 as, 
 
 Qwc n'etes-vous aussi post que 
 
 votre frère ? 
 Je ne sortirai pas, à moins que 
 
 vous ne veniez me prendre, 
 Je n'irai pas chez lui, s'il, ne m'y 
 
 I ngage, 
 
 Why are you not as sedate a* 
 
 your brotker ? 
 I shall not go out, unless you 
 
 come to fetch me. 
 I shall not go to his house, if he 
 
 do not invite me. 
 
 i. With nc — que used instead of seulement, as, 
 
 fhie jeujiesse, qui se livre à ses Youth, which abandons itself 
 
PARTICULAR RULIS OF THE ADVERB. 405 
 
 passions, ne transmet à la vieil- to its passions, transmits to 
 fasse qu'un corps usé f old age nothing but a worn- 
 
 out body. 
 
 When before the conjunction que, the word rien is un- 
 derstood, as, 
 U ne fait que rire. He does nothing but laugh. 
 
 Or when that conjunction may be changed into sinon, 
 or si ce n'est, as, 
 
 il ne tient qu'à vous de réussir f The success wholly depends 
 
 upon you. 
 Trop de maîtres à la fois ne Too many masters at once only 
 
 servent qu'à embrouiller l'es- serve to perplex the mind. 
 
 prit, 
 
 5. With a verb in the preterit, preceded by the con- 
 junction depuis que, or by the verb il y a, denoting a 
 certain duration of time, as, 
 
 Comment vous êtes-voas porté de- How have you been since I saw 
 
 puis que je ne vous ai vu ? you ? 
 
 // y a trois mois que je ne vous ai I have not seen you for these 
 
 vu, three months. 
 
 But they are not omitted, when the verb is in the pre* 
 sent, as, 
 
 Comment vit-il depuis que nous How does he live now we do 
 
 ne le voyons point ? not see him ? 
 
 Il y a six mois que nous ne le We have not seen him these 
 
 voyons point, six months. 
 
 6. In phrases where the conjunction que is preceded 
 by tlie adverbs of comparison plus, moins, mieux, &c. or 
 some other equivalent term, as, 
 
 On méprise ceux qui parlent au- We despise those who speak 
 trement qu'ils ne pensent, differently from what they 
 
 think. 
 U écrit mieux qu'il ne parle, He writes better than he 
 
 C'est pire qu'on ne le disait, It is worse than was said. 
 
 if est autre chose que je ne croy- It is different from what 1 
 
 ais, thought. 
 
 Peu s'en faut qu'on ne m'ait I have been very near being 
 
 trompé, deceived. 
 
 7e In sentences united by the conjunction que to the 
 
10b PARTICULAR RJJLES 01 THE ADVERB» 
 
 verbs douter, désespérer, nier, and disconvenir, forming 
 a negative member of a sentence, as, 
 
 Je ne doute pas qu'il m vienne, I doubt not that he will come . 
 
 Ne dés.spérez pas qui ce moyen Do not despair of the success of 
 
 ne vous réussisse, these means. 
 
 Je ne niepns, or je ne disconviens I do not deny that it is so. 
 
 pas que cela ne soit, 
 
 The Academy says, that after the two last verbs, ne 
 •nny be omitted, as, 
 
 Je ne nie pas, or, je ne disconviens pas que cela soit. 
 
 8. With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 
 verbs empêcher and prendre garde, meaning to take care. 
 
 as, 
 
 J empêcherai lien que vous ne I shall prevent your being of the 
 
 soyez du nombre, number. 
 
 Prenez garde qu'on ne vous se- Take care that they do not cor 
 
 duise, rupt you. 
 
 Remark. The Academy observes, that in the above 
 acceptation, prendre garde is followed by a subjunctive ; 
 but when it means to reflect, the indicative is used with 
 pas or point, as, 
 
 Prenez garde que vous ne m'en- Mind, you do not understand 
 tendez pas, what I mean. 
 
 9. With a verb united by the conjunction que to the 
 verb craindre, and those of the same meaning, when 
 we do not wish the thing expressed by the second verb, 
 as, 
 
 [l craint que son frère ne Vaban- He is afraid his brother should 
 
 donne, forsake him. 
 
 Je crains que won ami ne I fear my friend will die. 
 
 meure, 
 
 Butpasisnot omitted, when we wish the thing ex 
 pressed by the second verb, as, 
 
 Te crains que mon père n'arrive I ara afraid ray father will not 
 pas, come. 
 
 10. With the verb which follows de peur que, de crainte 
 que, in similar circumstances with craindre, Thus. 
 whon 
 
 
PARTICULAR RULES OF THE ADVERB. 401 
 
 De crainte qu'il ne -perde son procès. 
 We wish that he may gain it, and, when we say. 
 
 De crainte qu'il ne soit pas puni, 
 We wish that he may be punished. 
 Remark. In these phrases, 
 
 Je crains que mon ami ne I am afraid my friend will die. 
 
 meure, 
 Vous empêchez qu'on ne chante. You prevent them from sing 
 
 ing. 
 
 The expression we is not a negation ; it is the ne, or 
 quin of the Latins introduced into the French language, 
 as may be seen by the English translation. 
 
 11. After savoir, whenever it has the meaning of pou- 
 voir, as, 
 
 Je ne saurais en venir à bout, 1 cannot accomplish it. 
 
 When it means être incertain, it is the best to omit pas 
 and point, as, 
 
 Je ne sais où le prendre, I do not know whereto find 
 
 him. 
 Il ne sait ce qu'il dit, He does not know what he 
 
 says. 
 
 Remark. But pas and point must be used when sa 
 voir is taken in its true meaning, as. 
 Je ne sais pas le Français, I do not know French. 
 
 12. We also say, 
 
 Ne vous déplaise, ne vous en dé- By your leave, under favour. 
 plaise, or, let it not displease you. 
 
 Plus and davantage must not be used indifferently - 
 Plus is followed by the preposition de, or the conjunc- 
 tion -que, as, 
 
 II a plus de brillant que de so- He has more brilliancy than so 
 
 lide, lidity. 
 
 Use fie plus à ses lumières qu'à He relies more upon his own 
 
 celles des autres, knowledge than upon that of 
 
 others. 
 
 Davantage is used alone and at the end of sentences. 
 
 as, 
 
 La science est estimable, mais la, Learning is estimable, but vir 
 vertu Vest davantage. tue is still more so. 
 
108 PARTICULAR ROLES OF THE ADVERB. 
 
 Though davantage cannot be followed by the preposi- 
 tion de, it may be preceded by the pronoun en, as, 
 
 Je n'en dirai pas davantage, I shall not say any more about 
 
 it. 
 
 It is incorrect to use davantage for le plus. We must 
 say, 
 
 De toutes les fleures d'un parterre, Of all the flowers of a parterre 
 V anémone est celle qui mc plait the anemone is that which 
 h plus, pleases me most. 
 
 Si, aussi, tant, and autant, are always followed by the 
 conjunction que, expressed or understood. 
 
 Si and aussi are joined to adjectives, adverbs, and 
 participles ; tant and autant to substantives and verbs. 
 
 V Angleterre n'est pas si grande England is not so large as 
 
 que la France, France. 
 
 Il est aussi estimé qu'aimé. He is as much esteemed as he is 
 
 beloved. 
 Elle a autant de beauté que de She has as much beauty as vir- 
 
 vertu, tue. 
 
 Remark. Autant may, however, be substituted for 
 aussi, when it is preceded by one adjective, and followed 
 by que and another adjective, as, 
 U est modeste autant que sage, He is as modest as wise. 
 
 Aussi and autant are used in the affirmative ; si and 
 tant in negative and interrogative sentences. The two 
 last are, however, alone to be used in affirmative senten- 
 ces, when they are put for tellement, as, 
 
 Il est devenu si gros, qu'il a de la He is become so bulky that he 
 
 peine à marcher, can hardly walk. 
 
 ft a tant couru qu'il en est hors He has been running so fast 
 
 (Tkaleine, that he is out of breath. 
 
 Jamais takes sometimes the preposition à, and toujours 
 the preposition pour, as. 
 
 Soyez à jamais heureur-* Be for ever happy. 
 
 C'cti pour toujours, It i? for ever. 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. l09 
 
 CHAP. VIII. 
 
 OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION, 
 
 Grammatical construction is the order which the 
 genius of a language has assigned, in speech, to the 
 different sorts of words into which it is distinguished. 
 Construction is sometimes mistaken for syntax ; but 
 there is this difference, the latter consists in the rules 
 which we are to observe, in order to express the rela- 
 tions of words one to another, whereas grammatical 
 construction consists in the various arrangements 
 which are allowed while we observe the rules of syntax. 
 Now this arrangement is irrevocably fixed, not only as 
 phrases may be interrogative, imperative, or exposi- 
 tive, but also as each of these kinds may be affirmative 
 or negative. 
 
 In sentences simply interrogative, the subject is 
 either a noun or pronoun. 
 
 If the subject be a noun, the following is the order to 
 be observed : first, the noun, then the verb, then the 
 corresponding personal pronoun, the adverb, if any, and 
 the regimen in the simple tenses : in the compound tenses, 
 the pronoun and the adverb are placed between the 
 auxiliary and the participle, as, 
 
 lœs lumières sont-elles un bien Are sciences an advantage to 
 
 pour les peuples ? ont-elles nations ? Have they ever 
 
 jamais contribué à leur bon- contributed to their happi- 
 
 heur ? ness ? 
 
 If the subject be a pronoun, the verb begins the se- 
 ries, and the other words follow in the order already 
 pointed out, as, 
 
 Vous plairez-xous toujours à Will you always take pleasure 
 
 médire ? in slandering? 
 
 Aurez-vous bientôt fini ? Shall you have soon done ? 
 
 N. B. When the verb is reflected, the pronoun 
 forming the regimen begins the series ; this pronount 
 
 36 
 
1J0 OF GRAMMATICAL CGXSTEUCTION. 
 
 always preserves its place before the verb, except ii» 
 sentences simply imperative. 
 
 In interrogative sentences, with negation, the same 
 order is observed ; but ?ze'is placed before the verb, and 
 pas, or point, after the verb in the simple tenses, and 
 between the auxiliary and the participle in the compound 
 tenses, as, 
 
 Votre frère ne viendra-t-il pas Will not your brother come te 
 
 demain ? morrow? 
 
 \Taurez-T0us pas bientôt fini ? Shall you not have soon done : 
 
 Remark. There are in French several other w? 
 interrogating. 
 
 1. With an absolute pronoun, as, 
 
 Qui vous a dit cela ? or, 
 
 Qui est-ce qui vous a dit cela ? Who told you that I 
 
 & With the demonstrative pronoun ce, as, 
 
 Cst-cs-vous ? Is it you ? Est-ce qu'il pleut, ! Does it rain 1 
 
 3. With an interrogative verb, as, 
 
 Pourquoi tie rient-ilpas 1 Why does he not come 7 
 
 ''eminent vous trouvez-vous ? How do you find yourself 1 
 
 Hence we see that the absolute pronouns and the in- 
 ierrogativc adverbs always begin the sentence : but the 
 demonstrative pronoun always follows the verb. 
 
 In sentences, simply imperative, the verb is always 
 placed first, in the first and second persons ; but in the 
 third, it comes after the conjunction que and the noun, 
 or pronoun, as, 
 
 illons là, Let us go there. 
 
 Venez ici. Come here. 
 
 Qu'ils y aillent, Let them go there. 
 
 Que Pierre aille à Londres, Let Peter go to London. 
 
 With negation ne and pas are placed as in interroga- 
 tive sentences. 
 
 For the place of the pronouns, (see p. 241.) 
 Sentences are expositive, when we speak without 
 either interrogating, or commanding. The following 
 «the order of the words in those which are affirmative: 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION, 
 
 411 
 
 the subject, the verb, the adverb, the participle, the re- 
 
 gimen, as, 
 
 Un bon prince mérite V amour de 
 ses sujets, et V estime de tous les 
 peuples, 
 
 César eût inutilement passé le 
 Rubicon, s'il y eût eu de son 
 ps des Fabius, 
 
 A good prince deserves the love 
 of his subjects, and the esteem 
 of all nations. 
 
 Caesar would have crossed the 
 Rubicon to no purpose, had 
 there been Fabii in his time. 
 
 The negative sentences differ from this construction, 
 only as ne is always placed before the verb,, and pas, or 
 point, either after the verb, or between the auxiliary and 
 the participle, as, 
 
 Un homme riche ne fait pas tou- 
 jours le lien qiC il pourrait, 
 
 Cicéron n'eût peut-être pas été un 
 si grand orateur, si le désir de 
 s 1 élever aux premières dignités 
 n'eut enflammé son âme, 
 
 A rich man does not always de 
 all the good he might. 
 
 Cicero would not perhaps have 
 been so great an orator, had 
 not the desire of rising to the 
 first dignitiesinflamedhis soul. 
 
 Sentences are either simple, or compound. They 
 are simple, when they contain only one subject and one 
 attribute, as, 
 
 Vous lisez, 
 Vous êtes jeune, 
 
 You read. 
 You are young. 
 
 They are compound, when they associate several 
 subjects with one attribute, or several attributes with 
 one subject, or several attributes with several subjects. 
 or several subjects with several attributes. 
 
 This sentence, Pierre et Paul sont heureux, is com- 
 pound by having several subjects ; this, cette femme est 
 jolie, spirituelle et sensible, is compound by having se- 
 veral attributes ; and this, Pierre et Paul sont spirituels 
 et savans, is composed at once of several subjects and 
 several attributes. 
 
 A sentence may be compound in various other ways : 
 by the subject, by the verb, or by the attribute. 
 
 By the subject, when this is restricted by an inciden- 
 tal proposition, as, 
 
 Bieu, qui est bon^ 
 
IIX OF GRAMMATICAL CON8TBUCXIOST. 
 
 By the verb, when it is modified by some circuit 
 stance of time, order, &c, as, 
 
 Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais. 
 
 By the attribute, when this attribute is modified by a 
 regimen which is itself restricted, as, 
 
 Dieu, qui est bon, n'abandonne jamais les hommes, qui mettent 
 sincèrement leur confiance en lui. 
 
 These simple, or compound sentences, maybe joined 
 j others by a conjunction, as, 
 
 'laand on aime V étude, le temps When we love study, time flies 
 passe sans qu'on s'en aperçoive, without our perceiving it. 
 
 The two partial phrases here form but one. 
 
 Rule. When a sentence is composed of two partial 
 phrases, joined by a conjunction, harmony and perspi- 
 cuity generally require the shortest to go first. 
 
 EXAMPLES 
 
 iluand les passions nous quittent, When our passions leave us, we 
 
 nous nous flattons en vain, que in vain flatter ourselves that 
 
 c'est nous qui les quittons, it is we that leave them. 
 
 On n'est point à plaindre, quand, He is not to be pitied, who for 
 
 au défaut de plaisirs rids, on want of real pleasure, finds 
 
 trouve le moyen de s'occuper de means to amuse himself with 
 
 chimères, chimeras. 
 
 Periods result from the union of several partial 
 phrases, the whole of which make a complete sense. 
 Periods, to be clear, require the shortest phrases to 
 be placed first. The following example of this is taken 
 from Fléchier. 
 
 N'attendez pas, Messieurs, 
 
 1. Que j'ouvre une scene tragique ; 
 
 2. Que je représente ce grand homme étendu sur ses propres 
 trophées ; 
 
 3. Que je découvre ce corps pale et sanglant, auprès duquel 
 urne encore la foudre qui l'a frappé ; 
 
 4. Que je fasse crier son sang comme celui d'Abel, et qut 
 j'expo* yeux les images de la religion et de ta patçi< 
 
OF . GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION. 413 
 
 This admirable period is composed of four members s 
 which go on gradually increasing. It is a rule not to 
 give more than four members to a period, and to avoid 
 multiplying incidental sentences. 
 
 Obscurity in style is generally owing to those small 
 phrases which divert the attention from the principal 
 sentences, and make us lose sight of them. 
 
 The construction which we have mentioned is called 
 direct, or regular, because the words are placed in 
 those sentences according to the order which has been 
 pointed out. But this order may be altered in certain 
 cases, and then the construction is called indirect, or 
 irregular. Now, it may be irregular, by inversion, by 
 ellipsis, by pleonasm, or by syllepsis : these are what 
 are called the four figures cf words. 
 
 OF INVERSION 
 
 Inversion is the transportation of a word into a place, 
 •different from that which by usage is properly assigned . 
 to it. This ought never to be done except when h 
 introduces more perspicuity, energy, or harmony into 
 the language ; for it is a defect in construction, when- 
 ever the relation subsisting between words is not easily 
 perceived. 
 
 There are two kinds of inversion : the one, by its 
 boldness seems to be confined to poetry : the other is . 
 frequently employed even in prose. 
 
 We shall speak here of the latter kind only. 
 
 The following inversions are authorized by custom. 
 
 The subject by which a verb is governed may with 
 propriety be placed after it, as, 
 
 Tout ce que lui promet Vamitiê All that the friendship of the 
 des Romains, Romans promises him. 
 
 Remark. This inversion is a rule of the art of 
 speakjftg and writing, whenever the subject is modified; 
 ' ' "" 36* 
 
114 Ol (iR^MMATlCAL CONâTEUClIOK 
 
 by an incidental sentence, long enough to make us 
 Jose sight of the relation of the verb governed to the 
 subject governing. 
 
 The noun governed by the prepositions de and a 
 may likewise be very properly placed before the verb : 
 as, 
 D'une voix entrecoupée de san- In a voice interrupted by sobs. 
 
 gluts, ils s'écrièrent, they exclaimed. 
 
 A tant d'injures, qwa-t-elle ré- To so much abuse, what an 
 
 pondu ? swer did she give ? 
 
 The verb is likewise elegantly preceded by the pre- 
 positions après, dans, par, sous, contre, &c. with theii 
 dependencies, as well as by the conjunction si, quand, 
 parce que, puisque, quoique, lorsque, dec. as, 
 Pur la loi du corps, je tiens à By the law of the body, I an 
 ce monde qui passe, connected with this passing 
 
 world. 
 Puisqu'il le veut, qu'il le fasse. Since he wishes it, let him df 
 * it. 
 
 OF THE ELLIPSIS, 
 
 Ellipsis is the omission of a word, or even several 
 words which are necessary to make the construction 
 full and complete. In order to form a good ellipsis 
 the mind must be able easily to supply the words omit 
 ted, as, 
 
 J'accepterais les offres de Da- I would accept the offers ot 
 
 rius, si j'étais Alexandre : — et Darius, if I were Alezan- 
 
 tnoï aussi, si j'étais Parme- der: — and so would I, if 1 
 
 nion, were Parmenio. 
 
 Here the mind easily supplies the words je les accept 
 terois in the second member. 
 
 The ellipsis is very common in answers to interroga- 
 tive sentences, as, 
 
 Quand vitndrez-vous ? — de- When will you come ?— tc- 
 
 main, morrow. 
 
 that is, je viendrai demain. 
 
 In order to know whether an ellipsis be good, th* 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL CONSTRUCTION 41^ 
 
 words that are understood must be supplied. It is cor- 
 rect, whenever the construction completely expresses 
 the sense denoted by the words which are supplied ; 
 otherwise it is not exact. 
 
 OF THE PLEONASM. 
 
 Pleonasm, in general, is a superfluity of words ; in 
 order to constitute this figure good, it must be sane 
 tioned by custom, which never authorizes its use, but 
 to give greater energy to language, or to express, in a 
 clearer manner, the internal feeling with which we are 
 affected. 
 
 Et que m'a fait à moi cette Troie où je cours ! 
 Je me meurs. S'il ne veut pas. vous le dire, je vous le dinar!, 
 moi. 
 Je l'ai vu de mes propres yeux, 
 Je l'ai entendu de mes propres oreilles. 
 
 — A moi, in the first sentence ; — me, in the second ? 
 —moi, in the third ;— de mes propres yeux, in the 
 fourth ; and — de mes propres oreilles, in the fifth, are 
 employed merely for the sake of energy, or to manifest 
 an internal feeling. But this manner of speaking is 
 sanctioned by custom. 
 
 Remark. Expletives must not be mistaken for plec 
 aasms, as, 
 
 C'est une affaire, oil il y za du It is an affair in which the 
 salut de Vétat, safety of the state is cDjif 
 
 cerned. 
 
 Which is better than c'est une affaire, où il va, &c, 
 by omitting y, which is in reality useless on account of 
 où : but y here, is a mode of expression from which it 
 ♦s r»ot allowable to deviate, 
 
jïfî OF GRAMMATICAL CCTSStnVCTlQXi 
 
 OV THE SYLLEPSIS. 
 
 The syllepsis is a figure by which a word relates 
 i lore to our meaning, than to the literal expressions, as 
 in these : 
 
 Il est onze heures ; l'an mil sept cent quatre-vingt-dix-neuf. 
 
 When using it, the mind, merely intent upon a pre- 
 cise meaning, pays no attention to either the number, 
 >r the gender of heure and an. 
 
 There is likewise a syllepsis in these sentences : 
 
 Je crains qu'il ne vienne. 
 J'empêcherai qu'il ne vous nuise. 
 J'ai peur qu'il ne m'oublie, &c. 
 
 Full of a wish that the event may not take place, w< 
 tre willing to do all we can, that nothing should pre 
 ^ent an obstacle to that wish. This is the cause of the 
 introduction of the negative, which, although unne 
 "essary to complete the sense, yet must be preserver 
 for the idiom. 
 
 There is again a very elegant syllepsis in sentence? 
 like the following from Racine : 
 
 Entre le peuple et vous, vous prendrez Dieu pour juge ; 
 Vous souvenant, mon fils, que caché sous ce lin, 
 Comme eux vous fûtes pauvre, et, comme eux, orphelin. 
 
 The poet forgets that he has been using the wore 
 peuple : nothing remains in his mind but des pauvre 
 and des orphelins, and it is with that idea of which ht 
 >o fully impressed that he makes the pronoun em 
 pgree. For the same reason, Bossuct and Mézengir v 
 have said, 
 
 Quand le peuple Hébreu entra dans la terre promise, tout y celé» N 
 brait leurs ancêtres. — Bossuet. 
 
 Moïse eut recours au Seigneur, et lui dit: que ferai-ie \. et 
 yeuple ? bientôt ils me lapideront. — Mezengui. 
 
 heurs and ils stand for les Hébrevr 
 
OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 41 T 
 
 CHAP. IX. 
 
 OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES, AMPHIBOLOGIES, AND 
 GALLICISMS. 
 
 We have chiefly to notice two incorrect modes of 
 construction, which are contrary to the principles laid 
 down in the preceding chapters— grammatical discordan- 
 ces, and amphibologies. 
 
 OF DISCORDANCES. 
 
 In general, there is a discordance in language, 
 when the words, which compose the various members 
 of a sentence, or period, do not agree with each other, 
 cither because their construction is contrary to analo- 
 gy, or because they bring together dissimilar ideas, be- 
 tween which the mind perceives* an opposition, or can 
 see no manner of affinity. 
 
 The following examples will serve to illustrate this ; 
 
 Notre réputation ne dépend pas des louanges qu'on nous donne, 
 mais des actions louables que nous faisons. 
 
 This sentence is not correct, because the first mem- 
 ber being negative, and the second affirmative, cannot 
 come under the government of the same verb. It 
 ought to be : 
 
 Notre réputation dépend, non Our reputation depends, not 
 des louanges qu'on nous upon the praises which are 
 donne, mais des actions bestowed on us, but upon the 
 louables que, &c. praiseworthy actions which we 
 
 perform. 
 
 But the most common discordances are those which 
 arise from the wrong use of tenses, as in this sentence : 
 
 Il regarde votre malheur comme une punition du peu de com- 
 plaisance que voiis avez eue pour lui, dans le temps qu'il vous 
 pria, &c. 
 
 Because the two preterits, definite and indefinite, can- 
 aot well agree together ; it should be ; 
 
US OF GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANT! 
 
 Que vous eûtes pour lui dans le temps qu'il vous pria. 
 There is discordance in this sentence : 
 On en ressentit autant de joie que d'une victoire complète dai. 
 un autre temps, 
 
 Because the verb cannot be understood after the que 
 which serves for the comparison, when that verb is t< 
 be in a different tense ; it should be : 
 
 Ou en ressentit autant de joie qu'on en aurait ressenti, &c. 
 
 This line of Racine, 
 
 Le flot, qui l'apporta, recule épouvanté, 
 is also incorrect, because îhe form of the present cannoi 
 associate with that of the preterit definite ; it should 
 have been : qui Va apporté. 
 
 OF AMPHIBOLOGIES. 
 
 Amphibology in language is when a sentence is so 
 constructed as to be susceptible of two different inter- 
 pretations : this must be carefully avoided. As W€ 
 speak only to be understood, perspicuity is the first ant- 
 most essential quality of language ; we should always 
 recollect that what is not clearly expressed in any lan- 
 guage, is no language at all. 
 
 Amphibologies are occasioned, 1. By the misuse of 
 — moods, and — tenses. 2. Of — the personal pronouns, 
 ?7, le, la, &c. 3. Of — the possessive pronouns, son. so. 
 «», (fee. 4. By giving a wrong place to nouns. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the first Kind. 
 
 U,u'ai-je fait, pour venir accabler en ces lieux 
 
 Un héros, sur qui seul j'ai pu tourner les yeux ? Raclve. 
 
 Pour venir forms an amphibology, because we do noi 
 know whether it relates to the person who speaks, or to 
 me person spoken to : it should have boon : Pou 
 wu$ veniez. 
 
OF GBAHXATICAL DISCORDANCES* 
 
 U5 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the second Kind, 
 
 César voulut premièrement surpasser Pompée ; les grande* 
 richesses de Crassus lui firent croire, qu'iZ pourrait partager in 
 gloire de ces deux grands hommes. 
 
 This sentence is faulty in its construction, because 
 rhe pronouns il and lui seem to relate to César, although 
 ?he sense obliges us to refer them to Crassus, 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Of an Ajnphibology of the third Kind. 
 
 Valère alla chez Léandre ; il y trouva son fils. 
 
 The pronoun son is ambiguous, because we do noi 
 know to which it relates, to Valère, or to Leandre. 
 
 EXAMPLE. 
 
 Of an Amphibology of the fourth Kind. 
 
 J'ai envoyé les lettres, que j'ai écrites, à la poste. 
 
 A la poste, thus placed, is equivocal, because we dc 
 lot know whether it is meant that the letters have been 
 written at the post-office, or sent to the post-office. 
 
 OF GALLICIS3IS. 
 
 We have distinguished in our " Grammaire Philoso- 
 unique et Littéraire," four sorts of gallicisms : we shall 
 only mention here those of construction. 
 
 The gallicisms of construction are, in general, irre- 
 gularities and deviations from the customary rules ot 
 syntax : there are some, however, which are mere 
 ellipses, and others which can only be attributed to tfee 
 caprice of custom. 
 
iôû ÔF G21AMÏÏATICAL DISCORDANCES. 
 
 General Principle. Every gallicism of construe 
 tion which obscures the meaning of the sentence, ought 
 to be condemned. Those only ought to be preserved 
 which do not impair perspicuity, by introducing irregu- 
 larity of construction, and which are, at the same time, 
 sanctioned by long practice. 
 
 According to this principle, this elliptic gallicism is 
 now rejected : 
 
 Et qu'ainsi ne soit, meaning : ce que je vous dis est si vrai que, 
 because it obscures the sentence. For instance : 
 
 J'étais dans ce jardin, et qu'ainsi ne soit, voilà une fleur que j ! } 
 ;ii cueillie, that is : Et pour preuve de cela, voilà une fleur, &c! 
 
 Molière and La Fontaine seem to have been the last 
 great writers that have used this expression. 
 
 One of the most common gallicisms is that in which 
 the impersonal verb il y a, is used for il est, il existe 
 These expressions : 
 
 Il y avait une fois un roi ; — il y a cent à parier contre un, 
 are gallicisms. There are two in the following sen- 
 fence : 
 
 U n'y a pas jusqu'aux enfans, Even children will meddle with 
 qui ne s'en mêlent, it. 
 
 The verb falloir forms a sort of gallicism with the 
 pronoun en, when it is conjugated like pronominal verbs 
 With the double pronouns, il se ; as, 
 
 Il s'en faut, il s'en fallait, &c. 
 It then means to be wanting, and when preceded by an 
 adverb of quantity, the first pronoun is omitted, as, 
 Peu s'en faut, tant s'en faut. 
 These several manners of using the verb falloir will 
 be found in the following sentences : 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 H s'en faut bien qu'il soit He is far from being so cltttr 
 
 aussi habile qu'il croit l'être, as he thinks. 
 
 Peu s'en est fallu qu'il n'ait He was rery near failing in 
 
 succombé dans cette entreprise, that undertaking. 
 
 Il fîe s'en est presque rien He teas as near as possible be 
 
 fallu qu'il n'ait 6tf tué ing kilted. 
 
Or GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES, 
 
 421 
 
 Vous dites qu'il s'en faut 
 ^ingt livres que la somme en- 
 tière n'y soit, mais vous vous 
 trompez, il ne peut pas s'en 
 falloir tant, 
 
 Son rhume est entièrement 
 guéri, ou peut s'en faut, 
 
 Que s'en est-il fallu que ces 
 deux amis ne se soient brouil- 
 lés ? " 
 
 Je ne suis pas content de 
 votre application à l'étude, tant 
 «'en faut, 
 
 Tant s'en faut que cette co- 
 médie me plaise, elle me sem- 
 ble au contraire détestable, 
 
 Il s'en fallait beaucoup que 
 je vous approuvasse dans cette 
 i irconstance, 
 
 The sentences : 
 
 You say it wants twenty 
 pounds to complete the sum, but 
 you are mistaken, it cannot 
 want so much. 
 
 His cold is entirely well, or 
 very near. 
 
 How near were these two 
 friends quarrelling ? 
 
 I am not satisfied with your 
 application to study, far from 
 it. 
 
 So far from this play pleas- 
 ing me, I think it insufferable. 
 
 I was far from approving 
 your conduct on that occasion. 
 
 Il n'est rien moins que généreux, 
 Vous avez beau dire, 
 
 1 ce qu'il me semble, 
 
 Nous voilà à nous lamenter, 
 
 Qu'est-ce que de nous, 
 
 are also gallicisms. 
 
 He is far from being generous. 
 
 You may say what you please ; 
 but, &c. 
 
 By what I can see, as the mat- 
 ter appears to me, &c. 
 
 We began to lament, here we . 
 are lamenting, crying, &c. 
 
 What wretched beings we are ! 
 &c. &c. 
 
 The use which is made of the preposition en, in 
 many sentences* is likewise another source of galli- 
 cisms ; some of this kind will be found in the following 
 expressions : 
 
 A qui en avez-vous ? 
 Ou en veut-il venir ? 
 
 Il lui en zeut, 
 
 Whom are you angry with ? 
 What does he aim at 1 what 
 
 wou'dhe beat ? 
 He has a quarrel with him, &c 
 
 The preposition en changes also, sometimes, the sig 
 nification of verbs, and then gives rise to gallicisms. 
 
 37 
 
±22 0> GRAMMATICAL DISCORDANCES. 
 
 The conjunction que produces as great a number uf 
 gallicisms ; as, 
 
 C'est une terrible passion que Gaming is a terrible passion. 
 
 le jeu, 
 
 C'est donc en vain que je tra- It is in vain then that I work. 
 
 vaille, 
 
 Ce n'est pas trop que cela, That is not too much. 
 
 Il n'est que d'avoir du courage, There is nothing like having 
 
 courage. 
 
 Many others will be found in the use which is made 
 of the prepositions à, de, dans, après, &c. but enough 
 lias been said on the subject. 
 
 Gallicisms are of very great use in the simple style* 
 therefore La Fontaine and Mad. de Sévigné abound in 
 lb em. The middling style has not so many, and the 
 solemn oratorical but few, and these even of a peculiar 
 nature. Only two examples of this kind, both taken 
 from the tragedy of Iphigenia, by Racine, will be here 
 iecl. 
 
 Avez-vous pu penser qu'au sang d'Agamemnon 
 Achille préférât une fille sans nom, 
 Qui de tout son destin ce qu'elle a pu comprendre. 
 C'est qu'elle sort d'un sang, &c. 
 
 ' Vnd . 
 
 Je, ne sais qui m'arrête et retient mon courroux, 
 Que par un prompt avis de tout 'ce qui se passe. 
 Je ne coure des dieux divulguer la menace. 
 
 In the first instance, qui is the subject, though win 
 dut relating to any verb ; and in the second, je ne sais 
 qui m'arrête que je ne coure, is contrary to the rules of 
 "ommon construction. " But," says Vaugelas, " these 
 extraordinary phrases, far from being vicious, possess 
 the more beauty, as they belong to a particular kind of 
 language," 
 
FREE EXERCISES. 
 i. 
 
 MADAME DE MAINTENON TO HER BROTHER. 
 
 We can only be 1 unhappy by our own fault ; this shall always 
 be my text, and my reply to your lamentations. Recollect 2. 
 my dear brother, the voyage to America, the misfortunes of ou: 
 father, of our infancy and our youth 3 ; and you will bless Pro- 
 vidence instead of murmuring against fortune. Ten years ago, 
 
 re both very far (below our present situation 4 ;) and our 
 hopes were so feeble 5, that we limited our wishes to an (income 
 of three thousand livres 6.) At present we have four times that 
 sum 7, and our desires ara not yet satisfied ! we enjoy the happy 
 mediocrity which you have so often extolled 8 ; let us be content 
 is 9 come to us, let us receive them from the hand 
 
 I. but let not our views be 10 too extravagantjfll. We 
 have (every thing necessary 12) and comfortable 13 ; all the rest 
 is avarice 14 ; all these desires of greatness spring from 15 a 
 »s heart. Your debts are all paid, and you may live elc 
 gastly 18, without contracting more 17. What have you to 
 Qesire ? must 18 schemes 19 of wealth and ambition occasion 20 
 the loss of your repc.se* and your health ? read the life of St. 
 Louis ; you will see how unequal 21 the greatness of this world 
 is to the desires of the _ human heart; God only can satisfv 
 them 22. I repeat it, you are only unhappy by your own fault. 
 Your uneasiness 23 destroys y oar health, which you ought to 
 preserve, if it were 24 only because I love you. Watch 25 your 
 temper 26: if you can render it less splenetic 27 and les« 
 gloomy, (you will have gained a great advantage 28.) This ir 
 not the work of reflection only ; exercise, amusement, and a re- 
 gular life, (are necessary for the purpose 29.) Yon cannot think 
 well (whilst your health is affected 30 ;) when the body is debili 
 tated 31, the mind is without vigour. Adieu ! write to me more 
 frequently, and in a style less gloomy. 
 
 1 On ne être. ..que. 2 Songer à. 3 The misfortunes of our in- 
 fancy and those of our, &c. 4 Du point où nous sommes au 
 5 Si peu de chose. (5 Trois mille livres de rente. 7 
 That sum, en... plus. 8 Have so often extolled, vanter si fort 
 ind-2. 9 Possessions, biens. 10 Let us not have views. ]1 Trop 
 vaste. 12 Le nécessaire. 13 Le commode. 14 Avarice , cupidité 
 15 Spring from, partir du vide de. 16 Délicieusement. 17 Con- 
 tracting more, en faire de nouvelles. 18 Must, faut-il que. 19 
 Projet. 20 Occasion, coûter, sub-1. 21 Unequal, au-dessous de 
 22 Satisfy tJiem, le rassasier. 23 Uneasiness, inquiétude pi. 24 
 }f it tare, quand ce être, cond-1. 25 Travailler sur. 26 Humeur 
 27 Bilieux. 28 Ce être un grand point de gagné. 29 II y faui 
 de. 20 Tant que vous se porter mal. Debilitated, dans Uabatte 
 
1JREK EXEHCISES- 
 
 II. 
 
 THE CONVERT. 
 
 AN EASTERN TALE. 
 
 Divine mercy 1 had brought a vicious man into a society ot 
 >ages, whose morals were holy and pure. He was affected by 
 their virtues ; it was not long 2 before 3 he imitated them and 
 !ost his old habits : he became just, sober, patient, laborious, and 
 benevolent. His deeds nobody could deny, but they were attri- 
 buted 4 to odious motives. They praised his good actions, with- 
 out loving his person : they would always judge him by what he 
 had been, not by what he was become. This injustice filled him 
 with grief ; he shed tears in the bosom of an ancient sage, more 
 just and more humane than the others. " O my son," said the 
 old man to him, " thou art better than thy reputation ; be thankful 
 • ; to God for it. Happy the man who can say, my enemies and 
 ' my rivals censure in me vices cf which I am not guilty. What 
 • matters 5 it, if thou art good, that men persecute thee as wick- 
 " ed ? Hast thou not, to comfort thee, the two best witnesses of 
 11 thy actions, God and thy conscience ?" Saint-Lambert. 
 
 Mr. de Montausier has written a letter to Monseigneur upon 
 the taking of Philipsbourgh, which very much pleases me. 
 •'Monseigneur, I do not compliment you on the capture of Phi- 
 •' lipsbourg : you had a good army, bombs, cannon, and Vauban : 
 " neither shall Ï compliment you upon your valour : for that h 
 11 an hereditary virtue in your family. But I rejoice that you 
 " are liberal, generous, humane, and that you know how to 
 il recompense the services of those who behave well : it is foi 
 bjs that I congratulate you." Sevigne. 
 
 III. 
 THE GOOD MINISTER. 
 
 AN EASTERN TALE. 
 
 The great Aaron Raschild began to suspect that his vizier 
 Qiafar was not deserving of the confidence which he had reposed 
 in him. The women of Aaron, the inhabitants of Bagdad, the 
 courtiers, the dervises, censured the vizier with bitterness. The 
 calif loved Giafar ; he would not condemn him upon the clamours 
 of the city and the court : he visited his empire ; every where 
 he saw the land well cultivated, the country smiling, the cottages 
 opulent, the useful arts honoured, and youth full of gaiety. He 
 visited his fortified cities and sea-ports, he saw numerous ships 
 
 1 Miséricorde. 2 Ne pas tarder. 3 A înf-1. 4 On donne 
 «ip? moiifr. 5 Importer 
 
1KEE EXERCISES. 42£ 
 
 which threatened the coasts of Africa and of Asia ; lie saw war 
 riors disciplined and content ; these warriors, the seamen and the 
 peasantry, exclaimed : " O God, pour thy blessings upon the 
 ' faithful, by giving them a calif like Aaron, and a vizier like 
 • Giafar." The calif, affected by these exclamations, enters s 
 mosque, falls upon his knees, and cries out : " Great God, I re 
 ' turn thee thanks ; thou hast given me a vizier of whom m^ 
 '• courtiers speak ill, and my people speak well." 
 
 Saint-Lambert. 
 
 Providence conducts us with so much goodness through the 
 different periods of our life', that we (do not perceive our progrès? 
 I.) This loss takes place gently 2, it is imperceptible, it is the 
 shadow of the sun-dial whose motion we do not see. If,, at twen 
 iy years of age, we could see 3 in a mirror, the face we shall have 
 at three-scor.e, we (should be shocked at the contrast 4,) and 
 terrified at our own figure; but it Is day by day we advance : 
 we are to-day as we were yesterday, and shall be to-morrow a: 
 we are to-day ; so we go forward -without perceiving it, and till* 
 .is a miracle of that Providence whom i adore. Sevigne. 
 
 IV. 
 THE MAGNIFICENT PROSPECT, 
 
 This beautiful house was on the declivity of a hill, fron 
 v hence you beheld the sea, sometimes clear and smooth as glass 
 sometimes idly 1 irritated against the rocks on which it broke 
 he! lowing 2 and swelling its waves like mountains. On anothe: 
 si$e was seen a river, in which were islands bordered with 
 blooming limes, and lofty poplar?, which raised their proud heads 
 to the very clouds. The several channels, which formed those 
 islands, seemed sporting 3 in the plain. Some rolled their limpid 
 waters with rapidity ; some had a peaceful and still course ; 
 others, by long windings, ran back again, to reascend as it were 
 io their source, and seemed not to have power to leave these en 
 chanting borders. At a distance were seen hills and mountains, 
 which were lost in the clouds, and fonned, by their fantastic 
 figure, as delightful a horizon (as the eye could wish to behold 4.) 
 The neighbouring mountains were covered with verdant (vint 
 branches, 5) hanging in festoons ; the grapes, brighter than pur 
 pie. couid not conceal themselves under the leaves, and the 
 vine 6 was overloaded with its fruit. The fig, the olive, the 
 pomegranate, and all other trees, overspread the plain, and macte 
 it one'large garden. Fenelon. 
 
 1 Ne le sentir presque pas. 2 Va doucement. 3 On nous faire 
 voir. 4 Tomber à la renverse. 
 
 1 Follement. 2 En gémir. 3 Se jouer, i A souhait ponr II 
 nteisirde. 5 Pampre, m G Vigne, f. 
 
 37* 
 
I 'JO FKEÇ £XEfiCI£ 
 
 Long hopes wear out 7 joy, as long illness wears out pain. 
 All philosophic systems are only good when one (has no u~c 
 for them 8.) Sevigxe. 
 
 A GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 
 
 With what magnificence docs nature shine 1 upon earth ! A 
 pure light, extending from east to west, gilds successively th< 
 two hemispheres of this globe ; an element transparent and light, 
 surrounds it ; a gentle fecundating heat animates, gives being 2 
 to the seeds of life ; salubrious running streams contribute to 
 their preservation and growth ; eminences diversified over the 
 level land, arrest the vapours of the air, make these springs in- 
 exhaustible and always new ; immense cavities made to receive 
 'hem, divide the continents. The extent of the sea is as great a^ 
 hat of the earth; it is not a cold, barren element ; it is a new 
 empire, as rich, as populous as the first. The finger of God ha^ 
 •narked their boundaries. 
 
 The earth, rising above the level of the sea, is secure 3 from 
 Us eruptions : its surface, enamelled with flowers, adorned with 
 ever-springing verdure, peopled with thousands and thousand- 
 of species of dilferent animals, is a place of rest, a delightful 
 abode, where man, placed in order to second nature, presides 
 over all beings. The only ope among them all, capable oi 
 knowing and worthy of admiring, God has made him spectator 
 of the universe, and a witness of his wonders. The divine spark 
 with which he is animated, enables him to participate in the di 
 vine mysteries ; it is by this light that he thinks and reflects ; b\ 
 it he sees and reads in the book of the universe, as in a copy o; 
 the Deity. 
 
 Nature is the exterior throne of the divine Majesty ; the mar 
 who contemplates, who studies it, rises by degrees to the inte 
 rior throne of Omnipotence. Made to adore the Creator, the 
 vassal of heaven, sovereign of the earth, he ennobles, peoples 
 enriches it; he establishes among living beings, order, subordina 
 tion, harmony ; he embellishes nature herself; he cultivates, ex 
 tends, and polishes it; lops off the thistle and the briar, and mul 
 iplies the grape and the rose. Buffojt», 
 
 VI. " 
 
 ANOTHER GENERAL VIEW OF NATURE. 
 
 Trees, shrubs, and plants, are the ornaments and clothing 1 of 
 he earth. Nothing is so melancholy 2 as the prospect of a cotm 
 
 7 User. 8 N'en avoir que faire. 
 
 1 Ne briller pas. 2 Faire écloire, 3 A l'abri de. 
 
 1 Vêtement. 2 Triste. 
 
FïlKE EXERCISER. 421 
 
 'ay naked and bare 3, exhibiting to the eye nothing but stones, 
 mud, and sand. But, vivified by nature, and clad 4 in its nup- 
 tial robe, amidst the course of streams and the sieging of birds 4 . 
 the earth presents to man, in the harmony of the three kingdoms^ 
 a spectacle full of life, of interest and charms, the only spectacle 
 in the world of which his eyes and heart are never weary 5. 
 
 The more a (contemplative man's soul is fraught with sensi 
 bility 6,) the more he yields to the extacies which this harmony 
 produces in him. A soft and deep melancholy then takes pos- 
 session of his senses, and in an intoxication of delight, he loses 
 himself in the immensity of that beautiful system, with which he 
 feels himself identified/ Then every particular object escape* 
 him, he sees and feels nothing but in the whole. Some circum- 
 stance must contract his ideas, and circumscribe his imagination, 
 before 7 he can observe by parcels that universe which he wa i 
 endeavouring to embrace. J. J. Rousseau. 
 
 VII. 
 
 CULTIVATED NATURE. 
 
 How beautiful is cultivated nature! by the labours of man, 
 how brilliant it is, and how pompously adorned ! He himseh 
 is its chief ornament, its noblest pan ; by multiplying himself, 
 he multiplies the most precious germ ; she also seems to mut 
 îiply with him : by his art, he (brings forth to view 1) all thai 
 she concealed 2 in her bosom. How many unknown treasures : 
 What new riches! Flowers, fruits, seeds brought to perfection, 
 multiplied to infinity; the useful species of animals transport 
 ed, propagated, increased without number; the noxious spe- 
 cies reduced, confined, banished ; gold, and iron more neces- 
 sary than gold, extracted from the bowels of the earth ; torrents 
 confined 3, rivers directed, contracted 4 ; the sea itself subjected 
 explored 5, crossed, from one hemisphere to the other ; the eartfi 
 accessible in every part, and every where rendered equally 
 cheerful and fruitful : in the vallies, delightful meadows ; in 
 the plains, rich pastures and still richer harvests ; hills covered 
 with vines and fruits:* their summits crowned with useful trees 
 and young forests ; deserts changed into cities inhabited by an 
 immense population, which, continually circulating, spreads itseh 
 from these centres to their extremities ; roads opened and fre- 
 quented, communications established every where, as so many 
 witnesses of the strength and union of society ; a thousand other 
 monuments of power and glory sufficiently demonstrate that 
 man, possessing dominion over the earth, has changed, renewed 
 the whole of its surface, and that, at all times, he snares the em- , 
 pire of it with nature. 
 
 3 Pelé. 4 Revêtu. 5 Se lasser. 6 Contemplateur avoir l'âraë.. 
 sensible. 7 Pour qu'il. 
 
 1, Mettre au jour. 2 Receler. 3 Contenu» 4 Resserra, G 
 Reconnu. 
 
FREE EXEXC: 
 
 VIII. 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 However, man only reigns by right of conquest; lie rather 
 enjoys than possesses, and he can" preserve only by means of eon 
 unual labour. If this ceases, every thing droops, every thin- 
 declines, every thing changes, and again returns 1 under the 
 hand of nature ; she reassumes her rights, erases the work ol 
 man, covers with dust and moss his most pompous monuments, 
 destroys them in time, and leaves him nothing but the regret ol 
 having lost, through his fault, what his ancestors had conquered 
 by their labours. Those times, in which man loses his dominion, 
 .hose barbarous 2 ages, during which every thing is seen to pe- 
 rish, are always preceded by war, and accompanied by scarcity 
 and depopulation. Man, who can do nothing but by number, 
 who is strong only by union, who can be happy oniy by peace, h 
 
 - and to fight foi 
 
 " ' am- 
 huma- 
 ilty, turns all his strength against himself, seeks mutual destruction 
 actually 3 destroys himself ; and, after these periods of blood ami 
 carnage, when the smoke of glory has vanished, he contemplates 
 with a sad eye, the earth wasted, the arts buried, nations scattered. 
 the people weakened, his own happineis ruined, and his real 
 jower annihilated. 
 
 wiio is strong oniy oy union, wiiu can ue u&ppy umy uy |wqui 
 mad enough to arm himself for his misery, and to fight for 
 ruin. Impelled by an insatiable thirst of having, blinded by ï 
 bhion still more insatiable, he renounces all the feelings of hui 
 
 IX. 
 
 INVOCATION TO THE GOD OF NATURE! 
 
 Almighty God ! whose presence alone supports nature, and 
 i.nintains the harmony of the laws of the universe : Thou, who 
 
 ^rom the immoveable throne of the empyrean, seest the celes 
 spheres roll under thy fee., without shock or confusion : who. 
 ,rom the bosom of repose, reproducest every moment their im 
 raense movements, and alone governest, in profound peace, thai 
 infinite number of heavens and worlds ; restore, restore at length 
 tranquillity to the agitated earth ! let it be silent at thy voice . 
 
 "*tet discord and war cease their proud clamours ! God of good- 
 ness, author of all beings, thy paternal eye takes in J all the ob 
 jecta of the creation; but man is thy chosen being; thou has: 
 illumined 2 his soul with a ray of thy immortal light : complete 
 the measure of thy kindness by penetrating his heart with a ray 
 of thy love : this divine sentiment, diffusing itself every where 
 .\ ill reconcile opposite natures ; man will no longer dread the 
 jht of man ; his hand will no longer wield tiîe murderous 
 •13; the. devouring flames of war will no longer dry up 4 the 
 
 i Rentrer. 2 De barbaric 3 En effet. 
 
 iser 2 Eclairer 3 Le fer am a 4 Tarir. 
 
FKEfc EXEKCISES, 429 
 
 Sources of population : the human species, now weakened, muti 
 fated, mowed down in the blossom, will spring anew 5 and 
 multiply without number ; nature, overwhelmed under the weight 
 of scourges 6, will soon re-assume, with a new life, its former 
 t; uitfulness ; and we, beneficent God, will second it, we will cul- 
 tivate it, we will contemplate it incessantly, that we may even 
 moment offer thee a new tribute of gratitude and admiration. 
 
 Buffos 1 . 
 
 X. 
 
 Happy they who are disgusted with 1 turbulent pleasures, and 
 know how to'be contented 2 with the sweets of an innocent life . 
 Happy they who delight in being instructed 3, and who take a 
 pleasure 4 in storing their minds with knowledge ! Wherever 
 adverse fortune may throw them, they always carry entertain- 
 ment with them ; and the disquiet which preys upon others, even 
 in the midst of pleasures, is unknown to those Avho can employ 
 themselves in reading. Happy they who love to read, and are 
 not like me deprived of the ability. As these thoughts were 
 passing in my mind, I went into a gloomy forest, where I imme- 
 diately perceived an old man, holding a book in his hand. The 
 forehead of this sage was broad, bald, and a little wrinkled : a 
 white beard hung down to his girdle ; his stature was tall and 
 majestic ; his complexion still fresh and ruddy, his eyes lively 
 and piercing, his voice sweet, his words plain and charming. Î 
 never saw so venerable an old man. He was a priest of Apollo, 
 and officiated 5 in a marble temple, which the kings of Egypt, 
 had dedicated to that God in this forest. The book which he 
 held in his hand was a collection of hymns in honour of the 
 Gods. He accosted me in a friendly manner ; and we discoursed 
 together. He related things past so well, that they seemed 
 present, and yet with such brevity, that his account, never tired 
 me. He foresaw the future by his profound knowledge, which 
 made him know men and the designs of which they are capable. 
 With all this wisdom he was cheerful and complaisant, and the 
 sprightliest youth has not so many graces as this man had at so 
 advanced an age. He accordingly loved young men when they 
 were teachable 6, and had a taste for study and virtue. 
 
 Fenelojî. 
 
 XL 
 
 THOUGHTS ON POETRY. 
 
 Wherever I went, I found that poetry was considered as the 
 
 5 Germer de nouveau. 6 Fléau. 
 
 1 Se dégoûter de. 2 Se contenter de. 3 S'instruire. 4 Se 
 plaire. 5 Servir. 6 Docile. 
 
•130 FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 (highest learning 1) and regarded with a veneration (somewha; 
 approaching to 2,) that which men would pay to angelic nature. 
 
 It yet fills me with wonder that, in almost all countries, thf 
 most ancient poets are considered as the best; whether (it bf 
 that 3) every kind of knowledge is an acquisition gradually at 
 tained, and poetry is a gift conferred at once; or that the firs- 
 poetry of every nation surprised them as a novelty, and retainen 
 the credit by consent, which it received by accident at first ; oi 
 whether, as the province 4 of poetry is to describe nature and 
 passion, which are always the same, the first writers (took pos- 
 session 5) of (the most striking objects for description 6,) and 
 (the most probable occurrences for fiction 7,) and left nothing to 
 those that followed them, but transcription 8 of the same event?, 
 and new combinations 9 of the same images. Whatever be th« 
 reasou, it is commonly observed, that the early writers are in 
 possession of nature, and their followers 10 of art : that the first 
 excel in strength and invention, and the latter in elegance and 
 refinement. 
 
 I was desirous to add my name to this illustrious fraternity 11. 
 1 read all the poets of Persia and Arabia, and was able to repeal 
 by memory the volumes that are suspended in the mosque oi 
 Mecca. But I soon found that no man was ever great by imita 
 don. My desire of excellence 12 impelled 13 me to transfer 14 
 my attention to nature and to life 15. Nature was to be my sub 
 ject, and men to be my auditors : I could never describe what 1 
 had not seen ; I could not hope (to move those with delight or 
 terror 16) whose interests and opinions 1 did not understand 17. 
 
 XII. 
 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 Being now resolved to be a poet, I saw every thing (with o 
 new purpose 18 ; ; my sphere of attention was suddenly magni 
 iied : no kind of knowledge (was to be overlooked 19.) I ranged 
 mountains and deserts for 20 images and resemblances, and 
 /pictured upon my mind 21) every tree of the forest and flowes 
 of the valley. 1 observed with equal care the crags of the rod 
 and the pinnacles of the palace. Sometimes I wandered alon t L, 
 •he mazes ot the rivulet, and sometimes watched the changes ot 
 the summer-douds. To a poet nothing can be useless. What 
 
 1 Partie la plus sublime de la littérature. 2 Qui tenoit de. 3 
 Cela vienne de ce que. 4 But, 5. S'emparer. 6 Objets qui four- 
 nis aient les plus riches descriptions. 7 Fvénemens qui prêtaient 
 le plus à la fiction. 8 De copier. 9 Faire de nouvelles combi- 
 naisons. 10 Successeurs 11 Famille. 12 Exceller. 13 En 
 gager. 11 Reporter. ..sur. 15 Tableau de la vie. 16 Réveille: 
 te plaisir ou la terreur dans ceux. 17 Ne connaître ni. 18 Sou- 
 un nouveau jour. 19 Je ne devais négliger. 20. Pour recueille 1 
 M Pénétrer mon esprit du i 
 
FREE EXERCISES. 
 
 3 ver is beautiful, and whatever is dreadful, must be familiar to 
 his imagination : he must (be conversant 22) with all that (is 
 awfully vast or elegantly little 23.) The plants of the garden, 
 ihe animals of the wood, the minerals of the earth, and the me- 
 teors of the sky, must all concur to store his mind with inex- 
 haustible variety : for every idea is useful for the (enforcement 
 or decoration 24) of moral or religious truth ;.andhe who knows 
 most, will have most power 25 of diversifying his scenes 26, and 
 gratifying his reader with remote allusions and unexpected in- 
 struction. 
 
 All the appearances of nature I was, tht refore, careful to study 
 27, and every country which I have surveyed has contributed 
 something to my poetical powers. 
 
 In so wide a survey, interrupted the prince, you must surely 
 have left much unobserved. I have lived, till now, within the 
 circuit of these mountains, and yet cannot walk abroad without 
 the sight of something which I had never beheld before, or never 
 heeded 28. 
 
 XÏÏL 
 
 THE SAME SUBJECT CONTINUED. 
 
 The business of a poet, said Imlac, is to examine, not the indi= 
 vidual, but the species ; to remark general properties and (large 
 appearances 29 :) he does not number the streaks of the tulip, or 
 describe the different shades in the verdure of the forest. He i* 
 f o exhibit, in his portraits of nature, such prominent and striking 
 features, as 30 recalthe original to every mind ; and must neglect 
 ihe minuter discriminations 31, which one may have remarked 
 and another neglected, for those" characteristics 32 which are 
 alike obvious 33 to vigilance 34 and carelessness 35. 
 
 But the knowledge of nature is only half 36 the task of a poet : 
 he must be acquainted likewise with all the modes 37 of life. 
 His character requires that he estimate 38 the happiness and 
 misery of every condition : observe the power of all the passions, 
 m all their combinations, and trace the changes 39 of the human 
 mind, as they are modified by various institutions, and acciden- 
 tal influences of climate or custom : from the sprightliness of 
 infancy to the despondence of decrepitude. He must divest 
 mmself 40 of the prejudices of his age or country ; he must 
 consider right and wrong 41 in their abstracted and invariable 
 state 42 ; he must disregard present laws and opinions, and rise 
 
 22 Bien connaître. 23 Etonne par sa grandeur, ou charme par 
 son élégante petitesse. 24 Fortifier, ou embellir. 25 Ressources 
 pour 26 Tableau. 27 Etudier avec soin toutes les. &c. 28 Re- 
 marquer. 29 Considérer les objets en grand. 30 De ces traits 
 saillans et frappans qui, &c. 31 Ces petits détails. 32 Pour 
 s'appliquer à caractériser, «fee. <fec. 33 Frappe également. 34 
 Œil observateur. 35 Esprit insouciant 36 The half of. 37 
 Tous les différens aspects 38 Apprécier. 39 Suivre les vicis- 
 situdes. 40 Se dépouiller. 41 Ce qui est juste ou injuste, 42 
 
l33 FBEÊ EXERCISES. 
 
 to general and transcendent truths, which will always be the 
 same ; he must, therefore, (content himself with the slow progress 
 of his name 43,) contemn the applause of his own time, and 
 oommit his claims to the justice of posterity. He must write as 
 '.he interpreter of nature, and the legislator of mankind, and con- 
 sider himself as presiding 44 over the thoughts and manners of 
 future generations," as a being superior to time and place. 
 
 His labour is not yet at an end : he must know many languages, 
 md many sciences ; and, that his style may be worthy of his 
 •noughts, he must, by incessant practice, familiarize himself to 
 delicacy of speech and grace of harmony. S. Johnson. 
 
 xïv; 
 
 First follow nature, and your judgment frame, 
 By her just standard, which is still the same : 
 Unerring nature, still divinely bright, 
 One clear, unchanged, and universal light, 
 Life, force, and beauty, must to all impart ; • 1 
 At once the source, and end, and test of art. 2 
 Art, from that fund, each just supply provides ; 
 Works without show, and without pomp presides ; 
 In some fair body thus th' informing soul, 
 With spirits feeds, with vigour fills the whole ; 
 Each motion guides, and every nerve sustains 
 Itself unseen, but in th' effect remains. 
 Some, to whom heav'n in wit has been profuse, 
 Want as much more to turn it to its use : 
 For wit and judgment often are at strife, 
 Tho' meant each other's aid, like man and, wife. 4 
 'Tis more to guide, than spur the muse's steed, 
 Restrain his fury, than provoke his speed : ' 
 The winged courser, like a gen'rous norse, 
 Shows most true mettle, when you check its course. 6 
 Pope. 
 
 \ I ^traction faite de ces divers prgugés! 43 Se résigner à voir 
 
 ^on nom percer difficilement. 44 Influer. 
 
 1 Light, clear, immutable, and universal nature, which never 
 i, and shines always with a divine splendour, must impart to all 
 
 >he ilo<:<. life, force, and beauty. 2 She is at once the source, Set. 
 
 i in a fair body, unseen itself, but always sensible by its ef. 
 
 cts, the soul continually acting, feeds the whole with spirits, fills 
 
 it with vigour, guides every motion of it, and sustains every nerve 
 
 4 Some to whom heaven has given wit with profusion, want a-: 
 much yet to know the use they ought to make of it ; for wit and 
 judgment, though made, like man and wife, to aid each other 
 often in opposition. 
 
 5 It is more difficult to guide than spur the courser of the mil- 
 and to restrain its ardour than provoke its impetuosity. 
 
 6 Tlir- winged courser is like a generous horse : the more \V. 
 >id course ,the more it shows unconquerable 
 
EXAMPLES OF PHRASES 
 
 ON THE 
 
 PRINCIPAL DIFFICULTIES OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE 
 
 Sur les Collectifs Partitifs. 
 
 Lu plupart des fruits verts sont d/un 
 goût austère. 
 
 La plupart des gens ne se conduisent que 
 oar intérêt. 
 
 La plupart du monde se trompe. 
 
 Il méprise par philosophie les honneurs, 
 qui la plupart du monde recherche. 
 
 Il devait me fournir tant d'arbres ; mais 
 .'en ai rejeté la moitié qui ne- valait rien. 
 
 Un grand nombre de spectators ajou- 
 tait à la beauté du spectacle. 
 
 Tout sorte de livres ne sont pas égalt- 
 i:nt bons. 
 
 Beaucoup de personnes se sont présentée:. 
 
 Sien des personnes se font des principes 
 
 t leur fantaisie. 
 
 Ttt quelques Verbes qu'on ne peut con- 
 juguer avec Avoir sans faire des bar- 
 barismes. 
 
 Il lui est échu une succession du chef de 
 une. 
 
 Il »st bien déchu de son crédit. 
 
 Ne sommes-nous pas convenus du priv '.- 
 
 JY'est-ii pas intervenu dans cette affaire , 
 amine il Pavait promis ? 
 
 Il est survenu à l'improvisle. 
 
 Lu neige, qui est tombée ce matin, a adou- 
 i le temps. 
 
 7.ue de neige il est tombé ce matin : 
 
 Voûtes les dents lui sont tombées. 
 '£ propos n'est pas tombé à terre. 
 
 tftes-vous allé voir votre ami " 
 
 Us sont arrivés à midi et sont repartis de 
 suite. 
 
 Ces fleurs sont à peine écluses. 
 
 Ils est né de parens vertueux, qui n'ont 
 ien négligé pour son éducation. 
 
 Mademoiselle votre sœur est-elle rentrée ? 
 
 Madame votre mère n'est-elle pas encore 
 cnue ? 
 
 Sur les Mots de Quantité* 
 
 // a beaucoup d'esprit, mais encore plus 
 i'amow'propre. 
 
 Il a assez d'urgent pour ses menus nlal- 
 
 II y avait bUn du monde à l'Opéra. 
 
 Il y avait hier au Parzjz ne sais combien 
 le gens. 
 
 H boit autant d'eau que de vin. 
 
 Il a tant d'ami» qu'il ne manquera de 
 -itn. 
 
 Personne n'y a plus d'intérêt que lui. 
 
 fl n'a peu plus cPesprit qu'il n'en faut. 
 
 Trop de hisir perd souvent la jeunesse. 
 
 J'y ai Itien mêins d'intérêt que vou s. 
 
 3wr le» Pronoms Personnels. 
 $oro et te retire. 
 
 n 'j«rs vite et ne t'amuse pvint. 
 
 On the Collective Partitives. 
 The greater part of green fruit is of t 
 harsh taste. 
 Most people are guided only by interest, 
 
 The greater part of mankind live in e; 
 ror. 
 
 As a true philosopher he despises thos< 
 honours which mankind in general court. 
 
 He was to fnrnish me so many trees, bu 
 I refused half of them which were good fc 
 nothing. 
 
 A considerable number of spectators at 
 ded to the splendour of the scene. 
 
 Every kind of books are not equally gou 
 
 Many people presented themselves. 
 
 Many persons form principles to their 
 selves, according to their fancy. 
 Gn some Verbs xohick cannot be conjugiiiu 
 
 with the verb Avoir, zeithout making cu: 
 
 bar ous phrases. 
 
 An estate fell to him in right of his wiff 
 
 He has lost much of his credit. 
 
 Have we not agreed about the price ? 
 
 Did be not interfere in that affair as h« 
 had promised ? 
 
 He came up unawares. 
 
 The snow which fell this morning tia : 
 softened the weather. 
 
 How much snow bas fallen this mornïr g 
 
 All his teeth have fallen out. 
 
 That remark was not allowed to escape 
 
 Have you been to see your friend ? 
 
 They arrived at noon and set out aga:< 
 immediately. 
 
 These flowers are scarcely blown. 
 
 He was born of virtuous parents, who bf 
 stowed on him the best education. 
 
 Is your sister returned ? 
 
 Is not your mother come yet ? 
 
 On Words of Quantity. 
 He has a great deal of sense, but stir 
 more vanity. 
 He has sufficient pocket-money. 
 
 There were a great many people at tL- 
 Opera. 
 
 There were I do not know how man ^ 
 people in the Park yesterday. 
 
 He drinks as much water as wine. 
 
 He has so many friends that he will war.; 
 for nothing. 
 
 Nobody has more interest there than be. 
 
 He is not overburdened with sense. 
 
 Too much leisure time is frequently tkt 
 destruction of youtfa. 
 
 I am much less concer ned in it titan y«: 
 On the Personal Pronouns. 
 
 Go out and retire, withdraw 
 
 Go quick and do not loiter* 
 
i34 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 Il dit aujourd'hui une chose et demain il 
 le démentira. 
 
 Il t'est démenti lui-même. 
 
 La jeunesse est naturellement emportée ; 
 •lie a besoin de quelque entrave qui la re- 
 tienne. 
 
 Il ne peut voir personne dans la prospé- 
 rité sans lui porter envie. 
 
 Ce que vous me dites est une énigme pour 
 *noi. 
 
 C'est un homme extrême en tout ', il aime 
 •t il hait avec fureur. 
 
 Sivous n'y avez jamais été, je vous y mê- 
 lerai. 
 
 Je Vai connu doux et modeste ; il s'est 
 bien gâté dans le commerce de ses nouveaux 
 imis. 
 
 Elle n'est pas encore revenue du saisisse* 
 •nent, que lui causa cette nouvelle. 
 
 Il menace de l'exterminer, lui et toute sa 
 -ace. 
 
 Si vous n'avez que faire de ce livre-là.prê- 
 :ez-le-moi. 
 
 Je lui avais envoyé un diamant, il l'a re- 
 *usi,je le lui ai renvoyé. 
 
 Il apprend facilement et oublie de même. 
 
 Je lui pardonne facilement d'avoir voulu 
 se faire auteur ; mais je ne saurais lui par- 
 donner toutes les puérilités dont il a farci 
 %on livre. 
 
 Je me plains à vous de voue même. 
 
 Si vous ne voulez pas être pour lui t au 
 moins ne soyez pas contre. 
 
 Quand sera-ce que vous viendrez nous 
 
 loir? ' 
 
 Sur soi, lui, soi-même et lui-même. 
 
 Quand on a pour soi le témoignage de sa 
 ïonscicncc, on est bien fort. 
 
 L'estime de toute la terre ne sert de rien 
 à un homme qui n'a pas h témoignage de 
 sa conscience pour lui. 
 
 Un homme fait mille fautes, parce qu'il 
 ne fait point de réflexions sur lui. 
 
 On fait mille fautes, quand on ne fait 
 aucune réflexion sur soi. 
 
 Il aime mieux dire du mal de lui, que de 
 'l'en point parler. 
 
 L'égoïstt aimera mieux dire du mal de 
 toi, que de n'en point parler. 
 
 On a souvent besoin d'un plus petit que 
 tot. 
 
 Un prince a souvent besoin de beaucoup 
 le gens plus petits que lui. 
 
 C'est un bon moyen de s'élever soi-même, 
 jue d'exalter ses pareils ; et un homme 
 tdroit s'élève ainsi lui-même. 
 
 Sur les Pronoms Relatifs. 
 
 // n'y a rien de si capable d'ejféminer le 
 iourage, que ^oisiveté et les délice*. 
 
 Il faut empêcher que la division, qui est 
 dans cette famille, n'éclate. 
 
 Il y a bien des événement que l'on mn- 
 pose se passer pendmnt /et entr'actes. 
 
 Je le trouvai qui s'habillait. 
 
 <^ui le tirera de cet emjtaxrai. . 
 i'une grande miser* • 
 
 He advances a thing to-day, and will con 
 tradict himself to-morrow. 
 
 He has contradicted himself. 
 
 Youth is naturally hasty, it needs some 
 check to restrain it. 
 
 He can see the prosperity of nobody with 
 out envying them. 
 
 What you tell me is a perfect riddle t' - 
 me. 
 
 He is a man that carries every thing to 
 excess *, he is alike violent in Ids love and 
 in his hatred. 
 
 If you have never been there, I will t 
 you. 
 
 I knew him when he was mild and mo 
 dest 5 he has been much corrupted by asso 
 dating with his new acquaintances. 
 
 She is not yet recovered from tfie con 
 Sternation into which that intelligence thren 
 her. 
 
 He threatens to exterminate him an 
 hi3 family. 
 
 If you have done with this booh, lend it 
 me. 
 
 I had sent him a diamond, and he- refus 
 ed it, but I sent him it back again. 
 
 He learns easily and forgets the same. 
 
 I can easily pardon him for having at 
 tempted to turn author ; but I cannot par 
 don him all the absurdities with which h< 
 has filled his book. 
 
 I complain to you of yourself. 
 
 If you will not be for him, at lea ' 
 not be against him. 
 
 When will you come to see us ? 
 
 On soi, lui, soi-même and hii-wJmc. 
 
 The approbation of our conscience in 
 parts great courage. 
 
 The good opinion of the whole world i 
 of no use to a man who has not the appro 
 bation of his own conscience. 
 
 A man commits a thousand faults, because 
 he does not reflect on future consequences. 
 
 We commit a thousand faults, when w<* 
 neglect to reflect on ourselves. 
 
 He had rather speak ill of himself thai 
 not talk of himself at all. 
 
 The egotist prefers speaking ill of him- 
 self rather than not be the subject of bis 
 own conversation. 
 
 We frequently want the assistance of or.? 
 who is below ourselves. 
 
 A prince frequently needs the a.^istanc-. 
 of many persons inferior to himself. 
 
 Tt is an excellent method of exalting our 
 selves to exalt our equals, and a man of ad 
 dress by this means exalts himself. 
 
 On the Relative t ronounx. 
 
 Nothing is so calculated to enervate the 
 mind as idleness and pleasure. . 
 
 The dissention in that family must he 
 prevented from becoming public. 
 
 There are many events in a piece which 
 are supposed to happen between the acts. 
 
 I found him dressing. 
 
 Whoever extricates him from this difU 
 cuHy will relieve him from much dxstr - 
 
PHRASES OK SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 436 
 
 Ceux là sont xxéritablement heureux, qui 
 sroient Vêtre. 
 
 Il n'v a que la vertu, qui puisse rendre 
 un homme heureux en cette vie. 
 
 Il n'y a règle si générale, qui n'ait son 
 exception. 
 
 C'est un orateur qui ss possède et qui ne 
 te trouble jamais. 
 
 Il n'y a pas dans le cœur humain de repu 
 que Dieu ne connaisse. 
 
 ~ On n'a trouvé que quelques fragmens du 
 grand ouvrage çu 1 »'/ avait promis. 
 
 La faute, que vous avez faite, est plus im- 
 portante que vous ne pens tz. 
 
 Lts premières demarches qu'on fait dans 
 £ monde, ont beaucoup d'influence sur le 
 este de la vie. 
 
 Cette farce est une des plus visibles qu'on 
 ait encore vues. 
 
 Amassez-vous des trésors que les vers et 
 .a rouille ne puissent point gâter, tt que 
 les voleurs ne puissent point dérober. 
 
 L'incertitude, où nous sommes de ce qui 
 deit arriver, fait que nous ne saurions pren- 
 dre des mesures justes. 
 
 Je m'étonne qu'il ne voie pas le danger 
 . est. 
 
 L'homme dont vous parlez, nest plus izi. 
 
 Celai •*,: <yi je tiens cette nouvelle ne 
 : jus est pas connu. 
 
 Celui, à qui ce beau château appartient 
 fis Vhabite presque jamais 
 
 Ce sont des événemens auxquels il faut 
 bien se soumettre. 
 
 Cest ce à quoi veus ne pensez guère. 
 ' Sur les Pronoms Démonstratifs. 
 
 JVe point reconnaître la divinité, c'est rt- 
 -\oncer à toutes les lumières de la raison. 
 
 Mentir, c'est mépriser Dieu et craindre 
 les hommes. 
 
 H y a des épidémies morales, et ce sont 
 us plus dangereuses. 
 
 Je crois oie ce que vous dites est bien élo- 
 igné de ce que vous pensez. 
 
 Les hommes n'aiment ordinairement que 
 ceux qui lesjlatttnt. 
 
 Celui qui persuade à un autre de faire 
 un crime, n'est guère moins coupable que 
 -clui qui le commet. 
 
 Penser ainsi, c'est s'aveugler soi-même. 
 
 Qu'on rapporte de lui est inconcevable. 
 
 Ce quintajjlige, c'est devoir le triomphe 
 du crime. 
 
 Connaissez-vous la jeune Emilie 7 c'est 
 xne enfant dont tout le monde dit du bien. 
 Imitez en tout votre amit : elle est douce, 
 appliquée, honnête tt compatissante. 
 Sur le Verbe avoir employé iPImpersou- 
 neL 
 Remarque. Quand le verbe avoir s'em- 
 ploie à l'impersonnel, c'est dans le sens 
 d'être, et alors il se joint toujours avec y. 
 Il y a un an que je ne vous ai vu. 
 Ya-t-il des nouvelles ? 
 Yen, il n'y en a pas, <Ju moins quejt sa- 
 
 Those are really happy who think them* 
 selves so. 
 
 Virtue alone can render a man happy in 
 this life. 
 
 There is no rule so general but it admits 
 of exceptions. 
 
 He is an orator who is master of him- 
 self, and who is never embarrassed. 
 
 There is no recess of the human heart 
 but God perceives it. 
 
 Only some fragments of the great work 
 he had promised have been found. 
 
 The error you have committed is of more 
 consequence than you imagine. 
 
 The first steps we take on entering the 
 world have considerable influence on the 
 rest of our lives. 
 
 That farce is one of the most truly comic 
 that ever was seen. 
 
 Lay up for yourselves treasures which 
 neither moth nor rust can corrupt, and 
 which thieves cannot steal. 
 
 Our uncertainty as to 'what shall happen 
 makes us incapable of properly providing 
 against it. 
 
 I am astonished he does not see the dan- 
 ger he is in. 
 
 The man whom you are speaking of is 
 not here now. 
 
 The person from whom I received the in 
 telligence is not known to you. 
 
 The proprietor of that beautiful seat sei 
 com resides there. 
 
 Tbese are events to which we must I 
 mit. 
 
 It is what you seldom think of, 
 
 On the Demonstrative Pronouns. 
 
 Not to acknowledge the divinity, is tota- 
 ly to renounce the light of reason. 
 
 To lie is to despise God and to fear mau. 
 
 There are moral contagious disorders, and 
 these are the most dangerous. 
 
 What you advance is, Ï think, widely dit' 
 ferent from your sentiments. 
 
 Men in general love only those who flat 
 ter them. 
 
 He who persuades another to the commis- 
 sion of a crime, is hardly less guilty than 
 he who commits it. 
 
 To thiuk in this manner is to be wilfully 
 blind. 
 
 The reports concerning him are hardly 
 conceivable. 
 
 What distresses me is to see guilt trium 
 phant. 
 
 Do you know little Emily ? she is a child 
 of whom every body speaks well. 
 
 Imitr.te your friend in every thing ; she 
 is mild, assiduous, polite and compassionate 
 On the Verb avoir, to have, employed 
 impersonally, 
 
 When the verb avoir is uied impersonally 
 it signifies être, to be, and in this sense it 
 is always accompanied by the adverb y. 
 
 It is a twelvemonth since I saw you. 
 
 Is there any news ? 
 
 So., there is none, at least (hat I knew 
 
•136 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 JVy a*t-ilpas cinquante-quatre milles de 
 Londres à Brighton 7 
 
 Il y avait déjà beaucoup demonde lorsque 
 j arrivai. 
 
 Il n'y avait hier presque personne auparc. 
 
 Y avait il de grands débats ? 
 
 \ r '"j avait-il pas beaucoup de curieux ?■ 
 Je Pavais vu il y avait à peine vingi-qua- 
 re heures. 
 
 Il n'y avait pas deux jours qu'il avait 
 f.iné chez moi. 
 
 Y avait il si long-temps que vous ne Vavi* 
 ; TU ? 
 
 Il y eut hier un bal chez M. un tel. 
 Il rJy eut pas hier de spectacle. 
 
 Y eut-il beaucoup de confusion et de dc- 
 .ordre ? 
 
 JV'y eut-il pas un beau feu d'art ijïcc ? 
 
 Il y a eu aujourd'hui urie foule immense à 
 ' i promenade. 
 
 Il n'y a pas eu de bal, comme on Pavait 
 i an once. 
 
 Est-il vrai qu'il y a eu un duel ? 
 
 fPn a-t-il pas eu dans sa conduiteunpeu 
 ;op d'emportement ? 
 
 Quand il y eut eu une explication, les es- 
 prits se calmèrent. 
 
 N'y avait-il pas eu un plus grand no-inbrc 
 de spectateurs ? 
 
 Il y aura demain un simulacre de combat 
 xaval. 
 
 Il n'y aura aucun de vous. 
 
 Y aura-t-il une bonne récolte celle année ? 
 N'y aura-t-il pas quelqu'un de votre fa- 
 
 nilU? 
 A coup sûr il y aura eu bien du désordre. 
 
 Sur cent personnes, il n'y en aura 2 } ^ eu 
 iix de satisfaites. 
 
 Y aura-t-il eu un bon soupe ? 
 JY'y aura-t-il pas eu de mécontent ? 
 il y aurait de la malhonnête dans ce 
 
 ciié. 
 
 Il n'y aurait pas grand mal à cela. 
 
 Y aurait-il quelqu'un assez hardi pov..- 
 s'attaquer ? 
 
 Jfy aurait-il pas quelqu'un assez chari- 
 table pour l'avertir dt et qu'on dit de lui? 
 Il y aurait eu de l'imprudence à cela. 
 
 Il n'y aurait pas eu tant de rnesintclti- 
 'rtnee, si Pon m'en avait cru. 
 Il n'y aurait pus eu dix personnes. 
 
 Y aurait-il eu de l'inconvénient ? 
 
 J\Py aurait-il pas eu de jaloux peur le 
 ..averser dans ses projets " 
 Je ne crois pas qu'il y ait un speciach 
 >!us magnifique. 
 Je désirerais gVilycût moins J: fav .■;- 
 :té dans le commerce de lu vit. 
 Je f ,n'ai pas ouï dire qu'il y ait eu hier 
 
 nouvelles du continent* 
 Juricz-vous cru qu'il y eût eu tant de 
 "innés compromises dnnscettt affaire ? 
 
 Phrases d'tv< 
 Sa vie, ses actions, se» paroles, son air 
 
 •\(me et sa démarche, tout prêche, te:. 
 ♦ > lui. 
 
 Is not it fifty- four miles from Londoa tc 
 Brighton ? 
 
 There were already a great many people 
 when I arrived. 
 
 There was hardly any body in the Par': 
 yesterday. 
 
 Were there violent debates ? 
 
 Were there not many curious people ? 
 
 I had seen him scarcely four-and-twent\ 
 hours before. 
 
 He had dined with me not two days be- 
 fore. 
 
 Was it so long since you had seen him : 
 
 There was yesterday a ball at Mr. A's. 
 
 There was no play yesterday. 
 
 Was there a great deal of confusion au< 
 disorder ? 
 
 Were there not handsome fire-works ? 
 
 There was an immense crowd |o-da 
 the public walks. 
 
 There has not been any ball ai bad be; . 
 mentioned. 
 
 Is it true that there has been a duel ? 
 
 Was there not rather too much hastinc? 
 in his behaviour ? 
 
 After there had been an explanation, tran 
 quillity was restored. 
 
 Was not there a great number of specta 
 tors ? 
 
 To-morrow there will be the représenta 
 tion of a sea-fight. 
 
 There will be none of you- 
 
 Will there be a good harvest this yea 
 
 Will not there be some of your family . 
 
 There must certainly have been much di; 
 order. 
 
 Out of a hundred persons there will no", 
 have been ten satisfied. 
 
 Will there have been a good supper ? 
 
 Will therenot have been some dissatisfied 
 
 Such a step would have been ungenteel. 
 
 There would be no great harm in that. 
 
 Would there be any one bold enough i 
 attack him ? 
 
 Would there be nobody kind enough if 
 acquaint him with what is said of Li:n ? 
 
 There would have been some imprudence 
 in that. 
 
 There would not have been so great a mi 
 understanding had I been believed. 
 
 There would not have been teu persons. 
 
 Would there have been any income 
 nience ? 
 
 Would there not have been someenvion 
 person to thwart him in his designs ? 
 
 I do not think there can be a more super: 
 spectacle. 
 
 I wish there were less duplicity in th. 
 concerns of life. 
 
 I have not heard that there was any new* 
 from the continent yesterday. 
 
 Could you have thought so many persons 
 would have been exposed in that affair ? 
 
 Promiscuous Phrases. 
 His life, his uctions, his very look and de. 
 portm ling in hiiu instructs an- 
 
 edifies. 
 
PHRASES ON SOiiE DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 437 
 
 Jgruût qu'il n'arrivât quelque dé- 
 sordre dans rassemblée, mais toutes choses 
 s'y passèrent fort doucement. 
 
 La vigne et le lierre s'entortillent autour 
 des ormes. 
 
 On ne disconvenient point qu'il ne soit 
 Lrave, mais il est un peu trop fanfaron. 
 
 Le cadet est riche, mais Paîné Vest encore 
 .iage. 
 
 Le ciel est couvert de nuages, et l'orage 
 st prêt à fondre. 
 
 Après qu'il eut franchi les Alpes avec ses 
 troupes, il entra en Italie. 
 
 La frugalité rend les corps plus sains et 
 :.!us robustes. 
 
 Ce discours est peut-être un des plus beaux 
 -lorccaux d'éloquence, qu'il y ait jamais eu. 
 
 C'est un homme qui aime la liberté ; il ne 
 zz gêne pour qui que ce soit. 
 
 Il est plus haut que moi de deux doigts. 
 
 Irez-vous vous exposer à la barbarie tt à 
 l ' inhospilalité de ces peuples % 
 
 A la longue, les erreurs disparaissent, et 
 '.a vérité surnage. 
 
 Si -vous le prenez avec moi sur ce ton de 
 fierté, je serai aussi fer que veus. 
 
 C'est un homme rigide, qui ne pardonne 
 rien, ni aux autres ni à lui-même. 
 
 Les uns montent, les autres descendent, 
 .insi va. la roue de la fortune. 
 
 Je ne vois rien de solide dans tout ce que 
 . oas me proposez. 
 
 L'art n'a jamais rien produit de plus 
 ut au. 
 
 Jjequelest-ce des deux qui a tort ? 
 
 On aime quelquefois la trahison, mais on 
 hait toujours les traîtres. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 L'éléphant se sert de sa trompe pour pren- 
 pour enlever tout ce qu'il veut. 
 
 Plus j'examine cette personne, plus je 
 rois l'avoir vue quelque part. 
 
 La nuit vint, de façon que je fus con- 
 traint de me retirer. 
 
 Il faut vivre de façon qu'on ne fasse tort 
 à personne. 
 
 Elle sut qu'on attaquait son vxari et cou- 
 rut aussitôt tout éperdue pour le secourir. 
 
 Je trouvai ses p'irens tout éplorés. 
 
 Cet arbre pousse ses branches toutes droi- 
 tes. 
 
 J'en ai encore le mémoire toute fraîche. 
 
 Il a voulu faire voir par cet essai qu'il 
 pouvait réussir en quelque chose de plus 
 grand. 
 
 Il fut blessé au front et mourut de cette 
 blessure. 
 
 Ces chevaux prirent le mors aux dents et 
 extradèrent le carrosse. 
 
 C'est un homme qui compose sans chaleur 
 
 It was apprehended some disorder would 
 take place in the assembly, but every thing 
 went off very quietly. 
 
 The vine and ivy twist round the elms. 
 
 They do not deny that he is brave, but he 
 boasts rather too much. 
 
 The youngest is rich, but the eldest is still 
 more so. 
 
 The sky is covered with clouds, and the 
 storm is preparing to burst. 
 
 After having crossed the Alps with hi; 
 troops, he entered Italy. 
 
 Temperance imparts an increase of heaiu 
 and strength to the body. 
 
 This speech is perhaps one of the fir.ti 
 pieces of eloquence that was ever pronounc- 
 ed. 
 
 He is a man fond of liberty, he will be 
 restrained by nobody. 
 
 He is taller than me by two inches. 
 
 Will you go and expose yourself tu the 
 barbarity and inhospitably of those nations : 
 
 In time errors vanish and truth survives 
 
 If you treat me with «that haughtiness, I 
 can be as haughty as you. 
 
 He is a stern character, who pardon* 
 thing either in himself or others. 
 
 Some mount, others descend : thus gee-; 
 the wheel of fortune. 
 
 I see nothing certain in all you propose 
 tome. 
 
 It is one of the finest productions of art. 
 
 Which of the two is in the wrong ? 
 We sometimes love the treason, but we 
 always hate the traitor. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 The elephant makes use of his trunk to 
 take and lift whatever he pleases. 
 
 The more I look at that person, the more 
 I think I have seen him (or her) somewhere. 
 
 Night came on, so that I was obliged to 
 retire. 
 
 We must live in such a manner as to in 
 jure nobody. 
 
 She knew her husband was attacked, and 
 in a state of distraction ran to his assistance 
 
 I found his relations all in tears. 
 
 The branches of that tree grow quite 
 straight. 
 
 It is still quite fresh in my memory. 
 
 He wished to shew by that attempt that 
 he could succeed in an enterprise of more 
 consequence. 
 
 He was wounded in the forehead, and died 
 of his wound. 
 
 Those horses ran away with the carriage. 
 
 He is a man that writes without the least 
 
 ni imagination : tout ce qu'il écrit est froid warmth or animation : all his productions 
 
 ttplal, 
 
 Ce bâtiment a plus de profondeur que de 
 largeur. 
 
 Cet homme est un prodige de savoir, de 
 science, de valeur, d'esprit, et de mémoire. 
 
 Il est attaché à l'un et à l'autre, mais plus 
 à Vun qu'à l'autre. 
 
 ils ont bien de l'air l'un de l'autre 
 
 
 are coîd and insipid. 
 That building is deeper than it is broad. 
 
 That man is a prodigy of knowledge, 
 judgment, courage, sense, and memory. 
 
 He is attached to both, but to one more 
 than to the other. 
 
 Thej \ cry much resemble each other. 
 
•438 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTES. 
 
 Si Von ruine cet homms-là, le contre-coup 
 ^tombera sur vous. 
 
 Il serait mort } si on ne Veut assisté avec 
 oin. 
 
 Ce poème serait parfait , si Us incidens, 
 qui le font languir, n'interrompaient la 
 
 ■ ontinuité de Paction. 
 
 Continuation. 
 
 Quand je le voudrais Je ne lepourroispas. 
 
 Je serai toujours votre ami, quand même 
 ous ne le voudriez pas. 
 
 Quand vous auriez réussi, que vous en se* 
 ait-il revenu. ? 
 
 Quand on découvrirait votre démarche, 
 on ne pourrait la blâmer. 
 
 Quand vous auriez consulté quelqu'un sur 
 aire marriage, vous n'auriez pas mieux ré- 
 
 Le tonnerre et V éclair ne sont sensibles 
 que par la propagation du bruit et de lalu- 
 •\iere jusqu'à l'œil et à Pareille. 
 Le langage de la prose est plus simple et 
 i '".ins figuré que celui des vers. 
 Lt commencement de son discours est tou- 
 -ours assez sage ; mais, dans la suite, à 
 'orct de vouloir s'éltver, il se perd dans les 
 lues : on ne sait plus ni ce qu'on voit, ni 
 E qu'on entend. 
 
 C'est un faute excusable dans un autre 
 >.omme, mais à un homme aussi sage que lui, 
 :llt ne se peut pardonner. 
 
 Une suffit pas de paraître honnête hom- 
 me, il faut l'être. j 
 
 Il nous a reçus avec bonté, ci nous a écou- 
 is avec patience. 
 
 Tout y est si bien peint, qu'on croit voir 
 • ? qu'il décrit. 
 
 On ne p m se rien de vous, qui ne vous soit 
 2 Jorieux. 
 
 Les eaux de citernes ne sont que dis eaux 
 de pluie ramassées. 
 S'il n'est pas fort riche, du moins a-t-ilde 
 
 livre honnêtement. 
 Quel quantième du mois avons-nous ? 
 Il lui tara:', qu'il ne soit majeur, il compte 
 
 s et les mois. 
 Des qualités excellente?, jointes à de ra- 
 ti talent, font le parfait mérite. 
 Il a une mauvaise ^qualité, c'est qu'il ne 
 aurait garder un secret. 
 Modèles de phrase.? dans lesquelles, on doit 
 faire usage de Particle. 
 L'homme est sujet à bit les. 
 
 Les hommes d'un vrai génie sont 
 Les hommes à imagination sont . 
 
 ux. 
 L'homme, dont vous parlez, est un 6 
 
 La vie est un mé et de maux. 
 
 La perfection en tout genre eti le but au- 
 quel on doit tendre. 
 
 La beauté, les grâces, et l'esprit sont des 
 vantages bien précieux, quand ils sont re* 
 par la modestie. 
 
 Voilà des tableaux d'une grande beauté. 
 
 Faites-vous derf principes, dot-: 
 •ijus écartiez jamais. 
 
 Cet arbre porte «les fruits exca" 
 
 Cet ia>'sons sont des 
 
 If that man is ruined, his misfortune wil 
 recoil upon you. 
 
 He would have died, if he had not beei 
 kindly assisted. 
 
 That would be a perfect poem, if the in 
 cidents which give a heaviness to it, did no; 
 break the connection of the subject. 
 Continuation. 
 
 If I were disposed I could not do it. 
 
 I will always be your friend, even thou;:! 
 you should not wish it 
 
 Had you even succeeded, what wen 
 to have derived from it ? 
 
 Should the steps you have taken be dis 
 covered, they could not be blamed. 
 
 Had you consulted somebody about yom 
 marriage, you could not have succeedeo 
 better. 
 
 Thunder and lightning are only percep 
 tible by the transmission of sound and light 
 to the ear and eye. 
 
 Prose language is much more simple anr 
 less figurative than poetic. 
 
 The beginning of his speech is always 
 Ierably sensible : but afterwards, by afFeci 
 ing the sublime, he loses himself, and we no 
 longer understand either what we see o: 
 hear. 
 
 This fault would be excusable in anothe. 
 man, but in a man of his sense it is unpar 
 donable. 
 
 It is not enough to seem an honest man 
 we must be so. 
 
 He received us with kindness, and hearc 
 us patiently. 
 
 Every thing in it is so well delineated, yon 
 think you see what he describes. 
 
 They think nothing of you but what 
 your honour. 
 
 Cistern water is only rain-water goJU 
 ed. 
 
 If he is not rich, at least he has enough to 
 live upon respectably. 
 
 What day of the month is it ? 
 
 He longs to be of age, and counts the days 
 and months. 
 
 Excellent qualities, joined to distinguish 
 ed talents, constitute perfect merit. 
 
 He has one bad quality, be cannot !.. 
 
 secret. 
 
 Examples of phrases in which the Aj 
 used. 
 
 Man is liable to a variety of ehan 
 
 Men of real genius are scarce. 
 
 Men of a visionary character an 
 happy. 
 
 The man you speak of is a friend of mine 
 
 Life is a compound of good and 
 
 Perfection in every thing ought to 
 object. 
 
 Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are valua 
 ble endowments when heightened by mo 
 desty. 
 
 These are very beautiful pictures. 
 
 Establish rules for yourself, and never de 
 viate from them. 
 
 This tree bears very excellent fruit. 
 
 These reasons are very idle conjectures 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 4S9 
 
 Ùervu-vous des termes établis par Vus- Use the expressions established by custom 
 
 We ought to avoid the appearance of af- 
 fectation. 
 
 The Jupiter of Phidias was extreraei'v 
 b eautiful. 
 
 The same Phrases continued. 
 
 Memory is the treasure of the mind, tht 
 result of attention and reflection. 
 
 I yesterday bought some valuable and 
 scarce engravings. 
 
 France is the finest country in Europe. 
 
 The German interest was contrary to the 
 Russian. 
 
 The length of England from north to south 
 is 350 miles, and its breadth from east to 
 west is 300. 
 
 He comes from China, Japan,- and the 
 East Indie-;. 
 
 He comes from America, Barbadoes,J?: 
 maica, kc. 
 
 He comes from French Flanders. 
 
 lie has settled in the county of flïiddîesex 
 
 Coxcombs are unsufTerable beings in so 
 ciety. 
 
 It is the opinion of the new philosophers- 
 
 She does every thing most gracefully. 
 
 This stulT sells at a guinea the ell. 
 
 This win e costs seventy pounds a pipe. 
 
 J'.xamplés of phrases in which tht Article i, 
 
 emitted. 
 
 Our knowledge ought to be derived frevn 
 evident principles. 
 
 This tree produces excellent fruit. 
 
 These reasons are idle conjectures. 
 
 Avoid whatever bears the appearance o: 
 a free tat ion. 
 
 These examples may serve as models. 
 
 He Lus great presence of mind. 
 
 The memory of reason and sense is mort 
 useful than any other kind of memory. 
 
 Few people reflect on the rapidity of life. 
 
 How many inconceivable events have fol 
 lowed in succession ! 
 
 There is nice wit but less knowledge in 
 this age than in the last. 
 
 So much issurance never was met with. 
 
 I took a great deal of trouble yeslerda*. 
 about nothing. 
 
 Çandia is one of the most agreeable 
 . he Mediterranean. 
 
 He comes from Persia. Italy, Spain, &.c. 
 
 He is returned from Switzerland, Germa 
 ny, be. 
 
 French wines will be dear this year 5 tbi 
 vines have been blighted. 
 
 The German empire is composed of great 
 and small states. 
 
 The English hor«es are excellent. 
 
 After leaving Switzerland, I retired to 
 
 Rome. 
 
 Contint/ at tori of th?. same phrases. 
 
 You will find this passage at page ISO 
 book the first, chapter the tenth. 
 
 He has retired to England. 
 
 age, 
 On doit éviter Voir de 1'afFectation. 
 
 Le Jupiter de Phidias était d'une grande 
 
 hecuté. 
 
 Continuation des même phrases. 
 La mémoire est h trésor de l'esprit, le 
 fruit de l'attention et de la réflexion. 
 
 J'achetai hier des gravures précieuses et 
 -ares. 
 
 La France est le plus beau pays de V Eu- 
 rope. 
 
 L'intérêt de l'Allemagne était opposé à 
 (lui delà Russie. 
 
 La longueur de l'Angleterre du nord au 
 sud est de 360 milles, et sa largeur de Vest 
 x l'ouest est de iiOj. 
 
 Il arrive de la Chine, du Japon, et des 
 Indes Orientales, fyc. 
 
 Il arrive de l'Amérique, de la Barbade, 
 île la Jamaïque, fyc. 
 H vient de la Flandre Française. 
 
 t si établi dans la province^ Middlesex 
 s petits- maîtres sont des êtres insup- 
 
 s dans la société. 
 si Pepiiiion des nouveaux philosophes. 
 ' -i a bien de la grâce dans tout es 
 s fait. 
 Cette étoffe se vend une guinée l'aune. 
 Ce vin coût?. TO livres sterling la pièce. 
 Modèles de phrases dans lesquelles on ne 
 doit pas faire usage de l'article. 
 s connoissanc.es doivent être tirées de 
 jiincipes évidens. 
 Cet arbre porte d'excellens fruits. 
 Ou raisons sont de faibles conjectures. 
 Evitez tout ce qui a un air d'affectation. 
 
 exemples peuvent servir de modèles. 
 
 H a une grande présence d'esprit. 
 
 La mémoire de raison et d'esprit est plus 
 utile que les autres sortes de mémoire. 
 
 Peu de personnes réfléchissent sur la ra- 
 pidité de la vie. 
 
 Que d'événemens inconcevables se sont 
 ■uccédés les uns aux autrts ! 
 
 Il y a plus d'espiït, mais moins de conna- 
 <:Sances, dans ce siècle que dans le siècle 
 dtrnier. 
 
 On ne vit jamais autant d'effronterie. 
 
 Jt pris hier beaucoup de peine pour rien. 
 
 Candie est une des iles les plus agréables 
 de la Méditerranée. 
 Il arrtoede Perse, d'Italie, d'Espagne, êfc. 
 Il est rtvenu de Suisse, d'Allemagne. &fc. 
 
 Les vins ie France seront chers cette an- 
 née ; les vigies ont coulé. 
 
 L'empire d'Allemagne est composé de 
 grands et de puits états. 
 
 Les chevaux d'Angleterre sont excellens. 
 
 Après mon départ de Suisse, je me reti- 
 rai à Rom e, 
 
 Continuation des mêmes phrases. 
 
 Fous trouverez ce passage page 120, liv- 
 re premier, chapitre dix. 
 
 il ftit retiré en Angleterre. 
 
440 
 
 PHRASES Off SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 Il tit dans sa retraite en vrai philoso- 
 phe. 
 
 Quand il réfléchit sur sa conduite, il en 
 eut honte. 
 
 Cest un homme qui cherche fortune. 
 
 // entend malice à tout. 
 
 .Ye portez envie à personne. 
 Si vous promettez, tenez parole. 
 Dans les affaires importantes ne vous dé- 
 cidez jamais sans prendre conseil. 
 
 Courage, soldats, tenons fermes ; la vio- 
 oire est à nous. 
 Cette femme n'a ni grâce ni beauté. 
 
 Monseigneur le duc de éfc. prince du sang, 
 alla hier à la campagne. 
 
 Montrer tant de faiblesse, c'est n'être pas 
 homme. 
 
 Cet homme est une espèce de misanthrope, 
 dont les brusqueries sont quelquefois très- 
 plaisantes. 
 
 L^ananas est une sorte de fruit très-com- 
 f vin aux Antilles. 
 
 C'est un genre de vie qui ne me plaît point. 
 
 Continuation des mêmes phrases. 
 Cette dame plaît à tout le monde par son 
 honnêteté et su douceur. 
 
 Tout homme a des défauts plus ou moins 
 tensibles. 
 
 Cette conduite augmentait chaque jour le 
 . ombre de ses amis. 
 Tous les biens nous viennent de Dieu. 
 Vénus était la déesse de la beauté, et la 
 
 de l'amour et des grâces. 
 Selon Its païens, Jupiter était le premier 
 i".rs dieux. 
 
 Apollon c toit frère jumpau de Diane. 
 
 Rubens a ite un grand peintre. 
 
 Homère et Virgile sont les deux jilus 
 
 âè poètes épiques. 
 Londres est la plus belle ville que je con- 
 naisse. 
 
 L'eau de rivière est douce, et Veau de 
 ner est salée. 
 C'est un excellent poisson de mer. 
 Voilà une superbe table de marbre. 
 D'eau de Seine est celle qu'on préfère à 
 avis. 
 
 Pauvreté .n'est pas vice. 
 Citoyens, étrangers, grands, peuples, se 
 
 montres stnsibles à cette périt. 
 Modèles de phrases sur le Pronom Le. 
 Dst-ce là votre opinion ? — ne doutez point 
 
 ■c ne la soit. 
 Sont'Ce là vos domestiques? — oui, ce les 
 
 M-sdames, Stes-vous les étrangères qu'on 
 m'a annoncées ? — oui, nous les sommes. 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous la malade pour la- 
 quelle on m'a appelé ? — ont, je la suis. 
 
 Madame, êtes-vous la mère de rct enfant? 
 
 oui, je la suis. 
 
 Mesdames, etes-vous contentes de cette 
 musique ? — qui, nous le sommes. 
 
 Elle est malheureuse, et je crains bien, 
 Ut ne le soit touil la vie. 
 
 Madame, été i-vous mère f — oui, je le suis. 
 
 Madame, (tessous malade ? — oui, je te 
 
 He lives in his retreat like a real philo 
 sopher. 
 
 When he reflected on his conduct, be was 
 ashamed of it. 
 
 He is a man that seeks to make a fortune 
 
 He puts a malicious construction on*evc 
 jy thing. 
 
 Envy nobody. 
 
 If you promise, keep your word. 
 
 In matters of consequence, never decidr 
 without advice. 
 
 Cheer up, soldiers, let us continue firm 
 the day is our own. 
 
 This woman is destitute both of grac* 
 and beauty. 
 
 The duke of &.c. a prince of the blood, 
 went yesterday into the country. 
 
 To shew so much weakness is not acting 
 like a man. 
 
 This man is a kind of misanthropist. who;t 
 oddities are sometimes comical. 
 
 The pine-apple is a kind of fruit very com- 
 mon in the Antilles. 
 It is a kind of life that is not agreeable to me 
 
 'he same sentences continued. 
 
 This lady pleases every one by her good 
 breeding and mildness. 
 
 Every one has defects more or less obvi- 
 ous. 
 
 This behaviour daily increased the num- 
 ber of his friends. 
 
 Every blessing comes from God. 
 
 Venus was the goddess of beauty, and thç 
 mother of love and the graces. 
 
 According to the Heathens, Jupiter was 
 the first of the gods. 
 
 Apollo was twiu brother to Diana. 
 
 Rubens was a great painter. 
 
 Homer and Virgil are the two gre 
 epic po&ts. 
 
 London is the finest city that I know. 
 
 River water is sweet, and sea water is 
 salt. 
 
 It is an excellent sea-fish. 
 
 There is a superb marble table. 
 
 The water of the Seine is preferred at 
 Paris. 
 
 Poverty is not a vice. 
 
 Citizens, strangers, grandees, people, have 
 shewn themselves sensible of this loss. 
 
 Form i of phrases upon the pronoux Le. 
 
 Is that your opinion ?— do not qm ! 
 
 arc. 
 
 Are these your servants ?— yes tney 
 
 Ladies, are you the stranger» that have 
 been annourced to me ? — yes, «ve are. 
 
 Madam, are you the sick person for whom 
 I have been called ?— yes, I urn. 
 
 Madam, are you the mother of this child : 
 — yes. I am. 
 
 Laches, are you pleased with this music '. 
 — yes, we are. 
 
 She is unhappy, and I much fear she wii 
 continue so for life. 
 
 Madam, mv you a mother ?— yes I 
 " you c ick ?■ 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES» 
 
 44 s 
 
 Madame, depuis quel temps êtes-vous ma- 
 riée ?— ; je le suis depuis un an. 
 
 Y a-t-il long-temps que vous êtes arrivée ? 
 -je le suis depuis quinze jours. 
 
 Jiristote croyait que le monde était de 
 toute éternité ; maisPlaton ne le croyait pas. 
 
 Quoique cette femme montre plus defer- 
 neté que les autres, elle n'est pas pour cela 
 a. moins affligée. 
 
 Cette femme a Part de répandre des lar- 
 'îles dans le temps même qu'elle est le moins 
 
 affligée. 
 
 Modèles de phrases sur les différentes rè- 
 gles du participe passé. 
 
 La nouvelle pièce a-t-elle été applaudie ? 
 
 Ses parens y seront-ils arrivés à temps ? 
 
 Elle s'est donné de belles robes. 
 
 Elles nous ont apporté de superbes œillets. 
 
 < 'ttte ruse ne lui a pas réussi. 
 
 La vie tranquille que j'ai menée depuis 
 dix ans, a beaucoup contribué à me faire 
 oublier mes malheurs. 
 
 Les lettres, qui j'ai reçues, m'ont beau- 
 coup affligé. 
 
 Que de peines vous vous êtes données ! 
 
 Quelle lâche vous vous êtes imposée '.. 
 
 C'est une satire que j'ai retrouvée dans 
 mes papiers. 
 
 Les lettres qu'a écrites Fline le jeune, 
 quelque agréables qu'elles soient, se ressen- 
 tent néanmoins un peu de la décadence du 
 goûl parmi les Romains. 
 
 Je ne serais pas entré avec vous dans tous 
 ces détails de grammaire, si je ne les avais 
 crus nécessaires. 
 
 L'Egypte s'était rendue célèbre par la 
 sugesse de ses lois long-temps avant que la 
 Grèce sortît de la barbarie. 
 
 C'est une des plus grandes merveilles qu'on 
 ait vues. 
 
 L'homme de lettres, dont vous 7:1' avez ptxv- 
 ;é, a un goût exquis. 
 
 fous avez très-bien instruit vos élèves. 
 
 Lucrèce s'est donné la mort. 
 
 La sécheresse qu'il y a eu au printemps a 
 fait périr tous les fruits. 
 
 Je n'ai point 7-éussi, malgré les mesures 
 que vous m'avez conseillé de prendre. 
 
 Quelle aventure vous est-il arrivé ? 
 
 Cette femme s'est proposée pour modèle à 
 4 es enfans. 
 
 Cette femvie s'est proposé d'enseigner la 
 géographie et l'histoire à ses enfant. 
 
 Modèles de phrases sur les principaux rap- 
 ports des modes et des temps. 
 
 Je l'attendais depuis long-temps, quand 
 il vint me joindre. 
 
 il sortit au moment même que j'entrais. 
 
 Je commençais à voir des craintes sur la 
 réussite de votre affaire, lorsque fui reçi 
 votre lettre. 
 
 Dis que feus fait quelques visites indis- 
 pensables, je rentrai chez moi, et je ne sor- 
 tis plus. 
 
 Pavais déjà tout préparé pour mon a7- 
 
 Madam, how long have you been married ? 
 — a year. 
 Is it loDg since you arrived ?— a fortnight 
 
 Aristotle beiieved the world to have been 
 from all eternity -, but Plato did not. 
 
 Although this woman shows mere résolu 
 tion than the others, she is nevertheless not 
 the least afflicted. 
 
 This woman has the art of shedding teari 
 even when she is least afflicted. 
 
 Forms of Phrases upon the different rule 
 of the participle pait. 
 
 Did the new piece meet with applause '■: 
 
 Will your relations arrive there in tim e 
 
 She has given herself fine gowns. 
 
 They have brought us beautiful pinks. 
 
 He has not succeeded in this stratagem. 
 
 The quiet life I have led these ten year- 
 has greatly contributed to make me forge: 
 my misfortunes. 
 
 The letters I have received have afflicteu 
 me greatly. 
 
 What a deal of trouble you have given 
 yourself ! 
 
 What a task you bave imposed on your- 
 self ? 
 
 It is a satire that I have again met with 
 in my papers. 
 
 The letters which the younger Pliny has 
 written, however agreeable they may be 
 savour, nevertheless, a little of the decline 
 of taste among the Romans. 
 
 I would not have entered into these gram- 
 matical details with you, had I not though/, 
 them necessary. 
 
 Egypt had become celebrated for the wis 
 dom of its laws long before Greece haù 
 emerged from barbarism. 
 
 It is one of the greatest wonders that has 
 ever been seen. 
 
 The man of letters you spoke to me of has 
 an excellent taste. 
 
 You have instructed your pupils extreme 
 ly well. 
 
 Lucretia killed herself. 
 
 The dry weather we had in the spring 
 has destroyed all the fruit. 
 
 I have not succeeded, notwithstanding the 
 steps you advised me to take. 
 
 Wbat adventures have you met with ? 
 
 This woman proposed herself as a mode' 
 for her children. . 
 
 This woman proposed to teach geograpby 
 and history to lier children. 
 
 Forms of phrases upon the principal rela 
 tions of moods and tenses. 
 
 I had waited a long time for him, wher> 
 he came to me. 
 
 lie was going out at the time I was en 
 tcring. 
 
 I was beginning to be apprehensive ol 
 the success of your business when I receive 
 ed your letter. 
 
 As soon as I had paid some indispensable 
 visits, I went home and did not go out af 
 terwards. 
 
 I had already made every preparation fo: 
 
442 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 party lorsque des affaires imprévues m'ont 
 forcé à le différer de quelques jours. 
 
 Vous étiez déjà sorti, quiend je me pré- 
 sentai chez vous. 
 
 J'avais déjà livré à l'impression mon ouv- 
 rage, lorsque vous me demandiez, si je le 
 donnerais bientôt au public. 
 
 Lorsque j'ai eu terminé mon affaire-vous 
 avez commencé la vôtre. 
 
 Lorsque j'eus déjeûné je montai à cheval, 
 et je fus à Londres. 
 
 Lorsque j'aurai lu la nouvelle pièce, je 
 vous dirai avec franchise ce que j'en pensî. 
 
 IrieZ'Vous à ti orne si vous le pouviez ? — 
 oui, j'irais. 
 
 Jluriez-vous consenti à ces conditions, i>i 
 on vous Us avait proposées ? 
 
 Irezoous demain à Londres, si vous le 
 puuvez ? — oui, j'irai. 
 
 Il sera sûrement parti, si vous l'avez vou- 
 lu. 
 
 Vous eussiez laissé échapper une occasion 
 sifuxorable, si l'on ne vous eût averti à 
 temps. 
 
 Continuation des mêmes phrases. 
 
 On dit que vous partez aujourd'hui pour 
 far is. 
 
 Tout le monde soutient que vous accepte- 
 rez la place qu'on vous offre. 
 
 On soupçonne que vous aviez hkr reçu 
 cette agréable nouvelle quand on vous ren- 
 contra. 
 
 Beaucoup de vos amis croient que vous 
 partîtes hier pour la campagne. 
 
 Le bruit se répand que vous avez fait une 
 grosse perte. 
 
 J'apprends dans l'instant que vous fus- 
 siez parti il y a trois jours, si des engage- 
 mens, que vous avier "ontractés depuis long- 
 temps, ne vous avaient retenu. 
 
 JY'est-il pas vrai que vous partiriez au- 
 jourd'hui, si vous le pouviez ? 
 
 Est-il vrai que vous seriez parti depuis 
 long-temps pour la campagne, si votre 
 amour pour les arts ne vous avait retenu à 
 !a ville ? 
 
 Je ne crois pas que vous partiez, quoique 
 :out le monde l'assure. 
 
 Je ne croyais pas qu'il fût si-tôt de retour. 
 
 Il a fallu qu'il ait eu affaire a bien des 
 versonne*. 
 
 Je doute que voire ami fût venu à bout 
 de ses projets, s'il n'avait pas été fortement 
 : c'gé. 
 
 H n'est point d'homme, quelque mérite 
 qu'il ait, qui ne fût très-mort (fié, s'il sa- 
 vait toute ce qu'on pense de lui. 
 
 Vous ne vous persuadiez pas que les af- 
 fairtt pussent si mal tourner. 
 
 Modèles de Phrases sur la Négative JYc. 
 
 Il n'y a pas beaucoup d'argent chez ces 
 gens de lettres. 
 
 Il n'y a point de ressource dans une per- 
 sonne qui n'a point d'esprit. 
 
 i''at à tort que vous l'accusez de jouer ; 
 iâ vout assure qu'il n\ijouc point. 
 
 my departure, when same unexpected busi 
 ness occurred, that obliged me to defer i! 
 tor some days. 
 
 You were already gone out when I called 
 upon you. 
 
 My work had been sent to be printed 
 when you asked me if I should soon bring 
 it out. 
 
 When my business was over you begar. 
 yours. 
 
 When I had done breakfast, I got ov 
 horseback, and went to London. 
 
 When I have read the new piece, I wi!' 
 candidly give you my opinion of it. 
 
 Would you go to Rome if it were in youl 
 power ?— Yes, I would. 
 
 Would you have agreed to those t 
 had they been proposed to you ? 
 
 Shall you go to London to-morrow, if yc: 
 can ?— yes, I shall. 
 
 He will certainly have set out, tt 
 wished it. 
 
 You would have let so favourable an op- 
 portunity slip, had you not been warned i: 
 time. 
 
 The same phrases continued. 
 
 It is said that you set off to-day for Paris 
 
 Every one maintains that you will accept 
 of this place that is offered to you. 
 
 It is suspected that you had received this 
 agreeable intelligence when you were met 
 yesterday. 
 
 Many of your friends believe that you set 
 out yesterday for the country. 
 
 There is a report that you have met with 
 a considerable loss. 
 
 I bave this moment learnt that you would 
 have set out three days since, had not en- 
 gagements which you had formed long ago 
 detained you. 
 
 It is not true that you would set out to- 
 day, if you could ? 
 
 Is it true that you would have set out for 
 the country long since, had not your love 
 for the arts detained you in town ? 
 
 I do not imagine that you will set out, al- 
 though every body asserts it. 
 
 I did not believe he had gone back so 
 soon. 
 
 He must have had business with a great 
 many people. 
 
 I doubt that your friend would have suc- 
 ceeded in his plan, had he not been strongl; 
 patronised. 
 
 There is not a man, whatever merit ht- 
 may possess, that would not be very much 
 mortified, were be to know every thing 
 that is thought of him. 
 
 You never persuaded yourself that mat- 
 ter» could have taken so unfortunate a turn. 
 
 forms of Phrases upon the Negative Ne. 
 
 There is not much money to be founù 
 among men of letters. 
 
 There are no resources in a person with- 
 out sense. 
 
 You accuse him wrongfully of gaming 
 I assure you he «ever games. 
 
PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 443 
 
 Entrez dans It salon ; vous pourrez lui 
 parler} il ne joue pas. 
 
 Si pour avoir du bien, il en coûte à la 
 probité, je n'en veux point. 
 
 Rien n'est sûr avec les capricieux ; vous 
 troyez être bien en faveur, point du tout: 
 l'instant de la plus belle humeur est suivi de 
 la plus fâcheuse. 
 
 V ou» ne cessez de nous répéter les mêmes 
 choses. 
 
 Je n'aurais osé vous en parler le premier. 
 
 Malgré ses protections, il n'a pu réussir 
 ians ses projets. 
 
 Cet ouvrage serait fort hen, n'était pov.- 
 Ja négligence du style. 
 
 Y a-t-il quelqu'un dont elle ne médise. 
 
 J'ai pris tant de goût pour une vie reti- 
 rée, que je ne sor3 presque jamais. 
 
 Viola ce qui s'est passé ; n'en parlez à 
 personne. 
 
 Mon parti est pris ; ne m'en parlez plus. 
 
 N'employez aucun de ces moyens : ils seni 
 indignes de vous. 
 
 Rien n'est plus joli. 
 
 Je ne dis rien que je ne pense. 
 
 Je ne fais jamais d'excè* que je n'en sois 
 incommodé. 
 
 Continuation des mômes Phrases. 
 C'est un homme pour i fui je n'ai ni amour, 
 h estime. 
 Il n'est ni assez prudent ni assez éclairé. 
 
 Je vous assure que je ne le fréquente ni 
 ne le vois. 
 
 Ne faire que parcourir les différentes 
 oranches des connaissances humaines sans 
 s'arrêter à aucune, c'est moins chercher à 
 ^'instruire, qu'à tuer le temps. 
 
 Que n'êtes-vous toujours aussi complai- 
 sant .* 
 
 Il ne le fera pas, à moins que vous ne l'y 
 engagiez. 
 
 Il n'ira pas, si vous ne l'en priez. 
 
 Il nous a menacés de se venger ; nous 
 t? avons fait qu'en rire. 
 
 Trop d'insouciance ne peut que nuire. 
 
 Que devenez-vous ? il y a trois mois que 
 non* ne vous avons vu ? 
 
 Comment vous êies-vous porté depuis que 
 note» ne vous avons vu ? 
 
 C'est bien pire qu'on ne le disait. 
 
 Peu t'en faut qut je n'aie donné tête lais- 
 sée dans le piège. 
 
 Dites la vérité en toute occasion ; on mé- 
 prise toujours ceux qui parlent autrement 
 fuPils ne pensent. 
 
 Ne désespérez pas que la vérité ne se fas- 
 Séjour à la longue. 
 
 Je ne disconviens pas que la chose ne soit 
 ainsi. 
 
 Prenez garde qu'on ne vous entraîne dans 
 
 <£*&tue fausse démarche. 
 »/*empèc 
 
 /"empêcherai bien qu'on ne vous nuise 
 dans cette affaire. 
 
 H craint çu'an ne le soupçonne d'avoir 
 irtmpé dont ce ctmpfot 
 
 Go into the room, you may speak to him : 
 he is not playing. 
 
 I do not wish to make a fortune, if it car 
 only be done at the expense of honesty. 
 
 Nothing is certain with capricious peo- 
 ple ; you think yourself in favour, by no 
 means 5 the moment of the best humour is 
 foJlowed by that of the worst. 
 
 You are constantly repeating the same 
 thing to us. É 
 
 I should not have dared to be the first t r 
 speak to you of it. 
 
 With all bis interest he has not been able 
 to succeed in his plans. 
 
 This work would be very good, were ii 
 not for the negligence of the style. 
 
 Is there any one she does not slander ? 
 
 I have acquired so great a taste for re - 
 tiremeut, that I seldom go abroad. 
 
 This is what has passed j do not speak of 
 it to any one. 
 
 My resolution is fixed; talk to me no 
 more of it. 
 
 Do not employ any one of these measures 
 they are unworthy of you. 
 
 Nothing is more beautiful. 
 
 I never speak but what I think. 
 
 I never commit any excess without 
 fer in g by it. 
 
 Continuation of the same Phrases. 
 
 He is a man for whom I have neither 
 !ove nor esteem. 
 
 He is neither sufficiently prudent nor en* 
 lightened. 
 
 I assure you I neither associate with him 
 nor see him. 
 
 To go through the different branches of 
 human knowledge only, without fixing upon 
 any one of them, is not to seek for instruc- 
 tion, but to kill time. 
 
 Why are you not at all times equally com- 
 plaisant ? 
 
 He will not do it, unless you persuade him 
 toit. 
 
 He will not go, if you do not request it 0/ 
 him. 
 
 He has threatened us with vengeance j we 
 only laughed at him. 
 
 Too great supineness cannot but be hurt- 
 ful. 
 
 What has become of you ? we have not 
 seen you these three months. 
 
 How have you been since we saw you ? 
 
 It is much worse than was said. 
 
 I was near running headlong into thu 
 snare. 
 
 Tell the truth on all occasions : those who 
 speak what they do not think are always 
 despised. 
 
 Do not despair that truth will appear itf 
 time. 
 
 I admit that it is so» 
 
 Take care that you are not led into some 
 false step. 
 
 I shall prevent them from doi»g you aov 
 harm in this business. 
 
 He is apprehensive that he is suspected of 
 belrg concerned in fills pfrt- 
 
444 
 
 PHRASES ON SOME DIFFICULTIES. 
 
 On lui a donné iV excellent conseils, de 
 :rainte qu'il ne manquât V occasion de faire 
 connaître ce qu'il est en état de/aire. 
 
 J'y ai long-temps travaillé ; je ne saurais 
 in venir à bout. 
 
 fous feriez mieux de vous taire ; vous ne 
 savez ce que vous dites. 
 
 f^ous ne saurUz me faire un, plus grand 
 plaisir. 
 
 Phrases sur quelques Délicatesses de La 
 Langue Française. 
 
 Wez-voui ce soir à V opéra ? — oui, rirai. 
 
 Iriez-vov* avec plaisir à Rome 7<—oùij' > 
 -rais. 
 
 La justice qui nous est quelquefois refu- 
 sée par nos contemporains, la postérité soit 
 nous la rendre. 
 
 Cette grandeur qui vous étonne si fort, il 
 !a doit à votre nonchalance. 
 
 Il périt, ce héros, si cher à sen pars. 
 
 Je Pavais bien prévu que ce hcvil degré de 
 grandeur serait la cause de sa ntt'ne. 
 
 Citoyens, étrangers, ennemis, peuples, rois. 
 impereurs, le plaigi\ent et le révèrent. 
 
 L'assemblée finie, chacun se retira chez 
 soi. 
 
 Heureux le peuple qu'un sage roi gov* 
 verne. 
 
 H refusa les plus grandi honneurs, con- 
 tent de les mériter. 
 
 Prières, remontrances, commandemens, 
 : out est inutile. 
 
 Le vent renverse tours, cabanes, palais, 
 églises. 
 
 Notre réputation ne dépend pas du, ca- 
 price des hommes ; mais elle dépend des ac- 
 tions louables que nous faisons. 
 
 H y a beaucoup de choses qu'il n'importe 
 point du tout de savoir. 
 
 La vue de rcsjirit a plus d'étendue que la 
 mu du coips. 
 
 Ce qui sert à la vanité, n'est que vanité. 
 
 Tout ce qui n'a que le monde pour fon- 
 dement, ;- dissipe et s^évanouit avec lemon- 
 de. 
 
 C'est le privilège des grands hommes de 
 vaincre V envie ; le mérite la fait naître, le 
 mérite la fait mourir. 
 
 L'amour-propre est plus habile que le plus 
 Habile homme au monde. 
 
 En quittant le monde, on ne quitte le plus 
 souvent ni les erreurs, ni les folles passions 
 du monde. 
 
 They have given him excellent advice 
 lest he should lose the opportunity of shew 
 ing what he was capable of doing. 
 
 I have been long employed about it ; I 
 cannot accomplish it. 
 
 You had better be silent, you do not kno'.* 
 what you are saying. 
 
 You cannot do me a greater favour^ 
 
 Phrases on some JJelicacies of the tfn 
 Language. 
 
 Shall you go to the opera this evening ? 
 — yes, I shall. 
 
 Would you cheerfully go to Rome ?— yes 
 I would. 
 
 Posterity knows kow to do us that justice 
 which is sometimes refused us by our con 
 temporaries. 
 
 That greatness which so muoh astonl'.he? 
 you, he owes to your indifference. 
 
 That hero, so dear to his country, perish- 
 ed. 
 
 I foresaw that the greatness of his eleva 
 iion would be his ruin. 
 
 Citizens,strangers, enemies, nations, kings, 
 emperors, pity and respect Tiim. 
 
 The assembly being over, each returner 
 home. 
 
 Happy are the people who are govr 
 by a wise king. 
 
 He refused the greatest honours, satisfied 
 with having deserved tbem. 
 
 Entreaties, remonstrances, injunction*» 
 are all useless. 
 
 The wind overturns towers, cottages. pr« 
 laces, churches. 
 
 Our reputation does not depend on the ea 
 price of men, but on the commendable ac, 
 lions we perform. 
 
 There are many things which it is of no 
 consequence at all to know. 
 
 The eye of the mind reaches much far 
 ther than the bodily eye. 
 
 What promotes vanity is only vanity.' 
 
 All that is confined to this lower wor!, 
 disperses and vanishes with the world. 
 
 It is the prerogative of great men to co:i 
 quer envy 5 merit gives it birth, and □ 
 destroys it. 
 
 Self-love is more ingenious than the mos: 
 ingenious man in the world. 
 
 In renouncing the world we generally re 
 nounce niether the errors nor gide" 
 of the world. 
 
 «f Mf*9» 
 

/ 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 ^^ 
 
 < «OC! 
 
 
 ce 
 
 
 <Z 
 ^„ c <f^ , <_ c <^ «fee 
 
 1 c< ' ^S^ -^«œ '<d'' c « 
 
 <L>C«C 
 
 L ««£.■•' C C 
 
 < 
 
 
 < 
 c 
 
 C c c 4ÇT. 
 
 C c CC 
 
 C Cl 
 
 mes «C^. 
 
 ^ (C 
 
 c 
 
 :EteL^ 
 
 
 
 Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
 Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
 Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 
 
 PreservationTechnologies 
 
 A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 
 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
 Cranberry Township. PA 16066 
 (724)779-2111 
 
«?& 
 
 
 ? 25>-*-«i- 
 
 
 << «wag 
 
 
 
 <œ 
 
 
 0- c. ■ 
 1 c 
 
 
 C <£^ 
 
 c 
 
 :<<«? 
 
 c <£ 
 
 A§CH 
 
 
 'Ci» .< 
 ; v 
 
 
 5fS^ 
 
 e 
 
 \,g:1iiVL 
 
3ta 
 
 ;%--£wsvrv. 
 
 
 ?tâ^ 
 
 Ww 
 
 'I* ,/! \Ji: Arr*n OA 
 
 
 ^œ^î^